D ColorMF651 551 451 - SM - Y110571 1 - en

Color Printer
d-Color MF651
d-Color MF551
d-Color MF451
SERVICE MANUAL
Code Y110571-1
PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:
Olivetti S.p.A.
77, Via Jervis - 10015 Ivrea (TO)
Italy
Copyright © 2009, Olivetti

All rights reserved
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended.
Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and
“ CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited
meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium

trouble, and property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when servicing the

product. General Electric hazard High temperature
precaution
:Prohibition when servicing the

product. General Do not touch Do not
prohibition with wet hand disassemble
:Direction when servicing the

product. General Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY OLIVETTI BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
OLIVETTI brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved
through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-
ing behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with

wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between

relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.)

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed

by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE)
to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the
supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-
kw
uct's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-
rent capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-
ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-

minals of the plug according to the following order:
•Black or Brown:L (line)
•White or Light Blue:N (neutral)
•Green/Yellow:PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
S-3
[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

OLIVETTI brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi-
neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety
and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same

configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to kw
inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer
to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall

outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall
outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet

securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance,
overheating, and the risk of fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
S-4
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-
uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or

pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace
with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each
end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord
may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
S-5
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so
using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken
up. Fire may result.
2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-
tile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such

as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
S-6
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Stability
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-
mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-
mentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-
uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect
the power plugs from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some
units are still powered even if the POWER switch is
turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
S-7
Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover

detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of elec-
tric shock exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damage.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and

screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-

cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona
unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or
fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

fire.
S-8
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for
deterioration and sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)

incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has
been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply
power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount-
ing position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-

ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,
optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installa-
tion state.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and

check whether the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an
electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in
the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
fire.
S-9
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-
tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (ace-
tone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled
with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before

any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully
evaporated.
S-10
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take
care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately
wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to
discomfort.
S-11
[4] Used Batteries Precautions

ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recom-
mandé par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-
tillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
S-12
[5] Laser Safety

• This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of
danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this
manual.
5.1 Internal Laser Radiation
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW
d-Color MF651 19.2 µW
Maximum average radiation power (*) d-Color MF551 16.3 µW
d-Color MF451 16.3 µW
Wavelength 775-800 nm
*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit
• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The
laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
Laser Aperture
of the Print Head
Unit
Print Head Unit
A0P0P0C501DA
S-13
U.S.A., Canada
(CDRH Regulation)
• This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan-
dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory
for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for
Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
• The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
All Areas
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
Denmark
ADVARSEL
• Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.
Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1
sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
Laserdiodens højeste styrke 30 mW
bølgelængden 775-800 nm
S-14
Finland, Sweden
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
• Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat-
taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser-
säteilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho 30 mW
aallonpituus 775-800 nm
VARNING!
• Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,
kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för
laserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten för laserdioden 30 mW
våglängden 775-800 nm
VARO!
• Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle laser-
säteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
• Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.
Betrakta ej stråien.
Norway
ADVERSEL
• Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn-
ing, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning, som overskrider grensen
for laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 30 mW
bølgelengde 775-800 nm
S-15
5.2 Laser Safety Label

• A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
* Only for the U.S.A.
A0P0P0E507DA
5.3 Laser Caution Label

• A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
A0P0P0C503DA
S-16
5.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
• If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.
• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.
• The Print head is not to be disassembled or adjusted in the field. Replace the unit or
Assembly including the control board. Therefore, remove the laser diode, and do not per-
form control board trimmer adjustment.
S-17
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should
be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
WARNING
Do not burn used toner cartridges.
Toner expelled from the fire is CAUTION
dangerous.
The area around the fusing unit is
extremely hot.
Touching any part other than those
indicated may result in burns.
WARNING
Do not burn the used waste toner
box. Toner expelld from the fire is
dangerous.
WARNING
Do not burn used Imaging Units.
Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous.
A0P0P0E508DC
S-18
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
A0P0P0E509DA
S-19
High voltage
High voltage
A0P0P0E510DA
CAUTION:
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to
touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service
office.
S-20
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN

ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further
damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evalua-
tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations speci-
fied by every distributor.
S-21
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
Blank Page
S-22
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to
explain the main machine and its corresponding options.
Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of
the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship
between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of
each part.
Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the cus-
tomer’s premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance
steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be
applied to the following configuration.
<Theory of Operation section>
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration,

product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path
CONFIGURATION/ Explanation of configuration of each unit,
OPERATION: operating system, and control system
<Field Service section>
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration, and product

specifications
MAINTENANCE: Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, ser-
vice tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,
and firmware version up method etc.
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical
adjustment etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING: Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and
their countermeasures etc.
APPENDIX: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing
chart, overall layout drawing are attached.
C-1
Notation of the service manual
A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) d-Color MF651/MF551/MF451: Main body

(2) Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above:
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista
Windows 98/Me/ NT/2000/XP/Vista
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C. Feeding direction
• When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction, it is called short
edge feeding. The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the short edge feeding is
called the long edge feeding.
• Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the
paper size. No specific notation is added for the long edge feeding.
When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding, [S] will not be
added to the paper size.
<Sample notation>
Paper size Feeding direction Notation

Long edge feeding A4
A4
Short edge feeding A4S
A3 Short edge feeding A3
C-2
Color Printer
d-Color MF651
d-Color MF551
d-Color MF451
SERVICE MANUAL
Code Y110571-1
PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:
Olivetti S.p.A.
77, Via Jervis - 10015 Ivrea (TO)
Italy
Copyright © 2009, Olivetti

All rights reserved
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
CONTENTS
d-Color MF651/MF551/MF451 Main body
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 1
1.1 d-Color MF651/MF551 .......................................................................................... 1
1.2 d-Color MF451...................................................................................................... 3
OUTLINE
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 5
2.1 Type ...................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Functions .............................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Paper .................................................................................................................... 8
2.4 Materials ............................................................................................................... 9
2.5 Print volume........................................................................................................ 10
MAINTENANCE
2.6 Machine specifications........................................................................................ 11
2.7 Operating environment ....................................................................................... 12
2.8 Print functions ..................................................................................................... 13
2.9 Scan functions .................................................................................................... 15
MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT / SETTING
3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS ................................................................. 17
3.1 Concept of periodical maintenance .................................................................... 17
3.1.1 Main body ................................................................................................... 17
3.1.2 Automatic document feeder (ADF).............................................................. 18
3.1.3 LU-204/301 ................................................................................................. 19
3.1.4 ZU-606 ........................................................................................................ 19
TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1.5 FS-526 ........................................................................................................ 20
3.1.6 SD-508........................................................................................................ 20
3.1.7 PK-516 ........................................................................................................ 21
3.1.8 JS-602......................................................................................................... 21
3.1.9 PI-505 ......................................................................................................... 21
3.1.10 FS-527 ........................................................................................................ 22
3.2 Periodical replacement parts list......................................................................... 23
3.2.1 Main body ................................................................................................... 23
APPENDIX
3.2.2 Option ......................................................................................................... 24

3.3 Periodical cleaning parts list ............................................................................... 25
3.3.1 Main body ................................................................................................... 25
3.3.2 Option ......................................................................................................... 26
i
3.4 CMS corresponding parts................................................................................... 27

3.4.1 CMS corresponding parts........................................................................... 27
3.4.2 CMS corresponding parts list ..................................................................... 27
3.4.3 Replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set ............................................ 27
3.5 Concept of parts life ........................................................................................... 28
3.5.1 Life value of consumables and parts .......................................................... 28
3.5.2 Conditions for life specifications values ...................................................... 29
3.5.3 Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing
event occurs in another part ....................................................................... 30
OUTLINE
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE ..................................................... 31

4.1 Housing section.................................................................................................. 31
4.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter ........................................................................... 31
4.1.2 Replacing the toner filter............................................................................. 31
4.2 Write section....................................................................................................... 32
MAINTENANCE
4.2.1 Cleaning of the PH window Y/M/C/K .......................................................... 32

4.3 Imaging unit section ........................................................................................... 33
4.3.1 Replacing the imaging unit/Y,M,C ............................................................... 33
4.3.2 Replacing the drum unit/K .......................................................................... 36
4.4 Charging section ................................................................................................ 40
4.4.1 Cleaning of the electrostatic charger wire/Y,M,C ........................................ 40
4.5 Developing section ............................................................................................. 40

4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit/K ................................................................. 40
4.6 Toner supply section........................................................................................... 44
4.6.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ..................................................................... 44
4.7 1st transfer section ............................................................................................. 46
4.7.1 Replacing the transfer belt unit ................................................................... 46
4.8 2nd transfer/separation section .......................................................................... 50
TROUBLESHOOTING
4.8.1 Replacing the transfer roller unit ................................................................. 50

4.9 Toner collection section ...................................................................................... 51
4.9.1 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port ...................... 51
4.9.2 Replacing the waste toner box.................................................................... 51
4.10 Paper feed section.............................................................................................. 53
4.10.1 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller.................................... 53
4.10.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy................................................. 56
APPENDIX

4.10.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy................................................. 60
4.10.6 Replacing the tray 3 separation roller ......................................................... 62
ii
4.10.8 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller ......................................................... 65

4.10.9 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray
pick-up roller................................................................................................ 67
4.10.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy ........................... 69
4.11 Vertical conveyance section................................................................................ 70
4.11.1 Cleaning of the paper dust remover............................................................ 70
4.12 Registration section ............................................................................................ 71
4.12.1 Cleaning of the timing roller ........................................................................ 71
4.13 Fusing section..................................................................................................... 71
OUTLINE
4.13.1 Replacing the fusing unit............................................................................. 71
4.13.2 Cleaning of the IH coil unit .......................................................................... 73
4.14 Duplex section .................................................................................................... 73
4.14.1 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers ...................................................... 73
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS........................................................................... 74
MAINTENANCE
5.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 74
5.1.1 CCD unit ..................................................................................................... 74
5.1.2 PH unit ........................................................................................................ 74
5.1.3 Fusing unit .................................................................................................. 74
5.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list...................................................................... 75
5.3 Cleaning parts list ............................................................................................... 78
5.4 Need lubrication parts list ................................................................................... 78
5.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure ................................................................... 79
5.5.1 Upper front door .......................................................................................... 79
5.5.2 Lower front door .......................................................................................... 80
5.5.3 Upper front cover /1 .................................................................................... 80
5.5.4 Upper front cover /2 .................................................................................... 81
5.5.5 Right front cover.......................................................................................... 81
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.5.6 Lower front cover ........................................................................................ 82
5.5.7 Upper left cover........................................................................................... 83
5.5.8 Lower left cover ........................................................................................... 83
5.5.9 Rear left cover............................................................................................. 84
5.5.10 Paper exit rear cover ................................................................................... 84
5.5.11 Scanner rear cover...................................................................................... 85
5.5.12 Scanner right cover ..................................................................................... 85
APPENDIX
5.5.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1 ........................................................................ 86

5.5.14 Scanner upper rear cover/2 ........................................................................ 86
5.5.15 Scanner left cover ....................................................................................... 87
5.5.16 Scanner upper front cover........................................................................... 87
iii
5.5.17 Scanner front cover.................................................................................... 88

5.5.18 USB interface cover .................................................................................... 88
5.5.19 Original glass .............................................................................................. 89
5.5.20 Interface cover/1 ......................................................................................... 90
5.5.21 Interface cover/2 ......................................................................................... 90
5.5.22 Rear right cover/1 ....................................................................................... 91
5.5.23 Rear right cover/2 ....................................................................................... 91
5.5.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover.................................................................... 92
OUTLINE
5.5.25 Upper rear cover/1 ...................................................................................... 92

5.5.26 Upper rear cover/2 ...................................................................................... 92
5.5.27 Lower rear cover ......................................................................................... 93
5.5.28 Front right cover.......................................................................................... 93
5.5.29 Control panel assy ...................................................................................... 93
5.5.30 Exit tray (option: OT-503) ............................................................................ 94
MAINTENANCE
5.5.31 Tray 1/2 ....................................................................................................... 96

5.5.32 Tray 3/4 ....................................................................................................... 96
5.5.33 PH unit ........................................................................................................ 97
5.5.34 Duplex unit .................................................................................................. 99
5.5.35 Manual bypass tray unit ............................................................................ 100
5.5.36 CCD unit ................................................................................................... 101

5.5.37 Original glass moving unit......................................................................... 103
5.5.38 Glass step sheet ....................................................................................... 105
5.5.39 Exposure unit............................................................................................ 107
5.5.40 Hard disk................................................................................................... 109
5.5.41 IH coil (FH1).............................................................................................. 111
5.5.42 Intermediate transport roller assy ............................................................. 115
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.5.43 Main drive unit .......................................................................................... 116

5.5.44 LCC drive unit ........................................................................................... 118
5.5.45 Scanner chassis ....................................................................................... 123
5.5.46 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) ......................................................... 125
5.5.47 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) ........................................ 126
5.5.48 Inverter board (INVB)................................................................................ 127
5.5.49 PH relay board (REYB/PH)....................................................................... 128
APPENDIX
5.5.50 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) ............................................... 129

5.5.51 DC power supply (DCPU) ......................................................................... 130
5.5.52 Relay drive board (REDB) ........................................................................ 133
5.5.53 Printer control board (PRCB).................................................................... 134
iv
5.5.54 How to open PWB box/1 ........................................................................... 135

5.5.55 PCI board (PCIB) ...................................................................................... 136
5.5.56 MFP board (MFPB) ................................................................................... 137
5.5.57 How to open PWB box/2 ........................................................................... 140
5.5.58 High voltage unit/2 (HV2) .......................................................................... 140
5.5.59 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)........................................................... 141
5.5.60 High voltage unit/1 (HV1) .......................................................................... 144
5.5.61 IH power supply (IHPU) ............................................................................ 149
OUTLINE
5.5.62 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) ....................................................... 151
5.5.63 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) ....................................................... 152
5.5.64 ADU transport motor/1 (M31).................................................................... 153
5.5.65 ADU transport motor/2 (M32).................................................................... 154
5.5.66 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27) ....... 155
5.5.67 Scanner motor (M201) .............................................................................. 159
MAINTENANCE
5.5.68 Original glass moving motor (M202) ......................................................... 161
5.5.69 Waste toner agitating motor (M20)............................................................ 163
5.5.70 Transport motor (M25) .............................................................................. 164
5.5.71 Vertical transport motor (M26) .................................................................. 165
5.5.72 Transfer belt motor (M1)............................................................................ 166
5.5.73 Color PC drum motor (M16)...................................................................... 166
5.5.74 Color developing motor (M17)................................................................... 167
5.5.75 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)................................... 167
5.5.76 Registration motor (M2) ............................................................................ 168
5.5.77 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29).................................................... 170
5.5.78 Fusing motor (M30)................................................................................... 171
5.5.79 Switchback motor (M33) ........................................................................... 171
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.5.80 Exit motor (M4) ......................................................................................... 174
5.5.81 K PC drum motor (M18)............................................................................ 175
5.5.82 K developing motor (M19) ......................................................................... 176
5.5.83 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6) ............................................................................. 176
5.5.84 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8) ............................................................................. 177
5.5.85 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23) ........................................................................... 178
5.5.86 Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) ........................................................................... 178
APPENDIX
5.5.87 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) ........................................................... 179

5.5.88 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) ........................................................... 180
5.5.89 Take-up motor (M22)................................................................................. 181
5.5.90 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) ................................................................ 182
v
5.5.91 Cleaner motor (M38)................................................................................. 184

5.5.92 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21).................................. 188
5.5.93 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14). ............................................................. 188
5.5.94 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13).............................................................. 189
5.5.95 Toner supply motor/Y (M9), toner supply motor/M (M10),
toner supply motor/C (M11), toner supply motor/K (M12) ........................ 190
5.5.96 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1).................................................................. 193
5.5.97 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2)............................................................... 194
OUTLINE
5.5.98 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3) .............................................................. 195

5.5.99 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) ................... 195
5.5.100 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7).................................................................. 196
5.5.101 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F), IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R). 197
5.5.102 Scanner drive cables ................................................................................ 199
5.5.103 Tray 3/4 lift wire ......................................................................................... 209
MAINTENANCE
5.6 Cleaning procedure .......................................................................................... 215

5.6.1 Transfer belt unit ....................................................................................... 215
5.6.2 Tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller ........................................................ 215
5.6.3 Tray 1 separation roller ............................................................................. 216
5.6.4 Tray 1 transport roller................................................................................ 216

TROUBLESHOOTING

5.6.14 Manual bypass tray feed roller .................................................................. 221
5.6.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller ............................................................. 222
5.6.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller ........................................................ 222
5.6.17 Intermediate transport roller ..................................................................... 222
5.6.18 Original glass ............................................................................................ 223
APPENDIX
5.6.19 Scanner rails............................................................................................. 224

5.6.20 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) ................................................................................. 224
5.6.21 Lens .......................................................................................................... 224
5.6.22 CCD sensor .............................................................................................. 225
5.7 Lubrication procedure....................................................................................... 227
vi
5.7.1 Fusing unit ................................................................................................ 227

6. SERVICE TOOL .................................................................................................. 229
6.1 Service material list .......................................................................................... 229
6.2 CE tool list......................................................................................................... 229
7. FIRMWARE REWRITING ................................................................................... 231
7.1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 231
7.2 USB memory .................................................................................................... 231
7.2.1 Preparation ............................................................................................... 231
7.2.2 Procedure ................................................................................................. 231
OUTLINE
7.2.3 Action when data transfer fails .................................................................. 235
7.3 Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW .................................................... 236
7.3.1 Outline....................................................................................................... 236
7.3.2 Service environment ................................................................................. 236
7.3.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting ........................................................... 236
MAINTENANCE
7.3.4 Firmware rewriting from the control panel................................................. 239
7.3.5 Firmware rewriting from the CS Remote Care .......................................... 241
7.3.6 Error code list for the Internet ISW............................................................ 242
8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS................................................................ 245
8.1 Installing the key counter .................................................................................. 245
8.1.1 Configuration............................................................................................. 245
8.1.2 Procedure ................................................................................................. 245
8.2 Installing the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) ..................................... 251
8.2.1 Procedure ................................................................................................. 251
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
9. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
SECTION253
TROUBLESHOOTING
10. UTILITY ............................................................................................................... 254
10.1 List of utility mode ............................................................................................. 254
10.2 Starting/Exiting ................................................................................................. 268
10.2.1 Starting procedure .................................................................................... 268
10.2.2 Exiting procedure ...................................................................................... 268
10.3 Touch Panel Adjustment ................................................................................... 269
10.4 One-Touch User Box Registration .................................................................... 270
APPENDIX
10.4.1 Create One-Touch destination-Address Book (Public)/(Personal) ............ 270

10.4.2 Create One-Touch destination-Group ....................................................... 271
10.4.3 Create One-Touch destination-E-mail Settings ......................................... 272
10.4.4 Create User Box........................................................................................ 272
10.4.5 Create User Box-Public/Personal User Box .............................................. 272
vii
10.4.6 Create User Box-Bulletin Board User Box ................................................ 273

10.4.7 Create User Box-Relay User Box ............................................................. 273
10.4.8 Limiting Access to Destinations ................................................................ 274
10.4.9 Limiting Access to Destinations-Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations ..... 274
10.5 User Settings .................................................................................................... 275
10.5.1 System Settings-Language Selection....................................................... 275
10.5.2 System Settings-Measurement Unit Settings ........................................... 275
10.5.3 System Settings-Paper Tray Settings........................................................ 275
OUTLINE
10.5.4 System Settings-Auto Color Level Adjust. ................................................ 276

10.5.5 System Settings-Power Save Settings...................................................... 277
10.5.6 System Settings-Output Settings.............................................................. 277
10.5.7 System Settings-AE Level Adjustment ..................................................... 278
10.5.8 System Settings-Auto Paper Select for Small Original ............................. 278
10.5.9 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings .............................................. 279
MAINTENANCE
10.5.10 System Settings-Page Number Print Position .......................................... 279

10.5.11 System Settings-Select Keyboard ............................................................ 279
10.5.12 Custom Display Settings-Copier Settings ................................................. 280
10.5.13 Custom Display Settings-Scan/Fax Settings ............................................ 281
10.5.14 Custom Display Settings-User Box Settings............................................. 282
10.5.15 Custom Display Settings-Copy Screen..................................................... 283

10.5.16 Custom Display Settings-Fax Active Screen............................................. 283
10.5.17 Custom Display Settings-Color Selection Settings ................................... 283
10.5.18 Custom Display Settings-Left Panel Display Default ................................ 284
10.5.19 Custom Display Settings-Search Option Settings..................................... 284
10.5.20 Copier Settings-Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple ............................. 284
10.5.21 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet ..................................... 284
TROUBLESHOOTING
10.5.22 Copier Settings-Auto Sort/Group Selection .............................................. 285

10.5.23 Copier Settings-Default Copy Settings ..................................................... 285
10.5.24 Copier Settings-Default Enlarge Display Settings..................................... 286
10.5.25 Copier Settings-When AMS Direction is Incorrect .................................... 286
10.5.26 Copier Settings-Separate Scan Output Method ....................................... 286
10.5.27 Copier Settings-Enlargement Rotation ..................................................... 287
10.5.28 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (Platen) ......................................................... 287
APPENDIX
10.5.29 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (ADF) ............................................................ 287

10.5.30 Copier Settings-Specify Default Tray when APS Off................................. 287
10.5.31 Copier Settings-Select Tray for Insert Sheet............................................. 288
10.5.32 Copier Settings-Tri-Fold Print Side ........................................................... 288
viii
10.5.33 Copier Settings-Print Jobs During Copy Operation................................... 288

10.5.34 Copier Settings-Automatic Image Rotation ............................................... 288
10.5.35 Copier Settings-Finishing Program ........................................................... 289
10.5.36 Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings .......................................................... 289
10.5.37 Scan/Fax Settings-JPEG Compression Level ........................................... 290
10.5.38 Scan/Fax Settings-Black Compression Level............................................ 290
10.5.39 Scan/Fax Settings-TWAIN Lock Time ....................................................... 290
10.5.40 Scan/Fax Settings-Default Scan/Fax Settings........................................... 291
OUTLINE
10.5.41 Scan/Fax Settings-Default Enlarge Display Settings ................................ 291
10.5.42 Scan/Fax Settings-Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level ..................... 292
10.5.43 Scan/Fax Settings-Color TIFF Type .......................................................... 292
10.5.44 Scan/Fax Settings-OCR Operation Setting ............................................... 292
10.5.45 Scan/Fax Settings-Graphic Outlining ........................................................ 292
10.5.46 Printer Settings-Basic Settings ................................................................. 293
MAINTENANCE
10.5.47 Printer Settings-Paper Setting................................................................... 295
10.5.48 Printer Settings-PCL Settings ................................................................... 297
10.5.49 Printer Settings-PS Setting ....................................................................... 298
10.5.50 Printer Settings-XPS Settings ................................................................... 299
10.5.51 Printer Settings-Print Reports ................................................................... 300
10.5.52 Printer Settings-TIFF Image Paper Setting ............................................... 300
10.5.53 Change Password ..................................................................................... 301
10.5.54 Change E-mail Address ............................................................................ 301
10.5.55 Change Icon.............................................................................................. 301
10.5.56 Register Authentication Settings ............................................................... 302
10.5.57 Registered Application Setting-Default Application Selection ................... 302
10.5.58 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting-Link File Error Notification............................ 302
TROUBLESHOOTING
10.5.59 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting-Proxy Server Use......................................... 302
10.5.60 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting-Print Settings ............................................... 303
10.6 Administrator Settings....................................................................................... 304
10.6.1 System Settings-Power Save Settings ...................................................... 304
10.6.2 System Settings-Output Settings .............................................................. 305
10.6.3 System Settings-Date/Time Settings ........................................................ 306
10.6.4 System Settings-Daylight Saving Time ..................................................... 306
APPENDIX
10.6.5 System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings ................................................... 307

10.6.6 System Settings-Restrict User Access ..................................................... 308
10.6.7 System Settings-Expert Adjustment ......................................................... 310
10.6.8 System Settings-List/Counter ................................................................... 345
ix
10.6.9 System Settings-Reset Settings ............................................................... 346

10.6.10 System Settings-User Box Settings .......................................................... 348
10.6.11 System Settings-Standard Size Setting.................................................... 350
10.6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings .............................................................. 351
10.6.13 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings .............................................. 351
10.6.14 System Settings-Application Key Settings ................................................ 351
10.6.15 System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings .......................................... 352
10.6.16 System Settings-Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ............................... 352
OUTLINE
10.6.17 System Settings-Page Number Print Position .......................................... 352

10.6.18 System Settings-Advanced Preview Setting............................................. 352
10.6.19 Administrator/Machine Settings-Administrator Registration...................... 352
10.6.20 Administrator/Machine Settings-Input Machine Address .......................... 353
10.6.21 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create One-Touch Destination........... 353
10.6.22 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create User Box................................. 355
MAINTENANCE
10.6.23 One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List 356

10.6.24 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number of User Boxes ...... 357
10.6.25 User Authentication/Account Track-General Settings ............................... 357
10.6.26 User Authentication/Account Track-User Authentication Setting .............. 360
10.6.27 User Authentication/Account Track-Account Track Setting ....................... 362
10.6.28 User Authentication/Account Track-Print without Authentication .............. 362

10.6.29 User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List .............................. 363
10.6.30 User Authentication/Account Track-External Server Settings ................... 363
10.6.31 User Authentication/Account Track-Limiting Access to Destinations ........ 363
10.6.32 User Authentication/Account Track-Authentication Device Settings ......... 364
10.6.33 User Authentication/Account Track-Auth/Acct Track Common Setting ..... 365
10.6.34 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Home Settings ..................... 365
TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6.35 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Authorized Folder Settings .. 366

10.6.36 Network Settings-TCP/IP Settings............................................................ 366
10.6.37 Network Setting-NetWare Settings ........................................................... 372
10.6.38 Network Setting-http Server Settings........................................................ 375
10.6.39 Network Setting-FTP Settings .................................................................. 377
10.6.40 Network Setting-SMB Setting ................................................................... 378
10.6.41 Network Setting-LDAP Settings ................................................................ 380
APPENDIX
10.6.42 Network Setting-E-mail Settings ............................................................... 385

10.6.43 Network Setting-SNMP Setting................................................................. 392
10.6.44 Network Setting-AppleTalk Settings.......................................................... 396
10.6.45 Network Setting-Bonjour Setting............................................................... 396
x
10.6.46 Network Setting-TCP Socket Settings ...................................................... 397

10.6.47 Network Setting-Network Fax Setting ....................................................... 398
10.6.48 Network Setting-WebDAV Settings ........................................................... 399
10.6.49 Network Setting-Web Service Settings ..................................................... 401
10.6.50 Network Setting-SSDP Settings................................................................ 404
10.6.51 Network Setting-Detail Settings ................................................................ 404
10.6.52 Network Settings-IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings ............................ 409
10.6.53 Network Settings-Web Browser Setting .................................................... 409
OUTLINE
10.6.54 Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting .......................................................... 410
10.6.55 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (Platen) ......................................................... 410
10.6.56 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (ADF) ............................................................ 410
10.6.57 Copier Settings-Specify Default Tray when APS OFF............................... 410
10.6.58 Copier Settings-Select Tray for Insert Sheet ............................................. 410
10.6.59 Copier Settings-Print Jobs During Copy Operation................................... 411
MAINTENANCE
10.6.60 Copier Settings-Tri-Fold Print Side............................................................ 411
10.6.61 Copier Settings-Automatic Image Rotation ............................................... 411
10.6.62 Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings .......................................................... 412
10.6.63 Printer Settings-USB Timeout................................................................... 412
10.6.64 Printer Settings-Network Timeout ............................................................. 412
10.6.65 Printer Settings-Print XPS Errors.............................................................. 413
10.6.66 Printer Settings-PSWC Direct Print........................................................... 413
10.6.67 Fax Settings .............................................................................................. 413
10.6.68 Fax Settings-Header Information .............................................................. 413
10.6.69 Fax Settings-Header/Footer Position ........................................................ 413
10.6.70 Fax Settings-Line Parameter Setting ........................................................ 414
10.6.71 Fax Settings-TX/RX Settings .................................................................... 416
TROUBLESHOOTING
10.6.72 Fax Settings-Function Settings ................................................................. 418
10.6.73 Fax Settings-PBX Connection Setting ...................................................... 421
10.6.74 Fax Settings-Report Settings .................................................................... 422
10.6.75 Fax Settings-Job Settings List................................................................... 425
10.6.76 Fax Settings-Multi Lines Settings .............................................................. 426
10.6.77 Fax Settings-Network Fax Settings ........................................................... 427
10.6.78 System Connection-OpenAPI Settings ..................................................... 430
APPENDIX
10.6.79 System Connection-Call Remote Center .................................................. 432

10.6.80 System Connection-Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting ................................. 432
10.6.81 System Connection-Printer Information .................................................... 432
10.6.82 System Connection-Cellular Phone/PDA Setting...................................... 432
xi
10.6.83 Security Settings-Administrator Password................................................ 433

10.6.84 Security Settings-User Box Admin. Setting .............................................. 433
10.6.85 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels ....................................... 434
10.6.86 Security Settings-Security Details ............................................................ 434
10.6.87 Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode ............................................. 440
10.6.88 Security Settings-HDD Settings................................................................ 441
10.6.89 Security Settings-Function Management Setting...................................... 445
10.6.90 Security Settings-Stamp Settings ............................................................. 446
OUTLINE
10.6.91 Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings......................................... 447

10.6.92 Security Settings-Driver Password Encryption Setting ............................. 447
10.6.93 License Settings-Get Request Code ........................................................ 448
10.6.94 License Settings-Install License ............................................................... 448
10.6.95 License Settings-List of Enabled Functions.............................................. 448
10.6.96 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Restriction Code Setting ............. 449
MAINTENANCE
10.7 Banner Printing................................................................................................. 449

10.8 My Panel Settings............................................................................................. 450
10.9 Device Information............................................................................................ 450
11. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST.................................................................................. 452
12. SERVICE MODE................................................................................................. 454
12.1 List of service mode ......................................................................................... 454

12.3 Date/Time Input mode...................................................................................... 460
12.4 Machine............................................................................................................ 461
12.4.1 Color Alignment Adjustment ..................................................................... 461
12.4.2 Fusing Temperature.................................................................................. 462
TROUBLESHOOTING
12.4.3 Fusing Transport Speed............................................................................ 463

12.4.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. ............................................................... 464
12.4.5 Printer Area-Leading Edge Adjustment .................................................... 465
12.4.6 Printer Area-Centering.............................................................................. 466
12.4.7 Printer Area-Leading Edge Adj. (Duplex Side 2) ...................................... 467
12.4.8 Printer Area-Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) ................................................ 468
12.4.9 Printer Area-Paper Feed Direction Adj. .................................................... 469
12.4.10 Scan Area ................................................................................................. 470
APPENDIX
12.4.11 Scan Area-Image Position: Leading Edge ................................................ 471

12.4.12 Scan Area-Image Position: Side Edge...................................................... 472
12.4.13 Scan Area-Cross Direction Adjustment .................................................... 473
12.4.14 Scan Area-Feed Direction Adjustment...................................................... 474
xii
12.4.15 Printer Resist Loop ................................................................................... 475

12.4.16 Color Registration Adjustment-Cyan, Magenta, Yellow............................. 476
12.4.17 Skew adjustment-Skew adjustment .......................................................... 477
12.4.18 Skew adjustment-Skew adjustment reset ................................................. 477
12.4.19 LD adjustment-LD delay adjust. ................................................................ 478
12.4.20 LD adjustment-LD lightness balance adjust.............................................. 479
12.4.21 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment ............................................................... 480
12.4.22 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment ................................................................... 480
OUTLINE
12.4.23 Thick Paper Mode ..................................................................................... 480
12.4.24 Split Line Prior Detection .......................................................................... 481
12.4.25 Non-Image Area Erase Check .................................................................. 481
12.5 Firmware Version.............................................................................................. 482
12.6 Imaging Process Adjustment ............................................................................ 482
12.6.1 Gradation Adjust ....................................................................................... 482
MAINTENANCE
12.6.2 Transfer Belt-Cleaning Bias....................................................................... 483
12.6.3 Transfer Belt-Auto Cleaning ...................................................................... 484
12.6.4 D Max Density........................................................................................... 484
12.6.5 TCR Level Setting ..................................................................................... 485
12.6.6 Background Voltage Margin ...................................................................... 485
12.6.7 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Primary transfer adj.............................. 486
12.6.8 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Secondary transfer adj. ........................ 487
12.6.9 Stabilizer-Stabilization Only ...................................................................... 487
12.6.10 Stabilizer-Initialize+Image Stabilization..................................................... 488
12.6.11 Thick Paper Density Adjustment ............................................................... 488
12.6.12 Paper separation adjustment .................................................................... 489
12.6.13 TCR Toner Supply..................................................................................... 489
TROUBLESHOOTING
12.6.14 Monochrome Density Adjustment ............................................................. 490
12.6.15 Development AC Voltage Choice .............................................................. 490
12.7 CS Remote Care .............................................................................................. 491
12.7.1 Outlines ..................................................................................................... 491
12.7.2 Setting up the CS Remote Care ............................................................... 491
12.7.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care ................................................ 496
12.7.4 Setup confirmation .................................................................................... 505
APPENDIX
12.7.5 Calling the maintenance ........................................................................... 505

12.7.6 Calling the center from the administrator .................................................. 506
12.7.7 Checking the transmission log .................................................................. 506
12.7.8 Detail on settings ...................................................................................... 506
12.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code..................................................... 515
xiii
12.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care ....................................................... 522

12.7.11 CS Remote Care Operation under Enhanced Security Mode .................. 522
12.8 System 1 .......................................................................................................... 523
12.8.1 Marketing Area ......................................................................................... 523
12.8.2 Tel/Fax Number......................................................................................... 524
12.8.3 Serial Number........................................................................................... 524
12.8.4 No Sleep ................................................................................................... 525
12.8.5 Foolscap Size Setting ............................................................................... 525
OUTLINE
12.8.6 Original Size Detection ............................................................................. 525

12.8.7 Install Date................................................................................................ 526
12.8.8 Initialization-Clear All Data........................................................................ 526
12.8.9 Initialization-Clear Individual Data ............................................................ 526
12.8.10 Initialization-System Error Clear ............................................................... 528
12.8.11 Charging CH cleaning-Cleaning ............................................................... 528
MAINTENANCE
12.8.12 Charging CH cleaning-Self-Cleaning........................................................ 528

12.8.13 Trouble Isolation........................................................................................ 529
12.8.14 Post card transfer table ............................................................................. 529
12.8.15 Change Warm Up Time ............................................................................ 529
12.8.16 Machine State LED Setting....................................................................... 530
12.9 System 2 .......................................................................................................... 531

12.9.1 HDD .......................................................................................................... 531
12.9.2 Image Controller Setting ........................................................................... 531
12.9.3 Option Board Status ................................................................................. 532
12.9.4 Consumable Life Reminder ...................................................................... 532
12.9.5 Unit Change.............................................................................................. 533
12.9.6 Software Switch Setting............................................................................ 533
TROUBLESHOOTING
12.9.7 Software Switch Setting-Setting items in the software switch setting ....... 534
12.9.8 Scan Caribration ....................................................................................... 535
12.9.9 LCC Size Setting ...................................................................................... 535
12.9.10 LCT Paper Size Setting ............................................................................ 535
12.9.11 Line Mag Setting....................................................................................... 536
12.9.12 Data Capture ............................................................................................ 536
12.9.13 Split Line Detect. Setting-Prior Detection ................................................. 538
APPENDIX
12.9.14 Split Line Detect. Setting-Warning Level .................................................. 539

12.9.15 Split Line Detect. Setting-Paper Passaging Detection .............................. 539
12.9.16 Stamp ....................................................................................................... 539
12.9.17 Network Fax Settings................................................................................ 540
12.9.18 Image Stabilization Setting ....................................................................... 540
xiv
12.9.19 User Paper Settings .................................................................................. 541

12.9.20 Coverage Rate Screen.............................................................................. 542
12.9.21 JAM Code Display Setting ........................................................................ 542
12.9.22 BootUp Screen.......................................................................................... 542
12.9.23 Install Data ................................................................................................ 543
12.9.24 Bluetooth Settings ..................................................................................... 544
12.10 Counter ............................................................................................................. 544
12.10.1 Common procedure .................................................................................. 544
OUTLINE
12.10.2 Life ............................................................................................................ 544
12.10.3 Service Call Counter ................................................................................. 546
12.10.4 Section Service Call.................................................................................. 546
12.10.5 Warning..................................................................................................... 546
12.10.6 Maintenance ............................................................................................. 547
12.10.7 Service Total ............................................................................................. 547
MAINTENANCE
12.10.8 Counter of Each Mode .............................................................................. 548
12.10.9 Service Call History (Data) ....................................................................... 548
12.10.10 ADF Paper Pages ..................................................................................... 548
12.10.11 Paper Jam History..................................................................................... 548
12.10.12 Fax Connection Error ................................................................................ 548
12.10.13 Split Line Counter ..................................................................................... 549
12.10.14 Parts Counter (Fixed)................................................................................ 549
12.10.15 Jam ........................................................................................................... 551
12.10.16 Section JAM .............................................................................................. 551
12.11 List Output ........................................................................................................ 551
12.11.1 Machine Management List....................................................................... 551
12.11.2 Adjustment List ......................................................................................... 551
TROUBLESHOOTING
12.11.3 Parameter List........................................................................................... 551
12.11.4 Service Parameter .................................................................................... 551
12.11.5 Protocol Trace ........................................................................................... 551
12.11.6 Fax Setting List ......................................................................................... 551
12.11.7 Fax Analysis List ....................................................................................... 552
12.12 State Confirmation............................................................................................ 552
12.12.1 Sensor Check............................................................................................ 552
APPENDIX
12.12.2 Sensor check screens............................................................................... 553

12.12.3 Sensor check list ....................................................................................... 560
12.12.4 Table Number............................................................................................ 573
12.12.5 Level History1 ........................................................................................... 574
12.12.6 Level History 2 .......................................................................................... 574
xv
12.12.7 Temp. & Humidity...................................................................................... 574

12.12.8 CCD Check............................................................................................... 575
12.12.9 Memory/HDD Adj.-Memory Check ........................................................... 575
12.12.10 Memory/HDD Adj.-Compress / Decompression Check ............................ 576
12.12.11 Memory/HDD Adj.-Memory Bus Check .................................................... 576
12.12.12 Memory/HDD Adj.-DSC Bus Check.......................................................... 576
12.12.13 Memory/HDD Adj.-HDD R/W Check......................................................... 577
12.12.14 Memory/HDD Adj.-HDD Format ............................................................... 577
OUTLINE
12.12.15 Memory/HDD State .................................................................................. 577

12.12.16 Color Regist .............................................................................................. 578
12.12.17 IU Lot No................................................................................................... 578
12.12.18 Adjustment Data List................................................................................. 578
12.13 Test Mode ......................................................................................................... 579
12.13.1 Procedure for test pattern output .............................................................. 579
MAINTENANCE
12.13.2 Gradation Pattern ..................................................................................... 579

12.13.3 Halftone Pattern........................................................................................ 580
12.13.4 Lattice Pattern........................................................................................... 581
12.13.5 Solid Pattern ............................................................................................. 582
12.13.6 Color Sample ............................................................................................ 582
12.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern................................................................................. 583

12.13.8 CMM pattern ............................................................................................. 583
12.13.9 Running Mode .......................................................................................... 584
12.13.10 Fax Test .................................................................................................... 584
12.14 ADF .................................................................................................................. 585
12.14.1 Original Stop Position ............................................................................... 585
12.14.2 Registration Loop Adj. .............................................................................. 586
TROUBLESHOOTING
12.14.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment ................................................................. 587

12.14.4 Paper Passage ......................................................................................... 589
12.14.5 Sensor Check ........................................................................................... 590
12.14.6 Original Tray Width.................................................................................... 592
12.14.7 Read Pos Adj ............................................................................................ 593
12.14.8 Feed Zoom ............................................................................................... 595
12.14.9 Scanning Light Adjustment ....................................................................... 596
APPENDIX
12.14.10 Mixed original Size adjustment ................................................................. 596

12.15 FAX................................................................................................................... 596
12.16 Finisher............................................................................................................. 597
12.16.1 FS-FN adjustment - Center Staple Position.............................................. 597
12.16.2 FS-FN adjustment - Half-Fold Position ..................................................... 598
xvi
12.16.3 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Vertical Position ............................................. 599

12.16.4 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Horizontal Position......................................... 600
12.16.5 FS-FN adjustment - Punch edge detection ............................................... 601
12.16.6 FS-FN adjustment - Punch vertical position (Z-fold) ................................. 602
12.16.7 FS-FN adjustment - Punch horizontal position (Z-fold) ............................. 603
12.16.8 FS-FN adjustment - Punch regist adj. (Z-fold) .......................................... 603
12.16.9 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Regist Loop Size (Body)................................ 604
12.16.10 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Resist Loop Size (PI)..................................... 604
OUTLINE
12.16.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position
FS-FN adjustment - 2nd Z-Fold Position................................................... 605
12.16.12 FS-FN adjustment - Tri-Fold Position ........................................................ 606
12.16.13 FS-FN adjustment - Center-staple pitch adjustment ................................. 607
12.16.14 FS-FN adjustment - PI Size Detection ...................................................... 607
12.16.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment .......................................... 608
MAINTENANCE
12.16.16 FS-FN adjustment - finisher check............................................................ 608
12.16.17 FS-FN adjustment - Load Data ................................................................. 611
12.16.18 FS-FN adjustment - Side position adjustment .......................................... 612
12.16.19 FS-FN adjustment - Punch unit edge detection ........................................ 612
12.16.20 Staple Option Setting ................................................................................ 613
12.16.21 Punch Option Setting ................................................................................ 613
12.16.22 Fold power of pages restrict...................................................................... 614
12.16.23 Job Separator ........................................................................................... 614
12.17 Internet ISW...................................................................................................... 615
12.17.1 Internet ISW Set........................................................................................ 615
12.17.2 HTTP Setting ............................................................................................ 615
12.17.3 HTTP Setting-Data Input Setting .............................................................. 615
TROUBLESHOOTING
12.17.4 HTTP Setting-Connect Proxy.................................................................... 615
12.17.5 HTTP Setting-Proxy Server....................................................................... 616
12.17.6 HTTP Setting-Proxy Authentication .......................................................... 616
12.17.7 HTTP Setting-Connection Time-Out ......................................................... 616
12.17.8 FTP Setting ............................................................................................... 616
12.17.9 FTP Setting-Data Input Setting ................................................................. 616
12.17.10 FTP Setting-Connect Proxy ...................................................................... 617
APPENDIX
12.17.11 FTP Setting-Proxy Server ......................................................................... 617

12.17.12 FTP Setting-Connection Setting ............................................................... 617
12.17.13 Forwarding Access Setting-User ID .......................................................... 617
12.17.14 Forwarding Access Setting-Password....................................................... 618
12.17.15 Forwarding Access Setting-URL ............................................................... 618
xvii
12.17.16 Forwarding Access Setting-FileName....................................................... 618

12.17.17 Download.................................................................................................. 618
13. ENHANCED SECURITY..................................................................................... 619
13.1 List of Enhanced Security................................................................................. 619
13.2.2 Exiting procedure...................................................................................... 619
13.3 Enhanced Security ........................................................................................... 620
OUTLINE
13.3.1 CE Password ............................................................................................ 620

13.3.2 Administrator Password ............................................................................ 620
13.3.3 Administrator Feature Level ...................................................................... 621
13.3.4 CE Authentication ..................................................................................... 621
13.3.5 IU Life Stop Setting ................................................................................... 622
13.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup ............................................................................... 622
MAINTENANCE
13.3.7 Operation Ban release time ...................................................................... 622

13.3.8 Administrator unlocking............................................................................. 623
13.3.9 Engine FW DipSW.................................................................................... 623
14. BILLING SETTING.............................................................................................. 626
14.1 List of billing setting .......................................................................................... 626

14.2.2 Exiting procedure...................................................................................... 626
14.3 Billing Setting.................................................................................................... 627
14.3.1 Counter Setting......................................................................................... 627
14.3.2 Management Function Choice.................................................................. 630
14.3.3 Management Function Choice-Key Counter IF Vendor ............................ 630
TROUBLESHOOTING
14.3.4 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device 1 ........................... 630

14.3.5 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device 2 ........................... 631
14.3.6 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only .................................... 633
14.3.7 Management Function Choice-Management Device 1............................. 634
14.3.8 Management Function Choice-Management Device 2............................. 634
14.3.9 Management Function Choice-Vendor 1 .................................................. 634
14.3.10 Management Function Choice-Vendor 2 .................................................. 635
14.3.11 Coverage Rate Clear ................................................................................ 638
APPENDIX
14.3.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Restriction Code.......................... 639

14.3.13 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Region Code ............................... 639
15. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION .................................... 640
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................... 641
xviii
16.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section................................................. 641

16.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt ....................................................... 641
16.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit .................................... 642
16.1.3 Scanner position adjustment..................................................................... 643
16.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit ............................... 644
16.1.5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit
.................................................................................................................. 646
16.2 Mechanical adjustment of the paper feed section ............................................ 647
16.2.1 Tray3/4 paper size change ........................................................................ 647
OUTLINE
16.2.2 Skew adjustment of the tray 1/2 ................................................................ 648
16.2.3 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2 ......................................................... 649
16.2.4 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4 ......................................................... 650
16.2.5 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the tray 3/4 ............................................ 651
16.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section ........................................... 652
MAINTENANCE
16.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit ................................................. 652
16.4 Mechanical adjustment of the main drive unit section ...................................... 654
16.4.1 PC drive gear positioning adjustment ....................................................... 654
TROUBLESHOOTING
17. JAM DISPLAY ..................................................................................................... 657
17.1 List of JAM code ............................................................................................... 657
17.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ......................................................... 670
17.2 Sensor layout .................................................................................................... 671
17.2.1 Main body ................................................................................................. 671
17.2.2 ADF ........................................................................................................... 672
17.2.3 LU-204/LU-301 ......................................................................................... 673
TROUBLESHOOTING
17.2.4 JS-504....................................................................................................... 674
17.2.5 ZU-606 ...................................................................................................... 675
17.2.6 FS-526/SD-508/PK-516 ............................................................................ 676
17.2.7 JS-602....................................................................................................... 677
17.2.8 PI-505 ....................................................................................................... 677
17.2.9 FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603................................................................ 678
17.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 679
17.3.1 Initial check items...................................................................................... 679
APPENDIX
17.3.2 Misfeed at manual bypass feed section .................................................... 679

17.3.3 Misfeed at tray 1 feed section ................................................................... 680
xix

17.3.7 Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section ........................................ 682
17.3.8 Misfeed at tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section........................... 682
17.3.9 LCT feed section....................................................................................... 683
17.3.10 LCT transport section ............................................................................... 683
17.3.11 Misfeed at vertical transport section ......................................................... 684
17.3.12 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section ...................................................... 684
17.3.13 Misfeed at exit section .............................................................................. 685
OUTLINE
17.3.14 ADF turnover section ................................................................................ 685

17.3.15 ADF paper feed section ............................................................................ 686
17.3.16 ADF transport section ............................................................................... 686
17.3.17 ADF paper exit section.............................................................................. 687
17.3.18 ADF image reading section ...................................................................... 687
17.3.19 Code: 72-11 .............................................................................................. 688
MAINTENANCE
17.3.20 Code: 72-13 .............................................................................................. 688

17.3.21 Code: 72-14 .............................................................................................. 688
17.3.22 Code: 72-15 .............................................................................................. 689
17.3.23 Code: 72-16 .............................................................................................. 690
17.3.24 Code: 72-17 .............................................................................................. 690
17.3.25 Code: 72-18 .............................................................................................. 691

17.3.26 Code: 72-19 .............................................................................................. 692
17.3.27 Code: 72-21 .............................................................................................. 692
17.3.28 Code: 72-22 .............................................................................................. 693
17.3.29 Code: 72-23 .............................................................................................. 694
17.3.30 Code: 72-25 / 72-26.................................................................................. 694
17.3.31 Code: 72-31 / 72-34.................................................................................. 695
TROUBLESHOOTING
17.3.32 Code: 72-35 .............................................................................................. 695

17.3.33 Code: 72-38 .............................................................................................. 695
17.3.34 Code: 72-39 .............................................................................................. 696
17.3.35 Code: 72-40 .............................................................................................. 696
17.3.36 Code: 72-41 / 72-42.................................................................................. 696
17.3.37 Code: 72-43 .............................................................................................. 697
17.3.38 Code: 72-44 .............................................................................................. 697
APPENDIX
17.3.39 Code: 72-45 .............................................................................................. 698

17.3.40 Code: 72-46 .............................................................................................. 698
17.3.41 Code: 72-47 .............................................................................................. 698
17.3.42 Code: 72-49 .............................................................................................. 699
xx
17.3.43 Code: 72-50 .............................................................................................. 699

17.3.44 Code: 72-51 .............................................................................................. 699
17.3.45 Code: 72-60 .............................................................................................. 700
17.3.46 Code: 72-61 .............................................................................................. 700
17.3.47 Code: 72-62 .............................................................................................. 700
17.3.48 Code: 72-64 .............................................................................................. 701
17.3.49 Code: 72-81 .............................................................................................. 701
17.3.50 Code: 72-84 .............................................................................................. 702
OUTLINE
17.3.51 Code: 72-85 .............................................................................................. 702
17.3.52 Code: 72-86 .............................................................................................. 703
17.3.53 Code: 72-87 .............................................................................................. 703
17.3.54 Code: 72-90 .............................................................................................. 703
17.3.55 Code: 75-42 .............................................................................................. 704
17.3.56 Code: 75-43 .............................................................................................. 704
MAINTENANCE
17.3.57 Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section................................................. 705
17.3.58 Misfeed at duplex transport section .......................................................... 705
18. MALFUNCTION CODE ....................................................................................... 706
18.1 Display procedure............................................................................................. 706
18.2 List .................................................................................................................... 707
18.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 710
18.3.1 S-1: CCD gain adjustment failure.............................................................. 710
18.3.2 D-1: Split line detect.................................................................................. 710
18.3.3 D-2: ADF read guide trouble ..................................................................... 710
18.3.4 P-5: IDC sensor (front) failure ................................................................... 711
18.3.5 P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure ................................................................... 711
18.3.6 P-6: Cyan imaging unit failure ................................................................... 711
TROUBLESHOOTING
18.3.7 P-7: Magenta imaging unit failure ............................................................. 711
18.3.8 P-8: Yellow imaging unit failure ................................................................. 711
18.3.9 P-9: Black imaging unit failure................................................................... 711
18.3.10 P-14: Skew correction trouble ................................................................... 712
18.3.11 P-16: PC charge cleaning trouble 1 .......................................................... 712
18.3.12 P-18: PC charge cleaning trouble 2 .......................................................... 712
18.3.13 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure ........................................................ 713
APPENDIX
18.3.14 P-22: Color regist adjust failure................................................................. 713

18.3.15 P-27: Secondary transfer ATVC failure ..................................................... 713
18.3.16 P-31: PC home sensor (K) malfunction .................................................... 714
18.3.17 P-32: Heating roller temperature sensor /1 temperature detection failure 714
19. TROUBLE CODE ................................................................................................ 715
xxi

19.2 Trouble resetting procedure.............................................................................. 715
19.2.1 Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key.................................... 715
19.3 Trouble isolation function .................................................................................. 716
19.4 List.................................................................................................................... 716
19.5 Solution ............................................................................................................ 759
19.5.1 C0104: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn ...................... 759
19.5.2 C0105: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing . 759
OUTLINE
19.5.3 C0202: Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality .............................................. 759

19.5.7 C0216: LCT up/down abnormality ............................................................ 761
19.5.8 C0301: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn................................................. 762
MAINTENANCE
19.5.9 C0351: Paper cooling fan trouble.............................................................. 762

19.5.10 C1003: PK communication error............................................................... 763
19.5.11 C1004: FNS communication error ............................................................ 763
19.5.12 C1005: ZU communication error............................................................... 763
19.5.13 C1081: SD communication error .............................................................. 764
19.5.14 C1102: Main tray Up/Down motor malfunction ......................................... 764

19.5.15 C1103: Side-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction .......................... 765
19.5.16 C1104: Paper exit roller drive motor malfunction ...................................... 765
19.5.17 C1105: Paper exit auxiliary roller motor malfunction ................................ 766
19.5.18 C1106: Side-staple stapler drive malfunction ........................................... 766
19.5.19 C1109: Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction ................................. 767
19.5.20 C1110: Center-staple head roller motor malfunction ................................ 767
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.5.21 C1112: Center-staple clinch roller motor malfunction............................... 768

19.5.22 C1113: Center-staple lead edge stopper motor malfunction .................... 768
19.5.23 C1114: Center-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction ...................... 769
19.5.24 C1115: Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction................................. 770
19.5.25 C1116: Center-staple transfer motor malfunction ..................................... 771
19.5.26 C1124: Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (lower)................................... 772
19.5.27 C1125: Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (upper) .................................. 773
APPENDIX
19.5.28 C1127: Punch shift motor drive malfunction ............................................. 773

19.5.29 C1130: 1st stopper motor drive malfunction ............................................. 774
19.5.30 C1131: 2nd folding stopper motor drive malfunction ................................ 774
19.5.31 C1132: Output OP punch driving motor malfunction ................................ 775
19.5.32 C1133: Punch shift motor drive malfunction ............................................. 775
xxii
19.5.33 C1134: Main motor cooling fan drive malfunction ..................................... 776
19.5.34 C1135: Punch motor drive malfunction ..................................................... 776
19.5.35 C1136: Punch switchover motor drive malfunction ................................... 777
19.5.36 C1140: Side-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction ........................... 777
19.5.37 C1141: Side-staple paddle roller motor malfunction ................................. 778
19.5.38 C1142: Side-staple trailing paddle up-down motor malfunction................ 778
19.5.39 C1143: Side-staple rewinding paddle up-down motor malfunction ........... 779
19.5.40 C1144: Spare stacker board drive motor malfunction............................... 779
OUTLINE
19.5.41 C1145: End stopper drive motor malfunction............................................ 780
19.5.42 C1150: Center-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction........................ 780
19.5.43 C1151: Center-staple stapler drive motor malfunction.............................. 781
19.5.44 C1152: Center-staple paper exit motor malfunction.................................. 782
19.5.45 C1153: Center-staple paddle up-down motor malfunction (trailing edge). 782
19.5.46 C1156: Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (trailing edge)....... 783
MAINTENANCE
19.5.47 C1157: Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (middle) ............... 784
19.5.48 C1182: Shift motor drive malfunction ........................................................ 784
19.5.49 C1183: Elevate drive malfunction ............................................................. 785
19.5.50 C1190: Alignment plate motor drive malfunction ...................................... 786
19.5.51 C1194: Leading edge stopper motor drive malfunction ............................ 786
19.5.52 C11A1: Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction......................... 787
19.5.53 C11A2: Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction malfunction ............... 787
19.5.54 C11A7: Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction......................... 788
19.5.55 C11B0: Stapler movement drive malfunction ............................................ 788
19.5.56 C11B2: Staple drive malfunction............................................................... 789
19.5.57 C11B5: Saddle stapler drive malfunction .................................................. 789
19.5.58 C11C0: Punch motor drive malfunction .................................................... 790
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.5.59 C11E0: Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction /
Finisher route change malfunction ............................................................ 790
19.5.60 C11E1: Upper lower path switching motor drive malfunction.................... 791
19.5.61 C11E2: Tray1 path switching motor drive malfunction .............................. 792
19.5.62 C2101: PC charge cleaning malfunction................................................... 792
19.5.63 C2151: Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation.................. 793
19.5.64 C2152: Transfer belt pressure welding alienation ..................................... 793
APPENDIX
19.5.65 C2160: PC charge (C) malfunction ........................................................... 794

19.5.66 C2161: PC charge (M) malfunction........................................................... 794
19.5.67 C2162: PC charge (Y) malfunction ........................................................... 794
19.5.68 C2163: PC charge (K) malfunction ........................................................... 794
19.5.69 C2164: PC charge malfunction ................................................................. 794
xxiii
19.5.70 C2204: Waste toner agitating motor’s failure to turn................................. 794

19.5.71 C2253: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn........................................... 795
19.5.72 C2254: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing ...................... 795
19.5.73 C2255: Color developing motor’s failure to turn........................................ 795
19.5.74 C2256: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing ................... 795
19.5.75 C2257: Cleaner motor’s failure to turn ...................................................... 796
19.5.76 C2258: Cleaner motor’s turning at abnormal timing ................................. 796
19.5.77 C2259: K developing motor’s failure to turn .............................................. 796
OUTLINE
19.5.78 C225A: K developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing......................... 796

19.5.79 C225B: K PC drum motor’s failure to turn................................................. 797
19.5.80 C225C: K PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing............................ 797
19.5.81 C2350: Toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn ....................................... 797
19.5.82 C2353: IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn............................................. 798
19.5.83 C2354: Rear side cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ................................. 798
MAINTENANCE
19.5.84 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor............ 799
19.5.85 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor ..... 799
19.5.86 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor ......... 799
19.5.87 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor .......... 800
19.5.88 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor.... 800
19.5.89 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor........ 800
19.5.90 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor ........... 800
19.5.91 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor ......... 801
19.5.92 C2559: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure ........................................... 801
19.5.93 C255A: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure ..................................... 801
19.5.94 C255B: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure ......................................... 801
19.5.95 C255C: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure .......................................... 801
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.5.96 C2561: Cyan TCR sensor failure .............................................................. 802

19.5.97 C2562: Magenta TCR sensor failure ........................................................ 802
19.5.98 C2563: Yellow TCR sensor failure ............................................................ 802
19.5.99 C2564: Black TCR sensor failure.............................................................. 802
19.5.100 C2650: Main backup media access error ................................................. 803
19.5.101 C2651: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/C) ...................................... 804
19.5.102 C2652: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/M) ...................................... 804
APPENDIX
19.5.103 C2653: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/Y) ...................................... 804

19.5.104 C2654: EEPROM access error (Drum unit/K) .......................................... 804
19.5.105 C2A14: Drum unit/K new release failure................................................... 804
19.5.106 C2A21: Toner cartridge/C new release failure .......................................... 804
xxiv
19.5.107 C2A22: Toner cartridge/M new release failure .......................................... 804

19.5.108 C2A23: Toner cartridge/Y new release failure .......................................... 804
19.5.109 C2A24: Toner cartridge/K new release failure .......................................... 804
19.5.110 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure ..................................................... 805
19.5.111 C3102: Fusing roller failure to turn............................................................ 805
19.5.112 C3201: Fusing motor failure to turn .......................................................... 806
19.5.113 C3202: Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing...................................... 806
19.5.114 C3303: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 1 failure to turn .................................... 806
OUTLINE
19.5.117 C3424: Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side) .......................................... 808
19.5.118 C3425: Fusing heaters trouble (NC sensor) ............................................. 808
19.5.119 C3721: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection
(Center of the heating roller) ..................................................................... 809
MAINTENANCE
(Edge of the heating roller) ....................................................................... 809
19.5.121 C3725: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC sensor)........ 809
19.5.122 C3724: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side)..... 809
19.5.123 C3822: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection
(Edge of the heating roller) ....................................................................... 810
19.5.124 C3825: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC sensor) ......... 810
19.5.125 C3824: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking side) ...... 810
19.5.126 C3921: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Center of the heating roller)
.................................................................................................................. 811
19.5.127 C3922: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Edge of the heating roller) 811
19.5.128 C3925: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (NC sensor) ....................... 811
19.5.129 C3924: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (soaking side) .................... 811
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.5.130 C392A: Fusing sensor contamination (NC sensor)................................... 812
19.5.131 C3B02: IH malfunction (CPU) ................................................................... 813
19.5.132 C3B03: IH malfunction (monitor)............................................................... 813
19.5.133 C3B05: IH temperature sensor defect....................................................... 813
19.5.134 C3B06: IH surge error ............................................................................... 813
19.5.135 C3B07: IH input power error ..................................................................... 813
19.5.136 C3B08: IH input voltage error.................................................................... 813
APPENDIX
19.5.137 C4101: Polygon motor rotation trouble...................................................... 814

19.5.138 C4301: PH cooling fan motor failure to turn .............................................. 814
19.5.139 C4501: Laser malfunction ......................................................................... 815
19.5.140 C5104: Transfer belt motor’s failure to turn ............................................... 815
19.5.141 C5105: Transfer belt motor’s turning at abnormal timing .......................... 815
xxv
19.5.142 C5304: IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn.......................................... 816

19.5.143 C5306: IH cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn.......................................... 816
19.5.144 C5351: Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn ........................ 817
19.5.145 C5354: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn ................................. 817
19.5.146 C5356: Cooling fan motor’s failure to turn................................................. 818
19.5.147 C5370: MFP control board cooling fan motor’s failure to turn................... 818
19.5.148 C5372: MFP control board CPU temperature failure ................................ 819
19.5.149 C6102: Drive system home sensor malfunction ....................................... 819
OUTLINE
19.5.150 C6103: Slider over running ....................................................................... 819

19.5.151 C6301: Optical cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ..................................... 820
19.5.152 C6704: Image input time out..................................................................... 820
19.5.153 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure.............................................. 821
19.5.154 C6752: ASIC clock input error (front side) ................................................ 821
19.5.155 C6753: ASIC clock input error (back side)................................................ 821
MAINTENANCE
19.5.156 C6901: DSC board mount failure 1........................................................... 822

19.5.157 C6902: DSC board bus check NG1-1....................................................... 822
19.5.158 C6903: DSC board bus check NG1-2....................................................... 822
19.5.159 C6F01: Scanner sequence trouble 1 ........................................................ 822
19.5.160 C8101: Before reading pressure welding alienation mechanism.............. 822
19.5.161 C8102: Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble ......................... 823
19.5.162 C8103: Lift up mechanism trouble (Upward movement)........................... 823
19.5.163 C8104: Glass movement trouble .............................................................. 824
19.5.164 C8106: Lift up mechanism failure (Downward movement) ....................... 824
19.5.165 C8302: Cooling fan failure ........................................................................ 825
19.5.166 C8401: EEPROM failure ........................................................................... 825
19.5.167 C9401: Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection........................... 826
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.5.168 C9402: Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection.................... 826

19.5.169 CA051: Standard controller configuration failure ...................................... 826
19.5.170 CA052: Controller hardware error............................................................. 826
19.5.171 CA053: Controller start failure .................................................................. 826
19.5.172 CC001: Vendor connection failure ............................................................ 827
19.5.173 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)..................................... 827
19.5.174 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) ............................... 827
APPENDIX
19.5.175 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) ..................................... 827
19.5.176 CC155: Finisher ROM error ...................................................................... 827
19.5.177 CC156: ADF ROM error ........................................................................... 828
19.5.178 CC157: Finisher ROM error (RU) ............................................................. 828
xxvi
19.5.179 CC158: Finisher ROM error (ZU) .............................................................. 828

19.5.180 CC159: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1) .................................. 829
19.5.181 CC15A: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2)................................... 829
19.5.182 CC15B: Finisher ROM error (SD) ............................................................. 829
19.5.183 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) ........................................................... 830
19.5.184 CC164: ROM contents error (MSC) .......................................................... 831
19.5.185 CC165: ROM contents error (ADF)........................................................... 831
19.5.186 CC170: Dynamic link error during starting (AP0)...................................... 832
OUTLINE
19.5.191 CC180: Dynamic link error during starting (LDR) ..................................... 832
19.5.192 CC181: Dynamic link error during starting (IBR) ...................................... 832
MAINTENANCE
19.5.193 CC182: Dynamic link error during starting (IID) ........................................ 832
19.5.194 CC183: Dynamic link error during starting (IPF) ....................................... 832
19.5.195 CC184: Dynamic link error during starting (IMY) ...................................... 832
19.5.196 CC185: Dynamic link error during starting (SPF) ..................................... 832
19.5.197 CC186: Dynamic link error during starting (OAP) ..................................... 832
19.5.198 CC190: Outline font load error .................................................................. 832
19.5.199 CD002: JOB RAM save error.................................................................... 833
19.5.200 CD004: Hard disk access error (connection failure) ................................. 833
19.5.201 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error........................................................ 833
19.5.202 CD020: Hard disk verify error.................................................................... 833
19.5.203 CD010: Hard disk unformat ...................................................................... 833
19.5.204 CD011: Hard disk out of specifications mounted ...................................... 834
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.5.205 CD041 to CD046: HDD command execution error Address Mark Not Found
.................................................................................................................. 834
19.5.206 CD047 to CD04B: HDD SCSI library error................................................ 834
19.5.207 CD201: File memory mounting error......................................................... 835
19.5.208 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy ..................................................... 835
19.5.209 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 .................................................. 835
19.5.210 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure ............................................. 835
APPENDIX
19.5.211 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection................................... 835

19.5.212 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting...................................... 835
19.5.213 CD241: Encryption ASIC setting error ...................................................... 836
19.5.214 CD242: EncryptionASIC mounting error ................................................... 836
xxvii
19.5.215 CD252: No relay circuit boards for IC-412 mounting at IC-412 mount setting
.................................................................................................................. 836
19.5.216 CD261: USB host board failure................................................................. 836
19.5.217 CD271: i-Option activated and additional memory not installed ............... 837
19.5.218 CD272: i-Option activated and additional memory and HDD not installed 837
19.5.219 CD401: NACK command incorrect ........................................................... 838
19.5.220 CD402: ACK command incorrect.............................................................. 838
19.5.221 CD403: Checksum error ........................................................................... 838
OUTLINE
19.5.222 CD404: Receiving packet incorrect........................................................... 838

19.5.223 CD405: Receiving packet analysis error................................................... 838
19.5.224 CD406: ACK receiving timeout ................................................................. 838
19.5.225 CD407: Retransmission timeout ............................................................... 838
19.5.226 CE001: Abnormal message queue........................................................... 838
19.5.227 CE003: Task error..................................................................................... 838
MAINTENANCE
19.5.228 CE004: Event error ................................................................................... 838

19.5.229 CE005: Memory access error ................................................................... 838
19.5.230 CE006: Header access error .................................................................... 838
19.5.231 CE007: DIMM initialize error..................................................................... 838
19.5.232 CD3##: NVRAM data error ....................................................................... 839
19.5.233 CE002: Message and method parameter failure ...................................... 840

19.5.234 CEEE1: MFP board malfunction............................................................... 840
19.5.235 CEEE2: Scanner section malfunction....................................................... 840
19.5.236 CEEE3: Printer control board malfunction ................................................ 841
20. NETWORK ERROR CODE ................................................................................ 842
20.2 List.................................................................................................................... 842
TROUBLESHOOTING
21. POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE .............................................................................. 854

21.1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check) ................................. 854
21.2 Fusing heaters do not operate ......................................................................... 854
21.3 Power is not supplied to ADF ........................................................................... 855
21.4 Power is not supplied to option......................................................................... 855
21.4.1 LU-204/301 ............................................................................................... 855
21.4.2 FS-526/527 ............................................................................................... 855
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM.............................................................................. 856
APPENDIX
22.1 How to read element date ................................................................................ 856

22.1.1 Table number ............................................................................................ 856
22.1.2 Level history 1........................................................................................... 857
22.1.3 Level history 2........................................................................................... 858
xxviii
22.2 How to identify problematic part ....................................................................... 859

22.2.1 Initial check items...................................................................................... 859
22.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 862
22.3.1 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in
sub scan direction ..................................................................................... 862
22.3.2 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in
main scan direction ................................................................................... 864
22.3.3 Scanner system: color spots ..................................................................... 865
22.3.4 Scanner system: fog ................................................................................. 866
OUTLINE
22.3.5 Scanner system: blurred image, blotchy image ........................................ 867
22.3.6 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration, sync shift
(lines in main scan direction) .................................................................... 868
22.3.7 Scanner system: moire ............................................................................. 869
22.3.8 Scanner system: skewed image ............................................................... 870
22.3.9 Scanner system: distorted image.............................................................. 871
MAINTENANCE
22.3.10 Scanner system: low image density, rough image .................................... 872
22.3.11 Scanner system: defective ACS................................................................ 873
22.3.12 Scanner system: blank copy, black copy ................................................... 874
22.3.13 Scanner system: abnormal image ............................................................ 875
22.3.14 Scanner system: uneven density .............................................................. 876
22.3.15 Printer monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands
in sub scan direction ................................................................................. 877
22.3.16 Printer monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands
in main scan direction ............................................................................... 878
22.3.17 Printer monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction.......................... 879
22.3.18 Printer monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction........................ 880
22.3.19 Printer monocolor: low image density ....................................................... 881
TROUBLESHOOTING
22.3.20 Printer monocolor: gradation reproduction failure ..................................... 883
22.3.21 Printer monocolor: foggy background ....................................................... 884
22.3.22 Printer monocolor: void areas, white spots ............................................... 886
22.3.23 Printer monocolor: colored spots .............................................................. 887
22.3.24 Printer monocolor: blurred image.............................................................. 888
22.3.25 Printer monocolor: blank copy, black copy ................................................ 889
22.3.26 Printer monocolor: uneven image ............................................................. 890
22.3.27 Printer 4-color: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in
APPENDIX
sub scan direction ..................................................................................... 891

22.3.28 Printer 4-color: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in
main scan direction ................................................................................... 892
22.3.29 Printer 4-color: uneven density in sub scan direction................................ 893
22.3.30 Printer 4-color: uneven density in main scan direction.............................. 894
xxix
22.3.31 Printer 4-color: low image density ............................................................ 895

22.3.32 Printer 4-color: poor color reproduction .................................................... 896
22.3.33 Printer 4-color: incorrect color image registration ..................................... 897
22.3.34 Printer 4-color: void areas, white spots..................................................... 898
22.3.35 Printer 4-color: colored spots.................................................................... 899
22.3.36 Printer 4-color: poor fusing performance, offset ....................................... 900
22.3.37 Printer 4-color: brush effect, blurred image .............................................. 901
22.3.38 Printer 4-color: back marking.................................................................... 902
OUTLINE
22.3.39 Printer 4-color: uneven image................................................................... 903

23. IC protector ......................................................................................................... 904
23.1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 904
23.2 IC protector list ................................................................................................. 904
23.2.1 Main body ................................................................................................. 904
23.2.2 DF-618...................................................................................................... 909
MAINTENANCE
23.2.3 LU-301/LU-204 ......................................................................................... 910

23.2.4 JS-504 ...................................................................................................... 910
23.2.5 ZU-606...................................................................................................... 911
23.2.6 FS-526 ...................................................................................................... 911
23.2.7 SD-508...................................................................................................... 913
23.2.8 PK-516...................................................................................................... 914

23.2.9 PI-505 ....................................................................................................... 914
23.2.10 FS-527 ...................................................................................................... 914
23.2.11 SD-509...................................................................................................... 916
APPENDIX
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING................................................................................ 917
TROUBLESHOOTING
24.1 Main body......................................................................................................... 917

24.1.1 Scanner section ........................................................................................ 917
24.1.2 Front side .................................................................................................. 918
24.1.3 Back side .................................................................................................. 920
24.1.4 Around the write section ........................................................................... 923
24.1.5 Manual bypass tray................................................................................... 924
24.1.6 Tray 1 ........................................................................................................ 925
APPENDIX
24.1.7 Tray 2 ........................................................................................................ 926

24.1.8 Tray 3 ........................................................................................................ 927
24.1.9 Tray 4 ........................................................................................................ 928
24.1.10 2nd transfer section .................................................................................. 929
24.1.11 Duplex section .......................................................................................... 930
xxx
24.1.12 Fusing/paper exit section .......................................................................... 931

24.2 DF-618/SP-501................................................................................................. 932
24.3 LU-301 (Option) ................................................................................................ 934
24.4 LU-204 (Option) ................................................................................................ 935
24.5 JS-504 (Option) ................................................................................................ 936
24.6 JS-603 (Option) ................................................................................................ 937
24.7 ZU-606 (Option)................................................................................................ 938
24.8 OT-503 (Option) ................................................................................................ 940
24.9 FS-526 (Option) ................................................................................................ 941
OUTLINE
24.10 SD-508 (Option)................................................................................................ 944
24.11 PK-516 (Option)................................................................................................ 946
24.12 JS-602 (Option) ................................................................................................ 947
24.13 PI-505 (Option) ................................................................................................. 948
24.14 FS-527 (Option) ................................................................................................ 949
24.15 SD-509 (Option)................................................................................................ 952
MAINTENANCE
24.16 PK-517 (Option)................................................................................................ 954
25. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING .................................................................... 955
25.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 955
25.1.1 Printer control board (PRCB) .................................................................... 955
25.1.2 MFP board (MFPB) ................................................................................... 956
25.1.3 PCI board (PCIB) ...................................................................................... 957
25.1.4 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) ............................................... 957
25.1.5 PH relay board (REYB/PH) ....................................................................... 958
25.1.6 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN).......................................................... 958
25.1.7 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) ........................................ 959
25.1.8 DF control board (DFCB) .......................................................................... 959
25.1.9 LU drive board (LUDB) ............................................................................. 960
TROUBLESHOOTING
25.1.10 Punch control board (PKDB)..................................................................... 960
25.1.11 ZU control board ....................................................................................... 961
25.1.12 FS control board (FSCB) .......................................................................... 962
25.1.13 Interlock board (IRB) ................................................................................. 963
25.1.14 SD drive board (SDDB)............................................................................. 964
25.1.15 PI drive board............................................................................................ 965
26. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING........................................................ 966
APPENDIX
26.1 How to read the relay connector layout drawing ............................................... 966
26.2 Main body ......................................................................................................... 966
27. TIMING CHART .................................................................................................. 973
27.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 973
27.1.1 Timing chart in color mode........................................................................ 973
xxxi
27.2 DF-618 ............................................................................................................. 974

27.2.1 1-sided mode ............................................................................................ 974
27.2.2 2-sided mode ............................................................................................ 976
27.3 LU-204.............................................................................................................. 978
27.4 FS-526/SD-508 ................................................................................................ 979
27.4.1 Straight paper exit mode........................................................................... 979
27.4.2 2 flat stitching staples mode ..................................................................... 981
27.4.3 Saddle stitching mode .............................................................................. 984
OUTLINE
27.4.4 Tri-folding mode ........................................................................................ 986

27.5 ZU-606 ............................................................................................................. 987
27.5.1 Z-folding+Punch mode.............................................................................. 987
27.6 FS-527/SD-509/PK-517 ................................................................................... 988
27.6.1 Shift mode................................................................................................. 988
27.6.2 2 flat stitching staples mode ..................................................................... 989
MAINTENANCE
27.6.3 Center staples mode................................................................................. 990

27.6.4 Punch mode.............................................................................................. 991
27.7 JS-603 .............................................................................................................. 992
27.7.1 Tray3 paper exit mode .............................................................................. 992
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDIX
xxxii
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 d-Color MF651/MF551
1/2 System front view
[15] [16] [17] [18]

[2] [3] [4]
OUTLINE
[1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[14] [9]
[10]
[11]
[13] [12]
A0P0F1E503DB
[1] d-Color MF651/MF551 [9] Mount kit MK-715 *2

[2] Authentication unit: Biometric type [10] Large capacity unit LU-301
AU-101 [11] Large capacity unit LU-204
[3] Authentication unit: Biometric type [12] Z folding unit ZU-606
AU-102 [13] Saddle sticher SD-508
[4] Authentication unit: IC card type [14] Finisher FS-526
AU-201 [15] Punch kit PK-516
[5] Working table WT-506 [16] Post inserter PI-505
[6] Keyboard holder KH-101 [17] Job separator JS-602
[7] Local interface kit EK-604 [18] Output tray OT-503
[8] Local interface kit EK-605 *1
*1: Except for China.

*2: Except for the North America and Europe area.
Y110571-1 Service Manual 1

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
2/2 System rear view
[10] [11] [2]
[1]
[9]
[8]
[7]
OUTLINE
[6] [3]
[5]
[4]
A0P0F1C502DB
[1] d-Color MF651/MF551 [7] Mount kit MK-720

[2] Stamp unit SP-501 [8] Key counter kit KIT-1
[3] Fax kit FK-502 [9] Key counter kit KIT-CF *2
[4] Image controller IC-412 [10] i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2
/105 *3
[5] Security kit SC-507 [11] Upgrade kit UK-203
[6] Video interface kit VI-505
*1: Europe only

*2: Except for North America area.
2 Service Manual Y110571-1

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.2 d-Color MF451

1/2 System front view
[14] [15] [16] [17] [2] [3] [4]
[1]
OUTLINE
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[13] [9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
A0P0F1C506DA
[1] d-Color MF451 [8] Local interface kit EK-605 *1

[2] Authentication unit: Biometric type [9] Mount kit MK-715 *2
AU-101 [10] Large capacity unit LU-301
[3] Authentication unit: Biometric type [11] Large capacity unit LU-204
AU-102 [12] Saddle sticher SD-509
[4] Authentication unit: IC card type [13] Finisher FS-527
AU-201 [14] Punch kit PK-517
[5] Working table WT-506 [15] Job separator JS-603
[6] Keyboard holder KH-101 [16] Output tray OT-503
[7] Local interface kit EK-604 [17] Job separator JS-504
*1: Except for China.

*2: Except for the North America and Europe area.

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
2/2 System rear view
[10] [11] [2]
[1]
[9]
[8]
[7]
OUTLINE
[6] [3]
[5]
[4]
A0P0F1C502DB
[1] d-Color MF451 [7] Mount kit MK-720

[2] Stamp unit SP-501 [8] Key counter kit KIT-1
[3] Fax kit FK-502 [9] Key counter kit KIT-CF *1
[4] Image controller IC-412 [10] i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2
/105 *2
[5] Security kit SC-507 [11] Upgrade kit UK-203
[6] Video interface kit VI-505
*1: Europe only

*2: Except for North America area.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Type
Type Combination scanner and printer console type

Copying system Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper
Printing process Laser electrostatic printing system
PC drum type OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability)
Scanning density Main scan direction: 600 dpi, Sub scan direction: 600 dpi
Exposure lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
OUTLINE
Platen Stationary (mirror scan)
Mirror scanning CCD optical system
Original scanning
* Sheet through system when ADF is used
Registration Rear left edge
Manual bypass : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Tray 1 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Paper feeding
separation system
Exposure system 1 polygon 2 beam x 4 LD exposure and polygon mirror scan system
Equivalent to 1800 dpi in main scanning direction u
Exposure density
600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Developing system Dry 2 components developing method, HMT developing system
Charging system DC comb electrode scorotron system with electrode cleaning function
Neutralizing system Red LED system
Image transfer system Belt image transfer system (1st)/roller image transfer system (2nd)
Paper separating Combination of curvature, separating claws, and bias system
system
Fusing system Belt IH fusing system
Heating system Heating: IH heating, Soaking: Halogen lamp

2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
2.2 Functions
Types of original Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects

Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17
Max. original weight 2 kg
Multiple copies 1 to 9999
Warm-up time When the sub power switch is turned ON at any timing while the main power
(at ambient tempera- switch remains ON for a predetermined period of time or more
ture of 23q C/73.4q F (room temperature is 23qC/73.4qF)
and rated source volt- d-Color 30 sec. or less (Black print, Color print)
OUTLINE
age) MF651/MF551/MF451
d-Color MF551: 60 sec. or less (Black print, Color print)
Taiwan only
d-Color MF451: 30 sec. or less (Black print)
Taiwan only 60 sec. or less (Color print)
When the main power switch is turned ON during the sub power switch being
ON (room temperature is 23qC/73.4qF)
d-Color 45 sec. or less (Black print, Color print)
MF651/MF551/MF451
d-Color MF551: 60 sec. or less (Black print, Color print)
Taiwan only
d-Color CMF451: 45 sec. or less (Black print)
Taiwan only 60 sec. or less (Color print)
Image loss Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),
Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
First copy time (Tray1/2 A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, full size)
d-Color MF651 3.8 sec. or less (Black print)
5.5 sec. or less (Color print)
Processing speed Plain paper d-Color MF651: 310.00 mm/s
black d-Color MF551: 264.00 mm/s
d-Color MF451: 216.00 mm/s
Plain paper/full color d-Color MF651: 240.00 mm/s
Thick 1, Thick 1+ d-Color MF651: 155.00 mm/s
Thick 2, Thick 3, d-Color MF651: 120.00 mm/s

Thick 4, OHP, Post
card, Envelope, Label d-Color MF551: 108.00 mm/s
sheet, glossy mode d-Color MF451: 108.00 mm/s

Copying speed for Black d-Color MF651: 1-sided: 65 copies/min,

multi-copy cycle 2-sided: 65 copies/min
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, plain (8 1/ 2 x 11: 64 copies/min)
paper, tray 1) d-Color MF551: 1-sided: 55 copies/min,
2-sided: 55 copies/min
d-Color MF451: 1-sided: 45 copies/min,
Full color d-Color MF651: 1-sided: 50 copies/min,
OUTLINE
Fixed zoom ratios Full size x1.000
Reduction Metric area x0.500, x0.707, x0.816, x0.866
Inch area x0.500, x0.647, x0.733, x0.785
Enlargement Metric area x1.154, x1.224, x1.414, x2.000
Inch area x1.214, x1.294, x1.545, x2.000
Zoom ratios memory Metric area 3 memories
Variable zoom ratios x0.250 to x4.000 Inch area in 0.001 increments
Paper size Tray 1/Tray 2 Metric area A3 Wide, A3 to A5S, A6S, post card
11 x 17 to 8 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,
Inch area
12 1/4 x 18
Tray 3/Tray 4 A4, B5, A5, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 16K, postcard
Bypass tray A3 wide, A3 to B6S, A6S, postcard,
Metric area long size paper (210 to 297 mm x 457 to
1,200 mm)
11 x 17 to 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,
Inch area 12 1/4 x 18, long size paper (8 1/4 to 11
11
/16 x 18 to 47 1/4)
Copy exit tray capacity Plain paper 250 sheets
(When OT-503 is Thick paper 10 sheets
mounted)
OHP transparencies 1 sheet
External memory Supported external USB flash memory device that supports the USB
function memory devices (1.1/2.0) interface
FAT32-formatted memory device

2.3 Paper
Paper source (maximum tray capacity)

Type
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray
Plain paper
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(64 to 90 g/m2 / 17
(500 sheets) (500 sheets) (1500 sheets) (1000 sheets) (150 sheets)
to 24 lb)
Translucent paper – – – – –
OHP ❍
– – – –
transparencies (20 sheets)*3
OUTLINE
Thick paper 1 *1
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(91 to 120 g/m2
/ 24.25 to 32 lb)
Thick paper 1+ *1
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(121 to 157 g/m2
/ 32 to 41.75 lb)
Paper type
Thick paper 2 *1
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(158 to 209 g/m2
/ 42 to 55.5 lb)
Thick paper 3 *1,2
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(210 to 256 g/m2
/ 55.75 to 68 lb)
Thick paper 4 *1,2
❍
(257 to 300 g/m2 – – – –
(50 sheets)
/ 68.25 to 80 lb)
❍ ❍ ❍
Postcards – –
(200 sheets) (200 sheets) (50 sheets)
Envelopes – – – – ❍ (10 sheets)
Labels – – – – ❍ (50 sheets)
Long size paper *4 – – – – ❍ (1 sheet)
139.7 to 311.1 mm 90 to 311.1 mm
Long size paper *4 Copy paper dimensions
Width
5 1/2 to 12 1/2 inch 3 1/2 to 12 1/4 inch
A4, B5, A5, 8 1/2 x 11,

5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 16K, postcard 139.7 to 457.2
182.0 to 457.2 mm
Length mm
7 1/4 to 18 inch
5 1/2 to 18 inch
210 to 297 mm
Width – – – –
8 1/4 to 11 3/4 inch
457 to 1200 mm
Length – – – –
18 to 47 1/4 inch
*1: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.

*2: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3/4 is used.
*3: Black print only.
*4: 127 to 210 g/m2 / 33.75 to 55.75 lb
Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb) or
thick paper weighing 91 to 256 g/m2 (24.25 to 68 lb) are
reliably fed.

2.4 Materials
Parts name Field standard yield *1 Type name

Toner cartridge/C 30,000 prints TN613C
Toner cartridge/M 30,000 prints TN613M
Toner cartridge/Y 30,000 prints TN613Y
Toner cartridge/K 45,000 prints TN613K
Imaging unit/C d-Color MF651 135,000 prints IU612C
d-Color MF551 120,000 prints
OUTLINE
Imaging unit/M d-Color MF651 135,000 prints IU612M
Imaging unit/Y d-Color MF651 135,000 prints IU612Y
Developing unit/K 1,140,000 prints DV612K
Drum unit/K 285,000 prints DR612K
Waste toner box 48,000 prints Waste toner box
*1: Field standard yield

• This machine has the field standard yield which indicates the available print numbers
estimated by the quantities and usage of the unit in the market standard job mode.
Yields for each preventative maintenance unit will differ depending on actual usage.
• The market standard job modes for this unit are as follows.
Market standard job modes

d-Color MF651 d-Color MF551 d-Color MF451
Printing B/W 7 P/J 6 P/J 5 P/J
Color 4 P/J 3 P/J 3 P/J
Color mode [Full Color] or [Black] (apart from [Auto Color])
Paper size A4: 93 %, A4S: 7 %
Color ratio 25 %
Total print volume/month US: 21,900 US: 15,700 US: 10,500
EU: 29,600 EU: 21,200 EU: 14,300
No. of No. of times power
20 times/month
image turned on
stabilization No. of returns from
operations None
sleep mode
Changes in sur-
rounding environ- None
ment

2.5 Print volume

• d-Color MF651
US Average Color print 5,500 prints/month
Black print 16,400 prints/month
Maximum Color print 63,000 prints/month
EU Average Color print 7,400 prints/month
OUTLINE
• d-Color MF551
• d-Color MF451

2.6 Machine specifications

• d-Color MF651
Power requirements Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V
Current: 100 V 15 A + 7A
110 V 15 A + 7A
120 V 16 A
127 V 16 A
220-240 V 10 A
Frequency: 50 to 60 Hz r 3 Hz
OUTLINE
Max power consumption 100 V 2,000 W or less
110 V 2,000 W or less
120 V 2,100 W or less
127 V 2,100 W or less
220-240 V 2,100 W or less
Dimensions 650 *1 (W) x 879 *2 (H) x 1,155 mm (H)
25.5 *1 (W) x 34.5 *2 (D) x 45.5 inch (H)
Space requirements 2,554 (W) x 1,525 mm (D) x 1,650 mm (H)*3
100.5 (W) x 60.0 inch (D) x 65.0 inch (H) *3
Weight Machine Approx. 207.0 kg / 456.25 lb (without IU and TC)
IU and TC Approx. 14.0 kg / 32.0 lb
*1: Width when the bypass tray is closed.
*2: Including the control panel.
*3: Space requirements are the values when the finisher tray extension, paper trays and
LCU are pulled out, and the ADF is open.
• d-Color MF551

Current: 100 V 15 A
110 V 15 A
120 V 16 A
127 V 16 A
220-240 V 10 A
110 V 1,500 W or less
120 V 2,000 W or less
127 V 2,000 W or less
220-240 V 2,000 W or less
25.5 *1 (W) x 34.5 *2 (D) x 45.5 inch (H)
Space requirements 2,554 (W) x 1,525 mm (D) x 1,650 mm (H)*3
100.5 (W) x 60.0 inch (D) x 65.0 inch (H) *3

• d-Color MF451

Current: 100 V 15 A
110 V 15 A
120 V 16 A
127 V 16 A
OUTLINE
220-240 V 10 A
110 V 1,500 W or less
120 V 2,000 W or less
127 V 2,000 W or less
220-240 V 2,000 W or less
25.5 *1 (W) x 34.5 *2 (D) x 45.5 inch (H)
Space requirements 2,148 (W) x 1,525 mm (D) x 1,650 mm (H) *3
84.5 (W) x 60.0 inch (D) x 65.0 inch (H) *3
2.7 Operating environment
Temperature 10 to 30qC / 50 to 86qF (with a fluctuation of 10q C / 18q F or less per hour)
Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h)
Levelness Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.

2.8 Print functions
Type Built-in printer controller

RAM 2 GB (shared with the main body)
HDD 250 GB (shared with the main body)
Interface Standard Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB2.0/1.1
Option USB 2.0
Frame type Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet II, Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP,
OUTLINE
FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP,
NTP, SSL, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME,
IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD
Print speed Black print MF651: 1-sided: 65 ppm, 2-sided: 65 ppm (64 ppm
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, plain for 8 1/2 x 11)
paper) MF551: 1-sided: 55 ppm, 2-sided: 55 ppm
MF451: 1-sided: 45 ppm, 2-sided: 45 ppm
Color print MF651: 1-sided: 50 ppm, 2-sided: 50 ppm
MF551/MF451: 1-sided: 45 ppm, 2-sided: 45 ppm
Printer language PCL5c/6 Emulation
PCL XL ver. 2.1 Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)
XPS ver.1.0
Print resolution Equivalent to 1,800 dpi in main scanning direction u
600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Printer fonts PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts
Supported computer IBM PC/AT compatible machine,
Macintosh
(PowerPC/Intel processor : Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5 for Intel processor)
Printer driver PCL OLIVETTI Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
driver (PCL driver) Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later)
Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
* 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are sup-
ported

Printer driver PostScript OLIVETTI Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later)

driver (PS driver) Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later)
OUTLINE

ported
XPS OLIVETTI Windows Vista Business *
driver (XPS driver) Windows Vista Enterprise *
ported
PostScript PPD driver Mac OS 9.2 or later
(PS-PPD) Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5

Printer driver Fax driver Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later)
Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later)
OUTLINE
ported
2.9 Scan functions
Scanner Scannable range Same as the copier

(Max. 11 x 17: inch area, A3: metric area)
Scan speed 78 pages/min
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11,
Resolution 300 dpi)
Functions Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, Scan to
WebDAV, Scan to BOX
Scanning resolution 200/300/400/600 dpi
TWAIN Driver TWAIN Driver, HDD TWAIN Driver
Supported operating Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)
systems Windows XP Home Edition (SP3)
Windows XP Professional (SP3)
Windows NT 4.0 (SP6a)
Windows Vista Home Basic (SP1)
Windows Vista Home Premium (SP1)
Windows Vista Business (SP1)
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP1)
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP1)
PC Conform to the specification of operating system
Required memory Conform to the specification of operating system
Network Computer to which TCP/IP protocol is correctly set
Hard disk Required 20 MB or more disk space

SMB Supported Windows Windows NT4.0 Server/Workstation

operating Windows 2000 Server/Professional
systems Windows XP Home/Professional
Windows Server 2003 each edition
Windows Vista each edition
Windows Server 2008
DFS function is supported only in the environment

that structured with the following Windows server
operating systems.
• Windows 2000 Server each edition
• Windows Server 2003 each edition
OUTLINE
• Windows Server 2008
Direct hosting function apply to the following oper-

ating systems.
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
• Windows Vista
(IPv6 function is available only when the Windows
Vista is installed.)
Samba 2.2.x
3.x
Novell Netware 6.5 (SP6 or later)
Netware
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS
MAINTENANCE
3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS
3.1 Concept of periodical maintenance
• Cleaning/replacement cycle for each maintenance item of main body/options can be
evaluated with the total counter value or each life counter/fixed parts counter value of
[Service mode] o [Counter] o [Life].
3.1.1 Main body

A. Periodical maintenance1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Replace
cation tions
1 Overall Paper feed and image con-
●
ditions
2 Appearance ● ●
3 Conveyance Timing roller ●
MAINTENANCE
4 section Paper dust remover ●
5 Image transfer Around waste toner port
●
section
6 Processing Electrostatic charger wire
●
section
7 Duplex section Duplex transport roller ●
B. Periodical maintenance 2 (life counter; every 150,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Processing Imaging unit/Y,M,C 1 ●
2 section Toner filter 1 ● *1
*1: Replace these parts when drum unit/K is replaced, or when either black 285,000 counts
or color 120,000 counts is reached.

3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
C. Periodical maintenance 3 (life counter; every 300,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Manual bypass Pick-up roller 1 ●
tray Feed roller 1 ● *1
Tray 1
Tray 2 Separation roller assy 1 ●
2 Tray 3 Pick-up roller 1 ●
Tray 4 Feed roller 1 ● *1
Separation roller 1 ●
3 Processing Toner filter 1 ● *2
4 section Drum unit/K 1 ●
5 Ozone filter 1 ● *3
*1: Replace those three parts at the same time.

*2: Replace these parts when drum unit/K is replaced, or when either black 285,000 counts
or color 120,000 counts is reached.
*3: Replace it when replacing drum unit/K.
MAINTENANCE
D. Periodical maintenance 4 (life counter; every 600,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Conveyance Transfer roller unit
1 ●
section
2 Image transfer Transfer belt unit
1 ●
section
3 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 ●
4 IH coil unit 1 ● *1
*1: When fusing unit is replaced.
3.1.2 Automatic document feeder (ADF)

A. Periodical maintenance 1 (life counter; every 50,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Overall Paper feed and image
●
conditions
3 Paper feed Pick-up roller ●
4 section Feed roller ●
5 Separation roller ●
6 Conveyance Roller and rolls
●
section
7 Scanning Scanning guide
●
section
8 Paper feed Reflective sensor section
●
section

Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Paper feed Pick-up roller 2 ●
2 section Feed roller 1 ● *1
3 Separation roller 1 ●
3.1.3 LU-204/301
A. Periodical maintenance 1 (life counter; every 300,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Paper feed Pick-up roller 1 ●
2 section Feed roller 1 ● *1
3 Separation roller 1 ●
MAINTENANCE
3.1.4 ZU-606
A. Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
●
ditions
3 Punch section Punch edge ●
4 Conveyance Entrance guide plate ●
5 section Conveyance guide plate ●
6 Registration roller ●
7 Conveyance roller ●
8 Exit guide plate ●
9 Z folding Folding roller ●
10 section Folding guide plate ●
11 Punch scraps Punch scraps box
conveyance ●
section
B. Periodical maintenance 2 (fixed parts counter; every 1,000,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Punch scraps Punch scraps conveyance
1 ●
conveyance motor
2 section Punch clutch 1 ●

3.1.5 FS-526
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
●
ditions
3 Conveyance Paper exit roller 6 ●
4 section Paddle/1 1 ●
5 Paddle/2 2 ●
6 Conveyance roller ●
7 Main drive section ● ●
8 Main tray section ● ●
9 Alignment drive section ● ●
10 Paper exit drive section ● ●
11 Staple section Staple section ● ●
MAINTENANCE
B. Periodical maintenance 2 (fixed parts counter; every 500,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Staple section Stapler unit ●
3.1.6 SD-508
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
●
ditions
3 Conveyance Conveyance roller
●
section
4 Folding section Folding section ●
5 Folding roller ●
6 Paper exit belt ●
7 Staple section Staple section ● ●
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Staple section Stapler unit ●

3.1.7 PK-516
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
●
ditions
3 Punch section Punch edge ●
4 Punch scraps box ●
5 Punch scraps full sensor ●
3.1.8 JS-602
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
●
MAINTENANCE

ditions
3 Conveyance Conveyance roller
●
section
4 Paper exit Exit roller
●
section
3.1.9 PI-505
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
●
ditions
3 Paper feed Feed roller ●
4 section Separation roller ●
5 Pick-up roller ●
6 Conveyance Exit roller
●
section
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Paper feed Feed roller/Up ●
2 section Feed roller/Lw ●
3 Separation roller/Up ●
4 Separation roller/Lw ●

C. Periodical maintenance 3 (fixed parts counter; every 200,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Paper feed Pick-up roller/Up ●
2 section Pick-up roller/Lw ●
D. Periodical maintenance 4 (fixed parts counter; every 600,000 counts)
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Paper feed Torque limiter/Up ●
2 section Torque limiter/Lw ●
3.1.10 FS-527
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
MAINTENANCE

●
ditions
3 Conveyance Roller and rolls ●
4 section Paddles ●
Lubri- Descrip-
cation tions
1 Conveyance Upper paddle 2 ●
2 section Lower paddle 9 ●

3.2 Periodical replacement parts list

• To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is rec-
ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as
instructed.
• Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the totalcounter, the life
counter, the fixed parts counter or the messages displayed on the control panel.
• Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, standard mode and
low power mode OFF.
(Consumables which adopt field standard yield are excluded.)
Color B/W
* Standard mode d-Color MF651 5 pages per job 7 pages per job
d-Color MF551 5 pages per job 6 pages per job
d-Color MF451 5 pages per job 5 pages per job
3.2.1 Main body
Descrip Ref.
MAINTENANCE
Classification Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle
tions page
ADF Pick-up roller AVGR05004G 2 200,000 *1 *3 *4
Feed roller AVGR01119J 1 200,000 *1
Separation roller AVGR05005C 1 200,000 *1
Tray 1 Feed roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1 *3 P.53
Separation roller assy AVGR10775P 1 300,000 *1 P.56
Pick-up roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1 P.53
Separation roller assy AVGR10775P 1 300,000 *1 P.60
Separation roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1 P.62
Separation roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1 P.65
Manual bypass Feed roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1 *3 P.67
tray Separation roller assy AVGR10776T 1 300,000 *1 P.69
Conveyance Transfer roller unit 570,000 *2 P.50
AVGR10777X 1
section
Fusing section Fusing unit 570,000 *2 *5 P.71
1
AVGR10778L *6

Descrip Ref.
tions page
Processing Imaging unit/ Y B0822 MF651: 135,000 *2 *7 P.33
section Imaging unit/ M B0823 1 MF551/MF451:
Imaging unit/ C B0824 120,000 *2
Drum unit/ K B0826 1 285,000 *2 *8 P.36
Developing unit/ K B0825 1 1,140,000 *2 P.40
Ozone filter AVGR06902M 1 285,000 *2 P.31
Toner cartridge/ Y B0819 1 30,000 *2 *7 P.44
Toner cartridge/ M B0820 1 30,000 *2
Toner cartridge/ C B0821 1 30,000 *2
Toner cartridge/ K B0818 1 MF651/MF551: *7
45,000 *2
Toner cartridge/ K B0872 1 MF451: 45,000 *2
Toner filter AVGR10780W 1 285,000 (Black)/ P.31
120,000 (Color) *2,
*9
Image transfer Transfer belt unit AVGR10779Q 1 570,000 *2 P.46
MAINTENANCE
section Waste toner box B0827 1 (48,000) *2 *7, *10 P.51
*1: Actual durable cycle (life counter value)

*2: Field standard yield See P.9
*4: See the DF-618/SP501 service manual.
*5: 110 V to 120 V areas only.
*6: 220-240 V areas only.
*7: The parts can be replaced either by user or service engineer.
*8: The ozone filter and the toner filter are furnished with the drum unit/K so that all of them
are replaced at same time.
*9: When either black or color counter arrived at the replacing cycle.
*10: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.
3.2.2 Option
Descrip Ref.
tions Page
LU-204 Pick-up roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1
Feed roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1 *2
Separation roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1
LU-301 Pick-up roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1
Feed roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1 *2
Separation roller AVGR06906N 1 300,000 *1
ZU-606 Punch scraps AVGR12205X 1 1,000,000 *4
*3
conveyance motor
Punch clutch AVGR10463X 1 1,000,000 *4
FS-526 Paper exit roller AVGR06945S 6 100,000 *1
Stapler unit AVGR10781X 1 500,000 *4
Paddle/1 AVGR10728B 1 100,000 *1
Paddle/2 AVGR10783F 2 100,000 *1
SD-508 Stapler unit 2VGR10784U 1 200,000 *4

Descrip Ref.
tions Page
PI-505 Feed roller /Up AVGR09840K 1 100,000 *4
Feed roller /Lw AVGR09840K 1 100,000 *4
Separation roller /Up AVGR09862S 1 100,000 *4
Separation roller /Lw AVGR09862S 1 100,000 *4
Pick-up roller /Up AVGR09834Q 1 200,000 *4
*3
Pick-up roller /Lw AVGR09834Q 1 200,000 *4
Torque limiter /Up AVGR09861N 1 600,000 *4
Torque limiter /Lw AVGR09861N 1 600,000 *4
FS-527 Upper paddle AVGR12203E 2 800,000 *5
Lower paddle AVGR12204T 9 800,000 *5
*1: Actual durable cycle (life counter value)

*3: See each option service manual.
*4: Fixed counter value
MAINTENANCE
*5: Total conter value
3.3 Periodical cleaning parts list

• Clean with reference to the numeric values displayed on the totalcounter, the life counter
or the messages displayed on the control panel.
3.3.1 Main body
Descrip-
Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle Ref.Page
tions
ADF Pick-up roller 50,000
Feed roller 50,000
Separation roller 50,000
Rollers and rolls 50,000 *1
Scanning guide 50,000
Reflective sensor 50,000
section
Conveyance Timing roller 100,000 P.71
section Paper dust remover 100,000 P.70
Duplex section Duplex transport roller 100,000 P.73
Processing Electrostatic charger 100,000 P.40
section wire
Image transfer Area around the waste 100,000 P.51
section toner collecting port
Fusing section IH coil unit When fusing unit is replaced P.73
(600,000)
*1: See DF-618/SP-501 service manual.

3.3.2 Option
Descrip-
Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Ref.Page
tions
ZU-606 Punch edge 100,000 *1
Entrance guide plate 100,000 *1
Conveyance guide plate 100,000 *1
Registration roller 100,000 *1
Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
Exit guide plate 100,000 *1
Folding roller 100,000 *1
Folding guide plate 100,000 *1
Punch waste box 100,000 *1
Appearance 100,000 *1
FS-526 Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
SD-508 Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
Folding section 100,000 *1
MAINTENANCE
Folding roller 100,000 *1

*2
Exit belt 100,000 *1
PK-516 Punch edge 100,000 *1
Punch scraps box 100,000 *1
Punch scraps full
100,000 *1
sensor
JS-602 Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
Exit roller 100,000 *1
PI-505 Feed roller 100,000 *1
Separation roller 100,000 *1
Pick-up roller 100,000 *1
Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
FS-527 Roller and rolls 300,000 *1
Upper paddle 300,000 *1
Lower paddle 300,000 *1
*1: Total counter value

*2: See each option service manual.

3.4 CMS corresponding parts

3.4.1 CMS corresponding parts
• “CMS” stands for “customer maintenance support,” and this is applicable when the user
wants to change parts by himself.
3.4.2 CMS corresponding parts list
No Section Corresponding parts Cycle Clean Replace Ref. page

1 Processing Drum unit/K 285,000 ● P.36
2 section Ozone filter 285,000 ● P.31
3 Toner filter 285,000 (Black)/
● P.31
120,000 (Color)
3.4.3 Replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set

• There are three types of parts set which correspond to CMS. When conducting CMS,
replace all three parts at the same time.
MAINTENANCE

3.5 Concept of parts life

3.5.1 Life value of consumables and parts
• The life counter value of each consumables and parts is available from [Service Mode] o
[Counter] o [Life].
• Life specification value means an actual life terminated when prints are made under the
conditions as defined in the next section, “Conditions for life specifications values.”
The actual life may vary greatly depending on how the machine has been used and other
factors.
See P.29
• “M” refers to the rotation time of each unit.
Life value
Max. life
Description (Specification
value
value)
Waste toner The waste toner full sensor detects the amount of toner
48,000 prints
box accumulated in the waste toner box and sends a signal –
*1,2
that determines the end of the waste toner box life.
Fusing unit When the number of printed pages *4 reaches the set
MAINTENANCE
life value shown on the right, the end of unit life is

600,000 615,000
detected.
counts counts *3
Rotation time for the fusing unit is also counted for con-
trol’s sake, but not used for detecting life.
Transfer When the number of printed pages *4 reaches the set 615,000
600,000
roller unit life value shown on the right, the end of unit life is counts *3
counts
detected. (printable)
Transfer belt Number of prints *4 and rotation time of the transfer belt 600,000 615,000
unit are counted, and detected when one of those two counts/ counts *3/
reaches to the life value shown on the right. 32,638 M 33,333 M *3
Ozone filter Rotation time of the black photo conductor is counted,
and detected when it reaches to the set life value shown
on the right. 10,750 M
10,302 M
(printable)
* The PC drum rotation is calculated based on the dis-
tance the PC drum has run.
Toner filter Number of prints *4 for color printing and black printing
are counted, and detected when one of those two
reaches to the set life value shown on the right.
Color: 160,000
For the life counter, value based on the calculation Color: 150,000
counts
below is displayed. counts
Bk: 315,000
Value (1) or (2) below whichever is larger than the other Bk: 300,000
counts
one counts
(printable)
(1) Number of prints for black printing
(2) Number of prints for color printing y 150,000 x
300,000
Imaging Rotation time of the PC drum and number of prints *4
unit/Y,M,C are counted, and detected when one of those values 150,000 160,000
reaches to the set life value shown on the right. counts/ counts *3/
* The PC drum rotation is calculated based on the dis- 5,180 M 5,525 M *3

Life value
Max. life
Description (Specification
value
value)
Drum unit/K Rotation time of the PC drum is counted, and detected
when it reaches to the set life value shown on the right.
10,302 M 10,750 M *3
* The PC drum rotation is calculated based on the dis-
Developing When the number of printed pages *4 reaches the set
1,200,000 1,215,000
unit/K life value shown on the right, the end of unit life is
counts counts *3
detected.
*1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.
*2: Once the toner-full is detected, it has to be replaced with the new waste toner box in
order to reset.
*3: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the max. life value is reached.
*4: For counting with number of prints, the paper size in the sub scan direction is accumu-
lated and counts one when it reaches to 216.0 mm. For the paper with sub scan size of
less than 216.0mm, it is accumulated with the size of 216.0 mm.
MAINTENANCE
3.5.2 Conditions for life specifications values
• The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent
to it when given conditions (see the table given below) are met. They can be more or less
depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.
Item Description
Job type d-Color MF651 Black : Making 7 copies per job
Color : Making 5 copies per job
d-Color MF551 Black : Making 6 copies per job
d-Color MF451 Black : Making 5 copies per job
Paper size A4 / 8 1/2 x 11
Color ratio Black to Color = 4:1
PV/M MF651 Average Bk: 16,400 / Color: 5,500 (US), Bk: 22,200 / Color: 7,400 (EU)
Maximum Bk: 187,000 / Color: 63,000
MF551 Average Bk: 11,800 / Color: 3,900 (US), Bk: 15,900 / Color: 5,300 (EU)
MF451 Average Bk: 7,900 / Color: 2,600 (US), Bk: 10,700 / Color: 3,600 (EU)
Original density B/W = 5 % for each color, 5 % for black
20 days
No. of operating days per month
(main power switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)

3.5.3 Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing
event occurs in another part
• In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for
any of the following parts, make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is
reached, and replace those parts at the same time.
A. Object parts
• Object parts are divided into two groups. Each group has its own control method.
Two groups are listed below.
Group A • Fusing unit, transfer belt unit, developing unit/K

Group B • imaging unit/Y,M,C, drum unit/K
B. Control method
When a part from group A or B is prohibited from printing:
• A part from group A which reached its life is considered to be “printing inhibited” only
when the difference between the life counter value and the maximum life value is for
10,000 prints or under.
• A parts from group B which reached its life is considered to be “printing inhibited” regard-
MAINTENANCE
less of the difference with maximum life value.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
4.1 Housing section

4.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Ozone filter: Every 285,000 counts
B. Procedure
1. Remove the ozone filter [1], and then
install the new ozone filter.
[1]
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2C527DA
2. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [Ozone Filter].
See P.544
4.1.2 Replacing the toner filter

• Toner filter: Every 285,000 (black)/120,000 (color) counts
B. Procedure
1. Remove the toner filter [1], and then
install the new color toner filter.
[1]
A0P0F2C520DA
2. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [Toner Filter].
See P.544

4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
4.2 Write section

4.2.1 Cleaning of the PH window Y/M/C/K
A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• PH window Y,M,C,K: when toner cartridge is replaced
B. Procedure
1. Open the lower front door.
2. Pull out tray 2 and remove the clean-
ing tool [1] from tray 2.
[1]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C516DA
3. Insert the cleaning tool [1] into the

print head cleaning opening [2], pull
[2] it out, and then repeat this back-and-
forth movement two or three times.
NOTE
• When using the cleaning tool, put
the side with “UP” stamping [3]
face up.
[1]
• Clean the PH window of each CMYK
color.
• When cleaning the PH window of K
color, release the lock lever for the
imaging unit.
[3]
A00JF2C533DA

4.3 Imaging unit section

4.3.1 Replacing the imaging unit/Y,M,C
• Imaging unit/Y,M,C: Every 120,000 counts
B. Removal procedure
2. Remove the waste toner box.
See P.51
3. Release the lock lever [1] for the
imaging unit.
MAINTENANCE
[1] A0P0F2C505DA
4. Remove the imaging unit [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C506DA
C. Reinstall procedure
1. Remove the imaging unit from its
[1] packaging.
2. Remove the packing materials [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C507DA

3. Remove the imaging unit [2] from the

[1]
black protective bag [1].
[2] A0P0F2C508DA
4. Remove the packing material and

securing material.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C509DA
5. Tilt the imaging unit to the direction

c, and lightly shake it twice (d). Tilt
it to the direction e and shake it
twice (f).
A0P0F2C510DA
6. Peel off the tape [1], and remove the

[2] protective sheet [2] for the PC drum.
[1]
A0P0F2C511DA

7. Insert the new imaging unit into the

machine, and close the securing
lever [1] for the imaging unit.
[1]
A0P0F2C512DA
8. Install the waste toner box [1], and

[1] close the lower front door.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C513DA

4.3.2 Replacing the drum unit/K

• Drum unit/K: Every 285,000 counts
NOTE
• In this procedure, the state in which the drum unit/K and the developing unit/K are
assembled is called “imaging unit/K.”

See P.51
3. Loosen the shoulder screw [1], and
pull out the drum unit/K [2].
[1]
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C523DA
4. Hold the fixed levers [1] for the drum

[1] unit/K at two positions, and remove
[1] the drum unit/K [2] while loosening
the fixed lever.
[2]
A0P0F2C524DA

5. Remove the new drum unit/K from

the black protective bag.
[1] [1]
6. Remove caps [1] at the front and the
back of the drum unit/K.
A0P0F2C525DA
[1] 7. Put the drum unit/K [1] on the devel-

oping unit/K.
NOTE
• Do not tilt the drum unit/K when
putting it on the developing unit/K.
(Keep the drum unit/K level.)
MAINTENANCE
• Position the drum unit/K so that
part A of the drum unit/K is inserted
A into part B of the developing unit/K.
B
A0P0F2C526DA
[1]
NOTE
• Position the drum unit/K so that
part C of the drum unit/K is inside
the film [1] located on the main
body rail. (Check that Part C is not
on the top of the rail.)
OK NG
C
A0P0F2C560DA

8. Remove the protective sheet [1] for

the PC drum.
[1]
A0P0F2C528DA
9. Secure the drum unit/K [1] to the

[2]
[2] developing unit/K with the two levers
[2].
NOTE
• Push the front and back levers in
the direction of the arrow at a time
MAINTENANCE
to secure the drum unit/K.

[1] • Make sure the drum unit/K is
securely fixed with two levers.
• Check that the front lever [3] of the
drum unit/K is parallel to the verti-
cal line marked on the label [4] on
the developing unit/K.
[3]
[4]
A0P0F2C527DA

10. Insert the imaging unit/K [1] into the

machine, and tighten the shoulder
screw [2] to secure the drum unit/K.
[2]
[1]
A0P0F2C529DA
11. Remount the waste toner box [1],
MAINTENANCE
[1] and close the lower front door.
A0P0F2C513DA
12. Replace the ozone filter furnished with the drum unit/K.
See P.31
13. Replace the toner filter furnished with the drum unit/K.
See P.31

4.4 Charging section

4.4.1 Cleaning of the electrostatic charger wire/Y,M,C
• Electrostatic charger wire/Y,M,C: Every 100,000 counts
B. Procedure
[1] 2. Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning
tool [1] as far as possible.
Next, slowly push in the charger-
cleaning tool as far as possible.
Repeat the above operations three
times.
NOTE
• Move the charger-cleaning tool
slowly all the way to the end of
either way.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C515DA
4.5 Developing section

4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit/K
• Developing unit/K: Every 1,140,000 counts
B. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit/K.
See P.36
2. Remove the shoulder screw [1].
3. Set A of the developing unit/K to
[1]
meet B of the rail to remove the
developing unit/K [2].
A
[2]
B A0P0F2C541DA

[2] 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove

[1] the toner supply duct [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C557DA
5. Open the package [1] of the new

[1] developing unit/K from the part
shown on the left.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C558DA
6. Place the new developing unit/K

upside down together with its pack-
[1] age.
7. Remove the tape [1] and the mount-
ing member [2] for the new develop-
ing unit/K.
[2]
A0P0F2C542DA
8. Set two springs [1] for mounting and

the shutter [2] included to the new
developing unit/K.
[1]
[2]
[1] A0P0F2C546DA

9. Place the new developing unit/K

[1] upside down together with its pack-
age.
10. Open the package [1] of the new
developing unit/K from the part
shown on the left, and take out the
developing unit/K.
A0P0F2C559DA
[1]
11. Remove two screws [1], and remove
[1]
the cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C544DA
[2] 12. Mount the toner supply duct [2]

[1] removed in step 4, with two screws
[1] to the new developing unit/K.
[1]
A0P0F2C557DA

13. Remove the protective sheet [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C548DA
14. While aligning part A of the develop-

ing unit/K with the screw hole on the
rail, pass part B of the developing
unit/K under the rail.
MAINTENANCE
A
B A0P0F2C551DA
A 15. Align part A of the developing unit

with part B of the rail and place the
developing unit/k [1] on the rail of the
machine.
[1] NOTE
B • Make sure that the positioning
metal bracket [3] of the rail fits in
the cutout [2] in the developing
unit/K.
[2]
[3]
A0P0F2C549DA

16. Fix the developing unit/K to the rail

[1] using the shoulder screw [1].
A0P0F2C550DA
17. Remount the drum unit/K.

See P.36
4.6 Toner supply section

4.6.1 Replacing the toner cartridge
MAINTENANCE
NOTE
• Although the procedure shown below is for the replacement of the toner cartridge/
Y, use the same procedure to replace other toner cartridges.
• Toner cartridge/Y,M,C: Every 30,000 counts
• Toner cartridge/K: Every 45,000 counts
1. Open the upper front door.
2. Pull out the empty toner cartridge [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C501DA

1. Remove the new toner cartridge [1]
from its packaging, and then shake
the cartridge up and down 5 to 10
times.
[1]
A0P0F2C502DA
[1]
2. Remove the protective tape [1].
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C503DA
3. Align the toner cartridge [1] with the

slots in the cartridge compartment,
and then insert the cartridge.
Close the upper front door.
[1]
A0P0F2C504DA
4. Clean the electrostatic charger wire.

See P.40

4.7 1st transfer section

4.7.1 Replacing the transfer belt unit
• Transfer belt unit: Every 570,000 counts
B. Procedure
1. Open the upper right door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and the upper
right door stopper.
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C046DA
3. Loosen the shoulder screw [1] and

slide the image transfer entrance
guide stopper [2] towards the back of
the main body.
[1] [2]
A00JF2C047DA
4. Slide the image transfer entrance

guide [1] towards the back of the
main body and remove it.
NOTE
• Slide the image transfer entrance
guide [1] towards the back of the
main body and remove it.
[1]
A00JF2C048DA

5. Remove two screws [1] and pull the

[2] [1] two transfer belt locks [2] towards the
right of the main body to unlock the
transfer belt.
NOTE
• Remove two screws [1] and pull the
two transfer belt locks [2] towards
the right of the main body to unlock
the transfer belt.
When mounting the transfer belt
unit, also make sure the transfer
[1] [2] belt is completely unlocked.
A00JF2C049DA
6. Remove the rail [1] that aids in
MAINTENANCE
[1] mounting the transfer belt unit from
the tray 1.
A00JF2C050DA

7. Install the rail [1] on the main body

and secure it with the shoulder screw
[2].
NOTE
[3] • Make sure that the protrusion (at
two places) on the rail is inserted
into the dowel holes [3] (at two
places) on the main body.
[1] [2]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C005DA
8. Grip the part [1] of the transfer belt

[2] unit and slide it out until it touches
the stopper [2] of the rail.
[1]
A0P0F2C006DA
9. Change the way of holding the trans-

[1]
fer belt unit [1] as shown in the pic-
ture and remove it.
NOTE
• Do not touch the surface of the
transfer belt unit.
• Cover the transfer belt unit with
something such shade cloth to pro-
tect its surface from dust or foreign
matter.
A00JF2C053DA

NOTE
• When removing/reinstalling the
transfer belt unit, be sure not to
allow the contact [1] to hit the screw
[2] of the transfer belt unit lock.
[2]
[1] A00JF2C609DA
10. To reinstall, reverse the order of
MAINTENANCE
[2] removal.
NOTE
• Insert the transfer belt unit with
care not to allow its docking gear to
be damaged by hitting it against the
rail or associated part.
• Before reinstalling the transfer belt
unit, make sure that the two trans-
fer belt unit locks [1] are completely
unlocked. Insert the transfer belt
unit by pressing the area [2] (two
places) shown in the illustration on
the left until the transfer belt unit is
[1] fitted into its place.
[1]
[2] A00JF2C608DA
11. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter/Data] o [Life] o [New Release] and carry out new
release for the transfer belt unit.
See P.544
12. Select [Service Mode] o [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Gradation Adjust] and
carry out gradation adjust.
See P.482

4.8 2nd transfer/separation section

4.8.1 Replacing the transfer roller unit
• Transfer roller unit: Every 570,000 counts
2. Unlock the lock levers [1] of the
[2] transfer roller unit (at two places).
3. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at
two places), remove the transfer
roller unit [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C055DA
1. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at
[1] two places), mount the new transfer
roller unit [2].
2. Lock the lock levers [1] (at two
places).
NOTE
• Make sure that the levers are locked
in position both at front and rear.
[2] A00JF2C056DA
3. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [Transfer Roller Unit].
See P.544

4.9 Toner collection section

4.9.1 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port
• Area around the waste toner collecting port: Every 100,000 counts
B. Procedure
See P.51
3. Wipe the areas around the waste
toner collecting port clean of spilled
toner and dirt using a cleaning pad
dampened with water or alcohol.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C003DA
4.9.2 Replacing the waste toner box

• Waste toner box: Every 48,000 counts
[1]
2. Release the securing levers [1] for
the waste toner box, and then
remove the waste toner box [2].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C514DA

3. Mount the enclosed cap [2] included

[2]
in the new waste toner box to the
waste toner box [1] that has been
removed at the step 2.
[1]
A00JF2C507DA
4. Place the waste toner box [1] with

[2] the cap attached into the plastic bag
[2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C508DA
5. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port.

See P.51
1. Install the new waste toner box [1],
[1] and close the lower front door.
A0P0F2C513DA

4.10 Paper feed section

4.10.1 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller
• Tray 1 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
• Tray 1 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts
B. Procedure
1. Slide out the tray 1.
2. Remove the rear right cover.
See P.91
3. Remove the tray 2 paper feed unit.
See the replacement procedures 1 to 8 in “Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller.”
See P.57
4. Remove the harness from two wire
[1] [2] saddles [1] and the edge cover [2],
and disconnect the connector [3].
MAINTENANCE
[3]
A0P0F2C004DA
5. Remove four screws [1], take out the

[2] [1] tray1 paper feed unit [2] with the
upper right door open.
[1]
A00JF2C008DA


[2]
the tray 1 separation roller installa-
tion plate assy [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C563DA

the tray 1 feed roller cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2] [1]
A00JF2C010DA
8. Disconnect the connector [1], and

[2] [1] remove the harness from two wire
saddles [2].
9. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove
[2] the tray 1 paper feed clutch [4].
[4]
[3]
A0P0F2C564DA

10. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and

two bearings [3], and remove the
[3] [2] feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
A0P0F2C565DA
11. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing

[2] [3]
MAINTENANCE
[2], and remove the tray 1 feed roller
[3].
[1] A0P0F2C566DA

[1]
bearing [3], and remove the tray 1
pick-up roller [4].
[3] [2] [4]

A0P0F2C567DA
13. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

14. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy.
See P.56
15. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [1st.].
See P.544

4.10.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy

• Tray 1 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts
B. Procedure
2. Remove the manual bypass tray rear cover.
See P.92
3. Open the manual bypass tray door.
4. Opening the jam clearing cover [1],
remove two screws [2] and take out
the tray1 separation roller assy [3].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [2] [3] [2]

A00JF2C014DA
5. Remove the C-clip [1],and remove

[1] the tray 1 separation roller assy [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C568DA


B. Procedure
2. Open the lower right-side door.
3. Remove the manual bypass tray rear cover.
See P.92
5. Remove the interface cover /2.
See P.90
[2]
remove the harness from the wire
saddles [2] and the edge cover [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness,
MAINTENANCE
route it so that the harness ties [4]
are positioned as shown in the
illustration on the left.
[3] [4] [1]

A00JF2C018DA
7. Remove four screws [1], and remove

[2] the tray 2 paper feed unit [2].
[1]
A00JF2C019DA


[2] the tray 2 separation roller installa-
tion plate assy [2].
[1]
A00JF2C020DA

the tray 2 feed roller cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2] [1]
A00JF2C021DA

saddles [2].
[4]
[3]
A0P0F2C564DA


two bearings [3], and remove the
[3] [2] feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
A0P0F2C565DA

[2] [3]
MAINTENANCE
[2], and remove the tray 2 feed roller
[3].
[1] A0P0F2C566DA

[1]
bearing [3], and remove the tray 2
pick-up roller [4].
[3] [2] [4]

A0P0F2C567DA

See P.60
17. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [2nd.].
See P.544

4.10.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy

• Tray 2 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts
B. Procedure
2. Open the lower right door.
[3] [1] remove two screws [2] and take out
the tray 2 separation roller assy [3].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A00JF2C023DA

[1] the tray 2 separation roller assy [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C568DA


B. Procedure
[2] the tray 3 paper feed cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C024DA
3. Remove two C-clips [1] and two

[2] [1] [2]
bearings [2], and remove the feed
roller/pick-up roller assy [3].
[1] [3]
A00JF2C025DA

[1] [2]
the tray 3 feed roller [2].
A00JF2C026DA


the tray 3 pick-up roller [2].
[1] [2]
A00JF2C027DA

7. Remove the tray 3 separation roller.
See P.62
8. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [3rd.].
See P.544
MAINTENANCE
4.10.6 Replacing the tray 3 separation roller

• Tray 3 separation roller: Every 300,000 counts
B. Procedure
1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy.
See P.61
2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out
[1] the tray 3 [2] to the end.
[2] [1]
A00JF2C028DA

3. Disconnect two connectors [1], and

[2] [3]
remove the harness from two edge
covers [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness,
route the harness so that the har-
ness tie [3] is positioned as shown
in the illustration on the left.
[1]
A00JF2C029DA

the tray 3 paper feed unit [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
[1] [2]
A00JF2C031DA

[2] [1] the tray 3 separation roller [2].
A00JF2C032DA


B. Procedure
[1] [3] [1]
bearings [2], and remove the feed
roller/pick-up roller assy [3].
MAINTENANCE
[2] [2]
A00JF2C033DA

[1] [2]
the tray 4 feed roller [2].
A00JF2C026DA


the tray 4 pick-up roller [2].
[1] [2]
A00JF2C027DA

6. Remove the tray 4 separation roller.
See P.65
7. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [4th.].
See P.544
MAINTENANCE
4.10.8 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller
• Tray 4 separation roller: Every 300,000 counts
B. Procedure
See P.64
2. Remove the two screws [1] and pull
out the tray 4 [2] to the end.
[1]
[2] [1]
A00JF2C034DA

3. Disconnect three connectors [1], and

remove the harness from three edge
covers [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
A00JF2C035DA

MAINTENANCE
the tray 4 paper feed unit [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
A00JF2C036DA

[2] the tray 4 separation roller [2].
[1]
A00JF2C037DA

4.10.9 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up
roller
• Manual bypass tray feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
• Manual bypass tray pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts
B. Procedure
1. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.
See the replacement procedures 1 to 2 in “Manual bypass tray separation role assy.”
See P.69
[1] [1] the manual bypass tray upper cover
[2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A00JF2C038DA

[1] [2] [1] the manual bypass tray feed roller
cover [2].
A00JF2C039DA

[1] [2] [3]
bearings [2].
5. Remove the spring [3], and remove
the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4].
[4] [2] [1]

A00JF2C040DA


[1] [2], and remove the manual bypass
tray feed roller [3].
[2] [3]
A00JF2C041DA
7. Remove three C-rings [1] and two

[1] bearings [2], and remove the manual
bypass tray pick-up roller [3].
MAINTENANCE
[2] [3] [2]

A00JF2C042DA

See P.69
10. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray].
See P.544

4.10.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy

• Manual bypass tray separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts
B. Procedure
remove the two screws [2] and take
out the manual bypass tray separa-
tion roller assy [3].
[1] [2] [3] [2]

A00JF2C043DA
MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the E-ring [1], C-clip [2] and
[3] [4]
[3] [3][2] [1] the shaft [3], and remove the manual
bypass tray separation roller assy
[2]
[4].
[1] [4]
A0P0F2C571DA
A00JF2C044DA

4.11 Vertical conveyance section

4.11.1 Cleaning of the paper dust remover
• Paper dust remover: Every 100,000 counts
B. Procedure
2. Pushing the hook [1], remove the
paper dust remover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C001DA
3. Using a brush, whisk dust off the

[1]
paper dust remover [1].
A0P0F2C002DA

4.12 Registration section

4.12.1 Cleaning of the timing roller
• Timing roller: Every 100,000 counts
B. Procedure
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with
alcohol, wipe the timing roller [1]
clean of dirt.
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C001DA
4.13 Fusing section

4.13.1 Replacing the fusing unit
CAUTION
• The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing unit. You may get
burned when you come into contact with the area. Before replacement
operations, make sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since the
main and sub power switches were turned off.

• Fusing unit: Every 570,000 counts
B. Procedure
2. Loosen two screws [1] of the fusing
unit.
[1] [1]
A00JF2C057DA

3. Hold the position as shown in the left

[1] and remove the fusing unit [1].
NOTE
• When removing the fusing unit, grip
it with both hands to avoid letting
the fusing unit fall down.
A00JF2C058DA
4. Clean the IH coil unit.

[1] [2] See P.73
removal.
NOTE
MAINTENANCE
• When reinstalling the fusing unit,

be sure to press the fusing unit into
the machine until the surfaces of
the A [1] and B [2] are level with
[3] each other.
To remove unevenness between the
surfaces of the A and B, turn the
A00KF2C508DA
misfeed-clearing dial [3] while
pushing the fusing unit into the
machine.
• After ensuring that the surfaces are
level, secure the fusing unit by
tightening the two mounting screws
on the back side first, and then the
front side.
6. Select [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] o [New Release] and carry out new
release for the fusing unit.
See P.544

4.13.2 Cleaning of the IH coil unit

• IH coil unit: Every 570,000 counts (When the fusing unit is replaced)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
See P.71
[1] 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with
alcohol, wipe the IH coil unit [1] clean
of dirt.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C588DA
4.14 Duplex section

4.14.1 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers
• Duplex transport rollers: Every 100,000 counts
B. Procedure
1. Open the duplex door.
[1] alcohol, wipe the transport rollers [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C005DA

5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS

5.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items
A. Paint-locked screws
NOTE
• To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to
the screws.
• The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations
and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during
transportation.
• If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed, be sure to apply a screw
lock after the screws are tightened.
B. Red-painted screws
NOTE
• The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order
to prevent them from being removed by mistake.
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
MAINTENANCE
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one repre-
sentative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable resistors on board
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of
PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
5.1.1 CCD unit

A. Reason for prohibition
• Since the accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, no accuracy is guaranteed if
it is disassembled.
Therefore, screws that lead to the disassembly of the CCD unit must not be removed.
5.1.2 PH unit
• The laser runs inside the PH unit. Opening the cover may cause dust to enter and inter-
rupt the laser. Do no remove any screw which may disassemble the PH unit.
5.1.3 Fusing unit

• Inner part of the fusing unit and the position of the fusing belt are adjusted prior to ship-
ping. Do not remove any screw which may disassemble the fusing unit.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS
5.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list
No. Section Part name Ref. page

1 Exterior parts Upper front door P.79
2 Lower front door P.80
3 Upper front cover /1 P.80
4 Upper front cover /2 P.81
5 Right front cover P.81
6 Lower front cover P.82
7 Upper left cover P.83
8 Lower left cover P.83
9 Rear left cover P.84
10 Paper exit rear cover P.84
11 Scanner rear cover P.85
12 Scanner right cover P.85
13 Scanner upper rear cover/1 P.86
MAINTENANCE
14 Scanner upper rear cover/2 P.86
15 Scanner left cover P.87
16 Scanner upper front cover P.87
17 Scanner front cover P.88
18 USB interface cover P.88
19 Original glass P.89
20 Interface cover/1 P.90
21 Interface cover/2 P.90
22 Rear right cover/1 P.91
23 Rear right cover/2 P.91
24 Manual bypass tray rear cover P.92
25 Upper rear cover/1 P.92
26 Upper rear cover/2 P.92
27 Lower rear cover P.93
28 Front right cover P.93
29 Control panel assy P.93
30 Exit tray P.94
31 Tray 1/2 P.96
32 Tray 3/4 P.96


33 Units PH unit P.97
34 Duplex unit P.99
35 Manual bypass tray unit P.100
36 CCD unit P.101
37 Original glass moving unit P.103
38 Glass step sheet P.105
39 Exposure unit P.107
40 Hard disk P.109
41 IH coil P.111
42 Intermediate transport roller assy P.115
43 Main drive unit P.116
44 LCC drive unit P.118
45 Scanner chassis P.123
46 Boards Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) P.125
47 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) P.126
MAINTENANCE
48 Inverter board (INVB) P.127

49 PH relay board (REYB/PH) P.128
50 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) P.129
51 DC power supply (DCPU) P.130
52 Relay drive board (REDB) P.133
53 Printer control board (PRCB) P.134
54 PCI board (PCIB) P.136
55 MFP board (MFPB) P.137
56 High voltage unit/2 (HV2) P.140
57 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) P.141
58 High voltage unit/1 (HV1) P.144
59 IH power supply (IHPU) P.149
60 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) P.151
61 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) P.152
62 ADU transport motor/1 (M31) P.153
63 ADU transport motor/2 (M32) P.154
64 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) P.155
65 Bypass paper feed motor (M27) P.155
66 Scanner motor (M201) P.159
67 Original glass moving motor (M202) P.161
68 Waste toner agitating motor (M20) P.163
69 Transport motor (M25) P.164
70 Vertical transport motor (M26) P.165
71 Transfer belt motor (M1) P.166


72 Motors Color PC drum motor (M16) P.166
73 Color developing motor (M17) P.167
74 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) P.167
75 Registration motor (M2) P.168
76 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) P.170
77 Fusing motor (M30) P.171
78 Switchback motor (M33) P.171
79 Exit motor (M4) P.174
80 K PC drum motor (M18) P.175
81 K developing motor (M19) P.176
82 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6) P.176
86 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) P.179
MAINTENANCE
87 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) P.180
88 Take-up motor (M22) P.181
89 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) P.182
90 Cleaner motor (M38) P.184
91 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) P.188
92 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14) P.188
93 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) P.189
94 Toner supply motor/Y (M9) P.190
95 Toner supply motor/M (M10)
96 Toner supply motor/C (M11)
97 Toner supply motor/K (M12)
98 Clutches Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) P.193
99 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2) P.194
100 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3) P.195
101 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5) P.195
102 Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) P.195
103 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7) P.196
104 Others IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F), P.197
IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R)
105 Scanner drive cables P.199
106 Tray 3/4 lift wire P.209

5.3 Cleaning parts list

1 Processing section Transfer belt unit P.215
2 Tray 1 Tray 1 feed roller P.215
3 Tray 1 pick-up roller P.215
4 Tray 1 separation roller P.216
5 Tray 1 transport roller P.216
MAINTENANCE

18 Manual bypass tray Manual bypass tray feed roller P.221
19 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller P.222
20 Manual bypass tray separation roller P.222
21 Transport section Intermediate transport roller P.222
22 Scanner Original glass P.223
23 Scanner rails P.224
24 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) P.224
25 Lens P.224
26 CCD sensor P.225
5.4 Need lubrication parts list

1 Fusing section Fusing unit P.227

5.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure

5.5.1 Upper front door
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove
[2] the stopper [2].
[1]
A00JF2C061DA
3. Remove the C-clip [1].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C062DA
4. Slide the upper front door [1] to the

left to remove it.
[1]
A00JF2C063DA

5.5.2 Lower front door

[2] the stopper [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C007DA
3. Remove the C-clip [1].

[2] [1]
4. Slide the lower front door [2] to the
left to remove it.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C008DA
5.5.3 Upper front cover /1

2. Remove the control panel assy.
See P.93
[1]
the upper front cover /1 [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C009DA

5.5.4 Upper front cover /2

[1]
the upper front cover /2 [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C010DA
5.5.5 Right front cover

1. Remove the upper front door.
MAINTENANCE
See P.79
3. Remove the front right cover.
See P.93
the stoppers [2] of the upper front
door and the lower front door.
[1] [2]
A00JF2C073DA

[2]
the right front cover [2].
[1]
A00JF2C074DA

5.5.6 Lower front cover

1. Slide out the tray 1/2.
See P.93
3. Remove three screws [1], and
[1] remove the lower front cover [2].
NOTE
• Do not remove it in rush as it is con-
nected to the harness.
[2]
A0P0F2C011DA
4. Turn back the lower front cover [1]

MAINTENANCE
[2] [1]
and remove four screws [2].
A00JF2C076DA
5. Remove two empty display lenses

[1].
[1]
A00JF2C077DA

5.5.7 Upper left cover

2. Remove five screws [1], and remove
[1]
the upper left cover [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C012DA
5.5.8 Lower left cover
MAINTENANCE
1. Slide out the tray 1/2/3.
2. Remove the lower rear cover.
See P.93
3. Remove two covers [1].
[1]
A00JF2C079DA
4. Remove eight screws [1], and

[1] [2]
remove the lower left cover [2].
[1]
A00JF2C080DA

5.5.9 Rear left cover

1. Remove the upper left cover.
See P.83
2. Remove the upper rear cover /2.
See P.92
[2] 3. Remove three screws [1], and
remove the rear left cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C589DA
MAINTENANCE
5.5.10 Paper exit rear cover

1. Remove the rear left cover.
See P.84
[2]
the cover [2].
[1]
A00JF2C082DA
3. Remove two screws [1], and slide

[2] the paper exit rear cover [2] to
remove it.
[1]
A00JF2C083DA

5.5.11 Scanner rear cover

[1]
remove the scanner rear cover [2].
[2] A0P0F2C013DA
5.5.12 Scanner right cover

1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
MAINTENANCE
See P.85
[1] remove the scanner right cover [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C014DA

5.5.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1

1. Remove the ADF.
See P.19 of the DF-618/SP-501 service manual.
2. Remove the scanner right cover.
See P.85
[3]
3. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and
[1] three screws [2], and remove the
scanner upper rear cover/1 [3].
[2]
A0P0F2C015DA
MAINTENANCE
5.5.14 Scanner upper rear cover/2

1. Remove the scanner upper rear cover/1.
See P.86
[1] the scanner upper rear cover/2 [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C016DA

5.5.15 Scanner left cover

[1] the cover [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C017DA

[2] [1]
the scanner left cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C018DA
5.5.16 Scanner upper front cover

1. Open the ADF.
2. Remove the screw [1] and two shoul-
[2] der screws [2], and remove the scan-
ner upper front cover [3].
[1] [3]
A0P0F2C019DA

5.5.17 Scanner front cover

1. Remove the scanner upper front cover.
See P.87
2. Remove the upper front cover /1 and the upper front cover /2.
See P.80
3. Remove the scanner left cover.
See P.87
[1] the scanner front cover [2].
NOTE
• Do not remove it in rush as it is con-
nected to the harness.
[1] [2]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C020DA

[1] [2] remove the scanner front cover [2].
A0P0F2C021DA
5.5.18 USB interface cover

1. Remove the upper front cover /2.
See P.81
2. Remove the cap [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C022DA


[2] the USB interface cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C023DA
5.5.19 Original glass

See P.85
MAINTENANCE
2. Remove the scanner upper front cover.
See P.87
3. Remove each screw [1], and remove
[2] [1] the original glass fixing bracket (near
side/inmost side) [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C024DA
4. Remove the original glass [1].

[1]
A0P0F2C025DA

5.5.20 Interface cover/1

[1]
remove the interface cover/1 [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C026DA
5.5.21 Interface cover/2

1. Open the interface cover/2.
MAINTENANCE

[2] [1] the interface cover/2 [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C027DA

5.5.22 Rear right cover/1

2. Remove the ozone filter.
See P.31
[2] [1] the rear right cover/1 [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C028DA
MAINTENANCE
5.5.23 Rear right cover/2

[2] the lower right cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C029DA

[1] remove the rear right cover/2 [2].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C030DA

5.5.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover

[1] the Manual bypass tray rear cover
[2].
[2]
A0P0F2C031DA
5.5.25 Upper rear cover/1

MAINTENANCE

[1]
the upper rear cover/1 [2].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C032DA
5.5.26 Upper rear cover/2

1. Remove the toner filter.
See P.31
[1] the upper rear cover/2 [2].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C033DA

5.5.27 Lower rear cover
1. Remove six screws [1], and remove

[1] [2] the lower rear cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C034DA
5.5.28 Front right cover

MAINTENANCE
[1] remove the front right cover [2].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C035DA
5.5.29 Control panel assy

See P.81
2. Loosen two screws [1], and discon-
[1] [2] nect the connector [2].
A0P0F2C036DA


[2] [1]
the control panel assy [2].
A0P0F2C037DA
5.5.30 Exit tray (option: OT-503)

the exit tray [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
[1]
A00JF2C517DA

[1] [2] the connector cover [2].
A00JF2C518DA

3. Disconnect the connector [2] of the

[2] [1] fan unit [1].
A0P0F2C552DA
4. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and

two screws [2], and remove the fan
unit [3].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [2]
[3]
A00JF2C520DA

5.5.31 Tray 1/2

NOTE
• Tray 1 and 2 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 1.
1. Slide out the tray.

[2] the tray [2].
[1]
A00JF2C432DA
MAINTENANCE
5.5.32 Tray 3/4

NOTE
• Tray 3 and 4 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 3.
1. Slide out the tray.

2. Remove two screws [1] and six
[2]
screws [2], and remove the tray [3].
[1]
[1]
[3] [2]
A00JF2C433DA

5.5.33 PH unit
CAUTION
• Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is ON.
Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause
blindness.
• Do not disassemble or adjust the printer head unit.
Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause
blindness.

See P.83
2. Remove the lower left cover.
See P.83
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C039DA
4. Remove twelve screws [1], and

[1] [2] [1] remove the PH unit protective shield
[2].
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C038DA

5. Unplug two flat cables [1] and

[2] [1] removed if from the cable guide [2].
6. Remove the screw [3] to remove the
ground terminal [4].
NOTE
• Handle the flat cables carefully.
Remove them from the cable guide
with care while making it parallel to
the guide.
[4] [3]
A0P0F2C040DA
7. Disconnect three connectors [1], and

[1] remove the harness from the wire
saddle [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C041DA
8. Remove the screw [1] and take out

[2] [1]
the plate spring [2].
A0P0F2C042DA
9. Hold up the PH unit [1] slightly and

[1]
pull it toward to remove.
A0P0F2C043DA


11. Select [Skew adjustment] after
selecting [Service Mode] o
[Machine] o [Skew adjustment], and
input the adjustment value that is put
on the side of the replaced PH unit.
See P.477
A0P0F2C044DA
12. Execute [Skew adjustment] and [Skew adjustment reset] after selecting [Service Mode]
o [Machine] o [Skew adjustment].
5.5.34 Duplex unit
MAINTENANCE
1. Remove two screws [1] and two tabs
[1] [3] [2]
[2] to take out the duplex unit cover
[3].
A00JF2C105DA
2. Open the duplex unit door.

3. Remove three screws [1].
[1]
A00JF2C106DA

4. Open the upper right door, and

remove the tab [1].
[1]
A00JF2C107DA

[2] remove the duplex unit [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C045DA
5.5.35 Manual bypass tray unit

1. Remove the rear right cover /2.
See P.91
saddle [2] and the edge cover [3].
[3] [2] [1]

A00JF2C109DA


the manual bypass tray rear cover
[2].
[2] [1]
A00JF2C110DA
4. Open the manual bypass tray.

[1] 5. Remove the E-ring [1].
[2]
6. Remove the hinge shaft [2] from
below and remove the manual
[3] bypass tray [3].
MAINTENANCE
A00KF2C504DA
5.5.36 CCD unit

A. Removal procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
See P.89
2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove
[1] [2] [1] the CCD board protective shield [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C211DA

3. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[2] [3] [2] 4. Remove four screws [2], and remove
the CCD unit [3].
[1]
A0P0F2C046DA
B. Reinstall procedure
1. Set the CCD unit to the mounting
position at the center of the scale,
and fix it with four screws.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C047DA
2. Reinstall the original glass.

3. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
4. Carry out the [Cross Direction Adjustment]. If the specifications are not met, loosen the
CCD unit mounting screws and move the CCD unit in the sub scan direction as neces-
sary.
See P.473
NOTE
• Hold the CCD unit by hand when moving it. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar
tool to tap to move it, as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens
results.
• When CCD unit is replaced, [Scan Calibration] and [Line Mag Setting] under [Sys-
tem 2] available in Service Mode should be OFF.

5.5.37 Original glass moving unit

See P.87
2. Remove the scanner front cover.
See P.88
See P.89
4. Remove the original glass moving motor.
See P.161
5. Remove the glass step sheet.
See P.105
[2] the original glass moving unit cover
[2].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C048DA
7. Remove the C-ring [1] and the collar

[4] [2] one each, and remove the belts
[3] of both sides of the original glass
mounting unit out of the gear [4].
NOTE
• Be sure the direction of the collar
[2] to be as shown in the left illus-
[3] [4] tration when mounting it.
[1] [2] [3]
[1] [2]
[2]
A0P0F2C049DA


[3] [1] the original glass moving unit [2].
NOTE
• Use care not to lose the spacer [3]
mounted on each screw.
• Write down the type and numbers
of the spacer [3].
The same numbers of the spacer of
the same type with what is written
should be mounted when replacing
the original glass moving unit.
[2] [3]
A0P0F2C050DA
NOTE
• When replacing the original glass moving unit, clean the glass surface of the orig-
inal glass moving unit.
MAINTENANCE
Clean the inside of the glass well since it cannot be easily cleaned once it is
mounted.
1. When mounting the new original glass moving unit, take out the original glass moving
unit cover.
2. Set the spacers [1] and mount the
[1] original glass moving unit [2] to the
machine.
NOTE
• Make sure to set the spacers [1]
which are exact same type and
number as before removing the
original glass moving unit.
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C051DA
3. Tighten four screws [1] loosely and

[1] adjust the height of the original glass
moving unit.
See P.644
A0P0F2C052DA

4. Tighten four screws [1] fully.
[1]
A0P0F2C053DA
5. Follow the removing procedures in the opposite steps.

6. Perform the following setting.
[Service Mode] o [ADF] o [Read Pos Adj]
See P.593
MAINTENANCE
5.5.38 Glass step sheet
See P.87
[2] remove the glass step sheet [2].
[1]
A00JF2C398DA

1. Mount the glass step sheet [1] to the
[1] [2]
original glass moving unit [2].
NOTE
• Set the sheet [3] under the cover of
the original glass moving unit [4].
• Use care not to bend the edge of
the glass step sheet.
[4] [4]
[3] [3]
A00JF2C399DA
MAINTENANCE
[3] 2. Set the points [1] of the glass step

sheet to the edge of the scale plate
on the original glass moving unit [2],
and mount it with three screws [3].
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
A00JF2C400DA

See P.593

5.5.39 Exposure unit

See P.89
[2] the exposure unit [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C054DA
MAINTENANCE
[1] the exposure lamp [2] from the expo-
sure unit.
[2]
A0P0F2C055DA
1. Fix the exposure lamp [2] to the
[1] exposure unit with the two screws
[1].
[2]
A0P0F2C055DA

2. Tighten the exposure unit [2] with the

[2] two screws [1] temporarily.
[1]
A0P0F2C054DA
3. Move the exposure unit [1] and the

mirror unit to the end of the right.
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C056DA
4. Slide the exposure unit until it hits

the end of the scanner right frame.
5. Provide the length of 21.0 mm
between the end of the left indenta-
[1] tion [1] on the exposure unit upper
[1]
surface and the end of the scanner
right frame upper surface. When the
length is ensured, tighten the two
screws [2].
[2] [2]
A0P0F2C057DA
6. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] o [ADF] o [Read Pos Adj]
See P.593

5.5.40 Hard disk

1. Remove the upper rear cover/1.
See P.92
[1] the cover [2].
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C058DA
3. Remove three screws [1] of the hard

[1] disk drive assy.
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C059DA

[1] remove the hard disk drive assy [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C060DA


[1] the metal plate [2].
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C061DA

[1] the hard disk drive [2].
removal.
NOTE
MAINTENANCE
• When the hard disk is replaced,

select [State Confirmation] o
[Memory/HDD Adj.] o [HDD For-
mat] in Service Mode for logical for-
mat.
[2]
A0P0F2C062DA

5.5.41 IH coil (FH1)
Warning
• Tighten the screws of the lead wire terminal of the IH power supply fully to
the direction specified.
The terminal leakage may cause fire.
B A
C
MAINTENANCE
F
A00JF2C460DA
A: The harness with the longest green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF551) is installed
with the M4 screw.
B: The harness with green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF551) is installed with the
M4 screw.
C: The harness with green color is installed with the M3 screw. (d-Color MF651 only)
E: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is installed with the M4 screw.
(Either harness can be connected with terminal E and F.)
F: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is installed with the M4 screw.

See P.71
2. Remove the paper exit rear cover.
See P.84
3. Remove the IH power supply protective shield.
See the steps 1 to 12 of IH power supply removing procedure.
See P.149

4. Remove six screws [1] and remove

[1] [1]
the terminals of each harness.
[1]
A0P0F2C141DA

[1] the exit tray right cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C063DA

[1] [2] remove the exit tray front cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C064DA

[1]
A0P0F2C065DA


[2] [1] remove the harness from the har-
ness guide [2].
A0P0F2C066DA

[1] [2] the harness guide [2].
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C067DA
10. Remove the harness from two edge

[1] covers [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C068DA


[2] the ground terminal [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C069DA
12. Remove the fixture of the IH coil [1]

[1] as shown in the left illustration.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C070DA
13. Removing the harness [1], remove

[1]
the IH coil [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C071DA

5.5.42 Intermediate transport roller assy

2. Remove the rear right cover /2 and interface cover /2.
See P.91
4. Remove three screws [1], and slide
the lower right door [2] to the direc-
tion as shown in the illustration to
remove it.
[2] [1]
A00JF2C125DA
MAINTENANCE
remove the harness from four wire
[3] [2] [1]

A00JF2C126DA
6. Remove three screws [1], and slide

[2] the intermediate transport roller assy
[2] to the direction as shown in the
illustration to remove it.
[1]
A00JF2C127DA

5.5.43 Main drive unit

See P.71
2. Remove the transfer belt motor.
See P.166
3. Remove the color PC drum motor.
See P.166
4. Remove the color developing motor.
See P.167
5. Remove the K PC drum motor.
See P.175
6. Remove the K developing motor.
See P.176
7. Remove the service EEPROM board.
See P.141
8. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy.
See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure.
See P.184
9. Remove two harness guides on the high voltage unit/1.
MAINTENANCE
See the steps 12 to 15 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure.

See P.144
10. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the
[1] harness guide cover [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C072DA

A0P0F2C073DA

12. Remove the harness from eight wire

[3] [1]
saddles [1] and the edge cover [2],
and disconnect the connector [3].
[2] [1]
A00JF2C130DA
13. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove

[1]
the gear [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A00JF2C131DA

[1]
the fusing pressure retraction unit
[2].
[2]
A00JF2C132DA

[1]
the metal plate [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C074DA


[1] the main drive unit [2].
[2] [1]
A00JF2C134DA
NOTE
• When the color PC drum motor is removed to take out the main drive unit, make
sure to adjust the positioning of the PC drive gear when mounting the color PC
MAINTENANCE
drum motor.
See P.654
5.5.44 LCC drive unit

2. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy.
See P.144
3. Remove the intermediate transport roller assy.
See P.115
[2]
the lower right cover [2].
[1]
A00JF2C135DA

5. Remove two E-rings [1], the C-clip

[4] [2] [1]
[2], the bearing [3] and the gear [4].
[1] [3]
A00JF2C136DA

[1]
remove the harness from the edge
cover [1].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C075DA
7. Remove the harness from the wire

[1]
saddle [1].
A0P0F2C076DA

[1]
[2]
A0P0F2C077DA

9. Disconnect three connectors [1].

[1]
[1]
A0P0F2C078DA
10. Remove the harness from seven

[1] [2] wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C079DA

[1]
A0P0F2C080DA

12. Remove the harness from three

[2] [1]
wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2].
A0P0F2C081DA

[1]
the cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C082DA

[1]
saddles [1].
A0P0F2C083DA
15. Remove two wire saddles [1].

[1]
A0P0F2C084DA


[1] [2]
17. Remove seven screws [2], and
remove the power supply code unit
[3].
[3] [2]
A0P0F2C085DA
18. Remove seven screws [1] of the LCC

[1]
drive unit.
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C086DA
19. Remove the LCC drive unit [2] clear-

[1] [2] ing the harness [1].
A0P0F2C087DA

5.5.45 Scanner chassis

See P.87
2. Remove the scanner front cover.
See P.88
See P.85
See P.85
5. Remove the scanner upper rear cover /1 and the scanner upper rear cover /2.
See P.86
6. Remove the upper rear cover /1 and the upper rear cover /2.
See P.92
See P.89
8. Disconnect two connectors [1] on the
scanner relay board.
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C088DA

[1] remove the harness from seven wire
[3] [3] [2]

A0P0F2C089DA


[2]
A0P0F2C090DA
11. Remove the cable holder [1].

MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C091DA
12. Disconnect two connectors [1] and

[3] the USB connector [2].
13. Remove the harness from five wire
saddles [3].
[2] [1] [3]

A0P0F2C092DA


[1]
scanner chassis [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C093DA
5.5.46 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)

See P.86
2. Disconnect all connectors on the
scanner relay board.
A0P0F2C094DA


[2] the scanner relay board [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C095DA
5.5.47 Original glass position control board (OGPCB)

See P.85
MAINTENANCE
2. Disconnect three connectors [1].

[1]
A0P0F2C096DA
3. Remove two PWB support [1], and

[2] remove the original glass position
control board [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C097DA

5.5.48 Inverter board (INVB)

See P.92
2. Disconnect nine connectors [1].
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove the harnesses from four
wire saddles [2], two edge covers [3]
and the harness holder [4].
[4] [2] [1]

A0P0F2C098DA

[2] the Inverter board assy [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C099DA
5. Remove two screws [1] and two

[2] PWB supports [2], and remove the
inverter board [3].
[3] [1]
A0P0F2C100DA

5.5.49 PH relay board (REYB/PH)

See P.83
See P.83
[1]
A0P0F2C039DA
MAINTENANCE
4. Remove twelve screws [1], and

[1] [2] [1] remove the PH unit protective shield
[2].
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C038DA
5. Remove all the connectors and flat

[1] cables on the PH relay board [1].
A0P0F2C101DA


[1] the PH relay board [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C102DA
5.5.50 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

See P.93
MAINTENANCE
See P.91
[1] [4] the metal plate [2].
remove the paper feed/transport
drive board protective shield [4].
[3]
A00JF2C166DA
5. Remove all the connectors and flat

[1] cables on the paper feed/transport
drive board [1].
A0P0F2C103DA

6. Remove two wire saddles [1].

[1] [2] [1] [3] 7. Remove six screws [2], and remove
the paper feed/transport drive board
[3].
[2]
A0P0F2C104DA
5.5.51 DC power supply (DCPU)

See P.93
MAINTENANCE

See P.91
See P.83
[1] [4] the metal plate [2].
remove the paper feed/transport
drive board protective shield [4].
[3]
A00JF2C166DA

saddle [2].
[1] [2]
A00JF2C167DA

7. Remove thirteen screws [1], and

[2] [1] remove the DC power supply protec-
tive shield/1 [2].
[1]
[1]
A0P0F2C105DA
8. Disconnect the connector [1] of the

[1] [2] power supply cooling fan motor.
saddle [2].
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C106DA

[2] [1] the DC power supply protective
shield/2 [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C107DA
11. Remove the harness from four wire

[2] saddles [1] and the edge cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C108DA


[1]
A0P0F2C109DA
13. Remove all the connectors on the

DC power supply [1].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C110DA
14. Remove five screws [1].

[1]
[1]
A0P0F2C111DA

15. Clearing the harness, hold up the

[1] DC power supply [1] to remove it.
A0P0F2C112DA
5.5.52 Relay drive board (REDB)

1. Remove the DC power supply.
See P.130
MAINTENANCE
2. Remove all the connectors from the
[1] relay drive board [1].
NOTE
• For reinstallation, position the con-
nectors so that the harness hangs
down from the connectors.
A0P0F2C113DA
3. Remove four PWB supports [1], and

[1] [2] remove the relay drive board [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C114DA

5.5.53 Printer control board (PRCB)

1. Remove the upper rear cover /1 and the upper rear cover /2.
See P.92
2. Remove fifteen screws [1], and
[2] [1] remove the printer control board pro-
tective shield [2].
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C115DA
3. Remove the harness from twelve

[1] wire saddles [1] and three edge cov-
MAINTENANCE
ers [2].
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C116DA

[1] printer control board [1].
A0P0F2C117DA

5. Remove eight screws [1], and

[1] remove the printer control board [2].
removal.
NOTE
• When the printer control board is to
be replaced, rewriting the firmware
to the latest one.
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C118DA
5.5.54 How to open PWB box/1

See P.92
MAINTENANCE
See P.91
3. Remove nine screws [1], and move
[1] [2] the PWB box/1 [2] up to remove it.
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C119DA
4. Open the PWB box/1 [1] to the direc-

[1] tion shown on the left and set two fin-
gers [2] to the hook [3] on the frame
[2] [3] of the main unit.
A0P0F2C120DA

5.5.55 PCI board (PCIB)

See P.91
[1] the cover [2].
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C058DA
3. Slide out the PCI board assy [1].

[1]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C121DA

[2] [1] the PCI board [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C122DA

5.5.56 MFP board (MFPB)

1. Remove the hard disk drive assy.
See P.109
2. Remove the PCI board assy.
See P.136
3. Remove eleven screws [1], and
[1] [2] [1] remove the MFP board protective
shield [2].
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C123DA
MAINTENANCE
4. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the
[1] [2] NVRAM board assy [2] on the MFP
board.
[1]
A0P0F2C124DA
5. Unlock two lock levers [1], and

[1] [2] [1] remove the memory board [2] on the
MFP board.
A0P0F2C125DA

6. Remove six screws [1] of the MFP

control board cooling fan motor assy.
[1] [1]
[1]
A0P0F2C126DA

MAINTENANCE
[2] remove the MFP control board cool-

ing fan motor assy [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C127DA

[2] [3] the USB connector [2].
9. Remove the harnesses from three
wire saddles [3].
[1] [3]
A0P0F2C128DA

10. Remove six bolts [1] and six screws

[2] [1] [2] [3] [2], and remove the port bracket [3].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C129DA
11. Disconnect six connectors [1] and

[1] two flat cables [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C130DA
12. Remove ten screws [1], and remove

[1] the MFP board [2].
removal.
NOTE
• When the MFP board is to be
replaced, rewriting the firmware to
the latest one.
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C131DA

5.5.57 How to open PWB box/2

See P.92
See P.91
[2] [3] USB connector [2].
4. Remove the harnesses from four
wire saddles [3].
[1]
A0P0F2C132DA
MAINTENANCE
5. Remove five screws [1] and open the

[1] PWB box/2 [2].
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C133DA
5.5.58 High voltage unit/2 (HV2)

1. Open the PWB box/2.
See P.140
high voltage unit/2 [1].
[1]
A00JF2C206DA


[2] [1] [2] two harness guides [2].
[1]
A00JF2C207DA
4. Remove five screws [1] and four tap-

[3] [1]
ping screws [2], and remove the high
voltage unit/2 [3].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [2] [1]
A00JF2C208DA
5.5.59 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)

See P.140
2. Remove two screws [1] and the con-
[1] [2] nector [2], and take out the service
EEPROM board [3].
[3]
A00JF2C209DA

NOTE
After replacing the service EEPROM board, all parts shown below are required to be
replaced with new ones.
• Imaging unit Y/M/C/K
• Toner cartridge Y/M/C/K
• Waste toner box
• Image transfer belt
• Fusing unit
• Ozone filter
NOTE
• When service EEPROM is replaced, data of all adjustment settings stored in
EEPROM disappear and the adjustment settings are returned to the default ones.
After replacing the service EEPROM board, take the following steps to make read-
justments.
4. Open the upper front door and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power
switch.
5. Enter the Service Mode. Make individual adjustments shown in the following table in
MAINTENANCE
the order listed, using the machine maintenance list and the adjustment lists that were
output at the time of main body installation and maintenance.
Order Items that require readjustment in the Service mode Ref. page
1 Machine Skew adjustment Skew adjustment P.477
2 LD adjustment LD delay adjust. P.478
3 Color Registration Adjustment P.476
4 Imaging Process TCR Level Setting P.485
5 Adjustment Background Voltage Margin P.485
6 D Max Density P.484
7 Development AC Voltage Choice P.490

NOTE
• After replacing the service EEPROM board, be sure to make the above listed
adjustments before the first warm-up is made.
6. Turn OFF the main power switch and sub power switch.
7. Close the upper front door and turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
Check to see that warm-up and image stabilization operations are completed normally.
8. Enter the Service mode again. Make individual adjustments shown in the following
table in the order listed, using the machine management list and the adjustment lists
that were output at the time of main body installation and maintenance.
Order Items that require readjustment in the Service mode Ref. page
1 Machine LD adjustment LD lightness balance adjust. P.479
2 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment P.480
3 Finisher FS-FN adjustment P.597
4 Machine Printer Resist Loop P.475
5 Imaging Process Thick Paper Density Adjustment P.488
6 Adjustment Monochrome Density Adjustment P.490
7 Machine Fusing Temperature P.462
MAINTENANCE
8 Imaging Process Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning
P.484
Adjustment
9 Machine Thick Paper Mode P.480
10 Imaging Process Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias
P.483
Adjustment
11 System 1 Charging CH cleaning Cleaning P.528
12 Machine Printer Area Paper Feed Direction Adj. P.469
13 In this step, pull out the tray 3 and 4 and slide them in again.
14 Machine Fusing Transport Speed P.463
15 Color alignment Adjustment P.461
16 Printer Area Centering P.466
Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) P.468
Leading Edge Adjustment P.465
Leading Edge Adj.
P.467
(Duplex Side 2)
17 Imaging Process Transfer Output Fine Secondary transfer adj. P.486
18 Adjustment Adjustment Primary transfer adj. P.487
19 Paper separation adjustment P.489

5.5.60 High voltage unit/1 (HV1)

1. Remove the upper rear cove /1, upper rear cover /2 and lower rear cover.
See P.92
2. Remove the rear right cover/1, rear right cover/2, interface cover/1 and interface cover/
2.
See P.90
3. Remove the DC power supply.
See P.130
See P.140
5. Remove fifteen connectors [1] and
[1] [2] the flat cable [2] on the paper feed/
transport drive board.
MAINTENANCE
[1] [1] [1] [1]

A0P0F2C134DA
6. Remove the harness from three wire

[2] [1] saddles [1] and three edge covers
[2].
[2]
A0P0F2C135DA
7. Remove the harness from three wire

[1]
A0P0F2C136DA

8. Disconnect eight connectors [1].

[1]
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C137DA

[2] [1] the paper feed/transport drive board
assy [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C138DA
10. Remove five cable holders [1] and

[1] clear the flat cables [2].
[2]
A00JF2C215DA

11. Remove four screws [1] and take out

the reinforcing plate [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
A00JF2C216DA
12. Disconnect four connectors [2] on

MAINTENANCE
[1] the high voltage unit/1 [1].
[2]
A00JF2C217DA
13. Disconnect four connectors [1].

[1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the connectors,
hang the harness [2] on the hook.
Be sure to take the slack out of the
harness.
[2] A00JF2C218DA

[1]
the harness guide [2].
[2]
A00JF2C219DA
15. Disconnect four connectors [1].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C246DA

[1]
remove the harness guide [2].
[2]
A00JF2C220DA
17. Disconnect two connectors [2] on the

[1]
high voltage unit/1 [1].
[2]
A0P0F2C521DA

18. Remove nine screws [1].
[1]
A00JF2C222DA
19. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the

[2] high voltage unit/1 [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C223DA

5.5.61 IH power supply (IHPU)
Warning
• Tighten the screws of the lead wire terminal of the IH power supply fully to
the direction specified.
The terminal leakage may cause fire.
B A
C
MAINTENANCE
F
A00JF2C460DA
A: The harness with the longest green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF5521) is installed
with the M4 screw.
B: The harness with green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF551) is installed with the
M4 screw.
E: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is installed with the M4 screw.
F: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is installed with the M4 screw.

See P.80
See P.81
3. Remove the right front cover.
See P.81


[1]
A0P0F2C139DA

[2] [1] the IH power supply protective shield
[2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C140DA
6. Remove six screws [1] and remove

[1] [1]
the terminals of each harness.
[1]
A0P0F2C141DA

[1]
[1]
A0P0F2C142DA


[1] the IH power supply [2].
[1] [1] [2] [1]

A0P0F2C143DA
5.5.62 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)

1. Remove the tray1 and tray2.
MAINTENANCE
See P.96
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and
[3] [2] [3] remove the harness from the edge
cover [2].
3. Remove two screws [3], take out the
tray1 lift-up motor assy [4] and turn it
around.
[4] [1]
A00JF2C310DA
[3]
[1]
paper size detect board/1 assy [3].
[2] [2]
A00JF2C242DA

6. Remove the lever [1], and remove

[1]
the paper size detect board/1 [2].
[2]
A00JF2C243DA
5.5.63 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)

1. Remove the tray1 and tray 2.
See P.96
MAINTENANCE

cover [2].
around.
[4] [1]
A00JF2C604DA

[3] [1] 5. Unhook the tabs [2] and remove the
paper size detect board/2 assy [3].
[2] [2]
A00JF2C245DA

6. Remove the lever [1], and remove

[1]
the paper size detect board/2 [2].
[2]
A00JF2C243DA
5.5.64 ADU transport motor/1 (M31)

1. Remove the duplex unit.
See P.99
MAINTENANCE
[3] remove the harness from two wire
[2] [1]
A00JF2C247DA

[2] remove the ADU transport motor/1
assy [2].
[1]
A00JF2C248DA


[2] the ADU transport motor/1 [2].
[1]
A00JF2C249DA
5.5.65 ADU transport motor/2 (M32)

1. Remove the duplex unit.
See P.99
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C250DA

[2] the ADU transport motor/2 assy [2].
[1]
A00JF2C251DA


[2] the ADU transport motor/2 [2].
[1]
A00JF2C252DA
5.5.66 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27)
1. Remove the manual bypass tray unit.
See P.100
MAINTENANCE
[1]
the manual bypass tray upper cover
[2].
[2]
A00JF2C253DA

[1] remove the metal plate [2].
[1] [2]
A00JF2C256DA


[1]
[1]
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2C257DA
<1> NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness and
connectors which were removed in
step 4, route the harnesses follow-
ing the procedure shown in the
illustrations on the left.
<1> Fit the harness into the place as

shown in the illustration on the left.
<2>
<2> Insert the two connectors and route
the harness as shown in the illustra-
tion on the left.
<3> Secure the harness to the harness
guide.
<3>
A00JF2C600DA


[2]
[1]
A00JF2C258DA
6. Remove six screws [1].

[1]
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C259DA
7. Pull the manual bypass tray drive

assy [1] to the direction shown as the
illustration to remove it.
NOTE
• Do no pull forcedly as the harness
is connected.
[1]
A00JF2C260DA

8. Remove the screw [1] and the con-

[1] [2] [3]
nector [2], and take out the bypass
tray up down motor [3].
A00JF2C261DA

[2]
MAINTENANCE
[1] [3]
A00JF2C262DA

[2] the bypass paper feed motor [2].
[1]
A00JF2C263DA

5.5.67 Scanner motor (M201)

See P.85
2. Remove the scanner upper rear cover /1.
See P.86
3. Remove the connector [1] and take
[4] [1] out the harnesses from two wire sad-
dles [2].
4. Then remove the screw [3] to take
out the 15 degree sensor assy [4].
[2] [3]
A0P0F2C144DA
MAINTENANCE
5. Remove the harness from three
[1]
edge covers [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C145DA

[1] [2] the ADF table [2].
[1]
[1]
A0P0F2C146DA


[2]
remove three screws [2].
[1]
A0P
0F2C1
DA
7
4
8. Remove the spring [1] and the belt

[2] [2], and remove the scanner motor
assy [3].
MAINTENANCE
[3] [1]
A0P0F2C148DA

[2] the scanner motor [2].
[1]
A00JF2C269DA

1. Temporarily secure the scanner
[2] [1] motor assy [1] with three screws [2].
[2] [2]
A00JF3C538DA
2. With the scanner drive gear set

[1] [4] [3] screw [1] located on the right-hand
side as shown on the left, slide the
scanner motor assy [2] to the left and
MAINTENANCE
check that it is returned to the origi-
nal position by the tension of the
spring [3].
Perform this step three times.
3. Turn the pulley and make sure that
the belt does not ride up on the pul-
ley teeth.
[4] [2] [4]
4. Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the
A00JF3C526DA
scanner motor assy into position.
5.5.68 Original glass moving motor (M202)

See P.85
2. Remove the scanner upper rear cover /1 and scanner upper rear cover /2.
See P.86
[1]
A0P0F2C149DA

4. Remove the harness from the edge

cover [1] and four wire saddles [2].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C150DA

[1] 6. Remove the harness from two wire
saddles [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C151DA

[2] the bracket [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C152DA

[1] the original glass moving motor assy
[2].
[2]
A0P0F2C153DA


[2] the original glass moving motor [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C154DA
5.5.69 Waste toner agitating motor (M20)

1. Remove the PH relay board.
MAINTENANCE
See P.128
[1] cover [1].
A0P0F2C155DA
3. Remove two screws [2] of the

[2] [1] bracket [1].
[2]
A0P0F2C156DA

4. Remove the wire saddle [1], connec-

[4] [1] tor [2] and two screws [3], and take
out the waste toner agitating motor
[4].
[3] [2]
A0P0F2C157DA
5.5.70 Transport motor (M25)

See P.93
MAINTENANCE
2. Remove the rear right cover /2 and interface cover /2.

See P.91
[1] the transport motor cover [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C158DA
4. Remove four screws [1] and the con-

[1] [3] nector [2], and remove the transport
motor [3].
[2]
A0P0F2C159DA

5.5.71 Vertical transport motor (M26)

See P.93
[2] remove the harness from two wire
saddles [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C160DA

[1] the vertical transport motor assy [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A00JF2C278DA

[2]
the vertical transport motor [2].
[1] A00JF2C279DA

5.5.72 Transfer belt motor (M1)

See P.140
[2] nector [2], and take out the transfer
belt motor [3].
[1] [3]
A00JF2C280DA

MAINTENANCE
5.5.73 Color PC drum motor (M16)

See P.140
[1]
nector [2], and take out the color PC
drum motor [3].
removal.
NOTE
• Adjust the positioning of the PC
drive gear when mounting the color
PC drum motor.
See P.654
[3] [2]
A00JF2C281DA

5.5.74 Color developing motor (M17)

See P.140
[2] [3] nector [2], and take out the color
developing motor [3].
[1]
A0P0F2C161DA
MAINTENANCE
5.5.75 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)
intermediate transport unit [2].
[1] [1]
[2]
A00JF2C283DA
3. Remove five screws [1] and the con-

[1] [2]
nector [2], and take out the 2nd
image transfer pressure retraction
drive assy [3].
[1] [3]
A00JF2C284DA

4. Remove the 2nd image transfer

[1] pressure retraction motor assy [1].
A00JF2C285DA

[2] the 2nd image transfer pressure
retraction motor [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C286DA
5.5.76 Registration motor (M2)

intermediate transport unit [2].
[1] [1]
[2]
A00JF2C283DA

3. Disconnect the connector [1],

[1] [2]
saddle [2].
4. Remove two screws [3] and take out
the pressure welding alienation sen-
sor assy [4].
[4] [3]
A00JF2C287DA
5. Remove two screws [1] and the

[1] [2]
spring [2], and remove the gear
cover [3].
NOTE
• Make sure not to lose the spring.
MAINTENANCE
[3] [1]
A00JF2C288DA
6. Remove two E-rings [1], the collar [2]

[4] [1]
and the rotating knob [3], and
remove two gears [4].
[1] [2] [3]

A00JF2C289DA
7. Remove two screws [1], and take out

[2]
the shaft metal plate [2].
[1]
A00JF2C290DA


[1] the registration motor [2].
[2]
A00JF2C291DA
5.5.77 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)

1. Remove the rear right cover/1.
MAINTENANCE
See P.91
See P.140
the fusing pressure retraction motor
[3].
[1]
[2]
A00JF2C292DA

5.5.78 Fusing motor (M30)

See P.85
See P.140
[3] [2] nector [2], and remove the fusing
motor [3].
[1]
A0P0F2C162DA
MAINTENANCE
5.5.79 Switchback motor (M33)

See P.140
saddle [1].
[1]
A0P0F2C163DA

[1]
[2]
A0P0F2C164DA


[2]
the duct [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C165DA

[2] remove the harness from the edge
cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C166DA

[1] [2]
saddle [1], and disconnect the con-
nector [2].
A0P0F2C167DA

A0P0F2C168DA


the fan motor assy /1 [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
A0P0F2C169DA
MAINTENANCE
[2] [1] remove the switchback motor assy
[2].
[1]
A0P0F2C170DA

[2]
the switchback motor [2].
[1]
A00JF2C301DA

5.5.80 Exit motor (M4)

1. Remove the fan motor assy /1.
See the steps 1 to 8 of fusing motor removing procedure.
See P.171
saddle [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C171DA

MAINTENANCE
[1] the exit motor assy [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C172DA

[2]
the exit motor [2].
[1]
A00JF2C304DA

5.5.81 K PC drum motor (M18)

1. Take out the reinforcing plate.
See P.144
A0P0F2C168DA
MAINTENANCE
[4] [2] [3] remove the harness from two wire
the fan motor assy /2 [5].
[5] [1]
A0P0F2C173DA

[3] [2] nector [2], and remove the K PC
drum motor [3].
[1]
A0P0F2C174DA

5.5.82 K developing motor (M19)

See the steps 1 to 5 of K PC drum motor removing procedure.
See P.175
[1] nector [2], and remove the K devel-
oping motor [3].
[2] [3]
A00JF2C308DA

MAINTENANCE
5.5.83 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)

See P.96
cover [2].
around.
[4] [1]
A00JF2C310DA
4. Disconnect five connectors [1].

[1] 5. Remove the harness from the edge
cover [2] and three wire saddles [3],
and remove the tray1 lift-up motor
assy [4].
[4] [3] [2]

A00JF2C311DA


[1] [2]
remove the tray1 lift-up motor [2].
A00JF2C312DA

See P.96
MAINTENANCE
cover [2].
around.
[4] [1]
A00JF2C604DA
4. Disconnect five connectors [1].

[1] 5. Remove the harness from the edge
cover [2] and three wire saddles [3],
and remove the tray2 lift-up motor
assy [4].
[4] [3] [2]

A00JF2C313DA


[1] [2]
remove the tray 2 lift-up motor [2].
A00JF2C312DA

1. Remove the LCC drive unit.
See P.118
MAINTENANCE

[1] nector [2], and remove the tray 3 lift-
up motor [3].
[2] [3]
A0P0F2C175DA

See P.118
[1] nector [2], and take out the tray 4 lift-
up motor [3].
[2] [3]
A0P0F2C176DA

5.5.87 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)

See P.144
saddles [1].
A0P0F2C177DA
MAINTENANCE
[2] [1] the tray1 vertical transport motor
assy [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C178DA

the tray1 vertical transport motor [2].
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C179DA

5.5.88 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)

See P.144
See P.118
[1] [3] [2] nector [2].
saddle [3], and remove the tray 2
vertical transport motor assy [4].
[4] [1]
A0P0F2C180DA
MAINTENANCE

[1] the tray2 vertical transport motor [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C181DA

5.5.89 Take-up motor (M22)

1. Slide out tray 1/2.
2. Remove the reinforcing plate.
See P.144
See the steps 1 to 6 of tray 1 feed roller replacement procedure.
See P.53
See P.57
5. Remove four screws [1].
[1]
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C182DA

[1]
A00JF2C323DA
7. Remove the E-ring [1], the collar [2],

[1] [4] the belt [3] and the gear [4].
[3] [2] A00JF2C324DA


[2]
the take-up motor [2].
[1]
A00JF2C325DA
5.5.90 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)

1. Remove the drum unit/K.
See P.36
MAINTENANCE
2. Remove the developing unit/K.

See P.40
3. Remove the sensor unit.
See the steps 1 to 5 of IDC registration sensor/F and IDC registration sensor/R remov-
ing procedure.
See P.197
[1] remove the developing unit/K base
plate [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1] A0P0F2C591DA

5. Remove the harnesses from the wire

[3] [3]
[2]
[1]
A0P0F2C590DA

[1] [1] [1]
remove the charge cleaning motor/K
assy.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C592DA

[1]
the rail assy [2].
[1]
[2] A0P0F2C593DA


[2]
the charge cleaning motor/K [2].
[1]
[1]
A0P0F2C594DA
5.5.91 Cleaner motor (M38)

See the steps 1 to 8 of switch back motor removing procedure.
MAINTENANCE
See P.171
2. Remove the paper exit rear cover.
See P.84
[1] remove the harness from three wire
saddles [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C183DA

[1] [2] remove the fan motor assy /3 [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C184DA


[2] [1] 6. Remove the harness from six wire
saddles [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C186DA
7. Remove four screws [1], and take out

[2] the fan motor assy/4 [2] as clearing
the harness.
MAINTENANCE
[1] [1]
A0P0F2C187DA
8. Remove five connectors [2] on the

[1] [2] high voltage unit/2 [1].
[2]
A0P0F2C188DA

[2] [1]
remove the harness guide [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C189DA


[1]
A0P0F2C190DA

[1] saddles [1].
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C191DA
12. Remove five screws [1] and four tap-

[1] [1] [3] [1] ping screws [2], and remove the high
voltage unit/2 [3].
[1] [2] [1]

A00JF2C340DA


[1] [2] [1] the metal plate [2].
[1] [1]
A00JF2C607DA
14. Close the PWB box/2 once and

[1]
remove two screws [1] of the cleaner
motor.
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2C342DA
15. Open the PWB box/2 again, remove

[3] two screws [1] and the connector [2],
and take out the cleaner motor [3].
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C192DA

5.5.92 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)

See P.184
[2] [3] nector [2], and take out the 1st image
transfer pressure retraction motor
[3].
[1]
A0P0F2C193DA

MAINTENANCE
5.5.93 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14).

See the steps 1to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure.
See P.184
[2]
A0P0F2C194DA
3. Clear the harness.

[3]
remove the harness from two wire
saddles [1].
remove the toner cartridge motor C/
K Assy [4].
[2] [1] [4]

A0P0F2C195DA


[1]
the toner cartridge motor C/K [2].
[2]
A00JF2C346DA
5.5.94 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13)

1. Remove the high voltage unit/2 Assy.
MAINTENANCE
See P.184
[2] remove three screws [2], then
remove the toner cartridge motor Y/
M Assy[3].
[1] [3]
A0P0F2C196DA

[2]
saddle [1].
the toner cartridge motor Y/M [3].
[3] [1]
A00JF2C348DA

5.5.95 Toner supply motor/Y (M9), toner supply motor/M (M10),

toner supply motor/C (M11), toner supply motor/K (M12)
1. Remove the upper front door.
See P.79
See P.83
3. Remove the toner cartridges (C,M,Y,K).
See P.44
4. Open the lower front door and take out the all imaging units.
See P.33
NOTE
• After the imaging unit has been removed from the main body wrap it in the light
shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. DO NOT leave the imaging unit
exposed to light for a extended of time as it will become damaged.

See P.93
[2]
MAINTENANCE
remove the exit tray front cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C197DA

[1] the connector cover [2].
[2]
A00JF2C349DA


remove the harness from four wire
saddles [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
A0P0F2C198DA
MAINTENANCE
[1] the hinge convex part [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C199DA

[1]
remove the toner cartridge inserting
port cover/Y,M,C [2].
[2]
A00JF2C352DA

11. Remove nine screws [1], and pull the

[2]
front cover [2] forward slowly.
NOTE
• Use care not to mistake in the kind
of the screws.
[1]
A00JF2C353DA

[1]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C200DA

[3]
the front door switch assy[2], then
saddle [3].
[2]
A00JF2C357DA

[1]
the toner hopper units assy [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C522DA


remove four screws [2], then remove
the toner hopper unit /Y [3].
[2]
[3] [1] [2]

A00JF2C359DA
16. Remove two screws [1] and discon-

[1] [2] nect the connector [2], and remove
the toner supply motor /Y [3].
17. Repeat the steps 15 to 16 and take
out the toner supply motor/Y, M, C in
MAINTENANCE
order.
[3]
A00JF2C360DA
5.5.96 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)

See the steps 1 to 6 of tray 1 paper feed roller replacement procedure.
See P.53
[3] [1] cover [1], the harness holder [2], and
unplug the connector [3].
[2]
A00JF2C456DA


removal.
NOTE
• When mounting the tray 1 paper
feed clutch, set the convex part of
the stopper into the concave part of
the tray 1 paper feed clutch.
[1]
A00JF2C457DA
5.5.97 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2)

See the steps 1 to 6 of tray2 paper feed roller replacement procedure.
See P.57
MAINTENANCE

[2] saddle [1], and disconnect the con-
nector [2].
[1]
A00JF2C458DA

removal.
NOTE
the tray 2 paper feed clutch.
[1]
A00JF2C459DA

5.5.98 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)

See P.118
[1] the horizontal transport clutch [2].
removal.
NOTE
• When mounting the horizontal
transport clutch, set the convex
part of the stopper into the concave
part of the horizontal transport
clutch.
[2]
A0P0F2C201DA
5.5.99 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6)
MAINTENANCE
[1] the tray 3 [2] to the end.
[2] [1]
A00JF2C028DA
3. Remove the harness from two edge

[6] [4] [3] [1]
covers [1], and disconnect the con-
nector [2].
the tray 3 paper feed clutch [4].
the tray 3 transport clutch [6].
removal.
NOTE
[5] [1] [2] feed clutch/tray 3 transport clutch,
A00JF2C364DA
set the convex part of the stopper
into the concave part of the clutch.

5.5.100 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7)

the tray 4 [2] to the end.
[1]
[2] [1]
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2C034DA

[4] [1] cover [1], and disconnect the con-
nector [2].
the tray 4 paper feed clutch [4].
removal.
NOTE
[2] [3] the tray 4 paper feed clutch.
A0P0F2C202DA

5.5.101 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F), IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R).

2. Remove the image transfer entrance guide.
See the steps 1 to 4 of image transfer belt unit removing procedure.
See P.46
3. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the
[1] connector cover [2].
[2]
A00JF2C365DA
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C366DA

the sensor unit [2].
[1] [2] [1]

A00JF2C367DA

6. Remove seven screws [1] and the

[2] [3] spring [2], and remove the sensor
cover [3].
[1]
A00JF2C368DA
7. Remove two screws [1], and discon-

[1] [2] nect the connector [2], then remove
the IDC registration sensor/F [3].
MAINTENANCE
[3]
A00JF2C369DA
8. Remove two screws [1], and discon-

[1] [2]
nect the connector [2], then remove
IDC registration sensor/R [3].
[3]
A00JF2C370DA

5.5.102 Scanner drive cables

1. Remove the scanner chassis.
See P.123
2. Remove the exposure unit.
See P.107
3. Remove the scanner motor.
See P.159
4. Remove the original glass moving unit.
See P.103
5. Remove the USB board assy.
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C211DA

[1]
A0P0F2C203DA
8. Remove the hook side spring [1] of

[1]
the scanner drive cables.
A00JF2C435DA

9. Remove the bead side [1] of the

scanner drive cables from the adjust-
ment anchor.
[1]
[1]
A0P0F2C204DA
10. Remove the C-ring [1] and bearing

MAINTENANCE
[2] [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C205DA

[2] [1] the scanner drive gear [2].
12. Remove the bearing [3].
[3]
A0PF2C206DA

13. Remove the shaft [1] and pulleys [2].

[2] [1]
A0P0F2C207DA
[2] 14. Remove the screw [1] one each and

take out the two pulleys [2] from the
shaft.
15. Remove the scanner drive cables [3]
from each pulley [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
A0P0F2C561DA

B. reinstall procedure
(1) Overall figure
A00JF2C441DA
MAINTENANCE
(2) Winding of the scanner drive cables
NOTE
• The scanner drive cable differs in type between the front (silver) and the rear
(black), which are colored differently.
<Front>
[2] [1] 1. Set the round bead [1] of the scan-
ner drive cable (silver) to the pulley
[2] at the position as shown in the
B
illustration.
NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly
rests in the slit in the pulley.
A00JF2C550DA
2. Twist the A side scanner drive cable

around the pulley [1] starting from
the front groove in anticlockwise
direction five times.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable
rides on the other.
[1]
A00JF2C551DA

3. Twist the B side scanner drive cable

the rear groove in clockwise direction
five times.
NOTE
rides on the other.
[1]
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2C552DA
4. Apply the tape to fix the scanner

drive cable to the pulley [1].
[1]
A00JF2C553DA
<Rear>
[2] [1] 5. Set the round bead [1] of the scan-
ner drive cable (black) to the pulley
[2] at the position as shown in the
B illustration.
NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly
rests in the slit in the pulley.
A
A00JF2C547DA

6. Twist the B side scanner drive cable

the rear groove in anticlockwise
direction five times.
NOTE
rides on the other.
[1]
A00JF2C548DA
7. Twist the A side scanner drive cable

the front groove in clockwise direc-
tion five times.
NOTE
MAINTENANCE

rides on the other.
[1]
A00JF2C549DA
8. Apply the tape to fix the scanner

drive cable to the pulley [1].
[1]
A00JF2C554DA

9. Put the front/rear pulleys [1] into the

shaft [2], and fix them with one screw
each [3].
NOTE
• Set the pulley at the direction as
shown in the illustration.
• Fix the pulley at the position as
shown in the illustration.
• Apply the screw lock on the screw.
[2] [1] [2] [1]
[3] [3]
A00JF2C442DA
10. Install the C-ring [1] and the bearing
MAINTENANCE
[2] [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C205DA
11. Install the bearing [3].

[2] [1] 12. Install the gear [2] with the screw [1].
NOTE
• Apply the screw lock on the screw.
[3]
A0PF2C206DA

<Front>
[1]
13. Place the fixed bead side of the
scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley
[2] B [2], and place the fixed bead to the
adjustment anchor [3].
NOTE
• Make sure to hook the scanner
drive cable to the outside groove of
the pulley B.
[3]
A00JF2C452DA
<Rear>
[1]
14. Place the fixed bead side of the
scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley
[2] D [2], and place the fixed bead to the
adjustment anchor [3].
MAINTENANCE
[3]
A00JF2C461DA
<Rear>
15. Place the hook side of the scanner
drive cable [1] to the pulley C [2].
[2]
[1]
A00JF2C448DA
16. Place the scanner drive cable to the

pulley D [2] via the pulley C [1].
[1] NOTE
the pulley D [2].
[2]
A00JF2C449DA

[1] 17. Put the scanner drive cable into the

scanner frame hole [2] via the pulley
D [1].
[2]
A00JF2C450DA
18. Hook the end of the spring [1] to the

wire and the other end to the hook
[2] on the scanner left frame.
[2]
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C601DA
<Front>
19. Place the hook side of the scanner
drive cable [1] to the pulley A [2].
[2]
[1]
A00JF2C445DA

20. Place the scanner drive cable to the

pulley B [2] via the pulley A [1].
[2] NOTE
the pulley B [2].
[1]
A00JF2C446DA
21. Put the scanner drive cable into the

scanner frame hole [2] via the pulley
B [1].
MAINTENANCE
[1]
[2] A00JF2C447DA
22. Remove the end of the spring [1]

from the hook. Hook the end of the
spring to the wire coming from the
front.
[1]
A00JF2C462DA
23. Remove the tape that fixes the front/rear pulleys.

24. Adjust the focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit.
See P.641
25. Adjust the position of the scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage.
See P.642
26. Mount the original glass moving unit, and adjust the height of the original glass moving
unit.
See P.644


[Service Mode] o[Machine] o [Scan Area] o [Feed Direction Adjustment]]
See P.474
28. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] o [ADF] o [Read Pos Adj]
See P.593
5.5.103 Tray 3/4 lift wire

NOTE
• The tray 3 and 4 are of the same form and mechanism. This procedure shows the
steps taken for the tray 3.
1. Remove the tray from the main body.

See P.96
the tray 3 front cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[1] [1]
[2] [1] A00JF2C404DA

[1] the wire cover /Fr [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C574DA

4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear

cover [2], and take out the gear Assy
[3].
[3] [2]
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C575DA
5. Remove the gear [1] and the bearing

[2].
[2]
[1] A0P0F2C577DA

6. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the

drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked
direction to remove the wire /2
(white) [4] from the shaft [3].
MAINTENANCE
[3] [1] [2] [4]
A0P0F2C576DA
7. Remove the E-ring [1].

8. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire
[4] [3] [2] restraining cover [3], and then
remove the wire /2 (white) [4] and the
wire /1 (black) [5].
[5] [1]
A0P0F2C578DA

[5]
restraining cover [3], and then
remove the wire /2 (white) [4].
11. Pull out and remove the wire /2
(white) toward the rear side of the lift
plate [5].
[1] [3]
MAINTENANCE
[4] [2]
A0P0F2C579DA
[5]
drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked
(black) [4] from the shaft [3].
(black) toward the rear side of the lift
plate [5].
[4]
[3] [1] [2]

A0P0F2C580DA


[4] drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked
(black) [4] from the shaft [3].
[2] [1] [3]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C581DA

[3] [1]
remove the wire /3 (black) [4] and the
wire /4 (white) [5].
(black) toward the rear side of the lift
plate [6].
[5] [4] [2]
[6] A0P0F2C582DA


[2] [4] drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked
(white) [4] from the shaft [3].
[1] [3]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C583DA
[5]
remove the wire /4 (white) [4].
(white) toward the rear side of the lift
plate [5].
removal.
NOTE
• The same front/rear wires are used
[3] [4] for both white and black.
[1] [2]
A0P0F2C584DA

5.6 Cleaning procedure

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the ethanol isopropyl
alcohol.
5.6.1 Transfer belt unit

1. Remove the transfer belt unit.
See P.46
2. Using a dried cleaning pad, wipe the
transfer belt [1].
NOTE
• If it is difficult to clean with dried
cleaning pad, dampen a cleaning
pad with a solvent.
• Do not wipe out with water.
• When solvent is used to dampen a
cloth, do not use the ones other
than shown below:
MAINTENANCE
Isopropyl alcohol
[1] • After cleaned with the solvent,
A00JF2C371DA
make copies more than 28-piece of
A3 white paper to eliminate the
image noise.
5.6.2 Tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller

See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 1 separation roller assy replacement procedure.
See P.56
[1]
alcohol, wipe the tray 1 feed roller [1]
clean of dirt.
A00JF2C372DA


alcohol, wipe the tray 1 pick-up roller
[1] clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C373DA
5.6.3 Tray 1 separation roller

See P.56
MAINTENANCE

alcohol, wipe the tray 1 separation
roller [1] clean of dirt.
A0P0F2C569DA
5.6.4 Tray 1 transport roller

alcohol, wipe the tray 1 transport
[1]
A00JF2C375DA


See P.60
[1] alcohol, wipe the tray 2 feed roller [1]
clean of dirt.
A00JF2C376DA
MAINTENANCE
[1] clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C377DA

See P.60
A0P0F2C569DA


[1]
A00JF2C378DA

MAINTENANCE

[1]
A00JF2C024DA

clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C379DA


[1] alcohol, wipe the tray 3 pick-up roller
[1] clean of dirt.
A00JF2C380DA

See P.61
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C381DA

[1]
A00JF2C024DA


[1]
A00JF2C382DA

[1]
MAINTENANCE
clean of dirt.
A00JF2C383DA

[1] clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C384DA


See P.64
[1]
A00JF2C385DA
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A00JF2C386DA
5.6.14 Manual bypass tray feed roller

alcohol, wipe the manual bypass tray
feed roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C387DA

5.6.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller

pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C388DA
5.6.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller

See the steps 1 to 2 of manual bypass tray separation roller assy replacement proce-
MAINTENANCE
dure.
See P.69
[1]
separation roller [1] clean of dirt.
A0P0F2C573DA
5.6.17 Intermediate transport roller

alcohol, wipe the intermediate trans-
port roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
A00JF2C390DA

5.6.18 Original glass

alcohol, wipe the original glass [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
A0P0F2C517DA
2. Open the ADF, and remove the

cleaner [1]
[1]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C518DA
3. Clean the slit glass with the cleaner

[1].
[1]
A0P0F2C519DA

5.6.19 Scanner rails

See P.89
[1]
alcohol, wipe the scanner rails [1]
clean of dirt.
NOTE
• Apply lubricant after cleaning.
[1]
A00JF2C391DA
5.6.20 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)

MAINTENANCE

See P.89
[1] alcohol, wipe the mirror 1/2/3 [1].
A0P0F2C208DA
5.6.21 Lens
See P.89
2. Remove two screws [1] and lens
[2] cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C209DA


[1] alcohol, wipe the lens [1] clean of
dirt.
A0P0F2C210DA
5.6.22 CCD sensor

See P.89
MAINTENANCE
[1]
A0P0F2C211DA

[1] the ground plate [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C212DA


[2] the CCD sensor cover [2].
[1]
A0P0F2C213DA
5. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened

[1] with alcohol, wipe the CCD sensor
[1] clean of dirt.
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C214DA

5.7 Lubrication procedure

5.7.1 Fusing unit
• When the fusing unit produces abnormal noise under operating conditions, lubricate the
brush roller shaft and the sliding member of the bearings which can make the noise.
1. Remove the fusing unit

See P.71
[1] [1] 2. Remove three screws [1], and
remove the fusing unit cover/1 [2].
[2]
MAINTENANCE
[1] A00JF2C610DA
[4] [1] 3. Remove the screw [1].

saddle [2] and disconnect the con-
nector [3], and remove the fusing unit
cover/2 [4].
[2]
[3]
A0P0F2C215DA

5. Apply the heat resistant conductive grease (SANKOL ECG-25) to the surface [1] where
the brush roller shaft contacts the bearings.
NOTE
• Be sure to use heat-resistant conductive grease.
• Do not allow the grease to contact the brush roller.
• Do not disassemble any parts other than those described in the above procedure.
[1] [1]
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2C612DA
NOTE
• Take care so that harness in the fusing unit does not get caught between parts
when assembling the parts.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. SERVICE TOOL
6. SERVICE TOOL
6.1 Service material list
Name Shape Material No. Remarks
Isopropyl alcohol
A00KF2C506DA
Heat-resistant conductive
SANKOL ECG-25 grease A00J PP00 ##
grease
A00JF2C613DA
6.2 CE tool list
MAINTENANCE
Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks
Original glass moving unit

1 AVGR04761W
height adjustment jig
9J06F2C637DA
This part number

PH window cleaning jig 1 AVGR06932C include the clean-
ing pad.
A00JF2C525DA
PH window cleaning jig

1 AVGR06933G
pad
A00JF2C526DA
Transfer belt unit

1 AVGR06934V
extension rail
A00JF2C524DA
Slit glass cleaning jig 1 AVGR10774K
A0P0F2C562DA

6. SERVICE TOOL Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks
AVGR06936D A3
Color chart 1
A0P0F2C553DA
MAINTENANCE

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING
7. FIRMWARE REWRITING
7.1 Outline
• There are two ways to update the firmware: One is by directly connecting with the main
body using the USB memory device, and the other is by downloading over a network
using the Internet ISW.
NOTE
• When updating the firmware to the ver.4x, it is necessary to execute the following
steps to update the firmware.
1. Touch [BootRom] in the firmware update item display, and touch [START].
2. Check the message “BootRom Update completed successfully”, and touch [OK].
3. Rewrite the firmware data.
4. Select [Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Data Install], and update the movie data to the
new version.
See P.543
5. When operating the machine with the function version 2, select [Service Mode] o [Sys-
tem 2] o [Software Switch Setting] and change the function version of the machine.
(When operating the machine as the function version 1 on the firmware ver.4x, this set-
MAINTENANCE
ting is unnecessary.)
See P.533
6. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
7. Install the loadable device driver.
See P.631
8. Install the OCR dictionary data for the searchable PDF as occasion demands.
See P.543
7.2 USB memory

7.2.1 Preparation
• Conditions for USB memory which can be used for updating the firmware are as follows:
- Without security function added (security function can be turned off)
- Memory with 1 GB to 2 GB are recommended (One with 4 GB or more may not oper-
ate)
- Corresponds to USB2.0
- Formatted with FAT32 type
7.2.2 Procedure
1. Connect the USB to the PC, and copy the firmware data to the USB memory.
NOTE
• The firmware data to be updated must be copied to the root directory with the file
name “A0P0FW. tar.”
• More than one firmware data with a single model or multiple models can be stored
in the USB memory. (Maximum of fifteen files)
When storing more than one firmware data, make a folder with a name “(model
code) FW” (“A0P0FW” for this machine) right under the root directory.
(File names can be set arbitrarily)
• When making a folder and storing more than one firmware data, it is also neces-
sary to copy the firmware data “A0P0FW. tar” to the root directly.
2. Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.

7. FIRMWARE REWRITING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
3. Remove the screw [1].

4. Loosen the screw [2], and lift up the cover [3] of the USB port.
5. Insert the USB memory device to the USB port [4] for service.
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
A0P0F2C570DA
NOTE
• USB memory must be connected with the main power switch/sub power switch
MAINTENANCE
off.
• When updating the firmware, use the USB port for the service.
It cannot be updated when connected to another USB port.
6. Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
7. Control panel shows F/W items to be updated, and select the particular type of F/W to
be updated. (Select [YES].)
A0P0F2C539DB
F/W to be updated Appropriate board Remark

MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB)
SCANNER MFP board (MFPB)
PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB)
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
ADF (DF-M) DF control board (DFCB)

FINISHER FNS control board (FSCB) Only when the FS-526/527 is

RU Transfer control board (TRCB) mounted
ZU *1 ZU control board (ZUCB) Only when the ZU-606 is mounted

SD *2 SD drive board (SDDB) Only when the SD-509 is mounted
DSC1 *3 DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted
DSC2 Not used
*1: d-Color MF651/MF551 only

*2: d-Color MF451 only
*3: In d-Color MF651/MF552, this is displayed only when the function enhanced version 1
or later firmware is installed.
NOTE
• Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is automatically
updated after 30 seconds when the main power switch/sub power switch is turned
on.
• When the BootRom file is in the firmware data, [RootRom] key is displayed. Press-
ing the key updates data.
MAINTENANCE
• When more than one firmware are stored in step 1, pressing [FW Data Select]
enables selection. (Data of other models cannot be selected.)
(Data with * at the left top of data selection screen will be the default data copied to
the root directly in the USB memory.)
8. Press the [START]. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
9. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been
rewritten correctly ([Downloading Completed]). Check also the check sum value
([Check Sum ####]) shown on the control panel. (The Start key lights blue.)
10. Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
11. Remove the USB memory device, and fix the cover of the USB port using a screw.

NOTE
• When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is
updated, data may sometimes be internally updated.
In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power
switch OFF until either the serial number input screen or the trouble code screen
is displayed.
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2E582DA
13. Call the Service Mode to the screen.

14. Select [Firmware Version].
15. Make sure if the version of firmware is updated.

7.2.3 Action when data transfer fails

• If “NG” appears on the control panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in
which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps.
1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again.

2. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the USB memory for a new one and
try another rewriting sequence.
3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused “NG”
and carry out data rewriting procedure.

MAINTENANCE

DSC2 Not used


7.3 Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW

7.3.1 Outline
• [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the
control panel of the main body, so the main body will automatically receive the firmware
from the program server over a network for updating. With the Internet ISW, the firmware
can be updated when the CE is at the user’s without firmware data.
7.3.2 Service environment

The following conditions are necessary for using the Internet ISW function.
• The main body is connected to such a network environment that the firmware can be
downloaded on the internet using the ftp or http protocol.
The “Internet ISW” will not operate under the following conditions.
• Main power switch is set to OFF.
• Sub power switch is set to OFF.
• When the following setting is set to “ON”:
[Administrator Setting] o [Security Setting] o [Enhanced Security Mode]
• Machine is operating, or there are jobs present (including appointed jobs).
MAINTENANCE
• Machine is in idle with suspended job

• Paper jam has occurred
• Image file is in the memory
• Model or the circuit board of the program does not match
7.3.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting

• For using the Internet ISW, the network parameter, program server address as well as
firewall address need to be set to the main body.
• For details of each setting item, refer to Adjustment/Setting “Internet ISW”.
See P.615
A. Internet ISW Set

2. Touch [Internet ISW Set] which is available from [Internet ISW].
A0P0F2E585DA

3. Touch [ON], and touch [END].
NOTE
• Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this set-
ting.
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting.
[Administrator Setting] o [Security Setting] o [Enhanced Security Mode]
B. Protocol setting
• It performs the setting concerning the protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the
Internet ISW.
• When connecting to the program server using a proxy server, perform the setting
for a proxy server.
Step Connecting by http Connecting by ftp

0 Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode].
Data Input Setting Data Input Setting
1
• Touch [HTTP Setting], and select [ON]. • Touch [FTP Setting], and select [ON].
Connect Proxy
2
MAINTENANCE
• For connecting via proxy server, select [ON].
Proxy Server
• For connecting via proxy server, set the proxy server address and the port number.
3 1. Select the [Server Address], and set the proxy server address by IP addressing scheme or
FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the port number for the proxy server from 1 through 65535.
Proxy Authentication Connection Setting
• Set the login name and the password which • Perform the setting for accessing FTP
may be necessary for authentication when server.
accessing to the proxy server.
1. Select [Port Number], and set the port num-
1. When Authentication is necessary for ber for FTP server from 1 through 65535.
accessing to the proxy server, select 2. Select [Connection Time Out], and set the
[Authentication], and select [ON]. time for the connection time out from 1
2. Select [Log-in Name], and enter the login through 60.
name on the on-screen keyboard. 3. When connecting in PASV mode, select
4
3. Select [Password], and enter the password [PASV Mode], and select [ON].
on the on-screen keyboard.
*PASV Mode:
This mode is for transferring the file with
FTP under the condition where communica-
tion is restricted such as inside the firewall.
Since with PASV mode, the client with
restriction sets the port number, data trans-
mission port can be secured to enable the
file transmission.
Connection Time-Out
• Select [Connection Time-Out], and set the
5
time for the connection time out between 30
and 300 seconds.

C. Forwarding access setting

• To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data.
1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode].

2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting].
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2E584DA
3. Select [User ID], and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the pro-
gram server on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END].
4. Select [Password], and enter the password which is necessary for connecting to the
program server on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END].
5. Select [URL], and enter the directory which stores the program server address and the
firmware on the on-screen keyboard by URL method, and touch [END].
NOTE
• Enter the URL which matches to the protocol to be used.
When connecting to http http://(host name or IP address)/directory name
or https://(host name or IP address)/directory name
When connecting to ftp ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name
6. Select [File Name], and enter the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded on
the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END].
7. Touch [END] to finish setting.

7.3.4 Firmware rewriting from the control panel

NOTE
• When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before-
hand.
• DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading.
A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel.

[Service Mode] o [Internet ISW] o [Download]
2. Touch [ISW Start].
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2E585DA
3. The main body will automatically start running, and it starts accessing the server.

4. Control panel shows F/W items to be updated, and select the particular type of F/W to
be updated. (Select [YES].)
A0P0F2C539DA
MAINTENANCE


DSC2 Not used

NOTE
• Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is updated after
30 seconds when the unit has restarted.
B. During firmware updating

1. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or
transferring data.

C. Completed or failed
(1) Firmware updated normally
1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode
to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the main screen.
(2) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble

1. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network, an
error code and the message will be displayed.
2. Restart the main body in auto or manual mode, and touch [OK]. It can be used with the
firmware version before conducting updating.
3. Check the settings for the network by error codes, and try updating again.
NOTE
• For error codes, refer to “Error code list for the Internet ISW”.
See P.242
(3) Failing to update the firmware after downloading has started

1. Once firmware updating has started, the ROM in the main body will be deleted.
When it failed right after updating has started, restart the main body, and shift to the
MAINTENANCE
standby screen to retry downloading.
2. When updating on the control panel, touch [settings] on the standby screen, and check
the Network settings again.
Touch [Download], and restart the Internet ISW.
NOTE
• Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the main power switch OFF/
ON if the firmware is not updated.
• Firmware can be updated with the USB memory with the main power switch OFF.
D. Confirming the firmware version

2. Select the [Firmware Version].
3. Check if the firmware version is updated.
7.3.5 Firmware rewriting from the CS Remote Care

• For detailed error information relating to CS Remote Care, refer to “Adjustment/Setting:
CS Remote Care.”
See P.491
• For the firmware update procedure using CS Remote Care, refer to CS Remote Care
Center Manual.

7.3.6 Error code list for the Internet ISW

• When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally con-
nected, the message on the status and the error code will be displayed on the control
panel.
When updating with CS Remote Care, the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care
center.
<Sample display>
MAINTENANCE
A00JF2C556DA
Error code
Description Countermeasure
Control panel
0x00000001 Illegal error on the control • Check if the following setting is set to
“Valid”.
[Service Mode] o [Internet ISW] o
[Internet ISW setting]
• Check the status of the following set-
ting.
[Transfer access setting]
• If the above process does not solve the
problem, inform the corresponding
error code to the OLIVETTI.
0x00000010 Parameter error • Check if the following setting is set to
“Valid”.
[Internet ISW setting]
• If the above process does not solve the
problem, inform the corresponding
error code to OLIVETTI.

Error code
Control panel
0x00111000 Error concerning the network • Check the User’s network environment.
• Connection has been completed. (LAN cable’s connection)
• Check the status of the following set-
ting.
[Transfer access setting]
• Check to see if the FTP server oper-
ates normally.
0x00111001 Error concerning the network • Check the network environment of the
• It cannot be connected to the server. User.
0x00111100 Error concerning the network • Check to see if the FTP server oper-
• Communication timeout. ates normally.
0x00111101 Error concerning the network • Check the network environment of the
• Disconnection occurred User.
0x00111110 Error concerning the network • Check to see if the FTP server oper-
• The network is not connected. ates normally.
MAINTENANCE
0x00110010 Error concerning the network
• Others
0x00001### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server normally
• Reply code when it failed to be con- operates.
nected • Check the IP address, user’s name,
etc.
0x00002### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server operates
• Error reply code for the user command normally.
or pass command
0x00003### FTP error
• Error reply code for CWD command
• Error reply code for the TYPE com- normally.
mand.
0x00005### FTP error
• Error reply code for the PORT com-
mand.
• Error reply code for the PASV com- normally.
mand. • Set the PASV mode to “Invalid”, and try
it again.
• Error reply code for the RETR com- normally.
mand. • Wait for about 30 minutes and try it
again.
0x1000 0100 • It cannot be accepted because of the • Wait for the current job to be completed
job currently being executed. and try it again.
• ISW being executed by other method.
0x10000101 • It cannot be accepted because the sub • Turn sub power switch ON and try it
power switch is OFF. again.
0x10000102 • The Internet ISW is already being exe- • Wait for the current Internet ISW to be
cuted. completed.

Error code
Control panel
0x10000103 • It failed to prohibit the job. (It failed to • Check if the following setting is set to
lock the operation.) “Valid”.
o It failed to lock the job because the [Service Mode] o [Internet ISW] o
operation is already locked with [Internet ISW setting]
PSWC, etc. • If the above process does not solve the
0x10000104 • There is no space for F/W data to be problem, inform the corresponding
downloaded. error code to the OLIVETTI.
0x10000106 • Check sum error

0x10000107 File access error • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is
• The file downloaded has an error. of the correct type.
• The header of the file which has been
read has an error.
• The size of the file to be downloaded is
too large.
• When it is identified to be the different
type of F/W.
0x10000108 • The area F/W is stored is destroyed, • Wait until ISW is automatically exe-
MAINTENANCE
and another ISW is necessary. cuted on MFP side.

0x20000000 The temporary error when running the
subset
• When starting the Internet ISW in a
normal program, the rebooting will start
and the Internet ISW will be executed
with the subset program.
During the process by the subset pro-
gram, it has to be in the “Failed” status
unless the Internet ISW is successfully
conducted. This code is used tempo-
rarily to make it in error status.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS
8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

8.1 Installing the key counter
8.1.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C534DA
[1] Key counter socket [2] Key counter
8.1.2 Procedure
NOTE
• When mounting the key counter, either the optional key counter kit KIT-1 (4623-
472) or the key counter kit KIT-CF (4623-481) is necessary.
• Procedure for directly mounting the key counter to the main unit is described
below.
For mounting the key counter to the optional working table WT-506, refer to WT-
506 installation manual.
A. When using the key counter kit KIT-1 (4623-472)

1. Remove the scanner right cover [1].
See P.85
2. Cut out the knockouts [2] of the
scanner right cover.
[2] 3. Remove the two caps [3].
[1] [3] A0P0F2C530DA

8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
[1] 5. Remove the harness for the key

counter from five wire saddles [1]
and the edge cover [2].
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C531DA
[1] 6. Set the harness for the key counter

to the wire saddle [1] and the edge
cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2]
A0P0F2C532DA
7. Mount the scanner right cover [1],

[1] and insert the harness for the key
counter through the hole [2] knock-
outs were removed from.
[2] A0P0F2C533DA
[2] 8. Using two screws [2], secure the

counter mounting bracket [1].
NOTE
• Secure the counter mounting
bracket passing the connector into
the bracket.
• Use the two long screws
(9646 0418 14: M4 x 18) in the key
counter kit to secure the counter
mounting bracket.
[1] A0P0F2C535DA

9. Mount the edge cover [1] to the

counter mounting bracket and set
the harness to the edge cover.
[4] 10. Connect the key counter socket con-
[4]
nector [2].
11. Using two screws [4], secure the
counter socket [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
MAINTENANCE
A0P0F2C536DA
12. Using two screws [2], secure the key

[1] counter cover [1].
[2]
A00JF2C584DA
13. Select [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Management Function Choice] o [Key
Counter Only], [Vendor 1 + Key Counter] or [Vendor 2 + Key Counter].
Set color mode and message.
For details on setting, see “Adjustment/Setting.”
See P.630

B. When using the key counter kit KIT-CF (4623-481)

1. Remove the scanner right cover [1].
See P.85
2. Cut out the knockouts [2] of the
scanner right cover.
[2] 3. Remove the two caps [3].
[1] [3] A0P0F2C530DA
[1] 5. Remove the harness for the key

counter from five wire saddles [1]
and the edge cover [2].
MAINTENANCE
[2] [1]
A0P0F2C531DA
[1] 6. Set the harness for the key counter

to the wire saddle [1] and the edge
cover [2].
[2]
A0P0F2C532DA

7. Mount the scanner right cover [1],

[1] and insert the harness for the key
counter from the hole [2] where
knockouts were removed from.
[2] A0P0F2C533DA
[2] 8. Using two screws [2], secure the

counter mounting bracket [1].
NOTE
• Secure the counter mounting
bracket passing the connector into
MAINTENANCE
the bracket.
• Use the two long screws
(9646 0418 14: M4 x 18) in the key
counter kit to secure the counter
mounting bracket.
[1] A0P0F2C537DA
9. Mount the edge cover [1] to the

counter mounting bracket, and set
the harness to the edge cover.
10. Connect the key counter socket con-
[4] [4] nector [2].
11. Using two screws [4], secure the
counter socket [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
A0P0F2C538DA

12. Using two screws [2], secure the key

[1] counter cover [1].
[2]
A00JF2C584DA
13. Select [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Management Function Choice] o [Key
Counter Only], [Vendor 1 + Key Counter] or [Vendor 2 + Key Counter].
Set color mode and message.
For details on setting, see “Adjustment/Setting.”
See P.630
MAINTENANCE

8.2 Installing the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205)

8.2.1 Procedure
See P.89
[1]
saddles [1].
[1]
A0P0F2E586DA
MAINTENANCE
[2] [3]
3. Connect the connector [1] of the
original size detection 2 sensor.
4. Using the screw [2], mount the origi-
nal size detection 2 sensor [3] and fix
it.
[1]
A0P0F2E587DA
5. Select [Service Mode] o [System 1]

o [Original Size Detection], and set
the original glass to [Table2].
A00JF2E587DA

6. Select [Service Mode] o [Machine] o [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj].

See P.464
A00JF2E588DA
MAINTENANCE
7. Check to make sure that the [Org. Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set] is displayed on
the original size detection sensor adjustment screen.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 9. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
9. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
SECTION
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce-
dures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
Advance checks
• Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.

• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The original glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce-
dures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.

10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
10. UTILITY
10.1 List of utility mode
NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
• For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see “Administrator Security Level.”
See P.434
• For displaying the keys with *** marks, see “Administrator Feature Level.”
See P.621
Utility Mode Ref. page

One-Touch/ Create Address Book E-mail P.270
User Box One-Touch (Public)/ User Box P.270
Registration destination (Personal)
Fax P.270
PC (SMB) P.270
FTP P.271
WebDAV P.271
IP Address Fax P.271
Internet Fax P.271
Group P.271
E-mail E-mail Subject P.272
Settings E-mail Body P.272
Create User Public/Personal User Box P.272
Box Bulletin Board User Box P.273
Relay User Box P.273

Limiting Apply Levels/ Address Book P.274
Access to Groups to Group P.274
Destina- Destinations
tions Program P.274
User Settings System Language Selection P.275
Settings Measurement Unit Settings P.275
Paper Tray Auto Tray Selection Settings P.275
Settings Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF P.275
No Matching Paper in Tray Setting P.275
Print Lists P.276
Post Inserter Settings P.276
Auto Color Level Adjust. P.276
Power Save Low Power Mode Settings* P.277
Settings* Sleep Mode Settings* P.277
Output Print/Fax Out- Print** P.277
Settings** put Settings** Fax**
Output Tray Settings** P.278

AE Level Adjustment** P.278

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY

User Settings System Auto Paper Select for Small Original P.278
Settings Blank Page Print Settings** P.279
Page Number Print Position** P.279
Select Keyboard** P.279
Custom Copier Default Tab P.280
Display Settings Shortcut Key 1 P.280
Settings
Shortcut Key 2
Quick Settings 1 P.280
Quick Settings 2
Quick Settings 3
Quick Settings 4
Scan/Fax Default Tab P.281
Settings Program Default P.281
Address Book Index Default P.281
Shortcut Key 1 P.281
Shortcut Key 2
Default Address Book P.282
Default Address Type P.282
User Box Default Tab P.282
Settings Shortcut Key 1 P.282
Shortcut Key 2
Copy Screen Copy Operating Screen P.283
Fax Active TX Display P.283
Screen RX Display P.283
Color Selection Settings P.283
Left Panel Display Default P.284
Search Option Settings P.284
Copier Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple P.284
Settings Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet P.284
Auto Sort/Group Selection P.285
Default Copy Settings P.285
Default Enlarge Display Settings P.286
When AMS Direction is Incorrect P.286
Separate Scan Output Method P.286
Enlargement Rotation P.287
Auto Zoom (Platen)* P.287
Auto Zoom (ADF)* P.287
Specify Default Tray when APS Off* P.287
Select Tray for Insert Sheet* P.288
Tri-Fold Print Side P.288
Print Jobs During Copy Operation** P.288


User Settings Copier Automatic Image Rotation P.288
Settings Finishing Program P.289
Card Shot Layout P.289
Settings Zoom P.289
Store Original Size P.289
Scan/Fax JPEG Compression Level P.290
Settings Black Compression Level P.290
TWAIN Lock Time P.290
Default Scan/Fax Settings P.291
Default Enlarge Display Settings P.291
Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level P.292
Color TIFF Type P.292
OCR Operation Setting P.292
Graphic Outlining P.292
Printer Basic PDL Setting P.293
Settings Settings Number of Copies P.293
Original Direction P.293
Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP P.293
A4/A3 l LTR/LGR Auto Switch P.293
Banner Sheet Setting P.294
Binding Direction Adjustment P.294
Line Width Adjustment P.294

Gray Background Text Correction P.294
Gray Background Text Correction P.295
(Fiery Controller)
Paper Setting Paper Tray P.295
Paper Size P.295
2-Sided Print P.295
Binding Position P.296
Staple P.296
Punch P.296
Banner Paper Tray P.296
PCL Settings Font Settings P.297
Symbol Set P.297
Font Size P.297
Line/Page P.297
CR/LF Mapping P.298


User Settings Printer PS Setting Print PS Errors P.298
Settings ICC Profile Photo-RGB Color P.298
Settings Photo-Output Profile
Text-RGB Color
Text-Output Profile
Figure/Table Graph-RGB Color
Figure/Table Graph-
Output Profile
Simulation-Profile
Auto Trapping P.299
Black Overprint P.299
XPS Settings Verify XPS Digital Signature P.299
Print Reports Configuration Page P.300
Demo Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List
TIFF Image Paper Setting P.300
Change Password P.301
Change E-mail Address P.301
Change Icon P.301
Register Authentication Settings P.302
Registered Default Application Selection P.302
Application
Setting
Cellular Link File Error Notification P.302
Phone/PDA Proxy Server Use P.302
Setting
Print Settings P.302
Administrator System Power Save Low Power Mode Settings P.304
Settings Settings Settings Sleep Mode Settings P.304
Power Save Key P.304
Enter Power Save Mode P.305
Output Print/Fax Out- Print P.305
Settings put Settings Fax
Output Tray Settings P.305
Shift Output Each Job P.306
Date/Time Settings P.306
Daylight Saving Time P.306
Weekly Timer Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings P.307
Settings Time Settings P.307
Date Settings P.307
Select Time for Power Save P.307
Password for Non-Business Hours P.307


Administrator System Restrict User Copy Program Lock Settings P.308
Settings Settings Access Delete Saved Copy Program P.308
Restrict Changing Job Priority P.308
Access to Job Delete Other User Jobs P.308
Settings
Registering and Changing P.308
Addresses
Changing Zoom Ratio P.309
Changing the “From” Address P.309
Change Registered Overlay P.309
Biometric/IC Card Info. P.309
Registration
Restrict Restrict Broadcasting P.309
Operation
Expert AE Level Adjustment P.310
Adjustment Printer Leading Edge Adjustment P.311
Adjustment Centering P.312
Leading Edge Adjustment P.313
(Duplex Side 2)
Erase Leading Edge *** P.315
Vertical Adjustment *** P.316
Media Adjustment P.317
Finisher Center Staple Position P.318

Adjustment Half-Fold Position P.319
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment P.320
Punch Vertical Position P.321
Adjustment
Punch Horizontal Position P.322
Adjustment
Punch Regist Loop Size P.323
Adjustment
Punch Edge Sensor P.323
Adjustment
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) P.324
Position Adjustment
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) P.325
Position Adjustment
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment P.326
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor P.327
Post Inserter Tray Size P.327
Adjustment


Administrator System Expert Density Thick 1/1+ -Yellow P.328
Settings Settings Adjustment Adjustment Thick 2/3/4-Yellow
Thick 1/1+ -Magenta
Thick 2/3/4-Magenta
Thick 1/1+ -Cyan
Thick 2/3/4-Cyan
Thick 1/1+ -Black
Thick 2/3/4-Black
Black Image Density P.328
Image Image Stabilization Only P.329
Stabilization Image Stabilization Setting
Paper Separation Adjustment P.330
Color Color Registration Adjust P.331
Registration (Yellow)
Adjust Color Registration Adjust
(Magenta)
Color Registration Adjust
(Cyan)
Gradation Image Stabilization Only P.333
Adjustment Print
Copy
Scanner Area Scanner Adjustment: P.335
*** Leading Edge ***
Scanner Adjustment: P.336
Centering ***
Horizontal Adjustment *** P.337
Vertical Adjustment *** P.338
ADF Adjust- Centering*** P.339
ment *** Original Stop Position*** P.340
Centering Auto Adjustment*** P.341
Auto Adj. of Stop Position*** P.341
Line Prior Detection Setting P.342
Detection Feed Cleaning Settings P.342
Trail Edge Adjust P.343
User Paper Settings *** P.344
Erase Non-Image Area Erase P.345
Adjustment Operation Settings
List/Counter Management Job Settings List P.345
List
Paper Size/Type Counter P.345
Meter Counter List P.346
Check Consumables List P.346


Administrator System Reset System Auto Reset P.346
Settings Settings Settings Auto Reset P.347
Job Reset When Account is changed P.347
When Original is set on ADF P.347
NEXT JOB Staple Setting P.347
Original Set/ P.347
Bind Direction
Reset Data P.348
After Job
User Box Delete Unused User Box P.348
Settings Delete Secure Print Documents P.348
Auto Delete Secure Documents P.348
Encrypted PDF Delete Time P.348
ID & Print Delete Time P.349
Document Hold Setting P.349
External Memory Function Settings P.349
Allow/Restrict User Box P.349
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting P.350
Document Delete Time Setting P.350
Standard Size Original Glass Original Size Detect*** P.350
Setting*** Foolscap Size Setting*** P.350
Stamp Header/Footer Settings P.351

Settings Fax TX Settings P.351
Blank Page Print Settings P.351
Application Key Settings P.351
Skip Job Fax P.352
Operation Other than Fax
Settings
Default Bypass Paper Type Setting P.352
Page Number Print Position P.352
Advanced Preview Setting P.352
Administra- Administrator Registration P.352
tor/Machine Input Machine Address P.353
Settings


Administrator One-Touch/ Create One- Address Book E-mail P.353
Settings User Box Touch Desti- User Box P.353
Registration nation
Fax P.353
PC (SMB) P.353
FTP P.354
WebDAV P.354
IP Address Fax P.354
Internet Fax P.354
Group P.354
E-mail E-mail Subject P.354
Settings E-mail Body P.355
Create User Public/Personal User Box P.355
Box Bulletin Board User Box P.355
Relay User Box P.355
Annotation User Box P.355
One-Touch/ Address Book List P.356
User Box Group List P.356
Registration
List Program List P.356
E-mail Subject/Text List P.356
Maximum Number of User Boxes P.357
User General Settings P.357
Authentica- User Authen- Administra- User Name List P.360
tion/ tication tive Setting
Account Default Function Permission P.360
Settings
Track ID & Print Settings P.361
ID & Print Operation Settings P.361
User Registration P.361
User Counter P.362
Account Track Account Track Registration P.362
Settings Account Track Counter P.362
Print without Authentication P.362
Print Counter List P.363
External Server Settings P.363
Limiting Create Group P.363
Access to Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations P.363
Destinations
Apply Levels/Groups to Users P.364
Authentica- General Settings P.364
tion Device Logoff Settings P.365
Settings


Administrator User Auth/Acct Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting P.365
Settings Authentica- Track Com- Single Color > 2 Color Output Management P.365
tion/ mon Setting
Account Scan to Home Settings P.365
Track
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings P.366
Network TCP/IP IPv4 Settings P.366
Settings Settings IPv6 Settings P.367
DNS Host P.367
DNS Domain P.368
DNS Server Settings(IPv4) P.368
DNS Server Settings(IPv6) P.368
IPsec Settings P.369
IP Filtering (Permit Access) P.371
IP Filtering (Deny Access) P.371
RAW Port Number P.372
LLMNR Setting P.372
NetWare IPX Settings P.372
Settings NetWare Print Settings P.373
User Authentication Settings(NDS) P.374
HTTP Server Settings P.375
FTP Settings FTP TX Settings P.377
FTP Server Settings P.378

SMB Settings Client Settings P.378
Print Settings P.379
WINS Settings P.379
Direct Hosting Settings P.380
LDAP Enabling LDAP P.380
Settings Setting Up LDAP P.381
Default LDAP Server Setting P.385
E-mail E-mail TX (SMTP) P.385
Settings E-mail RX (POP) P.388
S/MIME Communication Settings P.391
SNMP Settings P.392
AppleTalk Settings P.396
Bonjour Setting P.396
TCP Socket TCP Socket P.397
Settings TCP Socket (ASCII Mode) P.397
Network Fax Network Fax IP Address Fax Function P.398
Settings Function Internet Fax Function P.398
Settings
SMTP TX Settings P.398
SMTP RX Settings P.399


Administrator Network WebDAV WebDAV Client Settings P.399
Settings Settings Settings WebDAV Server Settings P.401
Web Service Web Service Common Settings P.401
Settings Printer Settings P.402
Scanner Settings P.403
SSDP Settings P.404
Detail Device Setting P.404
Settings Time Adjustment Setting P.405
Status Notifi- Register Notification Address P.406
cation Setting
Total Counter Notification Settings P.407
PING Confirmation P.408
SLP Setting P.408
LPD Setting P.408
Prefix/Suffix ON/OFF Setting P.408
Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting P.408
Error Code Display Setting P.409
IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings P.409
Web Browser Setting P.409
Bluetooth Setting P.410
Copier Auto Zoom (Platen) P.410
Settings Auto Zoom (ADF) P.410
Specify Default Tray when APS OFF P.410
Select Tray for Insert Sheet P.410
Print Jobs During Copy Operation P.411
Tri-Fold Print Side P.411
Automatic Image Rotation P.411
Card Shot Layout P.412
Settings Zoom P.412
Store Original Size P.412
Printer USB Timeout P.412
Settings Network Timeout P.412
Print XPS Errors P.413
PSWC Direct Print P.413


Administrator Fax Header Information P.413
Settings Settings Header/ Header Position P.413
Footer Print Receiver’s Name P.414
Position
Footer Position P.414
Line Parame- Dialing Method P.414
ter Setting Receive Mode P.414
Number of RX Call Rings P.415
Number of Redials P.415
Redial interval P.415
Line Monitor Sound P.415
Line Monitor Sound Vol. P.415
TX/RX Duplex Print (RX) P.416
Settings Letter/Ledger over A4/A3 P.416
Print Paper Selection P.416
Print Paper Size P.416
Incorrect User Box No. Entry P.417
Tray Selection for RX Print P.417
Min. Reduction for RX Print P.417
Print Separate Fax Pages P.417
File After Polling TX P.417
No. of Sets (RX) P.417
Function Function ON/ F Code TX P.418

Settings OFF Setting Relay RX P.418
Relay Printing P.418
Destination Check Display P.419
Function
Confirm Address (TX) P.419
Confirm Address (Register) P.419
Memory RX Setting P.419
Closed Network RX P.420
Forward TX Setting P.420
Incomplete TX Hold P.420
PC-Fax RX Setting P.421
TSI User Box Setting P.421
PBX Connection Setting P.421


Administrator Fax Report Activity Report P.422
Settings Settings Settings TX Result Report P.422
Sequential TX Report P.422
Timer Reservation TX Report P.422
Confidential RX Report P.422
Bulletin TX Report P.423
Relay TX Result Report P.423
Relay Request Report P.423
PC-FAX TX Error Report P.423
Broadcast Result Report P.424
TX Result Report Check P.424
Network Fax RX Error Report P.424
MDN Message P.424
DSN Message P.425
Print E-mail Message Body P.425
Job Settings List P.425
Multi Line Line Parame- Dialing Method P.426
Settings ter Setting Number of RX Call Rings P.426
Line Monitor Sound P.426
Function PC-FAX TX Setting P.426
Settings
Multi Lines Settings P.427
Sender Fax No. P.427
Network Fax Black Compression Level P.427
Settings Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression P.428
Method
Internet Fax Self Rx Ability P.428
Internet Fax Advanced Settings P.429
IP Address Fax Operation Settings P.430
System OpenAPI Access Setting P.430
Connection Settings SSL/Port Number P.431
Authentication P.431
Call Remote Center P.432
Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting P.432
Printer Information P.432
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting P.432


Administrator Security Administrator Password P.433
Settings Settings User Box Administrator Setting P.433
Administrator Security Levels P.434
Security Password Rules P.434
Details Prohibited Functions When Authentication P.435
Error
Confidential Document Access Method P.436
Manual Destination Input P.436
Print Data Capture P.437
Job Log Settings P.437
Restrict Fax TX P.437
Hide Personal Information P.438
Display Activity Log P.438
Initialize P.438
Job History Thumbnail Display P.438
Secure Print Only P.439
Copy Guard P.439
Password Copy P.439
Web browser contents access P.440
Enhanced Security Mode P.440
HDD Settings Check HDD Capacity P.441
Overwrite HDD Data P.442

Overwrite All Data P.443
HDD Lock Password P.443
Format HDD P.444
HDD Encryption Setting P.444
Function Usage Settings for Each Function P.445
Management Maximum Job Allowance P.445
Settings
Network Function Usage Settings P.445
Authentication Time Setting P.446
Security Stamp Apply Stamps P.446
Settings Settings Delete Registered Stamp P.446
Image Log Transfer Settings P.447
Driver Password Encryption Setting P.447
License Get Request Code P.448
Settings Install License P.448
List of Enabled Functions P.448
OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings P.449
Check Consumable Life Print List
Banner Printing P.449


My Panel Language Setting P.450
Settings Measurement Unit Setting
Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Color Selection Setting
Main Menu Settings
Initial Screen Setting
Device Information P.450
Meter Count Check Print List
Details Coverage Rate
Copy
Print
Scan/Fax
Other
Remaining Copy Count *1
*1: Displayed after a user or account authentication if maximum limit is set for the number
of copies the user or account can make.

10.2 Starting/Exiting
10.2.1 Starting procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. The Utility Mode screen will appear.
A0P0F3E543DA
10.2.2 Exiting procedure

• Touch the [Close] key.

10.3 Touch Panel Adjustment

A. Use
• To adjust the position of the touch panel display
• Make this adjustment if the touch panel is slow to respond to a pressing action.
• Use during the setup procedure.
B. Procedure
1. Press the Accessibility key.
2. Touch [Touch Panel Adj.].
3. Using the tip of a pen or similar object, touch the four keys (+) on the screen in
sequence.
• These crosses may be touched in any order; but be sure to touch the center of each
cross.
• Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen.
A0P0F3E544DA
4. Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in blue.
5. Press the Start key.

10.4 One-Touch User Box Registration

• In a copier where the user authentication function that uses an external server or MFP is
set to ON, when you operate the copier without performing user authentication, this
menu is not displayed.
• It will not be displayed when the authentication device is set to “Set” by the following set-
ting.
[Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Management Function Choice]
10.4.1 Create One-Touch destination-Address Book (Public)/(Personal)

A. E-mail
(1) Use
• To register/change e-mail address to send scanned data.
(2) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.
B. User Box
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the
vendor is mounted.
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)
(1) Use
• To register/change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the hard
disk in the main body.
(2) Procedure
• At least one User Box must be registered for registering a Box address.
C. Fax
(1) Use
• To register/change the fax destinations.
(2) Procedure
D. PC(SMB)
(1) Use
• To register/change SMB address to send scanned data.
(2) Procedure

E. FTP
(1) Use
• To register/change FTP address to send scanned data.
(2) Procedure
F. WebDAV
(1) Use
• To register/change WebDAV address to send scanned data.
(2) Procedure
G. IP Address Fax
• Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following set-
tings.
[Administrator Settings] o [Network Settings] o [Network Fax Settings] o [Network Fax
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax
data.
(2) Procedure
• Select any displayed address to check, change or delete the setting.
H. Internet Fax
• Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data.
(2) Procedure
10.4.2 Create One-Touch destination-Group

A. Use
• To register/change a group to send scanned data/fax data simultaneously.
B. Procedure
• Select any displayed group to check, edit or delete them.
• At least one address must be registered for registering a new group.

10.4.3 Create One-Touch destination-E-mail Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the management device 2 is
mounted.
A. E-mail Subject
(1) Use
• To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data.
(2) Procedure
• Select any displayed address to detail check, edit or delete the setting.
• The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and
pressing [Set as Default].
B. E-mail Body
(1) Use
• To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data.
(2) Procedure
• Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting.
• The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing
[Set as Default].
10.4.4 Create User Box

• It will not be displayed when the authentication device is set to “Set” by the following set-
ting.
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
• This menu is not available due to functional restriction during user authentication when
[User Box] is set to Restrict.
• It will not be displayed when [Allow/Restrict User Box] is set to “Restrict” in the following
settings.
[Administrator Settings] o [System Settings] o [User Box Settings]
10.4.5 Create User Box-Public/Personal User Box

A. Use
• To register/change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine.
• Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use.
B. Procedure
• A new box can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed box to change or delete it.

10.4.6 Create User Box-Bulletin Board User Box

• It will not be displayed when the authentication device 1 is set to “Set” by the following
setting.
• It will not be displayed due to functional restriction upon user authentication when [User
Box] is set to “OFF.”
• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
• It will not be displayed during user authentication if the fax operation is set to “Restrict” by
the function restriction.
A. Use
• To register/change the bulletin board user box.
B. Procedure
10.4.7 Create User Box-Relay User Box

setting.
• It will not be displayed due to functional restriction upon user authentication when [User
Box] is set to “OFF.”
• It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted.
• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] o [FAX] o [System] o [Display Setting] o [Relay]
A. Use
• To register/change the Relay User Box.
B. Procedure

10.4.8 Limiting Access to Destinations

• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Enhanced Security Mode]
A. Outline
• The Limiting Access to Destinations setting allows or restricts individual user's access to
each destination. This enables security control by restricting information that can be
accessed.
(1) Apply Levels

• One of the six levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all destinations. Similarly, one of the
levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all users. Depending on the combination of the des-
tination and user levels, destinations that a user can access can be limited.
For example, users of level 2 can access the destinations that belong to the levels 0 to 2,
but cannot access to the destinations that belong to the levels 3 to 5. Level 5 users can
access all destinations of the levels 0 to 5.
(2) Groups
• A group can be made with a certain name to allow its members to access its destina-
tions. Users and destinations can be registered for the group so that the registered desti-
nations can be accessed by the registered users.
Access restriction depending on an individual level is also applied to the group with
access to the destinations determined by the combination of the user and destination
levels within a group.
• A destination can be included in only one group.
• A user can be included in multiple different groups.
10.4.9 Limiting Access to Destinations-Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations

A. Address Book
(1) Use
• Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the address book.
(2) Procedure
• Select a destination, press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting.
B. Group
(1) Use
• Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the group.
(2) Procedure
C. Program
(1) Use
• Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the program.
(2) Procedure

10.5 User Settings

10.5.1 System Settings-Language Selection
A. Use
• To select the language on the LCD display.
• To change the language used on the control panel.
B. Procedure
• The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] avail-
able from [System 1] under Service Mode.
See P.523
10.5.2 System Settings-Measurement Unit Settings

A. Use
• To select the unit displayed on the LCD display.
B. Procedure
• The default setting varies depending on the marketing area.
mm (Numerical Value) inch (Numerical Value) inch (Fraction)
10.5.3 System Settings-Paper Tray Settings

A. Auto Tray Selection Settings
(1) Use
• To set the tray for automatic selection when APS is being set.
• To establish the priority for switching the Tray when ATS is being set.
(2) Procedure
• Select the tray on the [Auto Tray Select] screen.
• Set the priority on the [Tray Priority] screen.
B. Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF

(1) Use
• To set whether to automatically switch to another tray with same size paper when the
paper feed tray runs out of paper during printing.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Restrict.
Allow “Restrict”
C. No Matching Paper in Tray Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether to switch to another tray automatically when the specified tray runs out of
paper during printing.
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) : It stops printing when the specified tray runs out of paper.
Switch Trays (Tray Priority): To switch to another tray with the specified paper and print
when the tray is out of paper
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Stop Printing (Tray Fixed).
“Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)” Switch Trays (Tray Priority)

D. Print Lists
vendor is mounted.
setting.
(1) Use
• To set the paper feed tray for output the list for the meter count or the unit check.
• It sets the simplex/duplex printing of the output for the sales counter or the unit check list.
(2) Procedure
<Paper tray>
• The default setting is Tray 1.
<Simplex/Duplex>
• The default setting is 1-Sided.
E. Post Inserter Settings

• It will be displayed only when the optional post inserter PI-505 is mounted.
(1) Use
• To set the paper tray, paper type and paper size for the post inserter.
(2) Procedure
<Paper Tray>
• The default setting is F1.

“F1” F2
<Paper Type>
• The default setting is Plain Paper.
“Plain Paper“ Thick 1 Thick 1+ Thick 2
<Paper Size>
• The default setting is Auto Detect.
“Auto Detect” Standard Size Custom Size
10.5.4 System Settings-Auto Color Level Adjust.

A. Use
• To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black-and-white
original in the auto color mode.
B. Procedure
• Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3.
Black Standard Full Color

1 2 “3” 4 5

10.5.5 System Settings-Power Save Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Setting] o [Administrator Security Level]
• t will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or
the vendor is mounted.
A. Low Power Mode Settings

(1) Use
• To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
• Low power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.
(2) Procedure
• Use the 10-key pad for setting.
• The default setting is 15 min.
“15 min.” (10 to 240)
B. Sleep Mode Settings

(1) Use
• To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
• Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control.
• “OFF” will only be displayed when [No Sleep] in Service Mode is set.
(2) Procedure
“30 min.” (15 to 240) / OFF
10.5.6 System Settings-Output Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Administrator Security Levels]
vendor is mounted.
A. Print/Fax Output Settings

(1) Use
• To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received.
Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received
Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received
(2) Procedure
<Printer>
• The default setting is Page Print.
<Fax>
• The default setting is Batch Print.
NOTE
• [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.

B. Output Tray Setting

• It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526/527 or the job separator JS-504 is
mounted.
(1) Use
• To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print
Reports).
(2) Procedure
• The default settings are as follows.
Copy : Tray 1
Print : Tray 1
Report Output : Tray 2
Fax : Tray 2
• [Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-603 is mounted to the finisher
FS-527.
10.5.7 System Settings-AE Level Adjustment

vendor is mounted.
A. Use
• To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) The larger the value becomes the more
emphasized the background will be.

To make the background level foggier : Increase the setting value
To make the background level less foggy : Decrease the setting value
B. Procedure
• The default setting is 2.
“2” (0 to 4)
10.5.8 System Settings-Auto Paper Select for Small Original

A. Use
• To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small, or no original is being
set.
• To copy the original such as business cards with which the original detection is not effec-
tive.
Copy on Small Size : Copies on A5 paper.
Copy on A4/Letter : Copies on A4 or Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size paper.
Prohibit Copy : Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected. paper
feed tray needs to be selected prior to pressing the Start key.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Prohibit Copy.
Copy on Small Size Copy on A4/Letter “Prohibit Copy”

10.5.9 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
A. Use
• Select wether or not to print the stamp/composition on blank pages.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Do Not Print.
Print “Do Not Print”
10.5.10 System Settings-Page Number Print Position

A. Use
• Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-
sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same posi-
tion on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Left & Right Bind: All the Same/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same.
“Left & Right Bind: All the Same/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same”
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical/Top & Bottom Bind: Symmetrical
10.5.11 System Settings-Select Keyboard
A. Use
• Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel.
• The type of keyboard to be displayed when [Local Keyboard] is selected depends on the
language selected in [User Settings] o [System Settings] o [Language Selection].
• The type of keyboard corresponding to each language is shown below.
Language Keyboard
Japanese Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Japanese)
English (US) *1 Standard keyboard (US ASCII) only
English (UK) *1 Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (UK)
French Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (French)
Italian Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (Italian)
German Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (German)
Spanish Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard Spanish)
Simplified Chinese Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Simplified Chinese)
Traditional Chinese Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Traditional Chinese)
Korean Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Korean)
*1 : If [Marketing Area] is set to Europe and [Language Selection] is set to English, English
(UK) takes effect. If another marketing area and English are selected, English (US)
takes effect.

B. Procedure
• The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] avail-
able from [System 1] under Service Mode.
See P.523
Standard Keyboard Local keyboard
10.5.12 Custom Display Settings-Copier Settings

A. Default Tab
(1) Use
• Selects a default tab display in the copy mode.
Basic : Normal basic screen
Quick Copy : This screen displays all options that can be selected for Paper, Zoom, and
Duplex/Combine functions.
For color functions, all selectable options can be displayed on the screen.
The normal [Basic] screen is also displayed as another tab on the screen.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Basic.
“Basic” Quick Copy
B. Shortcut Key 1/2

(1) Use
• Selects whether to use the shortcut key.
• Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is OFF.
ON “OFF”
• When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys dis-
played on the screen.
C. Quick Settings 1, 2, 3, 4
• It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is
version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines.
(1) Use
• Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place
them on the basic settings screen.
• The registered setting condition can be invoked by only pressing the corresponding easy
setting key.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
• When this setting is set to ON, select the copy functions you wish to register.

10.5.13 Custom Display Settings-Scan/Fax Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is
mounted.
A. Default Tab
(1) Use
• To set the basic screen display in scan/fax mode.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Address Book.
Address Search (LDAP) Job History “Address Book” Direct Input
B. Program Default
(1) Use
• To set the default display for the program screen during scan/fax mode.
• To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during
scan/fax mode
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is PAGE 1.
Temporary One-Touch/ “PAGE1” to PAGE27
C. Address Book Index Default

(1) Use
• To set the default display for the address book screen during scan/fax mode.
• To keep the default display instead of search string on the address book which frequently
changes during scan/fax mode.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Main.
“Favorite” /ABC to WXYZ / etc
D. Shortcut Key 1/2

• [Shortcut Key 2] is not displayed when the optional image controller (IC-412) is installed.
(1) Use
• Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

E. Default Address Book

(1) Use
• Sets a default screen display for the scan/fax mode where the address book is set to be
displayed.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Index.
“Index” Address Type
F. Default Address Type

(1) Use
• When the Default Address Book setting is set to “Address Type”, select an address type
that is displayed as the default in the “Address Book” tab
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Group.
Fax / E-Mail / Box / I-Fax / IP Ad. Fax / PC(SMB) / FTP / WebDAV / “Group”
10.5.14 Custom Display Settings-User Box Settings

A. Default Tab
(1) Use
• Selects a default tab display in the user box mode.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Public.
“Public” Personal System Group
B. Shortcut Key 1/2

• [Shortcut Key 2] is not displayed when the optional image controller (IC-412) is installed.
(1) Use
• Adds the shortcut keys of frequently used user box functions to the basic screen.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

10.5.15 Custom Display Settings-Copy Screen

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or
authentication device 1 is mounted.
However, this menu is available when the key counter is installed and [The next job reser-
vation] is set to License.
A. Copy Operating Screen

(1) Use
• To set the display on the control panel screen during printing.
Yes : The screen shows that the printing is being carried out. The job can be reserved
with [Program Next Job].
No : The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out. The normal copy set-
ting screen will be displayed. The copy reservation is available.
(2)
• The default setting is No.
Yes “No”
10.5.16 Custom Display Settings-Fax Active Screen

• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or
authentication device 1 is mounted.
A. TX Display
(1) Use
• To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting fax.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
B. RX Display
(1) Use
• To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving fax.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
10.5.17 Custom Display Settings-Color Selection Settings

A. Use
• Specifies a color that highlights a selection on the control panel.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Green.
“Green” Blue Yellow Pumpkin

10.5.18 Custom Display Settings-Left Panel Display Default

A. Use
• Specifies an item that is shown as a default on the left panel display.
Job List (List Display) : Displays a list of jobs that are both being printed and waiting
to be printed.
Job List (Status Display) : Displays the status of jobs that are being processed.
Check Job Settings : Displays the setting of the copy job that is being printed.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Job List.
“Job List.” Check Job Settings
10.5.19 Custom Display Settings-Search Option Settings

A. Uppercase and Lowercase Letters
(1) Use
• Select whether or not to differentiate between upper case and lowercase letters.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Differentiate.
“Differentiate” Do Not Differentiate
B. Search Option Screen

(1) Use
• Select whether or not to display [Uppercase and Lowercase Letters] setting in the
advanced search.
• Displaying the search option screen allows changing the search criteria for an individual
search.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Off.
On “Off”
10.5.20 Copier Settings-Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple

• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher is mounted.
A. Use
• To set whether to set the auto booklet when fold & staple is selected.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Auto Select Booklet.
“Auto Select Booklet” OFF
10.5.21 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet

A. Use
• To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when combine or booklet is
selected during auto paper select.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Auto Display Zoom Ratio.
“Auto Display Zoom Ratio” OFF

10.5.22 Copier Settings-Auto Sort/Group Selection

A. Use
• Selects whether to use the auto sort/group selection function when a job has output of
two or more sheets.
Yes : Automatically disables the Auto sort/group selection when a sheet of original is
placed on the ADF and the start key is pressed. Automatically enables the Auto
sort/group selection when two or more sheets of originals are placed on the ADF
and the start key is pressed.
No : Disable the Auto sort/group selection.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Yes.
“Yes” No
10.5.23 Copier Settings-Default Copy Settings

• This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication
devices is set to Set in the [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Management Function
Choice].
• This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to
inform that the vendor's main power switch needs to be checked or coins (a card) are not
inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] o
[Billing Setting] o [Management Function Choice].
A. Use
• To make default settings for the copy mode.
* The machine is initialized at the following timings:
• The main power switch is turned ON.
• Panel is reset.
• In an Interrupt mode.
• Auto Reset
• The password entry screen for account track is changed.
B. Procedure
<Current Setting>
• The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are
registered as the default settings of copy functions.
<Factory Default>
• The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default
settings of copy functions.

10.5.24 Copier Settings-Default Enlarge Display Settings

• Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] o [User Settings] o [Copier Settings] in
the enlarge display mode.
A. Use
• To make default settings for the enlarge display mode.

• Panel is reset.
• Auto Reset
B. Procedure
<Current Setting>
registered as the default settings of copy functions.
<Factory Default>
settings of copy functions.
10.5.25 Copier Settings-When AMS Direction is Incorrect

A. Use
• To set whether to print when the original is set in different direction from the set paper
during auto zoom select.
Print : To print according to the selected direction and size of paper

Delete Job : To display alarm and cancel the job
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Print.
“Print” Delete Job
10.5.26 Copier Settings-Separate Scan Output Method

A. Use
• To set the output mode at Separate Scan setting.
Page Print : Print consecutively during the read operation.
Batch print : Print all at once after reading all data.
Copy setting can be changed after the read operation.
B. Procedure
“Page Print” Batch Print

10.5.27 Copier Settings-Enlargement Rotation

A. Use
• Sets whether to rotate images of which length is more than 297 mm in the main scan
direction (in the horizontal direction on the ADF or the Original glass) in the copying pro-
cess.
Allow : Makes an enlargement rotation only when black is selected for the color set-
ting.
Restrict : Disables an enlargement rotation regardless of the color setting.
B. Procedure
10.5.28 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (Platen)

A. Use
• To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with doc-
ument set on the original glass (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.)
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”
10.5.29 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (ADF)
• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2”.
A. Use
• To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with doc-
ument set on the ADF (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.)
B. Procedure
• The default setting is ON.
“ON” OFF
10.5.30 Copier Settings-Specify Default Tray when APS Off

A. Use
• To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Tray (Tray 1) Before APS OFF.
“Tray Before APS OFF” Default Tray

10.5.31 Copier Settings-Select Tray for Insert Sheet

A. Use
• To select the default setting of the tray for cover sheet paper.
B. Procedure
10.5.32 Copier Settings-Tri-Fold Print Side

• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-526 is mounted.
A. Use
• Specifies the side of copies to be folded.
Inside : Folds paper in three with the printed side in.
Outside: Folds paper in three with the printed side out.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Inside.
Outside “Inside”
10.5.33 Copier Settings-Print Jobs During Copy Operation

A. Use
• To set whether to accept the printing job for print data or fax data during copy operation.
Accept : Receives the print data or fax data to print.
Receive Only : Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is fin-
ished.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Accept.
“Accept” Receive Only
10.5.34 Copier Settings-Automatic Image Rotation

• [It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.”
A. Use
• Sets whether to automatically rotate images to print if the original and specified paper
directions are not consistent with each other.
B. Procedure
“ON” OFF

10.5.35 Copier Settings-Finishing Program

A. Use
• Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen.
To display the button, register the contents of the finishing program.
Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at once by using
the button that appears in the basic settings screen.
B. Procedure
“ON” OFF
• When selecting “ON,” select the contents to be registered in the finishing program.
10.5.36 Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings

• [It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
A. Layout
(1) Use
• To set the initial copy layout setting in card shot mode.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Top/Bottom.
“Top/Bottom” Left/Right (Top Half) Left/Right
B. Zoom
(1) Use
• To set the initial zoom setting in card shot mode.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Full Size.
“Full Size” x 1.0
C. Store Original Size

(1) Use
• To pre-register original sizes that are used in card shot mode.
(2) Procedure
• Enter an original size, name it, and register the data.

10.5.37 Scan/Fax Settings-JPEG Compression Level

A. Use
• To set the JPEG compression method when scanning with JPEG while in scan/fax mode.
High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while
scanning.
Standard : Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scan-
ning.
High Compression : Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering
the data volume while scanning.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Standard.
High Quality “Standard” High Compression
10.5.38 Scan/Fax Settings-Black Compression Level

A. Use
• To set the black compression method for scanning in the black mode while in scan/fax
mode.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is MMR.
MH “MMR”
10.5.39 Scan/Fax Settings-TWAIN Lock Time

• It will not be displayed when the optional image controller IC-412 is mounted.
A. Use
• To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is 120 sec.
“120 sec.” (30 to 300 sec.)

10.5.40 Scan/Fax Settings-Default Scan/Fax Settings

• This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication
devices is set to set in the [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Management Function
Choice].
• This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to
inform that the vendor’s main power switch needs to be checked or coins (a card) are not
inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] o [Bill-
ing Setting] o [Management Function Choice].
A. Use
• To make default settings for the fax/scan mode.

• Panel is reset.
• Auto Reset
B. Procedure
<Current Setting>
registered as the default settings of fax/scan functions.
<Factory Default>
settings of fax/scan functions.
10.5.41 Scan/Fax Settings-Default Enlarge Display Settings
• Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] o [User Settings] o [Scan/Fax Settings]
in the enlarge display mode.
A. Use
• To make default settings for the enlarge display mode.

• Panel is reset.
• Auto Reset
B. Procedure
<Current Setting>
registered as the default settings of fax/scan functions.
<Factory Default>
settings of fax/scan functions.

10.5.42 Scan/Fax Settings-Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level

A. Use
• Selects a compression method applied to scanned data that is produced with the use of
Compact PDF/XPS in the scan/fax mode.
High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while
scanning.
Standard : Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scan-
ning.
High Compression : Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering
the data volume while scanning.
B. Procedure
High Quality “Standard” High Compression
10.5.43 Scan/Fax Settings-Color TIFF Type

A. Use
• Select the compression level used for saving TIFF format data in color.
TIFF(TTN2) : Scan in TTN2.
TIFF(modified TAG) : Scan in modified TAG.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is TIFF(TTN2).
“TIFF(TTN2)” TIFF(modified TAG)

10.5.44 Scan/Fax Settings-OCR Operation Setting

• It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-105) is activated.
A. Use
• To set the method of OCR operation where a searchable PDF file is created.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Prioritize Quality.
“Prioritize Quality” Prioritize Speed
10.5.45 Scan/Fax Settings-Graphic Outlining

A. Use
• To set the precision of outline conversion where outline PDFs are created.
• To set the processing level where scanned document is divided into text areas and image
areas and the text is converted to outlines.
B. Procedure
“OFF” LOW MIDDLE HIGH

10.5.46 Printer Settings-Basic Settings

A. PDL Setting
(1) Use
• To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Auto.
“Auto” PCL PS
B. Number of Copies
(1) Use
• To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC print-
ing.
• To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from
Windows DOS, etc.
(2) Procedure
“1” (1 to 9999)
C. Original Direction
(1) Use
• To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Portrait.
“Portrait” Landscape
D. Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP

(1) Use
• To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during RIP pro-
cess of the current job.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is ON
“ON” OFF
E. A4/A3 l LTR/LGR Auto Switch

(1) Use
• To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size paper, and A3 and Led-
ger (11 x 17) size paper in reading.
NOTE
• When switching the size, the image will be printed in the same magnification.
• The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

F. Banner Sheet Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to print on the banner (front cover) page.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
G. Binding Direction Adjustment

(1) Use
• Specifies the alignment between the sides of paper (binding position adjustment) in
duplex printing.
• To achieve faster printing performance, select Productivity Priority. To address misalign-
ment problems between sides of copies in the horizontal and vertical directions, select
Finishing Priority.
Finishing Priority : Able to optimize sides aligning operation as the process is per-
formed after the machine receives all of the print data.
Productivity Priority : Able to accelerate print speed as sides alignment proceeds
together with data reception and print operation.
Control Adjustments : Comply with the command from the printer driver and does not
take the side alignment step.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Finishing Priority.
“Finishing Priority” Productivity Priority Control Adjustments
H. Line Width Adjustment

(1) Use
• To correct line width of the output data during PC print.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Thin.
“Thin” Normal Thick
I. Gray Background Text Correction

(1) Use
• Letters or lines on a gray background may look thicker than those on a non-gray back-
ground.
ON : Makes characters and lines on a grayscale background thicker and sharpens
the outlines of characters and figures
OFF : Makes grayscale background text correction by selecting Thin, Normal, or Thick
in [Line Width Adjustment]. If selecting “ON” makes lines too thick, select “OFF.”
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF

J. Gray Background Text Correction (Fiery Controller)

• It will be displayed when the optional image controller IC-412 is mounted.
(1) Use
• To make thin lines and small characters on a grayscale background more visible by cor-
recting their line width when the optional image controller IC-412 is installed.
ON : Makes characters and lines on a grayscale background thicker and sharpens
the outlines of characters and figures.
OFF : Makes grayscale background text correction by selecting Thin, Normal, or Thick
in [Line Width Adjustment] If selecting “ON” makes lines too thick, select “OFF.”
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
10.5.47 Printer Settings-Paper Setting

A. Paper Tray
(1) Use
• To set the paper feed tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when paper feed tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing from
Windows DOS, etc.
(2) Procedure
B. Paper Size
(1) Use
• To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing.
• To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from
Windows DOS, etc.
C. 2-Sided Print
(1) Use
• To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the
printer driver.
• To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by
Windows DOS, etc.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

D. Binding Position
(1) Use
• To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver
during PC printing.
• To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by
Windows DOS, etc.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Left Bind.
Top Bind “Left Bind” Right Bind
E. Staple
(1) Use
• To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows
DOS, etc.
(2) Procedure
1 Position 2 Position “OFF”
F. Punch
• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher and punch kit are mounted.
(1) Use
• To select whether to make punch-holes or not when not specified by the printer driver
during PC printing.
• To use when the printer driver cannot specify punching during printing from Windows
DOS, etc.
(2)
2-Hole/3-Hole/4-Hole “OFF”
* The number of punch holes being set is available from [Service Mode] o [Finisher].
G. Banner Paper Tray

(1) Use
• To set the feed tray for printing on the banner (front cover) page.
(2) Procedure

10.5.48 Printer Settings-PCL Settings

A. Font Settings
(1) Use
• To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS,
etc.
• It can be selected from the Resident font or the download font.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Courier.
1. When selecting from the Internal font, touch [Internal], and select the one from the dis-
played font list.
B. Symbol Set
(1) Use
• To set the font symbol set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when the font symbol set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing
from Windows DOS, etc.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Roman-8 or PC8, Code Page 437.
C. Font Size
(1) Use
• To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from
Windows DOS, etc.
• To set scalable font (: Point) and bitmap font (: Pitch) respectively.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is
Scalable Font : 12.00 points
Bitmap Font : 10.00 pitch
D. Line/Page
(1) Use
• To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data.
(2) Procedure
• Default setting value differs depending on the values by the following two different set-
tings. [Utility] o [User Setting] o [Printer Setting] o [Basic Setting] o [Original Direc-
tion] [Utility] o [User Setting] o [Printer Setting] o [Paper Setting] o [Default Paper
Size]
“60 or 64 lines” (5 to 128)

E. CR/LF Mapping
(1) Use
• To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.
Mode 1 : CR o CR-LF LF=LF FF=FF
Mode 2 : CR=CR LFoCR-LF FFoCR-FF
Mode 3 : CRoCR-LF LFoCR-LF FFoCR-FF
OFF : Does not replace
(2) Procedure
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 “OFF”
10.5.49 Printer Settings-PS Setting

A. Print PS Errors
(1) Use
• To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS ras-
terizing.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
B. ICC Profile Settings

(1) Use
• To select a profile to be used for print jobs from a computer when a profile is not specified
by printer driver.
• Possible to set a profile separately for each of the following items.

Photo-RGB Color
Photo-Output Profile
Text-RGB Color
Text-Output Profile
Figure/Table/Graph-RGB Color
Figure/Table/Graph-Output Profile
Simulation Profile
(2) Procedure
• The default settings are shown below.
Photo-RGB Color : Device Color

Photo-Output Profile : Auto
Text-RGB Color : Device Color
Text-Output Profile : Auto
Figure/Table/Graph-RGB Color : Device Color
Figure/Table/Graph-Output Profile : Auto
Simulation Profile : None

C. Auto Trapping
(1) Use
• Select this option to superimpose neighboring colors to print so as to prevent white
space being generated around a picture.
ON : Adjacent colors are overprinted. If white lines appear at borders of colors on a
graph or figure, select “ON.”
OFF : The data is printed as is without being trap-processed.
NOTE
• If color-dulling results at the border of colors when “ON” is selected, change it to
“OFF.”
• Trapping process is sometimes specifiable with the application. When the trap-
ping process is specified in the application, select “OFF” on the machine side.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
D. Black Overprint
(1) Use
• Select this option to print with no white space around black characters or figures.
Text/Figure : Adjacent portion between a text and figure is overprinted with black. Use
this setting when a white line appears around the black portion in a graph
or figure.
Text : Black is overprinted on the adjacent colors in the text portion. Use this
setting when a white line appears around the text.
OFF : The data is printed as is without overprinting with black.
NOTE
• If color-dulling results around the black portion when “ON” is selected, change it
to “OFF.”
• The black overprinting process is sometimes specifiable with the application.
When the trapping process is specified in the application, select “OFF” on the
machine side.
(2) Procedure
Text/Figure Text “OFF”
10.5.50 Printer Settings-XPS Settings

• This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed.
A. Verify XPS Digital Signature

(1) Use
• Selects whether to verify digital signatures attached to XPS (XML Paper Specification)
files when printing the files.
• When digital signature verification is selected, files with invalid digital signatures are not
printed.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

10.5.51 Printer Settings-Print Reports

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or
vendor is mounted.
A. Use
• To output the report or demo page concerning the print setting.
• To check the setting concerning the printer.
The types of report available for output are as follows.
Configuration Page : The list of printer setting will be output.
Demo Page : The test page will be output.
PCL Font List : PCL font list will be output.
PS Font List : PS font list will be output.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [User Setting] o [Printer Setting] o [Print Reports].
2. Select the report to be output.
3. Select the feed tray.
4. Select simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.
10.5.52 Printer Settings-TIFF Image Paper Setting

A. Use
• Select this option to configure how to determine the paper size when directly printing
TIFF or JPEG image data.
Auto : Select this option to calculate the size of the image based on its
resolution and the number of pixels to print the image on paper

that fits the image size.
Select this option to print images on paper of the same size as the
image.
Priority Paper Size : Select this option to print on paper of the priority paper size spec-
ified on the machine. If the image size is larger than the paper
size, it is automatically reduced.
NOTE
• When “Auto” is selected and paper larger than the image size is not in the paper
trays, paper size error occurs.
B. Procedure
“Auto” Priority Paper Size

10.5.53 Change Password

• When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the
authentication is complete.
• This menu is available only when box administrator authentication is established during
user authentication or account track.
A. Use
• To modify the password used for the user authentication.
B. Procedure
• Enter the user authentication password with the keys on the control panel.
Current Password : Enter the user authentication password currently used.
New Password : Enter the new user authentication password to be used.
Retype Password : Enter the new user authentication password again.
NOTE
• When [Password Rules] which can be displayed by the following setting is set to
“ON”, password using the single letter or the password same with the previous
one, less than 8-digit will not be modified.
[Utility] o [Administrator Settings] o [Security Setting]
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, entering the incorrect password three
times will cause access lock. When an access lock occurred, turn the main power
switch OFF, and wait for 10 seconds or more and turn main power switch ON again
to enter the password again.
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Setting] o [Enhanced Security Mode]
10.5.54 Change E-mail Address
• When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the
authentication is complete.
A. Use
• To modify the e-mail address which is registered as a user.
B. Procedure
• Enter the new e-mail address using the keys on the control panel.
10.5.55 Change Icon

• When conducting user authentication, it will be displayed only when the authentication is
complete.
A. Use
• Change the icon specified as registered user information.
B. Procedure
• Select the icon and press [OK].

10.5.56 Register Authentication Settings

• It will be displayed when user authentication (MFP) is completed and the following is met;
[Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] is set to “Allow” in [Utility] o [Administrator Set-
tings] o [System Settings] o [Restrict User Access] o [Restrict Access to Job Settings].
A. Use
• To enable users to register or delete their own biometric/IC card information.
10.5.57 Registered Application Setting-Default Application Selection

• It will be displayed only when the intermediate authentication server is used for user
authentication and user authentication is completed.
However, it cannot be displayed depending on the setting of the application side.
A. Use
• For each user, set the application that is started just after the intermediate authentica-
tion.
B. Procedure
• As the applications registered in MFP appear, select an application you wish to set as the
one to be started at the beginning, and touch [OK].
10.5.58 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting-Link File Error Notification

• It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted.
A. Use
• To set whether to print a job where a link error occurs when you are trying to print a web
page and its links (page or file) from a cellular phone or PDA.
B. Procedure
“Yes” No
10.5.59 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting-Proxy Server Use

A. Use
• To set whether to use a proxy server when communicating with a cellular phone or PDA.
B. Procedure
Yes “No”

10.5.60 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting-Print Settings

A. Use
• To set different print settings used when printing from a cell phone or PDA.
B. Procedure
• The following items can be set.
Basic : 1-sided/2-sided, Full Color/Black, Paper, Finishing
Application : Page Margin, Stamp/Composition

10.6 Administrator Settings

• The Administrator Settings will be available by entering the administrator password (8
digits) set by the Administrator Settings or Service Mode.
(The administrator password is initially set to “12345678.”)
NOTE
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, entering the incorrect administrator
password three times will cause access lock.
The access lock is released after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after
the main power switch is turned OFF and then ON more than 10 seconds later.
The access lock can be released by touching keys as follows.
[Service Mode] o [Enhanced Security] o [Administrator unlocking].
10.6.1 System Settings-Power Save Settings

A. Low Power Mode Settings
(1) Use
• To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
Low power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.
(2) Procedure
“15 min.” (10 to 240)
B. Sleep Mode Settings

(1) Use
• To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
• Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control.
• “OFF” will only be displayed when “No Sleep” in Service Mode is set.
NOTE
• The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to “OFF.”
(2) Procedure
“30 min.” (15 to 240) / OFF
C. Power Save Key

(1) Use
• To set the type of the power save mode which starts by pressing the Power Save key.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Low Power.
“Low Power” Sleep

D. Enter Power Save Mode

(1) Use
• To set whether to immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of
receiving the fax/PC print during power save mode.
Normal : Switches to the power save mode according to the normal power save
mode after the printing.
Immediately : Switches to the power save mode immediately after the printing.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Normal.
“Normal” Immediately
10.6.2 System Settings-Output Settings

A. Print/Fax Output Settings
(1) Use
• To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received.
Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received
Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received
(2) Procedure
<Printer>
<Fax>
• The default setting is Batch Print.
NOTE
• [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
B. Output Tray Settings

mounted.
(1) Use
• To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print
Reports).
(2) Procedure
• The default settings are as follows.
Copy : Tray 1
Print : Tray 1
Report Output : Tray 2
Fax : Tray 2
• [Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-603 is mounted to the finisher
FS-527.

C. Shift Output Each Job

mounted.
(1) Use
• To set whether to offset each job when paper is printed using the finisher.
• Some paper type may fail to be discharged or get deteriorated loading when large vol-
ume copies are printed using the finisher.
This function is used to print large volume copies when finisher is mounted.
(When this function is set to “No”, the paper is discharged without offsetting the paper to
the center of the tray.)
(2) Procedure
“Yes” No
10.6.3 System Settings-Date/Time Settings

A. Use
• To set the date/time and the time zone to start the clock.
• This setting should be carried out for set up.
B. Procedure
• For time zone, set the time difference with the world standard time.
• Setting range for the time zone: -12:00 to +12:00 (by 30 minutes)
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, [Set Data] will be displayed. Touch [Set Data]
and modify the time.
[Administrator Settings] o [Network Settings] o [Detail Settings] o [Time Adjustment
Setting]
10.6.4 System Settings-Daylight Saving Time

A. Use
• To set whether to set the daylight saving time.
• To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time.
B. Procedure
Yes “No”
• When setting to ON, set the time difference to move up.

“60 min.” (1 to 150)

10.6.5 System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings

A. Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use or not to use the weekly timer.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
B. Time Settings
(1) Use
• To set the time to turn ON/OFF the weekly timer for each day of the week.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch the key of the day to be set.
2. Using the 10-key pad, input the ON time and the OFF time.
3. For cancelling the setting, press [Clear].
C. Date Settings
(1) Use
• To select the date or the day of the week for the weekly timer to function.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the Year/Month with [+] / [-] keys.
2. For setting by the date, touch the appropriate key of the day.
3. For setting by the day of the week, touch the appropriate key of the week by [Daily Set-
ting].
4. Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted, and touch [OK].
D. Select Time for Power Save

(1) Use
• To set the time to turn power OFF/ON when the weekly timer is set and the power is ON.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
<Set Time for Power Save>

• Using the 10-key pad, input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again.
E. Password for Non-Business Hours

(1) Use
• To set whether to input the password before using when the weekly timer is set.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
• When setting to Yes, enter the password (eight digits).

10.6.6 System Settings-Restrict User Access

A. Copy Program Lock Settings
(1) Use
• To set the prohibition for modifying the registered copy program.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch the key for the appropriate copy program.
2. Touch [OK].
B. Delete Saved Copy Program

(1) Use
• To delete the registered program job.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch the appropriate program job.
2. Touch [Delete].
3. Touch [Yes] on the check screen to delete the program job.
C. Restrict Access to Job Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or
vendor 2 is mounted.
(1) Changing Job Priority

<Use>
• To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the job.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Allow.
“Allow” Restrict
(2) Delete Other User Jobs

<Use>
• To set whether to allow or restrict job delete by other users when the user is authenti-
cated.
<Procedure>
(3) Registering and Changing Addresses

<Use>
• To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address.
<Procedure>
NOTE
• [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”.

(4) Changing Zoom Ratio

<Use>
• To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification.
<Procedure>
(5) Change the “From” Address

<Use>
• To set whether or not to prohibit the registered from address to be changed.
<Procedure>
(6) Change Registered Overlay

<Use>
• Selects allow or restrict for the change of registered overlay.
<Procedure>
(7) Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration

<Use>
• Allow or restrict the registration or deletion of authentication information.
<Procedure>
D. Restrict Operation
(1) Restrict Broadcasting
<Use>
• To set whether or not to prohibit sending the fax to more than one address.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”

10.6.7 System Settings-Expert Adjustment

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted.
(It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted or when the following setting
shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Software Switch Setting])
A. AE Level Adjustment
(1) Use
• To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) the larger the value becomes the more
emphasized the background will be.
To make the background level foggier : Increase the setting value
To make the background level less foggy : Decrease the setting value
(2) Procedure
“2” (0 to 4)

B. Printer Adjustment
(1) Leading Edge Adjustment
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is
mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set.
• This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter
is set to Set by [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Management Function Choice].
<Use>
• To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types
in the manual bypass tray.
• The PH unit has been replaced.
• The paper type has been changed.
• The print image deviates in the sub scan direction.
• A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
• Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick
2, thick 3, thick 4, transparencies, and envelopes.
<Procedure>
Width A
A0P0F3C503DA
Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
Specifications: 4.2 r 0.5 mm

Setting range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)
1. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.

2. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
3. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Printer Adjustment] o [Leading
Edge Adjustment].
4. Select the [Normal].
5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
6. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
7. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the cur-
rent one.
If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the cur-
rent one.
10. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check
again.
11. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
12. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick 1 to 3, OHP, and envelope.

(2) Centering
<Use>
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
• A paper feed unit has been added.
• The print image deviates in the main scan direction.
<Procedure>
Width A
A0P0F3C504DA
Width A on the test print produced should fall within the following range.

2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Printer Adjustment] o [Centering].
3. Select the paper source to be adjusted.
rent one.
rent one.
again.
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the bypass.)

(3) Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)

<Use>
• Makes an adjustment by changing the image write start position in the sub scan direction
on the 2nd side of duplex printing for individual types of paper.
• When the 2nd side image on paper fed from the tray is shifted in the sub scan direction.
2 and thick 3.
<Procedure>
Width A
Backside
A0P0F3C503DA
• Width A on the test print produced should fall within the following range.
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test print.

2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Printer Adjustment] o [Leading
Edge Adjustment (Duplex side 2)].
3. Select the [Normal].
rent one.
rent one.
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test print
again.
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick 1 to 3, OHP, and envelope.

(4) Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)

<Use>
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-
sided mode.
• To use when the optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is set up.
• The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.
<Procedure>
Width A
Backside
A0P0F3C504DA
• Width A on the test print produced should fall within the following range.
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test print.


2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Printer Adjustment] o [Centering
(Duplex 2nd Side)].
rent one.
rent one.
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test print on the backside of the copy.
again.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray.)

(5) Erase Leading Edge

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”.
[Service Mode] o [Enhanced Security] o [Administrator Feature Level]
<Use>
• To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
• To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper.
• To make this setting independently for Front and Back sides.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is “4 mm”.
“4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm

(6) Vertical Adjustment

<Use>
• To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed.
• The l adjustment becomes necessary.
• The printed image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk).
• When the printed image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.
2, thick 3 and thick 4.
<Procedure>
A0P0F3C505DA
• Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges.
Width A: equivalent to one grid
Width B: equivalent to 48 grids
Specifications
A: 7.9 to 8.3
B: 389.1 to 392.1
Setting Range
A, B: -7 to +7
1. Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 × 17 plain paper.
3. Touch these keys in this order: [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Vertical
Adjustment].
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.
5. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test
pattern.
6. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+]/[-]
keys.
If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the
current one.
If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the
current one.
7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern again.
8. Check width A and width B on the test pattern.
9. If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a
check again.
10. If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for [Thick 1 to 3], [OHP], and [Envelope]. (Check
width A only for [OHP] and [Envelope].)

(7) Media Adjustment

<Use>
• Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each
paper type.
• This function is provided to open [Transfer Output Fine Adjustment] o[2nd Transfer
Adjust] of Service Mode up to administrator and the fine-adjusted value is reflected in the
Service Mode setting.
• To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
• Pressing the [AUTO] key down activates the 2nd image transfer amperage upper and
lower limit control. In this case, the machine uses the voltage determined by the transfer
voltage control and the 2nd image transfer output fine adjustment value does not take
effect.
<Procedure>

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Expert Adjustment] o [Printer Adjustment] o [Media
Adjustment].
3. Select the side of the image (1st side or 2nd side), on which the transfer failure occurs.
NOTE
• For envelopes, OHP film and banner thick, only 1st side can be selected.
4. Select the paper type with the transfer failure.

5. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys.
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image),
increase the setting value.
To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image),
decrease the setting value.
6. Touch [OK] to validate the adjustment value.
7. Check the print image for any image problem.
* To automatically control the 2nd image transfer output without using the 2nd image trans-
fer output fine adjustment value, press [Auto].

C. Finisher Adjustment
(1) Center Staple Position
<Use>
• Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple func-
tion.
tion.
<Procedure>
A11PF3C500DA
NOTE
• After half-fold position adjustment, make this center staple position adjustment.
1. Place five sheets of originals on the ADF.

2. Make a set of copy in the saddle stitching mode.
3. Check the amount of horizontal deviation (A) between the staple and the half fold posi-
tions on the set of copy.
Specification A: 0 ± 1.0 mm
Adjustment range: -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
4. If (A) is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.

6. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [Center
Staple Position].
7. Touch the paper size where staple position is adjusted.
8. Look at the copy and adjust the staple position with the [+]/[-] key.
A11PF3C501DA
9. Touch [OK].
10. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of deviation (A).

(2) Half-Fold Position

<Use>
• Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing.
<Procedure>
Exit direction
A11PF3C502DA
1. Place two sheets of originals on the ADF.

2. Make a copy in the folding mode.
3. Fold the copies along the crease.
4. Measure the amount of deviation (A).

7. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [Half-Fold
Position].
8. Touch the paper size where half-fold position is adjusted.
9. Look at the copy and adjust the half-fold position with the [+]/[-] key.
A11PF3C503DA
10. Touch [OK].


(3) Tri-Fold Position Adjustment

<Use>
• Use this adjustment to adjust tri-fold position in tri-fold printing.
<Procedure>
First fold
C A11PF3C505DA
1. Make a copy sample in the tri-folding mode.

2. Check that the tri-fold positions (a) on the copy are within the specified range.
Specification a: 95 mm (A4S), 89.4 mm (8.5x11S), 88 mm (16KS)


4. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [Tri-Fold
Position Adjustment].
5. Touch the paper size where tri-fold position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the tri-fold position with the [+]/[-] key.
To make width (a) greater : Enter the value of [+]
To make width (a) smaller : Enter the value of [-]
A11PF3C504DA
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of deviation (a).

(4) Punch Vertical Position Adjustment

<Use>
• Adjusts the vertical position of the punch holes.
<Procedure>
A A2
A
A A A1
A
A A2
A11TF3C510DA
1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.

2. Make an adjustment so that 1/2 of the length A is within the following standard range.
Specifications:
2-4 hole: A=80 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between
holes.), 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
2-3 hole (2 hole): A=70 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance
between holes.), 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
SWE4 hole: B1=70 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance

4. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [Punch
Vertical Position Adjustment].
5. Touch the paper size where punch vertical position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch vertical position with the [+]/[-] key.
To move the hole position upward: Enter the value of [+]
To move the hole position downward: Enter the value of [-]
A11TF3C501DA
7. Touch [OK].

(5) Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment

<Use>
• To change the horizontal position of the punch holes.
<Procedure>
B B B
A11TF3C511DA

2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the following range.
<For PK-516>
Specification B: 9.5 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm (2-4 hole), 10.5 mm (SWE4 hole)
<For PK-517>
Specification B: 9.5 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-4 hole),
10.5 mm ± 1.0 mm (SWE4 hole)

Horizontal Position Adjustment].
5. <For PK-516>
Touch the paper size where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
<For PK-517>
Touch the paper type where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+]/ [-] key.
To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
To make width a smaller: Enter the value of [-]
7.
A11TF3C503DA
8. Touch [OK].
9. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of deviation (B).

(6) Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment

<Use>
• Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body.
• To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the
punch registration section.
<Procedure>
Regist Loop Size Adjustment].
3. Touch the paper size where punch regist loop size is adjusted.
4. Set the correction value using the [+]/[-] keys.
Misaligned punched holes: Enter the value of [+]
Wrinkled paper: Enter the value of [-]
5. Touch [OK].
(7) Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment

<Use>
• Adjusts the sensitivity (light intensity) of the PK punch front sensor of the punch kit.
• This adjustment is made at the time of setup.
<Procedure>
Edge Sensor Adjustment].
3. Touch Start key.
4. Confirm that the result is OK.
NOTE
• When NG appears, check whether the punch kit is properly installed.
5. Touch [OK].

(8) Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment

<Use>
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the sub-scanning direction when ZU is in use.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.
<Procedure>
A
A
A A
A
A
A109F3C501DA

2. Make an adjustment so that the width A is within the following range.
Standard value
• It is possible to adjust the A dimension of half of the top and bottom by ± 0.5 mm from the
standard value.
• It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.
A Top and bottom center gap

2-4 hole 80 ± 0.5
2-3 hole (2 hole) 70 ± 0.5 Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
2-3 hole (3 hole) 108 ± 0.5
Setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm (1step = 0.1 mm)

4. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [Vertical
Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
5. Select [ALL] and make the setting using [+] or [-].
To make width A greater: Enter the Value of [+]
To make width A smaller: Enter the Value of [-]
NOTE
• The adjustment setting value used for each paper size is the value set with [ALL]
plus the value set for each paper size.
6. Touch [OK].
7. Make copies in the punch mode again and check that the punch hole positions have
been adjusted properly.

(9) Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment

<Use>
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the main scanning direction when ZU is in use.
<Procedure>
B B B
A109F3C502DA

Standard value: B = 12.0 mm

Setting range: -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)

4. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [Horizontal
Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
5. Make the setting using [+] or [-].
To make width B greater: Enter the Value of [+]
To make width B smaller: Enter the Value of [-]
6. Touch [OK].

(10) 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment

2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment
<Use>
• To adjust the positions of the 1st Z-fold and 2nd Z-fold for the Z-fold mode.
<Procedure>
Length of the first fold

Position of the first fold
Position of the second fold Length of the second fold
A109F3C500DA
1. Make copies in the Z-fold mode.

2. Make an adjustment so that the width a is within the following range.
Length of 1st fold Length a Length L

11 x 17 108 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 215 mm
A3 105 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 209 mm
B4 91 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 181 mm

8.5 x 14 - - Less than 241.7 mm
8K 98 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 194 mm
NOTE
• Length of the 1st fold is for standard value.
• The adjustable range for B4 size is only between -2.0 mm and +2.0 mm.
• 8.5 X 14 is available for only an half fold.

4. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [1st Z-Fold
Position Adjustment] or [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment].
To increase the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a negative value with [-] key.
To decrease the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a positive value with [+] key.
NOTE
6. Touch [OK].
7. Make copies in the Z-fold mode and check for possible deviation from the specified 1st
and 2nd Z-fold positions.

(11) Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor

<Use>
• To adjust sensitivity (light intensity) of the paper size detect board (PSDTB) of the punch
unit of ZU.
<Procedure>
Unit Size Detect Sensor].
3. Touch Start key.
NOTE
• When NG appears, check whether the punch unit is properly installed.
5. Touch [OK].
(12) Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment

<Use>
• To make automatic post inserter size detection adjustments separately in each of the
upper and lower trays.
• Make this adjustment at the time of setup or when the post inserter cannot make proper
size detection.
• Make this adjustment after performing PI displacement adjustment.
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Finisher Adjustment] o [Post
Inserter Tray Size Adjustment].
3. Touch [Upper Tray].
4. Place A4S paper on the upper tray and touch [A4 ].
5. Touch Start key.
7. Touch [Lower Tray].
8. Place A4S paper on the lower tray and touch [A4 ].
9. Touch Start key.
11. Touch [OK].

D. Density Adjustment
(1) Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
<Use>
• To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transpar-
encies. (Only black color adjustable for OHP transparencies)
• To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP
transparencies
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Density Adjustment].
3. Select a type of thick paper and a color that need to be adjusted.
4. Touch the Lighter or Darker key to correct the image density.
Light color: Touch the Darker key.
Dark color: Touch the Lighter key.
(2) Black Image Density

<Use>
• To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black print
• To vary the density of the printed image of a black print
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Density Adjustment] o [Black
Image Density].
3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density.
If the black is light, touch the Darker key.
If the black is dark, touch the Lighter key.

E. Image Stabilization
(1) Image Stabilization Only
<Use>
• The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of
image stabilization control.
• Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been executed.
• When [D Max Density] and [Background Voltage Margin] of Service Mode are changed.
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Image Stabilization] o [Image Sta-
bilization Only].
3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.
The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence.
4. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue.
(2) Initialize+Image Stabilization

<Use>
• To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabiliza-
tion control has been initialized.
• Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been executed.
• Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after image stabilization
has been executed.
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Image Stabilization] o
[Initialize+Image Stabilization].
The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence.

(3) Image Stabilization Setting

<Use>
• To change the type and timing of image stabilization.
• To provide the desirable image stabilization control that depends on customer’s machine
usage pattern, i.e. the ratio of color to black print.
Standard : This mode is suitable for low-volume users and reduces the
number of times image stabilization is carried out when the
main power switch is turned ON.
If the change of absolute humidity is detected during warm-up,
normal stabilization is performed during warm-up.
Color Priority : This mode is suitable for high-volume and high ratio of color
print users.
Color stabilization sequence is performed unconditionally
when the main power switch and the sub power switch are
turned ON.
Black & White Priority : This mode is suitable for users who use mainly black print and
use less color print. It provides monochrome stabilization and
reduces the number of times image stabilization is carried out
when the main power switch is turned ON. If the change of
absolute humidity is detected during warm-up, monochrome
stabilization is performed during the warm-up and color stabili-
zation is performed before color printing.
<Procedure>
“Standard” Color Priority Black & White Priority

F. Paper Separation Adjustment

(1) Use
• For duplex printing of thin paper, the paper separation position is adjusted for the first
and second sides of paper.
• To adjust the balance between paper separation and image transfer performances by
changing the paper separation position in duplex printing of thin paper (64 g/ m2) in hot
and humid conditions.
(2) Procedure

2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Paper Separation Adjustment].
3. Select [Front] or [Back].
4. Change the setting value with [+] or [-] key.
Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value
Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value
5. Touch [OK] to determine the adjusted value.
6. Make a print and check the image.

G. Color Registration Adjust

(1) Color Registration Adjust (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan)

<Use>
• To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or
thick paper.
• To correct any color shift.
2, thick 3 and thick 4.
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Color Registration Adjust].
3. Load tray 1 with A3/11x17 or A4/8 1/2 x11 normal paper.
5. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line of
each color at positions X and Y.
6. Select the color to be adjusted.
7. Using the [+] / [-] key, change the setting value as necessary. (At this time, only the line
of the selected color moves.)
If the cross deviates in the direction of A, increase the setting.
If the cross deviates in the direction of B, decrease the setting.
8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.

Check Procedure
Check point X, Y
Adjustment for X direction: If the cross deviates in the direction of A,

Check point X increase the setting.
If the cross deviates in the direction of B,
decrease the setting.
Direction of A Direction of B
Adjustment for Y direction: If the cross deviates in the direction of A,

Check point Y increase the setting.
A0P0F3C511DA

H. Gradation Adjustment
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] o [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Dev. Bias Choice]
(1) Use
• To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and
the readings taken by the scanner.
• Color reproduction performance becomes poor.
• The IU has been replaced.
• The image transfer belt unit has been replaced.
Printer (Gradation) : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image
as it adjusts.
Printer (Resolution) : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters
and lines as it adjusts.
Copy : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to
be stored in the memory as it adjusts.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Stabilizer] and the Start key to perform image stabilization.
NOTE
• Before executing Gradation adjust, be sure to perform Stabilizer.
3. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Gradation Adjustment].
4. Select the appropriate mode for the gradation adjustment.
6. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass.
7. Place ten blank sheets of A3/11 x 17 paper on the test pattern and lower the original
cover.
8. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
9. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 2 through 7 twice (a total of three times).
If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.

I. Scanner Area
• Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.
• If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-
10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-1
0+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10
COLOR CHART COLOR CHART
P2
4.0 2.5 2.2
1.0
BK
4.5
2.8
2.0
3.2
Y M C
1.1
C
1.8
3.6
M
1.25 1.4 1.6 C䋫M C䋫Y Y䋫M
Y
Color is “hue”, ᑥⅱⅳ
lightness is “value”, ଢ↺ↄ
saturation is “chroma”: ⅱↅ↳ⅺↄ
R
this is the world of color. ↂ↻ⅻᑥࢢ↝ɭမ↖ↈ⅛
G
The quality of color which can be
Hue described by words such as red, ᑥႻ ⿒‫ޔ‬㤛‫ޔ‬㕍ߣ޿߁ࠃ߁ߦ‫ࠇߙࠇߘޔ‬඙೎
ߐࠇࠆ㨬⦡޽޿㨭ࠍ⦡⋧ߣ޿޿߹ߔ‫ޕ‬
A
yellow, blue etc. ᵦᴾᵆᵦᶃᶓᵇ
B
The quality of color which can be 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Value described by words such as light,
dark etc., relating the color to a gray
ଢࡇ
ᵴᴾᵆᵴᵿᶊᶓᶃᵇ
⦡ߣ⦡ࠍᲧセߒߡ‫ޔ‬᣿ࠆ޿⦡ߣ߆ᥧ޿⦡
ߣ޿߁ࠃ߁ߦ‫ߪߦ⦡ޔ‬㨬᣿ࠆߐ㨭ߩᐲว޿
߇޽ࠅ߹ߔ‫ޕ‬
of a similar lightness.
ߎߩࠃ߁ߦ⦡⋧ߦ㑐ଥߥߊᲧセߢ߈ࠆ
㨬᣿ࠆߐ㨭ߩᐲว޿ࠍ᣿ᐲߣ๭ࠎߢ޿
߹ߔ‫ޕ‬
-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-
10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-1
Chroma 0+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10
described by words such as vivid,
dull etc., describing the extent to
which a color differs from a gray
ࢢࡇ ⦡⋧߿᣿ᐲߣߪ߹ߚ೎ߦ‫ޔ‬㨬޽ߑ߿߆ߐ㨭
ߩᐲว޿ࠍ␜ߔᕈ⾰ࠍᓀᐲߣ๭ࠎߢ޿߹
ᵡᴾᵆᵡᶆᶐᶍᶋᵿᵇ ߔ‫ޕ‬
having the same value.
MODEL :
MACHINE S/N :
DATE : / / °C %RH
COUNTER :
COPY DENSITY :
4.0 2.5 2.2
1.0 COLOR BALANCE Y :
4.5
2.8 M:
2.0 C :
3.2
BK :
1.1
P2
D
Y M C 1.8 OTHERS :
3.6
1.25 1.4 1.6

C䋫M C䋫Y Y䋫M
CHART NO. : CTC-008-01
PART NO. : 4036-7940-01
P1 P1 Printed In Japan
-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-
10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-1
0+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10
B
Original reference
A0P0F3C506DA
Adjustment item Ref.

A: Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge Adjustment P.335
B: Scanner Adjustment: Centering P.336

C: Horizontal Adjustment P.337
D: Vertical Adjustment P.338

(1) Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge

<Use>
• To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor
and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start position in
the main scan direction.
• When the original glass is replaced.
• When the original width scale is replaced.
<Procedure>
A0P0F3C507DA
• A width on the color chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that
the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the
Printer Adjustment.
Specifications
A: ± 0.5 mm
Setting range
-5.0 to +5.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Scanner Adjustment] o [Scanner
Adjustment: Leading Edge].
3. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the
scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a copy.
5. Check point A on the image of the test print.
6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

(2) Scanner Adjustment: Centering

<Use>
• To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accu-
racy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
• When the CCD unit is replaced.
• The scanner home sensor has been replaced.
<Procedure>
A0P0F3C508DA
• B width on the color chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that
the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the
Printer Adjustment.
Specifications
B: ± 1.0 mm
Setting range
-10.0 to +10.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)
1. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.

2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Scanner Adjustment] o [Scanner
Adjustment: Centering].
scale.
5. Check point B on the image of the test print.
If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
8. Check point B of the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.

(3) Horizontal Adjustment

<Use>
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section.
• The CCD unit has been replaced.
<Procedure>
A0P0F3C509DA
• Measure C width on the color chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within
the following specification.
Specifications
C: ± 1.0 mm
Setting range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Scanner Adjustment] o [Horizontal
Adjustment].
scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a test print.
5. Check the C width on the image of the test print.
If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.

(4) Vertical Adjustment

<Use>
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section
• The exposure unit has been replaced.
• The scanner motor has been replaced.
• The scanner drive cables have been replaced.
<Procedure>
A0P0F3C510DA
• Measure D width on the color chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within
Specifications
D: ± 1.5 mm
Setting Range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Scanner Adjustment] o [Vertical
Adjustment].
scale.
5. Check the D width on the image of the test print.
If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.

J. ADF Adjustment
(1) Centering
<Use>
• To adjust the read position in the Main Scanning Direction.
• When the result is Unable in the [Centering Auto Adjustment].
• When ADF has been replaced.
<Procedure>
A0P0F3C600DA
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
3. Check that the difference in the widths of b between the chart and the copy sample falls
within the specified range.
Specification b: 0 ± 2.0 mm
5. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [ADF Adjustment] o [Centering].
6. Look at the copy and make adjustment with the [+]/[-] key.
If the difference in the widths of A is greater than the specifications, enter the [+] value.
If the difference in the widths of A is smaller than the specifications, enter the [-] value.
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of A falls

(2) Original Stop Position

<Use>
• To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF
modes.
• When the result is Unable in the [Auto Adj. of Stop Position].
<Procedure>
B
A0P0F3C601DA
NOTE
• In the same way place the chart with the blank side facing up in the document feed
tray in the duplex mode and make a copy. Check the difference in the widths of a
between the chart and the second sided surface of the copy sample.
3. Check that the difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample falls
Specification B: 0 ± 2.0 mm

5. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [ADF Adjustment] o [Original Stop
Position].
6. Look at the copy and adjust [Front] or [Back] with the [+]/[-] key.
If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the [+] value.
If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the [-] value.
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of B falls

(3) Centering Auto Adjustment

<Use>
• To automatically adjust the read position in the Main Scanning Direction.
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [ADF Adjustment] o [Centering
Auto Adjustment].
5. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [New].
6. Touch [Close].
NOTE
• If the result is Unable:
Check and correct the skew of the document.
• Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
See P.340
(4) Auto Adj. of Stop Position

<Use>
• To automatically adjust the read position for the Sub Scanning Direction.
• To check skew feed.
<Procedure>
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [ADF Adjustment] o [Auto Adj. of
Stop Position].
3. Touch [Front] or [Back].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray.
[Front]: Set the chart with its arrow side facing upward.
[Back]: Set the chart with its blank side facing upward.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [New].
7. Touch [Close].
NOTE
• If the result is Unable:
Check and correct the skew of the document.
See P.340

K. Line Detection
(1) Prior Detection Setting
<Use>
• To set whether or not to perform pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
• To set the detection level of the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
• To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected.
• Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain
on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the lines.
TYPE1 : Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark. (warning code: D-1/D-2)
TYPE2 : Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen.
TYPE3 : Warning will be displayed on all screens.
OFF : Warning will not be displayed.
• Use when changing the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the original glass.
Low : Stain on the glass will not be detected easily.
Normal : Normal detection level
High : Stain on the glass will easily be detected.
<Procedure>
“Yes” No
NOTE
• [Warning Level] and [Detection Level] can be set when “Yes” is selected.
• Be aware that selecting “No” and performing the pre-detection with the following
setting will display “NG.”
[Service Mode] o [Machine] o [Split Line Prior Detection]
• When “No” is selected, the original glass cleaning operation after the job ends
does not operate.
<Warning Level>
• The default setting is TYPE2.
TYPE1 “TYPE2” TYPE3 OFF
<Detection Level>
• The default setting is Std.
Low “Std.” High
(2) Feed Cleaning Settings

<Use>
• To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original
glass when feeding the original.
• Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the
ADF original glass when feeding the original.
Do not remove : The glass will stop moving when the original is fed, and will not per-
form removing the stain.
Remove : The glass will move between originals when feeding the original.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Remove.
Do not remove “Remove”

L. Trail Edge Adjust

(1) Use
• To adjust trail edge if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or
thick paper.
• To correct any color shift at trail edge.
• Able to make a setting on a process speed basis independently for each paper type of
plain paper (color), thick 1/1+, and thick 2/3/4.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Color Registration Adjust].
3. Load manual bypass tray with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/2 x 11 normal paper.
4. Select a paper type that is set on the manual bypass tray.
7. Using the [+] / [-] key, change the setting value as necessary.
Check Procedure
Check point Z
compare
Adjustment for Z direction: If the cross deviates in the direction of A,
Check point Z increase the setting.
A0P0F3C502DA

M. User Paper Settings

(1) Use
• To set and register individual user paper that includes different basic weight and transfer
output fine adjustment data.
• To register a paper type that is suitable for customer’s intended use and use environ-
ment.
• The feature available from [Service Mode] o [System 2] o [User Paper Settings] is
extended to Administrator. However, the fusing temperature setting is not possible in
Administrator Settings.
• The user paper registration keys and corresponding paper types are as follows:
User Paper 1, 2 : Plain paper
User Paper 3 : Thick 1
User Paper 4 : Thick 1+
(2) Procedure
2. Touch [System Settings] o [Expert Adjustment] o [Forward] o [User Paper Settings].
3. Select the desired key from [User Paper 1] to [User Paper 6] to register user paper.
4. Select [Basic Weight] and enter a value with the [+]/ [-] key.
5. Select one from the following; [Media Front - Color], [Media Front - Black], [Media Back-
Color], or [Media Back - Black]. Enter a 2nd transfer output value with the [+]/[-] key.
Setting range: -7 to +8 (1 step: 1 increment or decrement)
6. Load the tray with A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S paper.

7. Touch [Test Pattern Output]. Specify a paper feed tray and select either 1st side or 2nd
side.
8. Press the Start key and check the image of the output test pattern. If the image is not
acceptable, adjust the settings, output and check a test pattern again.
(3) Test pattern in user paper settings

• The printable test pattern for user paper settings is provided to ease determining the
most appropriate 2nd transfer output value used when customizing user paper.
• This test pattern changes output voltage as shown below based on the standard voltage
A (voltage determined by the 2nd image transfer auto transfer voltage control) on a sheet
of paper.
A +600 V
A +400 V
A +200 V
A 0V
A -200 V
A -400 V
A -600 V A: standard voltage
A0P0F3C539DA

N. Erase Adjustment
(1) Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings
<Use>
• Configure Non-Image Area operation settings.
Auto : Automatically detects the background density of the original, and selects
either [Bevel] or [Rectangular] accordingly.
Specify : Allows you to manually specify an erase method and original density. As an
erase method, select [Bevel] or [Rectangular]. Specify an original density from
five levels.
<Procedure>
“Auto” Specify
10.6.8 System Settings-List/Counter

A. Management List
(It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows
that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
(1) Job Settings List

<Use>
• To output the value set by the setting menu.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Job Settings List].
3. Select simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.
B. Paper Size/Type Counter

<Use>
• To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type, and to set the
count.
<Procedure>
1. Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys.
2. Select the paper type.
3. Touch the paper size key to select the paper size.

C. Meter Counter List

• Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication
device, management device 2, vendor 2 is mounted.
<Use>
• To output the meter counter list.
• To print out the list in this setting because counter list cannot be printed when the follow-
ing setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Meter Counter] o [Details]
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Meter Counter List].
2. Select the Feed tray.
3. Select Simplex or Duplex print, and touch the Start key.
D. Check Consumables List

• Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication
device, management device 2, vendor 2 is mounted.
<Use>
• To output the consumable life list.
• To print out the list in this setting because the list cannot be printed when the following
setting shows that Vendor is mounted.
[Utility] o [Check Consumable Life]
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Consumable Life List].

3. Select Simplex or Duplex print, and touch the Start key.
10.6.9 System Settings-Reset Settings

A. System Auto Reset
(1) Use
• To set the period of time until system auto reset starts functioning.
(2) Procedure
<Priority Mode>
• To set the functions displayed during system auto reset from Copy and Scan/Fax.
• The default setting is Copy.

“Copy” Scan/Fax
<System Auto Reset Time>

“1 min.” (1 to 9, OFF)

B. Auto Reset
(1) Use
• To set the period of time until auto reset starts functioning in “Copy” and “Scan/Fax.”
(2) Procedure
“1 min.” (1 to 9, No)
C. Job Reset
(1) When Account is changed
mounted.
<Use>
• Selects whether to reset (initialize) a machine when the key counter is unplugged, a
magnetic card is pulled out, or user authentication/account track is set.
• To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed
through the use of a data management device.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Reset.
“Reset” Do Not Reset
(2) When Original is set on ADF
<Use>
• Select whether to reset the function when originals are placed on the ADF.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Do Not Reset.
Reset “Do Not Reset”
(3) Next Job: Staple Setting

<Use>
• To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the staple setting job started and the
next job setting has become available.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(4) Next Job: Original Set/Bind Direction

<Use>
• To set whether to cancel the original set/bind direction when the job (which original set/
bind direction is set) started and the next job setting has become available.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”

(5) Next Job: Reset Data After Job

<Use>
• To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting fax when the scanning is
finished or fax is transmitted, making the next job setting available.
(The address will be cleared even when [OFF] is selected.)
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
10.6.10 System Settings-User Box Settings

A. Delete Unused User Box
(1) Use
• To delete the unnecessary box without data.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Unused User Box].
2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen.
B. Delete Secure Print Documents

(1) Use
• To delete the whole classified documents in the box.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Secure Documents].
2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen.
C. Auto Delete Secure Document

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to delete the confidential documents in the box after a certain
period of time. It also sets the period of time to store data.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is 1 Day.
12 Hours “1 Day” 2 Days 3 Days 7 Days 30 Days Save
D. Encrypted PDF Delete Time

(1) Use
• Specifies whether to delete encrypted PDF data stored in the box after a lapse of a pre-
determined period of time.
Sets the time period for which encrypted PDF data can be stored.
(2) Procedure

E. ID & Print Delete Time

(1) Use
• Specifies whether to delete ID & print data stored in the box after a lapse of a predeter-
mined period of time.
Sets the time period for which ID & print data can be stored
(2) Procedure
F. Document Hold Setting

(1) Use
• Selects whether to store the document again in the box after it was retrieved from the
box.
• If the function is set to No, the document is automatically deleted after it was retrieved.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
G. External Memory Function Settings

(1) Use
• This operation enables or disables functions using an external memory connected to this
machine.
• Capability to enable [Save Document] and [Print Document] separately.
Save Document : a function that saves scanned documents into the external memory
using [Save Document] in the box mode.
Print Document : a function that prints and sends documents saved in the external
memory using [Use Document] in the box mode.
(2) Procedure
<Save Document>
ON “OFF”
<Print Document>
“ON” OFF
H. Allow/Restrict User Box

(1) Use
• Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User
Box.
(2) Procedure
“Allow” Prohibit

I. ID & Print Delete after Print Setting

(1) Use
• Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been
deleted after printed.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Confirm with User.
“Confirm with User” Always Delete
J. Document Delete Time Setting

(1) Use
• This function enables the administrator to specify the time to delete a document from a
User Box when you cannot specify the document deletion time. When automatically
specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and set the deletion time.
(2) Procedure
10.6.11 System Settings-Standard Size Setting

A. Original Glass Original Size Detect

(1) Use
• To change the document size detection table.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Table1.
“Table1” Table2
B. Foolscap Size Setting

(1) Use
• To set the size for foolscap paper.
• Upon setup.
(2) Procedure
• Select the size from among the following five.
220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 “8 x 13”

10.6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings

A. Header/Footer Settings
(1) Use
• Saves or deletes header/footer settings.
• Able to obtain registered header/footer data by [Application] o [Stamp/Composition]
(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register new headers and footers.
B. Fax TX Settings
(1) Use
• Specifies whether to reset a stamp setting when fax is sent.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Cancel.
“Cancel” Do Not Cancel
10.6.13 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings

A. Use
• Specifies whether to print a stamp/page number on blank pages.
B. Procedure
“Print” Do Not Print
10.6.14 System Settings-Application Key Settings
• This is displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 or LK-103) is activated.
A. Use
• To assign the additional functions provided by i-Option to the application keys.
• This settings allow free application key assignment to additional functions provided by i-
Option as well as to “User Box”, “Fax/Scan” and “Copy” to which the application keys
were conventionally assigned. (However, Key 0 is assigned to the function of displaying
the application menu so that other functions cannot be assigned to Key 0.)
• The functions that can be assigned are as follows:
Copy, Fax/Scan, User Box, Image Panel, Web Browser, My Panel
B. Procedure
1. Select [Key 1] or [Key 2].
2. Select a function to which the key is assigned, and touch [OK].

10.6.15 System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings

A. Use
• Configure whether to start processing for the next job when the current job stops due to
running out of paper in the paper tray.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Skip Job Operation Settings].
2. Make settings and touch [OK].
10.6.16 System Settings-Default Bypass Paper Type Setting

A. Use
• Configure the initial settings for the paper type to be used for the bypass tray.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Default Bypass Paper Type Setting].
2. Select the desired paper type and touch [OK].
10.6.17 System Settings-Page Number Print Position

A. Use
• Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-
sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same posi-
tion on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Page Number Print Position].
2. Check test print and fine adjust the position.
10.6.18 System Settings-Advanced Preview Setting

A. Original direction setting display

(1) Use
• To set whether to display the screen where the original set direction can be selected after
touching [Preview] when printing with the advanced preview function.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
10.6.19 Administrator/Machine Settings-Administrator Registration

A. Use
• Registers administrator information displayed Help service/Administrator information
screen as well as sender addresses used for E-mail transmission from the machine.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator Name], [E-mail Address] to input them.
2. Using the 10-key pad, enter the extension No.

10.6.20 Administrator/Machine Settings-Input Machine Address

A. Use
• To register the name of the machine and e-mail address.
Machine Name : When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of
document registered in Box is generated automatically, it is added.
E-mail : To be used as from address at internal Fax transmission.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Device Name] and input the name.
2. Touch [E-mail Address] and input the E-mail address.
10.6.21 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create One-Touch Destination

A. Address Book
(1) E-mail
<Use>
• To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
<Procedure>
• Touch [New] to register the new address.
• Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.
(2) User Box

vendor is mounted.
<Use>
• To register or change the box address for storing the scanned data to the box in the hard
disk of the machine.
<Procedure>
• At least one user box must be registered in order to register the box address.
(3) Fax
<Use>
• To register or change the fax number for transmitting the fax.
<Procedure>
(4) PC (SMB)
<Use>
• To register or change the SMB address for transmitting the scanned data by SMB.
<Procedure>

(5) FTP
<Use>
• To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP.
<Procedure>
(6) WebDAV
<Use>
• To register and change the WebDAV address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP.
<Procedure>
(7) IP Address Fax

<Use>
• To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax
data.
<Procedure>
(8) Internet Fax

<Use>
• To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data.
<Procedure>
B. Group
(1) Use
• To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simulta-
neously.
(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new group.
• Select any displayed group to check, edit, or delete the setting.
• At least one address must be registered in order to register the group.
C. E-mail Settings
(1) E-mail Subject
<Use>
• To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
<Procedure>
• Touch [New] to register the new subject.
• Select any displayed subject to detail check, edit, or delete the setting.
• The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and
pressing [Set as Default].

(2) E-mail Body

<Use>
• To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
<Procedure>
• Touch [New] to register the new message.
• Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting.
• The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing
[Set as Default].
10.6.22 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create User Box

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is
mounted.
A. Public/Personal User Box

(1) Use
• To register or change the box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine.
(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new box.
• Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.
B. Bulletin Board User Box

(1) Use
• To register or change the bulletin board user box.
(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new box.
• Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.
C. Relay User Box

• It will be displayed when the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed.
(1) Use
• To register/change the Relay User Box.
(2) Procedure
D. Annotation User Box

(1) Use
• To register or change the annotation user box.
• To attach the image of the date, time, and/or filing number to the document data stored in
the scanner mode, and to distribute them.
(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] key to register the new box.

10.6.23 One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List

A. Address Book List
(1) Use
• To output the address book list.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the destination type to be output.
2. Touch [Starting destination No.] and enter the number from which output starts.
3. Touch [No. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output.
4. Touch [Print], and select the paper feed tray.
5. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the Start key to output the list of abbrevi-
ated addresses.
B. Group List
(1) Use
• To output the group list.
(2) Procedure
ated addresses.
C. Program List
(1) Use
• To output the program list.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the destination type to be output.
ated addresses.
D. E-mail Subject/Text List

(1) Use
• To output the subject or the text list.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the paper feed tray.
ated addresses.

10.6.24 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number of User Boxes

A. Use
• Set the maximum of public, personal, and group boxes that individual users can hold.
B. Procedure
1. Select a user box type and name.
2. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified, set Max. No. of Use Boxes to
[OFF].
3. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified, set Max. No. of Use Boxes to
[OFF].
10.6.25 User Authentication/Account Track-General Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter or vendor is
mounted.
A. User Authentication
(1) Use
• To set the user authentication method.
• To select whether to authenticate the user by the external server or MFP.
(2) Procedure
“OFF” ON (External Server) ON (MFP)
NOTE
• [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
• [ON (External Server)] cannot be selected when external servers are not registered
in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] o [User Authentication/Account Track] o [External
Server Settings]
• Neither [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)] can be selected when the presence of
management device is set in the following setting.

B. Public User Access

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when User
authentication has been set.
• Able to use the machine without authentication by logging in as a public user when [ON
(Without Login)] is selected.
(2) Procedure
“Restrict” ON (With Login) ON (Without Login)
NOTE
• This setting is not available without user authentication.
• [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
• [Allow] cannot be selected when [Synchronize User Authentication & Account
Track] is set to “Do Not Synchronize.”
C. Account Track
(1) Use
• To set whether to enable the account track function or not.
(2) Procedure
“OFF” ON
D. Account Track Input Method

(1) Use
• To set the authentication method for the account track.
• To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Account Name & Password.
“Account Name & Password” Password Only
NOTE
• This setting is not available without the account track.
• “Password Only” cannot be set when using both user authentication and account
track.
E. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track

(1) Use
• To set whether to synchronize the user authentication and account track.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Synchronize.
“Synchronize” Do not synchronize
NOTE
• The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and
account track.

F. When # of Jobs Reach Maximum

(1) Use
• To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job, or to stop the
machine, when reaching to the upper limit for the number of printed pages set by the
user authentication and the account track.
• To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by the
user authentication and the account track.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Skip Job.
“Skip Job” Stop Job
G. Number of User Counters Assigned

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is
mounted.
(1) Use
• To set the number available to be assigned for the user registration and account registra-
tion.
(2) Procedure
• The total number to be registered for the user authentication and account track is 1000.
The number for the user registration will be set.
* When setting the [# of Counters Assigned for Users] to 50, the number available for
Account Track will be 950.
NOTE
• The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and
account track.
H. Ticket Hold Time Setting

(1) Use
• Specify the desired length of holding time of Kerberos authentication ticket.
NOTE
• This setting takes effect only when the authentication server type is set to active
directory.
(2) Procedure
• The default settings is 60 min.
1 to “60 min.”

I. Scanner Settings
• It will be displayed only when the optional image controller IC-412 is mounted and user
authentication or account track has been set.
(1) Use
• To select whether to use TWAIN scan function available in Fiery Remote Scan when user
authentication or account track is set to on.
• When user authentication or account track is set to on, select the use of TWAIN scan
function available in Fiery Remote Scan software that is supplied with the image control-
ler.
(2) Procedure
• The default settings are Restrict.
10.6.26 User Authentication/Account Track-User Authentication Setting

• The settings are available only when carrying out the user authentication.
A. Administrative Setting
(1) User Name List
• It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to “ON.”
<Use>
• To set whether to display or not the list key for user names on user authentication screen.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
• [ON] cannot be selected when [ON] is specified in the following setting. [Adminis-
trator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Enhanced Security Mode]
(2) Default Function Permission

<Use>
• To set the default value for the function permission in user authentication by the external
server.
• To set the function which authenticated user can use when initially authenticating the
user by the external server.
• Items available for setting: Copy, Scan, Fax, Print, User Box, Print Scan/Fax TX, Save to
External Memory, Read the stored document in External
Memory, Manual destination input, Cellular Phone/PDA and
Web browser
<Procedure>

(3) ID & Print Settings

<Use>
• To set whether to use ID & Print (a job sent by a user cannot be printed until the user
authentication is completed).
• To set whether to print a job of unauthenticated or public user or to save the job into the
ID & Print User Box.
<Procedure>
<ID & Print>
ON “OFF”
<Public User>
• The default setting is Print Immediately.
“Print Immediately” Save
(4) ID & Print Operation Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device is set
to “installed”.
<Use>
• To set whether to print all jobs or only one job from the same authenticated user when ID
& Print is selected.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Print All Jobs.
“Print All Jobs” Print Each Job
B. User Registration
(1) Use
• To register, change or delete the user for authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the user, and touch [Edit]
2. Input the user name, user password, and e-mail address.
NOTE
• It cannot be entered when conducting authentication by external server.
3. Set the output permission, max allowance set, function permission, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• When the public users are allowed, the output permission and the function per-
mission can be set.
• [Authentication Information Registration] does not appear when the presence of
Authentication Device 2 is set in the following setting.
• [Output Permission], [Max. Allowance Set], and [Function Permission] do not
appear when the presence of Management Device 1 is set in the following setting.

C. User Counter
(1) Use
• To display the status of use of the copy+print, copy, print and scan/fax for each user.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the user and touch [Counter Details].
2. Select the key to check to see the status of use.
3. For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
4. For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].
10.6.27 User Authentication/Account Track-Account Track Setting

• The settings are available only when carrying out the account track.
A. Account Track Registration

(1) Use
• To register and change the account.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the proper Account and touch [Edit].
2. Input the [Account Name], [Password] and [Name].
3. Set the [Output Permission], and [Max. Allowance Set], and touch [OK].
NOTE
• When the “Password Only” is selected for [Account Track Input Method], [Account
Name] does not appear.
• When the “Password Only” is selected for [Account Track Input Method], [Account
Name] does not appear.
B. Account Track Counter

(1) Use
• To display the status of use of the copy+print, copy, print and scan/fax for each account.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the account and touch [Counter Details].
2. Select the key for the item to be checked.
3. For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
4. For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].
10.6.28 User Authentication/Account Track-Print without Authentication

• It cannot select [Allow] when the following setting is set to “ON.”
A. Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified.
• To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified.
• When Allow is selected, pages printed by unidentified users are counted and included in
the count of the public user.
B. Procedure

10.6.29 User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List

• The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication or account track.
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, authen-
tication device1 or management device 2 is mounted.
A. Use
• To print out the User counter and the account counter.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Counter List].
2. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the start key to output the counter list.
10.6.30 User Authentication/Account Track-External Server Settings

A. Use
• Registers and sets an external server that is used for user authentication.
B. Procedure
1. Select one from No. 1 to No. 20 and touch [NEW].
2. Set [Server Name] and [Server Type].
3. To change settings, select an external server to be edited and touch [Edit].
<Server Type>
Active Directory NTLM v1 NTLM v2 NDS LDAP
NOTE
• Neither [NTLM v1] nor [NTLM v2] appear when OFF is selected in the following set-
ting.
[Administrator Settings] o [Network Settings] o [SMB Settings] o [User Authenti-
cation (NTLM)]
• [NDS] does not appear when OFF is selected in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] o [Network Settings] o [NetWare Settings] o [User
Authentication Setting (NDS)]
10.6.31 User Authentication/Account Track-Limiting Access to Destinations

A. Create Group
(1) Use
• Registers and edits groups of destinations for limiting access.
(2) Procedure
1. Select a group and touch [Edit].
2. Enter [Group Name].
3. Set the Access Allowed Level and touch [OK].
B. Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations

(1) Use
• Sets Apply Level and Apply Group for individual destinations.
(2) Procedure
1. Select one from Address Book, Group, and Program.
2. Select a registered address. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to
make each settings.

C. Apply Levels/Groups to Users

(1) Use
• Sets Apply Level or Apply Group for individual users.
(2) Procedure
1. Select a registered user. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make
each settings.
10.6.32 User Authentication/Account Track-Authentication Device Settings

• The function can be displayed only when the authentication device 2 is set to Set by
A. General Settings
(1) Use
• Specifies a device used for user authentication.
Card Authentication : Select the IC card type and operation settings.
Bio Authentication : Select the beep and operation settings.
(2) Procedure
Card Authentication Bio Authentication
• Select either one of the authentication devices and press the corresponding key to go to
the individual operation setting screen.
• The screen displays the authentication device that is selected in [Service Mode] o [Bill-
ing Setting] o [Management Function Choice] o [Authentication Device 2].
When [Card 1] is selected as the authentication device, select the card type from among
[FeliCa], [TypeA], [SSFC], [FCF], and [FCF (Campus)] and make the operation settings.
When [Card 2] is selected as authentication device, the authentication device name will
be displayed differently depending on the type of installed loadable device driver.
• If SSFC (Shared Security Formats Cooperation) is selected in Card Authentication, set
[Company Code], [Company Identification Code], [Area No.], [Building No.], [Floor No.],
[Room No.], and [Security Level].
• If LEGIC (PID) is selected in Card Authentication, perform the access setting (STAMP
input) for LEGIC (PID).
• If MIFARE (PID) is selected in Card Authentication, perform the MIFARE key setting.

B. Logoff Settings
(1) Use
• Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy
document is scanned.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Do not log off.
“Do not log off” Log off
10.6.33 User Authentication/Account Track-Auth/Acct Track Common Setting

A. Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting
(1) Use
• Select whether or not to display the logout confirmation screen.
• If the setting is made not to display the confirmation screen, the logout sequence is per-
formed only through the Access key operation with no confirmation screen appearing.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
B. Single Color > 2 Color Output Management

(1) Use
• Configure whether to manage the output of single color or 2 color as color print or black
print.
When managing it as black print, even a user who is restricted from performing color
print can perform single color or 2 color output.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Color.
“Color” Black
10.6.34 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Home Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the Scan to Home function that is used to send scanned
data to user’s home folder.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Disable.
Enable “Disable”

10.6.35 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Authorized Folder Settings

A. Use
• Use to restrict specification of sending destinations by users.
• Enabling this item disables manual entry of destinations except for recipients of faxes or
IP address faxes. Therefore users can specify sending destinations only by accessing
the address book. Enabling this item also applies the following restrictions.
- Users cannot save documents to User Boxes
- Users cannot transmit documents from User Boxes
- Users cannot use annotation User Boxes
- Users cannot use the image panel
- Users cannot select addresses from the transmission history
- Users cannot use the URL notification function
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Do Not Limit.
Limit “Do Not Limit”
10.6.36 Network Settings-TCP/IP Settings

A. TCP/IP Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP settings.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
NOTE
• When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again
more than 10 seconds after.
B. IPv4 Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to enter the IP address (IPv4) directly or to obtain it automatically.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Auto Input.
Manual Input “Auto Input”
• When it is set to [Auto Input], select the method to obtain it automatically.

DHCP Setting : ON OFF
BOOTP Setting : ON OFF
ARP/PING Setting : ON OFF
AUTO IP Setting : ON OFF
NOTE
• [ARP/PING Setting] and [Auto IP Setting] cannot be set to “OFF” simultaneously.
• They will all be set to “ON” when [Manual Input] is changed to [Auto Input].
• When it is set to [Manual Input], set the IP address, subnet mask and default gate way.

C. IPv6 Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use IP address (IPv6).
• To set whether to enter the IP address (IPv6) directly or to obtain it automatically.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
<Auto IPv6 Setting>
• To set whether or not to automatically obtain IP address (IPv6).
When selecting [OFF], set a global address or gateway address.
“ON” OFF
<DHCPv6 Setting>
“ON” OFF
D. DNS Host
(1) Use
• To set the DNS host name.
• To set whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS setting.
(2) Procedure
<DNS Host Name>
1. Touch [DNS Host Name].
2. Enter the DNS host name on the screen key board, and touch [OK].
<Dynamic DNS Settings>

• The default setting is No Limit.
Enable “No Limit”

E. DNS Domain
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name.
• To set the DNS default domain name.
• To set the DNS search domain name.
(2) Procedure
<DNS Domain Name Auto Retrieval>
• The default setting is Enable.
“Enable” No Limit
NOTE
• “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Settings] is set to “Auto Input.”
<Search Domain Name Auto Retrieval>

• Touch [Default DNS Domain Name] or [DNS Search Domain Name 1 to 3], and enter the
domain name using the keyboard on the screen and touch [OK].
F. DNS Server Settings (IPv4)

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the DNS server address.
• To set the priority/substitute DNS server address.
(2) Procedure
<DNS Server Auto Obtain>

NOTE
<Priority/secondary DNS server.>

• Touch the corresponding key, and input the server address.
G. DNS Server Settings (IPv6)

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the DNS server address.
• To set the priority/substitute DNS server address.
(2) Procedure
<DNS Server Auto Obtain>
NOTE
<Priority/secondary DNS server.>
• Touch the corresponding key, and input the server address.

H. IPsec Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use IPsec protocol for IP network communication.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
• When selecting [ON], make settings in [IKE Setting], [IPSec SA Setting], and [Peer].
I. IPsec Settings-IKE Settings

(1) Use
• To make the settings that relate to IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol which is used
for IPsec communication.
• Settings can be made independently for four different sets (Group 1 to 4).
(2) Procedure
<Group>
• Among four groups (Group 1 to 4), select a group where settings are made.
<Encryption Algorithm>
• Set a encryption algorithm used for IPsec communication.
DES_CBC 3DES_CBC “OFF”
<Authentication Algorithm>
• Set an authentication algorithm used for IPsec communication.
MD5 SHA-1 “OFF”
<Key Validity Period>

• Set a key validity period.
• The default setting is 28800 (sec.).
80 to 604800 (sec.)
<Diffie-Hellman Group>
• Set Diffie-Hellman group.
• The default setting is Group 2.

J. IPsec Settings-IPsec SA Settings

(1) Use
• To make the settings that relate to IPsec SA (Security Association) which is used for
IPsec communication.
• Settings can be made independently for eight different sets (Group 1 to 8).
(2) Procedure
<Group Set Number>
• Among Group 1 to 8, select a group where settings are made.
• After touching the key of the Group, make the following settings.
(If the combination of each selection is not allowed among different settings, the key
operation of the corresponding option is locked.)
<Security Protocol>
• Set a security protocol.
AH ESP ESP_AH “OFF”
<ESP Encryption Algorithm>

• Set an encryption algorithm used for ESP protocol.
DES_CBC 3DES_CBC AES_CBC AES_CTR NULL “OFF”
<ESP Authentication Algorithm>

• Set authentication algorithm used for ESP protocol.
MD5 SHA-1 “OFF”
<AH Authentication Algorithm>

• Set authentication algorithm used for AH protocol.
MD5 SHA-1 “OFF”
<Lifetime After Establishing SA>

• Set the period of time starting from when SA connection is established and ending when
the SA connection is cut.
• The default setting is 3600 (sec.).
120 to 604800 (sec.)

K. IPsec Settings-Peer
(1) Use
• To register destinations used for IPsec communication.
• Settings can be made independently for different ten sets (Group 1 to 10).
(2) Procedure
<Peer>
• Among Group 1 to 10, select a group where settings are made.
• After touching the key of the Group, make the following setting.
<Encapsulation Mode>
• Set a encapsulation mode used for IPsec.
Tunnel Mode Transport Mode “OFF”
<IP Address>
• When the encapsulation mode is set, specify the IP address of destinations.
• Touch [IP Address] and enter the IP address with IPv4 or IPv6 format.
<Pre-Shared Key Text>

• When the encapsulation mode is set, specify a Pre-shared key (Key data).
• Touch [Input] and enter the Pre-shared key.
<Perfect Forward Secrecy>

• When the transport mode is selected, set whether to use Perfect forward secrecy.
ON “OFF”
L. IP Filtering (Permit Access)
(1) Use
• To set the IP filtering (Permit Access).
• To set whether to allow only IP addresses that are within a specified range.
(2) Procedure
1. Select Enable or “Disable”.
2. When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP
addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].
M. IP Filtering (Deny Access)

(1) Use
• To set the IP filtering (Deny Access).
• When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP
addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad.
(2) Procedure
1. Select Enable or “Disable”.
2. When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and enter the range of IP
addresses to be denied using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].

N. RAW Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the RAW port number.
• Several data can be accepted at the same time by selecting several ports.
(2) Procedure
1. Select the necessary port number.
2. When using the selected port, press the Clear key to clear the value, and enter the
RAW port number using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].
O. LLMNR Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable LLMNR (Linklocal Multicast Name Resolution) setting.
• To perform the name resolution to send data to a computer with Windows Vista/Server
2008 installed, select [Enable].
To perform the name resolution especially in the IPv6-only communication environment,
enable this setting.
(2) Procedure
10.6.37 Network Setting-NetWare Settings

A. IPX Settings
(1) Use
• To enable or disable the NetWare (IPX) setting.

• To set the ethernet frame type.
(2) Procedure
<IPX Settings>
“ON” OFF
<Ethernet Frame Type>

• The default setting is Auto Detect.
“Auto Detect” 802.2 802.3 Ethernet II 802.3SNAP

B. NetWare Print Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the NetWare print mode.
• To set the NetWare print mode.
• To display NetWare status.
(2) Procedure
<NetWare Print Settings>
ON “OFF”
<NetWare Print Mode>

• The default setting is PServer.
“PServer” Nprinter/Rprinter
• After selecting either key in the NetWare print mode setting, proceed to each setting
screen.
<Status>
1. Touch [Status].
2. Touch up/down arrow keys to select the server to check.
3. Check the NetWare status.
C. P Server Settings: Print Server Name/Print Server Password

(1) Use
• To set the print server name and print server password.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Server name] or [Print Server Password].
2. Enter the print server name or the print server password (up to 63 characters) using the
on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
D. P Server Settings: Polling Interval

(1) Use
• To set the polling interval.
• To set the interval to search the print queue.
(2) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
E. P Server Settings: NDS/Bindery Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the bindery setting when using NetWare4.x model
and after.
• To enable the bindery service.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is NDS.
“NDS” NDS/Bindery

F. P Server Settings: File Server Name

(1) Use
• To set the full server name for the print server to logon.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [File Server Name].
2. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
G. P Server Settings: NDS Context Name

(1) Use
• To set the NDS context name (context name to register NDS print server).
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Context name].
2. Enter the NDS context name (up to 191 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
H. P Server Settings: NDS Tree Name

(1) Use
• To set the NDS tree name (name to login).
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Tree Name].
2. Enter the NDS tree name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
I. Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Print Server Name

(1) Use
• To set the print server name.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Server Name].
2. Enter the printer name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
J. Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Printer Number

(1) Use
• To set the printer number.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Auto] and cancel the reverse display.
3. Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10-key pad.
K. User Authentication Setting (NDS)

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the user authentication setting.
• To conduct user authentication in netware environment.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF

10.6.38 Network Setting-http Server Settings

mounted.
A. http Server Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the http server setting.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
B. PSWC Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
C. IPP Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) setting.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
D. Accept IPP jobs

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
E. Support Information
(1) Use
• To set the operation support information.
• For the response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Support Information].
2. Set “ON” or OFF for each item.

F. Printer Information
(1) Use
• To set the printer information.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Information].
2. Enter the printer name, printer location, and printer information on the on-screen key-
board.
3. Touch [Print URI] to check the printer URI information.
G. IPP Authentication Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the IPP authentication setting.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
H. Authentication Method
(1) Use
• To set the authentication method for IPP authentication.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is requesting-user-name.
“requesting-user-name” basic digest

I. User Name
(1) Use
• To set the User name for IPP authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [User Name].
2. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
J. Password
(1) Use
• To set the password for IPP authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password].
2. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
K. realm
(1) Use
• To set the realm for identifying the authentication setting for IPP authentication.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [realm].
2. Enter the realm on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

10.6.39 Network Setting-FTP Settings

A. FTP TX Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use FTP TX settings.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
B. FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Address

(1) Use
• To set the proxy server address.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a
host address.
C. FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the proxy server port number.
(2) Procedure
• Press the Clear key.
• Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
D. FTP TX Settings: Port No.
(1) Use
• To set the port number to be used for transmission with FTP server.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.
E. FTP TX Settings: Connection Timeout

(1) Use
• To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad.

F. FTP Server Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use this machine as FTP server.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
NOTE
• [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
10.6.40 Network Setting-SMB Setting

mounted.
A. Client Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the SMB transmission setting.
• To set whether or not to enable the user authentication setting by NTLM.
• To set the NTLM version for the user authentication.
NTLM has v1 and v2. Select the version which suits the network environment.
(2) Procedure
<Client Settings>
“ON” OFF
<NTLM Settings>
• The default setting is v1.
“v1” v2 v1/v2
<User Authentication (NTLM)>

“ON” OFF
<DFS Setting>
• Select [ON] when using SMB transmission under an environment that uses a distributed
file system (DFS).
“Enable” Invalid

B. Print Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use SMB port or not in printer mode.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
C. Print Settings: NetBIOS Name

(1) Use
• To set NetBIOS name.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NetBIOS Name].
2. Enter the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
D. Print Settings: Print Service Name

(1) Use
• To set the print service name.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Service Name].
2. Enter the print service name (up to 13 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
E. Print Settings: Workgroup
(1) Use
• To set the workgroup.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Workgroup].
2. Enter the workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
F. WINS Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the WINS setting.
• To use the WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) setting is necessary.
• By using the WINS, the traffic by broadcast can be reduced, and the communication
becomes available with the network where broadcast does not reach.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF

G. WINS Settings: Automatic Retrieval Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the WINS server address.
• To acquire the WINS server address automatically.
• To obtain the WINS server address from DHCP server. If there are more than on address
settings, up to two can be acquired.
(2) Procedure
H. WINS Settings: WINS Server Address 1, 2

(1) Use
• To set the WINS server address.
• To use when manually entering the WINS server address.
• The primary address and the secondary address can be set.
(The primary address has the priority during operation.)
(2) Procedure
• Touch [1] or [2].
• Enter the WINS server address.
I. WINS Settings: Node Type Setting

(1) Use
• To set a node type.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is H Node.

B Node P Node N Node “H Node”
J. Direct Hosting Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the direct hosting setting.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
10.6.41 Network Setting-LDAP Settings

mounted.
A. Enabling LDAP
(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP function.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

B. Setting Up LDAP
• Registration and/or setting concerning the LDAP server can be conducted.
• Touch [Setting Up LDAP], and select the optional blank key to register and/or set.
(1) LDAP Server Name

<Use>
• Set the LDAP server name.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Server Name].
2. Enter the server name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
(2) Max. Search Results

<Use>
• To set the Max. results of address for LDAP search.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Max. Search Results].
3. Enter the Max. Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10-key pad.
(3) Timeout
<Use>
• To set the Max. timeout period for LDAP search.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Timeout].
3. Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad.
(4) Initial Setting for Search Details

<Use>
• To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Initial Setting for Search Details].
2. Touch the key about condition for each search item, and select the condition.
(5) Check Connection

• It will not be displayed when [Enabling LDAP] is set to “OFF.”
• It will not be displayed when the following is set to “Restrict.”
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Security Details] o [Manual Destina-
tion Input]
<Use>
• To check the connection with the LDAP server which has been set.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Check Connection].
2. Confirm a proper connection and touch [Close].

(6) Reset All Settings

<Use>
• To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the ship-
ping.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Reset All Settings].
2. Check the message and touch [Yes].
3. Touch [OK].
(7) Server Address

<Use>
• To set the LDAP server address.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Server Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and enter the
server address.
(8) Search Base

<Use>
• To set the directory path for LDAP server.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Search Base].
2. Enter the search base (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
(9) SSL Setting

<Use>
• To set whether to use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(10) Port Number

<Use>
• To set the LDAP server port number.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.
(11) Port Number (SSL)

<Use>
• To set the port number for LDAP server when using SSL.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.

(12) Certificate Verification Level Settings)

<Use>
• To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.
<Procedure>
Expiration Date : Select whether to check that the server certificate is
within the validity period.
Key Usage : Select whether to check that the server certificate is
used according to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Chain : Select whether to check that the server certificate chain
(certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certif-
icates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation : Select whether to check that the server certificate is
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation
List) are checked in this order when the expiration date
of the certificate is checked.
CN : Select whether to check that the CN of the server certif-
icate matches the server address.
(13) Authentication Type

<Use>
• To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server.
Anonymous : User name and password are not necessary
(Dynamic authentication will be invalid when anonymous is selected.)
Simple : Simple method which needs the user name and the password
Digest-MD5 : Method available with normal LDAP server. When failing to authenti-
cate with Digest-MD5, it automatically switches to CRAM-MD5.
GSS-SPNEGO : Method available with Windows active directory
(Kerberos authentication).
NTLM (v1) : Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT, etc.
NTLM (v2) : Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT, etc.
It has been applied to the Windows NT4.0 SP4 and later versions. Its
security has been enhanced compared to v1.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Anonymous.
“Anonymous” Simple Digest-MD5 GSS-SPNEGO NTLM v1 NTLM v2

(14) Select Server Authentication Method

<Use>
• To set the authentication system when conducting LDAP server authentication.
• To use when changing the server authentication system.
Use Set Value : It conducts authentication with the setting value set by [LDAP
Server Registration].
Use User Authentication ID and Password
: It conducts authentication with the registration data for the
copier’s user authentication.
Dynamic Authentication : It conducts authentication by dynamic authentication.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Use Set Value.
“Use Set Value” Use User Authentication ID and Password Nprinter/Rprinter
(15) Referral Setting

<Use>
• To set whether or not to use the referral setting.
• To use when tracing the server with referral at the time of LDAP connection.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(16) Login Name

<Use>
• To set the login name to connect to LDAP server.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Login Name].
2. Enter the logon name (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
NOTE
• The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous.
(17) Password
<Use>
• To set the password for connecting to LDAP server.
<Procedure>
2. Enter the password (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous.

(18) Domain Name

<Use>
• To set the domain name for connecting to LDAP server.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Domain Name].
2. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
C. Default LDAP Server Setting

(1) Use
• To set the server to be used as the default when searching LDAP.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Default LDAP Server Setting].
2. Select the optional server.
10.6.42 Network Setting-E-mail Settings

mounted.
A. E-mail TX (SMTP)
(1) E-mail TX (SMTP)
<Use>
• To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail transmission setting.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(2) Scan to E-mail

<Use>
• To set whether or not to transfer scanned data by e-mail.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(3) Status Notification

<Use>
• To set whether or not to inform the status by e-mail.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF

(4) Total Counter Notification

<Use>
• To set whether or not to inform the total counter by e-mail.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(5) SMTP Server Address

<Use>
• To set the SMTP server address.
<Procedure>
server address.
(6) Binary Division

<Use>
• To set whether to carry out binary division for data to be transmitted.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(7) Divided Mail Size

<Use>
• To set the dividing size when carrying out the binary division for data to be transmitted.
• To change the dividing size of the data.
<Procedure>
2. Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 (in 100 increments) using the 10-
key pad.
(8) Connection Timeout

<Use>
• To set the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server.
<Procedure>
• Select the timeout period using [+] / [-] keys.
“60 sec.” (30 to 300, in 30 sec. increments)
(9) Server Capacity

<Use>
• To set the Max. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is No Limit.
“No Limit” (1 to 100)

(10) SSL Setting

<Use>
• To set whether or not to use SSL when sending an e-mail.
<Procedure>
SMTP over SSL Start TLS “OFF”
(11) Port No.

<Use>
• To set the port number for transmission with SMTP server.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

<Use>
• To set the port number when using SSL.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
2. Touch the Clear key.
3. Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
<Use>
<Procedure>

(14) Detail Settings: SMTP Authentication

<Use>
• To set whether or not to enable SMTP authentication.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
• When set to “ON”, enter the [User ID], [Password] and [Domain Name].
(15) Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication

<Use>
• To set whether or not to enable the POP Before SMTP authentication.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(16) Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Time

<Use>
• To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP authentication.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10-key pad.
B. E-mail RX (POP)
(1) E-mail RX (POP)
<Use>
• To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(2) POP Server Address

<Use>
• To set the POP server address.
<Procedure>
server address.
(3) Connection Timeout

<Use>
• To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server.
<Procedure>
• Select the timeout period of connection using [-]/[+] keys.

(4) SSL Setting

<Use>
• To set whether or not to use SSL when receiving an e-mail.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(5) Port No.

<Use>
• To set the port No. for transmitting with POP server.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port No. between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

<Use>
• To set the port number when using SSL.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
<Use>
<Procedure>

(8) Login Name

<Use>
• To enter a login name used for POP server authentication.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Login Name].
2. Enter a login name.
(9) Password
<Use>
• To enter a login name used for POP server authentication.
<Procedure>
2. Enter a password.
(10) APOP Authentication

<Use>
• To set whether to use APOP authentication.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(11) Check for New Messages

• It will not be displayed when either [Internet Fax] is set to “OFF” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] o [Network Setting] o [Network Fax Setting] o [Network Fax
Function Settings]
<Use>
• To set whether to automatically check a POP server for new messages.
<Procedure>
“Yes” No
(12) Polling Interval

• It will not be displayed when either [Internet Fax] is set to “OFF” in the following settings.
Function Settings]
<Use>
• To set a polling interval at which a POP server is checked for new messages.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is 15 minutes.
1 to 60 minutes

C. S/MIME Communication Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to activate S/MINE communication that provides encrypted E-mail trans-
mission.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
D. S/MIME Communication Settings-Digital Signature

(1) Use
• Set whether to add a digital signature to S/MIME messages.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Do not add signature.
“Do not add signature” Always add signature Select when sending
E. S/MIME Communication Settings-E-mail Text Encryption Method

(1) Use
• To select an encryption method used for S/MIME E-mail text.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is 3DES.
RC2-40 RC2-64 RC2-128 DES “3DES” AES-128 AES-192 AES-256
F. S/MIME Communication Settings-Print S/MIME Information
(1) Use
• To select whether to print S/MIME information when sending and receiving E-mail.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
G. S/MIME Communication Settings-Automatically Obtain Certificates

(1) Use
• To set whether to automatically acquire a certificate when sending or receiving E-mail.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”

H. S/MIME Communication Settings-Certificate Verification Level Settings)

(1) Use
(2) Procedure
10.6.43 Network Setting-SNMP Setting

A. SNMP Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) or not.
• To set the SNMP version to be used.
• To readout management information base and to enter community name for writing.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
• To individually set whether or not to use SNMP v1/v2c (IP), SNMP v3 (IP), and SNMP v1
(IPX).
“ON” OFF
B. UDP Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the UDP standby port number which is used for SNMP (IP).
(2) Procedure

C. SNMP v1/v2c Settings

(1) Use
• To conduct setting when using SNMP v1/v2c.
• To use when entering the community name for reading the Management Information
Base (MIB) and writing to it.
(2) Procedure
<Read Community Name Settings>
• Enter a Read community name.
<Write Setting>
“Enable” Disable
NOTE
• [Enable] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
<Write Community Name Settings>

• Enter a Write community name.
D. SNMP v3 Settings
(1) Context Name Settings
<Use>
• Set the context name which is used for SNMP v3.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Name].
2. Enter the context name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen key board, and touch
[OK].
(2) Discovery User Permissions

<Use>
• To set whether or not to enable the discovery authority user which is used for SNMP v3.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(3) Discovery User Name Settings

<Use>
• To set the name of the discovery authority users which is used for SNMP v3.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Discovery User Name].
2. Enter the discovery user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
NOTE
• The user name same with the read user name or the write user name cannot be
set.

(4) Read User Name Settings

<Use>
• To set the read-only user name used for SNMP v3.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Read User Name].
2. Enter the read user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
NOTE
• The user Name same with the discovery user name cannot be used.
(5) Security Level

<Use>
• To set the security level of the read-only user used for SNMP v3.
OFF : No authentication will be conducted when the read-only user
accesses.
auth-password : Conducts authentication only for the authentication password when
the read-only user accesses.
auth-Password/privpassword
: Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy
password when read-only user accesses.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is auth-password/privpassword.
OFF auth-password “auth-password/privpassword”

(6) Password Setting

<Use>
• To set the Authentication password for the read-only User which is used for SNMP v3.
<Procedure>
1. Select a type of password.
2. Enter the password (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(7) Write User Name Settings

<Use>
• To set the name of the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Write User Name].
2. Enter the write user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
NOTE
• The user name same with the discovery use name cannot be used.

(8) Security Level

<Use>
• To set the security level for the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3.
OFF : Authentication will not be conducted when reading/writing authority
user accesses.
auth-password : Conducts authentication only with authentication password when
reading/writing authority user accesses.
auth-password/privpassword
: Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy
password when reading/writing authority user accesses.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is auth-password/privpassword.
OFF auth-password “auth-password/privpassword”
NOTE
• [Authentication OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
(9) Encryption Algorithm

<Use>
• To set the encryption algorithm in SNMPv3 communication.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is DES.
“DES” AES-128
(10) Authentication Algorithm
<Use>
• To set the authentication algorithm in SNMPv3 communication.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is MD5.
“MD5” SHA-1
E. TRAP Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to allow the TRAP function.
(2) Procedure
F. TRAP Setting When Authentication failed

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the TRAP function when authentication failed.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Invalid.
Enable “Invalid”

10.6.44 Network Setting-AppleTalk Settings

mounted.
A. AppleTalk Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
B. Printer Name
(1) Use
• To set the printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Name].
2. Enter the printer name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
C. Zone Name
(1) Use
• To set the zone name connected with AppleTalk network.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Zone Name].

2. Enter the zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
D. Current Zone
(1) Use
• To display the current zone on AppleTalk network.
10.6.45 Network Setting-Bonjour Setting

A. Bonjour Setting
(1) Use
• To use when operating under the Bonjour service environment.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
B. Bonjour Name
(1) Use
• To set the name for identifying over the bonjour network.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Bonjour Name].
2. Enter the Bonjour name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].

10.6.46 Network Setting-TCP Socket Settings

A. TCP Socket
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to set the TCP socket.
• To set the port number for TCP socket transmission.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
<Port Number>
• When SSL Certificate is registered, the following can be set.

<SSL Setting>
ON “OFF”
<Port Number>
1. Touch [Enter].
2. Press Clear key.
3. Enter a port number within the range between 1 and 65535 with the 10-key pad.
<Port Number (SSL)>

1. Touch [Enter].
2. Press Clear key.
3. Enter a port number within the range between 1 and 65535 with the 10-key pad.
B. TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to set the TCP socket for ASCII mode.
• To set the port number which is used for TCP socket transmission by ASCII mode.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
<Port Number (ASCII Mode)>


10.6.47 Network Setting-Network Fax Setting

• It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to “OFF” in the following set-
tings.
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Network Fax Settings]
A. Network Fax Function Settings

(1) IP Address Fax Function
• Setting will be available only when [IP Address Fax] is set to “ON” in the following set-
tings.
<Use>
• To set whether or not to use IP address fax function.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(2) Internet Fax Function

• Setting will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
<Use>
• To set whether or not to use Internet fax function.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
B. SMTP TX Settings
(1) Use
• To set SMTP TX when network fax function is being used.
• To set SMTP TX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function
is being used.
(2) Procedure
<Port Number>
1. Touch [Input].
<Connection Timeout>
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec.) using the 10-key pad.

C. SMTP RX Settings
(1) Use
• To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used.
• To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function
is being used.
(2) Procedure
<SMTP RX>
“ON” OFF
<Port No.>
1. Touch [Input].
<Connection Timeout>
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec.) using the 10-key pad.
10.6.48 Network Setting-WebDAV Settings

A. WebDAV Client Settings
(1) WebDAV Client Setting
<Use>
• To set whether to use WebDAV Client Settings.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(2) WebDAV Client Settings: Proxy Server Address

<Use>
• To set the proxy server address.
<Procedure>
host address.
(3) WebDAV Client Settings: Proxy Server Port Number

<Use>
• To set the proxy server port number.
<Procedure>
2. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

(4) WebDAV Client Settings: User Name

<Use>
• To set the user name for WebDAV authentication.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [User Name].
2. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(5) WebDAV Client Settings: Password

<Use>
• To set the password for WebDAV authentication.
<Procedure>
2. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
(6) WebDAV Client Settings: Connection Timeout

<Use>
• To set the timeout period for connecting to WebDAV server.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Input].
(7) WebDAV Client Settings: Server Authentication Character Code

<Use>
• To set a character code used during WebDAV server authentication.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is UTF-8.
“UTF-8” Windows Code page
(8) WebDAV Client Settings: Certificate Verification Level Settings

<Use>
<Procedure>

B. WebDAV Server Settings

(1) WebDAV Server Setting
<Use>
• To set whether to use WebDAV Server Settings.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(2) WebDAV Server Settings: SSL Setting

• It is displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.
<Use>
• To set whether to use SSL/TSL for communications when using the machine as WebDAV
server.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is Non-SSL Only.
“Non-SSL Only” SSL Only SSL/Non-SSL

NOTE
• When “ON” is selected in [Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o
[Enhanced Security Mode], only [SSL Only] is selectable.
(3) WebDAV Server Settings: Password Setting

<Use>
• To set a password to access WebDAV server.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Password Setting].
2. Enter a password with the keyboard on the screen, and touch [OK].
• Touching [Initial Password] can restore the default password setting.

(Default password: sysadm)
10.6.49 Network Setting-Web Service Settings

A. Web Service Common Settings
(1) Web Service Common Settings: Friendly Name
<Use>
• To define a friendly name that is used when printing a job with WSD (Web Service on
Devices) function.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Friendly Name].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 62 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].

(2) Web Service Common Settings: Publication Service

<Use>
• To set whether or not to enable Publication Service.
• Select [Enable] when using this machine under an environment where communication is
possible only with Windows Vista’s IPv6.
<Procedure>
Enable “Invalid”
(3) Web Service Common Settings: SSL Setting

• It will be displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.
<Use>
• To set whether to use SSL when using WSD (Web Service on Devices) function.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(4) Web Service Common Settings: Certificate Verification Level Settings

• It will be displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.
<Use>
<Procedure>

B. Printer Settings
(1) Printer Settings
<Use>
• To set whether to use this printer as a WSD printer.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”

(2) Printer Settings: Printer Name

<Use>
• To set the WS printer name.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Printer Name].
[OK].
(3) Printer Settings: Printer Location

<Use>
• To set the WS printer location.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Printer Location].
[OK].
(4) Printer Settings: Printer Information

<Use>
• To set the WS printer information.
<Procedure>
[OK].
C. Scanner Settings
(1) Scanner Settings
<Use>
• To set whether to use this machine as a WSD scanner.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(2) Scanner Settings: Scanner Name

<Use>
• To set the WSD scanner name.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Scanner Name].
[OK].
(3) Scanner Settings: Scanner Location

<Use>
• To set the WS scanner location.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Scanner Location].
[OK].

(4) Scanner Settings: Scanner Information

<Use>
• To set the WS scanner information.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Scanner Information].
[OK].
(5) Scanner Settings: Connection Timeout

<Use>
• To set the timeout period for connection of WS scanner.
<Procedure>
10.6.50 Network Setting-SSDP Settings

A. Use
• To set whether to use SSDP protocol.
• To set the multicast TTL value.
B. Procedure
“ON” OFF
<Multicast TTL Setting >

“1” to 10
10.6.51 Network Setting-Detail Settings

A. Device Setting
(1) MAC Address
<Use>
• To display the MAC address of the machine.
<Procedure>
• The address cannot be changed.
(2) Network Speed

<Use>
• To set the network speed.
<Procedure>
“Auto” 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex

100Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex 1Gbps Full Duplex
NOTE
• When Network speed setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it
on again more than 10 seconds after.

(3) LLTD Setting

<Use>
• To set whether or not to enable LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery).
• By enabling LLTD, Windows Vista’s Network Map can show this machine’s location on
the network.
<Procedure>
B. Time Adjustment Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting.
• To synchronize the time between the server and the client.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
C. Time Adjustment Setting-Auto IPv6 Retrieval

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to automatically obtain NTP server’s IPv6 address.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
D. Time Adjustment Setting-NTP Server Setting
(1) Use
• To set the NTP server address.
(2) Procedure
<Host Address>
2. Select [IP Address Input], and enter the IP address.
3. Select [Host name Input], and enter the host name.
<Port Number>
E. Time Adjustment Setting-Auto Time Adjustment

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to automatically adjust time.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Off.
On “Off”

F. Time Adjustment Setting-Polling Interval

(1) Use
• To set a polling interval when Auto Time Adjustment is set to ON.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter a polling interval within the range between 1 to 240 hours with the 10-key pad.
G. Status Notification Setting

mounted.
• To notify status, notifications both by E-mail and by SNMP TRAP function can be set. For
E-mail, up to ten IP addresses and one IPX address can be set. For SNMP TRAP func-
tion, up to five IP addresses and one IPX can be set.
(1) Register Notification Address (IP Address)

<Use>
• To set IP addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
• Up to 5 addresses can be registered.
<Procedure>
1. From IP address 1 to 5, select an IP address where settings are made.
3. Select [Input Host], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host
address.
4. Touch the Clear key and enter a port number within the range of 1 to 65535 using the
10-key pad.
5. Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name.

6. Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON].
7. Touch [OK] and finish the settings.
(2) Register Notification Address (IPX Address)

<Use>
• To set IPX addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [IPX Address].
2. Touch [Network Address] or [Node Address] and enter an address.
3. Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name.

(3) Register Notification Address (E-mail Address)

<Use>
• To set E-mail addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
• Up to 10 addresses can be registered.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Forward].
2. From E-mail addresses 1 to 10, select an E-mail address where settings are made.
3. Touch [Edit E-mail Address].
4. Enter an E-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) using the keyboard on the
screen and touch [OK].
H. Total Counter Notification Settings

(1) Notification Schedule Setting
<Use>
• To set the schedule for informing the total counter value.
• Two different schedules can be set for reporting.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Schedule 1] or [Schedule 2].
2. Select the reporting cycle from [Daily], [Weekly] or [Monthly].
3. When selecting [Daily] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of day(s).
4. When selecting [Weekly] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of week(s) and day of
the Week.
5. When selecting [Monthly] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of month(s) and date
of the month.
(2) Notification Address Setting

<Use>
• To set the e-mail address for reporting the total counter value.
• Up to three e-mail addresses can be set.
• It can be selected whether to apply the schedule of the [Set Schedule] to each address.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Address 1], [Address 2] or [Address 3].
2. Touch [E-mail Address Edit].
3. Enter the e-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard,
and touch [OK].
4. Touch [Set Schedule].
5. Select ON/OFF for each schedule.
(3) Model Name

<Use>
• To set the device name for identifying the copier when reporting the total counter.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Model Name].
2. Enter the model name (up to 20 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].

(4) Send Now

<Use>
• To transfer the current total counter value to the set address.
I. PING Confirmation
(1) Use
• To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission.
host address.
3. Touch [Check Connection] key to check the connection.
J. SLP Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether to use SLP or not.
Device search will be available with TWAIN by setting SLP enable.
(2) Procedure
K. LPD Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether to use LPD during printing or not.
(2) Procedure
L. Prefix/Suffix Setting
(1) ON/OFF Setting
<Use>
• To set whether to add prefix or suffix to the address when calling or entering an address.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(2) Prefix/Suffix Setting

<Use>
• To register or change the prefix or suffix.
• Eight types of prefix and suffix can be added.
Prefix: Letters added to the top of the text (header part)
Suffix: Letters added to the bottom of the text (footer part)
<Procedure>
• Available number to be registered as prefix is up to 20 characters.
• Available number to be registered as suffix is up to 64 characters.

M. Error Code Display Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to display an error code when a network-related error occurs.
• To help to identify the cause of network error by displaying an error code.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
10.6.52 Network Settings-IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

A. Use
• To set whether or not to use IEEE802.1X authentication.
• To display IEEE802.1X authentication status.
• To initialize IEEE802.1X authentication settings.
NOTE
• IEEE802.1X authentication settings are made with PageScope Web Connection.
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”
<Auth. Status>
• Displays present IEEE802.1X authentication status.
<Reset Job Settings>

• Returns all IEEE802.1X authentication settings to initial values.
<Certificate Verification Level Settings>
• Sets a certificate verification method for server certificate verification.
10.6.53 Network Settings-Web Browser Setting

• It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 v2 or LK-103 v2) is activated.
A. Use
• To set whether to use the web browser function.
B. Procedure

10.6.54 Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting

• [It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Invalid.”
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Bluetooth Settings]
A. Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the Bluetooth function.
B. Procedure
10.6.55 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (Platen)

A. Use
• To set whether to function the auto zoom when the tray is selected with document set on
the original glass (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.)
B. Use
ON “OFF”
10.6.56 Copier Settings-Auto Zoom (ADF)

A. Use
• To set whether to function the auto zoom when the feed tray is selected with document
set on the ADF (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.)
B. Procedure
“ON” OFF
10.6.57 Copier Settings-Specify Default Tray when APS OFF

A. Use
• To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled.
• To set the tray (tray 1) for the default setting when cancelling APS.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Tray Before APS ON.
“Tray Before APS ON” Default Tray
10.6.58 Copier Settings-Select Tray for Insert Sheet

A. Use
• To select the initial value for the tray for the cover sheet paper.
B. Procedure

10.6.59 Copier Settings-Print Jobs During Copy Operation

A. Use
• To set whether to receive printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation.
• To restrict receiving printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation.
Accept : Receives the print data or fax data and print
Receive Only : Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is fin-
ished
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Accept.
“Accept” Receive Only
10.6.60 Copier Settings-Tri-Fold Print Side

A. Use
• Specifies the side of copies to be folded.
Inside : Folds paper in three with the printed side in.
Outside : Folds paper in three with the printed side out.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Inside.
Outside “Inside”
10.6.61 Copier Settings-Automatic Image Rotation
A. Use
• Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the document and copy
paper orientations are different.
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set : If the “Auto” Paper setting, “Auto”
Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is
selected, the image is automatically
rotated to fit the orientation of the
paper.
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set : If the “Auto” Paper setting or “Auto”
Zoom setting is selected, the image is
automatically rotated to fit the orienta-
tion of the paper.
When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set : If the “Auto” Zoom setting or a Reduce
setting is selected, the image is auto-
matically rotated to fit the orientation of
the paper.
When Auto Zoom is set : If the “Auto” Zoom setting is selected,
the image is automatically rotated to fit
the orientation of the paper.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set.
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set “When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set”
When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set When Auto Zoom is set

10.6.62 Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings

A. Layout
(1) Use
• To set the initial copy layout setting in card shot mode.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Top/Bottom.
“Top/Bottom” Left/Right (Top Half) Left/Right
B. Zoom
(1) Use
• To set the initial zoom setting in card shot mode.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Full Size.
“Full Size” x 1.0
C. Store Original Size

(1) Use
• To pre-register original sizes that are used in card shot mode.
(2) Procedure
• Enter an original size, name it, and register the data.
10.6.63 Printer Settings-USB Timeout

A. Use
• To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication
are activated.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is 60 seconds for input and output timeouts.
“60 seconds” (10 to 1000 seconds)
10.6.64 Printer Settings-Network Timeout

A. Use
• To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication
are activated.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is 60 seconds for input and output timeouts.
“60 seconds” (10 to 1000 seconds)

10.6.65 Printer Settings-Print XPS Errors

A. Use
• To set whether to print error information when an error occurs while printing a XPS file.
B. Procedure
“Yes” No
10.6.66 Printer Settings-PSWC Direct Print

A. Use
• To set whether or not to allow direct print with PageScope Web Connection.
B. Procedure
Yes “No”
10.6.67 Fax Settings

• Settings are available only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
10.6.68 Fax Settings-Header Information

A. Use
• To register the name of the sender and fax ID which will be printed when transmitting fax.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Sender] and enter the name of the sender (up to 30 characters) on the on-
screen keyboard.
2. Enter Sender Fax No. (up to 20 characters) using the 10-key pad and [+], [Space] dis-
10.6.69 Fax Settings-Header/Footer Position

A. Header Position
(1) Use
• To set the position to print the header when transmitting fax.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Outside Body Text.
Inside Body Text “Outside Body Text” OFF

NOTE
• [Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for Internet Fax/IP Address Fax.

B. Print Receiver’s Name

• It will not be displayed on the screen when [Fax Target] is set to beside “US” or “HK” in
the following settings.
[Service Mode] o [System 1] o [Marketing Area]
(1) Use
• To set whether to print the information of TX destination (Registered name or Fax No.)
when transmitting fax.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
C. Footer Position
(1) Use
• To set whether to print the footer when transmitting fax.
(2) Procedure
Inside Body Text Outside Body Text “OFF”
NOTE
• [Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for the color mode of Internet Fax/IP
Address Fax.
10.6.70 Fax Settings-Line Parameter Setting

A. Dialing Method
(1) Use
• To set the dialing method.
• The displays are different depending on the country.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is PB.
“PB” 10 pps
NOTE
B. Receive Mode
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is
mounted.
(1) Use
• To set the fax reception mode.
• To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function, etc. when con-
nected to the external telephone.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Auto RX.
“Auto RX” Manual RX

C. Number of RX Call Rings

(1) Use
• To set the number of times to receive call rings.
• To change the number of times of the fake ringback tone after it starts calling until it
starts receiving.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is 2 X.
“2 X” (0 to 15)
D. Number of Redials
(1) Use
• To set the number of redials.
• To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy, etc.
• The line which can be set up is different depending on the country.
(2) Procedure
“3 X” (0 to 7)
NOTE
• The line which can be set up is different depending on the country.
E. Redial Interval
(1) Use
• To set the interval for redialing.
(2) Procedure
“3 min” (1 to 15)
F. Line Monitor Sound

(1) Use
• To set whether to output the line monitor sound from the speaker or not.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
G. Line Monitor Sound Vol.

(1) Use
• To set the volume of the speaker.
(2) Procedure
• Change the volume by touching the [Lower] or [Higher].

10.6.71 Fax Settings-TX/RX Settings

A. Duplex Print (RX)
• It will not be displayed when [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to “ON.”
(1) Use
• To set whether to carry out the duplex print for the received original when receiving fax.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
B. Letter/Ledger over A4/A3

(1) Use
• To set weather to use the inch paper priority when receiving fax.
(2) Procedure
ON OFF
NOTE
• The default setting is different depending on the country.
C. Print Paper Selection

(1) Use
• To set the priority for paper feed tray when receiving fax.
Auto select : Selected automatically
Priority Size : Printed on size with priority. When the size is not set, it will be printed on
the closest size.
Fixed Size : Printed only on the fixed size.

(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Auto Select.
“Auto Select” Fixed Size Priority Size
D. Print Paper Size

(1) Use
• To set the paper size to print the text when receiving fax.
• To make the setting of [Print Paper Size] enable, set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to
[Auto].
(2) Procedure
• The initial setting is A4.
A3 B4 “A4”
NOTE

E. Incorrect User Box No. Entry

(1) Use
• To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered.
(2) Procedure
“Print” Show Error Message Auto Create User Box
F. Tray Selection for RX Print

(1) Use
• To select the paper tray to be fixed when printing the received text.
(2) Procedure
• Items available for selection are different depending on the paper feed option mounted.
“Auto” Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
G. Min. Reduction for RX Print

(1) Use
• To set the print magnification for received text.
(2) Procedure
“96” (87 to 96, x1.0)
H. Print Separate Fax Pages
• It will not be displayed when [Duplex print (RX)] is set to “ON.”
(1) Use
• To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
I. File After Polling TX

(1) Use
• To set whether to delete the original which polling transmission has been completed.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Delete.
“Delete” Save
J. No. of Sets (RX)

(1) Use
• To set the number of copies to be printed with the received document.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is 1 set.
1 to 10 set.

10.6.72 Fax Settings-Function Settings

A. Function ON/OFF Setting
(1) F-Code TX
<Use>
• To set whether to use the F code transmission.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
NOTE
• When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again
more than 10 seconds after.
(2) Relay RX
<Use>
• To set whether to use the relay RX function.
• To use the machine as the relay delivery station during relay TX.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
(3) Relay Printing

<Use>
• To set whether to use the relay print function.
• To print out the document that the machine relayed during relay TX.
• The relay print will be output in the following case.
1. When the relay delivery completes appropriately.
2. When the delivery job is cancelled halfway by turning OFF sub power switch.
3. When the delivery job is cancelled due to redial over.
4. When main power switch is turned OFF/ON during relay print error.
5. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during redialing.
6. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during relay delivery.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”

(4) Destination Check Display Function

<Use>
• To set whether or not to display the list of specified addresses when sending the fax.
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(5) Confirm Address (TX)

<Use>
• To set whether to use Confirm Address (the machine displays the screen where the user
reenters the fax number for confirmation when the user faxes by entering the fax number
directly with the keys).
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
(6) Confirm Address (Register)

<Use>
• To set whether to use Confirm Address (the machine displays the screen where the user
reenters the fax number for confirmation when the user faxes by entering the fax number
directly with the keys).
<Procedure>
ON “OFF”
B. Memory RX Setting
• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] o [FAX] o [System] o [Display Setting] o [Compulsory Memory RX]
• It will not be displayed when [PC-FAX RX Setting], [Forward TX Setting] or [TSI User Box
Setting] is set to “ON.”
(1) Use
• To set whether to use the forced memory RX function.
• To store the received text in the hard disk without printing, and print it out when ordered.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is NO.
• Enter the password (up to 8 digits) for printing when set to [ON].

C. Closed Network RX
[Service Mode] o [FAX] o [System] o [Display Setting] o [Closed area RX]
(1) Use
• To set whether to use the closed network function.
• To receive data only from the device which password matches.
(2) Procedure
• When set to [ON], enter the password (up to 4 digits) to be used.
D. Forward TX Setting
• It will not be displayed when [PC-FAX RX Setting], [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Set-
ting] is set to “ON.”
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor or Authentication
Device is mounted.
(1) Use
• To set whether to use the forward fax function.
• To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified.
Forward & Print : Forward the received text, and print all out
Forward & Print (If TX Fails) : Forward the received text, and prints out only when fails
to be forwarded
(2) Procedure
<Forward TX Setting>
• When set to [Yes], set the address to forward to.
E. Incomplete TX Hold
[Service Mode] o [FAX] o [System] o [Display Setting] o [Re-Transmission]
mounted.
(1) Use
• To set whether to use incomplete TX hold function.
• To re-send the data failed to be sent after a given time.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
• When set to Yes, specify the Incomplete TX Hold Time.

F. PC-Fax RX Setting
• It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Set-
ting] is set to “ON.”
(1) Use
• To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function.
• To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk.
(2) Procedure
• When Allow is selected, make the settings of Receiving user box destination, Print ON/
OFF, and Password check ON/OFF.
G. TSI User Box Setting

• It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX] or [PC-Fax RX Setting]
is set to “ON.”
(1) Use
• To set whether to use TSI distribution or not.
• To set setting method when there is no matched box at receiving.
Automatically Print : To print the received data.
Memory RX Use Box : To store the received data in the forced memory receiving
box.
(2) Procedure
<TSI User Box Setting>
Yes “No”
• Press [TSI User Box Registration] and register the distribution.
<Non-matched Box Setting>

• The default setting is Automatically Print.
“Automatically Print” Memory RX User Box
10.6.73 Fax Settings-PBX Connection Setting

A. Use
• To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not.
• This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line.
B. Procedure
• When set to [Yes], enter the external number between 0 and 9999.

10.6.74 Fax Settings-Report Settings

A. Activity Report
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication
device is mounted.
(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the activity report or not, and also the timing for printing.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
• When this setting is set to ON, make the setting of Output Setting.
• The default setting is Every 100 Comm.
Daily “Every 100 Comm.” 100/ Daily
B. TX Result Report
(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the TX report, and also the timing for printing.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is If TX Fails.
ON “If TX Fails” OFF
C. Sequential TX Report
(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the sequential TX report or not.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
D. Timer Reservation TX Report

(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
E. Confidential RX Report
(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the confidential RX report.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF

F. Bulletin TX Report
(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the bulletin TX report or not.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
G. Relay TX Result Report

(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the relay TX result report or not.
• To print out the relay TX result report after the relay delivery is completed when the
machine is used as the relay delivery station.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
H. Relay Request Report

(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the relay request RX report or not.
• To print out the relay request RX report during relay request RX when the machine is
used as the relay delivery station.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
I. PC-Fax TX Error Report

(1) Use
• To set whether to print out the PC-fax TX error report or not.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

J. Broadcast Result Report

(1) Use
• To set the format to output the broadcast result report.
All Destinations : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses
Each Destination : Outputs a report after each transmission
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is All Destinations.
“All Destinations” Each Destination
K. TX Result Report Check

(1) Use
• To set whether to display the TX result report screen.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
L. Network Fax RX Error Report

• Settings will be available when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in
the following settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set whether to print RX error report when network fax function is being used.
• To print the error report at unusual situation such as receiving the image data that cannot
be processed.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
M. MDN Message
• Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set whether to print message when receiving response message to MDN request
when internet fax function is being used.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF

N. DSN Message
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set whether to print message when receiving response message to DSN request
when network fax function is being used.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
O. Print E-mail Message Body

Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set whether to print mail text received normally as the report when internet fax func-
tion is being used.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
10.6.75 Fax Settings-Job Settings List
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted.
(It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows
that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
(1) Use
• The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator Settings] o [Fax Setting] o [Job Settings List].
3. Select the simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.

10.6.76 Fax Settings-Multi Lines Settings

• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted.
A. Line Parameter Setting

(1) Dialing Method
<Use>
• To set the dial method for the expanded line.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is PB.
“PB” 10 pps
NOTE
(2) Number of Rx Call Rings

<Use>
• To set the number of RX call rings for the expanded line.
• To change the number of artificial ringback tones with expanded line when receiving calls
until it starts receiving operation.
<Procedure>
“2 X” (0 to 15)
(3) Line Monitor Sound

<Use>
• To set whether or not to output the line monitor sound of the expanded line from the
speaker.
<Procedure>
“ON” OFF
B. Function Settings
(1) PC-FAX TX Setting
• This setting does not appear when “RX Only” is selected for [Multi Line Settings].
<Use>
• To set the number of the line used for PC-FAX transmission.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is No Selection.
“No Selection” Line 1 Line 2

C. Multi Lines Setting

(1) Use
• To set the system for using each line when using more than one line.
(2) Procedure
<Multi Line Usage>
• When selecting [Normal], perform the transmission setting for Line 2.
<Line 2 Setting>
• The default setting is TX and RX.
“TX and RX” RX Only TX Only
D. Sender Fax No.

(1) Use
• To register the fax ID when using the additional line.
(2) Procedure
• Use 10-key pad or [+] / [space], enter the fax ID (up to 20 characters).
10.6.77 Fax Settings-Network Fax Settings

• It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the
following settings.
Function Settings]
A. Black Compression Level

following settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set black compression level at monochrome TX mode when network fax function is
being used.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is MH.
“MH” MR MMR

B. Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method

following settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set a color/black multi value compression method used when faxing selecting JPEG
or PDF as a file format under network fax operation.
JPEG (Color) : Data is compressed in color JPEG format.
JPEG (Gray Scale) : Data is compressed in monochrome JPEG format.
Unset : Data transmission in color or grayscale is disabled. Data is com-
pressed in black and white (binary) with a specified compression
method.
(2) Procedure
• The default setting is JPEG (Color).
“JPEG (Color)” JPEG (Gray Scale) Unset
C. Internet Fax Self Rx Ability

• It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set image data compression system, paper size and resolution, which can be
received by the machine with internet fax.
(2) Procedure
• The following shows the options of each setting item.
Compression Type Paper Size Resolution

JPEG (Color) A3 600 x 600 (Ultra Fine)
JPEG (Gray Scale) B4 400 x 400 (Super Fine)
MMR A4 200 x 200 (Fine)
MR 200 x 100 (Std.)
MH

D. I-Fax Advanced Settings

• It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set advanced functions of internet fax.
MDN Request : To set whether to send MDN (Message Disposition
Notification) request when transmitting through
internet fax.
DSN Request : To set whether to send DSN (Delivery Status Notifi-
cation) request when transmitting through internet
fax.
MDN Response : To set whether to response for MDN request made
by the other machine when receiving through inter-
net fax.
MDN/DSN Response Watch Time : To set the period to observe the response from the
other machine when sending MDN/DSN request.
In the case of time over, time out message is noti-
fied.
Max Resolution : To set maximum resolution for reading, TX/RX and
record when internet fax function is being used.
Add Content-Type Information : To set whether or not to add Content-Type informa-
tion when using Internet fax.
When [Yes] is selected, “application=faxbw” is
added as sub-type to MIME Content-Type header.
NOTE
• Only MDN Request will be sent when both MDN Request and DSN Request are set
to “ON.”
(2) Procedure
• Default settings are shown below.
MDN Request : “ON” OFF

DSN Request : ON “OFF”
MDN Response : “ON” OFF
MDN/DSN Response Watch Time : “24 hours” (1 to 99) OFF
Max Resolution : 400 x 400 “600 x 600”
Add Content-Type Information : Yes “Do Not Send”

E. IP Address Fax Operation Settings

• It will not be displayed when [IP Address Fax Function] is set to “OFF” in the following
settings.
Function Settings]
(1) Use
• To set the operational mode applied to IP address fax.
Mode1: This mode allows communication between Olivetti models capable of
transmitting IP address faxes and models compatible with the Direct SMTP
standard defined by CIAJ. However, a unique method developed for Olivetti
models is used to transmit a color fax.
Mode2: This mode allows communication between Olivetti models capable of
transmitting IP address faxes and models compatible with the Direct SMTP
standard defined by CIAJ. The transmission in color mode is performed in the
communication mode (Profile-C format) compatible with the Direct SMTP stan-
dard.
(2) Procedure
<Operation Mode>
• The default setting is Mode1.
“Mode1” Mode2
• When selecting Mode 2, make color original transmission settings.
10.6.78 System Connection-OpenAPI Settings

A. Access Setting
(1) Use
• To allow or restrict the access from other systems with OpenAPI when using Page Scope
Data Administrator.
(2) Procedure

B. SSL/Port Settings
(1) Use
• To set the SSL/access port for other systems with OpenAPI.
(2) Procedure
<SSL Setting>
• The default setting is Non-SSL Only.
“Non-SSL Only” SSL Only SSL/Non-SSL
<Port No./Port No.(SSL)>

1. Select Port No. or Port No. (SSL), and touch [Input].
<Client Certificates>
• The default setting is Do Not Request.
Request “Do Not Request”
<Certificate Verification Level Settings>

C. Authentication
(1) Use
• To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which uses OpenAPI when using
PageScope Data Administrator.
• To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
• When setting to [ON], enter the login name and the password to be set.

10.6.79 System Connection-Call Remote Center

• It will be displayed when the setup at the CS Remote Care center is complete.
A. Use
• To call the CS Remote Care center from the administrator, when the CS Remote Care
setup is complete.
B. Procedure
For details, see “CS Remote Care.”
See P.491
10.6.80 System Connection-Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting

(1) Use
• Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
10.6.81 System Connection-Printer Information

A. Use
• Specify [Printer Name], [Printer Location], [Printer Information], and [Printer URI].
The [Printer Information] setting is linked to [Printer Information] in [HTTP Server Set-
tings].
B. Procedure
2. Enter the printer name, printer location and printer information using the keyboard on
the display.
3. Touch [Printer URI], and confirm the printer URI information.
10.6.82 System Connection-Cellular Phone/PDA Setting

A. Use
• Specify whether to allow the user to print data in a cellular phone or PDA or save such
data in a User Box.
B. Procedure

10.6.83 Security Settings-Administrator Password

A. Use
• To set/change the administrator password.
B. Procedure
• Enter the administrator password on the on-screen keyboard.
Current Password : Enter the current administrator password
New Password : Enter the new administrator password to be used
Re-Input Password : Re-enter the new administrator password
NOTE
• When selecting [Utility] o [Administrator Settings] o [Security Setting] o [Secu-
rity Details] leads to [Password Rules] being ON, the password with the same let-
ters, the password which is same as the previous one and the password of less
than eight digits cannot be changed.
10.6.84 Security Settings-User Box Admin. Setting

• Setting is disabled if user authentication or account track is not performed.
A. Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the box administrator to use the system.
• To allow the box administrator to use the system.
The box administrator is the special administrator for box, who is allowed to browse con-
tents in common box / individual box without the password.
NOTE
• [Allow] cannot be set when the user authentication or account track is not carried
out.
B. Procedure
NOTE
• [Allow] cannot be selected when user authentication and account track are not
conducted.
• Set the password when setting to [Allow].
NOTE
• When the following setting shows that [Password Rules] is set to “ON”, the Pass-
word using only a single letter or the password same with the previous one, or the
password with less than eight letters cannot be accepted.
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings]

10.6.85 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication
device 1 is mounted.
A. Use
• To set the level for administrator settings item open to the user.
• To make part of the administrator settings items open to the user.
Level 1 : [Power Save Setting], [Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)], [Auto Magni-
fication Selection (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when APS Off], [Select Tray
for Insert Sheet] and [Card Shot Settings] are available to users.
Level 2 : [Power Save Setting], [Output Setting], [Date/Time Setting], [Daylight Sav-
ings Time Setting], [AE Level Adjustment], [Auto Magnification Selection
(Platen)], [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when
APS Off], [Select Tray for Insert Sheet], and [Print Jobs During Copy Oper-
ation] are available to users.
Prohibit : Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Prohibit.
Level 1 Level 2 “Prohibit”
10.6.86 Security Settings-Security Details

A. Password Rules
(1) Use
• To set whether to apply the password rules.
• To apply the password rule to enhance security.

• Passwords to be covered: CE password, administrator password, public user box pass-
word, user password, account track password, passwords for
confidential documents, SNMPv3 WriteUser password,
WebDAV server password.
• Details of the password rules:
Password except user password, public user box password, SNMPv3 WriteUser pass-
word shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. (Case-sensitive)
User password shall be 8 to 64 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.
(Case-sensitive)
Public user box password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.
SNMPv3 WriteUser password shall be 8 to 32 digits of one-bite alphanumeric charac-
ters.
Password with only the same letter is prohibited.
Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited.
When the password rule is set to [ON], the password cannot be changed or registered
unless it follows the above conditions.

(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
NOTE
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Enhances Security Mode]
• [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “OFF.”
[Service Mode] o [Enhanced Security] o [CE Authentication]
[CE Authentication] will not be displayed and cannot be set to “OFF” when [Pass-
word Rules] is set to “ON.”
B. Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error

(1) Use
• To set the function for prohibiting authentication operation in order to prevent the unau-
thorized access.
• To use when setting the system to prohibit authentication failure when conducting
authentication by password, etc.
• Authentications which are subjected to this function: CE authentication, administrator
authentication, user+ accounts authentication, SNMP authentication, secure print
authentication, user box authentication.
Mode 1 : When failed to authenticate, authentication operation (entering the password)

will be prohibited for a certain period of time.
Mode 2 : When failed to authenticate, authentication operation (entering the password)
will be prohibited for a certain period of time.
The number of times failure occurred will be counted, and when the number
reaches to the specified time, authentication will be prohibited and the access
will be locked.
When the access is locked, touch [Release] on the main body, or turn main
power switch OFF/ON to cancel it.
For CE authentication and administrator authentication, only turning main
power switch OFF/ON will cancel it.
When the machine goes into an access lock condition, release the lock in the
following procedure.
User+ accounts authentication • Touch keys in the following order. [Administrator Settings] o
SNMP authentication [Security Setting] o [Security Details] o [Prohibited Func-
Secure print authentication tions When Authentication Error].
User box authentication Then touch [Release].
• After the main power switch is turned OFF and ON, the
access lock is released automatically after the lapse of a pre-
Administrator authentication determined period of time.
• [Service Mode] o [Enhanced Security] o [Administrator
unlocking]
• The lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop o
0 o 9 o 3 o 1 o 7 in [Meter Count] o [Check Details] o
CE authentication [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF
and On. When the timer reaches the time specified in this
setting, the access lock is released.

(2) Procedure
• The default setting is Mode 1.
“Mode 1” Mode 2
NOTE
• [Mode1] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
• Only the number of times for trials up to the access lock can be changed.
• When [Mode 2] is selected, set the number of times where checks are made before
access is locked.
• Touch [Release Time Settings] and set a period of time that elapses before access lock
is released.
C. Confidential Document Access Method

(1) Use
• To display the status of the authentication system on the control panel for the confidential
document access.
• It cannot be changed at the operator’s option since it will automatically be set according
to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error] setting.
• It will be set to [Mode 1] when [Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error] is set to
[Mode 1].
It will be set to [Mode 2] when [Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error] is set to
[Mode 2].
Mode 1 : This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID and password. It
displays the list of the corresponding confidential document to print them.
Mode 2 : This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID. It displays the list
of the corresponding confidential document, and print them with authentica-
tion by password.
NOTE
• [Mode1] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
(2) Procedure
“Mode 1” Mode 2
D. Manual Destination Input

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the desti-
nation Input screen.
• To prohibit entering the destination address manually.
(2) Procedure

E. Print Data Capture

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the print job data.
• To be used when carrying out [Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Data capture].
(2) Procedure
NOTE
F. Job Log Settings

(1) Use
• Selects whether to keep logs of operations and access made by users and service engi-
neers.
• To set whether to overwrite existing logs.
• To ensure security, this settings is used to keep logs of operations and access including
security settings changes, authentication, and job executions by users and service engi-
neers.
• Logs are saved in HDD and NVRAM.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
NOTE
• After selecting “Yes”, the main power switch must be turned OFF and ON so that
the new setting takes effect.
• When ON is selected in [Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o
[Enhanced Security Mode], this setting is automatically set to “Yes.”
<Overwrite>
• Set whether to allow or restrict overwriting existing logs when saving audit logs.
• To erase audit logs, press [Erase Job Log].
G. Restrict Fax TX
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to prohibit sending fax.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

H. Hide Personal Information

• It will not be displayed when the two settings below are as follows:
The authentication device is set in [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Function Man-
agement Choice] o [Authentication Device].
“NO” is selected in [Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Function Manage-
ment Settings] o [Authentication Device Setting] o [Job Confirmation Display].
(1) Use
• Selects whether to display file names and destinations in job logs.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
I. Display Activity Log

• It will not be displayed when both settings are as follows:
The authentication device is set in [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting] o [Function Man-
agement Choice] o [Authentication Device].
“NO” is selected in [Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Function Manage-
ment Settings] o [Authentication Device Setting] o [Job Confirmation Display].
(1) Use
• Selects whether to display communication logs for scan/fax transmission.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
J. Initialize
(1) Use
• All data of selected items is cleared.
• Data of the following items can be cleared.
- Job history
- Copy Program
- Network Settings
- One-Touch/User Box Registration
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Initialize].
2. Select the desired item to clear its data and touch [OK].
3. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK] to initialize the data.
K. Job History Thumbnail Display

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to display a thumbnail of originals when displaying a job history.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”

L. Secure Print Only

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to allow only Secure Print for print jobs from PC.
When “ON” is selected in this setting, the Secure Print feature must be always used for
printing from a printer driver. As all print jobs require ID or a password, output documents
remains private.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
M. Copy Guard
• It will be displayed only when the optional security kit SC-507 is mounted.
(1) Use
• Specify whether to use the Copy Guard function.
If [Copy Guard] is selected in [Application], you can embed copy inhibit information on
paper.
• This is used upon set-up of the optional security kit SC-507.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”
N. Password Copy
• It will be displayed only when the optional security kit SC-507 is mounted.
(1) Use
• Specify whether to use the Password Copy function.
If [Password Copy] is selected in [Application], you can embed a password on paper. You
can also detect a password embedded on paper.
• This is used upon set-up of the optional security kit SC-507.
(2) Procedure
Yes “No”

O. Web browser contents access

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable access to locally-stored files (pre-installed contents,
image files, and help files) from the web browser that is interacting with MFP via
OpenAPI applications.
(2) Procedure
* When using the application where server authentication is carried out by web browser
extensions, [Allow] is automatically selected.
10.6.87 Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode

A. Use
• To set whether or not to enhance security.
• To use when enhancing the security function at user’s option.
• The following settings are necessary for setting the security enhancement “ON”.
Administrator Password : Change it with the one which meets password rules.
User Authentication : Set to “User Authentication (MFP)” or “User Authentication
(External Server)”.
HDD encryption word : Set the encryption word with 20 characters.
SSL Certificate : Register self-certificate for SSL communication from the
PSWC.
Image Controller Setting : Set to [Controller 0].

CE Password : Change it with the one which meets password rules.
CE Authentication : Set to [ON].
Image Controller Setting : Set to [Controller 0].
Management Function Choice
: Set to “Unset.”
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”
NOTE
• Setting the Enhanced Security Mode “ON” will change the setting values for the
following functions.
Name of the function Default setting When Enhanced Security Mode is ON

Password Rules OFF ON (Cannot be changed)
Prohibit Functions When Mode 2 (Cannot be changed) set to three times
Mode 1
Auth. Error *Can change times (from once to three times)
User Name List OFF OFF (Cannot be change)
Print without Authentication Restrict Restrict (Cannot be changed)
User Box Admin. Setting Restrict Restrict (Cannot be changed)
Mode 2 (Cannot be changed)
Secure Document Access
Mode 1 *It will be changed according to “Prohibit Func-
Method
tions When Auth. Error”.

Name of the function Default setting When Enhanced Security Mode is ON

Job History Thumbnail
OFF OFF (Cannot be changed)
Display
SSL OFF ON (Cannot be changed)
FTP Server ON OFF (Cannot be changed)
SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write allowed Only “Read” is allowed (Cannot be changed)
SNMPv3 auth-password/ Cannot be changed to disable authentication
Write User Security Level priv-password system
Network Setting Clear
(PageScope Web Allow Restrict
Connection)
Administrator password
change via network (Page- Allow Restrict (Cannot be changed)
Scope Web Connection)
Registering and Changing
Allow Restrict (Cannot be changed)
Addresses by user
Public User Access Restrict Restrict (Cannot be changed)
Print Data Capture Allowed Prohibited (Cannot be changed)
When the time setting is between 1 and 4 min., 5
min. replaces the setting and takes effect.
Release Time Settings 5 min.
The lower limit of settable range is 5 minutes.
(Cannot be set to less than 5 minutes)
Image display/List
Secure print user box Only list display available before password
display/document
preview authentication (Mode 2)
detail display
Image Log Transfer Settings NO NO (Cannot be changed)
Internet ISW
Disabled Disabled (Cannot be changed)
(Service Mode)
When the time setting is between 1 and 4 min., 5
Operation Ban release time min. replaces the setting and takes effect.
5 min.
(Service Mode) The lower limit of settable range is 5 minutes.
(Cannot be set to less than 5 minutes)
10.6.88 Security Settings-HDD Settings

A. Check HDD Capacity
(1) Use
• To display the used space capacity, total space capacity, and the remaining capacity of
the hard disk.
• To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk.

B. Overwrite HDD Data

• When the image becomes unnecessary, temporary data overwrite function will write
meaningless data over all area where images are stored, and destroy the image data
itself.
The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen, the remain-
ing data included in the image data will not leak. Using the HDD lock password function
or HDD encryption function along with this function will provide a high level of security
which prevents images of great importance from leaking. It is recommended to use HDD
lock password function or HDD encryption function along with this function for those who
require high level of security.
(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use overwrite temporary data.
• To set overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function.
• To use when making temporary data overwrite function valid.
• All data are temporarily written into HDD during PC print, copier print, scanning and fax
transmission. When the operation is complete, perform overwriting to the area data were
once written in HDD in order to enhance security.
• To change overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function.
Mode 1: To overwrite 0x00 one time.
Mode 2: Overwrite 0x00 o overwrite 0xff o overwrite 0x61 ovalidation
• “Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority” can be selected.

Encryption Priority : When the encryption word is set, the security level of the data will
be enhanced before writing to HDD. When erasing data, they will
all be converted into encryption data before overwritten. There-
fore, overwriting will be executed with the value besides the value
specified by the selected mode.

Overwrite Priority : Standard encryption method will be applied to data written to
HDD even when the encryption word is set, so overwriting and
erasing will be performed without fail using the specified value in
the selected mode.
It is used for performing the overwriting and erasing according to
the HDD data erase standard.
NOTE
• It is necessary to make HDD format when encryption priority/overwrite priority set-
ting is changed.
(2) Procedure
ON “OFF”
When selecting [ON], select an overwrite method.

“Mode 1” Mode 2
NOTE
• The default setting is Encryption Priority.
“Encryption Priority” Overwrite Priority

C. Overwrite All Data

(1) Use
• To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting.
• To initialize the area of use for the user stored in NVRAM.
• To use when disposing of the hard disk.
• Select the overwriting method from Mode 1 through 8.
Mode 1 : It overwrites 0x00 once.
Mode 2 : Overwrites with random numbers o overwrites with random numbers o over-
writes with 0x00
Mode 3 : Overwrites with 0x00 o overwrites with 0xff o overwrites with random num-
bers o verifies
Mode 4 : Overwrites with random numbers o overwrites with 0x00 o overwrites with
0xff
Mode 5 : Overwrites with 0x00 o overwrites with 0xff o overwrites with 0x00 o over-
writes with 0xff
writes with 0xff o overwrites with 0x00 o overwrites with 0xff o overwrites
with random numbers
with 0xaa
with 0xaa o verifies
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Overwrite All Data].
2. Touch [Overwrite].
3. Touch [Yes] on the check screen.
4. Touch [YES] on the confirmation screen.
5. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
D. HDD Lock Password

(1) Use
• To set the lock password for the hard disk.
• To enter, change or delete the lock password for the hard disk.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [HDD Lock Password].
2. Enter the password (20 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• Password using only a single letter is not acceptable.
• Don’t forget the password. When the password is forgotten, the replacement of
hard disk is needed.
3. Re-enter the password to confirm.

4. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after.

E. Format HDD
(1) Use
• To conduct logical formatting of HDD.
NOTE
• It is subject to logical formatting here, therefore if starting with physical format-
ting, follow as [Service Mode] o [State Confirmation] o [Memory/HDD Adj.] o
[HDD Format].
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [HDD Formatting].
2. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK].
F. HDD Encryption Setting

(1) Use
• To re-set encrypting word due to exchange of NVRAM board or etc.
NOTE
• This setting is available only when the optional security kit SC-503 is mounted.
• HDD formatting is required after this setting. Therefore it is necessary to retrieve
certain data from HDD in advance.
The following data will be lost after HDD formatting.
➀ Address data
➁ Authentication data : Authentication mode, user authentication setting, account track
setting
➂ Box setting data : Box and text in the box, setting information of each box, box for
fax
➃ Job history, fax transmission history

(2) Procedure
1. Press [HDD Encryption Setting].
2. Enter encryption key (20 characters) with the keyboard on the operation panel and
press [OK].
NOTE
• Double-byte and identical characters are not acceptable.
4. Open [Administrator Settings] and conduct HDD formatting according to the instruction
appeared on the panel.

10.6.89 Security Settings-Function Management Setting

A. Each Function Setting
• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor 2 or Management
Device is mounted.
(1) Use
• To set whether to use management function for each item of [Copy], [PC print], [Send
data] and [Print others].
[Print others] is not displayed when vendor is connected.
• [ON] for [Send Data] will not be displayed when the optional image controller (IC-409) is
mounted.
• To set whether to use Management function for each item of [Copy], [PC print], [Send
data] and [Print others].
[Print others] is not displayed when Vendor is connected.
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF Prohibit
B. Max Copy Set

• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
(1) Use
• To set the upper limit of the number of copy or PC print when management function has
been set.
(2) Procedure
1 to “9999”
C. Network Function Usage Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use network function or not when management function has been set.
• Not to use the network function whose counter is difficult to be managed when manage-
ment function has been set.
• The following are target functions.
PC-FAX transmission/Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in
user boxes/Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in user
boxes/Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes/Using Page-
Scope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Box operations using
the PageScope Web Connection
(2) Procedure
“ON” OFF
NOTE
• However, when the vendor or management device setting in the Service Mode is
set, this setting is set to OFF.
Exercise caution since it will stay in “OFF” setting even when “unset” is selected
on vendor or management device setting in Service Mode later.

D. Authentication Time Setting

• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is
mounted.
(1) Use
• To set the authentication mode when authentication device is used.
• To change the authentication mode when authentication device is used.
Keep Card : Authentication is available leaving the card in the given place when
making authentication with the device.
Touch and Print : Card is placed only when authentication is made with the device and
if the card is left for a given time (authentication reset time) the
authentication setting is reset.
• When selecting “Touch and Print”, authentication reset is set after completing the job in
[Authentication Time].
(2) Procedure
<Authentication Method>
• The default setting is Touch and Print.
Keep Card “Touch and Print”
<Authentication Time>
1 to 30 min.
<Authentication Log-out When Job is Completed>

“Yes” No
10.6.90 Security Settings-Stamp Settings

A. Apply Stamps
(1) Use
• Selects whether to add a stamp to documents when jobs are printed or fax/scanned data
is sent.
(2) Procedure
• The each default setting is Do Not Apply.
Apply “Do Not Apply”

• Touch “Apply” to make stamp settings independently for print and transmission modes.
B. Delete Registered Stamp

(1) Use
• Deletes registered stamps, and copy protect/repeat stamps.
(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Registered Stamp].
2. Select [Stamp] or [Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat].
3. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK] to delete the registered stamps.

10.6.91 Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings

• It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.63 is set to [01] at
HEX assignment.
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Software Switch Setting]
A. Use
• Specifies whether to transfer the input or output image data to the server using whenever
MFP inputs or outputs image data.
Makes the settings of the WebDAV server or the FTP server where image data are trans-
ferred.
• Use this settings to keep logs of input and output image data for security purpose.
B. Procedure
• The each default setting is No.
Yes “No”
• When selecting [Yes], make the settings of the server where data are transferred.
• Set the following item.
<WebDAV Server setting>

• Host Name, File Path, User Name, Password, Port Number, Proxy, SSL Setting.
<FTP Server setting>

• Host Name, File Path, User Name, Password, Port Number, PASV, and Proxy.
10.6.92 Security Settings-Driver Password Encryption Setting

A. Use
• To set whether to use the factory default encryption word or user-defined one as a com-
mon key that encrypts a password used for a print job.
User-Defined : Sets an encryption word. Enter an encryption word of 20 letters.
Use Factory Default: Uses the factory default encryption word (undisclosed predefined
encryption key).
NOTE
• When selecting [User-Defined], set an encryption key being consisted of the same
letters in the printer driver. If the encryption word set in the main body differs from
the encryption key set in the printer driver, different encrypted passwords are cre-
ated and printing cannot be made.
• The use of OpenAPI allows an encryption key to be obtained from the main body.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Use Factory Default.
User-Defined “Use Factory Default”

10.6.93 License Settings-Get Request Code

A. Use
• To display and print a request code and serial number used to activate i-Option.
• Used to confirm the request code and serial number.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Get Request Code], and [Yes].
2. A serial number and request code are issued.
3. By touching [Print], the serial number and request code are printable.
10.6.94 License Settings-Install License

• This is displayed only when the additional memory included in the optional upgrade kit
UK-203 is installed.
A. Use
• To allow administrator to activate functions provided by i-Option.
• Used when administrator activates functions provided by i-Option.
• By selecting a desired function and entering the corresponding license code, the function
can be activated.
• By making settings in [Service Mode] o [Billing Setting], CE can also activate functions
provided by i-Option.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Install License].
2. Touch [Select Function].
3. Select i-Option function to be activated, and touch [Yes].
4. Touch [OK].
5. Touch [License Code].

6. Enter the license code that was issued in the license management server using the key
board on the control panel, and touch [OK].
7. Touch [Install] key.
8. Confirm the message, select [Yes], and touch [OK].
9. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
10.6.95 License Settings-List of Enabled Functions

• This is displayed only when the additional memory included in the optional upgrade kit
UK-203 is mounted.
A. Use
• To display currently activated functions.
• Used to check the functions that are activated now.

10.6.96 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Restriction Code Setting

A. Use
• These are communication settings for the application which is developed by the third
vendor.
Do not set or change these settings without vendor’s instructions.
10.7 Banner Printing

• It will not be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526 is mounted.
A. Use
• To shift to the banner printing mode.
• To use when printing on the long size paper.
B. Procedure
1. Set the long size paper to the bypass tray.
2. Touch [Banner Printing], and touch [ON].
3. Send the job for the long paper print.
4. Touch [Finish] to finish banner printing mode.
NOTE
• Only PC print is available for the long paper print.
• Normal job cannot be accepted during banner printing mode.

10.8 My Panel Settings

• This is displayed only when a registered user is logging in after user authentication.
However, this is not displayed when both management device 2 and user authentication
are used.
A. Use
• To make various settings about My Panel.
• To customize My Panel screen for individual registered users.
• Items that can be set are as follows:
Language Setting, Measurement Unit Setting, Copier Settings, Scan/Fax Settings, Color
Selection Setting, Main Menu Settings, and Initial Screen Setting
B. Procedure
1. Touch [My Panel Settings].
2. Touch a key that represents a desirable item and change its settings.
NOTE
• Registering, editing, and deleting My Panel settings are allowed only when logging
in as a registered user.
• When My Panel is not customized, the settings for MFP take effect in the three of
the control panel settings, Language setting, Measurement unit setting, and Color
selection setting.
• Depending on the functions provided by each MFP and the optional device config-
uration, not all My Panel settings may not take effect.
10.9 Device Information


A. Use
• To display the function version of the firmware installed in MFP and the IP address.
B. Procedure
• Touch [Device Information] to check the function version and IP address.
<About function version>
Function version
Version 1 Version 2
Model
d-Color MF651/MF551 Initial firmware Function enhancement 1
d-Color MF451 - Initial firmware
MF360/MF280/MF220 - Initial firmware

Blank Page

11. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
11. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST

Replacement part/Service job
Replace separation roller assy

Replace paper feed roller
Replace transfer belt unit

Change marketing area
Replace mirror unit

Replace CCD unit
Replace PH unit
Replace IU
Install LCT
Adjustment/setting items No
Print Positioning: Leading Edge 1 (4)
Printer
Print Positioning: Side Edge 2 ❍ (5)
Area
Paper Feed Direction Adj. 3 (1) (4)
Image position: Leading Edge 4
Scan Image position: Side Edge 5 (3)
Area Cross Direction Adjustment 6 (2)
Machine
Feed Direction Adjustment 7 (5)
Org. Detecting Sensor Adj. 8 ❍
Skew Skew adjustment 9 (1)
adjustment Skew adjustment reset 10 (2)
LD LD delay adjust. 11 (3)
Service Mode
adjustment LD lightness balance adjust. 12

Touch Panel Adjust 13
HDD R/W Check 14
Memory/
State HDD Format 15

HDD
Confir- Adjust Conversion Up/Down 16
mation Up/Down Version 17
Table Number 18
Firmware Version 19
System Re-entry of setting values 20
1/2 Serial Number 21
Counter Life Counter Clear 22 ❍ ❍
Image Process Adjustment Gradation Adjust 23 ❍ ❍
ADF Read Pos Adj *1 24 (3)
Enhanced Security NVRAM Data Backup 25
Re-entry of Utility settings 26
Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings 27
Parallel adjustment of scanner/mirrors carriage 28 (1)
Positioning scanner unit 29 (2)
Scanner motor belt adjustment 30
Original glass moving unit height adjustment 31
F/W upgrading 32
Installation of original size sensor 33
Remounting of NVRAM (MFP board) 34
Replace transfer belt unit 35
• This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. Prior-
ity order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the
parentheses.

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
No
Replace original size
(1)
(2)
(3)
detection sensor
Y110571-1
Wind scanner drive cables
(3)
(2)
(4)
Replace scanner motor
(1) (1)
(5) (2)
Replace scanner assy
(1)
(2)
(3)
Replace scanner
❍
home sensor
Replace original glass
(1)
(2)
moving unit
Replace glass step sheet
❍
Replace printer control
❍
board
Replace MFP board
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Replace image processing
❍
board
Replace original glass

(1)
(2)
Service Manual
Replace IDC/registration
❍
sensor/F,R
(1) Replace hard disk

(2)
Add key counter
❍
(2) Execute initialize
(5)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(6)
❍ Execute add. option
Execute F/W update

❍
❍
❍
Add fax board
❍
11. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST
453
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
12. SERVICE MODE

12.1 List of service mode
✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Service Mode Ref. Page

Machine Color alignment Adjustment P.461
Fusing Temperature P.462
Fusing Transport Speed P.463
Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. P.464
Printer Area Leading Edge Adjustment P.465
Centering P.466
Leading Edge Adj. P.467
(Duplex Side 2)
Paper Feed Direction Adj. P.469
Scan Area Image Position: Leading Edge P.471
Image Position: Side Edge P.472
Cross Direction Adjustment P.473
Feed Direction Adjustment P.474
Printer Resist Loop P.475
Color Registration Adjustment P.476
Skew adjustment Skew adjustment P.477
Skew adjustment reset P.477

LD adjustment LD delay adjust. P.478
LD lightness balance adjust. P.479
Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment P.480
Lead Edge Erase Adjustment P.480
Thick Paper Mode P.480
Split Line Prior Detection P.481
Non-Image Area Erase Check P.481
Firmware Version P.482
Imaging Process Gradation Adjust P.482
Adjustment Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias P.483
Auto Cleaning P.484
D Max Density Copy P.484
Printer
TCR Level Setting P.485
Background Voltage Margin P.485
Transfer Output Fine Primary transfer adj. P.486
Adjustment Secondary transfer adj. P.487
Stabilizer Stabilization Only P.487
Initialize+Image Stabilization P.488

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE

Imaging Process Thick Paper Density Thick 1,1+ P.488
Adjustment Adjustment Thick 2,3,4
Paper separation adjustment P.489
TCR Toner Supply P.489
Monochrome Density Adjustment P.490
Development AC Voltage Choice P.490
CS Remote Care P.491
System 1 Marketing Area P.523
Tel/Fax Number P.524
Serial Number P.524
No Sleep P.525
Foolscap Size Setting P.525
Original Size Detection P.525
Install Date P.526
Initialization Clear All Data P.526
Clear Individ- Copy Program Data P.526
ual Data Address Registration P.527
Data
Fax Setting Data P.527
All History Data P.527
Network Setting Data P.527
System Error Clear P.528
Charging CH cleaning Cleaning P.528
Self-Cleaning P.528
Trouble Isolation P.529
Post card transfer table P.529
Change Warm Up Time P.529
Machine State LED Setting P.530
System 2 HDD P.531
Image Controller Setting P.531
Option Board Status P.532
Consumable Life Reminder P.532
Unit Change P.533
Software Switch Setting P.533
Scan Calibration P.535
LCC size setting P.535
LCT Paper Size Setting A4LCT P.535
A3LCT
Line Mag Setting P.536
Data Capture P.536
Split Line Detect. Setting P.538
Stamp P.539


System 2 Network Fax Settings P.540
Image Stabilization Setting P.540
User Paper Settings P.541
Coverage Rate Screen P.542
JAM Code Display Setting P.542
Boot up Screen P.542
Install Data P.543
Bluetooth Settings P.544
Counter Life P.544
Service Call P.546
Section Service Call P.546
Warning P.546
Maintenance P.547
Service Total P.547
Counter Of Each Mode P.548
Service Call History (Data) P.548
ADF Paper Pages P.548
Paper Jam History P.548
Fax Connection Error P.548
Split Line Counter P.549
Parts Counter (Fixed) P.549
Jam P.551
Section JAM P.551
Counter Reset
List Output Machine Management List P.551
Adjustments List P.551
Parameter List P.551
Service Parameter P.551
Protocol Trace Last P.551
Error
Fax Setting List P.551
Fax Analysis List P.552
State Confirmation Sensor Check P.552
Table Number P.573
Level History1 P.574
Level History2 P.574
Temp. & Humidity P.574
CCD Check P.575


State Confirmation Memory/HDD Adj. Memory Check P.575
Compress / Decompression Check P.576
Memory Bus Check P.576
DSC Bus Check P.576
HDD R/W Check P.577
HDD Format P.577
Memory/HDD State P.577
Color Regist P.578
IU Lot No. P.578
Adjustment Data List P.578
Test Mode Gradation Pattern P.579
Halftone Pattern P.580
Lattice Pattern P.581
Solid Pattern P.582
Color Sample P.582
8 Color Solid Pattern P.583
CMM Pattern P.583
Running Mode P.584
Fax Test P.584
ADF Original Stop Position P.585
Registration Loop Adj. P.586
Auto Stop Position Adjustment P.587
Paper Passage P.589
Sensor Check P.590
Original Tray Width P.592
Read Pos Adj P.593
Feed Zoom Orig. Feed Zoom Ad P.595
Auto Adjust P.595
Scanning Light Adjustment P.596
Mixed Original Size adjustment P.596
FAX *1 Line 1 *1 Modem/NCU *1 P.596
NetWork *1
System *1
Fax File Format *1
Communication *1
List Output *1
Function Parameter *1
Initialization *1
Line 2 *2 Modem/NCU *2
Network *2
Communication *2
Initialization *2


Finisher *3 FS-FN adjustment *3 Center Staple Position *3 P.597
Half-Fold Position *4 *5 P.598
Punch Vertical Position *9 P.599
Punch Horizontal Position *10 P.600
Punch edge detection *9 P.601
Punch vertical position (Z-fold) *7 P.602
Punch horizontal position (Z-fold) *7 P.603
Punch regist adj. (Z-fold) *7 P.603
Punch Resist Loop Size (Body) *10 P.604
Punch Resist Loop Size (PI) *6 *9 P.604
1st Z-Fold position *7 P.605
2nd Z-Fold position *7
Tri-Fold Position *4 P.606
Center-staple pitch adjustment *4 *5 P.607
PI Size Detection *6 P.607
Post Inserter Adjustment *6 P.608
finisher check *3 P.608
Load Data *3 P.611
Side position adjustment *4 *5 P.612
Punch unit edge detection *7 P.612
Staple option setting P.613
Punch Option setting P.613

Fold power of pages restrict. P.614
Job Separator *8 P.614
Internet ISW Internet ISW Set P.615
HTTP Setting *11 P.615
FTP Setting *11 P.616
Forwarding Access Setting *11 P.617
Download *11 P.618
*1: It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 1 is mounted.
*2: It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted.
*3: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-526 or FS-527) is mounted.
*4: It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher (SD-508) is mounted.
*5: It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher (SD-509) is mounted.
*6: It will be displayed only when the optional post inserter (PI-505) is mounted.
*7: It will be displayed only when the optional Z folding unit (ZU-606) is mounted.
*8: It will be displayed only when the optional job separator (JS-504) is mounted.
*9: It will be displayed only when the optional punch kit (PK-516) is mounted.
*10: It will be displayed only when the optional punch kit (PK-516 or PK-517) is mounted.
*11: It will be displayed only when the [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON.”

NOTE
• Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. They
should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service
jobs.
A. Procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. Touch [Details] on meter count display.
3. Press the following keys in this order.; Stop o 0 o 0 o Stop o 0 o 1
NOTE
• When selecting [CE Authentication] under [Enhanced Security] available from Ser-
vice Mode, authentication by CE password is necessary.
Enter the 8 digits CE password, and touch [END].
(The initial setting for CE password is “92729272.”)
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, CE password authentication is neces-
sary; [Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Enhanced Security Mode]
• If a wrong CE password is entered, re-enter the right password. The machine will
not enter Service Mode unless the CE password is entered correctly. To return to
the Basic screen, turn OFF the sub power switch and turn it ON again.
When the following setting is set to “Mode 2”, operation will be prohibited since it
indicates authentication failure by failing to enter the correct CE password within
the specified number of times.
if the access lock is activated, the lock release timer starts to operate by input the
Stop o 0 o 9 o 3 o 1 o 7 in [Meter Count] o [Check Details] o [Coverage Rate]
after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. When the timer reaches the
time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
• The service code entered is displayed as “✽.”
4. The Service Mode menu will appear.
A0P0F3E545DA

NOTE
• Be sure to change the CE password from its default value.
• For the procedure to change the CE password, see the Enhanced Security.
See P.619
B. Exiting procedure
• Touch the [Exit] key.
12.3 Date/Time Input mode

A. Use
• This mode is used to set time-of-day and date.
B. Procedure
2. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 1 → 1 → 4 → 4 → Clear
3. Enter year, month, day, hour, and minute, in that order, from 10-key pad.
(Year 4 digits → Month 2 digits → Day 2 digits → Hour 2 digits → Minute 2 digits)
NOTE
• Before entering date and time, press the Clear key to delete the present time from
the place where data and time is entered.
• When setting the month, day, hour, or minute, enter “0” first if the data one digit.
4. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch [Entry].
5. Touch [END] to return to the Service Mode.
A00JF3E537DA

12.4 Machine
12.4.1 Color Alignment Adjustment
A. Use
• To adjust color shift if color shift is found at the trailing edge of either plain paper or thick
paper by the comparison of originals and their output.
• Uses this function when color shift occurs at the trailing edge of images.
• Able to make a setting on a process speed basis independently for each paper type of
plain paper (color), thick 1/1+, and thick 2/3/4.
B. Procedure

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Color Registration Adjustment].
3. Load manual bypass tray with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/2 x 11 plain paper.
4. Select the paper type to be adjusted.
6. Using the printed test pattern, check color shift in the sub scan direction on both lead-
ing and trailing edge areas. If color shift is found only around the trailing edge, perform
the following adjustment.
(If color shift is found on both areas, perform [Color Registration Adjustment].
7. Using the [+] / [-] key, change the setting value as necessary.
If the cross deviates in the direction of A, increase the setting. (Decrease paper trans-
port speed.)
If the cross deviates in the direction of B, decrease the setting. (Increase paper trans-
port speed.)
Check Procedure
<compare two places>
If the cross deviates in the direction of A,

increase the setting.
A0P0F3C502DA

12.4.2 Fusing Temperature

A. Use
• To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller
for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing
environmental conditions.
• When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper
is changed or environmental conditions change.
• Use when the curling of the paper due to the paper type or environmental change
occurred, or when the paper jam, as well as stapling or folding position error occurred
due to the curling of the paper.
• By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print can be improved.
• By setting the temperature lower (-), exit roller mark can be reduced.
<Adjustment range>
Paper type Setting range step

Plain Paper -20 qC to +5 qC 5 qC
OHP Film -20 qC to +5 qC 5 qC
Thick 1 -20 qC to +5 qC 5 qC
Thick 1+ -20 qC to +5 qC 5 qC
Post. -20 qC to +5 qC 5 qC
Enve. -5 qC to +5 qC 5 qC
B. Procedure
NOTE
• To adjust the fusing temperature, adjust on the heating side first. If the further
adjustment is necessary, adjust on the pressure side.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Fusing Temperature].
3. Select the paper type and fusing roller type (Heater Roller or Pressure).
4. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] key.
If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.
If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.
If offset is poor, decrease the setting.
If curling of the paper occurs, decrease the setting.
5. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
6. Return to the basic screen.
7. Output two or three test printing and check to see whether the image has any problem.
8. Make the adjustment for each type of paper.

12.4.3 Fusing Transport Speed

A. Use
• To adjust the speed of the fusing motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport
speed.
• Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental condi-
tions or degraded durability.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Fusing Transport Speed].
3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred.
<d-Color MF651>
Transport speed Paper Setting

310 mm/s Plain paper: black (High speed)
240 mm/s Plain paper: black (Middle speed), color (Not glossy)
155 mm/s Thick 1, Thick 1+: black/color
Plain paper: color (Glossy)
120 mm/s Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4, envelope, postcard: black/color
OHP film: black
<d-Color MF551>

264 mm/s Plain paper: black (High speed)
216 mm/s Plain paper: black (Middle speed), color (Not glossy)
OHP film: black
<d-Color MF451>

216 mm/s Plain paper: black, color (Not glossy)
OHP film: black
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.

If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image.
If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting.

12.4.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.

A. Use
• To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the original size detection sen-
sor/1.
• To display if the original size detection sensor/2 is mounted.
• When the sensor is replaced with a new one.
• When an optional sensor has been added.
• When an erroneous original size detection is made.
• When the marketing area setting is changed.
B. Procedure
1. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper on the original glass and lower the original
cover.
3. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.].
If the adjustment has been successfully made, it completes the adjustment procedure.
If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful, check the optional original size sen-
sors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness.

12.4.5 Printer Area-Leading Edge Adjustment

A. Use
• To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types.
(To adjust the timing where paper is sent out from the timing roller)
• The paper type has been changed.
• The print image deviates in the sub scan direction.
• A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
• This setting can be made independently for plain paper, Thick 1/1+, Thick 2, Thick 3,
Thick 4, OHP transparencies, and envelopes.
B. Procedure
Width A
A0P0F3C503DA
• Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
1. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.

3. Touch [Machine] o [Printer Area] o [Leading Edge Adjustment].
4. Select the [Plain Paper].
rent one.
rent one.
again.
11. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END].
12. Following the same procedure, adjust for Thick 1 to 3, OHP film, and Enve.

12.4.6 Printer Area-Centering

A. Use
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
• The PH Unit has been replaced.
• A paper feed unit has been added.
• The print image deviates in the main scan direction.
B. Procedure
Width A
A0P0F3C504DA

2. Touch [Machine] o [Printer Area] o [Centering].
rent one.
rent one.
again.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the bypass.)

12.4.7 Printer Area-Leading Edge Adj. (Duplex Side 2)

A. Use
• For individual types of paper, this function allows the adjustment of the image write start
position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing.
• This adjustment is made when the image on the 2nd side of paper deviates from the
original position in the sub scan direction.
• This adjustment can be made independently for each of plain paper, thick paper 1/1+,
thick paper 2, and thick paper 3.
B. Procedure
Width A
Backside
A0P0F3C503DA
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern.

1. Place A3 paper on the tray.
3. Touch [Machine] o [Printer Area] o [Leading Edge Adj. (Duplex Side 2)].
4. Select the [Plain Paper].
rent one.
rent one.
again.
12. Following the same procedure, adjust for Thick paper.

12.4.8 Printer Area-Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)

A. Use
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-
Sided mode.
• The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.
B. Procedure
Width A
Backside
A0P0F3C504DA
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern.

2. Touch [Machine] o [Printer Area] o [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)].
rent one.
rent one.
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test print on the backside of the copy.
again.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray.)

12.4.9 Printer Area-Paper Feed Direction Adj.

A. Use
• To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed.
• Feed Direction Adjustment becomes necessary.
• The print image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk).
• When the print image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.
• This setting can be made independently for plain paper, Thick 1/1+, Thick 2, Thick 3, and
Thick 4.
B. Procedure
A0P0F3C505DA
• Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges.
Width A: equivalent to one grid
Width B: equivalent to 48 grids
Specifications
A: 7.9 to 8.3
B: 389.1 to 392.1
1. Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 x 17 plain paper.
3. Touch [Machine] o [Printer Area] o [Paper Feed Direction Adj.].
4. Select [Plain Paper].
6. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test
print.
7. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Printer Area] o [Paper Feed Direction
Adj].
8. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+]/[-]
keys.
If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the
current one.
If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the
current one.
9. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print again.
10. Check width A and width B on the test print.
11. If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a
check again.
12. If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch [END].
13. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick paper.

12.4.10 Scan Area

• Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.
• If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-
10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-1
0+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10
COLOR CHART COLOR CHART
P2
4.0 2.5 2.2
1.0
BK
4.5
2.8
2.0
3.2
Y M C
1.1
C
1.8
3.6
M
1.25 1.4 1.6 C䋫M C䋫Y Y䋫M
Y
Color is “hue”, ᑥⅱⅳ
lightness is “value”, ଢ↺ↄ
saturation is “chroma”:
C ⅱↅ↳ⅺↄ
R
this is the world of color. ↂ↻ⅻᑥࢢ↝ɭမ↖ↈ⅛
G
Hue
ᑥႻ ⿒‫ޔ‬㤛‫ޔ‬㕍ߣ޿߁ࠃ߁ߦ‫ࠇߙࠇߘޔ‬඙೎
A
described by words such as red, ߐࠇࠆ㨬⦡޽޿㨭ࠍ⦡⋧ߣ޿޿߹ߔ‫ޕ‬
yellow, blue etc. ᵦᴾᵆᵦᶃᶓᵇ
B
The quality of color which can be 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Value described by words such as light,
dark etc., relating the color to a gray
ଢࡇ
ᵴᴾᵆᵴᵿᶊᶓᶃᵇ
⦡ߣ⦡ࠍᲧセߒߡ‫ޔ‬᣿ࠆ޿⦡ߣ߆ᥧ޿⦡
ߣ޿߁ࠃ߁ߦ‫ߪߦ⦡ޔ‬㨬᣿ࠆߐ㨭ߩᐲว޿
߇޽ࠅ߹ߔ‫ޕ‬
of a similar lightness.
ߎߩࠃ߁ߦ⦡⋧ߦ㑐ଥߥߊᲧセߢ߈ࠆ
㨬᣿ࠆߐ㨭ߩᐲว޿ࠍ᣿ᐲߣ๭ࠎߢ޿
߹ߔ‫ޕ‬
-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-
10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-1
Chroma 0+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10
described by words such as vivid,
dull etc., describing the extent to
which a color differs from a gray
ࢢࡇ ⦡⋧߿᣿ᐲߣߪ߹ߚ೎ߦ‫ޔ‬㨬޽ߑ߿߆ߐ㨭
ߩᐲว޿ࠍ␜ߔᕈ⾰ࠍᓀᐲߣ๭ࠎߢ޿߹
ᵡᴾᵆᵡᶆᶐᶍᶋᵿᵇ ߔ‫ޕ‬
having the same value.
MODEL :
MACHINE S/N :
DATE : / / °C %RH
COUNTER :
COPY DENSITY :
4.0 2.5 2.2
1.0 COLOR BALANCE Y :
4.5
2.8 M:
2.0 C :
3.2
BK :
1.1
P2
D
Y M C 1.8 OTHERS :
3.6
1.25 1.4 1.6

C䋫M C䋫Y Y䋫M
CHART NO. : CTC-008-01
PART NO. : 4036-7940-01
P1 P1 Printed In Japan
-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-
10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-1
0+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10+%#/+01.6#-10
B
Original Reference
A0P0F3C506DA
Adjustment item Ref.

A: Image Position: Leading Edge P.471
B: Image Position: Side Edge P.472
C: Cross Direction Adjustment P.473
D: Feed Direction Adjustment P.474

12.4.11 Scan Area-Image Position: Leading Edge

A. Use
• To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor
and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start position in
the main scan direction.
• When the original width scale is replaced.
B. Procedure
A0P0F3C507DA
• B width on the color chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that
the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of
[Printer Area].
Specifications
A: ± 0.5 mm (10 ± 0.5 mm if a scale is used)
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Scan Area] o [Image Position: Leading
Edge].
scale.
5. Check point A on the test print.
6. If width A on the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the
[+] / [-] key.
If the test print is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the test print exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.

12.4.12 Scan Area-Image Position: Side Edge

A. Use
• To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accu-
racy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
• When the CCD unit is replaced.
• The scanner home sensor has been replaced.
B. Procedure
A0P0F3C508DA
• A width on the color chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that
the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Centering] of [Printer Area].
Specifications
B: ± 1.0 mm

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Scan Area] o [Image Position: Side
Edge].
scale.
5. Check point B on the image of the test print.
6. If the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]
key.
If the test print is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the test print exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
8. Check point B of the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.

12.4.13 Scan Area-Cross Direction Adjustment

A. Use
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section.
• The CCD unit has been replaced.
B. Procedure
A0P0F3C509DA
• Measure C width on the color chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj.” of
[Printer Area].
Specifications
C: ± 1.0 mm
* Standard size when using a scale: 200.0 mm

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Scan Area] o [Cross Direction Adjust-
ment].
scale.
5. Check the C width on the image of the copy.
key.
If the C width on the test print is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the C width on the test print exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.

12.4.14 Scan Area-Feed Direction Adjustment

A. Use
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section.
• The exposure has been replaced.
• The scanner motor has been replaced.
• The scanner drive cables have been replaced.
B. Procedure
A0P0F3C510DA
• Measure D width on the color chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj.” of
[Printer Area].
Specifications
D: ± 1.5 mm
* Standard size when using a scale: 200.0 mm

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Scan Area] o [Feed Direction Adjust-
ment].
scale.
5. Check the D width on the image of the test print.
key.
If the D width on the test print is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the D width on the test print exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.

12.4.15 Printer Resist Loop

A. Use
• To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of tray 1 to
tray 4, LCT, bypass, and duplex.
• To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the registration rollers.
• Use “Paper Passage” for paper passage check.
• When a paper skew occurs.
• When a paper misfeed occurs.
B. Procedure
• The adjustable range is different depending on paper source and processing speed.
<d-Color MF651>
Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 LCT Manual Duplex

310 mm/sec -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -5 to +5
240 mm/sec -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -5 to +5
155 mm/sec -9 to +9 -9 to +9 -9 to +9
120 mm/sec -10 to +10 -10 to +10 -10 to +10
420 mm/sec 0 to +3
216 mm/sec -5 to +5
<d-Color MF551>

264 mm/sec -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -5 to +5
216 mm/sec -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -5 to +5
132 mm/sec -9 to +9 -9 to +9 -9 to +9
108 mm/sec -10 to +10 -10 to +10 -10 to +10
350 mm/sec -3 to +3
<d-Color MF451>

216 mm/sec -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -5 to +5
132 mm/sec -9 to +9 -9 to +9 -9 to +9
108 mm/sec -10 to +10 -10 to +10 -10 to +10
350 mm/sec -3 to +3

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Printer Resist Loop].
3. Select a paper source and a processing speed where the settings are made by touch-
ing the corresponding keys.
To decrease the loop amount: Increase the setting value
To increase the loop amount: Decrease the setting value

12.4.16 Color Registration Adjustment-Cyan, Magenta, Yellow

A. Use
• To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or
thick paper.
• To correct any color shift.
• This setting can be made independently for plain paper, Thick 1/1+, Thick 2, Thick 3, and
Thick 4.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Color Registration Adjustment].
3. Load manual bypass tray with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/2 x 11 plain paper.
7. Using the [+] / [-] key, change the setting value as necessary. (At this time, only the line
of the selected color moves.)
Check Procedure
Check point X, Y
Adjustment for X direction: If the cross deviates in the direction of A,

Check point X increase the setting.
Adjustment for Y direction: If the cross deviates in the direction of A,

Check point Y increase the setting.
A0P0F3C511DA

12.4.17 Skew adjustment-Skew adjustment

A. Use
• This function allows you to set the default position of the skew correction motor.
• Adjusts and sets a value that is used as an individual skew correction motor's reference
position for skew correction control.
• This setting is made after the PH unit is replaced.
• Use this function when the information of the motor’s position setting is lost due to the
replacement of the service EEPROM board or other reasons.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order:
[Machine] o [Skew adjustment] o [Skew adjustment].
3. Select the color to be set.
4. Enter the skew value described on the new PH unit with the 10-key pad.
5. Touch [OK].
6. Proceed to [Skew adjustment reset].
12.4.18 Skew adjustment-Skew adjustment reset

A. Use
• Returns the skew correction motor to the default position and clear the backup copies of
the cumulative skew amount.
• After PH unit replacement, perform [Skew adjustment] and then execute this function.
• Use this feature when the information of the skew correction position that is backed up in
the machine is lost by replacing the service EEPROM board or other reasons.
• After addressing the alert code P-14 and completing an action to the problem, perform
this function.
• Use this function when the current skew correction motor’s position becomes unavailable
due to the skew adjustment interrupted by the door being opened or the main power
switch being turned OFF.
B. Procedure
[Machine] o [Skew adjustment] o [Skew adjustment reset].
3. Touch the start key and execute the skew adjustment reset.
NOTE
• After replacing the PH unit or service EEPROM board, set the initial position of the
skew correction as follows: [Machine] o [Skew adjustment] o [Skew adjustment].
After completing [Skew adjustment], perform [Skew adjustment reset].
• After the skew adjustment reset is complete, be sure to perform [Initialize + Image
Stabilization].

(1) Skew adjustment result on the panel

• Skew adjustment result is provided in [Skew Adjust Value], which is selected as follows:
[Service Mode] o [State Confirmation] o [Color Regist].
A0P0F3E546DA
Skew Adjust Value Description

Initial • Displays the initial position of the skew correction set in [Skew adjust-
ment] which is selected as follows: [Service Mode] o [Machine] o [Skew
adjustment] o [Skew adjustment]. The initial position is same as the one
set upon shipment.
End • Displays the final skew correction position that was obtained after finish-
ing the image stabilization control.
Move • Displays how much skew adjust value changed in the previous image
stabilization control.
12.4.19 LD adjustment-LD delay adjust.

A. Use
• LD delay adjust sets adjustment values by adjusting LD light emission delay amount.
(Values to be entered are described on the side of the PH unit.)
• This setting is made after the PH unit is replaced.
• This adjustment is made when the service EEPROM board is replaced or the backup of
information on position settings is lost.
B. Procedure
[Machine] o [LD adjustment] o [LD delay adjust.].
3. Select the color to be set.
4. Enter the values described on the side of the PH unit using 10-key pad.
5. Touch [OK].

12.4.20 LD adjustment-LD lightness balance adjust.

A. Use
• This function adjusts the LD lightness balance between the two LDs to correct the differ-
ence of LD lightness between the LDs.
• This setting is made after the PH unit or the service EEPROM board is replaced.
• This adjustment is made to prevent uneven density in highlighted halftone area pro-
cessed with error diffusion being caused by inappropriate laser intensity.
B. Procedure
[Machine] o [LD adjustment] o [LD lightness balance adjust.].
3. Select [For adjustment] and press Start key.
4. The test print includes seven rows of patterns produced with different levels of LD2 light
intensity towards LD1.
-9 % -6 % -3 % 0% +3 % +6 % +9 %
A0P0F3C512DA
5. Three squares each made up by four small squares are printed with the different four
colors. The two small squares diagonal to each other are printed using the same LD.
Depending on individual print timing, it is decided that which pair of small squares cor-
responds to which LD.
The pair of small squares where image density changes corresponds to LD2.
6. From the test pattern, select the pattern where the least density difference appears
between LD1 and LD2 for each color.
7. Enter the adjustment value corresponding to the pattern you selected (see the above
illustration) or a value close to the adjustment value using the ten key pads on the
panel.
8. Select [For effect confirmat.] and press Start key.
9. Check that LD2 small squares have no image noise of woodgrain.
10. Touch [OK].

12.4.21 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment

A. Use
• To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the bypass paper width detection
resistor of the manual bypass guide.
• Use when the bypass paper width detection resistor of the manual bypass guide has
been changed.
• Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual bypass is used.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment].
3. Touch [Max. Width].
4. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 297 mm.
5. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
6. Touch [Min. Width.].
7. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 100 mm.
8. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
✽ Make the adjustment again if the results are [NG].
12.4.22 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment

A. Use
• To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
• Upon user requests, it is possible to specify the void area where image is not printed
along the leading edge.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is 4 mm.
“4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm
NOTE
• When “4 mm” is selected, 4.2 mm is the actual amount to be erased in print based
on the control system of the machine.
12.4.23 Thick Paper Mode

A. Use
• For thick paper, the paper interval can be changed.
• To resolve image failure (black streaks) in the main scan direction due to the vibrations
created when the trailing edge of the preceding paper is passing by the timing roller.
• To reduce the effect of vibrations on image quality by widening paper interval.
Image Quality : Operates with the paper interval longer than normal.
Productivity : Operates with the paper interval closer to the normal
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Productivity.
Image Quality “Productivity”

12.4.24 Split Line Prior Detection

A. Use
• To check the stain on the ADF original glass and display the result.
• To manually perform the pre-detection of the stain which is normally conducted when the
main/sub power switch is turned ON, recovering from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
• [Split Line Prior Detection] will be conducted with the detection level set by the following
setting.
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Split Line Detect. Setting] o [Prior Detection]
When the above setting is set to “Not Set”, “NG” will be displayed even though the pre-
detection is conducted.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Split Line Prior Detection].
3. Press the start key to start the pre-detection.
4. Check to make sure that “OK” is displayed for the result.
✽ When the result says “NG”, clean the glass and check again.
12.4.25 Non-Image Area Erase Check

A. Use
• The non-image area erase function may not work properly under bright light source.
Incoming light quantity is checked to verify that the non-image area erase function can
work properly under the environment.
• Verification results are shown as follows:
OK : Works properly.
NG1 : Works properly. However, data that may interfere with the non-image area
erase function was found. This function may not work well with dark original.
NG2 : Data that may interfere with the non-image area erase function was found.
• Use this feature when installing a new machine or reinstalling a machine in a new place.
• Use this feature when the non-image area erase function fails to work properly due to the
changes of the surrounding environment at the installation site.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] o [Non-Image Area Erase Check].
3. Press the Start key to start a check.
NOTE
• Before the check, make sure that the ADF is completely opened. In addition, make
sure that no scratch or stain exists on the original glass.
4. Check the result is “OK.”

✽ If the check result is “NG1” or “NG2,” reinstall the machine in another place or adjust the
orientation of the machine to reduce light incidence on the machine. Then, perform the
check again.

12.5 Firmware Version

A. Use
• To check the firmware version.
• Use when the firmware is upgraded.
• When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Firmware Version].
3. Select the appropriate key from 1 to 3 to check the Firmware Version.
12.6 Imaging Process Adjustment

12.6.1 Gradation Adjust
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Service Mode] o [Image Process Adjustment] o [Development AC Voltage Choice]
A. Use
• To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and
the readings taken by the scanner.
• Color reproduction performance becomes poor.
• The imaging unit, drum unit or developing unit has been replaced.
• The image transfer belt unit has been replaced.
✽ The Adj. Values of “Dark” and “Highlight” shown on the gradation adjust screen represent
how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. Conv. Value shows
the difference from the ideal image density.
✽ The closer the Conv. Value to 0, the more ideal the image.
Stablizer : Before gradation adjust, perform image stabilization.

Print : Priority is image gradation reproducibility (priority on gradation) as well as
reproducibility of characters and lines (priority on resolution).
Copy : Priority is to increase the number of images that can be stored in the mem-
ory (priority on compression). The adjustment conforms to FEET (non-
screen).
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Image Process Adjustment] o [Gradation Adjust].
3. Touch [Stabilizer] and the Start key to perform image stabilization.
NOTE
• Before executing Gradation adjust, be sure to perform Stabilizer.
4. Select Print or Copy and select the paper size on which test pattern is printed.
NOTE
• When the image stabilization performed in step 3 is NG, the Start key stops func-
tioning.
• When one of the alert codes, P-5, P-6, P-7, P-8, P-9, and P-28 is on the screen and
[Printer] is selected, the Start key stops functioning.
6. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass.

NOTE
• Depending on the size of the test pattern, it is set in a different position. Set the
test pattern according to the instructions displayed on the control panel.
7. Place ten blank sheets of paper on the test pattern and lower the original cover.
8. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
9. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 4 through 8 twice (a total of three times).
10. Touch [Gradation Adjust] to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values of each color (C,
M, Y and K) for Dark and Highlight.
11. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value.
Dark: 0 ± 100 and Highlight: 0 ± 60: It completes the adjustment procedure.

If neither Dark nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps
from 4 to 8.
NOTE
• If the convergence falls within the specified range after the second Gradation
Adjustment, further adjustment may not be necessary.
• If a fault is detected, “0” is displayed for all values. In that case, after turning off the main
power switch, turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and then make the gradation
adjustment again.
• If either dark or highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max Den-
sity.
• If a total of four sequences of gradation adjust do not bring the values into the specified
range, check the image.
• If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.
12.6.2 Transfer Belt-Cleaning Bias
A. Use
• To set the level of transfer belt cleaning bias independently for each process speed.
• When the image pattern is not completely removed, it strengthen the transfer belt clean-
ing bias in order to make the cleaner more effective.
• For each processing speed, positive and negative output values can be set.
B. Procedure
• The each default setting is 0.
-5 to +5 (step:1 *)
*: One step corresponds to 5 PA.

12.6.3 Transfer Belt-Auto Cleaning

A. Use
• To set whether to perform the long regular transfer belt cleaning operation (approx. 30
sec).
• The long cleaning operation (approx. 30 seconds) can be used to take more effective
measures against toner filming on the surface of the transfer belt.
Enable : Performs the long cleaning operation (approx. 30 sec) after the normal regular
cleaning operations (approx. 10 sec.) which are performed nine times.
Disable : Performs only the normal regular operations (approx. 10 sec) but not the long
cleaning operation (approx. 30 sec.).
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Disable.
Enable “Disable”
12.6.4 D Max Density

A. Use
• To adjust gradation, color, and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the
maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of
gamma of each color after gradation adjust.
• An image quality problem is not corrected even after gradation adjust has been run.
B. Procedure
-10 to +10 (step: 1 *)
*: 1 step corresponds to 0.03 in density difference.

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [D Max Density].
3. Select [COPY] or [Printer].
5. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad or [+/-].
To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking, increase the setting value.
To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking, decrease the setting value.
6. Touch [END] to return to the [Process] menu screen.
7. Touch [Stabilizer].
8. Touch [Stabilizer Mode].
9. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.
NOTE
• If the setting value has been changed, be sure to run an image stabilization
sequence to make valid the new value.

12.6.5 TCR Level Setting

A. Use
• To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a
change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change.
• Use when T/C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site.
B. Procedure
-3 to +3
(1 step in positive (+) direction: 0.5 % increase, 1 step in negative (-) direction: 0.5 %
decrease, Center value 0 corresponds to 7 % T/C ratio.)

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Process] o [TCR Level Setting].
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key pad and [+/-] key.
To increase T/C, increase the setting value.
To decrease T/C, decrease the setting value.
12.6.6 Background Voltage Margin

A. Use
• To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an
auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of J of each color after gradation adjust.
• Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem.
B. Procedure
-5 to +5 (step: 1)

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Background Voltage
Margin].
To make the background level foggier, decrease the setting value.
To make the background level less foggy, increase the setting value.
5. Touch [END] to return to the [Image Adjust] menu screen.
6. Touch [Stabilizer].
7. Touch [Stabilization Only].
8. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.
NOTE
• If the setting value has been changed, be sure to run an image stabilization
sequence to make valid the new value.

12.6.7 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Primary transfer adj.

A. Use
• Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage.
• To use when white spots appeared.
B. Procedure
-8 to +7 (step: 1)
*1 step is equivalent to 2PA.

2. Select [Test Mode] o [Halftone Pattern] to output the red or green test pattern.
See P.580
3. When the test pattern image has white spots, adjust with the following procedure.
4. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Transfer Output Fine
Adjustment].
5. Select [Primary transfer adj.].
6. Select the color.
7. Change the setting value using the [+] / [-] keys.
Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by;
Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease)
Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value
8. Touch [OK] key to set the adjustment value.
Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while
checking the test pattern.
NOTE
• PC Drum memory may occur by taking measure to white spots occurred by

increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it.
Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting.

12.6.8 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Secondary transfer adj.

A. Use
• Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each
paper type.
• To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
• Pressing the [AUTO] key down activates the 2nd image transfer amperage upper and
lower limit control. In this case, the machine uses the voltage determined by the auto
transfer voltage control and the 2nd image transfer output fine adjustment value does not
take effect.
B. Procedure
-8 to +7 (step: 1)
* 1 step is equivalent to 100 V.

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Transfer Output Fine
Adjustment].
3. Select [Secondary transfer adj.].
4. Select the side of the image (1st side or 2nd side), on which the transfer failure occurs.
NOTE
• For envelopes, OHP film and banner thick, only 1st side can be selected.
5. Select the paper type with the transfer failure.

6. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys.
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image),
increase the setting value.
To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image),
decrease the setting value.
* Press [Auto] to automatically control the 2nd image transfer output without using the 2nd
image transfer output fine adjustment value.
12.6.9 Stabilizer-Stabilization Only

A. Use
• The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of
image stabilization control.
• Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been executed.
• When [D Max Density] and [Background Voltage Margin] of Service Mode are changed.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Stabilization Only].
The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the stabilizer sequence.

12.6.10 Stabilizer-Initialize+Image Stabilization

A. Use
• To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabiliza-
tion control has been initialized.
• Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been executed.
• Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after stabilizer mode has
been executed.
• When color shift correction is needed again after the machine maintenance.
• After executing the skew adjustment reset.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Stabilizer].
3. Touch [Initialize+Image Stabilization].
4. Press the Start key to start stabilizer.
The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the stabilizer sequence.
12.6.11 Thick Paper Density Adjustment

A. Use
• To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transpar-
encies. (Only black color adjustable for OHP transparencies)
• To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP
transparencies.
B. Procedure

-5 to +5 (step: 1)
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Thick Paper Density
Adjustment].
3. Select [Thick 1, 1+] or [Thick 2, 3, 4].
4. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density.
Light color: Touch the Darker key.
Dark color: Touch the Lighter key.

12.6.12 Paper separation adjustment

A. Use
• By changing the period between the activation of the timing roller and the 2nd image
transfer output, the paper separation position can be adjusted for the 1st and 2nd sides
of paper in duplex print that uses thin paper.
• To ensure proper balance between paper separating and image transferring perfor-
mances by varying the paper separation position applied for duplex printing of thin paper
(64 g/ m2) in hot and humid conditions.
B. Procedure
-2 mm to +2 mm (step: 0.1 mm)

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Paper separation
adjustment].
3. Select [First Side] or [Second Side].
4. Use the [+] or [-] key to change the setting value.
Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value.
Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value.
5. Touch [OK] and determine the adjustment value.
6. Make a print and check the produced image.
12.6.13 TCR Toner Supply

A. Use
• To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID
occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of prints have been made of originals
having a high image density.
• When there is a drop in T/C.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [TCR Toner Supply].
3. Select the color, for which supply of toner is to be replenished.
4. Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and; if the
density is lower than a reference value, a toner replenishing sequence and then a
developer agitation sequence are run.
5. These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density
reaches the reference value. If the toner density is found to be higher than the refer-
ence value, only a developer agitation sequence is carried out.

12.6.14 Monochrome Density Adjustment

A. Use
• To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black print.
• To vary the density of the printed image of a black print.
B. Procedure
-2 to +2 (step: 1)

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [Monochrome Density
Adjustment].
3. Touch [Lighter] or [Darker] as necessary to correct the image density.
If the black is light, touch the Darker key.
If the black is dark, touch the Lighter key.
12.6.15 Development AC Voltage Choice

A. Use
• To change the setting of the development AC voltage.
• When this function is turned ON, it decreases the development AC voltage, thereby pre-
venting voltage leak from occurring.
• Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pres-
sure, such as in high altitudes.
• If ON is set, the screen doesn't display [Service Mode] o [Imaging Process Adjustment]
o [Gradation Adjust] and the Gradation Adjust is not allowed.
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”

12.7 CS Remote Care

12.7.1 Outlines
• CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to
exchange data through telephone/fax line in order to control the machine.
• CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble
occurs. It also enables the computer at the center to contact the machine for the neces-
sary data.
• Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups.
a. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as total count, PM count.
b. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how
often errors occur.
c. Data on adjustment
d. Data on setting
NOTE
• It cannot be set when the following setting is set to “ON”.
12.7.2 Setting up the CS Remote Care

NOTE
• For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up,
clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting.
See P.509
• When using a telephone line modem for connection, use the data modem which is
based on the ITU-T recommendations V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 and AT command.
A. Using the tel/fax modem, E-mail
Procedure
Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line
Using E-mail
line modem modem *1
0 Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center.
The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
1 Connecting the Be sure to remove the Be sure to remove the telephone line modem
modem telephone line modem when e-mail is used.
Turn the power for the when the fax line is
modem OFF. Connect used.
the machine and the
modem with a modem
cable. Connect the
modem and the wall
jack with a modular
cable.
* For connecting the
modular cable, see the
manual for the modem.
2 Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care] o [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
See P.506

Procedure
Using E-mail
line modem modem *1
3 Clearing the RAM
3. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
4. Touch [RAM Clear].
5. Select Set, and touch [OK].
See P.509
4 Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Remote Care function Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care] o
Select [Service Mode] Select [Service Mode] [System Setting], and touch [E-Mail 1] or [E-
o [CS Remove Care] o [CS Remove Care] Mail 2].
o [System Selection], o [System Selection],
and touch [Modem]. and touch [Fax].
See P.506
6 Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
See P.507
7 Setting the Center ID
2. Touch [Machine Setting] o [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
See P.507
8 Confirm the Device ID

2. Touch [Machine Setting] o [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
• [Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode]o[System
1]o[Serial Number].
9 Proceed to step 10. Encryption setting
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care],
and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Basic Setting] and select either
Encryption or No Encryption.
Retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error

• When selecting [E-mail2], set the retransmis-
sion interval on e-mail delivery error in soft-
ware SW setting.
See P.496
10 Setting the telephone number of the Center Setting the Respond Timeout
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care], 1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care],
and touch [Detail Setting]. and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] o [Center Tele- 2. Touch [Respond Timeout] and enter the
phone Number]. response timeout using the 10-key pad.
3. Input the telephone number of the center NOTE
using the 10-keys pad and [P], [T], [W], [-]. • Under normal conditions, there is no
See P.507 need to change the default setting.
See P.507

Procedure
Using E-mail
line modem modem *1
11 Inputting the device telephone number Proceed to step 12.
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care],
and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] o [Device Tele-
phone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the
10-key pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
See P.507
12 Inputting the AT com- Proceed to step 13. Setting the E-mail address
mand for initializing the 1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care],
modem and touch [Server Set].
1. Select [Service 2. Touch [Server for RX], and set POP3 server
Mode] o [CS address, POP3 login name, POP3 password
Remote Care] o and POP3 port number.
and touch [Detail See P.511
Setting]. 3. Press [Receive], and set the E-Mail address,
2. Touch [AT Com- Mail Check, Connection Time Out and
mand]. APOP Authentication.
3. Input AT Command. See P.511
NOTE 4. Touch [Send], and set the SMTP server
• Change this com- address, SMTP port number, Connection
mand only when it Time Out, and APOP Authentication.
is necessary. See P.511
(They do not need 5. Touch [TX/RX Test], and press Start key to
to be changed in carry out a transmission/reception test. If it
normal condition.)
fails to exchange messages, see the error
• For details on AT
message to take necessary measure, and
command, see the
manual for the try again.
modem. See P.511
See P.510
13 Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care When selecting [E-Mail2]:
NOTE 1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care],
• This setting is not normally necessary. and touch [Detail Setting].
Take this step only when necessary in a 2. Touch [Schedule] and set the schedule of
specific connecting condition. periodic transmission.
See P.507
3. Touch [Center Notifi. Item] and set items that
will be reported to the Center.
See P.507

Procedure
Using E-mail
line modem modem *1
14 Executing the initial transmission Receiving the initial connection E-mail mes-
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care], sage
and touch [Detail Setting]. Sending the initial connection E-mail message
2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right from the center to the address of the copier.
bottom of the screen to start initial transmis- NOTE
sion. • When receiving the initial connection E-
3. When the machine is properly connected mail message from the center while CS
with the center, CS Remote Care setting Remote Care-related screen is being dis-
played, the current setting information
screen will be displayed.
will be deleted, and CS Remote Care set-
NOTE ting will be displayed.
• The initial transmission key at the right • For sending the initial connection E-mail,
bottom of the screen will be displayed see the manual for CS Remote Care cen-
only when the center ID, the device ID, ter.
Telephone number of the center and the • Messages can be exchanged only
device telephone number have been between the center with initial connection
input. and the copier.
See P.507 • The initial connection from the center will
be carried out, and the E-mail address of
the center will be stored in the copier.
• When the initial registration is complete,
the E-mail address of the center will be
displayed by selecting [Service Mode] o
[CS Remote Care] o [Detail Setting],
[Basic Setting] o [E-Mail address].
*1: Setting will be available only when the optional fax board is installed.
B. When using a WebDAV server in http communication

• When using http communication for CS Remote Care, the setup is as follows:
Procedure
Step http
http (bilateral communication)
(unilateral communication: Device to Center)
0 Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center.
The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
1 Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the http communication is used.
See P.506
3 Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [OK].
See P.509
4 Selecting the CS Remote Care function Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remove Care] o Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remove Care] o
[System Selection], and touch [http1]. [System Selection], and touch [http2].
See P.506

Procedure
Step http
6 Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
See P.507
7 Setting the Center ID
2. Touch [Machine Setting] o [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
See P.507
8 Confirm the Device ID
2. Touch [Machine Setting] o [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
• [Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] o[System 1] o
[Serial Number].
9 Encryption setting
2. Touch [Basic Setting] o [Client Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
10 Heart Beat *1
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care] o [Detail Setting], and touch [Heart Beat].
2. In [Communication], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat communication. (Default: Yes)
3. Touch [Comm. Interval] and enter a Heart Beat transmission interval (1 to 256 minutes,
Default: 30 minutes).
4. In [Specified Transmission], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat transmission at a speci-
fied interval. (Default: Yes)
5. Touch [Hour] and [Minute] and enter a time for specified transmission.
11 Proceed to step 12. Notification Setting
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care]
o [Detail Setting], and touch [Notification
Setting].
2. Touch [Schedule] and set the schedule of
periodic transmission.
See P.507
3. Touch [Center Notifi. Item] and set items that
will be reported to the Center.
See P.507
12 Setting the http server
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care], and touch [Server Set].
See P.514
2. Touch [HTTP Server Settings] and set a URL address, account, password, and port number.
3. Touch [Proxy/SSL] and make proxy server and SSL settings.
13 Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• This setting is not normally necessary. Take this step only when necessary in a specific
connecting condition.

Procedure
Step http
14 Executing the initial transmission
2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
NOTE
• The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only
when the center ID and the URL address have been input.
See P.507
3. When the machine is properly connected with the center, CS Remote Care setting screen will
be displayed.
• If communication error between the machine and Center occurs, check the error code that
appears.
*1 Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a
specified interval to report that the device is operating. Heart Beat files include total
counter and status information.
12.7.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care

NOTE
• SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you
changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state.
A. Input procedure
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care] o [Detail Setting], and touch [Software
Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Switch No.], and input the switch number (two digits) using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [Bit Assignment], and select switch bit number using the arrow keys, and input 0
or 1 using the 10-key pad.
(For setting by hexadecimal numbers, touch [HEX Assignment] key, and input using the
10-key pad or A to F keys.)
4. Touch [Fix].
NOTE
• About functions of each switch, see to “B. List of software SW for CS Remote
Care.”
B. List of software SW for CS Remote Care
SW No. Functions Ref. Page

01 • Dial Mode, Line for send only, Baud rate P.497
02 • Emergency transmission, Date specified transmission, Call parts replace P.498
date, Call drum replace date, Call regular service date(PM), Auto call on
the IC Life, Auto call of the IR shortage, Auto call on the zero reset of the
fixed parts replacement
03 • Trouble display setting, Auto call on the toner empty, Auto call on the waste P.498
toner bottle full
04 • CS Remote Care communication mode P.499
05 • Modem redial interval P.499
06 • Modem redial times P.500
07 • Redial for response time out P.500

SW No. Functions Ref. Page

08 • Retransmission interval on E-Mail/http delivery error P.500
09 • Retransmission times on E-Mail/http delivery error P.501
10 • Time zone settings P.501
11 • Timer 1 RING reception o CONNECT reception P.501
12 • Timer 2 Dial request completed o CONNECT reception P.502
13 • Reservation —
14 • Timer 4 Line connection o Start request telegram delivery P.502
15 • Timer 5 Wait time for other side's response P.502
18 • Attention display
To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem but the P.503
power for the modem is OFF.
19 • Email/http communication mode P.503
20 • http communication HeartBeat function, http communication HeartBeat
P.503
periodic transmission
21 • Automatic transmission of chronological misfeed data at the time of trans-
mission of misfeed frequent occurrence warning, transmission of paper-
P.504
based misfeed frequent occurrence warning, transmission of original-
based misfeed frequent occurrence warning
22 • Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value P.504
23 • Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value P.505
24 • Reservation
: —
40
C. Details of software SW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• Do not change any bit not described on this table.
• Shaded portions denote default values.
SW No. Default
7654 3210
01 Bit
1000 0001
HEX: 81
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7-4 Baud rate 0110 9600 bps
0111 19.2 Kbps
1000 38.4 Kbps
Other Not available
3-2 Reservation
1 Line for send only Disable Enable
0 Dial Mode Pulse Tone

SW No. Default
7654 3210
02 Bit
1111 1111
HEX: FF
Logic
0 1
Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts
7 Disable Enable
replacement
6 Auto call of the IR shortage Disable Enable
5 Auto call on the IC Life Disable Enable
4 Call regular service date(PM) Disable Enable
3 Call drum replace date Disable Enable
2 Call parts replace date Disable Enable
1 Date specified transmission Disable Enable
0 Emergency transmission Disable Enable
SW No. Default
7654 3210
03 Bit
0000 1010
HEX: 0A
Logic
0 1
7-4 Reservation
3 Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Disable Enable
2 Reservation
1 Auto call on the toner empty Disable Enable
0 Trouble Display setting When the When the Select the type of mes-
CSRC is CSRC is sage to be displayed at
not con- con- the time of automatic trou-
nected nected ble notification made
when the CSRC is con-
nected, either the mes-
sage when the CSRC is
connected or that when
the CSRC is not con-
nected.

SW No. Default
7654 3210
04 Bit
0000 0010
HEX: 02
Logic
0 1
7-2 Reservation
1-0 CS Remote Care communication mode 00 DATA
01 FAX
10 E-mail
11 Not available
SW No. Default
7654 3210
05 Bit
0000 0011
HEX: 03
Logic
0 1
7-5 Reservation
4-0 Modem redial interval 00001 1 minute
00010 2 minutes
00011 3 minutes
00100 4 minutes
00101 5 minutes
00110 6 minutes
00111 7 minutes
01000 8 minutes
01001 9 minutes
01010 10 minutes
Others Not available

SW No. Default
7654 3210
06 Bit
0000 1010
HEX: 0A
Logic
0 1
7-0 Modem redial times 0000 0000 0 time
0000 0001 1 time
: :
0000 1010 10 times
: :
0110 0010 98 times
0110 0011 99 times
SW No. Default
7654 3210
07 Bit
0000 0001
HEX: 01
Logic
0 1
7-0 Redial for response time out 0000 0000 0 time
0000 0001 1 time

SW No. Default
7654 3210
08 Bit
0000 0110
HEX: 06
Logic
0 1
7-0 Retransmission interval on E-mail/http 0000 0000 0 minute
delivery error 0000 0001 10 minutes
: :
0000 0110 60 minutes
: :
0000 1011 110 minutes
0000 1100 120 minutes

SW No. Default
7654 3210
09 Bit
0000 1010
HEX: 0A
Logic
0 1
7-0 Retransmission times on E-mail/http delivery 0000 0000 0 time
error 0000 0001 1 time
: :
0000 1010 10 times
: :
0110 0010 98 times
0110 0011 99 times
SW No. Default
7654 3210
10 Bit
0000 0000
HEX: 00
Logic
0 1
7-0 Time zone settings 0000 0000 -12 hours
0000 0001 -11 hours
: :
0110 0010 +12 hours
0001 1010 +13 hours
SW No. Default
7654 3210
11 Bit
0010 0000
HEX: 20
Logic
0 1
7-0 Timer 1 0000 0000 Not available
RING reception o CONNECT 0000 0001 1 sec
reception
: :
0010 0000 32 sec
: :
1111 1110 254 sec
1111 1111 255 sec

SW No. Default
7654 3210
12 Bit
0100 0000
HEX: 40
Logic
0 1
7-0 Timer 2 0000 0000 Not available
Dial request completed o CONNECT 0000 0001 1 sec
reception
: :
0100 0000 64 sec
: :
1111 1110 254 sec
1111 1111 255 sec
SW No. Default
7654 3210
14 Bit
0010 0000
HEX: 20
Logic
0 1
7-0 Timer 4 0000 0001 100 msec
Line connection o Start request telegram : :
delivery
0010 0000 3,200 msec

: :
1111 1110 25,400 msec
1111 1111 25,500 msec
SW No. Default
7654 3210
15 Bit
0001 1110
HEX: 1E
Logic
0 1
7-0 Timer 5 0000 0001 1 sec
Wait time for other side’s response : :
0001 1110 30 sec
: :
1111 1110 254 sec
1111 1111 255 sec

SW No. Default
7654 3210
18 Bit
0000 0001
HEX: 01
Logic
0 1
7-1 Reservation
0 Attention display
To set weather to give the alarm display when
OFF ON
using the modem but the power for the
modem is OFF.
SW No. Default
7654 3210
19 Bit
0000 0000
HEX: 00
Logic
0 1
7-1 Reservation
0 Bidirec- Unidirec-
Email/http communication mode
tional tional
SW No. Default
7654 3210
20 Bit
0000 0000
HEX: 00
Logic
0 1
7-2 Reservation
http communication HeartBeat periodic trans-
1 YES NO
mission
0 http communication HeartBeat function YES NO

SW No. Default
7654 3210
21 Bit
0000 0000
HEX: 00
Logic
0 1
7-3 Reservation
2 Automatic transmission of chronological mis- ON OFF
feed data at the time of transmission of mis-
feed frequent occurrence warning
Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence ON OFF If the number of jams
1
threshold value exceeds the threshold
0 Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence ON OFF specified per day (0:00 to
threshold value 23:59), Jam Frequent
Occurrence Warning is
sent. At 12 a.m. of the
next day, the counter is
reset.
SW No. Default
7654 3210
22 Bit
0000 0101
HEX: 05
Logic
0 1
7-0 Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence 0000 0001 1
threshold value 0000 0010 2
: :
0000 0101 5
: :
0000 1110 14
0000 1111 15

SW No. Default
7654 3210
23 Bit
0000 0101
HEX: 05
Logic
0 1
7-0 Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence 0000 0001 1
threshold value 0000 0010 2
: :
0000 0101 5
: :
0000 1110 14
0000 1111 15
12.7.4 Setup confirmation

• Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set
up.

2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed.
12.7.5 Calling the maintenance
• When CE starts maintenance, inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which
CE can identify. They are controlled by the distributor.) will transmit the information to the
Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. When the maintenance is fin-
ished, touching [Maintenance Complete] key will transmit the information to the center
and tells that it is finished.
A. When starting the maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [ID Code], and input ID Code.
3. Touch [ID Coke].
* The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.
B. When finishing the maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [Maintenance Complete].

12.7.6 Calling the center from the administrator

• When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote
Care center.
1. Select [Administrator Settings], and touch [System Connection].

2. Touch [Admin. transmission].
When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out, the
Admin. transmission key will not be displayed, and the transmission is not available.
NOTE
• For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date
and time, refer to the manual for CS Remote Care center.
12.7.7 Checking the transmission log

• The transmission log list will be output to be checked.
1. Select [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail setting].
2. Touch [Communication Log Print].
3. Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S paper.
4. Press the Start key to output transmission log.
12.7.8 Detail on settings

A. System Selection
(1) Use
• To select the system type for remote diagnosis.
• Use to newly build or change the system.
(2) Procedure
• Select E-Mail, Modem, or Fax.
• Fax is available only when the optional fax kit is being installed.
E-Mail1 E-Mail2 Modem Fax http1 http2
B. ID Code
(1) Use
• To register the service ID.
• Use when registering and changing service ID.
(2) Procedure
• Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-key pad. (0000001 to 9999999)
<Registration>
• Touch ID code and enter the service ID.
• Touch [ID code] to register the ID.
• The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered.

C. Detail Setting
(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
<Use>
• Execute the primary setting.
• Use to change the set contents.
• Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center.
<Procedure>
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
<Center Setting>
• Set the center ID, Device ID, and the phone No.
• When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed, e-mail
address of the center is displayed.
* When entering the phone number, 10-keys and keys on the screen have following mean-
ings.
[-] Pose : Waits to start transmitting after dialing
[W] Wait : Detects the dial tone of the other end
[T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing
[*], [#] : To be used as necessary
<Schedule (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>

• Set the schedule of notification to the center.
• Up to three different notification schedules can be registered.
• Select the notification cycle from [Day], [Week], or [Month].
When selecting [Day] for the notification cycle, set the Day Frequency.
When selecting [Week] for the notification cycle, set the Week Frequency and day of the
week.
When selecting [Month], set the Month Frequency and the date of the month.
<Center Notification (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>

• Select the items of data that will be sent to the center in one-way transmission through E-
Mail2.
• The following table shows each of the notification item keys and corresponding data.
[1] Sales count data [7] EKC data

[2] Error count data [8] Adjustment data
[3] Service count data [9] Coverage data
Life count data
[4] [10] Not used
Life cycle data
CSRC-System data
[5] [11] Not used
Device config data
[6] History data [12] Not used
NOTE
• Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure that
only EKC data cannot be sent together with other items of data.

<Initial Transmission>
• Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care
center to register the machine.
(Only when the modem or fax is selected on the system Input.)
(2) Basic Setting (http1 or http2)

<Use>
• Execute the primary setting.
• Use to change the set contents.
• Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center.
<Procedure>
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
<Center Setting>
• Set the center ID.
• Display the device ID.
<Client Setting>
• To set whether or not to encrypt communication.
<Heart Beat>
• To make Heart Beat related settings.
• Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a
specified interval to report that the device is operating. Heart Beat files include total
counter and status information.
<Initial Transmission>
• Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care
center to register the machine.
(3) Date & Time Setting

<Use>
• To set the data and time-of-day.
• Use to set or change the date and time-of-day.
<Procedure>
3. Touch [Detail Setting] to access Date & Time Setting.
4. Enter the date (month, day and year), time-of-day, and the time zone from the 10-key
pad.
5. Touch [SET] to start the clock.

(4) RAM Clear

<Use>
• To clear the following data at the center
ID Code, Primary Setting, Date/Time Input (Time Zone), Software SW Setting and AT
Command.
• To be used for setting CS Remote Care.
• To be used for reset the every data of the center to default.
NOTE
• If RAM clear is selected during transmission, RAM clear processing will be imple-
mented at the time the transmission is completed regardless of whether it is done
properly or not.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is “Unset.”
Set “Unset”
(5) Communication Log Print

<Use>
• To print out the communication log.
• Use to output and use the communication log.
<Procedure>
1. Call the Service Mode on the screen.
3. Touch [Detail Setting] to access communication log print.
4. Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S or 81/2 x 11 paper.
5. Press Start key to print out the communication log.
(6) Software Switch Setting

<Use>
• To change the CS Remote Care settings.
<Procedure>
• Refer to “Software SW setting for CS Remote Care” for the setting.
See P.496
(7) Response Time Out

<Use>
• It sets the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error occurred.
• It can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting.
• To use when changing the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error
occurred.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is 60 minute.
“60 minute” (10 to 1440)

(8) AT Command
<Use>
• To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization.
• This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting.
<Procedure>
• Enter the command and touch [SET] to register.
(9) Notification Setting

<Use>
• To make the settings of notification to the Center that is performed under unilateral com-
munication via http.
• This setting is available only when [http2] is selected in System Setting.
<Procedure>
<Schedule>
• Set the schedule of notification to the center.
• Up to three different notification schedules can be registered.
• Select the notification cycle from [Day], [Week], or [Month].
When selecting [Day] for the notification cycle, set the Day Frequency.
When selecting [Week] for the notification cycle, set the Week Frequency and day of the
week.
When selecting [Month], set the Month Frequency and the date of the month.
<Center Notifi. Item>

• The following table shows each of the notification item keys and corresponding data.
[1] Sales count data [7] EKC data

[2] Error count data [8] Adjustment data

[3] Service count data [9] Coverage data
[4] Life count data [10] Not used
Life cycle data
[5] CSRC-System data [11] Not used
Device config data
[6] History data [12] Not used
NOTE
• Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure that
only EKC data cannot be sent together with other items of data.

D. Server Setting (E-Mail1 or E-mail2 is selected.)

(1) Server for RX-POP3 server
<Use>
• To set the POP3 server address used for the CS Remote Care.
• To set the address of the POP3 Server.
• POP3 server address can be set with IP address or the domain name.
<Procedure>
<Input IP Address>
• IP address version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
(2) Server for RX-POP3 login name

<Use>
• To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.
<Procedure>
• Up to 64 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
(3) Server for RX-POP3 password

<Use>
• To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.
<Procedure>
(4) Server for RX-POP3 port number

<Use>
• To set the POP3 port number used for the CS Remote Care.
<Procedure>
“110” (1 to 65535)
(5) Receive-E-mail Address

<Use>
• To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care.
<Procedure>

(6) Receive-Mail Check

<Use>
• To set whether or not to use mail check and the time interval for the POP server used for
the CS Remote Care.
• To change the time interval for mail check.
<Procedure>
“No” (1 to120 min., No)
(7) Receive-Connection timeout

<Use>
• To set the timeout period for connection during reception.
<Procedure>
• The default setting is 60 Sec.
“60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec)
(8) Receive-APOP Authentication

<Use>
• To set whether or not to authenticate the APOP during reception.
<Procedure>
Yes “No”
(9) Send-SMTP server

<Use>
• To set the SMTP sever address for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
• SMTP server address can be set by the IP address or the domain name.
<Procedure>
<Input IP Address>
• IP address version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
(10) Send-SMTP port number

<Use>
• To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
<Procedure>
“25” (1 to 65535)

(11) Send-SMTP Connection Time-out

<Use>
• To set the timeout period for transmission.
<Procedure>
“60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec)
(12) Send-Authentication Setting

<Use>
• To set whether or not to authenticate during transmission via SMTP server.
• To use when authenticating during transmission.
Available authentication mode: POP Before SMTP, SMTP authentication
<Procedure>
“OFF” POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication
* Setting to “POP Before SMTP” will set the time for POP Before SMTP.

“60 Sec” (0 to 60 Sec)
* When setting to SMTP authentication, touch the “Setting Check” key for authentication.
User ID : Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication.
Password : Enter the password for SMTP authentication.
Domain name : Enter the domain name for SMTP authentication.
(13) TX/RX Test
<Use>
• To determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care.
<Procedure>
• Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test.
• The test procedure and result will be displayed on the screen.
(14) Data Initialization

<Use>
• To initialize the contents for the sever setting.
<Procedure>
Yes “No”

E. Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected)

(1) HTTP Server Settings
<Use>
• To set a http server at the other end that is used in CS Remote Care.
<Procedure>
<URL>
• To set the address of the http server.
<Account>
• To set an account that is used to access the http server.
<Password>
• To set a password that is used to access the http server.
<Port Number>
• To set a port number that is used to access the http server.
(2) Proxy/SSL
<Use>
• To make proxy/SSL settings of the http server at the other end that is used in CS Remote
Care.
<Procedure>
<Proxy Server>
• To set whether or not to use a proxy server.
<SSL Settings>
• To set whether or not to use SSL communication.
(3) Data Initialization

<Use>
• To initialize values in the server settings.

12.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code

A. When connecting by modem
Error code Error Solution

0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) • Transmit again manually.
0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmit- • Check if the power of the
ting (When the transmission completes with modem is ON.
modem initial setting failed) • Check the connecting condition
between the modem and the
main body.
0003 Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting • Transmit again manually
(No response to ATD) • Check if the power of the
modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition
main body.
0005 Timeout of CONNECT at receiving • Check if the power of the
(No response to ATA) modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition
main body.
0006 Shut down of the data modem line (Host) • No solution, because the line is
(Carrier OFF is detected) shut down at the host side.
0008 Timeout of start request telegram delivery • Transmit again manually.
(Start request telegram is not delivered after line
connection)
0009 Timeout of finish request telegram delivery • Transmit again manually.
(Finish request telegram is not delivered (Start of
shut down).)
000A Receiving rejection • Check the setting condition of
(Receiving is made when the main body is set to the host side.
reject receiving.) • Check the setting condition of
the main body side.
000B RS232C driver over run • If the same error is detected
(When the modem detects over run.) several times, turn the modem
power OFF and ON.
000C If the same error is detected several times, turn • If the same error is detected
the modem power OFF and ON. several times, turn the modem
power OFF and ON.
000D Break Interrupt (BI) indicator • If the same error is detected
(When the modem detects Break Interrupt (BI) several times, turn the modem
indicator.) power OFF and ON.
0011 Baud rate ERROR • Check the baud rate of the
(When selected baud rate is out of the specifica- software DipSW.
tion (9600 bps to 38400 bps).)
0018 Machine ID has already been registered • Set the initial registrations
(Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the again for all including the host
main body that has already registered machine side.
ID.)
0019 Center ID error • Check center ID setting of the
(Center ID of the host is not identical with the one main body side.
of start request telegram.) • Check center ID setting of the
main body side.


001A Device ID inconsistency • Check device ID setting of the
(Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main body side.
of start request telegram.) • Check the setting of the host
side.
001B Device ID unregistered • Check device ID setting of the
(Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmitting, main body side.
emergency call) comes from the main body that • Check the setting of the host
has not registered machine ID yet.) side.
001E Impossible to change (during printing) • Try again when the machine is
(Setting cannot be changed because the setting not printing.
change is made during the machine is printing or
starts printing.)
0020 Timeout of telegram delivery • Try communication again.
(At waiting mode of telegram delivery the
machine fails to receive the telegram in a given
time.)
0027 Transmission / receiving collision • Try communication again.
(Receiving is detecting during transmitting pro-
cessing)
NOTE
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, contact KMBT and
inform the error code.

B. When connecting by e-mails

0001 Connection timeout during transmission • Check the SMTP server on
User side.
0### Transmission error • Check the SMTP server on
###: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal) User side.
0003 Connection timeout when receiving • Check the POP3 server on
User side.
0005 Receiving error • Check the POP3 server on
User side.
1030 Machine ID mismatching • Check the machine ID setting.
• Received an e-mail which tells that machine ID • Check the machine ID setting
mismatches. on host side.
1050 Grammar error • Check mail content.
• Received mail did not define the CS Remote
Care command (2 digits).
• The Type of Subject and the command of
attached file are not consistent.
1061 Modifying not allowed • Ask the host to send another
• The host sent a command mail that asked instruction mail for modifying.
modifying data of item where setting change is
not allowed.
1062 Modifying not available due to the copy job cur- • Ask the host to send another
rently performing instruction mail for modifying.
• When informing the host that it cannot be mod-
ified due to the copy job currently performing.
1080 Data length problem • Ask the host to send another
• LEN value of TEXT data and actual data length instruction mail for modifying.
are not consistent.
1081 Frame No. error • Check the status of the
• The last frame has not been received. machine registration on host
• There are missing frame No. side.
1082 Subject Type problem • Ask the host to send another
• Received code did not define the Type of Sub- instruction mail for modifying.
ject.
1084 Date expired • Ask the host to send another
• Expiration date for data modification command instruction mail for modifying.
has passed.
1091 Oversized command • Ask the host to send another
• Received attached file exceeds the machine’s instruction mail for modifying.
receive buffer size.
1092 Received an error mail when center setup is not • Check the status of the
complete machine registration on host
side.
2039 Socket is not connected. • Check the SMTP server and
• LAN cable on the copier side is detached. POP3 server on user side.
203E Network is down. • Check the connection between
• LAN cable on the copier side is detached. the copier on the user’s side
and the network connector.
• Check the network
environment on the user’s side.


3000 POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR • Check the POP3 server
environment on user’s side.
3001 POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3002 POP3_CONNECT_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3003 POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3004 POP3_FORMAT_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3005 POP3_MEMORY_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3006 POP3_JOBID_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3007 POP3_NO_DATA_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3008 POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR • Check the POP3 server
3009 POP3_MAILBOX_FULL • Check the POP3 server
4103 Not ready • Wait for a while and try
• Tried to transmit or receive an e-mail when the transmitting again.
machine was not yet in the e-mail receiving
status after power was turned ON.
4104 SMTP channel not ready • Wait for a while and try
transmitting again.
4105 POP3 channel not ready • Wait for a while and try
transmitting again.
4106 Not Ready other than the ones listed above. • Wait for a while and try
transmitting again.
NOTE

C. When connecting by http

0001 Connection timeout during transmission • Check the http server on User
side.
0*** Transmission error • Check the http server on User
###: http responding code (hexadecimal) side.
0003 Connection timeout when receiving • Check the POP3 server on User
side.
0005 Receiving error • Check the POP3 server on User
side.
1030 Machine ID mismatching • Check the machine ID setting.
• Received an e-mail which tells that machine • Check the machine ID setting on
ID mismatches. host side.
1050 Grammar error • Check mail content.
• Received mail did not define the CS Remote
Care command (2 digits).
• The Type of Subject and the command of
attached file are not consistent.
1061 Modifying not allowed • Ask the host to send another
• The host sent a command mail that asked instruction mail for modifying.
modifying data of item where setting change
is not allowed.
1062 Modifying not available due to the copy job • Ask the host to send another
currently performing instruction mail for modifying.
• When informing the host that it cannot be
modified due to the copy job currently per-
forming.
1080 Data length problem • Ask the host to send another
• LEN value of TEXT data and actual data instruction mail for modifying.
length are not consistent.
1081 Frame No. error • Check the status of the machine
• The last frame has not been received. registration on host side.
• There are missing frame No.
1082 Subject Type problem • Ask the host to send another
• Received code did not define the Type of instruction mail for modifying.
Subject.
1084 Date expired • Ask the host to send another
• Expiration date for data modification com- instruction mail for modifying.
mand has passed.
1091 Oversized command • Ask the host to send another
• Received attached file exceeds the instruction mail for modifying.
machine’s receive buffer size.
2001 http request result problem • Check user network environment.
• Internal status error • Check http server environment.
2002 http request result problem
• File list acquisition result problem
• Request header transmission failure
• Request body transmission failure


• Response header receive response failure • Check http server environment.
• Response body receive response failure
• Session ID inconsistent
• Unopened client ID was specified
• Receive time out occurred
• Receive error occurred. Or wrong request
URL was specified.
• Content-Length or receive size exceeded
the specified max. transfer size. Message
body size was too large.
• Due to reset, process was stopped. Or mes-
sage body size exceeded the specified max.
transfer size.
• Internal error occurred. Or due to internal
reset, process was stopped.
• Connection to WebDAV server failed.

• Error occurred during transmission to the
WebDAV server.
• Time out occurred during transmission to
the WebDav server.
• Connection to the proxy server failed.
• The proxy server refused CONNECT
request.
• The proxy server was set to enabled, but the
proxy server host was not set.
• Proxy server authentication failed.
• Other errors were sent from the proxy
server.
• Internal error occurred.


• As the device application specified • Check http server environment.
MIO_REQBODY_ERROR, process was
stopped.
4103 Not Ready • Wait for a while and try
• After turning the main power switch ON, the transmitting again.
machine tried to start http communication
though http communication was not ready to
work.
4106 Not Ready other than the ones listed above. • Wait for a while and try
transmitting again.
NOTE
D. When connecting by Fax modem

T50 Host terminal ID not correct • Check the telephone number
set for host.
R80 Serial number received from the host not correct. • Check the status of the
Machine registration on host
side.
R81 Disconnection of writing instruction from host • Wait for a while and try
during machine is running. transmitting again.
R82 Disconnection of FAX-CSRC instruction when • Check the status of the
FAX-CSRC is not allowed. Machine registration on host
side.
R83 Host command error. • Contact KMBT and inform the
error code.
R84 NVRAM writing error. • Contact KMBT and inform the
error code.
NOTE
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, see the FK-502 Service
Manual.

12.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care

If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures
shown below.
1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] o [CS Remote Care] o [Detail Setting].
At this time, in the cases of initial transmitting / administrator transmitting / maintenance
start transmitting / maintenance finish transmitting, the communication result will be
displayed at the top of the screen.
* For the communication result, the following message will be displayed based on its suc-
cess or failure.
Display of
Cause Solution
communication result
Communicating
Communication trouble Although the machine tries to communi- • See the list of error message
with the center cate with the center, there is any trouble and confirm the corresponding
and the communication completes point.
unsuccessfully. See P.515
Complete successfully
Modem trouble Although the machine tries to communi- • Check if the power of modem
cate with the center, there is any trouble in ON.
in the modem. • Check if there is any problem in
connection between the
modem and the main body.
Busy line Although the machine tries to communi- • Communicate with the center
cate with the center, the line to the cen- again.
ter is busy.
No response Although the machine tries to communi- • Communicate with the center
cate with the center, there is no again.
response from the center. • Check the communication
environment of the center side.
12.7.11 CS Remote Care Operation under Enhanced Security Mode

CS Remote Care can be used even when “ON” is selected in [Administrator Settings] o
[Security Settings] o [Enhanced Security Mode].
However, to keep the enhanced security level, the following restrictions are accompanied.
• Only SSL communication is available.
• Error occurs if the Center tries to send the following commands.
- Firmware update command
- Command of reading and updating account track information
- Machine settings update command
- Command of reading and updating Internet ISW setting information

12.8 System 1
12.8.1 Marketing Area
A. Use
• To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to
the applicable marketing area.
• Upon setup.
B. Procedure
<Marketing Area>
• Select the applicable marketing area and touch [END] to set the marketing area.
JAPAN US Europe Others1

Others2 Others3 Others4 Others5
<Fax Target>
1. Touch the [Fax Target].
2. Select the applicable marketing area using [+] and [-] keys, and touch [END].
(1) List of functions affected by marketing area setting

• The listed are the functions of which setting is automatically changed depending on the
selected marketing area.
Marketing area
JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 Others5
Setting item
Language Japanese English English English English Simplified Tradi- English
(Default value) Chinese tional
Chinese
Language Japanese English English English English Simplified Tradi- English
Selection English French French French French Chinese tional French
French Italian Italian Spanish Spanish English Chinese Spanish
(Selectable
Italian German German Japanese Traditional English Hangul
language) German Spanish Spanish Chinese
Spanish Japanese Japanese
Additional select- Simplified Simplified Simplified Italian Italian French French Italian
able language Chinese Chinese Chinese German German Italian Italian German
Traditional Traditional Traditional
when the UK-203 Simplified Japanese German German Japanese
Chinese Chinese Chinese
is installed. Chinese Simplified Spanish Spanish Simplified
Hangul Hangul Hangul Traditional Chinese Chinese
Chinese Japanese Japanese Traditional
Hangul Traditional Simplified
Hangul Chinese
Chinese Chinese
Hangul Hangul
Foolscap size 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13
LCT size A4 LEF Letter A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF
LEF
LCC size A4 LEF Letter A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF
LEF
Unit Metric Inch Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric
Total counter Mode1 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2
mode
Size counter No count A3, A3,B4, A3,B4, A3,B4, A3,B4, A3,B4, A3,B4,
11x17 11x17, 11x17, 11x17, 11x17, 11x17, 11x17,
81/2x14 81/2x14 81/2x14 81/2x14 81/2x14 81/2x14
Unit Change Japan US Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe

NOTE
• The language used in the service mode depends on the Language Selection set-
ting, and changes to the language as following table.
Language Selection Service Mode

Japanese Japanese
Simplified Chinese Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese Traditional Chinese
Hangul Hangul
Language other than
English
listed above
12.8.2 Tel/Fax Number

A. Use
• To enter the tel/fax number of the service contact that will appear on the control panel
when a malfunction occurs in the machine.
• Upon setup.
B. Procedure
• Enter the tel/fax number (19 digits) from the 10-key pad.
• Use Interrupt key to enter “-.”
12.8.3 Serial Number

A. Use
• To register the serial numbers of the machine and options.
• The numbers will be printed on the list output.

• To use the serial number as machine ID during CS Remote Care communication.
• Upon setup.
NOTE
• When main power switch was turned ON while the serial No. was not entered, the
message to require entering the serial No. will be displayed.
• Do not change the serial number registered in the machine. If memory data is lost
and entering the serial number is required, enter the original correct serial num-
ber. Be careful to enter the correct serial number since characters other than
alphanumeric can be also entered. CSRC communication is not available if a
wrong serial number is entered.
• The serial number of “Printer” can be checked through the following:
[Utility] o [Meter Count] o [Check Details].
B. Procedure
• Type the serial numbers.
Printer, Scanner, ADF, LCT, Sorter/FN, Duplex, Vendor, Fax1, Fax2, RU, ZU (Not used)

12.8.4 No Sleep
A. Use
• To display the option of “OFF” for the sleep mode setting screen available from adminis-
trator settings.
NOTE
• The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to “OFF.”
B. Procedure
• The default setting is “Prohibit.”
Permit “Prohibit”
12.8.5 Foolscap Size Setting

A. Use
• To set the size for foolscap paper.
• Upon setup.
B. Procedure
• Select the size from among the following five.
81/2 x 131/2 220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 8 x 13
12.8.6 Original Size Detection

A. Use
• To change the document size detection table.
• Use to change the setting for the document size detection table.
Copy Glass : To change the size detection table for the document glass.
81/2 x 14/Foolscap Size Detection
: To set whether paper of 81/2 x 131/2 size is detected as 81/2 x 14 or foolscap
in original glass or ADF size detection.
When Table 1 is selected in Copy Glass, paper of 81/2 x 131/2 size is
detected as foolscap despite of the setting of 81/2 x 14/Foolscap Size
Detection.
B. Procedure
<Copy Glass>
• The default setting is “Table1.”
“Table1” Table2
NOTE
• Table 2 can be set only when original size detection 2 sensor is being mounted.
<81/2 x 14/Foolscap Size Detection>

• The default setting is “81/2 x 14.”
“81/2 x 14” Foolscap

12.8.7 Install Date

A. Use
• To register the date the main body was installed.
• Upon setup.
B. Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode on the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] o [Install Date].
3. Enter the date (Year 4 digit o Month 2 digit o date 2 digit) from the 10-key pad.
4. Touch [Entry] to set the date of installation.
12.8.8 Initialization-Clear All Data

A. Use
• To initialize the setting data.
• For details on items to be cleared, see “CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET
FUNCTION.”
See P.640
NOTE
• When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below, be sure
to clear the data.
Referring data: One-touch registration, user authentication/account track.
B. Procedure
[System 1] o [Initialization] o [Clear All Data].

4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than
10 seconds after.
12.8.9 Initialization-Clear Individual Data

• Clear Individual Data enables you to select and clear multiple items at a time.
A. Copy Program Data

(1) Use
• To clear data registered as copy program.
• Use this feature to clear all copy program data at a time.
(2) Procedure
[System 1] o [Initialization] o [Copy Program Data].
10 seconds after.

B. Address Registration Data

(1) Use
• To clear address registration data.
• Use this feature to initialize address registration data.
• The following are address registration data:
Group address data, Program key data, One-touch destination data, Mail body data,
Subject data, Prefix/suffix data
(2) Procedure
[System 1] o [Initialization] o [Address Registration Data].
10 seconds after.
C. Fax Setting Data

(1) Use
• To clear fax-related settings and parameters. However, address-related data is not
cleared.
• Use this feature to clear fax-related settings and parameters at a time.
(2) Procedure
[System 1] o [Initialization] o [Fax Setting Data].
10 seconds after.
D. All History Data
(1) Use
• To clear history data.
• The following are history data:
Job history, Journal history, Receive reject history, Destination history,
Job secure counter (Internal data for history management)
(2) Procedure
[System 1] o [Initialization] o [All History Data].
10 seconds after.
E. Network Setting Data

(1) Use
• To clear network-related settings.
• Use this feature to initialize and set network-related settings again when the machine
does not work properly upon change of network-related settings.
(2) Procedure
[System 1] o [Initialization] o [Network Setting Data].
10 seconds after.

12.8.10 Initialization-System Error Clear

A. Use
• To reset the trouble data.
• Use to clear the [Jam], [Trouble], [Error] displays, and other improper displays.
• For details on items to be cleared, see “CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET
FUNCTION.”
See P.640
B. Procedure
[System 1] o [Initialization] o [System Error Clear].
10 seconds after.
12.8.11 Charging CH cleaning-Cleaning

A. Use
• Cleaning operation can be executed to the comb electrode of the imaging unit /K.
• When image problems occur, you can execute the cleaning operation manually.
B. Procedure
[System 1] o [Charging CH cleaning] o [Cleaning].
4. When the Start key changes its lighting from red to blue, you can confirm that the
cleaning operation has been completed.
12.8.12 Charging CH cleaning-Self-Cleaning

A. Use
• This setting allows you to select the self cleaning of the comb electrode section in the
imaging unit /K.
• This setting can be used to temporarily stop the self cleaning operation in order to
address problems.
ON : The self cleaning operation occurs every 2,700 sheets of print, synchronizing
the transfer belt cleaning operation.
OFF : The machine does not perform the self cleaning operation.
NOTE
• For color imaging units, the comb electrode section needs to be cleaned by hand
every time when a toner cartridge of the corresponding color is replaced.
B. Procedure
“ON” OFF

12.8.13 Trouble Isolation

A. Use
• Individual units and options have a set or unset setting for the trouble isolation function.
• When a problem occurs, this function enables the continuous use of the units that are not
affected by separately controlling them and isolating other units that have a problem.
• The machine isolates only units that have a “set” setting.
NOTE
• The malfunction detection mechanism is not applied to units and options that are
being isolated.
• This function can be selected for the following units and options.
Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, LCT, manual, Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling, Punch,
Staple, Scanner, ADF
• Though trouble isolation is not selected, if the specified malfunctions occur on the above
listed units or options, an alert screen appears and asks users whether to isolate the
units or options where malfunction occurs.
See the “Trouble shooting” section for the corresponding trouble codes.
See P.715
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Unset for individual units and options.
Set “Unset”
• After changing the setting, touch [Decision] and turn the main power switch OFF and ON
to make the new setting effective.
12.8.14 Post card transfer table
A. Use
• This setting allows you to select the transfer table to be used for thick3 postcards.
• For the use of thick 3 postcards, you can select the transfer table suitable for postcards.
• This setting is used to improve transfer performance to postcards.
Post. : The postcard 2nd image transfer table is used when printing on thick3 post-
cards.
Thick 3 : The normal thick3 2nd image transfer table is used when printing on thick 3
postcards.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Thick 3.
Post. “Thick 3”
12.8.15 Change Warm Up Time

• Not used.

12.8.16 Machine State LED Setting

A. Use
• To set how to display main body statuses on the machine state LED (state display lamp,
paper empty lamp).
• Each of Type1 and Type2 has the following LED display forms.
Machine State LED Setting Type1 Type2

Warning statuses Attention Blinking Blinking
• Toner supply door open
• Improper toner cartridge placement
Near life Blinking Unlit
Alert code Unlit Unlit
Trouble isolation Blinking Blinking
Fatal error Lit Lit
• Trouble code
• Jam
• Door opened
• Life stop
Amount of paper 100 % to near empty Unlit Unlit
remaining (Tray 1 and 2) Near empty Blinking Unlit
Empty Lit Lit
Being lifted up Unlit Unlit
Door opened or closed
Amount of paper 100 % to near empty Unlit Unlit
remaining (Tray 3 and 4, Near empty Blinking Unlit
LCT)
Empty Lit Lit
Being lifted up Unlit Unlit
Door opened or closed
B. Procedure
• Each default setting is Type2.
Type 1 “Type 2”

12.9 System 2
12.9.1 HDD
• Not used.
12.9.2 Image Controller Setting

A. Use
• To set the type of the controller.
• [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected.
• When setting up the controller.
B. Procedure
Image Controller Setting
• Select the controller to be used.
“Controller 0” : The standard controller is used.
Controller 1 : The optional image controller IC-412 is used.
Controller 2 : undefined.
Controller 3 : undefined.
Others : undefined.
Peripheral Mode
• Select the operating mode of the Scanner.
Mode 1: undefined.
Mode 2: undefined.
Mode 3: undefined.
NOTE
• When the following setting is “ON”, this setting should be set to “Controller 0”.
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings] o [Enhanced Security Mode] When
[Enhanced Security Mode] is set to “ON”, this setting cannot be changed.
• After changing setting, make sure to turn off the main power switch and turn it on
again more than 10 seconds after.
Note on returning the setting from “Controller 1” to “Controller 0”.
• Selecting “Controller 0” will initialize the following settings made while “Controller 1” was
selected. Reset the following items as necessary when using the internal standard con-
troller.
<Control panel on the machine>

• Setting items included in [Network Setting] available from [Administrator Setting].
(Except [Status Notification Setting] and [Prefix/Suffix Setting] available from the follow-
ing setting. [Administrator Settings] o [Network Settings] o [Detail Settings].)
• The following setting
[Administrator Settings] o [User Authentication /Account Track] o[General Settings] o
[External Server]
• The following setting
[Administrator Settings] o [System Connection] o [OpenAPI Setting]
• Mailbox Destination (scan)
• Information on the original specified by the program destination
<Page Scope Web Connection>

• SSL/TLS

12.9.3 Option Board Status

A. Use
• To set when the optional fax board (FK-502) or DSC board (SC-507) is mounted.
• Use when setting up the optional fax kit (FK-502) or security kit (SC-507) is mounted.
• [DSC1], [DSC2] will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function
version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines.
B. Procedure
• The default settings are “Unset.”
Fax (circuit 1) : Set “Unset”

Fax (circuit 2) : Set “Unset”
DSC1 : Set “Unset”
DSC2 : Not used
NOTE
• When the setting has been changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on
again more than 10 seconds after.
12.9.4 Consumable Life Reminder

A. Use
• To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime
PM parts lifetime display : An entire screen warning is given when the service life
of a specific unit has been reached, prompting the user to
replace the part.
• Applicable units: Transfer belt unit, fusing unit, imaging unit (C, M, Y, K)
• Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is “No.”
Yes “No”

12.9.5 Unit Change

A. Use
• To select who is to replace a unit.
• Upon setup.
• When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who is
going to replace the unit.
When “User” is selected : Printing is inhibited.
When “Service” is selected : Life warning.
• To set whether or not to display a toner near empty warning.
• Drum unit/K and Developing unit/K are not subject to this setting because they are
replaced by customer engineer.
B. Procedure
<Unit Change>
• The following are the default settings:
US, Japan, Others 4 Europe, Others1/2/3

Toner Cartridge “User” Service User Service
Imaging Unit User “Service” “User” Service
Waste Toner Box User “Service” “User” Service
Punch Dust Box User “Service” “User” Service
<Warning Display>
Toner Near Empty : “Yes” No
12.9.6 Software Switch Setting
A. Use
• To set the operating characteristic of each function from software switch depending on
what types of printing are normally made.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Software Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Switch No.] and enter the intended switch number with the ten-key pad.
3. Touch [Bit Assignment].
4. Use [m] or [o] to select a bit. To set the bit, enter 0 or 1 with the ten-key pad.
5. To set the bit in hex, touch [HEX Assignment] and use the ten-key pad and [A] to [F]
keys to enter numbers and characters.
6. Touch [Fix].

12.9.7 Software Switch Setting-Setting items in the software switch setting

A. Change the function version of the machine
(1) Use
• To change the function version of the firmware version.
• To use when the firmware is updated from the initial version to the Ver. 4x.
HEX Assignment 00 : Operate with the function version 1. (Default setting)

HEX Assignment 10 : Operate with the function version 2.
(2) Procedure
2. Touch [Switch No.] and enter “25” with the ten-key pad.
3. Touch [HEX Assignment] and enter “00” or “10” with the ten-key pad.
4. Touch [Fix].
B. ACS mode control change

(1) Use
• To change the 1st image transfer roller pressure/retraction operation control in ACS
mode.
• When a user makes mainly black prints, selecting 01 may allow avoiding the PC drum
wear-out caused by unnecessary rotation of color imaging units.
HEX Assignment 00 : The color print (pressed) position is set as the default position of
the 1st image transfer roller. (Default setting)
HEX Assignment 01 : The black print (retracted) position is set as the default position
of the 1st image transfer roller.
(2) Procedure

3. Touch [HEX Assignment] and enter “00” or “01” with the ten-key pad.
4. Touch [Fix].
C. Secure Print shortcut key display in the User Box mode menu
(1) Use
• To display the [Secure Print] shortcut key in the User Box mode menu (the default setting
is not shown).
bit0-0: Does not display the shortcut key
bit0-1: Displays the shortcut key
(2) Procedure
3. Touch [BIT Assignment] and select “bit0” with [m]/[o] key.
4. Enter “0” or “1” with the 10-key pad.
5. Touch [Fix].

D. Printing on paper of nonstandard size fed from the bypass tray (AnySize mode)
(1) Use
• To enable printing only by the setting made on the printer driver when printing is
attempted on paper of nonstandard size fed by way of the bypass tray (the default setting
is the conventional operation).
bit0-0 : Conventional operation
bit0-1 : The print cycle is initiated for the paper specified on the printer driver regard-
less of the bypass tray paper setting.
(2) Procedure
3. Touch [BIT Assignment] and select “bit2” with [m]/[o] key.
4. Enter “0” or “1” with the 10-key pad.
5. Touch [Fix].
12.9.8 Scan Caribration

• This feature is not available in this machine.
12.9.9 LCC Size Setting

A. Use
• To set the paper size for the LCC.
• Use to change the paper size for the LCC (tray 3/4).
B. Procedure
• The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area.
A4 B5 8 1/2 x 11 16K A5 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 Post. S
12.9.10 LCT Paper Size Setting

A. Use
• To set a LCT type.
• To set the paper size for the LCT.
• Use this feature upon LCT set-up.
B. Procedure
<LCT type setting>
• The default setting is A4LCT.
“A4LCT” A3LCT
* For a selected LCT type, set a paper size.
NOTE
• When the LCT type setting is changed, the paper size setting in the LCT is
returned to the default.
<A4LCT>
A4 81/2 x 11
<A3LCT>
A3h B4 A4S A4 12 x 18
11 x 17 8 /2 x 14
1 8 /2 x 11
1 8 /2 x 11S
1

12.9.11 Line Mag Setting

• This feature is not available in this machine.
12.9.12 Data Capture

A. Use
• When an error occurs, it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the
error.
• When an error occurs, this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the
print job data.
B. Procedure
NOTE
• The following conditions are necessary for this function.
When selecting [Security Setting] o [Security Details] o [Print Data Capture] in
Administrator Settings, [Allow] must be set.
The hard disk must be mounted to the machine.
When selecting [Administrator Settings] o [Network Settings] o [FTP Settings],
[FTP Server Settings: ON] must be set.
• This function is not available when the optional image controller IC-412 is
mounted.
1. Select [Service Mode] o [System 2], and touch [Data Capture]. Select [ON].
(While the Data Capture setting is [ON], the print job data from the PC will be stored in
the hard disk.)
NOTE
• The original offset value can be disabled to address image failure and other prob-
lems caused by individual CCD performance difference.
2. Check the IP address of the machine.

3. Connect the PC (Windows) and the machine with ethernet cable.
4. Start the DOS command prompt of the PC, and specify the IP address of the machine
to start FTP.
A0P0F3E547DA

5. Input the user name and the password.

User name: capture
Password: sysadm
A0P0F3E548DA
6. Using the “ls” command, display the list of the file available for capture.
A0P0F3E549DA
7. Using the “binary” command, set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer.
A0P0F3E550DA

8. Using the “get” command, transfer the data for capture to PC.
A0P0F3E551DA
9. Finish the command prompt.
NOTE
• After receiving capture data, select [Administrator Settings] o [Security Settings]
o [Security Details], and select [Restrict] for print data capture in order to delete
the job data stored in the hard disk.
When HDD Format or Overwrite Temporary Data is performed, job data is deleted.
12.9.13 Split Line Detect. Setting-Prior Detection

A. Use
• To set the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
• Use when changing the setting for whether or not to detect the stain on the ADF original
glass when opening/closing ADF as well as its detection level as the main/sub power
being ON, recovering from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
Not Set : Detection of stain on the glass will not be conducted.
Low : Stain on the glass will not be detected easily.
Normal : Normal level detection.
High : Stain on the glass will easily be detected.
NOTE
• Be aware that selecting “Not Set” and performing the pre-detection with the fol-
lowing setting will display “NG.”
[Service Mode] o [Machine] o [Thin Line Prior Detection]
• When “Not Set” is selected, the original glass cleaning operation after the job
ends does not operate.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is “Normal.”
Not Set Low “Normal” High

12.9.14 Split Line Detect. Setting-Warning Level

A. Use
• To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected.
• Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain
on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the lines.
0: Warning will not be displayed.
1: Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark. (warning code: D-1/D-2)
2: Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen.
3: Warning will be displayed on all screens.
NOTE
• This setting is invalid when [Prior Detection] is set to “Not Set.”
B. Procedure
0 1 “2” 3
12.9.15 Split Line Detect. Setting-Paper Passaging Detection

A. Use
• To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original
glass when feeding the original.
• Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the
ADF original glass when feeding the original.
0 : The glass will stop moving when the original is fed, and will not perform
removing the stain.
1 : The glass will move between originals when feeding the original.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is 1
0 “1”
12.9.16 Stamp
A. Use
• To set the mounting status of the optional stamp unit SP-501.
• To use when setting up the stamp unit SP-501.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Unset.
Set “Unset”

12.9.17 Network Fax Settings

A. Use
• To set whether or not to use network fax function.
• To use network fax function (IP address fax, internet fax).
• Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to “ON” in the following
settings.
Function Settings]
B. Procedure
• The default settings are OFF.
IP Address Fax : ON “OFF”

SIP-Fax : Not Used
Internet Fax : ON “OFF”
12.9.18 Image Stabilization Setting

A. Use
• To change the type and timing of image stabilization.
• To provide the desirable image stabilization control that depends on customer’s machine
usage pattern, i.e. the ratio of color to black print.
Standard : This mode is suitable for low-volume users and reduces the number of
times image stabilization is carried out when the main power switch is
turned ON.
If the change of absolute humidity is detected during warm-up, normal
stabilization is performed during warm-up.
Color Priority : This mode is suitable for high-volume and high ratio of color print users.
Color stabilization sequence is performed unconditionally when the
main power switch and the sub power switch are turned ON.
Mono Priority : This mode is suitable for users who use mainly black print and use less
color print. It provides monochrome stabilization and reduces the num-
ber of times image stabilization is carried out when the main power
switch is turned ON. If the change of absolute humidity is detected dur-
ing warm-up, monochrome stabilization is performed during the warm-
up and color stabilization is performed before color printing.
B. Procedure
• The default settings are Standard.
“Standard” Color Priority Mono Priority

12.9.19 User Paper Settings

A. Use
• To set and register individual user paper that includes a different basic weight, fusing
temperature, 2nd image transfer fine adjustment value.
• User Paper Settings is also available from [Administrator Settings] o [System Settings]
o [Expert Adjustment] o [User Paper Settings].
• To register a paper type that is suitable for individual customer’s intended use and use
environment.
• The following shows user paper registration keys and corresponding paper types.User
Paper 1/2: Plain paper
User Paper 3 : Thick1
User Paper 4 : Thick1+
B. Procedure
[System 2] o [ ] o [User Paper Settings].
3. Select the desired key from [User Paper 1] to [User Paper 6] to register user paper.
4. Select [Basic Weight] and enter a value with the [ + ]/[ - ] key.
5. Select [Heating Side] or [Pressurizing Side] and enter a fusing temperature with the [ +
]/[ - ] key.
The setting range is -20 qC to +5 qC. (1 step: 5 qC)
6. Select one from the following: [Front-Color], [Front-Black], [Back-Color], or [Back-
Black]. Enter a 2nd image transfer fine adjustment value with the [ + ]/[ - ] key.
The setting rage is -7 to +8. (1 step: 1 increment or decrement)
7. Set paper of A4S or 81/2 x 11S on the manual tray.
8. Select [1-side] (only front side) or [Front side] (only back side) and press the Start key.
9. Check the image of the output test pattern.
If the image is not acceptable, adjust the settings and output the test pattern again.
(1) Test Pattern in User Paper Settings

• The printable test pattern for user paper settings is provided to ease determining the
most appropriate 2nd image transfer output value when customizing user paper.
• This test pattern changes output voltage as shown below based on the standard voltage
A (voltage determined by the 2nd image auto transfer voltage control) on a sheet of
paper.
A +600 V
A +400 V
A +200 V
A 0V
A -200 V
A -400 V
A -600 V A: Standard voltage
A0P0F3C539DA

12.9.20 Coverage Rate Screen

A. Use
• To set whether or not to display a coverage rate on the sales counter screen and sales
counter list.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Display.
“Display” Do Not Display
12.9.21 JAM Code Display Setting

A. Use
• To set whether or not to add a jam code to a jam warning display on the control panel
when a jam occurs.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Do Not Display.
Display “Do Not Display”
12.9.22 BootUp Screen

A. Use
• To customize the BootUp Screen displayed upon machine start-up.
• Use this feature when changing the Olivetti logo displayed on the control panel
upon start-up to a client company logo or others for client’s intended use of the machine.
• Register logo data in the machine’s flash ROM via a USB memory device.
The following are the logo data specifications that should be met.
Image format : PNG format

File extension : *. png
File name : BootupScreen.png
Image size : 800 x 480 dots
Color : 256 colors (Palette that the machine specifies is used.)
NOTE
• When making the logo data, use the exclusive image making tool.
• If a USB memory device is not connected or a nonconforming USB memory device
is connected, “USB NG” is displayed and logo data cannot be registered.
• If the file name of logo data does not conform to the above specifications, “File
NG” message is displayed and logo data cannot be registered.

B. Procedure
1. Save logo data that conforms to the above specifications in the root directory of a USB
memory device.
NOTE
• Be sure to save data in the root directory as the machine cannot detect data saved
in other directories.
2. Connect the USB memory device to the machine USB port.

[System 2] o [ ] o [BootUp Screen].
4. Touch [Set].
5. Check result “OK” is displayed and touch [END].
NOTE
• If logo data is already registered, new logo data overwrites the existing logo data.
• The color of logo data may look different between the machine control panel and
some PC screens. After registering logo data, restart the machine and check the
color of the logo data on the BootUp screen.
* To delete registered data, touch [Delete] and check result “OK” is displayed.
12.9.23 Install Data

A. Use
• To install movie help data or OCR dictionary data into HDD.
• To use when the logical format of the hard disk is performed.
• To install each data into the machine HDD via USB memory device.
B. Procedure
NOTE
• To use OCR function, the optional i-Option LK-105 must be activated.
1. Save data (*.tar) into the root directory of a USB memory device.
2. Connect the USB memory device to the machine USB port.
[System 2] o [ ] o [Install Data].
4. Touch [Movie Data] or [OCR Dictionary].
You can select the above two types of data at a time and install them.
5. Touch [Set].
6. Press the Start key to install the data.
7. Check result “OK” is displayed and touch [END].
NOTE
• If data is already installed, it is necessary to delete old data before installing new
one.
* To delete registered data, select the data to be deleted and touch [Delete]. Check result
“OK” is displayed.

12.9.24 Bluetooth Settings

A. Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the Bluetooth function.
• Use this setting upon set-up of the optional local interface kit EK-605.
B. Procedure
Effective “Invalid”
12.10 Counter
• The counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the technical representative
to check or set as necessary.
12.10.1 Common procedure

1. Touch [Counter] to show the counter menu.
2. Select the specific counter to be displayed.
3. To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at
once, touch [Counter Reset], select the specific counters to be cleared, and touch
[END]. Two or more counters can be selected.
(However, the [Service Call], [Service Total], and [JAM] counters cannot be selected.)
12.10.2 Life
A. Use
• To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been
used.
• To clear the count of each counter.
• To perform New Release in fusing unit and transfer belt unit.
• To check how many times maintenance parts have been used.
• When each of the maintenance parts is replaced.
B. Procedure
(1) Counter clear
• To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key.
• If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing
operation.
• It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the fusing unit, transfer belt unit,
imaging unit and TCR new article detection.
• For the count method of each counter, see the table “Count method of each life counter.”
<Count method of each life counter>
Counter item Counting method

Fusing Unit Rotation Time • Counts how many hours the fusing unit has turned.
Fusing Unit No. of • Counts how many sheets have been ejected. The counter increases
Printed Page by 1 per every 216 mm in the sub scan direction and shows the total
count. For paper length less than 216 mm in the sub scan direction,
the counter uses 216 mm as the paper length.
Image Transfer belt • Counts how many hours the transfer belt unit has turned.
Rotation Time

Counter item Counting method

Image Transfer belt • Counts how many sheets have been ejected. The counter increases
No. of by 1 per every 216 mm in the sub scan direction and shows the total
Printed Page count. For paper length less than 216 mm in the sub scan direction,
Transfer Roller Unit • Counts how many sheets have been ejected. The counter increases
by 1 per every 216 mm in the sub scan direction and shows the total
Ozone Filter • Counts how many hours PC drum/K has turned.
Toner Filter • Counts how many sheets have been printed. The counter increases
by 1 per every 216 mm in the sub scan direction and shows the total
1st. • Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 1
2nd. • Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 2
3rd. • Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 3
4th. • Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 4
Manual Tray • Number of sheets of paper fed from the bypass
IU Rotation Time (C) • Counts how many hours PC drum has turned.
IU Rotation Time (M)
IU Rotation Time (Y)
IU-DC Rotation Time (K) • Counts how many hours DC has turned.
Number of Pages • Counts how many sheets have been printed.
Printed by IU (C)
Number of Pages
Printed by IU (M)
Number of Pages
Printed by IU (Y)
Number of Pages
Printed by IU-DevC (K)
LCT Parts • Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT
ADF Feed • Number of sheets of original fed through the take-up section of the
ADF
ADF Reverse • Number of sheets of original fed through the turnover unit of the ADF
Sorter/Finisher • Number of sheets of paper fed out of the sorter/finisher
TCR new article detection (C) • Period of time over which the toner cartridge has been used.
TCR new article detection (M)
TCR new article detection (Y)
TCR new article detection (K)

(2) New Release

• After replacing a fusing unit or transfer belt unit, perform New Release to clear its life
counter.
[Counter] o [Life] o [New Release].
3. Select a unit where New Release is made.
4. Press the Start key and perform New Release.
(3) New Release Disable mode

• To enable a unit that is used temporarily for troubleshooting to be used again as a new
unit in another machine, the New Release Disable mode is provided.
• Applicable units are the following units that have the new unit detection feature
Imaging unit/Y,M,C, drum unit/K, developing unit/K
• See the following page for the method of enabling the New Release Disable mode.
See P.623
12.10.3 Service Call Counter

A. Use
• To count and display how many times trouble has been detected on a trouble type basis.
• Use this feature to check how many times trouble has occurred.
NOTE
• In the service call counter list, “Reboot” shows how many times abort code (C-
FXXX) has occurred.
12.10.4 Section Service Call

A. Use
• To count and display how many times trouble has been detected during a certain period,
i.e. an interval between service visits, on a trouble type basis.
• Use this feature to check how many times trouble has occurred in a certain period, i.e. an
interval between service visits.
• By clearing the counter at the time of visit to your customer, i.e. service visit, you can
check how many times trouble has occurred since the previous visit.
To reset the counter, use [Counter Reset].
NOTE
• In the zone service call list, “Reboot” shows how many times abort code (C-FXXX)
has occurred.
12.10.5 Warning
A. Use
• To count and display how many times warning code has been detected on a warning
code type basis.
• To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type
B. Procedure
• To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key.
• If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing
operation.
• When a warning condition occurs, an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the
basic screen.
• Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen.

12.10.6 Maintenance
A. Use
• To set a count value for maintenance of any given part.
• When any given part is replaced.
B. Procedure
Maint.-Set
• Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-key pad.
Maint.-Count
• The number of sheets that have been ejected is counted up. (1 sided: 1 count, 2 sided: 2
count)
• Pressing the Clear key will clear the count.
• If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing
operation.
12.10.7 Service Total

A. Total
(1) Use
• To display the count value for the service total counter.
• Use to check the total No. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Service
Mode.
(2) Procedure
Service Total : No. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode.
Service Total (Duplex) : No. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode in
duplex.
B. Paper Size 1/2
(1) Use
• To display the count value for service total counter of each paper size.
• To check the total number of printed pages including the one at Service Mode according
to each paper size.
• The count of Paper Size 1 and Paper Size 2 that contain the following paper sizes is pro-
vided respectively.
Paper Size 1: A3, A4, A4S, A5, A6, B4, B5, B5S, B6, Post., 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x
14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 71/4 x 101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 4 x 6, Foolscap
Paper Size 1: 8K, 16K, long Length, Others

12.10.8 Counter of Each Mode

A. Use
• To display the printed pages in the following specified modes; copy, printer, scanner, and
fax. It also displays the count value of using the specified mode.
• Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes; copy, printer, scanner,
and fax, as well as No. of times each mode was used, in order to know the using condi-
tion.
Copy/printer/scanner counter : Displays individual counts in copy, printer, and scan
mode.
Fax-related counter : Displays individual counts in fax mode
Counter by finishing option : Displays individual counts on a finishing option basis.
Stabilization counter : Displays individual counts on a basis of the factors that
cause image stabilization. The counter helps to under-
stand what causes image stabilization and how to
improve image stabilization control.
PJ counter : Jobs that the machine has processed are divided
according to the number of pages per job: 1P/J, 2P/J, ...
10P/J, or 11P/J and more. The total number of jobs in
each group is counted and displayed separately based
on whether job is processed in color, monochrome, or
auto color mode.
The counter is used to understand how the machine
has been used in the field.
12.10.9 Service Call History (Data)

A. Use
• To display the trouble history in chronological order.

• Use to check the trouble history in chronological order.
12.10.10 ADF Paper Pages

A. Use
• To display the No. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder.
• Use to check the No. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder.
12.10.11 Paper Jam History

A. Use
• To display the jam history in chronological order.
• Use to check the jam history in chronological order.
NOTE
• [Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code.
For details of JAM code, see “Trouble shooting.”
See P.657
12.10.12 Fax Connection Error

A. Use
• To display the No. of fax transmission errors occurred.
• Use to check the No. of fax transmission errors occurred.

12.10.13 Split Line Counter

A. Use
• To display the average number of detected stain on the ADF original glass at the pre-
detection.
• Used for checking the number of detected stain on the ADF original glass.
Pre-detect Large Size : Large-sized detected stain divided by the number of times
pre-detection is practiced (average number of detected
lines) will be displayed.
Pre-detect Small Size : Small-sized detected stain divided by the number of times
pre-detection is practiced (average number of detected
lines) will be displayed.
Detect Split line in acting : Number of detected stain on the original glass during the
original feed divided by the number of scanning by ADF
(average number of detected lines) will be displayed.
B. Procedure
• To clear each counter value, select the items to be cleared, and press the Clear key.
(When selecting [Pre-detect Large Size] or [Pre-detect Small Size] is selected, both val-
ues will be cleared.)
• If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing
operation.
12.10.14 Parts Counter (Fixed)

A. Use
• When the optional finisher is mounted, the parts counter screen displays the relevant
parts and their counts. When the relevant parts are replaced, their counters need to be
reset to update the service history.
• When the optional finisher is mounted, the relevant parts counter can be checked from
this menu.
• Service history can be maintained from this menu.
NOTE
• See the table below for the relevant parts and count method.
B. Procedure
1. Touch in the order of [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [n] o [Parts Counter (Fixed)].
2. Check the parts counter or display the relevant part of which counter will be reset.
3. Check the part count.
To reset the count value, touch the key of the part where the counter is reset. Touch the
Clear key.
(1) Fixed parts to be counted

CSRC
No. param- Parts name Parts number Limit value Count condition
eter
001 43 FNS 2-Staple Stapler AVGR10781X 500,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in
both 1 staple and 2 staple mode.
002 44 FNS Center Staple & AVGR10784U 200,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in
Fold Stapler saddle stitch mode.

CSRC
No. param- Parts name Parts number Limit value Count condition
eter
003 Stacker Accessory no code 3,000,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in
Plate Movement front 1 staple, rear 1 staple, 2 sta-
Monitor ples in sort staple mode as well as
shift sort m
004 47 FNS Center press AVGR07493X 2,000,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in
Knife Motor half-fold, saddle stitch, and tri-fold
mode
005 4A PI sheet paper feed AVGR09842Y 1,000,000 1 count for each sheet fed from the
clutch (Upper) PI upper tray
006 4B PI sending Roller AVGR09834Q 200,000
Pair/A (Upper)
007 4C PI sending Roller AVGR09840K 100,000
Pair/B (Upper)
008 4D PI Reversal Rubber AVGR09862S 100,000
Pair (Upper)
009 4E PI Torque Limiter AVGR09861N 600,000
(Upper)
010 PI Tray Up/Down AVGR12223U 1,000,000 1 count for each job where paper is
Motor (Up) fed from the PI upper tray
011 PI sheet paper feed AVGR09842Y 1,000,000 1 count for each sheet fed from the
clutch (Lower) PI lower tray
012 PI sending Roller AVGR09834Q 200,000
Pair/A (Lower)
013 51 PI sending Roller AVGR09840K 100,000

Pair/B (Lower)
014 52 PI Reversal Rubber AVGR09862S 100,000
Pair (Lower)
015 53 PI Torque Limiter AVGR09861N 600,000 1 count for each sheet fed from the
(Lower) PI lower tray
016 PI Tray Up/Down AVGR12223U 1,000,000 1 count for each job where paper is
Motor (Down) fed from the PI lower tray
017 65 PI Regist AVGR09842Y 1,000,000 1 count each time a sheet is ejected
from PI.
018 66 Punch Motor no code 1,000,000 Number of sheets ejected in punch
included in code mode
AVGR12224R
019 FNS Output Roller/A AVGR06945S 300,000 1 count for each sheet ejection to
the FNS main tray. 1 count for each
sheet ejection in staple mode
020 PK Counter AVGR12224R 1,000,000 Number of punch kit punching
021 Punch scrap trans- AVGR12205X 1,000,000 Number of punches in ZU
portation motor pair (1) 1 count for each sheet printed in
022 Punch clutch AVGR10463X 1,000,000 punch mode when ZU is
installed and PK is not installed.
(2) 1 count for each sheet printed in
Z-fold and punch modes when
ZU and PK are installed.

12.10.15 Jam
A. Use
• To count and display how many times jam has been detected on a jam location basis.
12.10.16 Section JAM

• To count and display how many times jam has been detected in a certain period, i.e. an
interval between service visits, on a jam location basis.
• Use this feature to check how many times jam has occurred in a certain period, i.e. an
interval between service visits.
• By clearing the jam counter at the time of visit to your customer site, i.e. service visit, you
can check how many times jam has occurred since the previous visit.
To reset the counter, use [Counter Clear].
12.11 List Output

12.11.1 Machine Management List
A. Use
• To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, total counter values,
and others.
• At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.
B. Procedure
• Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source.
• Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list.
• The time-of-day and date will also be printed.
12.11.2 Adjustment List
A. Use
• To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment, process adjustment, etc. in Service
Mode.
• At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.
B. Procedure
• Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source.
• Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list.
• The time-of-day and date will also be printed.
12.11.3 Parameter List

• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.
12.11.4 Service Parameter

12.11.5 Protocol Trace

12.11.6 Fax Setting List


12.11.7 Fax Analysis List

12.12 State Confirmation

12.12.1 Sensor Check
A. Use
• To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine
remains stationary.
• Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs.
B. Procedure
• The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time basis.
• It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a door is open.
(1) Electrical components check procedure through input data check
• When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper feed section of the machine, the tray 2 paper
feed sensor is considered to be responsible for it.
1. Remove the sheet of paper misfed.

2. From the sensor check list that follows, check the panel display of the tray 2 paper feed
sensor. For the tray 2 paper feed sensor, you check the data of “Paper feed” of “Tray 2.”
4. Select [State Confirmation] o [Sensor Check] and then select the screen that contains
“Paper feed” under “Tray 2.” For “Paper feed” under “Tray 2,” select “1” on the left-hand
side of the screen.
5. Check that the data for “Paper feed” under “Tray 2” is “0” (sensor blocked).
6. Move the actuator to unblock the tray 2 paper feed sensor.
7. Check that the data for “Paper feed” under “Tray 2” changes from “0” to “1” on the
screen.
8. If the input data is “0,” change the sensor.

12.12.2 Sensor check screens

• These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi-
vidual machine.
A. Sensor monitor
(1) Sensor monitor 1,2
A0P0F3E552DA


A0P0F3E553DA

A0P0F3E554DA


A0P0F3E568DA

A0P0F3E569DA


A0P0F3E570DA

(7) Sensor monitor 13
A0P0F3E555DA

12.12.3 Sensor check list

A. Sensor monitor
(1) Sensor monitor 1 (Main body)
Operation characteris-
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name tics/panel display
1 0
Paper feed tray 1
PS1 Device detection Tray 1 device detection sensor In position Out of
position
PS2 Paper empty Tray 1 paper empty sensor Paper not Paper
present present
PS3 Near Empty Tray 1 near empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS4 Vertical transport Tray 1 vertical transport sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS5 Paper feed Tray 1 paper feed sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS6 Upper Limit Tray 1 upper limit sensor At raised Not at
position raised
position
Paper feed tray 2
PS9 Device detection Tray 2 device detection sensor In position Out of
position
present present

PS12 Vertical transport Tray 2 vertical transport sensor Paper Paper not
present present
present present
position raised
position
Paper feed tray 3
In position Out of
Device detection
position
present present
present present
position raised
position
Paper feed tray 4
In position Out of
Device detection
position
present present

1 0
present present
position raised
position
Tray 3/4
PS28 Sensor in front of Intermediate roller sensor Paper Paper not
mid. roller. present present
PS29 Horizon. Transpor- Horizontal transport sensor Paper Paper not
tat. sensor present present
Manual
PS30 Device detection Bypass set sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS31 Multi FD size 1 Multi FD size sensor/1 ON OFF
PS34 Paper empty Bypass paper empty sensor At raised Not at
position raised
position
PS35 Upper Limit Bypass paper limit sensor At raised Not at
position raised
position
PS36 Lower Limit Bypass paper lower sensor At lower Not at
limit lower limit
position position
PS37 Sub Tray Bypass sub tray set sensor Blocked Unblocked
Paper passage transportation
PS38 Sensor in front of Timing roller sensor Paper Paper not
tim. roller. present present
PS39 Paper exit Paper exit sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS40 OHP detection OHP detection sensor OHP Not OHP
PS41 Loop amount Loop amount detection sensor/1 Loop Loop not
detection 1 present present
PS42 Loop amount Loop amount detection sensor/2 Loop Loop not
detection 2 present present

(2) Sensor monitor 2 (Main body, LCT)
1 0
Photo conductor
PS43 Charging CL home Charging cleaner home sensor Blocked Unblocked
sensor (this side)
PS44 Charging CL home Charging cleaner return sensor Blocked Unblocked
sensor (interior)
PS45 Black and white K PC encoder sensor/1 Blocked Unblocked
PC encoder 1
PS46 Black and white K PC encoder sensor/2 Blocked Unblocked
PC encoder 2
LCT
No
LCT detection LCT identification signal Connection
connection
LU-204: Tray set sensor/1 Out of posi-
PS1 Tray set sensor In position
LU-301: Tray set sensor tion
Not at
At raised
raised
PS2 Upper limit sensor Upper limit sensor position
position
(Blocked)
(Unblocked)
Paper Paper not
PS3 Paper feed Paper feed sensor
present present
Paper not Paper

PS4 paper empty Paper empty sensor
present present
PS5 Near empty 1 Near empty sensor /1 Blocked Unblocked
PS6 Near empty 2 Near empty sensor /2 Blocked Unblocked
MS1 Upper Door LU door switch Close Open
Duplex
PS47 Paper passage1 ADU paper passage sensor/1 Paper Paper not
present present
PS48 Paper passage 2 ADU paper passage sensor/2 Paper Paper not
present present
Secondary transfer
PS50 Pressure welding Pressure welding alienation sensor Not Retracted
alienation Retracted
Transfer belt
PS51 Retraction (black) Pressure welding alienation sensor/K Not Retracted
Retracted
PS52 Retraction (color) Pressure welding alienation sensor/color Not Retracted
Retracted
Waste toner
PS53 Waste Toner Box Waste toner box set sensor Blocked Unblocked
Set
Waste Toner Full 1 • Not used.
PS54 Waste Toner Full 2 Waste toner full sensor/1 Blocked Unblocked
Fusing

1 0
PS55 Roller retraction Pressure home sensor Not Retracted
Retracted
Fuser Power No electricity Electricity

Switch restrictions restrictions
(3) Sensor monitor 3 (Main body, LCT)
1 0
Toner
RS/C Toner (C) Empty Toner empty sensor/C Toner not Toner
present present
RS/M Toner (M) Empty Toner empty sensor/M Toner not Toner
present present
RS/Y Toner (Y) Empty Toner empty sensor/Y Toner not Toner
present present
PZS/K Toner (K) Empty Toner empty sensor/K Toner not Toner
present present
TCB/C Toner (C) set Toner cartridge set board/C In position Out of
detection position
TCB/M Toner (M) set Toner cartridge set board/M In position Out of
detection position
TCB/Y Toner (Y) set Toner cartridge set board/Y In position Out of
detection position
TCB/K Toner (K) set Toner cartridge set board/K In position Out of
detection position
Toner (C) new New article Not a new

article detect article
Toner (M) new New article Not a new

Toner (Y) new New article Not a new

Toner (K) new New article Not a new

IU
Drum Unit (K) set In position Out of

detection position
Drum Unit (K) new New article Not a new


(4) Sensor monitor 4 (FS-526)
1 0
Finisher 1
Pass Through Paper Paper not
PS1 FNS pass sensor
FNS Inlet present present
Z-Fold Punch Paper Paper not
PS2 Z-fold Punch regist sensor
Regist. present present
Center Staple & Paper Paper not
PS12 Center staple pass sensor
Fold Stacker Inlet present present
2 Staples Stacker Paper Paper not
PS3 2 staples stacker sensor
Inlet present present
2 Staples Stacker Paper not Paper
PS15 2 staples stacker empty sensor
Empty present present
Rewind Paddle
Not at
PS16 Up/Down Move- Rewind paddle home sensor At home
home
ment M HP
2 Staples Align-
2 staples alignment motor home sensor/ Not at
PS17 ment F HP Detec- At home
F home
tion
2 Staples Align-
2 staples alignment motor home sensor/ Not at
PS18 ment R HP Detec- At home
R home
tion
Side-staple pad-
PS19 dle phase detec- 2 staples paddle phase sensor Blocked Unblocked
tion
Paper Output-
Not at
PS10 Driven R Move- Paper output roller home sensor At home
home
ment M HP
Stacker Acces- Not at
PS11 Stacker plate home sensor At home
sory Plate M HP home
Trail Edge Paddle
Not at
PS20 up/Down Move- Trail edge paddle home sensor At home
home
ment M HP
Sub Tray Output Paper Paper not
PS8 Sub tray exit sensor
Detection present present
Sub Tray Full Other than
PS9 Sub tray full sensor Full
Detection full
Main Tray Top Sur- Not at
PS4 Main tray top surface sensor Upper limit
face Detection upper limit
Main Tray Lower Not at lower
PS5 Main tray lower limit sensor Lower limit
Limit Detection limit
Stapled Paper
PS7 Output Top Sur- Staple paper exit top surface sensor Blocked Unblocked
face Detection
Main Tray Empty
PS6 Main tray empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
Detection

1 0
FNS Front Door
PS201 open/Close 24V Door open/close sensor Open Close
Detection
Side-staple sta- 50 sheets 100 sheets

pler cartridge (Blocked) (Unblocked)
2-staple stapler Not at
At home
HP Detection home
Staple Detection
Staple No staple
for 2 staples
(5) Sensor monitor 5 (FS-526, SD-508)
1 0
Finisher 2
Shutter open/close
PS24 Shutter open/close sensor Close Open
Detection
SD exit paper full Other than
PS35 SD exit full sensor Full
detection full
SD output Upper Not at
PS41 SD exit upper limit sensor Upper limit
Limit Detection upper limit
Side-staple rear
Not at
PS22 stopper move M 2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor At home
home
:HP
side-staple rear Other than
2 staples trail edge stopper standby sen- Standby
PS23 stopper move M standby
sor position
:standby position position
PS50 Stapler Position 1 Stapler position sensor/1 Blocked Unblocked
Paper Paper not
PS27 Fold Detection Fold sensor
present present
PS28 SD Output Detec- SD exit sensor/LED Paper Paper not
PS29 tion SD exit sensor/PR present present
Center Staple &
Paper not Paper
PS26 Fold Stacker Center staple stacker empty sensor/1
present present
Empty
Paddle Movement Not at
PS37 Paddle home sensor/C At home
M (Center) HP home
Not at
PS34 Half-Fold knife HP Center fold knife home sensor At home
home
Stapler Movement Not at
PS33 Stapler home sensor At home
M HP home
Leading Edge Not at
PS32 Leading edge stopper home sensor At home
Stopper M HP home

1 0
Center Staple &
Center staple alignment motor home Not at
PS31 Fold R Alignment At home
sensor/R home
M HP
Center Staple &
Center staple alignment motor home Not at
PS30 Fold F Alignment At home
sensor/F home
M HP
(6) Sensor monitor 6 (PK-516, JS-602)
1 0
Finisher 3
PK Punch Oscillat-
Not at
PS303 ing Drive M HP PK punch oscillating home sensor At home
home
Detection
2-Hole Position 3 holes
PS307 2 hole position sensor
Detect (4 holes)
PK Punch Front
PS308 PK punch front sensor Blocked Unblocked
Detection
PK Punch-Hole
Other than
PS302 Scraps Box Full PK punch scraps box full sensor Full
full
Detection
PK Punch-Hole
PS304 Scraps Box Instal- PK punch scraps box set sensor Set Not set
lation Detection
3rd tray cover
PS401 Job tray cover sensor Open Closed
open detection
Paper Paper not
PS402 3rd tray paper exit Job tray paper exit sensor
present present
3rd tray exit paper Other than
PS403 Job tray full sensor Full
full detection full
3rd tray detection Set Not set
(7) Sensor monitor 7 (ZU-606)
1 0
Finisher 4
Transport. pas- Paper Paper not
PS202 Paper pass sensor
sage detect. PS present present
FNS connection Uncon-
FNS connection signal Connected
detection nected

(8) Sensor monitor 8 (PI-505)
1 0
Finisher 5
PI operation panel SW
Start/Clear button Post inserter unit manual start/clear SW OFF ON
Punch button Post inserter unit manual punch button OFF ON
SW
Function select Post inserter unit manual function selec- OFF ON
button tion button SW
MS205 PI Door Open Upper door open/close switch Open Close
PS201 PI Upper Sheet Paper entrance sensor /Up Paper Paper not
Path Detection present present
PS202 PI Upper Tray Paper empty sensor /Up Paper Paper not
Sheet detection present present
PS203 PI Upper Sheet Paper set sensor /Up Paper Paper not
set Detection (Mid- present present
dle)
PS204 PI Upper Tray Tray upper limit sensor /Up At upper Not at
Upper limit detec- limit upper limit
tion position position
PS205 PI Upper Tray Tray lower limit sensor /Up At lower Not at
lower limit detec- limit lower limit
PS206 PI Lower Tray Paper entrance sensor /Lw Paper Paper not
Sheet Detection present present
PS207 PI Lower Tray Paper empty sensor /Lw Paper Paper not
Sheet Detection present present
PS208 PI Lower Sheet Paper set sensor /Lw Paper Paper not
Set Detection present present
(Middle)
PS209 PI Lower Tray Tray upper limit sensor /Lw At upper Not at
upper limit detec- limit upper limit
PS210 PI Lower Tray Tray lower limit sensor /Lw At lower Not at
lower limit detec- limit lower limit
PS212 PI Lower Sheet L size sensor /Lw Paper Paper not
Size Detection present present
(Large)

(9) Sensor monitor 9 (ZU-606)
1 0
Finisher 6
ZU
PSDTB Entrance detection Paper size detect board Paper not Paper
L: Paper having present present
PS609 Exit detection L: Exit sensor Paper not Paper
Paper having present present
PSDTB Detection 2 on Paper size detect board Paper not Paper
edge side L: Paper present present
having
having
having
PS605 Punch movement Punch shift home sensor Paper not Paper
home position H: present present
HP
PS604 Two stopper home 2nd folding stopper home sensor At home Not at
positions L: HP home
PS608 Punch rubbish full Punch scraps full sensor Not at At home
detection L: Full home

PS607 Punch rubbish box Punch scraps box set sensor Set Other than
set H: Set set
PS610 Z transportation Conveyance encoder sensor Other than Lock
motor lock detec- lock
tion L: Detection
MS601 Hole switch detec- Punch switchover switch 3(/4) holes 2 holes
tion H:3(4) punch
2/3(4) hole
PS606 Punch position Punch home sensor Not at At home
home position home
L:HP
PS603 One stopper home 1st folding stopper home sensor Not at At home
position L:HP home
ACSW1 Interlock (door Door switch Open Closed
opening and shut-
ting) detection H:
Opening
FM601 Fan motor lock Main motor cooling fan Detection Other than
detection H: detection
Detection
edge Side L: present present
Paper having

1 0
PS601 Sheet detection L: Conveyance sensor Paper not Paper
Paper having present present
(10) Sensor monitor 10 (FS-527)
NOTE
• “Tray 1” indicates the tray 2 (lower) and “Tray 2” is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the
panel.
1 0
Finisher 7
PS1 paper passage 1 Paper passage sensor/1 Paper Paper not
present present
PS2 paper passage 2 Paper passage sensor/2 Paper Paper not
present present
PS10 Punch regist Registration sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS8 Upper path Upper path sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS9 Lower path lower path sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS6 Tray 2 Path Tray1 path sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS11 Saddle path Saddle path sensor Paper Paper not
present present
PS17 Alignment Plate Alignment plate home sensor At home Not at
home home
PS20 FD Stopper Home Leading edge stopper home sensor At home Not at
home
Main finishing tray
PS16 Paper detection Tray2 paper detection sensor Paper Paper not
present present
Stapler Movement
PS18 Home Sensor 1 Stapler home sensor/1 At home Not at
(Rear) home
PS19 Home Sensor 2 Stapler home sensor/2 At home Not at
(Front) home
Staple Unit
Staple empty No staple Staple
Self Prime Staple No staple
Home At home Not at
home
SW2 Elevate upper/ Tray2 upper position switch At lower Not at
SW3 lower limit SW Tray2 lower position switch limit lower limit
position position

1 0
M15 Elevate motor lock Lock Other than
Elevate motor
detection lock
PS21 At lower Not at
Elevate Minimum
Tray2 lower position sensor limit lower limit
Detection
position position
PS25 Home(Shift) Tray2 shift home sensor Rear Front
PS13 No electric-
Accommodation R Electricity
Accommodation roller pressure sensor ity restric-
Retraction home restrictions
tions
PS12 No electric-
Tray 1 Exit R Electricity
Exit roller pressure sensor ity restric-
Retraction Home restrictions
tions
PS3 2-Side Path switch
Duplex path switching sensor Duplex Not duplex
Home
PS26 Upper Lower path
Upper lower path switching sensor Upper path Lower path
switch Home
PS7 Tray 2 path
Tray1 path switching home sensor Tray 1 Upper path
Change Home

(11) Sensor monitor 11 (FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603)
NOTE
panel.
1 0
Finisher 8
SW1 Front Door Open
Front door switch Closed Open
Detection
PS14 Upper Door Open
Upper door sensor Closed Open
Detection
PS5 Horizontal trans-
Horizontal conveyance cover sensor Closed Open
port open
Tray1
PS24 Other than
Upper position Top
Tray2 upper position sensor top
Detection detected
detected
Tray2
PS22 Other than
Full detection Tray1 full sensor Full
full
PS300 Punch pulse Punch pulse sensor/1 ON OFF
PS200 Punch Cam posi- At home Not at
Punch cam position sensor
tion home
PS100 At home Not at
Punch Home Punch home sensor/1
home
PS30 Punch Hole Full Other than
Punch hole full sensor Full
Detect full
Set Other than
Punch Unit Set
set
PS45 Edge Stopper M At home Not at
Leading edge stopper home sensor
Home home
Set Other than
Saddle Set
set
M21 Upper Paddle
Upper paddle motor ON OFF
Rotation Signal
M22 Lower Paddle
Lower paddle motor ON OFF
Rotation Signal
PS42 Center Staple At home Not at
Center staple alignment home sensor/F
align M HP (F) home
PS41 Center Staple At home Not at
Center staple alignment home sensor/R
align M HP (R) home
Saddle Tray
PS43 Upper Paper
Paper detection sensor/1 Staple No staple
Detection
PS44 Lower Paper
Paper detection sensor/2 Staple No staple
Detection

1 0
Saddle Staple At home Not at

Home home
Saddle staple 1
Staple No staple
Empty
Saddle staple 2
Staple No staple
Empty
PS47 Center fold plate M At home Not at
Center fold plate home sensor
Home home
M25 Center fold M Lock Lock Other than
Center fold roller motor
detection lock
PS48 Booklet tray empty Paper Paper not
Booklet tray near full sensor
detection present present
PS50 Booklet tray full Paper Paper not
Booklet tray full sensor
detection present present
Tray 3
Set Other than
Set Detection
set
PS36 Other than
Full detection Tray3 full sensor Full
full
PS35 No electricity Electricity
Exit R Retraction Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor
restrictions restrictions
(12) Sensor monitor 12 (JS-504)
1 0
Finisher 9
PS1 Paper Paper not
Tray 1 exit sensor Lower tray exit sensor
present present
PS2 Paper Paper not
Exit(Non-sort2) Upper tray exit sensor
present present
T1FDTB/ Other than
Tray 1 full sensor Lower tray paper full detect board/LED Full
LED full
T2FDTB/ Other than
Full(Non-sort2) Upper tray paper full detect board/LED Full
LED full
PS3 Front cover Front door sensor Closed Open
PS4 At home Not at
path switch home Route change home sensor
home
PS6 At home Not at
Home(Shift) Route change home sensor
home

(13) Sensor monitor 13 (Scanner section of the main body)
1 0
Scanner
PS201 Home Sensor Scanner home sensor At home Out of
home
Org. Detecting Sensor
S201 Original Cover Original cover sensor Lowered Raised
PS202 20 Degree 15 degree sensor Less than 20 degree
20 degree or more
PS204 Original Size Original size detection 1 sensor Original Original not
Detection 1 loaded, not loaded
mounted
PS205 Original Size Original size detection 2 sensor Original Original not
Detection 2 loaded, not loaded
mounted
Original Size Not used

Detection 3

Detection 4

Detection 5

Detection 6

Detection 7

Detection 8
12.12.4 Table Number

A. Use
• When IDC is detected, for plain paper, Thick 1/1+, Thick 2/3/4, and Black, the machine
independently displays each Vg/Vdc output value that is calculated based on the density
(toner amount stuck on the belt) of the test pattern created on the transfer belt.
• Used for troubleshooting of image problems.
• Reference values: C, M, Y K Vdc: around 400 V, Vg: around 500 V
B. Procedure
• If the value is high, correct so that the image density becomes low.
• If the value is low, correct so that the image density becomes high.

12.12.5 Level History1

A. Use
• To display TCR (T/C ratio), IDC/registration sensor output values, and fusing tempera-
ture.
B. Procedure
• TCR-C/-M/-Y/-K : Shows the T/C output reading taken last.
• IDC1/IDC2 : Shows the latest IDC data.
• Middle heat temperature : Displays the latest temperature on the middle of the
heating roller.
• Heat. Protect Temperature : Displays the latest temperature of the heating protec-
tion.
• Heat edge temperature : Displays the latest temperature at the edges of the heat-
ing roller.
• Soaking side temperature : Displays the latest temperature of the soaking roller.
• NC sensor temperature : Displays the temperature detected by NC sensor.
“Reading taken last” means

• Density of toner of the latest image
• When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while level history 1 is being dis-
played.
12.12.6 Level History 2

A. Use
• IDC Sensor (Transfer belt bare surface level) as adjusted through the image stabilization
sequence and ATVC value.

B. Procedure
• IDC Sensor : Shows the intensity adjustment value (0 to 255) of the IDC sensor.
• ATVC (C, M, Y, K) : Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value
(10 to 100 PA).
• ATVC (2nd) : Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value
(300 to 5000 V).
12.12.7 Temp. & Humidity

A. Use
• To display the temperature, humidity and paper temperature of a specific location (IDC
sensor portion) inside the machine.
• Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs.
B. Procedure
• Temp-Inside : 0 to 100 qC in 1 qC increments
• Humidity : 0 to 100 % in 1 % increments
• Absolute Humidity : 0 to 100 in 1 increments
• Paper Temp. : 0 to 100 qC in 1 qC increments

12.12.8 CCD Check

A. Use
• To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B.
• Used for troubleshooting for the CCD sensor.
B. Procedure
• Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values.
CLAMP:The difference between the max. and min. output values should be within
±100.
GAIN :The difference from the CLAMP values (R, B) should be within (90 for R
and B. The difference from the CLAMP value (G) should be within ±50
for G.
The difference between each pair of RO and RE, GO and GE, and
BO and BE should be within 30.
12.12.9 Memory/HDD Adj.-Memory Check

A. Use
• To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write/
read check.
• If the copy image is faulty.
Rough Check
• A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very
limited area.
• The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage.
Detail Check
• A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at the
addresses and buses in all areas.
• The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] o [Memory / HDD Adj.] o [Mem-
ory Check].
3. Select the desired type of check, either [Rough Check] or [Detail Check].
4. Press the Start key to start the check procedure.
5. When the check procedure is completed, the results are shown on the screen.
If the check results are NG, check the memory for connection or replace the memory
with a new one.
✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence.

12.12.10 Memory/HDD Adj.-Compress / Decompression Check

A. Use
• To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly.
• If the copy image is faulty.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] o [Memory / HDD Adj.] o [Com-
press / Decompression Check].
3. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompres-
sion check sequence.
4. The check result will be displayed.
12.12.11 Memory/HDD Adj.-Memory Bus Check

A. Use
• To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory, and from
memory to printer.
• Bus check between scanner and memory has two steps; the scanner internal check step
as internal processing and the check step between scanner and memory. If either of the
two steps is NG, NG1 or NG2 is displayed respectively.
• If the print image is faulty.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] o [Memory / HDD Adj.] o [Mem-
ory Bus Check].
3. Select either [Scanner o Memory], [Memory o PRT], or both.

4. Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automati-
cally.
5. The check result will be displayed, [OK] or [NG].
12.12.12 Memory/HDD Adj.-DSC Bus Check

A. Use
• To check the connection between the DSC board and the scanner section when the
optional security kit SC-507 is installed.
• When an error is detected after checking, NG1 or NG2 is displayed depending on the
location of the board where the defect is found.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] o [Memory / HDD Adj.] o [DSC
Bus Check].
3. Touch [Scanner o DSC].
4. Pressing the Start key will start the DSC bus check and be terminated automatically.
5. The check result will be displayed.

12.12.13 Memory/HDD Adj.-HDD R/W Check

A. Use
• To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly, and if read/write operation of the
hard disk is correctly performed.
• When the hard disk is mounted.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] o [Memory / HDD Adj.] o [HDD R/
W Check].
3. Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be terminated
automatically.
4. The check result will be displayed, [OK] or [NG].
12.12.14 Memory/HDD Adj.-HDD Format

A. Use
• To format the hard disk.
• The function proceeds in the order of physical format to logical format.
• If the hard disk is yet to be formatted, the malfunction code “C-D010” will appear. Ignore
this code and continue with the formatting procedure.
• When the hard disk is mounted.
• When the hard disk is to be initialized. (Physical format to logical format)
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] o [Memory / HDD Adj.] o [HDD
Format].
Physical Format
1. Touch [Physical Format].
2. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
3. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
Logical Format (only when initial is set up)

1. Touch [Logical Format].
2. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
3. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
✽ Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it.
12.12.15 Memory/HDD State

A. Use
• To display the condition and amount of the memory and hard disk.
B. Procedure
• When the encryption board is mounted, the machine automatically recognizes it and dis-
plays [Set].

12.12.16 Color Regist

A. Use
• To check each of C, M, and Y for color shift amount.
• The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjustment
has been completed.
• To display the results of skew adjustment.
B. Procedure
• For each of C, M, and Y, the color shift amount (in X and Y directions) at two locations
(one at the front and the other in the rear) and the difference in color shift amount
between the front and rear (X and Y directions) are displayed.
• Display unit: dots
• Individual color shifts of C, M, and Y are based on K and their amounts are displayed.
• For details of skew adjustment, see the following.
See P.477
12.12.17 IU Lot No.

A. Use
• To display the 10-digit lot number for each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow IUs.
• To display the 10-digit lot number for developing unit/K.
• The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each unit.
B. Procedure
• The lot number is displayed even with the front door opened; however, the display is
blank, since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the main power switch is
turned ON with the front door open. Nonetheless, the lot number will be displayed when
the front door is closed.

(The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the front door is closed.)
12.12.18 Adjustment Data List

A. Use
• To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main body.
• Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main body.

12.13 Test Mode

• To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of
test pattern. It also tests the printing operation in running mode, as well as the fax trans-
mission.
• The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of tray 2, tray 3, tray 4,
and tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for printing.
12.13.1 Procedure for test pattern output

1. Touch [Test Mode] to display the test mode menu.
2. Touch the desired test pattern key.
3. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key.
12.13.2 Gradation Pattern

A. Use
• To produce a gradation pattern.
• Used for checking gradation reproducibility.
<Test pattern>
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Cyan
A0P0F3C518DA
B. Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).
• Select FEET or “HYPER”.
• Select”1-Sided”, 2-Side1 or 2-Side2.
2-Side1: The same pattern is printed on both front and back sides.
2-Side2: The front side is blank and the pattern is printed on the back side.
• Select “Gradation”, Resolution or Error diffusion if HYPER has been selected.
• Select “12 Gradations”, 24 Gradations or 256 Gradations.
• Select the color mode.
“Cyan”, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), CMYK, 8Color, 4Color, Black (1PC)
Black (4PC): Uses four colors.
Black (1PC): Uses one color of black.
NOTE
• When 24 Gradations or 256 Gradations is selected, [8 Color] or [4 Color] is not
selectable in color mode.

12.13.3 Halftone Pattern

A. Use
• To produce a solid halftone pattern.
• Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise.
<Test pattern>
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Cyan
Density: 128
A0P0F3C519DA
B. Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Select FEET or “HYPER.”
“Cyan”, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), Red, Green, Blue, CMYK, 3 Color,
4 Color, Black (1PC), MIX
• Select a printable area from [Full Bleed] or [Front Half].
NOTE
• [Front Half] is selectable only for one-side printing.
• Type the density level (0 to “255”).

12.13.4 Lattice Pattern

A. Use
• To produce a lattice pattern.
• Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density.
• A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a
solid background.
<Test pattern>
SINGLE
FEET
Cyan
CD Width: 5
FD Width: 5
Density: 255
Normal
A0P0F3C520DA
B. Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Select “FEET” or HYPER.
• Select Gradation or Resolution. (Only select HYPER)
“Cyan”, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), Red, Green, Blue, CMYK, 3 Color,
4 Color, Black (1PC)
• Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots).
• Select “Normal” or Reverse.

12.13.5 Solid Pattern

A. Use
• To produce each of the C, M, Y, and K solid patterns.
• Used for checking reproducibility of image density.
<Test pattern>
K SINGLE
Y
HYPER
Gradation
Density: 255
M
C
A0P0F3C521DA
B. Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
12.13.6 Color Sample

A. Use
• To produce a color sample.
• Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors.
<Test pattern>
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
A0P0F3C522DA
B. Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Produce 12-gradation-level patches of C, M, Y, K, R, G, and B, and a patch of each of the
12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected.

12.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern

A. Use
• To produce an 8-color solid pattern.
• Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color.
<Test pattern>
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Density: 255
A0P0F3C523DA
B. Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
12.13.8 CMM pattern

A. Use
• To produce a CMM (Color Management Module) pattern.
• Used to check color difference depending on the places where output is made.
<Test pattern>
Error diffusion
270 degrees
A0P0F3C524DA
B. Procedure
• # of Print is always “1”.
• Select “Error diffusion”, Gradation, or Resolution.
• Select an angle from among “0 degrees”, 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees.

12.13.9 Running Mode

A. Use
• To test the printing operation in running mode.
• Use to check the printing operation in running mode from each paper source.
B. Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] o [Running Mode].
3. Touch [Select Tray] and select the paper feed tray to be tested.
4. Touch [Paper Kind] and select a paper type.
5. Press the Start key to start the running mode.
6. Pressing the Stop key will stop operation.
12.13.10 Fax Test


12.14 ADF
12.14.1 Original Stop Position
<Use>
• To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF
modes.
• When the result is Unable in the automatic adjustment of the original stop position.
<Procedure>
NOTE
• Before performing this adjustment, the feed zoom adjustment needs to be com-
plete.
See P.595
(1) Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side / Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side
B
A0P0F3C601DA
1. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
NOTE
3. Check that the difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample falls

5. Touch [ADF] o [Original Stop Position].
6. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side] or [Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side].
7. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the + value.
If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the - value.
8. Touch [END].
9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

(2) Main Scanning (Front) / Main Scanning (Back)
A0P0F3C600DA
1. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
NOTE
3. Check that the difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample falls

5. Touch [ADF] o [Original Stop Position].
6. Touch [Main Scanning (Front)] or [Main Scanning (Back)].
7. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
If the difference in the widths of A is greater than the specifications, enter the + value.
If the difference in the widths of A is smaller than the specifications, enter the - value.
8. Touch [END].
11. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of A falls
12.14.2 Registration Loop Adj.

<Use>
• To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the registration rollers.
• When an original misfeed or skew occurs.
<Procedure>
The default setting is 0.
Adjustable range: -5 mm to + 5 mm (in 1-mm increments)

2. Touch [ADF] o [Registration Loop Adj].
3. Select either [1-Side] or [Second Side] for the adjustment.
4. Press the clear key and change the setting value using the 10-key pad. (Press the [+/-]
key to change the +/- code.)
The amount of loop increases by the amount of positive (+) value and decreases by the
amount of negative (-) value.
5. Touch [END].

12.14.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment

A. Use
• To automatically adjust the read position for the Sub Scanning Direction.
• To check skew feed.
B. Procedure
(1) Sub Scanning Direction 1-SIde
2. Touch [ADF] o [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
3. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 1-SIde].
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
7. Touch [END].
NOTE
If the result is Unable:
• Check and correct the skew of the document.
See P.585
(2) Sub Scanning Direction 2-SIde
3. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 2-SIde].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing
upward).
7. Touch [END].
NOTE
See P.585

(3) Main Scanning (Front)

3. Touch [Main Scanning (Front)].
7. Touch [END].
NOTE
See P.585
(4) Main Scanning (Back)

3. Touch [Main Scanning (Back)].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing
upward.).
7. Touch [END].
NOTE
See P.585

12.14.4 Paper Passage

A. Use
• To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes.
• Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document mis-
feed occurs.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [ADF] o [Paper Passage].
3. Select a paper passage mode to be tested from [1-Sided No Detect], [1-Sided Mixed
Org.], [2-Sided], or [AMS Mixed Org.].
4. Set the original in the feed tray.
5. The Start key changes from orange to blue.
6. Press the Start key. The operation starts.
NOTE
• After starting the operation by pressing the Start key, if the Start key is pressed
during the operation, the operation will be suspended. Then, if the Start key is
pressed again during the suspension, the operation will be resumed.
• If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation, the test will be forced to end.
• If there is no Original set in the feed Tray, the Start key will not work.
• All Originals set in the feed Tray are passed through. Upon the completion of all
Originals passed through, the Paper Through Test ends.

12.14.5 Sensor Check

A. Use
• To check sensors on the paper path.
• When a document misfeed occurs.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [ADF] o [Sensor Check].
3. Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like, and check the screen display.
(Paper detected: 1, No paper detected: 0)
C. Sensor check screen

• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ-
ual main unit.
A0P0F3E609DA
D. Sensor check list
Operation characteristics/
Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name panel display
1 0
PS1 Feed Open&Shut Feed open/close sensor Open Close
PS2 Read Open&Shut Read open/close sensor Open Close
Paper Paper not
PS3 Regist Registration sensor present present
(Blocked) (Unblocked)
Paper Paper not
PS4 After Separate After separate sensor present present
(Unblocked) (Blocked)
Paper Paper not
PS5 Eject Exit sensor present present
Pressure Retraction
PS6 Read Roller Read roller sensor
Pressure Retraction
PS7 Reverse Roller Reverse roller sensor

Operation characteristics/
Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name panel display
1 0
RS201 DF Open Original cover sensor Open Close
Paper Paper not
PS8 Reverse Regist Reverse registration sensor present present
Paper Paper not
PS9 Before Read Before read sensor present present
Document width detection variable
VR1 Restriction Analog value
resistor
Paper Paper not
PS10 Length Sensor1 Length sensor/1
present present
PS11 Length Sensor2 Length sensor/2 Blocked Unblocked
Paper Paper not
PS12 Length Sensor3 Length sensor/3
present present
Paper Paper not
Length Sensor4
present present
At home Out of home
PS203 Glass Home Pos. Glass home sensor
Paper Paper not
PS14 Empty Empty sensor
present present
PS16 Lift Up Lower Lift up lower sensor Unblocked Blocked
PS15 Lift Up Upper Lift up upper sensor Blocked Unblocked
Paper Paper not
PS19 Consolidation1 Consolidation/1
present present
Paper Paper not
present present
Paper Paper not
present present
Out of
PS20 Original Set Original set sensor In position
position

12.14.6 Original Tray Width

A. Use
• To set the values of maximum (A3 position) and minimum (B6 position) widths on the
document width detection variable resistor.
• When an original misfeed occurs.
• When an original size detection error occurs.
• When the document width detection variable resistor has been replaced.
• When the EEPROM has been replaced.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [ADF] o [Original Tray Width].
3. Widen the width across the edge
[1] guides [1] by sliding them to the “A3”
position.
A0HTF2C037DA
4. Touch [Max. Width].


6. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed.
7. Narrow the width across the edge
[1] guides [1] by sliding them to the “B6”
position.
A0HTF2C038DA
8. Touch [Min. Width].

10. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed.
11. Touch [END].
NOTE
If the result is NG:
• Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection variable resistor,
wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the DFCB.

12.14.7 Read Pos Adj

A. Use
• To adjust the original read position.
• When the first/second carriage, the scanner wire, the scanner assy, the original glass
moving unit, and/or the glass step sheet have been replaced.
B. Procedure
(1) Auto Adjust
2. Touch [ADF] o [Read Pos Adj].
3. Touch [Auto Adjust].
4. Open the ADF.
5. Place the ADF reading chart [1] so
that a triangular mark may become
the original glass side (downward)
and the pointed tip of the triangle
points toward the black sheet on the
left side.
NOTE
• Be sure that the ADF reading chart
is in position.
• Keep the automatic document
feeder open while making the
adjustment.
[1]
A01HF3C003DA
7. Make sure that the result is OK.

8. Touch [END].
NOTE
• Check that the chart is in the correct place.
• Make the manual adjustment on the [Read Pos Adj] screen.
See P.593

(2) Read Pos Adj

B
A0P0F3C601DA
Adjustment range: -64 mm to +64 mm (1 step: 1 mm)

4. Touch [ADF] o [Read Pos Adj].
5. Touch [Read Pos Adj].
6. Enter the value using the [-]/[+] keys.
If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the - value.
If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the + value.
7. Touch [END].

12.14.8 Feed Zoom

A. Use
• To adjust the feed zoom of ADF in the feeding direction.
B. Procedure
(1) Auto Adjust
2. Touch [ADF] o [Feed Zoom].
3. Touch [Auto Adjust].
7. Touch [END].
(2) Orig. Feed Zoom Ad
c A0P0F3C603DA
Specification C: 0 ± 1.0 mm
Adjustment range: -2.00% to +2.00% (1 step: 0.1%)

4. Touch [ADF] o [Feed Zoom].
5. Touch [Orig. Feed Zoom Ad].
6. Enter the value using the [-]/[+] keys.
If the difference in the widths of C is greater than the specifications, enter the - value.
If the difference in the widths of C is smaller than the specifications, enter the + value.
7. Touch [END].
10. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of C falls

12.14.9 Scanning Light Adjustment

A. Use
• To adjust the scanning light of ADF.
• When the original glass moving unit has been replaced.
• Used for adjusting the difference in the scanning lights between scanning from the origi-
nal glass and scanning from the ADF original glass.
B. Procedure
Adjustable range: -4 to + 4 (1 step)

2. Touch [ADF] o [Scanning Light Adjustment].
3. Select a color by pressing [Red], [Green], or [Blue].
4. Press the value using the [+]/[-] key.
NOTE
• It is recommended that the scanning light adjustment should be made by the same
steps for all the three colors of red, green, and blue.
5. Touch [END].
12.14.10 Mixed original Size adjustment

A. Use
• To adjust paper length detection accuracy used during paper feed in ADF mixed original
mode.
• To set the threshold for each size detection based on the length detected when feeding
standard sizes (large and small sizes).
B. Procedure
2. Touch [ADF] o [Mixed original Size adjustment].
6. Touch [END].
12.15 FAX

12.16 Finisher
12.16.1 FS-FN adjustment - Center Staple Position
A. Use
tion.
tion.
B. Procedure
A11PF3C500DA
NOTE
• After [Half-Fold Position] adjustment, make this [Center Staple Position] adjust-
ment.
1. Place five sheets of originals on the ADF.

2. Make a set of copy in the saddle stitching mode.
3. Check the amount of horizontal deviation (A) between the staple and the half fold posi-
tions on the set of copy.

6. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Center Staple Position].
7. Touch the paper size where staple position is adjusted.
8. Look at the copy and adjust the staple position with the [+]/[-] key.
A11PF3C501DA
9. Press the Reset key.


12.16.2 FS-FN adjustment - Half-Fold Position

A. Use
• Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing.
B. Procedure
Exit direction
A11PF3C502DA

2. Make a copy in the folding mode.
3. Fold the copies along the crease.
4. Measure the amount of deviation (A).
7. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Half-Fold Position].
8. Touch the paper size where half-fold position is adjusted.
9. Look at the copy and adjust the half-fold position with the [+]/[-] key.
A11PF3C503DA


12.16.3 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Vertical Position

A. Use
• Adjusts the vertical position of the punch holes.
B. Procedure
A A2
A
A A A1
A
A A2
A11TF3C510DA

2. Make an adjustment so that 1/2 of the length A is within the following standard range.
Specifications:
2-4 hole: A=80 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between
holes.), 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm

4. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch Vertical Position].
5. Touch the paper size where punch vertical position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch vertical position with the [+]/[-] key.
To move the hole position upward: Enter the value of [+]
To move the hole position downward: Enter the value of [-]
A11TF3C501DA


12.16.4 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Horizontal Position

A. Use
• To change the horizontal position of the punch holes.
B. Procedure
B B B
A11TF3C511DA

<For PK-516>
Specification B: 9.5 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm (2-4 hole), 10.5 mm (SWE4 hole)
<For PK-517>
Specification B: 9.5 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-4 hole),
10.5 mm ± 1.0 mm (SWE4 hole)

4. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch Horizontal Position].

5. <For PK-516>
Touch the paper size where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
<For PK-517>
Touch the paper type where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+]/[-] key.
To make width B greater : Enter the value of [+]
To make width a smaller : Enter the value of [-]
A11TF3C503DA


12.16.5 FS-FN adjustment - Punch edge detection

A. Use
• Adjusts the sensitivity (light intensity) of the PK punch front sensor of the punch kit.
• This adjustment is made at the time of setup.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch edge detection].
3. Touch Start key.
NOTE
• When NG appears, check whether the punch kit is properly installed.

12.16.6 FS-FN adjustment - Punch vertical position (Z-fold)

A. Use
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the sub-scanning direction when ZU is in use.
B. Procedure
A
A
A A
A
A
A109F3C501DA

2. Make an adjustment so that the width A is within the following range.
Standard value
• It is possible to adjust the A dimension of half of the top and bottom by ± 0.5 mm from the
standard value.
• It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.
A Top and bottom center gap

2-4 hole 80 ± 0.5
2-3 hole (2 hole) 70 ± 0.5 Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
2-3 hole (3 hole) 108 ± 0.5
Setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm (1step = 0.1 mm)

4. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch vertical position (Z-fold)].
To make width A greater: Enter the Value of [+]
To make width A smaller: Enter the Value of [-]
NOTE
6. Touch [OK] twice.

12.16.7 FS-FN adjustment - Punch horizontal position (Z-fold)

A. Use
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the main scanning direction when ZU is in use.
B. Procedure
B B B
A109F3C502DA

Standard value: B = 12.0 mm


4. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch horizontal position (Z-fold)].
5. Make the setting using [+] or [-].
To make width B greater: Enter the Value of [+]
To make width B smaller: Enter the Value of [-]
12.16.8 FS-FN adjustment - Punch regist adj. (Z-fold)

A. Use
• Adjust the size of the punch resist loop that is applied when ZU operates.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch regist adj. (Z-fold)].


12.16.9 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Regist Loop Size (Body)

A. Use
• Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch Regist Loop Size (Body)].
3. Touch the paper size where punch regist loop size is adjusted.

12.16.10 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Resist Loop Size (PI)

A. Use
• To adjust the loop size used for punch registration in the post inserter upper and lower
trays.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch Regist Loop Size (PI)].
3. Touch [Upper] or [Lower].
4. Select a type of paper where adjustment is made.


12.16.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position

FS-FN adjustment - 2nd Z-Fold Position
A. Use
• To adjust the positions of the 1st Z-fold and 2nd Z-fold for the Z-fold mode.
<Procedure>
Length of the first fold

Position of the first fold
Position of the second fold Length of the second fold
A109F3C500DA
1. Make copies in the Z-fold mode.

2. Make an adjustment so that the width a is within the following range.
Length of 1st fold Length a Length L

11 x 17 108 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 215 mm
A3 105 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 209 mm
B4 91 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 181 mm
8.5 x 14 - - Less than 241.7 mm
8K 98 mm 4.0 ± 2.0 mm Less than 194 mm
NOTE
• Length of the 1st fold is for standard value.
• The adjustable range for B4 size is only between -2.0 mm and +2.0 mm.
• 8.5 X 14 is available for only an half fold.

4. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [1st Z-Fold Position] or [2nd Z-Fold Position].
To increase the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a negative value with [-] key.
To decrease the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a positive value with [+] key.
NOTE
9. Make copies in the Z-fold mode and check for possible deviation from the specified 1st
and 2nd Z-fold positions.

12.16.12 FS-FN adjustment - Tri-Fold Position

A. Use
• Use this adjustment to adjust tri-fold position in tri-fold printing.
B. Procedure
c
a
b A11RF3C500DA
1. Make a copy sample in the tri-folding mode.

2. Check that the tri-fold positions (a, b, c) on the copy are within the specified range.
Standard value
Folding position Standard
A4S 8.5 X 11A 16KS
a 95mm 89.4mm 88mm
b 101mm 95mm 91mm ±2mm
c 101mm 95mm 91mm

4. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Tri-Fold Position].
5. Touch the paper size where tri-fold position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the tri-fold position with the [+]/[-] key.
To make width (a) greater : Enter the value of [+]
To make width (a) smaller : Enter the value of [-]
10. Make a copy again and check the 1st fold width “a”.
NOTE
• If the 2nd fold width b is not within the specified range, perform mechanical
adjustment.
See P.20 of the SD-508 service manual.

12.16.13 FS-FN adjustment - Center-staple pitch adjustment

A. Use
• Adjust the interval between two staples in saddle stitching.
B. Procedure
A
A
A11RF3C501DA

2. Make a set of copy in the two position saddle stitching mode.
3. Measure the interval (A) between the two staples on the copy.
Specification: Paper width of less than 245.3 mm: 42.5 mm ± 3.0 mm

Paper width of 245.3 mm or more: 60.0 mm ± 3.0 mm
Adjustment range: -38.0 mm to +3.0 mm (1 step: 1 mm)
5. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Center-staple pitch adjustment].
6. Touch the paper size where saddle stitching pitch is adjusted.
7. Set and adjust a value with the [+]/[-] key.
To make width (A) greater : Enter the value of [+]
To make width (A) smaller : Enter the value of [-]
11. Make a copy again and check the interval between the staples.
12.16.14 FS-FN adjustment - PI Size Detection

A. Use
• To specify paper sizes that the post inserter detects.
• To set a paper size with which size detection is made when a paper having a similar size
is placed on the feeder.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [PI Size Detection].
3. Touch [Mode 1].
4. Select a desired paper size with which size detection is made.
5. Make the same setting in [Mode 2] to [Mode 6].

12.16.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment

A. Use
• To make automatic post inserter size detection adjustments separately in each of the
upper and lower trays.
• Make this adjustment at the time of setup or when the post inserter cannot make proper
size detection.
• Make this adjustment after performing PI displacement adjustment.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Post Inserter Adjustment].
3. Touch [Upper Tray].
4. Place A4S paper on the upper tray and touch [A4 ].
5. Touch Start key.
7. Touch [Lower Tray].
8. Place A4S paper on the lower tray and touch [A4 ].
9. Touch Start key.
12.16.16 FS-FN adjustment - finisher check

A. Use
• Use this adjustment to check finisher's operation.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [finisher check].
3. Touch [1], [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6] to select a mode.
4. Press the Start key to start finisher operation.
5. Press the Stop key to stop ongoing finisher operation.

C. Finisher check list (FS-526/SD-508/PK-516/PI-505/ZU-606)
Mode
Finisher check1 M1 (1st Transport M) Forward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed
M1 (1st Transport M) Backward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed
M2 (2nd Transport M) Forward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed
M2 (2nd Transport M) Backward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed
M5/Tray Up/Down M: Move to HP
M5/Tray Up/Down M: Move to Lower Limit
M5/Tray Up/Down M: Small No. of Paper Tray Up/Down in Staple Mode
M17/Stacker Accessory Plate Movement M: HP Search
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Move to HP
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Move to Standby Position
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Alignment Operation
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Return to Standby Position
M4/Output Roller Drive M: Forward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed
M34/Center Staple & Fold Output M: Fwd Rotation 50mm/s Linear Sp.
Finisher check2 M22/Center Staple & Fold Leading Edge Stopper M: HP Search
M6/Paper Output-Driven Roller Position Movement M: HP Search
M6/Paper Output-Driven Roller Position Movement M: Large Opening
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Back at 2 Positions
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Front at 2 Positions
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Front at 1 Position
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Initial
2-Staple Stapler Unit: Implement Staple Operation
M23/Center Staple & Fold Stapler Movement M: Initial
Center Staple & Fold Stapler Unit: Implement Staple Operation
M23/Center Staple & Fold Stapler Move. M: A3 Paper Binding Pos.
M26/Cent. Staple&Fold Trail Edge Paddle Up/Down Move. M: HP Search
M27/Cent. Staple&Fold Center Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search
M28/Cent. Staple&Fold Lead. Edge Paddle Up/Down Move. M: HP Search
Finisher check3 M10/Transport to Stacker Inlet M: 667mm/s
M20 & M21/Center Staple & Fold Alignment M F/R: HP Search
M19/rear stopper move M :HP
M19/rear stopper move M :standby position 1
M19/rear stopper move M :standby position 2
M32/Half-Fold Knife Drive M: Implement 1-Cycle
M33/Half-Fold Transport M: High-Speed Forward Rotation
SD2: Bypass Path Switching Gate Solenoid: ON
SD5: DM Gate Solenoid: ON
SD1: Center Staple & Fold Path Switching Gate Solenoid: ON
SD4: Switchback Switching Gate Solenoid: ON
SD6/Leading Edge Nip Solenoid: ON
M3 (Bypass Trans./Sub Tray Paper Output M) Fwd Rotation 667mm/s

Mode
Finisher check3 M15: Trail Edge Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search
Finisher check4 M18: Rewind Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search
M16: Rewind Paddle Rotation M: Forward Rotation (Stack)
M31/Cent. Staple&Fold Lead. Edge Paddle Rota. M: Fwd Rota. (Stack)
M30/Cent. Staple&Fold Center Paddle Rotation M: Fwd Rota. (Stack)
M29/Cent. Staple&Fold Trail Edge Paddle Rotation M: Fwd Rotation
M302/Oscillating Drive M: HP Search
M302/Oscillating Drive M: Edge Sensor Control
M301/Punch Drive M: HP Search
M301/Punch Drive M: Execute Punch (2-Hole)
M301/Punch Drive M: Execute Punch (3- or 4-Hole)
M201 transportation M F rotation (1000mm/s)
RU Fan Motor Drive
Two punch 2/3(4) change motor hole positional movement
Punch 2/3(4) change motor 3(4) hole position movement
Finisher check5 Resist motor/transportation motor drive beginning
Pantibaipassorad turning ON (Punch bypass solenoid turning ON)
Punch clutch ON
Punch rubbish transportation motor transportation beginning
Fan motor drive beginning
Punch drive motor punch operation execution
Punch movement motor HP search

SD3: subtray and 3rd tray switch gate solenoid: on
SD10/3rd tray switch gate solenoid: on
SD401/3rd tray switch gate solenoid: on
M203(Post Inserter Transport.) 667mm/s Line Velocity
MC201 (upper paper feed clutch)
MC202 (lower paper feed clutch) ON
M201 (Upper rise descent) Down (HP Search)
Finisher check6 M201 (Upper rise descent) Up
M202 (Lower rise descent) Down (HP Search)
M202 (Lower rise descent) Up
SD202 (upper row move solenoid) ON
SD203 (the lower move solenoid) ON
MC203 (resist transportation clutch) ON
One Z fold stopper motor HP Search
Two Z fold stopper motor HP Search
Z-Fold Gate Solenoid ON

D. Finisher check list (FS-527/SD-509)
NOTE
panel.
Mode
Finisher check1 Stapler Movement
Alignment Moving
Tray up/down operation
FD Stopper Operation
Punch Drive Standard Holes
Punch Drive MC (2 Holed)
Tray 1 Exit Roller open/Close
Accommodation Roller Open/Close
2-Side Path Switch
Conveyance Drive
Tray 2 Path Switch
Upper/Lower Path Switch
Paddle Operation
Shift Operation
Finisher check2 Saddle Stapler Operation
Center fold knife operation
Center staple Transport Motor Drive
Edge Stopper Operation
Center Staple Paddle Operation
12.16.17 FS-FN adjustment - Load Data

A. Use
• Register or call values adjusted for the finisher when it was installed at the customer site.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Load Data].
3. Select a mode from the following.
• Present adjusted value enrollment: Registers values adjusted for the finisher at the
installation.
• Enrollment lingua set point call: Calls values adjusted for the finisher at the installation.
5. Check that [OK] is displayed.
6. Touch [END].
8. Turn OFF the main power switch. Then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main
power switch.

12.16.18 FS-FN adjustment - Side position adjustment

A. Use
• To fine adjust the horizontal width of the aligning plate.
• Use this feature to fine adjust the aligning plate that aligns ejected paper.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Side position adjustment].
3. Select a mode from the following.
The default setting is “0.0mm”.

4. Set and adjust a value with the [+]/[-] key.

12.16.19 FS-FN adjustment - Punch unit edge detection

A. Use
• To adjust sensitivity (intensity) of the paper size detect board (PSDTB) of the punch unit
of ZU.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [FS-FN adjustment] o [Punch unit edge detection].

4. Check that [OK] is displayed.
NOTE
• If the [NG] appears, check the install condition again.

12.16.20 Staple Option Setting

A. Use
• Specify the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled together.
• Only when FS-527 is installed, it is possible to independently set the maximum for each
paper type.
• To change the maximum that can be stapled together.
B. Procedure
<For FS-526>
Default setting: “100 Piece”. Large size staple limit restriction: “Do not do.”
Setting range: [2 to 100]. Large size staple limit restriction: [-20 pieces] or [Do not do.]
<For FS-527>
Default setting: Plain Paper “100 Piece”. Thick1 “30 Piece”. Thick1+ “22 Piece”.
Thick2 “22 Piece”. Large size staple limit restriction: “Do not do.”
Setting range: Plain Paper [2 to 50]. Thick1 [2 to 30]. Thick1+ [2 to 15]. Thaick2 [2 to 15].
Large size staple limit restriction: [-20 pieces] or [Do not do.]
2. Touch [Finisher] o [Staple Option Setting].
3. Enter a desirable maximum number with the 10-key pad.
4. Touch [END].
power switch.
NOTE
• If mixed originals includes one or more large size ones (A3/11 x 17 or more), the
maximum that can be stapled together is subject to the setting of large size staple
limit restriction.
• If large size staple limit restriction is set to [-20 pieces] and the maximum number
of sheets to be stapled together less 20 is 2 or less, then the restricted number of
sheets as the maximum is 2.
• When FS-526 is installed and the staples for 50 sheets are detected, 50 sheets
becomes the upper limit even though the setting of the upper limit up to which
sheets can be stapled exceeds 50 sheets.
12.16.21 Punch Option Setting

A. Use
• Specifies punch settings depending on the optional punch kit attached to the finisher.
• An individual punch setting needs to be made according to the type of the punch option.
• This setting is necessary when ZU-606 is installed.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [Punch Option Setting].
3. Touch [PK-516] or [PK-517].
4. Touch [2-Holes/3-Holes], [2-Holes/4-Holes], [EU4 holes] or [SWE4 holes].
5. When ZU-606 is installed, touch [ZU-606].
6. Touch [decision].
7. Touch [END].
power switch.

12.16.22 Fold power of pages restrict

A. Use
• Imposes restriction on the number of sheets to be folded in each of different folding
modes.
• This function is available only when SD-508 or ZU-606 is installed.
• To change the maximum number of sheets to be folded in each of different folding
modes.
B. Procedure
[Center Fold]
• Default setting: “3 Piece”.
• Setting range: 1 to 3 Piece
[Center Staple]
• Setting range: 2 to 20 Piece
[three fold]
• Setting range: 1 to 3 Piece.
[z fold/staple using together]

• Setting range: 2 to 10 Piece.
[z fold]
• Setting range: 50 pieces, 40 pieces, 30 pieces, 20 pieces.

2. Touch [Finisher] o [Fold power of pages restrict].
3. Select a folding mode where the maximum is restricted and enter a desirable maximum
number with the 10-key pad.
4. Touch [END].
6. Turn OFF the main power switch. then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main
power switch.
12.16.23 Job Separator

A. Use
• Use this adjustment to check job separator operation.
B. Procedure
2. Touch [Finisher] o [Job Separator].
3. Touch [Exit Motor Drive], [Route Change Motor Drive], [Shift Motor Drive] or [Exit Roller
Retraction].
4. Touch the Start key to start the operation check.
5. Touch the Stop key to stop the ongoing operation check.

12.17 Internet ISW

• By using this setting, the firmware stored in the server can be downloaded over internet
for upgrading.
• For details for upgrading the firmware, refer to “Firmware upgrade” in the Maintenance
section.
See P.231
12.17.1 Internet ISW Set

A. Use
• To set whether or not to enable each setting for Internet ISW.
• To use when upgrading the firmware by Internet ISW.
• Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to “ON”.
NOTE
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, this setting will automatically be set to
“OFF” and cannot be changed.
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”
12.17.2 HTTP Setting

• It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”.
12.17.3 HTTP Setting-Data Input Setting
A. Use
• To set whether or not to enable downloading using the HTTP protocol.
• To use when accessing the server using the HTTP protocol.
• Setting on the proxy server will be valid when this setting is “ON”.
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”
12.17.4 HTTP Setting-Connect Proxy

A. Use
• To set whether or not to connect via proxy server when accessing the server.
• To use when accessing the server via proxy server.
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”

12.17.5 HTTP Setting-Proxy Server

A. Use
• To set the address and the port number for the proxy server.
• To use when accessing the server via proxy server.
B. Procedure
<Server Address>
• Enter an address using IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format.
<Port Number>
• Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
(The default setting is 80)
12.17.6 HTTP Setting-Proxy Authentication

A. Use
• To set the login name or password when authentication is necessary for accessing the
proxy server.
• To use when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server.
B. Procedure
<Authentication>
ON “OFF”
<Log-in Name>
• Enter the login name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
<Password>
• Enter the password (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
12.17.7 HTTP Setting-Connection Time-Out

A. Use
• To set the time for the timeout for accessing the server.
B. Procedure
30 to 300 sec.
12.17.8 FTP Setting

• It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”.
12.17.9 FTP Setting-Data Input Setting

A. Use
• To set whether or not to enable downloading using FTP protocol.
• To use when accessing the server with FTP protocol.
• Setting this to “ON” will enable the proxy server setting.
B. Procedure
“ON” OFF

12.17.10 FTP Setting-Connect Proxy

A. Use
• To set whether or not to access the server via proxy server.
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”
12.17.11 FTP Setting-Proxy Server

A. Use
• To set the address and the port No. of the proxy server.
B. Procedure
<Server Address>
• Enter an address using IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format.
<Port Number>
12.17.12 FTP Setting-Connection Setting

A. Use
• To set the port No. and the time for timeout when accessing the FTP server, and also to
set whether or not to enable PASV mode.
• To use when accessing the FTP server.
• To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) mode (FTP server side will inform the
connection port before connecting).
B. Procedure
<Port Number>
<Connection Time Out>

• Enter the value between 1 and 60 (min.) using the 10-key pad.
<PASV Mode>
ON “OFF”
12.17.13 Forwarding Access Setting-User ID

A. Use
• To register the user ID for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored.
B. Procedure
1. Select [User ID].
2. Enter the user ID (up to 64 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

12.17.14 Forwarding Access Setting-Password

A. Use
• To register the password for accessing the program server where firmware is to be
stored.
B. Procedure
1. Select [Password].
2. Enter the password (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
12.17.15 Forwarding Access Setting-URL

A. Use
• To register the address and directory of the program server where the firmware is to be
stored in URL.
B. Procedure
1. Select [URL].
2. Enter the URL (up to 256 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
NOTE
• Enter the URL which format suits the protocol to be used.
When connecting to http http:// (Host name or IP address)/ directory name or
https:// (Host name or IP address)/directory name.
When connecting to ftp ftp:// (Host name or IP address) / directory name.
12.17.16 Forwarding Access Setting-FileName

A. Use
• To register the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded.
B. Procedure
1. Select [FileName].
2. Enter the file name (up to 63 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
12.17.17 Download
A. Use
• Access the program server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the firm-
ware.
• To use when updating the firmware via network.
B. Procedure
1. Select [Download].
2. Touch [ISW Start] to start downloading the firmware.
3. The message to show the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting and
transferring data.
NOTE
• When it failed to connect to the program server, or failed to download, the error
code and the message will be displayed. Check the cause of the error by the error
code, and follow the message for resetting.
Refer to “Error cord list” for the error codes.
See P.242
• When the firmware is normally upgraded, the main body will automatically be restarted to
complete the Internet ISW.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 13. ENHANCED SECURITY
13. ENHANCED SECURITY

13.1 List of Enhanced Security

Enhanced Security CE Password P.620
Administrator Password P.620
Administrator Feature Level P.621
CE Authentication P.621
IU Life Stop Setting P.622
NVRAM Data Backup P.622
Operation Ban release time P.622
Administrator unlocking P.623
Engine FW DipSW P.623
Stop o 0o Clear
3. Enhanced Security menu will appear.
A0P0F3E556DA

• Touch the [Exit].

13. ENHANCED SECURITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
13.3 Enhanced Security

13.3.1 CE Password
A. Use
• To set and change the CE password.
B. Procedure
• Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
• The initial setting is “92729272.”
Current Password : Enter the currently using CE password.
New Password : Enter the new CE password.
Re-Input Password : Enter the new CE password again.
NOTE
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with
the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous one can-
not be changed.
• NEVER forget the CE password. When forgetting the CE password, call responsi-
ble person of KMBT.
13.3.2 Administrator Password

A. Use
• To set and change the administrator password.
• Use this function when the administrator forget the administrator password because a
new password can be set without entering the current administrator password with this.
B. Procedure
• Enter the administrator password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
• The initial setting is “12345678.”
New Password : Enter the new administrator password.
Re-Input Password : Enter the new administrator password again.
NOTE
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with
the same letters, the password which is same as the previous one and the pass-
word of less than eight digits cannot be changed.

13.3.3 Administrator Feature Level

A. Use
• To set which modes to be allowed for the administrator to use in Service Mode.
• Use when allowing the administrator to use some modes in Service Mode.
• The modes allowed for the administrator to use in each setting are as follows.
Administrator settings function Level 1 Level 2

[System Setting] o Printer
Erase Leading Edge
[Expert Setting] Adjustment
Scanner Leading Edge Adjustment
Adjustment Centering
Horizontal Adjustment
Vertical Adjustment
ADF Adjustment Centering
Original Stop Position
Centering Auto Adjustment
Auto Adj. of Stop Position
User paper Settings
[Standard Size Original Glass Original Size Detect
Setting] Foolscap Size Setting
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Prohibit.
Level1 Level2 “Prohibit”
13.3.4 CE Authentication
• It will not be displayed when the following settings are set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Setting] o [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password
Rules].
A. Use
• To determine whether or not to authenticate CE password as entering Service Mode.
• Use when authenticating CE password as entering Service Mode.
NOTE
• For setting the following setting to “ON”, set the CE Authentication to “ON” and
change the initial CE password beforehand.
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Setting] o [Enhanced Security Mode] or
[Password Rules]
B. Procedure
ON “OFF”

13.3.5 IU Life Stop Setting

A. Use
• To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Stop.
“Stop” No Stop
13.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup

A. Use
• To backup NVRAM data in the main body to the flash memory.
• To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unexpect-
edly.
• To backup data manually. It usually makes backup every hour automatically.
• Backup data can be restored by following the specified procedure when the trouble
(CD3XX) occurred.
Refer to “Troubleshooting” for details on restoration procedure.
See P.839
B. Procedure
1. Touch [NVRAM Data Backup].
2. Touch [Start] to start making a backup.
3. Check the message [Backup is completed.], and turn main power switch OFF. Wait for
ten seconds or more and turn main power switch back ON.
13.3.7 Operation Ban release time

A. Use
• To set the time that elapses before the machine releases an access lock that is activated
after the CE password authentication.
• To set the period of time that elapses before the machine releases the access lock,
which aims to prevent the unintentional release of the access lock.
• After the CE password authentication, if the access lock is activated, the lock release
timer starts to operate by input the Stop o 0 o 9 o 3 o 1 o 7 in [Meter Count] o
[Check Details] o [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On.
When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is 1 (minutes).
“1” to 60 (minutes)
NOTE
• When Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON in [Administrator Settings] o [Secu-
rity Settings] o [Enhanced Security Mode], the period of time that can be set in
this setting is 5 minutes or more.

13.3.8 Administrator unlocking

A. Use
• To release an access lock that is activated after an administrator password authentica-
tion.
• To release the access lock with service authority when an administrator password
authentication fails and the access lock is activated.
• When the main power switch is turned OFF and ON or the period of time set in the
Release Time Settings elapses, the machine releases the access lock that is activated
after the administrator password authentication.
In addition to these operations, this setting provides another way to release the access
lock.
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator unlocking].
2. Touch [unlocking] to release an access lock.
3. When [OK] is displayed, touch [OK].
13.3.9 Engine FW DipSW

• It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.59 is set to [01] at
HEX assignment.
A. Use
• To make printer engine settings.
• The following table shows DIP switches that can be set in this machine.
Switch No. Function Ref. page
1 • Not used -
2 • Not used -
3 • New Release Disable mode P.624
4 • Fusing unit alternative temperature control P.625
5
: • Not used -
28
B. Procedure
1. Touch [Engine FW DipSW].
2. Touch the key that corresponds to the switch No. of the function to be set and check the
key is highlighted (ON state) in reverse video.
3. Touch [OK].

C. Details of Each Function

(1) New Release Disable mode
• To enable a unit that is temporarily used for troubleshooting or other purposes to be used
again as a new unit in another machine, New Release Disable mode is provided.
• Applicable units are the following that have the new unit detection feature.
Imaging unit/Y,M,C, Drum unit/K, Developing unit/K
<Procedure>
2. Touch [Service Mode] o [Enhanced Security] o [Engine FW DipSW].
3. Touch [3] and check the key is highlighted (ON state) in reverse video.
4. Touch [OK].
5. Close the lower front door.
By closing the lower front door, the New Release Disable mode takes effect.
Notes when using the New Release Disable mode

<1> Before starting the mode
• Output the list in [Service Mode] o [List Output] to check the information on the
wear-out rate of each unit and keep the Dmax density adjustment value.
Replace units that have reached their life or that are near life with new ones, and
perform New Release.
<2> During the New Release Disable mode
• The New Release Disable mode is subject to the condition that the New Release
Disable mode should not be used for a long period, i.e. duration of printing only
several tens of sheets. Units used in the New Release Disable mode for a long time
cannot be guaranteed as new ones.
• If a unit (imaging unit/Y,M,C or developing unit/K) which has reached its life or for
which a accumulated rotation time excess warning has been issued are replaced
with a new one in the New Release Disable mode, the new unit life is judged as
normal and the accumulated rotation time excess warning is reset.
• In the New Release Disable mode, the drum unit/K life counter is not reset and it
continues to count in a normal manner. If the counter reading becomes close to
the value at which an accumulated rotation time excess warning is issued or
becomes close to the end of life value, the accumulated rotation time excess warn-
ing or the end of life warning can be issued in the New Release Disable mode.
(If the drum unit/K counter should reach the end of life value while temporarily
using a new drum unit/K in the New Release Disable mode, turn OFF the New
Release Disable mode, open and close the lower front door (or turn the main
power switch and sub power switch OFF and ON), and perform New Release in a
normal manner. In this case, the previous drum unit/K, which has been temporarily
removed, cannot be used again.)
• After activating the New Release Disable mode in [Engine FW DipSW], do not turn
OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch or do not let the
machine go into the sleep mode until the work in the New Release mode is com-
pleted.
(In case that the main power switch is turned OFF or the machine goes into the
sleep mode, be sure to open the lower front door and turn the main power switch
ON or activate the machine from the sleep mode. Then turn ON the New Release
Disable mode and close the lower front door.

<3> After finishing work in New Release Disable mode

• When continuing to use the new unit used in the New Release Disable mode in the
same machine, turn OFF the new Release Disable mode and open and close the
lower front door (or turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power
switch) to perform New Release.
• To reinstall the previous unit used in the machine, open the lower front door, turn
OFF the New Release Disable mode, replace the new unit with the previous unit,
and close the lower front door (or turn the main power switch and sub power
switch OFF and ON).
In this case, perform Initialize + Image Stabilization, Gradation Adjustment, and
input of the previous Dmax density adjustment value in service mode. If these
adjustments are not performed, gradation reproducibility cannot be guaranteed.
• After temporarily using a new drum unit/K in the New Release Disable mode,
before reinstalling the previous drum unit/K, be sure to check the reading of the
drum unit/K life counter in [Service Mode] o [Counter] o [Life] to learn that New
Release is not performed on the new drum unit/K, i.e. the counter value have not
decreased.
There is no way to judge whether New Release is performed on the new drum unit/
K or not from the appearance of the unit. Checking the counter reading is neces-
sary to avoid bringing back the drum unit/K on which New Release is performed,
assuming that the drum unit/K remains new.
(2) Fusing unit alternative temperature control

• Condensation and dirt on the lens of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 disable
accurate temperature detection. To prevent this, this machine provides a control system
that detects condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor/1.
• When condensation is detected on the heating roller temperature sensor/1, the heating
roller temperature control depends on the temperature detected by the heating roller
thermistor/1 instead of the heating roller temperature sensor/1. (Alternative temperature
control)
• When a print job is sent during the alternative temperature control, temperature control
depends on this setting.
OFF: Prohibits print during alternative temperature control
ON: Allows print during alternative temperature control
• During alternative temperature control, printing productivity is reduced by 50 %.
<Procedure>
1. Touch [Service Mode] o [Enhanced Security] o [Engine FW DipSW].
2. Touch [4] and check the key is highlighted (ON state) in reverse video.
3. Touch [OK].

14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
14. BILLING SETTING

14.1 List of billing setting

Billing Setting Counter Setting P.627
Management Function Choice P.630
Coverage Rate Clear P.638
License Management Activation *1
Deactivation
Repair
Initialize
Request Code
List
Function List
OpenAPI Authentication Restriction Code P.639
Management Region Code P.639
*1: For details, see the LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105 service manual.

Stop o 9
3. Billing Setting menu will appear.
A0P0F3E557DA

• Touch the [Exit].

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING
14.3 Billing Setting

14.3.1 Counter Setting
A. Use
• To set the counting method for the total counter, size counter and long length paper
counter.
• To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts.)
• Use to change the counting method for the counters.
B. Procedure
(1) Total Counter
Mode 1 : 1 count per 1 copy cycle (Default: Japan)
Mode 2 : Large size is double counts
(Default: US, Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3, Others 4)
NOTE
• The content of this setting is reflected in the count method with the key counter.
• “Others 1” to “Others 4” are setting items in [Marketing Area] available from Ser-
vice Mode.
See P.523
(2) Size Counter

• A3/11 x 17 : When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan direction
and 420 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 399
mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size.
• A3/B4/11 x 17/8 /2 x 14
1 : When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan direction
mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size.
• A3/11 x 17/B4/81/2 x 14/Foolscap : When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan direction
mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size
(However the size in the main scan direction changes
according to the foolscap size setting.)
• Not counted (Default: Japan)

• A3 and 11 x 17 (Default: US)
• A3, B4, 11 x 17, and 81/2 x 14 (Default: Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3, Others 4)
• A3, B4, Foolscap, 11 x 17, 11 x 14, and 81/2 x 14
✽ Count-up table
Print mode 1-Sided 2-Sided

Sizes other than Specified Sizes other than Specified
Size
those specified sizes those specified sizes
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Total 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4
Size 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 2
2-sided Total 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0: No count; 1: 1 count; 2: 2 counts; 3: 3 counts; 4: 4 counts

(3) Long Length Paper Counter Mode

• When printing on the long paper (457.2 mm or over), the counting value will be the total
of the value set by the total counter mode and the value by this setting.
Mode 1 : + 0 count
Mode 2 : + 1 count
Mode 3 : + 2 counts (457.2 to 915.0 mm will be + 1 count)
Mode 4 : + 3 counts (457.2 to 686.0 mm will be + 1 count,
and 686.1 to 915.0 mm will be + 2 count)
(4) Banner Counter Double Count Mode

• To set whether to use normal count or double count when printing long size paper.
• When “ON” is selected, double count is applied to only long size paper.
ON “OFF”
* The count method used when printing long size paper depends on the combination of the
above count mode settings: Settings in Long Length Paper Counter Mode and Banner
Counter Double Count Mode. The following shows details on count methods that are the
combination of each setting.
Long Length Banner Counter

Total Counter Paper Counter Double Count paper size Count
Mode Mode
Mode 1 Mode 1 OFF Normal size 1 count
Long size 1 count
ON Normal size 1 count

Long size 2 counts
Mode 2 OFF Normal size 1 count
Long size 2 counts
Long size 4 counts
Long size 457.3 to 915.0 mm 2 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 3 counts

Long Length Banner Counter

Total Counter Paper Counter Double Count paper size Count
Mode Mode
Mode 2 Mode 1 OFF Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 2 counts
ON Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 4 counts
Mode 2 OFF Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 3 counts
Large size 2 counts
Long size 6 counts
Large size 2 counts
Large size 2 counts
Large size 2 counts
Large size 2 counts

14.3.2 Management Function Choice

• To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted.
Key Counter, Management Device (Data controller), Authentication Device, or Vendor
NOTE
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
• When the setting shows that [Management Device 1], [Management Device 2] or
[Vendor 2] is mounted, the following applications will be invalid.
PC FAX transmission / HDD TWAIN/PS Box Operator / PS Scan Direct / PS Job
Spooler / Fiery: Scan to Box
Also, the following setting will be set to “Disable”.
[Administrator Settings] o [Security Setting] o [Management Function Setting] o
[Network Function Setting]
14.3.3 Management Function Choice-Key Counter IF Vendor

• Not used
14.3.4 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device 1

A. Use
• To set whether or not the authentication device 1 is installed.
• Set when the authentication device 1 (PageACSES) is mounted.
B. Procedure
NOTE
• The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set
“OFF” with [Administrator Settings] o [User Authentication/Account Track] o

[General Setting].
• When the Authentication Device mount setting is set to “mount”, make sure that
the [IP Address Fax] and [Internet Fax] settings are set to “OFF” with [Service
Mode] o [System 2] o [Network Fax Settings].

14.3.5 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device 2

A. Use
• To set whether or not the authentication device 2 is installed.
• Set when the authentication unit (biometric type or card type) is mounted.
Card 1 : Uses IC card authentication system (AU-201)
Card 2 : Uses loadable device card authentication system
Bio1 : Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system (AU-101)
Bio2 : Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system (AU-102)
• When selecting [Bio1], set a film timeout interval.

• When selecting [Bio2], set a film timeout interval, capture trial time and authentication
trial time.
• When selecting [Card 1] or [Card 2], a response timeout interval is displayed.
(The interval is unchangeable.)
• When the setting is set to Card 2, the main power switch must be turned OFF and ON to
let the new setting take effect.
• Selecting Card 2, a loadable device driver allows to install.
B. Procedure
<Authentication Mode>
Card 1 Card 2 Bio1 Bio2
(1) Installing method of the loadable device driver

• The firmware is updated using the USB memory device.
NOTE
• NEVER remove or insert the USB memory device with the machine power turned
ON.
1. Prepare a USB memory device on which the driver data of the loadable device to be
used was written.
2. Turn OFF the main power switch.
3. Remove the screw [1].
4. Loosen the screw [2], and lift up the cover [3] of the USB port.
5. Insert the USB memory device to the USB port [4] for service.
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
A0P0F2C570DA

NOTE
• USB memory must be connected with the main power switch/sub power switch
off.
• When updating the firmware, use the USB port for the service.
It cannot be updated when connected to another USB port.
7. Select [Yes] on the loadable device driver installation screen.
A00JF3C543DA
8. Press the [START] to start installing the driver.

(At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)

9. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been
installed correctly ([Downloading Completed]). Check also the check sum value
([Check Sum ####]) shown on the control panel. (The Start key lights blue.)
11. Remove the USB memory device from the port.
12. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch.

14.3.6 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only

A. Use
• To set whether or not the key counter is installed.
• Set when the key counter is mounted.
• Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the key counter is mounted.
✽ Color Mode
• When [Mode 1] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] o [Counter
setting].
Mode 1: 1 count per 1 print cycle
Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 print cycle
setting] and large size is selected on [Large Size Counter Mode]
setting] and sizes other than large size are selected on [Large Size Counter Mode]
Mode 1: 1 count per 1 print cycle
✽ Message
Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted.
Type 1: Message for key counter
Type 2: Message for card scanning
Type 3: Message for ID management
Type 4: Message for remote SW
✽ Confirmation copy
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
• The default setting is Ban.
License “Ban”
✽ The next job reservation

• Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.
License “Ban”
NOTE
[General Setting].

14.3.7 Management Function Choice-Management Device 1

A. Use
• To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed.
B. Procedure
NOTE
• The setting is available only when user authentication is set “OFF” and account
track is set “Off” or “Account Name + Password” with [Administrator Settings] o
[User Authentication/Account Track] o [General Settings].
14.3.8 Management Function Choice-Management Device 2

A. Use
• To set whether or not the management device 2 is installed.
B. Procedure
✽ Management Setting
• Select the Management Setting Mode
Mode 1: Use contact type device (Logout with ID key is not allowed.)
Mode 2: Use non-contact type device (Logout with ID key is allowed.)
NOTE
• The setting is not available when either “External Server” of user authentication,
“Password Only” of account track, “Do not synchronize” of user authentication
and account track or “Allow” of public user access has been set with [Administra-
tor Settings] o [User Authentication/Account Track] o [General Settings].
14.3.9 Management Function Choice-Vendor 1

• Not used.

14.3.10 Management Function Choice-Vendor 2

A. Use
• To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed.
NOTE
• When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter will
set it to the “Key Counter Mode” and removing it will set it to the “Vendor Mode”.
B. Procedure
• Select color mode and message of key counter.
(Only for key counter, the type of the color mode and message are same after mounting.)
✽ Confirmation copy
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
License “Ban”
✽ The next job reservation

• Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.
License “Ban”
• Select message of vendor.
✽ Message
Type 1: Message for key counter
Type 2: Message for card scanning
Type 3: Message for ID management
NOTE
[General Setting].

NOTE
• Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting
values below. It needs resetting when cancelling the setting in order to set back to
“not mounted” because the setting value will remain.
<When the vendor2 or authentication device 1/2 is mounted>

Setting Item Vendor 2 Authentication Device 1 Authentication Device 2
Default Copy Settings Factory Default
Default Scan/Fax Settings Factory Default
Copy Operating Screen [Yes]
Utility
Fax Active Screen Tx/Rx Display [Yes]

Scan/Fax Settings Default
Direct Input
Tab
Left Panel Display Default [Job List]
Each Function Setting Copy, PC print, Send Data, and Print others will be set to “ON”.
Network Function Usage
OFF
Settings
Administrator Security
Prohibit
Level
Weekly Timer ON/OFF
OFF
Setting
Reset Data After Job will be
Reset Setting
set to “ON”.
When Key 1 is set to My Panel, reset the setting and
Application Key Settings assign Key 1 to [FAX/SCAN]. When Key 2 is set to My
Panel, reset the setting and assign Key 2 to [Copy].
Changing Job Priority, Deleting Other User’s Jobs, Regis-
Restrict Access to Job
tering and Changing Addresses, Changing Zoom Ratio

Settings
will be set to “Restrict”.
External Memory
Save Document and Print Document will be set to “OFF”.
Function Settings
Skip Job Operation
Administrator Settings
All settings be set to “Yes”.

Settings
ID & Print will be set to
ID & Print Settings
“ON”.
Forward TX Setting OFF
Password for Memory RX
Setting is set to the default
Memory RX Setting
value of the administrator
password
PC-Fax RX Setting Restrict
TSI User Box Setting No
Access Setting will be set to
“Restrict” and Authentica- Access Setting will be set to
OpenAPI Setting
tion will be changed to “Restrict”.
“OFF” setting.
IPP Setting will be set to
IPP Setting “OFF”, and Accept IPP job
will be set to “OFF”.
AppleTalk Setting OFF
Scan Setting, Print Setting
SMB Setting
E-mail TX Setting, Scan to
E-mail, E-mail Notification,
E-mail TX (SMTP)
Meter Count Notification will
be set to “Restrict”.

Setting Item Vendor 2 Authentication Device 1 Authentication Device 2

E-mail RX Setting will be
E-mail RX (POP)
set to “OFF”.
Enabling LDAP will be set
LDAP Settings
to “OFF”.
Prefix/Suffix Prefix/Suffix Setting will be

Setting set to “OFF”.
WebDAV Client Settings will
WebDAV Client Settings
be set to “OFF”.
Web Service Settings
Printer setting/Scanner Printer Setting and Scanner setting will be set to “OFF”.
setting
Status Notification Setting All setting items will be set

Notification Item Setting to “OFF”.
Image Log Transfer Set-
tings
[No]
SW No. 63 will be changed

Software Switch Setting
to 01 (HEX).
Service Mode
Management function Confirmation copy will be

choice set to “Ban”.
[System] o [Display Set-
FAX ting] o [Re-Transmission]
<When the key counter IF vendor or management device 1/2 is mounted>

Setting Item Key counter IF Vendor Management Device 1 Management Device 2
Default Copy Settings Factory Default
Default Scan/Fax Settings Factory Default
Copy Operating Screen [Yes]
Utility
Fax Active Screen Tx/Rx Display [Yes]

Scan/Fax Settings Default
Direct Input
Tab
Left Panel Display Default [Job List]
Copy, PC print will be set to Copy will be set to “ON”.
Copy, PC print, Send Data,
“ON”. PC print, Send Data, and
Each Function Setting and Print others will be set
Send Data, Print others will Print others will be set to
to “ON”.
be set to “OFF”. “OFF”.
Network Function Usage
OFF
Settings
Administrator Security
Prohibit
Level
Weekly Timer ON/OFF
OFF
Setting
When Key 1 is set to My
Panel, reset the setting and
assign Key 1 to [FAX/
Application Key Settings SCAN]. When Key 2 is set
to My Panel, reset the set-
ting and assign Key 2 to
[Copy].
Changing Job Priority,
Deleting Other User’s Jobs,
Restrict Access to Job Registering and Changing

Settings Addresses, Changing Zoom
Ratio will be set to
“Restrict”.
External Memory

Function Settings

Setting Item Key counter IF Vendor Management Device 1 Management Device 2

Forward TX Setting OFF
Password for Memory RX
Setting is set to the default
Memory RX Setting
value of the administrator
password
PC-Fax RX Setting Restrict
TSI User Box Setting No
Access Setting will be set to
“Restrict” and Authentica-
OpenAPI Setting
tion will be changed to
“OFF” setting.
Apply Stamps/Stamp No
Apply Stamps/Copy Pro-
No
tect
Apply Stamps/Stamp
No
Repeat
Apply Stamps/Copy Pro-
No
tect
Apply Stamps/Page Num-
No
ber
Apply Stamps/Date/Time No
Web Service Settings
Printer setting/Scanner Printer Setting and Scanner setting will be set to “OFF”.
setting
Image Log Transfer Set-
tings
[No]
SW No. 63 will be changed

Software Switch Setting
to 01 (HEX).
Service Mode
Management function Confirmation copy will be

choice set to “Ban”.
[System] o [Display Set-
FAX ting] o [Re-Transmission]
14.3.11 Coverage Rate Clear

A. Use
• To clear the coverage rate.
B. Procedure
• The default setting is Unset.
Set “Unset”
• Touching [END] key will clear the coverage rate.

14.3.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Restriction Code

A. Use
vendor.
14.3.13 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Region Code

A. Use
vendor.

15. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
15. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION

Function for clearing Initialize
Clear All Data
Main power switch OFF/ON
Address Registration Data

Job Memory Setting Data
Front door open/close
Network Setting Data

System Error Clear
Fax Setting Data
All History Data

Clear All Data
Trouble reset
Contents to
be cleared
Jam display
Rank A
Malfunction
Rank B
display
Rank C
Erratic operation / display
Utility Mode
(Except items on engine
adjustment)
Job memory setting data
Address registration data
Fax setting data
(Excluding destination-
related data)
History data
(Job history, Journal history,
Receive reject history, Desti-
nation history, Job secure
counter)
Network setting data
(Excluding destination-
related data)
Service Mode (System 1/2) *1
Management
Billing
Function
Setting
Choice
Adjustment of the touch

panel position
: Will be cleared (initialized)

: Will not be cleared
*1: Items to be cleared

System 1 Marketing Area (Fax Target only)
HDD
System 2
Image Controller Setting

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT

16.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section
16.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The scanner motor assy has been removed.
• The scanner drive cables have been rewound.
1. Temporarily secure the scanner

[2] [1] motor assy [1] with three screws [2].
[2] [2]
A00JF3C538DA
2. With the scanner drive gear set

[1] [4] [3] screw [1] located on the right-hand
side as shown on the left, slide the
scanner motor assy [2] to the left and
check that it is returned to the origi-
nal position by the tension of the
spring [3].
Perform this step three times.
3. Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the
scanner motor assy into position.
[4] [2] [4]
A00JF3C526DA

16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
16.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit

• The scanner drive cables have been rewound
[2] [2]
1. Move the mirror unit [1] to the center
and push it against the notches [2]
on the rail.
[1]
A0P0F2C216DA
2. When the mirror unit do not push its

both sides against the notches,
loosen two mirror unit adjustment
[1] screws [1] and adjust the mirror unit
position until it pushes its both sides
against the notches.
Tighten the adjustment screw.
3. Then conduct scanner positioning
adjustment.
A0P0F3C563DA

16.1.3 Scanner position adjustment

• The scanner drive cables have been rewound.
• Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit must be completed.
1. Move the exposure unit [1] and the

mirror unit to the end of the right.
[1]
A0P0F2C056DA
2. Slide the mirror unit until it hits the

end of the IR right frame.
3. Provide the length of 21.0 mm
between the end of the left indenta-
[1] tion [1] on the exposure unit upper
[1]
surface and the end of the IR right
frame upper surface. When the
length is ensured, tighten the two
screws [2].
[2] [2]
A0P0F2C057DA
4. Mount the original glass moving unit, and adjust the height of the original glass moving
unit.
See P.644
5. Whenever the scanner drive cables have been removed, be sure to carry out the [Feed
Direction Adjustment] procedure.
See P.474
See P.593

16.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit

• When replacing the original glass moving unit.
1. Set the height adjustment jig for the

[1]
original glass moving unit [1].
Insert the paper [2] between the orig-
inal glass and the height adjusting jig
for the original glass moving unit.
[2]
A00JF3C010DA
2. Press the height adjusting jig for the

[1]
original glass moving unit [1] on the
original glass moving unit side [2].
[2] A00JF3C011DA
[1] 3. Pull the paper [2] while pressing the

height adjusting jig for the original
glass moving unit [1] and make sure
that the paper will not come out.
NOTE
• Pull the paper [2] while pressing the
height adjusting jig for the original
glass moving unit [1] and make
sure that the paper will not come
out.
4. When the paper comes off, the
adjustment of the height is neces-
[2] A00JF3C012DA
sary by the following procedure.

5. Remove four screws [1] from the

[1] original glass moving unit.
A0P0F2C052DA
6. Install four spacers [1] and make a

[1]
height adjustment.
[1]
A0P0F3C558DA
NOTE
• Prepare and use the spacers
described below as necessary.
cA00J 2903 ##: 0.5 mm thickness
dA00J 2908 ##: 0.2 mm thickness
eA00J 2909 ##: 0.1 mm thickness
• Each spacer can be identified by
the number of holes [1] which are
1.5 mm in diameter.
[1] [1]
A00JF3C608DA

7. Temporarily secure the original glass

[1] moving unit [2] with four screws [1].
8. Check the height repeating step 1 to
3.
9. Secure the original glass moving unit
with four screws [1].
[2]
A0P0F3C564DA
16.1.5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit
• Only when original jam, bend, or tilt occurred during original feeding by ADF.
1. Adjust the guide support for the orig-

inal glass moving unit by rotating the
small screws (one on the near side
and one on the far side) with the
hexagon wrench (1.5 mm) to adjust
the height.
Turning clockwise: Up
Turning counterclockwise: Down
NOTE
• Feed a paper with ADF, and adjust
so that no original jam, bending, or
tilt will occur.
A0P0F2C217DA

16.2 Mechanical adjustment of the paper feed section

16.2.1 Tray3/4 paper size change
• Upon user requests, the paper size used for the tray3/4 needs to be changed.
1. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.

[2] [3] 2. Remove four screws [1] and remove
the paper guide plates (front [2]/rear
[3]).
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1] A0P0F3C540DA
[2] 3. Remove two screws [1] and remove
the end guide plates [2].
[1]
A0P0F3C541DA
4. Align the paper guide plate (rear)

with the marking on the bottom and
secure it with four screws.
To set B5/8.5/16K sizes:

• Insert the paper guide plate (rear)
into the hole. Align it with the back
marking and secure it.
To set A5/Post card size:

• Insert the paper guide plate (rear)
into the hole. Align it with the front
A0P0F3C542DA
marking and secure it.

5. Insert paper of the size to be placed in the tray, and set the paper guide plate (front)
against the edge of the paper.
Gap between paper and the paper guide plate (front):0 < 1mm
6. Secure the front side of the paper guide plate (front) with two screws, remove the paper
and secure the back side with two screws.
7. Align the end guide plate with the marking on the bottom and secure it.
8. Select the tray where paper size needs to be changed and change paper size in the fol-
lowing screen.
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [LCC Size Setting]
See P.535
9. Make a test print.
16.2.2 Skew adjustment of the tray 1/2

• To reduce paper skew that cannot be corrected by the registration loop adjust-
ment when the tray 1 or 2 is within the specifications.

2. Load the tray with the paper.
[1]
3. Move the set of the paper guides [1]
until no gap is produced between the
both ends of paper and the paper
guides.
A00KF3C516DA
4. Remove the paper from the tray.

5. Secure the set of paper guides [1] on
the tray using a screw (M3 x 8 mm:
[1]
V121 0308 04).
A00KF3C513DA

16.2.3 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2

• When an image printed on a copy is displaced from the correct position with the
use of the tray1/2.
1. Make a test print and check the amount of misalignment.

3. Stretch the paper guide [1] to the

[1]
maximum size position.
A00JF3C002DA
4. Loosen two screws [1].

[1]
A00JF3C003DA
5. Move the paper guide [1] complete

[1] according to the amount of the mis-
centering you checked in step 1 and
adjust the center position of it.
6. Tighten two screws [2].
7. Make another test print and check
the amount of misalignment.
[1] [2]
A00JF3C004DA

16.2.4 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4

• When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem.
[Service Mode] o [Machine] o [Centering]
1. Make a test print and check the amount of misalignment.

3. Stretch the paper guide [1] to the

[1] maximum size position.
A00JF3C005DA
4. Loosen ten screws [1].

[1]
[1]
A00JF3C006DA
5. Move the paper guide [1] complete

[2] according to the amount of the mis-
centering you checked in step 1 and
adjust the center position of it.
6. Tighten ten screws [2].
7. Make another test print and check
the amount of misalignment.
[1]
A00JF3C007DA

16.2.5 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the tray 3/4

• In case a no feed jam occurs frequently.

2. Remove two screws (M3 x 6 mm:
[1]
V118 0306 03) [1].
A00KF3C514DA
3. In the pick-up roller assy, put paper

[3]
[2] feed assist plate (A00J P001 ##) [2]
on the paper feed assist plate holder
[1], and fix them with two accompa-
nying screws (M3 x 8 mm: V118
0308 03) [3].
[1]
A00KF3C515DA
4. Set the tray.

5. Perform test print to check whether the no feed or the double feed occurs or not.

16.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section

16.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit
• The bypass paper size unit has been removed.
[1] [2] 1. Align one of the six gear ribs [1] with
the match mark [2] on the bypass
guide rack gear.
[1] [2] A00JF3C539DA
[1]
2. Attach the holder [1] with two screws.
A00JF3C540DA

3. Install the bypass unit cover so that

[2] part A (edge) [1] of the rack gear for
the bypass paper size unit and part
B [2] of the bypass unit cover are
aligned in a straight line.
[1]
[2]
[1]
A00JF3C541DA
4. Align the mark of the gear [1] with

[2]
the mark [2] on the rack gear so that
those gears are engaged.
[1]
A00JF3C542DA
5. After the bypass paper size unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the
bypass paper size unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the
bypass guide.
6. Call the Service Mode to the screen and select [Machine] o [Manual Bypass Tray
Adjustment]. Then, carry out manual bypass tray adjustment.
See P.480

16.4 Mechanical adjustment of the main drive unit section

16.4.1 PC drive gear positioning adjustment
• When the color PC drum motor was removed.
See P.166
• When the main drive unit was removed.
See P.116
A. Checking method
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
A00JF2C453DA
1. Slowly turn the PC drive gear/1 [1], and fit the hole A [3] and B [4] with the gear holes
on the upper frame [2].
2. Visually check if the hole A [3] and B [4] are fit with each gear hole at the same time.
B. Adjusting method
[4] 1. Turn the PC drive gear/1 [1], and fit
[2] the hole A [2] with the PC Gear/1 [1]
hole while visually checking.
2. Fix the PC drive gear/1 [1], and then
fit the hole B [3] with the PC drive
gear/2 [4] hole while visually check-
ing.
[1] [3]
A00JF2C454DA

3. Mount the color PC drum motor [1]

while two hole positions are well set.
[1]
A00JF2C455DA

Blank Page

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY
TROUBLESHOOTING
17. JAM DISPLAY
• When the paper jam occurred, the message, the position jam occurred (number blinks),
position of the remaining paper (number lights up), and the JAM code are displayed.
NOTE
• JAM code is displayed on the jam warning screen only when the following setting
is set to “Display.”
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [JAM Code Display Setting]
A0P0F4E512DA
17.1 List of JAM code
JAM Misfeed processing Ref.

JAM type Detection timing
code location page
10-01 Manual bypass • The leading edge of the paper does not Manual bypass tray P.679
feed section turn ON the tray1 vertical transport sensor door
TROUBLESHOOTING
(PS4) even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the manual bypass
starts to feed paper.
10-02 • For paper fed from the manual bypass,
loop forming has not been complete
before a sheet enters the timing roller
because the rise timing of load to perform
registration is earlier than the rise timing of
load to form a loop.

17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009

code location page
10-10 Manual bypass • The bypass paper limit sensor (PS35) is Manual bypass tray P.679
feed section not blocked after the lapse of a predeter- door
mined period of time after the paper lifting
plate is started to be raised from the
standby position to the paper feed posi-
tion.
• For paper fed from the manual bypass
tray, the bypass paper lower sensor
(PS36) is not blocked after the lapse of a
predetermined period of time after the
paper lifting plate is started to be lowered
from the paper feed position to the
standby position.
10-40 • For paper fed from the manual bypass, the
image write start signal permit continues
to be disabled for a predetermined period
of time after the timing of the image write
start signal output.
11-01 Tray 1 feed • The leading edge of the paper does not Manual bypass tray P.680
section turn ON the tray1 vertical transport sensor door
period of time after the tray1 starts to feed
paper.
11-02 • For paper fed from the tray1, due to a
delay in paper arrival, loop forming in front
of the timing roller is not complete before
the rise timing of the registration motor.
11-40 • For paper fed from the tray1, the image
write start signal permit continues to be
disabled for a predetermined period of
time after the timing of the image write
- • The tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
is turned ON when the main power switch
is turned ON, a door or cover is opened
TROUBLESHOOTING
and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is

reset.
12-01 Tray 2 feed • The leading edge of the paper does not Lower right door P.680
section turn ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor
period of time after the tray2 starts to feed
paper.
- • Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) is
turned ON when the main power switch is
turned ON, a door or cover is opened and
closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.


code location page
13-01 Tray 3 feed • The leading edge of the paper does not Tray 3/4 horizontal P.681
section block the tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) transport unit
even after the lapse of a given period of
time after the tray 3 starts to feed paper.
- • Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is blocked
when the main power switch is turned ON,
a door or cover is opened and closed, or a
misfeed or malfunction is reset.
14-01 Tray 4 feed • The leading edge of the paper does not Lower right door P.681
section unblock the tray4 paper feed sensor
period of time after the tray 4 starts to feed
paper.
- • Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) is
unblocked when the main power switch is
reset.
15-01 LCT feed • The leading edge of the paper does not Lower right door P.683
section block the paper feed sensor (PS3) even
after the lapse of a given period of time
after the LCT starts to feed paper.
15-40 • For paper fed from the LCT, the image
TROUBLESHOOTING
17-08 LCT transport • The paper feed sensor (PS3) is not turn Lower right door P.683
section OFF even after the set period of time has
elapsed after it turns ON.
17-20 • The Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
is not turn ON even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the paper feed sen-
sor (PS3) turns ON.


code location page
17-09 Tray 3/4 • The tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is not Tray 3/4 horizontal P.682
horizontal unblocked even after the lapse of a given transport unit
transport period of time after the paper has blocked
section the PS21.
17-30 • The horizontal transport sensor (PS29) is
not blocked even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the paper has blocked
the tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21).
17-31 • The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is
not unblocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the paper has
blocked the horizontal transport sensor
(PS29).
- • Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) is
blocked when the main power switch is
reset.
17-10 Tray 3/4 • A sheet of paper does not block the tray4 Lower right door, P.682
intermediate paper feed sensor (PS26) after a prede- Tray 3/4 horizontal
transport roller termined period of time has elapsed since transport unit
section the sheet unblocks the PS26.
17-11 • A sheet of paper does not unblock the hor-
izontal transport sensor (PS29) after a
predetermined period of time has elapsed
since the sheet blocks the PS29.
17-40 • A sheet of paper does not turn ON the
intermediate roller sensor (PS28) after a
predetermined period of time has elapsed
since the sheet unblocks the tray4 paper
feed sensor (PS26).
17-41 • A sheet of paper does not turn ON the
tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
after a predetermined period of time has
TROUBLESHOOTING
elapsed since the sheet turns ON the

intermediate roller sensor (PS28).
- • The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is
reset.


code location page
20-01 Vertical trans- • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not Manual bypass tray P.684
port section unblocked even after the lapse of a given door,
period of time after the paper has turned Lower right door
ON the tray 1 vertical transport sensor
(PS4).
20-03 • The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is not
turned ON even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the paper has turned
ON the tray 1 vertical transport sensor
(PS4).
20-10 • The tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a
turned ON the PS4.
20-11 • The tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a
turned ON the PS12.
20-12 • The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is
not blocked even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the paper has
unblocked the PS28.
20-20 • The tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
is not turned ON even after the lapse of a
turned ON the tray2 vertical transport sen-
sor (PS12).
20-02 Vertical trans- • For paper fed from the tray 1/2/3/4 or LU- Manual bypass tray
port section 301, loop forming has not been complete door,
before a sheet enters the timing roller Lower right door
because the rise timing of load to perform
registration is earlier than the rise timing of
load to form a loop.
TROUBLESHOOTING


code location page
30-01 2nd image • A sheet of paper does not block the timing Upper right door P.684
transfer roller sensor (PS38) after a predetermined
section period of time has elapsed since the sheet
unblocks PS38.
30-02 • A sheet of paper does not turn OFF the
OHP detection sensor (PS40) after a pre-
determined period of time has elapsed
since the sheet turns ON the PS40.
30-03 • The leading edge of paper does not
unblock the exhaust sensor (PS39) since
the registration motor (M2) is activated.
- • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is
unblocked when the main power switch is
reset.
• The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is
reset.
32-01 Exit section • The ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) Upper right door P.685
is not blocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the switchback
sequence is started.
32-05 • The exhaust sensor (PC39) is not blocked
even after the lapse of a given period of
time after the paper has unblocked PC39.
32-30 • Fusing roller had a trouble rotating while
printing.
- • The exhaust sensor (PC39) is unblocked
when the main power switch is turned ON,
a door or cover is opened and closed, or a
misfeed or malfunction is reset.
TROUBLESHOOTING
66-01 ADF turnover • The before read sensor (PS9) is not Transportation cover P.685
section turned ON after a lapse of a given time
after the reverse regist motion is per-
formed.
66-11 • The reverse registration sensor (PS8) is
not turned OFF after a lapse of a given
time after the reverse regist motion is per-
formed.
66-21 • The reverse registration sensor (PS8) is
not turned ON after a lapse of a given time
after the before read sensor (PS9) is
turned OFF.


code location page
66-02 ADF paper • The after separate sensor (PS4) is not Transportation cover P.686
feed section turned ON after a lapse of a given time
after the take-up motor (M2) is turned ON.
66-12 • The size of the original on the tray
detected by ADF does not match the size
of the original detected by the main unit.
66-03 ADF transport • The after separate sensor (PS4) is not P.686
section turn OFF even after the set period of time
has elapsed after it turns ON.
66-13 • The registration sensor (PS3) is not turned
ON after a lapse of a given time after the
after separate sensor (PS4) is turned ON.
66-23 • The registration sensor (PS3) is not turned
OFF after a lapse of given time after the
after separate sensor (PS4) is turned OFF.
66-33 • The before read sensor (PS9) is not
turned ON after a lapse of a given time
after the registration sensor (PS3) is
turned ON.
66-04 ADF paper exit • The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON P.687
section after a lapse of a given time after the
before read sensor (PS9) is turned ON.
66-14 • The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned OFF
after a lapse of a given time after the
before read sensor (PS9) is turned OFF.
66-24 • The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON
after a lapse of a given time after the
before read sensor (PS9) is turned OFF.
66-34 • The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned OFF
after a lapse of a given time after the turn-
over and paper exit motion is performed.
66-05 ADF image • The before read sensor (PS9) is not P.687
reading sec- turned OFF after a lapse of a given time
TROUBLESHOOTING
tion after the registration sensor (PS3) is
turned OFF.
66-15 • The before read sensor (PS9) is not
turned OFF after a lapse of a given time
after the reverse registration sensor (PS8)
is turned OFF.
66-06 • The before read sensor (PS9) is turned
ON earlier than a given time after the
before read sensor (PS9) is turned OFF
during original transportation.
66-07 • Due to a remaining sheet of paper that
has not been detected by sensors, before
the start of a job, a sensor detects the
sheet at an unexpected timing.


code location page
72-11 FS transport • The Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) is Front door P.688
section not turned ON even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the FNS pass sen-
sor (PS1) is turned ON by the paper.
72-13 • The Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) is Front door P.688
not turn OFF even after the set period of
time has elapsed after it turns ON.
72-14 <When FS-526 is installed> Front door P.688
• The center staple pass sensor (PS12) is
not turned ON even after the set period of
<When FS-527 is installed> Horizontal convey-
• The saddle path sensor (PS11) is not ance cover
turned ON even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the lower path sen-
• The center staple pass sensor (PS12) is
• The saddle path sensor (PS11) is not turn ance cover
OFF even after the set period of time has
• The FNS pass sensor (PS1) is not turned
ON even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the copier's exhaust sensor
(PS39) is turned ON by the paper.
• The paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is not ance cover
time has elapsed after the copier's
exhaust sensor (PS39) is turned ON by
TROUBLESHOOTING
the paper.
• The paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is not
turned OFF even after the set period of
time has elapsed after it is turned ON by
the paper.
• The sub tray exit sensor (PS8) is not
• The paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) is not ance cover
time has elapsed after the paper passage
sensor/1 (PS1) is turned ON by the paper.
• The paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) is not
turn OFF even after the set period of time


code location page
72-18 FS transport <When FS-526 is installed> Front door P.691
section • The 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3) is not
time has elapsed after the Z-fold punch
regist sensor (PS2) is turned ON by the
paper.
• The registration sensor (PS10) is not ance cover
time has elapsed after the paper passage
sensor/2 (PS2) is turned ON by the paper.
• The registration sensor (PS10) is not turn
• The 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3) is not
<When FS-527 is installed>
• The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned
elapsed after the registration sensor
• The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turn
• The upper path sensor (PS8) is not turned
• The upper path sensor (PS8) is not turn
• The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned
ON by the paper even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the switchback
TROUBLESHOOTING
operation caused by the conveyance
motor (M4) is completed.
• After the switchback operation caused by
the conveyance motor (M4) is completed,
the lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned
elapsed after PS9 is turn ON by the paper.


code location page
72-21 FS exit section <When FS-526 is installed> Front door P.692
• The 2 staples stacker empty sensor
(PS15) is not turn OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the start
of exiting paper.
• The tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16)
is not turned ON even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the lower path
sensor (PS9) is turned ON by the paper.
• The sub tray exit sensor (PS8) is not
time has elapsed after the Z-fold punch
paper.
• The tray2 path sensor (PS6) is not turned
• The tray2 path sensor (PS6) is not turn
72-23 • The sub tray exit sensor (PS8) is not turn Front door P.694
72-25 SD exit section • SD exit sensor/LED (PS28) is not turned Front door, stacker P.694
ON by the paper even after the set period unit
of time has elapsed after the half-fold exit
operation started.
72-26 <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed>
• The SD exit sensor/LED (PS28) is not turn
TROUBLESHOOTING
<When FS-527+SD-509 is installed>

• The paper detection sensor/2 (PS44) is
72-31 JS exit section • The job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) is Separator cover P.695
time has elapsed after the z-fold Punch
paper.
72-34 • The job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) is
72-35 PI section • The paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) is Upper door P.695
time has elapsed after the transfer clutch /
Lw (CL202) is turned ON by the paper.


code location page
72-38 ZU section • None of the leading, trailing, or side edge Front door P.695
sensor on the paper size detect board
(PSDTB) is turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the paper
pass sensor (PS202) in the horizontal
transport unit is turned ON by the paper.
72-39 • None of the leading, trailing, or side edge Front door P.696
sensor on the paper size detect board
(PSDTB) is turned OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after one of
these sensors is turned ON by the paper.
72-40 • The conveyance sensor (PS601) is not Front door P.696
time has elapsed after the leading, trailing,
or side sensor on the paper size detect
board (PSDTB) is turned ON by the paper.
72-41 • When the second fold is started in Z-fold Front door, Z folding/ P.696
mode, the conveyance sensor (PS601) is conveyance unit
not switched from ON to OFF by the paper
after the set period of time has elapsed.
72-42 • After the second fold is completed in Z- Front door
fold mode, the conveyance sensor
(PS601) is not switched from ON to OFF
by the paper even after the set period of
time has elapsed.
72-43 PK section <When FS-526+PK-516 is installed> Front door P.697
• PK punch home sensor (PS301) does not
turn ON even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the leading edge detec-
tion started.
<When FS-527+PK-517 is installed>
• Though the punch home sensor/1
(PS100) is not turned ON after the punch
motor/1 (M100) starts rotating forward,
PS100 is turned ON after M100 starts
TROUBLESHOOTING
rotating backward.
72-44 ZU section • The exit sensor (PS609) is not turned ON Front door P.698
even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the leading, trailing, or side
edge sensor on the paper size detect
72-45 • The exit sensor (PS609) is not turned ON Front door P.698
elapsed after the paper pass sensor
(PS202) in the horizontal transport unit is
turned ON by the paper.
72-46 • The exit sensor (PS609) is not turn OFF Front door P.698


code location page
72-47 ZU section • Paper remains in the Z-fold unit even after Front door, Z folding/ P.698
the set period of time has elapsed after conveyance unit
MFP sends a processing stop signal to the
Z-fold unit.
72-49 PI section • The paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) is Upper door P.699
time has elapsed after the transfer clutch /
Up (CL201) is turned ON by the paper.
72-50 • The FNS pass sensor (PS1) is not turned Upper door P.699
elapsed after the paper entrance sensor /
Up (PS201) is turned ON by the paper.
72-51 • The FNS pass sensor (PS1) is not turned Upper door P.699
elapsed after the paper entrance sensor /
Lw (PS206) is turned ON by the paper.
72-60 ZU section • The corresponding side edge sensor on Front door, Z folding/ P.700
the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is conveyance unit
time has elapsed after the leading, trailing,
or side edge sensor on PSDTB is turned
OFF by the paper. Or the punch home
sensor (PS606) is not turned ON by the
paper even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the punch clutch (CL601) is
turned ON.
72-61 • The conveyance sensor (PS601) is turned Front door P.700
ON after the set period of time has
elapsed even after the leading, trailing, or
side edge sensor on the paper size detect
72-62 • The exit sensor (PS609) is not turned ON Front door P.700
elapsed after the conveyance sensor
TROUBLESHOOTING
72-64 • The conveyance encoder sensor (PS610) Front door, Z folding/ P.701
is not turned ON or OFF even after the set conveyance unit
period of time has elapsed after the main
motor (M606) starts running.
72-81 FS staple <When FS-526 is installed> Front door P.701
section • Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53) does not
turn ON even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the side-staple opera-
tion started.
• Though the stapler sensor (PS27) is not
turned ON after the stapler motor (M18)
starts rotating forward, PS27 is turned ON
after M18 starts rotating backward.


code location page
72-84 SD staple • Stapler home sensor (PS33) does not turn Front door, stacker P.702
section ON even after the set period of time has unit
elapsed after the center-staple operation
started.
72-85 <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Front door, stacker P.702
• The stapler home sensor (PS33) is not unit
time has elapsed after saddle stitch sta-
pling is started.
• Though the saddle stapler home sensor is
not turned ON after the saddle stapler
motor starts rotating forward, the saddle
stapler home sensor is turned ON after
the saddle stapler motor starts rotating
backward.
72-86 SD transport <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed> Front door, stacker P.703
section • The paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) is unit
time has elapsed after the saddle path
72-87 <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed> P.703
• The paper detection sensor/2 (PS44) is
time has elapsed after the saddle path
75-42 RU section • The Paper pass sensor (PS202) is not Horizontal transport P.704
turned ON even after the set period of cover
time has elapsed after the copier's
exhaust sensor (PS39) is turned ON by
the paper.
75-43 • The Paper pass sensor (PS202) is not P.704
TROUBLESHOOTING


code location page
92-01 Duplex • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not Upper right door, P.705
pre-registra- unblocked even after the lapse of a given Duplex door
tion section period of time after a duplex paper feed
sequence has been started.
92-02 • For the second-side feed of paper in the
duplex mode, loop forming has not been
complete before the second side of a
sheet enters the timing roller because the
rise timing of load to perform registration
is earlier than the rise timing of load to
form a loop.
92-03 • The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is not
turned ON even after the lapse of a given
period of time after a duplex paper feed
sequence has been started.
92-40 • For the second-side feed of paper in the
duplex mode, the image write start signal
permit continues to be disabled for a pre-
determined period of time after the timing
of the image write start signal output.
93-01 Duplex • A sheet of paper does not unblock the Duplex door P.705
transport ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) after
section a predetermined period of time has
elapsed since the sheet blocks the PS47.
93-10 • A sheet of paper does not unblock the
ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48) after
a predetermined period of time has
elapsed since the sheet blocks the ADU
paper passage sensor/1 (PS47).
- • ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) is
blocked, or ADU paper passage sensor/2
(PS48) is unblocked when the main power
switch is turned ON, a door or cover is
opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-
function is reset.
TROUBLESHOOTING
99-01 Controller JAM • Forced stop command was sent from the
controller to the printer engine due to the
error in paper size, media, etc. - -
• Media error has occurred in both sides
printing.
17.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure

• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfed, and close the door.

17.2 Sensor layout

17.2.1 Main body
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
TROUBLESHOOTING
[12] [11] A0P0F4C504DA
[1] Paper exit sensor PS39 [7] Tray 2 vertical transport sensor PS12
[2] ADU paper passage sensor/1 PS47 [8] Tray2 paper feed sensor PS13
[3]*1 Timing roller sensor PS38 [9] Intermediate roller sensor PS28
[3]*1 OHP detection sensor PS40 [10] Tray 4 paper feed sensor PS26
[4] ADU paper passage sensor/2 PS48 [11] Horizontal transport sensor PS29
[5] Tray 1 vertical transport sensor PS4 [12] Tray 3 paper feed sensor PS21
[6] Tray1 paper feed sensor PS5
*1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3].

17.2.2 ADF
[5] [1]
[4]
[3] [2] A0P0F4C600DA
[1] Exit sensor (PS5) [4] Registration sensor (PS3)

[2] Reverse registration sensor (PS8) [5] After separate sensor (PS4)
[3] Before read sensor (PS9)
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.2.3 LU-204/LU-301
[1]
[2]
A0TJF4C500DA
TROUBLESHOOTING
[1] Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) [2] Paper feed sensor (PS3)

17.2.4 JS-504
[3]
[1]
[2]
A083F4C501DA
[1] Paper exit sensor (PS39) [3] Upper tray exit sensor (PS2)
[2] Lower tray exit sensor (PS1)
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.2.5 ZU-606
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
A109F4C500DA
[1] Paper size detect board (PSDTB) [3] Exit sensor (PS609)
[2] Paper pass sensor (PS202) [4] Conveyance sensor (PS601)
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.2.6 FS-526/SD-508/PK-516
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
TROUBLESHOOTING
A11PF4C500DA
[1] Paper pass sensor (PS202) [5] SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)

[2] Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) [6] 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
[3] PK punch home sensor (PS301) [7] 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15)
[4] FNS pass sensor (PS1) [8] Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)

17.2.7 JS-602
[1]
A10CF4C500DA
[1] Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402)
17.2.8 PI-505
[1]
[2]
TROUBLESHOOTING
[3]
A10AF4C500DA
[1] Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) [3] FNS pass sensor (PS1)
[2] Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)

17.2.9 FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603
[4]
[3] [1]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
TROUBLESHOOTING
A0HRF4C500DA
[1] Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) [6] Paper detection sensor/1 (PS43)
[2] Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) [7] Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44)
[3] Registration sensor (PS10) [8] lower path sensor (PS9)
[4] Tray2 path sensor (PS6) [9] Tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16)
[5] Saddle path sensor (PS11) [10] Upper path sensor (PS8)

17.3 Solution
17.3.1 Initial check items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item Action

Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
is the paper path deformed or worn?
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the cor-
Set as necessary.
rect position to accommodate the paper?
Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator.
17.3.2 Misfeed at manual bypass feed section
Relevant parts
Bypass paper feed motor (M27) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) Printer control board (PRCB)
Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step Action Location (Electri-
Control signal
cal component)
1 Initial check items — —
2 PS4 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN11-8 (ON) Q-2
3 PS35 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN6<B>-10 (ON) Q-12
4 PS36 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN6<A>-11 (ON) Q-11
5 M27 operation check PFTDB CN6<B>-1~4 Q-11
6 Change PFTDB — —
7 Change PRCB — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.3.3 Misfeed at tray 1 feed section
Relevant parts
Take-up motor (M22) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) Printer control board (PRCB)
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 CL1 operation check PFTDB CN11-14 (REM) Q-2 to 3
4 M22 operation check PFTDB CN8-5 to 8 X-12
5 PFTDB ICP1 or ICP3 conduction check — —
Relevant parts
Take-up motor (M22) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 CL2 operation check PFTDB CN10<A>-1 (REM) Q-3
TROUBLESHOOTING

Relevant parts
Transport motor (M25) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS21 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN16-9 (ON) X-6
3 CL5 operation check PFTDB CN15-5 (REM) X-5
4 M25 operation check PFTDB CN13-6 (LOCK) X-11
5 PFTDB ICP4 conduction check — —
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS26 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN18-3 (ON) X-7~8
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.3.7 Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section
Relevant parts
Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) Printer control board (PRCB)
Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)
Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.8 Misfeed at tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section
Relevant parts
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) Printer control board (PRCB)
Intermediate roller sensor (PS28) Transport motor (M25)
Horizontal Transport sensor (PS29) Vertical transport motor (M26)
Tray 2 vertical transport motor (M7)
Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)
WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS12 check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-2 (ON) Q-4
3 PS26 check, sensor check PFTDB CN18-3 (ON) X-7 to 8
8 M26 operation check PFTDB CN12-1 to 4 X-10 to 11

17.3.9 LCT feed section
Relevant parts
Paper feed motor (M2) LU drive board (LUDB)
Paper feed sensor (PS3) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
LU-204/LU-301
2 PS3 I/O check, sensor check LUDB CN5-8 (ON)
G-4
LU-204/LU-301
3 M2 operation check LUDB CN4-5 to 6
G-3
4 Change LUDB — —
17.3.10 LCT transport section
Relevant parts
Paper feed sensor (PS3) LU drive board (LUDB)
Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
LU-204/LU-301
2 PS3 I/O check, sensor check LUDB CN5-8 (ON)
G-4
d-Color MF651/551
3 PS12 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-2 (ON)
Q-4
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.3.11 Misfeed at vertical transport section
Relevant parts
Tray 1 vertical transport motor (M5) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Tray 2 vertical transport motor (M7) Printer control board (PRCB)
Vertical transport motor (M26)
Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
Timing roller sensor (PS38)
OHP detection sensor (PS40)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
6 PS40 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-2 (ON) Q-4 to 5
17.3.12 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section
Relevant parts
Registration motor (M2) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Fusing motor (M30) Printer control board (PRCB)
Paper exit sensor (PS39)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS38 check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-6 (ON) Q-5
5 M2 operation check PFTDB CN9-1 to 4 Q-9
PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
6 M30 operation check K-8
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)

17.3.13 Misfeed at exit section
Relevant parts
Exit motor (M4) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Switchback motor (M33)
Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
4 M4 operation check PRCB CN18-17 to 20 C-14
PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
5 M30 operation check K-8
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)
7 SD1 operation check PRCB CN18-7 (REM) C-13
17.3.14 ADF turnover section
Relevant parts
Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) DF control board (DFCB)
Before read sensor (PS9)
Reverse registration sensor (PS8)
WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS9 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ14-8 (ON) DF-618 B-6
3 PS8 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ12-2 (ON) DF-618 I-3
4 M5 operation check DFCB PJ6-10 to 11 DF-618 I-7
5 Change DFCB — —

17.3.15 ADF paper feed section
Relevant parts
Take-up motor (M2) DF control board (DFCB)
After separate sensor (PS4)
Length sensor/1 (PS10)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 PS10 I/O check, sensor check REYB PJ5-12 (ON) DF-618 K to L-8
17.3.16 ADF transport section
Relevant parts
Registration motor (M7) DF control board (DFCB)
Take-up motor (M2)
Registration sensor (PS3)
After separate sensor (PS4)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Adjust the height of the guide support for
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 the original glass moving unit. — —

See P.646

17.3.17 ADF paper exit section
Relevant parts
Exit motor (M3) DF control board (DFCB)
Exit sensor (PS5)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.18 ADF image reading section
Relevant parts
Reading motor (M1) DF control board (DFCB)
Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4)
Reverse registration sensor (PS8)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Make the adjustment of original stop
2 position. — —
See P.585
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.3.19 Code: 72-11
Relevant parts
FNS pass sensor (PS1) FS control board (FSCB)
Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-2 (ON) FS-526 D-8
4 Change FSCB — —
17.3.20 Code: 72-13
Relevant parts
Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.21 Code: 72-14

(1) When FS-526 is installed
Relevant parts
Center staple pass sensor (PS12)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 PS12 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-8 (ON) FS-526 D-8 to 9

Relevant parts
Lower path sensor (PS9) FS control board (FSCB)
Saddle path sensor (PS11)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS9 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-5 (ON) FS-527 J-4
3 PS11 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-6 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
17.3.22 Code: 72-15

Relevant parts
Center staple pass sensor (PS12) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS12 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-8 (ON) FS-526 D-8 to 9
Relevant parts
Saddle path sensor (PS11) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
TROUBLESHOOTING
cal component)

17.3.23 Code: 72-16

Relevant parts
Paper exit sensor (PS39) FS control board (FSCB)
FNS pass sensor (PS1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
d-Color MF651/
2 PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON)
551/451 Q-5
Relevant parts
Paper exit sensor (PS39) FS control board (FSCB)
Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
d-Color MF651/
551/451 Q-5
FS-527
3 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ11-2 (ON)
I-11 to 12
17.3.24 Code: 72-17

TROUBLESHOOTING
Relevant parts
Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 PS8 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<B>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-8

Relevant parts
Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
FS-527
I-11 to 12
3 PS2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ11-8 (ON) FS-527 I-11
17.3.25 Code: 72-18

Relevant parts
2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 PS3 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN17-9 (ON) FS-526 L-7
Relevant parts
Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) FS control board (FSCB)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)

17.3.26 Code: 72-19

Relevant parts
Stacker entrance motor (M10) FS control board (FSCB)
2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS3 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN17-9 (ON) FS-526 L-7
3 M10 operation check FSCB CN12-7 to 12 FS-526 D-4 to 5
Relevant parts
Conveyance motor (M4) FS control board (FSCB)
Upper path sensor (PS8)
Lower path sensor (PS9)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
5 M4 operation check FSCB PJ10-5 to 8 FS-527 B to C-3
17.3.27 Code: 72-21

TROUBLESHOOTING
Relevant parts
2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)

Relevant parts
lower path sensor (PS9) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.28 Code: 72-22

Relevant parts
Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Relevant parts
Registration sensor (PS10) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray2 path sensor (PS6)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)

17.3.29 Code: 72-23
Relevant parts
Sub tray exit sensor (PS8) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.30 Code: 72-25 / 72-26

(1) When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Relevant parts
Exit motor (M34) SD drive board (SDDB)
Fold sensor (PS27) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS27 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN406<A>-14 (ON) SD-508 K-9
3 M34 operation check FSCB CN42-1 to 12 SD-508 G-3 to 4
4 Change SDDB — —
Relevant parts
Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44) SD drive board (SDDB)
FS control board (FSCB)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS44 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ13-2 (ON) SD-509 G-3

17.3.31 Code: 72-31 / 72-34
Relevant parts
Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS402 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN50-6 (ON) FS-526 C-16
17.3.32 Code: 72-35
Relevant parts
Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202) PI drive board (PIDB)
Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS206 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN53<A>-5 (ON) PI-505 C to D-5
3 CL202 operation check PIDB CN56-1 (ON) PI-505 C to D-7
4 Change PIDB — —
17.3.33 Code: 72-38
Relevant parts
Paper pass sensor (PS202) Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Transport control board (TRCB)
ZU control board (ZUCB)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 Q-2 to 3
ZU-606
3 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10
C to D-9 to 10
4 Change TRCB — —
5 Change ZUCB — —

17.3.34 Code: 72-39
Relevant parts
Paper size detect board (PSDTB) ZU control board (ZUCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
ZU-606
C to D-9 to 10
17.3.35 Code: 72-40
Relevant parts
Paper size detect board (PSDTB) ZU control board (ZUCB)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
ZU-606
C to D-9 to 10
3 PS601 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-2 (ON) ZU-606 C-4
17.3.36 Code: 72-41 / 72-42
Relevant parts
Conveyance sensor (PS601) ZU control board (ZUCB)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)

17.3.37 Code: 72-43

(1) When FS-526+PK-516 is installed
Relevant parts
Punch drive motor (M301) Punch control board (PKDB)
PK punch home sensor (PS301) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS301 I/O check, sensor check PKDB CN36-5 (ON) PK-516 C-3
3 M301 operation check PKDB CN35-1 to 3 PK-516 C-2
4 Change PKDB — —
(2) When FS-527+PK-517 is installed
Relevant parts
Punch motor/1 (M100) FS control board (FSCB)
Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
FS-527 (PK-517)
J-9
FSCB PJ19-1 (CW) FS-527 (PK-517)
3 M100 operation check
FSCB PJ19-3 (CCW) J-8
17.3.38 Code: 72-44
TROUBLESHOOTING
Relevant parts
Exit sensor (PS609) Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
ZU-606
C to D-9 to 10

17.3.39 Code: 72-45
Relevant parts
Paper pass sensor (PS202) ZU control board (ZUCB)
Exit sensor (PS609)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 Q-2 to 3
17.3.40 Code: 72-46
Relevant parts
Exit sensor (PS609) ZU control board (ZUCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.41 Code: 72-47
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
TROUBLESHOOTING
cal component)

17.3.42 Code: 72-49
Relevant parts
Transfer clutch /Up (CL201) PI drive board (PIDB)
Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 CL201 operation check PIDB CN54-3 (ON) PI-505 C to D-4
17.3.43 Code: 72-50
Relevant parts
Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) PI drive board (PIDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.44 Code: 72-51
Relevant parts
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) PI drive board (PIDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)

17.3.45 Code: 72-60
Relevant parts
Punch clutch (CL601) Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Punch home sensor (PS606) ZU control board (ZUCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 CL601 operation check ZUCB CN11-4 ZU-606 C-7
ZU-606
C to D-9 to 10
17.3.46 Code: 72-61
Relevant parts
Conveyance sensor (PS601) Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
ZU-606
C to D-9 to 10
17.3.47 Code: 72-62

TROUBLESHOOTING
Relevant parts
Conveyance sensor (PS601) ZU control board (ZUCB)
Exit sensor (PS609)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)

17.3.48 Code: 72-64
Relevant parts
Main motor (M606) ZU control board (ZUCB)
Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 M606 operation check ZUCB CN8-1 to 6 ZU-606 C-2
17.3.49 Code: 72-81

Relevant parts
Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Relevant parts
Stapler unit FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Control signal
cal component)
2 Change stapler unit — —

17.3.50 Code: 72-84
Relevant parts
Center staple motor (M23) SD drive board (SDDB)
Stapler home sensor (PS33) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS33 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN403-17 (ON) SD-508 C-10
3 M23 operation check SDDB CN406<A>-1 to 4 (ON) SD-508 K-8
17.3.51 Code: 72-85

Relevant parts
Stapler home sensor (PS33) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Relevant parts
TROUBLESHOOTING
Saddle stapler unit SD drive board (SDDB)

WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 Change saddle stapler unit — —

17.3.52 Code: 72-86
Relevant parts
Saddle path sensor (PS11) SD drive board (SDDB)
Paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.53 Code: 72-87
Relevant parts
Saddle path sensor (PS11) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.54 Code: 72-90
Relevant parts
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)

17.3.55 Code: 75-42
Relevant parts
Paper exit sensor (PS39) Transport control board (TRCB)
Paper pass sensor (PS202) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
d-Color MF651/551
Q-5
3 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 P to Q-2
17.3.56 Code: 75-43
Relevant parts
Paper pass sensor (PS202) Transport control board (TRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 P to Q-2
TROUBLESHOOTING

17.3.57 Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section
Relevant parts
ADU transport motor/1 (M31) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
ADU transport motor/2 (M32) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
17.3.58 Misfeed at duplex transport section
Relevant parts
ADU transport motor/1 (M31) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
ADU transport motor/2 (M32) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING

18. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
18. MALFUNCTION CODE

18.1 Display procedure
• The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding warning code and maintenance call mark on the control panel.
• Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the
state confirm screen.
Maintenance mark
TROUBLESHOOTING
A0P0F4E513DA

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. MALFUNCTION CODE
18.2 List
• If an image stabilization or scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code
appears.
Code Item Description

S-1 CCD gain adjustment failure • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment
value is faulty.
D-1 Split line detect • While recovering from the power save mode or when
the main/sub power switch is ON, it detects whether or
not stain exist at the original glass moving unit when
the ADF is closed.
This warning will be displayed if the original is set to
ADF when stain exist.
• The thin line detection level and the warning display
can be changed by the following setting.
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [Thin line Detect. Set-
ting]
D-2 Read guide trouble • While recovering from the power save mode or when
the main/sub power switch is ON, it detects whether or
not stain exist at the scanning guide when the ADF is
closed.
This warning will be displayed if the original is set to
ADF when stain exist.
• This setting is valid only when the [Detection during
Paper Passing] available from the following setting is
set to one between 2 and 6.
[Service Mode] o [System 2] o [This Line Detect. Set-
ting]
P-5 IDC sensor (front) failure • When adjusting the IDC sensor, output voltage
P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure detected for all eight sample patterns are 4.3 V or
more.
• When adjustment is complete, sensor’s output voltage
with selected light intensity is 1.0 V or under.
• During image stabilization (gamma correction control),
detected output value for IDC sensor did not go below
threshold (half the value of what is detected by IDC
sensor on the belt surface) for three consecutive times
TROUBLESHOOTING
(position of the pattern end is not detected).
• During image stabilization (gamma correction control),
sensor’s output value of each color for hyper 0 grada-
tion after the primary approximation is half the detec-
tion level on the belt surface or under
P-6 Cyan imaging unit failure • All density readings taken from the density pattern pro-
P-7 Magenta imaging unit failure duced on the transfer belt are 1.0 g/m2 (IDC sensor
photo receiver output) or less during max. density
P-8 Yellow imaging unit failure adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment).
P-9 Black imaging unit failure
P-14 Skew correction trouble • The difference between the skew default position set-
ting value and the cumulative amount of skew adjust-
ment values goes over the predetermined value.
P-16 PC charge cleaning trouble 1 • Charging cleaner home sensor is not transmitted even
after the specified time has passed while the wire
cleaning material is moving forward.


P-18 PC charge cleaning trouble 1 • Charging cleaner return sensor is not interrupted even
after the specified time has passed when the wire
cleaning material is moving forward.
* Under the situation above occurs, control will be
switched to the return operation after the warning is
given. When the charging cleaner home sensor is not
interrupted after the specified time has passed during
the return operation, trouble code C-2101 will be given.
P-21 Color regist test pattern failure • The number of points detected in the main scan direc-
tion is more or less than the specified value during
main scan direction registration correction.
• The number of points detected in the sub scan direction
is more or less than the specified value during sub scan
direction registration correction.
P-22 Color regist adjust failure • The color shift amount is greater than the specified
range during main scan direction registration correction.
• The color shift amount is greater than the specified
range during sub scan direction registration correction.
• On the color shift test pattern, the maximum and mini-
mum deviations detected in the main and sub scan
directions go over the predetermined value.
P-27 Secondary transfer ATVC failure • An abnormal average value is detected during an
adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value.
P-31 K PC encoder sensor malfunction • While the K PC drum motor is rotating at a stable pace
and lock signals are in an active (LOW=0) condition, an
abnormal encoder pulse width continues to be detected
over the predetermined period of time.
P-32 Heating roller temperature sensor/1 • During warm up, the temperature detected by the heat-
temperature detection failure ing roller temperature sensor/1 exceeded the warm up
complete temperature of the heating roller for over the
predetermined value, and stayed for a predetermined
period of time.
• When the predetermined period of time had passed
after the warm up became complete, detected temper-
ature of the heating roller thermistor/1 exceeded the
temperature detected by the heating roller temperature
TROUBLESHOOTING
sensor/1 for over the predetermined value for more

than the predetermined period of time.
• While printing, temperature detected by the heating
roller thermistor/1 exceeded the temperature detected
by the heating roller temperature sensor/1 for more
than the predetermined value for a predetermined
period of time.
• This warning indicates that condensation dirt on the

heating roller temperature sensor/1 was detected, and
the alternate temperature control is being conducted.
With condensation, the warning is cleared when the
condensation is detected to be removed. When the dirt
on the sensor is detected, it is considered as a failure
and the trouble code C-392A is issued.


L-1 Imaging unit/C accumulated • PC drum rotation time count value used for the life
rotation time excess warning judgment of imaging units (the value for PC drum rota-
L-2 Imaging unit/M accumulated tion distance calculated into the rotation time) is above
rotation time excess warning the threshold value for the excess warning (5,180 M).
• Printing with this warning being displayed is not
L-3 Imaging unit/Y accumulated included in the image warranty.
rotation time excess warning
L-4 Drum unit/K accumulated rotation • Count value for PC drum rotation time used for judging
time excess warning drum unit/K life (the value for PC drum rotation distance
calculated into the rotation time) is above threshold
value for the excess warning (8,958 M).
included in the image warranty.
L-5 Transfer belt unit accumulated • Count value for the transfer belt rotation time used for
rotation time excess warning judging the transfer belt unit life is above the threshold
value for excess warning (27,777 M).
included in the image warranty.
TROUBLESHOOTING

18.3 Solution
18.3.1 S-1: CCD gain adjustment failure
Relevant parts
Exposure unit CCD board (CCDB)
MFP board (MFPB)
Step Action
1 Correct the harness connection between CCDB and MFPB if faulty.
2 Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.
3 Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty.
4 Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if faulty, or change scanner.
5 Change CCD sensor unit.
6 Change MFPB.
18.3.2 D-1: Split line detect
Relevant parts
Original glass moving unit Original glass position control board (OGPCB)
Printer control board (PRCB)
Step Action
1 Wipe clean the glass surface of the original glass moving unit.
2 Correct the harness connection between OGPCB and PRCB if faulty.
3 Change original glass moving unit.
4 Change OGPCB.
5 Change PRCB.
18.3.3 D-2: ADF read guide trouble
Relevant parts
ADF scanning guide
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step Action
Wipe clean the surface of the ADF scanning guide with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.
1
See P.12 of the DF-618/SP-501 service manual.

18.3.4 P-5: IDC sensor (front) failure

18.3.5 P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure
Relevant parts
IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) Printer control board (PRCB)
IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
Transfer belt unit
Step Action
1 Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.
2 Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged.
Reinstall or reconnect IDCS/F or IDCS/R, sensor shutter or connector, if it is installed or con-
3
nected improperly.
4 Clean IDCS/For IDCS/R if it is dirty.
5 Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
Open/close the front door, run an image stabilization sequence, and select [State Confirmation]
o [Level History 1] to check the IDC value.
6
IDC1: IDCS/F, IDC2: IDCS/R
If the value is 1.0 V or less, change IDCS/F or IDCS/R.
7 PRCB ICP17 conduction check
8 Change PRCB.
18.3.6 P-6: Cyan imaging unit failure

18.3.7 P-7: Magenta imaging unit failure
18.3.8 P-8: Yellow imaging unit failure
18.3.9 P-9: Black imaging unit failure
Relevant parts
Imaging unit /C Transfer belt unit
Imaging unit /M High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
Imaging unit /Y Printer control board (PRCB)
Drum unit /K
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step Action
Select [Imaging Process Adjustment] o [D Max Density] and, if the setting value is negative,
1
readjust.
2 Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary.
Clean the IDC/registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) or IDC/registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) window if
3
dirty.
4 Clean the contact of the imaging unit connector if dirty.
5 Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
6 Change imaging unit.
7 Change the transfer belt unit.
8 HV1 IP101, IP201, IP301 or IP401 conduction check
9 Change HV1.
10 Change PRCB.

18.3.10 P-14: Skew correction trouble
Relevant parts
IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) PH relay board (REYB/PH)
IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) Printer control board (PRCB)
Imaging unit PH unit
Step Action
1 Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary.
2 Clean the contact of the imaging unit connector if dirty.
Reinstall or reconnect IDCS/F or IDCS/R, sensor shutter or connector, if it is installed or con-
3
nected improperly.
4 Clean IDCS/For IDCS/R if it is dirty.
5 Change IDCS/F or IDCS/R.
6 Change imaging unit.
7 Change PH unit.
8 REYB/PH ICP3, ICP4 or ICP5 conduction check
9 Change REYB/PH.
10 PRCB ICP17 conduction check
9 Change PRCB.
NOTE
• After the PH unit is replaced, reset the skew default position for each color. Touch
keys as follows for this setting.
[Service Mode] o [Machine] o [Skew adjustment] o [Skew adjustment]
See P.477
• When this alert code is displayed, according to the list, take actions to address the
problem. After the problem is resolved, select [Service Mode] o [Machine] o
[Skew adjustment] o [Skew adjustment reset] and perform the skew adjustment
reset.
See P.477
18.3.11 P-16: PC charge cleaning trouble 1

TROUBLESHOOTING
18.3.12 P-18: PC charge cleaning trouble 2
Relevant parts
Drum unit /K Printer control board (PRCB)
Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)
Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)
Step Action
1 PS43 I/O check, sensor check.
2 PS44 I/O check, sensor check.
3 M15 operation check.
4 Change drum unit /K.
5 Change M15.
6 Change PRCB.

18.3.13 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure
Relevant parts
Transfer belt unit Printer control board (PRCB)
PH unit
Step Action
1 Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.
2 Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged.
3 Change the PH unit.
4 Change PRCB.
18.3.14 P-22: Color regist adjust failure
Relevant parts
IDC/registration sensor /F (IDCS/F) Printer control board (PRCB)
IDC/registration sensor/R (IDCS/R)
Step Action
1 Slide out the imaging unit and reinstall it in position.
2 Reinstall or reconnect IDCS/F or IDCS/R if it is installed or connected improperly.
3 Check the vertical transport guide for installed position and correct as necessary.
4 Change PRCB.
18.3.15 P-27: Secondary transfer ATVC failure
Relevant parts
High voltage unit/2 (HV2) Image transfer entrance guide
Printer control board (PRCB) 2nd image transfer assy
Transfer belt unit
Step Action
Check roller opposed to the 2nd image transfer roller is grounded.
1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Clean the joint or correct if necessary.
2 Check the image transfer entrance guide for proper installation and correct if necessary.
Check that the spring does not come off during the pressure operation of the 2nd transfer roller
3
and correct if necessary.
Check the contact at the joint of the 2nd image transfer assy and HV2. Clean the joint or correct
4
if necessary.
5 Change the transfer belt unit.
6 HV2 IP101 conduction check
7 Change HV2.
8 Change PRCB.

18.3.16 P-31: PC home sensor (K) malfunction
Relevant parts
K PC encoder sensor/1 (PC45) Transport drive assy
K PC encoder sensor/2 (PC46) Printer control board (PRCB)
Step Action
1 Perform the faulty sensor check procedure. *1
Check the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, for installed position and
2
proper connector connection.
3 Wipe the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, clean of dirt if any.
4 If P-31 persists, change the transport drive assy.
5 Change PRCB.
*1: Faulty sensor check procedure

1. Open the lower front door and turn ON the main power switch of the machine.
2. Call the [Sensor Check] screen to the screen by way of Service Mode.
For details how to display, see “Adjustment /Setting.”
See P.552
3. Close the lower front door and start [Stabilizer].
4. During the stabilizer sequence, check to see if the values of the phase detection sen-
sors (K PC encoder sensor/1 and K PC encoder sensor/2) change.
5. A sensor is faulty if its value does not change.
18.3.17 P-32: Heating roller temperature sensor /1 temperature detection failure
Relevant parts
Fusing unit Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
Step Action
1 Wipe the TEMS1 clean of dirt if any.
<Cleaning procedure>
• Clear away a dirt or a foreign object on the sensor with a cotton swab.
• When a dirt is left even if you cleaned the sensor by above procedure, clear away a dirt or a
foreign object on the sensor using a cotton swab dampened with the alcohol.
And, wipe off the sensor with a dry cotton swab afterwards.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 Check the TEMS1 for installed position and proper connector connection.
3 Check the connection of the fusing unit.
4 Change TEMS1.
5 Change fusing unit.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE
19. TROUBLE CODE

• The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code on the control panel.
A0P0F4E514DA
19.2 Trouble resetting procedure

• Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble
code.
* List of malfunction resetting procedures
Trouble code rank Resetting procedures

• Trouble reset
Rank A
* Refer to the following procedure.
Rank B • Opening/closing the lower front door
Rank C • Turning main power switch OFF/ON
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.2.1 Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key
A. Use
• If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch
OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the lower front door, clear the status of the
machine.
• To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and
ON again, or opening and closing the lower front door in case of a trouble.
B. Procedure
2. Turn main power switch ON while pressing the Utility/Counter key.
3. Touch [Trouble Reset].
4. Check to make sure that [OK] is displayed and the it has been reset.
5. After turning off the main power switch, turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and
check if the machine starts correctly.

19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
19.3 Trouble isolation function

• The trouble isolation function enables you to control MFP temporarily isolating faulty
units and options where the trouble isolation function can be applied when trouble
occurs. This allows you to continue using the other units that are not affected and reduce
down time that continues until CE resolves the problem.
• This function can be selected for the following units and options.
Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, LCT, manual, Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling, Punch,
Post Inserter, Z fold, Staple, Scanner, ADF
• If a problem occurs with the units where the trouble isolation function can be applied, the
control panel displays a trouble code and a key with which you decide whether to con-
tinue using the MFP. When you press down the key, the control panel displays the units
that will be isolated as well as the next confirmation key with which you decide to con-
tinue.
• When you press down the confirmation key, the message on the control panel asks you
to turn OFF and ON the sub power switch. After turning OFF and ON the sub power
switch, the MFP starts operating, isolating the faulty units. The message on the control
panel also tells that the MFP is working, isolating the faulty units.
• To temporarily isolate faulty units and continue using the MFP with the trouble isolation
function, be sure to make the above mentioned control panel operation. The faulty units
cannot be automatically isolated.
NOTE
• The malfunction detection mechanism is not applied to units and options that are
being isolated.
19.4 List
Trouble iso-
Code Item Detection timing Rank
lation
C0104 Tray 3/4 feeder transpor- • The lock signal remains HIGH for a prede- Tray 3/4 B
tation motor failure to turn termined continuous period of time while the
motor remains stationary.
C0105 Tray 3/4 feeder transpor- • The lock signal remains LOW for a predeter- B
tation motor turning at mined continuous period of time while the
abnormal timing motor remains stationary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
C0202 Tray 1 feeder up/down • The tray 1 upper limit sensor is not blocked Tray 1 B
abnormality even after the lapse of a given period of time
after the lifting motion has been started.
C0216 LCT up/down abnormality • The Upper limit sensor (PS2) is not blocked LCT B
even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the paper lift-up operation began.

Trouble iso-
lation
C0301 Suction fan motor’s fail- • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
ure to turn determined continuous period of time while
the motor remains stationary.
C0351 Paper cooling fan trouble • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
determined continuous period of time while
C1003 PK communication error <When FS-526+PK-516 is installed> C
• When a communication error is detected
between the FS control board (FSCB) and
the punch control board (PKDB).
C1004 FNS communication error • When the FS control board (FSCB) is C
receiving data, a communication error is
detected.
C1005 ZU communication error • When the ZU control board (ZUCB) is C
receiving data, a communication error is
detected.
C1080 • Undetectable
C1081 SD communication error <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed> Half-Fold/ C
• When a communication error is detected Tri-Fold/
between the FS control board (FSCB) and Center Sta-
the SD drive board (SDDB). pling
C1102 Main tray Up/Down motor <When FS-526 is installed> B
malfunction • The main tray top surface sensor (PS4) is
turned neither ON nor OFF even after the
set period of time has elapsed while the
main tray lift motor (M5) is energized.
• The staple paper exit top surface sensor
(PS7) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
after the set period of time has elapsed
while the main tray lift motor (M5) is ener-
gized.
C1103 Side-staple front adjust <When FS-526 is installed> B
drive motor malfunction • The 2 staples alignment motor home sen-
TROUBLESHOOTING
sor/F (PS17) is not turned ON even after the
Alignment plate motor/F (M11) is energized.
C1104 Paper exit roller drive <When FS-526 is installed> B
motor malfunction • The exit roller motor (M4) lock signal
remains set to H for a set period of time
while the exit roller motor (M4) is turning.
C1105 Paper exit auxiliary roller <When FS-526 is installed> B
motor malfunction • The paper output roller home sensor (PS10)
is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the
paper output roller motor (M6) is turned ON.

Trouble iso-
lation
C1106 Side-staple stapler drive <When FS-526 is installed> Staple B
malfunction • The stapler position sensor/1/2/3/4 (PS50/
PS/51/PS52/PS53) is turned neither ON nor
elapsed after the 2 staples stapler move-
ment motor (M13) is turned ON.
C1108
C1109 Side-staple stapler motor <When FS-526 is installed> Staple B
drive malfunction • The home sensor in the staple unit does not
turn ON even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the side-staple 2 staples sta-
pler motor (M14) turned ON.
C1110 Center-staple head roller • The stapler home sensor (PS33) is turned Half-Fold/ B
motor malfunction neither ON nor OFF even after the set Tri-Fold
period of time has elapsed after the staple Center
motor (M24) is turned ON. Stapling
C1112 Center-staple clinch roller <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Staple, B
motor malfunction • The stapler home sensor (PS33) is not Half-Fold/
turned ON even after the set period of time Tri-Fold
has elapsed while the clincher motor (M25) Center
is energized. Stapling
C1113 Center-staple lead edge <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> B
stopper motor malfunction • The leading edge stopper home sensor
after the set period of time has elapsed after
the leading edge stopper motor (M22) is
turned ON.
• The leading edge stopper home sensor
turned ON.
TROUBLESHOOTING
C1114 Center-staple front adjust <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B

drive motor malfunction • The center staple alignment motor home Tri-Fold
sensor/F (PS30) is turned neither ON nor Center
OFF even after the set period of time has Stapling
elapsed after the center staple alignment
motor /F (M20) is turned ON.
• The center staple alignment home sensor/F
the center staple alignment motor/F (M24) is
turned ON.

Trouble iso-
lation
C1115 Center-staple knife drive <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
motor malfunction • The center fold knife home sensor (PS34) is Tri-Fold
not turned ON even after the set period of Center
time has elapsed while the center fold knife Stapling
motor (M32) is energized.
• The center fold plate home sensor (PS47) is
set period of time has elapsed after the cen-
ter fold plate motor (M26) is turned ON.
C1116 Center-staple transfer <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
motor malfunction • The transport motor (M33) does not reach Tri-Fold
the specified speed even after the set period Center
of time has elapsed after it starts to operate. Stapling
• The center fold roller motor (M25) does not
reach the specified speed even after the set
period of time has elapsed after it starts to
operate.
C1124 Sheet feeder up/down <When FS-526+PI-505 is installed> Post B
drive failure (lower) • The tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) or Inserter
tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210) are not
turned ON even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the tray lift motor /Lw
(M202) is energized.
C1125 Sheet feeder up/down <When FS-526+PI-505 is installed> Post B
drive failure (upper) • The tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205) or Inserter
tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204) are not
has elapsed after the tray lift motor /Up
C1127 Punch shift motor drive <When FS-526+PK-516 is installed> Punch B
malfunction • The PK punch home sensor (PS301) is not
has elapsed while the punch drive motor
TROUBLESHOOTING
C1130 1st stopper motor drive <When FS-526+ZU-606 is installed> Z fold B
malfunction • The 1st folding stopper home sensor
(PS603) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the 1st
stopper motor (M602) starts searching
home position.
C1131 2nd stopper motor drive <When FS-526+ZU-606 is installed> Z fold B
malfunction • The 2nd stopper home sensor (PS604) is
time has elapsed after the 2nd stopper
motor (M603) starts searching home posi-
tion.

Trouble iso-
lation
C1132 Output OP punch driving <When FS-526+PK-516 is installed> Punch B
motor malfunction • The PK punch oscillating home sensor
after the set period of time has elapsed
while the punch oscillating motor (M302) is
energized.
C1133 Punch shift motor drive <When FS-526+ZU-606 is installed> Z fold B
malfunction • The punch shift home sensor (PS605) is not
turned ON, or is not turned OFF after it is
turned ON, even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the punch shift motor
(M605) starts searching its home position.
C1134 Main motor cooling fan <When FS-526+ZU-606 is installed> B
drive malfunction • Even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the main motor cooling fan
(FM601) is turned ON, the FM601 EM signal
is faulty and the fan is turned OFF; the sig-
nal is faulty after each of the following three
trials.
C1135 Punch motor drive mal- <When FS-526+ZU-606 is installed> B
function • The punch motor (M604) is not turned OFF
after it is turned ON.
C1136 Punch switchover motor <When FS-526+ZU-606 is installed> Z fold B
drive malfunction • The punch switchover switch (MS601) is not
turned OFF from the ON position, or not
turned ON from the OFF position, even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the
punch switchover motor (M608) is turned
ON.
C1140 Side-staple rear adjust <When FS-526 is installed> B
drive motor malfunction • The 2 staples alignment motor home sen-
sor/R (PS18) is not turned ON even after the
TROUBLESHOOTING
alignment plate motor/R (M12) is energized.

C1141 Side-staple paddle roller <When FS-526 is installed> Staple B
motor malfunction • The paddle motor (M16) lock signal remains
set to H for a set period of time while the
paddle motor (M16) is turning.
C1142 Side-staple trailing pad- <When FS-526 is installed> Staple B
dle up-down motor mal- • The trail edge paddle home sensor (PS20)
function is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the trail
edge paddle motor (M15) is turned ON.
C1143 Side-staple rewinding <When FS-526 is installed> B
paddle up-down motor • The rewind paddle home sensor (PS16) is
malfunction turned neither ON nor OFF even after the
rewind paddle motor (M18) is turned ON.

Trouble iso-
lation
C1144 Spare stacker board drive <When FS-526 is installed> B
motor malfunction • The stacker plate home sensor (PS11) is
stacker plate motor (M17) is energized.
C1145 End stopper drive motor <When FS-526 is installed> B
malfunction • The 2 staples trail edge stopper home sen-
sor (PS22) is turned neither ON nor OFF
after the 2 staples trail edge stopper motor
(M19) is turned ON.
• The 2 staples trail edge stopper standby
sensor/1 (PS23) is turned neither ON nor
elapsed after the 2 staples trail edge stop-
per motor (M19) is turned ON.
• The 2 staples trail edge stopper standby
sensor/2 (PS42) is turned neither ON nor
elapsed after the 2 staples trail edge stop-
per motor (M19) is turned ON.
C1150 Center-staple rear adjust <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
drive motor malfunction • The center staple alignment motor home Tri-Fold
sensor/R (PS31) is turned neither ON nor Center
OFF even after the set period of time has Stapling
elapsed after the center staple alignment
motor /R (M21) is turned ON.
• The center staple alignment home sensor/R
the center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
is turned ON.
C1151 Center-staple stapler <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
drive motor malfunction • The stapler home sensor (PS33) is turned Tri-Fold
neither ON nor OFF even after the set Center
TROUBLESHOOTING
period of time has elapsed after the center Stapling
staple motor (M23) is turned ON.
C1152 Center-staple paper exit <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
motor malfunction • The exit motor (M34) lock signal remains set Tri-Fold
to H for a set period of time while the exit Center
motor (M34) is turning. Stapling
C1153 Center-staple paddle up- <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
down motor malfunction • The paddle home sensor/C (PS37) is turned Tri-Fold
staple paddle lift motor/C (M26) is turned
ON.

Trouble iso-
lation
C1156 Center-staple paddle <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
roller motor malfunction • The center staple paddle/T (M29) lock sig- Tri-Fold
(trailing edge) nal remains set to L for a set period of time Center
while the center staple paddle/T (M29) is Stapling
turning.
• Even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the upper paddle motor (M21)
starts running, a change of motor lock signal
is not detected and neither the paper detec-
tion sensor/1 (PS43) nor the paper detec-
tion sensor/2 (PS44) is turned ON.
C1157 Center-staple paddle <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
roller motor malfunction • The center staple paddle/C (M30) lock sig- Tri-Fold
(middle) nal remains set to L for a set period of time Center
while the center staple paddle/C (M30) is Stapling
turning.
C1182 Shift motor drive malfunc- <When JS-504 is installed> Staple B
tion • The shift home sensor (PS6) is not blocked
the shift motor (M2) is turned ON (start of
moving to the home position.)
• The shift home sensor (PS6) is not
unblocked twice in a row after the set period
of time has elapsed after the shift motor
(M2) is turned ON (start of moving to the
shift position.)
• When moving to the front (home) position:
The tray 1 shift home sensor (PS25) is not
has elapsed after the tray 1 shift motor
(M16) is turned ON.
• When moving to the rear (shift) position:
The tray 1 shift home sensor (PS25) is not
turned OFF even after the set period of time
TROUBLESHOOTING
has elapsed after the tray 1 shift motor

(M16) is turned ON.
C1183 Elevate drive malfunction <When FS-527 is installed> B
• During downward movement, the tray 1
upper limit sensor (PS24) is turned OFF and
the tray 1 lower limit sensor (PS21) is turned
ON.
• The elevate motor (M15) lock signal remains
set to H for a set period of time while the
elevate motor (M15) is turning.
• The tray1 upper position switch (SW2) is
has elapsed while the elevate motor (M15)
is energized.
• The tray1 lower position switch (SW3) is
has elapsed while the elevate motor (M15)
is energized.

Trouble iso-
lation
C1190 Alignment plate motor <When FS-527 is installed> B
drive malfunction • The alignment plate home sensor (PS17) is
alignment plate motor (M13) is turned ON.
C1194 Leading edge stopper <When FS-527 is installed> Staple B
motor drive malfunction • The leading edge stopper home sensor
turned ON.
C11A0 • Undetectable
C11A1 Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ <When FS-527 is installed> B
retraction malfunction • The exit roller pressure sensor (PS12) is
set period of time has elapsed after the exit
roller retraction motor (M9) is turned ON.
C11A2 Accommodation roller <When FS-527 is installed> B
pressure/ retraction mal- • The accommodation roller pressure sensor
function (PS13) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
the accommodation roller retraction motor
(M10) is turned ON.
C11A3 • Undetectable
C11A4
C11A5
C11A6
C11A7 Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ <When JS-603 is installed> B
retraction malfunction • The exit roller pressure sensor (PS12) is
set period of time has elapsed after the exit
roller retraction motor (M9) is turned ON.
TROUBLESHOOTING
C11B0 Stapler movement drive <When FS-527 is installed> Staple B
malfunction • During home position search, neither the
stapler home sensor/1 (PS18) nor the sta-
pler home sensor/2 (PS19) is turned ON or
elapsed after the stapler movement motor
(M11) is turned ON.
C11B1 • Undetectable
C11B2 Staple drive malfunction <When FS-527 is installed> Staple B
• The stapler home sensor is turned neither
ON nor OFF even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the stapler motor is
turned ON.

Trouble iso-
lation
C11B5 Saddle stapler drive mal- <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed> Half-Fold/ B
function • The center stapler home sensor is turned Tri-Fold
stapler motor is turned ON.
C11C0 Punch motor drive mal- <When FS-527+PK-517 is installed> B
function • The punch home sensor/1 (PS100) is not
has elapsed while the punch motor/1
C11D0 • Undetectable
C11E0 Duplex path switching <When FS-527 is installed> B
motor drive malfunction • The duplex path switching sensor (PS3) is
duplex path switching motor (M2) is turned
ON.
Finisher route change <When JS-504 is installed> B
malfunction • The route change home sensor (PS4) is not
blocked after the set period of time has
elapsed after the route change motor (M3)
is turned ON (start of shifting to the lower
tray route.)
• The route change home sensor (PS4) is not
unblocked after the set period of time has
elapsed after the route change motor (M3)
is turned ON (start of shifting to the upper
tray route.)
C11E1 Upper lower path switch- <When FS-527 is installed> B
ing motor drive malfunc- • The upper lower path switching sensor
tion (PS26) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
the upper lower path switching motor (M6) is
turned ON.
TROUBLESHOOTING
C11E2 Tray1 path switching <When FS-527 is installed> B

motor drive malfunction • The tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the
tray1 path switching motor (M8) is turned
ON.
C1432
C1434
C1453
C2101 PC charge cleaning • During backward movement of the cleaner, B
malfunction the charging cleaner home sensor is not
blocked after a predetermined period of time
has elapsed.

Trouble iso-
lation
C2151 Secondary transfer roller • The pressure welding alienation sensor B
pressure welding alien- doesn’t turn OFF (retracting) even after the
ation lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd
image transfer pressure retraction motor
has started rotating during the 2nd image
transfer roller is retracting.
• The pressure welding alienation sensor
doesn’t turn ON (pressuring) even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd
image transfer pressure retraction motor
has started rotating during the 2nd image
transfer roller is pressuring.
C2152 Transfer belt pressure • At the completion of transfer belt pressure/ B
welding alienation retraction operations, the pressure welding
alienation sensor/K or the pressure welding
alienation sensor/color is not in the status
corresponding to each of the transfer belt
pressure/retraction operations. See the
table below.
• Even after a predetermined period of time
has elapsed since the transfer belt starts
pressure/retraction operation, the pressure
welding alienation sensor/K or the pressure
welding alienation sensor/color is not in the
status corresponding to each of the transfer
belt pressure/retraction operations. See the
table below.
Sensor status
Operation Position
(K: Color)
• Color and K
retraction o K ON (not
pressure K
• Color and K
blocked)
pressure
pressure o K :OFF (blocked)
pressure
• Color and K
TROUBLESHOOTING
retraction o
Color and K Color ON (not
pressure and K blocked):ON
• K pressure o pressure (not blocked)
Color and K
pressure
• K pressure o
Color and K
retraction Color
OFF (blocked):
• Color and K and K
pressure OFF (blocked)
retraction
oColor and K
retraction

Trouble iso-
lation
C2160 PC charge (C) • When electrostatic charge output is ON, B
malfunction electrostatic charge leak detection system
C2161 PC charge (M) continues to detect leaks for a predeter- B
malfunction mined period of time.
In this case, C2164 is displayed at the first
C2162 PC charge (Y) detection and then after the trouble is reset, B
malfunction a leak IU identification process is executed.
C2163 PC charge (K) Then the trouble code corresponding to the B
malfunction IU color is displayed.
C2164 PC charge malfunction B
C2204 Waste toner agitating • The waste toner agitating motor lock sensor B
motor’s failure to turn continues to be blocked or unblocked for a
predetermined period of time when the
motor is turning.
C2253 Color PC drum motor’s • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
failure to turn predetermined continuous period of time
while the motor is turning.
C2254 Color PC drum motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a B
turning at abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time
while the motor remains stationary.
C2255 Color developing motor’s • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
C2256 Color developing motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a B
C2257 Cleaner motor’s failure to • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
turn predetermined continuous period of time
C2258 Cleaner motor’s turning at • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a B
abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time
C2259 K developing motor’s • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
TROUBLESHOOTING

C225A K developing motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a B
C225B K PC drum motor’s failure • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
to turn predetermined continuous period of time
C225C K PC drum motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a B
C2350 Toner suction fan motor’s • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
C2353 IU cooling fan motor’s • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B

Trouble iso-
lation
C2354 Rear side cooling fan • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
motor’s failure to turn predetermined continuous period of time
C2551 Abnormally low toner • When sampling data is determined in TC B
density detected cyan ratio calculation control, TCR sensor output
TCR sensor is higher than a predetermined value for a
predetermined number of times in a row
even though there is toner in the sub hop-
per.
C2552 Abnormally high toner • TC ratio in the developing unit which is B
density detected cyan determined by Toner replenishing amount
TCR sensor control mechanism, is a predetermined
value or more for a given number of times
consecutively.
density detected magenta ratio calculation control, TCR sensor output
per.
C2554 Abnormally high toner • TC ratio in the developing unit, which is B
density detected magenta determined by toner replenishing amount
consecutively.
density detected yellow ratio calculation control, TCR sensor output
per.
density detected yellow determined by toner replenishing amount
TROUBLESHOOTING
consecutively.
density detected black ratio calculation control, TCR sensor output
per.
density detected black determined by toner replenishing amount
consecutively.

Trouble iso-
lation
C2559 Cyan TCR sensor • TCR sensor automatic adjustment does not B
adjustment failure function properly, failing to adjust to an
C255A Magenta TCR sensor appropriate value. B
adjustment failure
C255B Yellow TCR sensor B
adjustment failure
C255C Black TCR sensor B
adjustment failure
C2561 Cyan TCR sensor failure • Alarm signals for a TCR sensor are B
C2562 Magenta TCR sensor detected more than the predetermined num- B
failure ber of times.
This detection is used for detecting discon-
C2563 Yellow TCR sensor failure nection of TCR sensor connector. B
C2564 Black TCR sensor failure B
C2650 Main backup media • Contact the responsible people of KMBT
access error before taking some countermeasures.
C2651 EEPROM access error • The re-written data, which has been read C
(IU C) out, checked and founded as error, is read
C2652 EEPROM access error out again and found as error. C
(IU M) • The error was found when reading out the
counter value.
C2653 EEPROM access error C
(IU Y)
C2654 EEPROM access error C
(DC K)
C2A14 Drum unit/K • The status with the new unit is not cleared C
new release failure after the new drum unit/K is set.
C2A21 Toner cartridge/C • The status with the new cartridge is not C
new release failure cleared after the new toner cartridge is set
C2A22 Toner cartridge/M C
new release failure
C2A23 Toner cartridge/Y C
new release failure
TROUBLESHOOTING
C2A24 Toner cartridge/K C

new release failure
C3101 Fusing roller separation • With the fusing roller being retracted, the B
failure pulse of the encoder sensor does not
change even after the specified period of
time has passed after the fusing pressure
retraction motor started rotating.
• With the fusing roller being pressed, the
encoder pulse sensor does not change even
after the specified period of time has passed
after the fusing pressure retraction motor
started rotating.
• With the pressure roller being pressed, the
pressure home sensor did not turn ON
(pressed) even after the fusing retraction
position sensor counted up the specified
number of pulse after the fusing pressure
retraction motor started rotating.

Trouble iso-
lation
C3102 Fusing roller failure to turn • When the IH power supply is turned ON, A
pulse signals are not input either of the
heating roller rotation sensor within a prede-
termined period of time.
C3201 Fusing motor failure to • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
turn predetermined continuous period of time
C3202 Fusing motor turning at • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a B
abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time
C3303 Fusing cooling fan motor/ • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for B
1 failure to turn a predetermined continuous period of time
C3424 Fusing heaters trouble • After warm-up operation starts, the soaking A
(soaking side) roller thermistor does not detect a tempera-
ture as high as a predetermined one though
a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
C3425 Fusing heaters trouble • After warm-up operation starts, the heating A
(NC sensor) roller temperature sensor/1 does not detect
a temperature as high as a predetermined
one though a predetermined period of time
has elapsed.
C3721 Fusing abnormally high • The heating roller temperature sensor/2 A
temperature detection continues to detect a temperature higher
(Center of the heating than a predetermined one for a predeter-
roller) mined period of time.
• The signal is turned ON to activate the hard
ratchet in the middle of the heating side.
TROUBLESHOOTING
(Edge of the heating than a predetermined one for a predeter-
roller) mined period of time.
ratchet at the edges of the heating side.
C3724 Fusing abnormally high • The soaking roller thermistor/1 continues to A
temperature detection detect a temperature higher than a predeter-
(soaking side) mined one for a predetermined period of
time.
ratchet on the soaking side.
(NS sensor) than a predetermined one for a predeter-

Trouble iso-
lation
C3822 Fusing abnormally low • The heating roller thermistor/2 continues to A
temperature detection detect a temperature lower than a predeter-
(Edge of the heating mined one for a predetermined period of
roller) time.
C3824 Fusing abnormally low • The soaking roller thermistor/1 continues to A
temperature detection detect a temperature lower than a predeter-
(soaking side) mined one for a predetermined period of
time.
C3825 Fusing abnormally low • The heating roller temperature sensor/1 A
temperature detection continues to detect a temperature lower
(NC sensor) than a predetermined one for a predeter-
C3921 Fusing sensor wire breaks • At the warm-up stage, the heating roller A
detection temperature sensor/2 voltage does not
(Center of the heating decrease by predetermined steps (tempera-
roller) ture rise) within a predetermined time.
detection temperature sensor/3 voltage does not
(Edge of the heating decrease by predetermined steps (tempera-
roller) ture rise) within a predetermined period of
time.
C3924 Fusing sensor wire breaks • At the warm-up stage, the soaking roller A
detection (soaking side) thermistor/1 voltage does not decrease by
predetermined steps (temperature rise)
within a predetermined period of time.
detection (NC sensor) temperature sensor/1 voltage does not
increase by predetermined steps (tempera-
ture rise) within a predetermined period of
time.
C392A Fusing sensor • While checking the contamination on the A
contamination heating roller temperature sensor/1,
(NC sensor) detected temperature of the heating roller
thermistor/1 exceeded the detected temper-
ature of the heating roller temperature sen-
TROUBLESHOOTING
sor/1 for over the predetermined value for

the predetermined period of time.
C3B02 IH malfunction (CPU) • A failure in communication with the fusing A
CPU continues for a predetermined period
of time.
C3B03 IH malfunction (monitor) • Though the IH heater is ON, this status can- A
not be detected mechanically. (IH heater
operation failure)
• Though the IH heater is OFF, mechanically,
the ON status is detected. (Malfunction of IH
heater operation)

Trouble iso-
lation
C3B05 IH temperature sensor • While the IH heater was on, IH temperature A
defect sensor was disconnected for more than the
predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was on, short circuit on
IH temperature sensor continued for more
than the predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was on, temperature
change occurred within the predetermined
period of time with over the predetermined
range, and they continued for more than the
predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was on, temperature
around the heat radiator stayed high for over
C3B06 IH surge error • While the IH heater was on, IH stopped due A
to input voltage which exceeded that of
surge detection voltage, and the surge
detection voltage continued for more than
C3B07 IH input power error • While the IH heater was on, input power A
stayed at the high voltage power detection
value or over for more than the predeter-
• While the IH heater was on, input power
was at the low power detection value or
under for more than the predetermined
period of time.
was at the high voltage detection value or
over for more than the predetermined period
of time.
was below the low voltage detection value or
period of time.
• While the IH heater was on, inverter power
TROUBLESHOOTING
stayed at the upper limit value or over for
more than the predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was on, output voltage
halt was detected.
C3B08 IH input voltage error • While the IH heater was on, input power B
was at the high voltage detection value or
over for more than the predetermined period
of time.
• While the IH heater was on, input voltage
was at the low power detection value or
period of time.
C4101 Polygon motor rotation • The polygon motor fails to turn stably even B
trouble after the lapse of a given period of time after
activating the polygon motor.
• Motor lock signal detects HIGH for a given
period time consecutively during the poly-
gon motor is rotating.

Trouble iso-
lation
C4301 PH cooling fan motor • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for B
failure to turn a predetermined continuous period of time
C4501 Laser malfunction • SOS signal is not detected even after the B
lapse of a given period of time after staring
the laser output.
• SOS signal is not detected for a given
period of time during printing or IDC sensor
adjustment.
C5104 Transfer belt motor’s • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a B
C5105 Transfer belt motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a B
C5304 IH cooling fan motor/1’s • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
failure to turn determined continuous period of time while
C5306 IH cooling fan motor/2’s • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
C5351 Power supply cooling fan • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
motor/1’s failure to turn determined continuous period of time while
C5354 Ozone ventilation fan • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
motor’s failure to turn determined continuous period of time while
C5356 Cooling fan motor’s • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
C5370 MFP control board cooling • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
fan motor’s failure to turn determined continuous period of time while
C5372 MFP control board CPU • Temperature failure of CPU on the MFP C
TROUBLESHOOTING
temperature failure board was detected.

Trouble iso-
lation
C6102 Drive system home • The scanner home sensor is unable to Scanner B
sensor malfunction detect the scanner located at its home posi-
tion.
• The scanner home sensor is unable to
detect a scanner even when the scanner
motor has been driven to move the scanner
over the maximum travelling distance.
• The scanner home sensor detects the scan-
ner when the scanner has moved the maxi-
mum travelling distance from the position, at
which it blocks the scanner home sensor.
C6103 Slider over running • The scanner home sensor detects the scan- B
ner at its home position during a period of
time that begins with the time when a pre-
scan command and a scan preparation
command are executed and ends when a
home return command is executed.
C6301 Optical cooling fan • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- B
motor’s failure to turn determined continuous period of time while
C6704 Image input time out • Image data is not input from the image pro- C
cessing board (IPB) to the printer control
board (PRCB).
C6751 CCD clamp/gain • The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a B
adjustment failure CCD clamp adjustment.
• The peak value of the output data is 64 or
less during a CCD gain adjustment.
C6752 ASIC clock input error • When starting the scanner, verification on C
(front side) reading and writing the predetermined value
C6753 ASIC clock input error for image processing ASIC on CCD board C
(back side) was conducted, and verification failure was
detected.
C6901 DSC board mount failure • When MFP detects that DSC board is not C
1 properly installed.
C6902 DSC Bus check NG1-1 • When DSC bus check detects an error. C
TROUBLESHOOTING
C6903 DSC Bus check NG1-2 C
C6911 Undetectable
C6912
C6913
C6F01 Scanner sequence • The original transport interval becomes Scanner C
trouble 1 shorter than the designed value due to an
original transport control error in original
reading in ADF.
C6F02 Reserved
C6F03 Reserved
C6F04 Reserved
C6F05 Reserved
C6F06 Reserved
C6F07 Reserved

Trouble iso-
lation
C6F08 Reserved
C6F09 Reserved
C6F0A Reserved
C6FDC Reserved
C8101 Before reading pressure • During a pressure motion being performed, B
welding alienation the read roller sensor (PS6) output does not
mechanism change from H to L.
• During a retraction motion being performed,
the read roller sensor (PS6) output does not
change from L to H.
C8102 Turn around pressure • During a pressure motion being performed, B
welding alienation trouble the reverse roller sensor (PS7) output does
not change from H to L.
• During a retraction motion being performed,
the reverse roller sensor (PS7) output does
not change from L to H.
C8103 Lift up mechanism trouble • The lift up upper sensor (PS16) is not turned B
(Upward movement) ON after a lapse of a given time after the lift-
up motor (M6) moves up (is turned forward).
C8104 Glass movement trouble • The glass home sensor (PS203) output B
does not change from H to L after a lapse of
a given time while the original glass moving
motor (M202) is working.
• The glass home sensor (PS203) output
does not change from L to H after a lapse of
a given time while the original glass moving
motor (M202) is working.
C8105 Undetectable
C8106 Lift up mechanism • The lift up lower sensor (PS15) is not turned B
failure (Downward move- ON after a lapse of a given time after the lift-
ment) up motor (M6) goes down (is turned back-
ward).
C8302 Cooling fan failure • The lock signal continues to detect H during B
a given time while the cooling fan (FM1) is
TROUBLESHOOTING
spinning
• The lock signal continues to detect L during
a given time while the cooling fan (FM1) is
during halts.
C8401 EEPROM failure • EEPROM does not access normally C
C9401 Exposure turning on the • The output from the CCD sensor is a prede- Scanner A
lamp trouble detection termined value or less during CCD sensor
gain adjustment.
C9402 Exposure turning on the • The average output value of the CCD sen- Scanner A
lamp abnormally sor with the scanner at its standby position
detection is a predetermined value or more at the end
of a scan job.
CA051 Standard controller • The controller of the printer control board C
configuration failure (PRCB) is faulty.
CA052 Controller hardware error • A controller hardware error is detected in C
the network I/F.

Trouble iso-
lation
CA053 Controller start failure • A controller start failure is detected in the C
controller interface.
CB001 FAX board error 1 See the FK-502 Service Manual. C
CB002 FAX board error 2 C
CB003 FAX board error 3 C
CB051 FAX board mount failure C
line 1
CB052 FAX board mount failure C
line 2
CB110 FAX driver error: Instance C
generation error or
observer registration error
CB111 FAX driver error: C
Configuration space ini-
tialization NG
Semaphore acquisition,
release error
Sequence error among
main body tasks
CB114 FAX driver error: Message C
queue control error
CB115 FAX driver error: Main C
body - sequence error
among FAX boards
CB116 FAX driver error: FAX C
board nonresponse
(Nonresponse after initial-
ization)
CB117 FAX driver error: ACK C
waiting timeout error
TROUBLESHOOTING
CB118 FAX driver error: Receiv- C
ing undefined frame
CB119 FAX driver error: DMA C
transfer error
CB120 JC soft error C
CB122 Device error C
(GA LOCAL SRAM)
CB123 Device error (DRAM) C
CB125 Device error (GA) C
CB126 Timeout error due to non- C
response from DC during
suspension process
response from CC during
suspension process

Trouble iso-
lation
CB128 Timeout error due to non- See the FK-502 Service Manual. C
response from LINE dur-
ing suspension process
response from file system/
file driver during
suspension process
CB130 MIF driver error: C
Driver soft error
Reception frame length
error from main
Reception frame header
error from main
CB133 MIF driver error: 232C i/f C
sequence error
CB134 MIF driver error: DPRAM C
i/f sequence error
CTL/STL register error
CB136 MIF driver error: AKC C
waiting timeout
RESET reception
CB140 MSG I/F Error with JC C
CB141 I/F error with main: I/F C
error with driver
CB142 I/F error with main: Unde- C
fined command reception
CB143 I/F error with main: Com- C
mand frame length error
TROUBLESHOOTING
CB144 I/F error with main: C

Command parameter
length error
Undefined parameter
Command/response
sequence error
CB150 Line control: External C
class instance acquisition
error
CB151 Line control: Job start C
error (Starting job
parameter error/child job
generation error)

Trouble iso-
lation
CB152 Line control: Doc access See the FK-502 Service Manual. C
error (Report buf access
error)
CB153 Line control: Response C
wait timeout from external
task
CB154 Line control: Internal que C
table control error
(create/enque/deque)
CB160 1 destination control: C
Instance generation error
Timeout error
Interface error
Message que control error
Semaphore acquisition
release error
Observer registration
error
Reception resource check
error
Deployment error of send-
ing image information
Serialization error of
receiving image
TROUBLESHOOTING
Access error to quick
memory data
CB170 Page control: Internal que C
table control error
(create/enque/deque)
CB171 Page control: Instance C
generation error
CB172 Page control: C
Timeout error
CB173 Page control: C
Interface error
CB174 Page control: Semaphore C
acquisition release error
CB175 Page control: Observer C
registration error

Trouble iso-
lation
CB176 Page control: Unable to See the FK-502 Service Manual. C
check TTI domain
CB177 Page control: Error return C
from TTI rasterizer
CB178 Page control: Receiving C
job generation error
CB185 Page control: Receiving C
data size logic error
(Receiving data are not
multiples of dotline)
CB186 Page control: Image buf C
acquisition (alloc) error
CB187 Page control: Error return C
from compressor
CB188 Page control: BandBuf C
control error
(newInstance/get/free)
CC001 Vendor connection failure • It is detected that communications with the C
vendor are interrupted for a given period of
time or more with “Installed” selected for the
setting of vendor installation.
CC151 ROM contents error upon • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM C
startup (MSC) contents check of the MSC (PRCB) during
starting
startup (scanner) contents check of the IPB during starting.
startup (PRT) contents check of the mechanical control
board (MFPB) during starting.
CC155 Finisher ROM error • Data of flash ROM of the finishing options is C
determined to be faulty when the power is
turned ON.
CC156 ADF ROM error • Upgrade of the firmware has not been suc- C
TROUBLESHOOTING
cessful.
CC157 Finisher ROM error (RU) • When a communication error is detected C
between the main body and the horizontal
transport unit.
CC158 Finisher ROM error (ZU) • Data of flash ROM of the z-folding unit is C
turned ON.
startup (DSC1) contents check of the DSC board during
CC15A ROM contents error upon starting. C
startup (DSC2)
CC15B Finisher ROM error (SD) • Data of flash ROM of the saddle unit is C
turned ON.

Trouble iso-
lation
CC163 ROM contents error (PRT) • The wrong model of firmware is detected in C
the engine during the initial connection to
the engine is being checked.
CC164 ROM contents error • The wrong model of firmware is detected in C
(MSC) the MFP board when the main power switch
is turned ON.
CC165 ROM contents error • When the power is turned ON, DF control C
(ADF) board or firmware error is detected.
CC170 Dynamic link error during • A dynamic link error occurs in the program C
starting (AP0) on the MFP board due to an insufficient
CC171 Dynamic link error during memory space available, a ROM fault, or C
starting (AP1) other reason when the main power switch is
turned ON.
CC172 Dynamic link error during C
starting (AP2)
starting (AP3)
starting (AP4)
starting (LDR)
starting (IBR)
starting (IID)
starting (IPF)
starting (IMY)
CC185 Dynamic link error during • A dynamic link error occurs in the program C
starting (SPF) on the MFP board due to an insufficient
CC186 Dynamic link error during memory space available, a ROM fault, or C
starting (OAP) other reason when the main power switch is
turned ON.
TROUBLESHOOTING
CC190 Outline font load error • An error occurred while loading the outline C
font.
CD002 JOB RAM save error • The error in save of job data to the memory/ C
hard disk and its read error are detected.
CD004 Hard disk access error • Unable to communicate between the hard C
(connection failure) disk and printer control board (PRCB).
CD00F Hard disk data transfer • Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty. C
error
CD010 Hard disk unformat • Unformatted hard disk is connected. C
CD011 Hard disk out of • A hard disk that falls outside the specifica- C
specifications mounted tions is connected.
CD020 Hard disk verify error • The data abnormality is detected by the C
HDD verify check.
CD030 Hard disk management • The machine fails to read administrative C
information reading error information data saved in the hard disk.

Trouble iso-
lation
CD041 HDD command execution • The error occurred inside the hard disk. C
CD042 error C
Address Mark Not Found
CD043 C
CD044 C
CD045 C
CD046 C
CD047 HDD SCSI library error • The error occurred inside the hard disk. C
CD048 C
CD049 C
CD04A C
CD04B C
CD201 File memory mounting • The file memory is not mounted. C
error • The file has any abnormality.
CD202 Memory capacity • File memory capacity on the printer control C
discrepancy board (PRCB) is not enough.
• File memory capacity necessary for duplex
printing is not enough during duplex unit
mounting.
CD203 Memory capacity • File memory capacity on the printer control C
discrepancy 2 board (PRCB) is not enough.
CD211 PCI-SDRAM DMA • Hardware related to the transfer of memory C
operation failure image of the printer control board (PRCB)
fails to respond.
CD212 Compression/extraction • Hardware related to the BTC compression C
timeout detection function of the printer control board (PRCB)
fails to respond.
CD231 No Fax memory at FAX • The DIMM for FAX is not mounted during C
board mounting the FAX board is mounting.
• The FAX board is not mounted when the
FAX board mounting is set ON at Service
Mode.
TROUBLESHOOTING
CD241 Encryption ASIC error • Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is C

detected during the machine is starting.
CD242 Encryption ASIC • The faulty of the installation of encrypted C
mounting error ASIC is detected during the machine is
starting.
CD251 Undetectable
CD252 No relay circuit boards for • Relay circuit boards (VI-505) are not C
IC-412 mounting at IC- mounted when the IC-412 is set to mount
412 mount setting setting at Service Mode.
CD261 USB host board failure • When a failure is detected in USB host C
board included in the local interface kit.
• Non-standard USB device is connected.
CD271 i-Option activated and • While the i-Option is activated, the addi- C
additional memory not tional memory included in UK-203 is not
installed installed.

Trouble iso-
lation
CD272 i-Option activated and • While the i-Option is activated, the addi- C
additional memory and tional memory included in UK-203 and the
HDD not installed HDD are not installed.
CD3## NVRAM data error • Abnormality is detected by the abnormal
check of each NVRAM data.
CD370 NVRAM data multiple • Multiple errors (Over 5) are detected by the
errors abnormal check of each NVRAM data.
CDC## Trouble related to security • Contact the responsible people of KMBT
before taking some countermeasures.
CD401 NACK command incorrect • When abnormality is found in the communi- C
CD402 ACK command incorrect cation of controller. C
CD403 Checksum error C
CD404 Receiving packet C
incorrect
CD405 Receiving packet C
analysis error
CD406 ACK receiving timeout C
CD407 Retransmission timeout C
CE001 Abnormal message • MFP board (MFPB) is faulty. C
queue
CE002 Message and method C
parameter failure
CE003 Task error C
CE004 Event error C
CE005 Memory access error C
CE006 Header access error C
CE007 DIMM initialize error C
CEEE1 MFP board malfunction • MFP board (MFPB) is faulty. C
CEEE2 Scanner section • A scanner part is faulty. A
malfunction
TROUBLESHOOTING
CEEE3 Printer control board • Printer control board (PRCB) is faulty. A
malfunction

• The machine displays an abort code (CF###) on the control panel as it becomes unable
to process tasks properly through its software control.
• When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and
connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition.
Relevant electrical
Code Item components, units, and Rank
options
CF001 CT_singleList table abnormal An exceptional • MFP board (MFPB) C
CF004 CT_queue full abnormal instance occurred C
due to the unex-
CF011 Array link abnormal pected parameter in C
CF012 FAT link abnormal the system F/W. C
CF013 File size abnormal C
CF021 setDelayMessage Table
C
OverFlow
CF023 MsgQue OverFlow C
CF033 setDivTbl() limitation over C
CF112 Compress table OverFlow Compression
C
malfunctions
CF113 Compress table check Compression
C
malfunctions
CF211 setParameterBandColorPlane() An exceptional
Table OverFlow instance occurred
due to the unex- C
pected parameter in
the system F/W.
CF300 IR Bus Check Timeout Image transfer error
C
on IR input bus
CF411 Parity error Communication error C
CF421 Overrun error (between IR-sys- C
tems)
CF431 Parity error + Overrun error C
CF441 Framing error C
CF451 Parity error + Framing error C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CF461 Overrun error + Framing error C

CF471 Parity error + Overrun error +
C
Framing error
CF412 Parity error C
CF422 Overrun error C
CF442 Framing error C
CF452 Parity error + Framing error C
C
Framing error
CF510 Parity error C

Relevant electrical
options
CF520 Framing error Communication error • MFP board (MFPB) C
CF530 Parity error + Framing error (IR detected) C
CF540 Overrun error C
C
Framing error
CF580 Frame distortion of ADF C
CF600 Report receiving of print start • MFP board (MFPB)/
C
that is out of sequence Engine
CF601 Report receiving of paper feed-
C
ing that is out of sequence
CF604 Outside IF/Command queue • MFP board (MFPB) C
CF614 “Output sequence” queue An exceptional C
CF624 Panel LCD date queue instance occurred C
due to the unex-
CF704 Common data “Delete-waiting pected parameter in C
HDD accumulated job ID” queue the system F/W.
CF714 IRC/Command queue C
CF724 Engine/Command queue • MFP board (MFPB)/
C
Engine
CF734 Panel/Command queue • MFP board (MFPB)/
C
Control Panel
CF744 File memory transfer start-wait- • MFP board (MFPB)
C
ing command queue
CF754 File memory compression
C
requesting command queue
CF764 Panel instruction delete job
C
queue
CF774 Warning delete job queue C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CF784 Application instruction delete job
C
queue
CF794 Output page information for
C
duplex back side queue
CF7A4 Paper feed completion output
C
pate information queue
CF7B4 Exposure compaction output
C
page information queue
CF7C4 Pre-discharge completion output
C
page information queue
CF7D4 Touch panel coordinate data An exceptional
C
queue instance occurred
CF7E4 Direct key data queue due to the unex- C
pected parameter in
CF7F4 Scan sequence queue the system F/W. C

Relevant electrical
options
CF802 SIO sending port...ENG • MFP board (MFPB)/
C
Engine
CF806 SIO sending port...IRC • MFP board (MFPB) C
CF807 SIO sending port...ADF C
CF806
Unsupported option trouble
CF807
CF812 SIO sending port...Fiery • External controller I/F
C
board
CF815 SIO sending port...PIC/PIC terminal • MFP board (MFPB) C
CF8ED SIO sending port...EPNet C
CF902 • MFP board (MFPB)/
SIO receiving port...ENG C
Engine
CF906 SIO receiving port...IRC • MFP board (MFPB) C
CF907 SIO receiving port...ADF C
CF908
Unsupported option trouble
CF909
CF912 SIO receiving port...Fiery • External controller I/F
C
board
CF915 SIO receiving port...PIC/PIC terminal • MFP board (MFPB) C
CF9ED SIO receiving port...EPNet C
CFA01 getOneImgTransInfoFromTh() An exceptional
C
No applied thread instance occurred
CFA03 setTransBandAndRepeatNum() due to the unex-
pected parameter in C
error
the system F/W.
CFA06 getOneImgIndexNumFromTh()
C
No applied thread
CFA11 cancelTransExec() No applied
C
thread
CFA12 ImgTransInfo No space C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFA13 Clear Buffer Sequence error C

CFA14 Thread software error • Whole electrical compo-
C
nents, units, and options
CFA15 Global semaphore time out (ten seconds) • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFA16 Thread software error (upper parameter error) C
CFA50 IGC control error DB error C
CFA51 IGC internal error C
CFB00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFB01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 C

Relevant electrical
options
CFB04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04 • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFB0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 C
CFB0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 C
CFB0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 C
CFB0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 C
CFB0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 C
CFB0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 C
CFB1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 C
CFB1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 C
CFB1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 C
CFB1D ASIC200first sheet DMA29 C
CFB1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFB1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 C
CFB20 ASIC200 second sheet DMA00 C
CFB2A ASIC200 second sheet DMA10 C
CFB2B ASIC200 second sheet DMA11 C
CFB2C ASIC200 second sheet DMA12 C

Relevant electrical
options
CFB2D ASIC200 second sheet DMA13 • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFB2E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 C
CFB2F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 C
CFB3A ASIC200 second sheet DMA26 C
CFB3B ASIC200 second sheet DMA27 C
CFB3C ASIC200 second sheet DMA28 C
CFB3D ASIC200 second sheet DMA29 C
CFB3E ASIC200 second sheet DMA30 C
CFB3F ASIC200 second sheet DMA31 C
CFB40 ASIC200 third sheet DMA00 C
TROUBLESHOOTING

CFB4A ASIC200 third sheet DMA10 C
CFB4B ASIC200 third sheet DMA11 C
CFB4C ASIC200 third sheet DMA12 C
CFB4D ASIC200 third sheet DMA13 C
CFB4E ASIC200 third sheet DMA14 C
CFB4F ASIC200 third sheet DMA15 C

Relevant electrical
options
CFB56 ASIC200 third sheet DMA22 • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFB5A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 C
CFB5B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 C
CFB5C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 C
CFB5D ASIC200 third sheet DMA29 C
CFB5E ASIC200 third sheet DMA30 C
CFB5F ASIC200 third sheet DMA31 C
CFB60 ASIC7 DMA A C
CFB71 ASIC200 second sheet interruption C
CFB72 ASIC200 third sheet interruption C
CFB80 ASIC200 first sheet common register setting C
CFB81 ASIC200 second sheet common register setting C
CFB82 ASIC200 third sheet common register setting C
CFBA0 ASIC200 first sheet BTC compression/extension unit C
CFBA1 ASIC200 second sheet BTC compression/extension
C
unit
CFBA2 ASIC200 third sheet BTC compression/extension unit C
CFC00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 error interruption C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFC0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 error interruption C
CFC0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 error interruption C
CFC0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 error interruption C
CFC0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 error interruption C
CFC0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 error interruption C
CFC0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 error interruption C

Relevant electrical
options
CFC15 ASIC200 first sheet DMA21 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFC1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 error interruption C
CFC1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 error interruption C
CFC1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 error interruption C
CFC1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 error interruption C
CFC1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 error interruption C
CFC1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 error interruption C
CFC20 ASIC200 watchdog timer error interruption C
ASIC200 first sheet image output interface 1 had under-
CFC21 C
run
CFC22 ASIC200 first sheet image input interface had
C
overflow
CFC23 ASIC200 first sheet LCD output interface had
C
underrun
CFC24 ASIC200 first sheet JBIG core detected unknown
C
marker
CFC25 ASIC200 first sheet JBIG core detected SC count
C
overflow
CFC26 ASIC200 first sheet SDC slave illegal access error
C
occurred
CFC27 ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had
C
Completer Abort
C
Unsupported Request
C
TROUBLESHOOTING
Completion Timeout
CFC2A ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had
C
Poisoned TLP
CFC2B ASIC200 first sheet memory target access had
C
Unsupported Request
CFC2C ASIC200 first sheet memory target access had
C
Poisoned TLP
CFC2D ASIC200 first sheet config target access had
C
Unsupported Request
CFC2E ASIC200 first sheet config target access had Poisoned
C
TLP
CFC30 ASIC200 second sheet DMA00 error interruption C

Relevant electrical
options
CFC33 ASIC200 second sheet DMA03 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFC3A ASIC200 second sheet DMA10 error interruption C
CFC3B ASIC200 second sheet DMA11 error interruption C
CFC3C ASIC200 second sheet DMA12 error interruption C
CFC3D ASIC200 second sheet DMA13 error interruption C
CFC3E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 error interruption C
CFC3F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 error interruption C
CFC4A ASIC200 second sheet DMA26 error interruption C
CFC4B ASIC200 second sheet DMA27 error interruption C
CFC4C ASIC200 second sheet DMA28 error interruption C
CFC4D ASIC200 second sheet DMA29 error interruption C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFC4E ASIC200 second sheet DMA30 error interruption C
CFC4F ASIC200 second sheet DMA31 error interruption C
CFC50 ASIC200 second sheet watchdog time error interruption C
ASIC200 second sheet image output interface 1 had
CFC51 C
underrun
ASIC200 second sheet image input interface had over-
CFC52 C
flow
ASIC200 second sheet LCD output interface had
CFC53 C
underrun
ASIC200 second sheet JBIG core detected unknown
CFC54 C
marker
ASIC200 second sheet JBIG core detected SC counter
CFC55 C
overflow

Relevant electrical
options
ASIC200 second sheet SDC slave had illegal access • MFP board (MFPB)
CFC56 C
error
ASIC200 second sheet memory master access had
CFC57 C
Completer Abort
CFC58 C
Unsupported Request
CFC59 C
Completion Timeout
CFC5A C
Poisoned TLP
ASIC200 second sheet memory target access had
CFC5B C
Unsupported Request
ASIC200 second sheet memory target access had
CFC5C C
Poisoned TLP occurred
ASIC200 second sheet config target access had
CFC5D C
Unsupported Request
ASIC200 second sheet config target access had
CFC5E C
Poisoned TLP
CFC60 ASIC200 third sheet DMA00 error interruption C
CFC6A ASIC200 third sheet DMA10 error interruption C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFC6B ASIC200 third sheet DMA11 error interruption C

CFC6C ASIC200 third sheet DMA12 error interruption C
CFC6D ASIC200 third sheet DMA13 error interruption C
CFC6E ASIC200 third sheet DMA14 error interruption C
CFC6F ASIC200 third sheet DMA15 error interruption C

Relevant electrical
options
CFC79 ASIC200 third sheet DMA25 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFC7A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 error interruption C
CFC7B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 error interruption C
CFC7C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 error interruption C
CFC7D ASIC200 third sheet DMA29 error interruption C
CFC7E ASIC200 third sheet DMA30 error interruption C
CFC7F ASIC200 third sheet DMA31 error interruption C
CFC80 ASIC200 third sheet watchdog timer error interruption C
ASIC200 third sheet image output interface 1 had
CFC81 C
underrun
ASIC200 third sheet image input interface had
CFC82 C
overflow
ASIC200 third sheet LCD output interface had
CFC83 C
underrun
ASIC200 third sheet JBIG core detected unknown
CFC84 C
marker
CFC85 ASIC200 third sheet JBIG core had SC count overflow C
CFC86 ASIC200 third sheet SDC slave had illegal access error C
ASIC200 third sheet memory master access had
CFC87 C
Completer Abort
CFC88 C
Unsupported Request
CFC89 C
Completion Timeout
CFC8A C
Poisoned TLP
ASIC200 third sheet memory target access had
CFC8B C
Unsupported Request
ASIC200 third sheet memory target access had
CFC8C C
TROUBLESHOOTING
Poisoned TLP
ASIC200 third sheet config target access had
CFC8D C
Unsupported Request
ASIC200 third sheet config target access had Poisoned
CFC8E C
TLP
CFCC4 CPS2007 slave read data parity error occurred C
CFCD0 PIC2007 PCI slave illegal access error occurred C
CFCD1 PIC2007 address parity error occurred C
CFCD2 PIC2007 slave write data parity error occurred C
CFCD3 PIC2007 slave read data parity error occurred C
CFCE0 ASIC22 watchdog timer error occurred C
CFCE1 ASIC22 local bus error occurred C
CFCE2 ASIC22 another type of error occurred C

Relevant electrical
options
CFD00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFD01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 time out C
CFD0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 time out C
CFD1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 time out C
CFD1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 time out C
CFD1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 time out C
CFD1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 time out C
CFD1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 time out C
CFD1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 time out C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFD20 ASIC200 second sheet DMA00 time out C

CFD2A ASIC200 second sheet DMA10 time out C
CFD2B ASIC200 second sheet DMA11 time out C
CFD2C ASIC200 second sheet DMA12 time out C
CFD2D ASIC200 second sheet DMA13 time out C

Relevant electrical
options
CFD2E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFD2F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 time out C
CFD3A ASIC200 second sheet DMA26 time out C
CFD3B ASIC200 second sheet DMA27 time out C
CFD3C ASIC200 second sheet DMA28 time out C
CFD3D ASIC200 second sheet DMA29 time out C
CFD3E ASIC200 second sheet DMA30 time out C
CFD3F ASIC200 second sheet DMA31 time out C
CFD40 ASIC200 third sheet DMA00 time out C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFD4A ASIC200 third sheet DMA10 time out C
CFD4B ASIC200 third sheet DMA11 time out C
CFD4C ASIC200 third sheet DMA12 time out C
CFD4D ASIC200 third sheet DMA13 time out C
CFD4E ASIC200 third sheet DMA14 time out C
CFD4F ASIC200 third sheet DMA15 time out C

Relevant electrical
options
CFD57 ASIC200 third sheet DMA23 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFD5A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 time out C
CFD5B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 time out C
CFD5C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 time out C
CFD5D ASIC200 third sheet DMA29 time out C
CFD5E ASIC200 third sheet DMA30 time out C
CFD5F ASIC200 third sheet DMA31 time out C
CFDA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out C
CFDA1 ASIC7 DMA_C time out C
CFDA2 ASIC7 DMA_D time out C
CFE00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out C
CFE0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 time out C
CFE0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 time out C
CFE0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 time out C
CFE0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 time out C
CFE0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 time out C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFE0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 time out C

CFE1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 time out C
CFE1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 time out C
CFE1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 time out C

Relevant electrical
options
CFE1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFE1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 time out C
CFE1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 time out C
CFE20 ASIC200 second sheet DMA00 time out C
CFE2A ASIC200 second sheet DMA10 time out C
CFE2B ASIC200 second sheet DMA11 time out C
CFE2C ASIC200 second sheet DMA12 time out C
CFE2D ASIC200 second sheet DMA13 time out C
CFE2E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 time out C
CFE2F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 time out C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFE3A ASIC200 second sheet DMA26 time out C
CFE3B ASIC200 second sheet DMA27 time out C
CFE3C ASIC200 second sheet DMA28 time out C
CFE3D ASIC200 second sheet DMA29 time out C
CFE3E ASIC200 second sheet DMA30 time out C
CFE3F ASIC200 second sheet DMA31 time out C
CFE40 ASIC200 third sheet DMA00 time out C

Relevant electrical
options
CFE46 ASIC200 third sheet DMA06 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFE4A ASIC200 third sheet DMA10 time out C
CFE4B ASIC200 third sheet DMA11 time out C
CFE4C ASIC200 third sheet DMA12 time out C
CFE4D ASIC200 third sheet DMA13 time out C
CFE4E ASIC200 third sheet DMA14 time out C
CFE4F ASIC200 third sheet DMA15 time out C
CFE5A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 time out C
CFE5B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 time out C
CFE5C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 time out C
CFE5D ASIC200 third sheet DMA29 time out C
CFE5E ASIC200 third sheet DMA30 time out C
CFE5F ASIC200 third sheet DMA31 time out C
CFF00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out C
TROUBLESHOOTING

CFF0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 time out C
CFF0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 time out C
CFF0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 time out C
CFF0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 time out C
CFF0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 time out C

Relevant electrical
options
CFF0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFF1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 time out C
CFF1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 time out C
CFF1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 time out C
CFF1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 time out C
CFF1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 time out C
CFF1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 time out C
CFF20 ASIC200 second sheet DMA00 time out C
TROUBLESHOOTING
CFF2A ASIC200 second sheet DMA10 time out C
CFF2B ASIC200 second sheet DMA11 time out C
CFF2C ASIC200 second sheet DMA12 time out C
CFF2D ASIC200 second sheet DMA13 time out C
CFF2E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 time out C
CFF2F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 time out C

Relevant electrical
options
CFF38 ASIC200 second sheet DMA24 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C
CFF3A ASIC200 second sheet DMA26 time out C
CFF3B ASIC200 second sheet DMA27 time out C
CFF3C ASIC200 second sheet DMA28 time out C
CFF3D ASIC200 second sheet DMA29 time out C
CFF3E ASIC200 second sheet DMA30 time out C
CFF3F ASIC200 second sheet DMA31 time out C
CFF40 ASIC200 third sheet DMA00 time out C
CFF4A ASIC200 third sheet DMA10 time out C
CFF4B ASIC200 third sheet DMA11 time out C
CFF4C ASIC200 third sheet DMA12 time out C
CFF4D ASIC200 third sheet DMA13 time out C
CFF4E ASIC200 third sheet DMA14 time out C
CFF4F ASIC200 third sheet DMA15 time out C
TROUBLESHOOTING

CFF5A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 time out C
CFF5B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 time out C
CFF5C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 time out C
CFF5D ASIC200 third sheet DMA29 time out C
CFF5E ASIC200 third sheet DMA30 time out C

19.5 Solution
19.5.1 C0104: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn
19.5.2 C0105: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the M25 connector for proper con- — —
nection and correct as necessary.
2 Check the connector of M25 for proper — —
drive coupling and correct as necessary.
4 Change M25 — —
19.5.3 C0202: Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality
Relevant parts
Tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS6) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
Tray 1 lift-up motor (M6) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the M6 connector for proper connec- — —
tion and correct as necessary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 Check the connector of M6 for proper drive — —
coupling and correct as necessary.
5 Change M6 — —

Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
5 Change M8 — —
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING


Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
19.5.7 C0216: LCT up/down abnormality
Relevant parts
Upper limit sensor (PS2) LU drive board (LUDB)
Lift-up motor (M1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 PS2 I/O check, sensor check LUDB CN5-3 (ON) LU-204 G-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 M1 operation check LUDB CN3-4 (ON) LU-204 G-3
5 Change M1 — —
6 LUDB ICP2 conduction check — —

19.5.8 C0301: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Suction fan motor (FM1) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the FM1 connector for proper con- — —
2 Check the fan for possible overload and — —
correct as necessary.
3 PFTDB CN5-3 (REM)
FM1 operation check Q-6
PFTDB CN5-5 (LOCK)
4 Change FM1 — —
19.5.9 C0351: Paper cooling fan trouble
Relevant parts
Paper cooling fan motor (FM13) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Check the FM13 connector for proper con- — —
1
Check the fan for possible overload and — —
2
PRCB CN15-7 (REM)
3 FM13 operation check K-7
PRCB CN15-9 (LOCK)
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 PRCB ICP6 conduction check — —


19.5.10 C1003: PK communication error
Relevant parts
Punch control board (PKDB) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Disconnect and then connect the power — —
cord. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait
for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the main
power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. — —
19.5.11 C1004: FNS communication error
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Disconnect and then connect the power
1 — —
power switch.
3 JSCB F1 conduction check — —
19.5.12 C1005: ZU communication error
Relevant parts TROUBLESHOOTING

WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 — —
power switch.

19.5.13 C1081: SD communication error
Relevant parts
SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 — —
power switch.
19.5.14 C1102: Main tray Up/Down motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Main tray lift motor (M5) FS control board (FSCB)
Main tray top surface sensor (PS4)
Staple paper exit top surface sensor (PS7)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Check the motor and sensor connectors for
1 proper connection, and correct as neces- — —
sary.
Check the connector of M5 for proper drive
2 — —
coupling, and correct as necessary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 M5 operation check FSCB CN22-1 to 11 FS-526 K-5

6 Change M5 — —
7 FSCB ICP1 conduction check — —

19.5.15 C1103: Side-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Alignment plate motor/F (M11) FS control board (FSCB)
2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F (PS17)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
Check the connector of M11 for proper
2 — —
drive coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS17 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<A>-6 (ON) FS-526 L-11
4 M1 operation check FSCB CN19-1 to 4 FS-526 D-13
5 Change M1 — —
19.5.16 C1104: Paper exit roller drive motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Exit roller motor (M4) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 Change M4 — —

19.5.17 C1105: Paper exit auxiliary roller motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Paper output roller motor (M6) FS control board (FSCB)
Paper output roller home sensor (PS10)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
5 Change M6 — —
19.5.18 C1106: Side-staple stapler drive malfunction
Relevant parts
2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) FS control board (FSCB)
Stapler position sensor/1 (PS50)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING
sary.
2 — —
FS-526 L-13 to
5 PS52 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-9 (ON)
14
FS-526 D-11 to
7 M13 operation check FSCB CN15-3 to 8
12

19.5.19 C1109: Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
2 staples stapler motor (M14) FS control board (FSCB)
Stapler unit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M14 operation check — —
19.5.20 C1110: Center-staple head roller motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Staple motor (M24) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 — —
SD-508 K-9 to
4 M24 operation check SDDB CN406<B>-1 to 2
10
6 SDDB ICP7 conduction check — —

19.5.21 C1112: Center-staple clinch roller motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Clincher motor (M25) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M25 operation check SDDB CN405-4 to 10 SD-508 C-7
19.5.22 C1113: Center-staple lead edge stopper motor malfunction

Relevant parts
Leading edge stopper motor (M22) SD drive board (SDDB)
Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS32) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING

2 — —
3 PS32 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN407-8 (ON) SD-508 K-7

Relevant parts
Leading edge stopper motor (M20) SD drive board (SDDB)
Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M20 operation check SDDB PJ8-1 to 4 SD-509 B-5
19.5.23 C1114: Center-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction

Relevant parts
Center staple alignment motor /F (M20) SD drive board (SDDB)
Center staple alignment motor home sensor/F FS control board (FSCB)
(PS30)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 — —

Relevant parts
Center staple alignment motor/F (M24) SD drive board (SDDB)
Center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M24 operation check SDDB PK7-1 to 4 SD-509 G-3
19.5.24 C1115: Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction

Relevant parts
Center fold knife motor (M32) SD drive board (SDDB)
Center fold knife home sensor (PS34) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

3 PS34 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN407-3 (ON) SD-508 K-6
4 M32 operation check SDDB CN411-1 to 2 SD-508 K-8

Relevant parts
Center fold plate motor (M26) SD drive board (SDDB)
Center fold plate home sensor (PS47) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
SDDB PJ2-1 (CW)
4 M26 operation check SD-509 B-4
SDDB PJ2-3 (CCW)
19.5.25 C1116: Center-staple transfer motor malfunction

Relevant parts
Transport motor (M33) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 — —
3 M33 operation check SDDB CN409-1 to 11 SD-508 K-5

Relevant parts
Center fold roller motor (M25) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
19.5.26 C1124: Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (lower)
Relevant parts
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202) PI drive board (PIDB)
Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 M202 operation check PIDB CN56-5 to 6 PI-505 C to D-7
7 PIDB ICP2 conduction check — —

19.5.27 C1125: Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (upper)
Relevant parts
Tray lift motor /Up (M201) PI drive board (PIDB)
Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
3 PS204 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN55-8 (ON) PI-505 C to D-5
4 PS205 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN55-7 (ON) PI-505 C to D-6
5 M201 operation check PIDB CN54-7 to 8 PI-505 C to D-4
7 PIDB ICP2 conduction check — —
19.5.28 C1127: Punch shift motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Punch drive motor (M301) Punch control board (PKDB)
PK punch home sensor (PS301) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING
sary.
2 — —
6 PKDB ICP4 conduction check — —

19.5.29 C1130: 1st stopper motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
1st stopper motor (M602) ZU control board (ZUCB)
1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
6 ZUCB ICP7 conduction check — —
19.5.30 C1131: 2nd folding stopper motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
2nd folding stopper motor (M603) ZU control board (ZUCB)
2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
3 PS604 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-5 (ON) ZU-606 C-4 to 5

19.5.31 C1132: Output OP punch driving motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Punch oscillating motor (M302) Punch control board (PKDB)
PK punch oscillating home sensor (PS303) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
6 PKDB ICP1 conduction check — —
19.5.32 C1133: Punch shift motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Punch shift motor (M605) ZU control board (ZUCB)
Punch shift home sensor (PS605)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 — —

19.5.33 C1134: Main motor cooling fan drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Main motor cooling fan (FM601) ZU control board (ZUCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Check the motor connectors for proper
1 — —
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of FM601 for proper
2 — —
3 FM601 operation check ZUCB CN11-11 (DRV) ZU-606 C-8 to 9
19.5.34 C1135: Punch motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Punch motor (M604) ZU control board (ZUCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Check the motor connectors for proper
1 — —
connection, and correct as necessary.
2 — —
3 M604 operation check ZUCB CN11-2 (DRV) ZU-606 C-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.35 C1136: Punch switchover motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Punch switchover motor (M608) ZU control board (ZUCB)
Punch switchover switch (MS601)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
3 MS601 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN11-9 ZU-606 C-8
4 M608 operation check ZUCB CN11-8 (DRV) C-7 to 8
19.5.36 C1140: Side-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Alignment plate motor/R (M12) FS control board (FSCB)
2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R (PS18)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.37 C1141: Side-staple paddle roller motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Paddle motor (M16) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
3 M16 operation check FSCB CN14<A>-1 to 7 FS-526 D-5
19.5.38 C1142: Side-staple trailing paddle up-down motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Trail edge paddle motor (M15) FS control board (FSCB)
Trail edge paddle home sensor (PS20)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
3 PS20 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<A>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-6 to 7
4 M15 operation check FSCB CN14<A>-8 to 12 FS-526 D-5
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.39 C1143: Side-staple rewinding paddle up-down motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Rewind paddle motor (M18) FS control board (FSCB)
Rewind paddle home sensor (PS16)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M8 operation check FSCB CN14<B>-1 to 4 FS-526 D-6
5 Change M8 — —
19.5.40 C1144: Spare stacker board drive motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Stacker plate motor (M17) FS control board (FSCB)
Stacker plate home sensor (PS11)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.41 C1145: End stopper drive motor malfunction
Relevant parts
2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19) FS control board (FSCB)
2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor (PS22)
2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/1
(PS23)
2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/2
(PS42)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
FS-526
4 PS23 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<A>-18 (ON)
L-12 to 13
5 PS42 I/O check FSCB CN20<A>-9 (ON) FS-526 L-12
19.5.42 C1150: Center-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction

Relevant parts
Center staple alignment motor /R (M21) SD drive board (SDDB)
Center staple alignment motor home sensor/R FS control board (FSCB)
(PS31)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —

Relevant parts
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23) SD drive board (SDDB)
Center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M23 operation check SDDB P7-5 to 8 SD-509 G-2
19.5.43 C1151: Center-staple stapler drive motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Center staple motor (M23) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.44 C1152: Center-staple paper exit motor malfunction
Relevant parts
Exit motor (M34) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
3 M34 operation check — SD-508 G-3 to 4
19.5.45 C1153: Center-staple paddle up-down motor malfunction (trailing edge)
Relevant parts
Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26) SD drive board (SDDB)
Paddle home sensor/C (PS37) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
3 PS37 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN406<A>-11 (ON) SD-508 K-9
4 M26 operation check SDDB CN406<A>-5 to 8 SD-508 K-8

19.5.46 C1156: Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (trailing edge)

Relevant parts
Center staple paddle/T (M29) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
Relevant parts
Upper paddle motor (M21) SD drive board (SDDB)
Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 — —

19.5.47 C1157: Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (middle)
Relevant parts
Center staple paddle/C (M30) SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
3 M30 operation check SDDB CN406<B>-11 to 15 SD-508 K-10
19.5.48 C1182: Shift motor drive malfunction

(1) When JS-504 is installed
Relevant parts
Shift motor (M2) JS control board (JSCB)
Shift home sensor (PS6)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 — —
3 PS6 I/O check, sensor check JSCB PJ7JSCB-18 (ON) JS-504 F-3
4 M2 operation check JSCB PJ4JSCB-1 to 4 JS-504 F-6
5 Change M2 — —
7 Change JSCB — —

Relevant parts
Tray2 shift motor (M16) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M16 operation check FSCB PJ5-5 (REM) FS-527 B to C-9
19.5.49 C1183: Elevate drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Elevate motor (M15) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray1 lower position sensor (PS21)
Tray1 upper position sensor (PS24)
Tray1 upper position switch (SW2)
Tray1 lower position switch (SW3)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 — —
FS-527
5 SW2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ3-2 (ON)
B to C-10
FS-527
6 SW3 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ3-2 (ON)
B to C-10

19.5.50 C1190: Alignment plate motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Alignment plate motor (M13) FS control board (FSCB)
Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
19.5.51 C1194: Leading edge stopper motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Leading edge stopper motor (M14) FS control board (FSCB)
Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS20)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING


19.5.52 C11A1: Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Relevant parts
Exit roller retraction motor (M9) FS control board (FSCB)
Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
4 M9 operation check FSCB PJ9-5 (REM) FS-527 J-1
5 Change M9 — —
19.5.53 C11A2: Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Relevant parts
Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10) FS control board (FSCB)
Accommodation roller pressure sensor (PS13)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.54 C11A7: Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Relevant parts
Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
FS-527 (JS-603)
L-10
FS-527 (JS-603)
4 M17 operation check FSCB PJ30-2 (REM)
L-9
19.5.55 C11B0: Stapler movement drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Stapler movement motor (M11) FS control board (FSCB)
Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)
Stapler home sensor/2 (PS19)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING

2 — —

19.5.56 C11B2: Staple drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Stapler unit FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
19.5.57 C11B5: Saddle stapler drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Saddle stapler unit SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 Change saddle stapler unit — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.58 C11C0: Punch motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Punch motor/1 (M100) FS control board (FSCB)
Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
FS-527 (PK-517)
J-9
FSCB PJ19-1 (CW) FS-527 (PK-517)
4 M100 operation check
FSCB PJ19-3 (CCW) J-8
19.5.59 C11E0: Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction / Finisher route
change malfunction
Relevant parts
Duplex path switching motor (M2) FS control board (FSCB)
Duplex path switching sensor (PS3)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING
sary.
2 — —
4 M2 operation check FSCB PJ29-1 to 3 FS-527 I-12
5 Change M2 — —

(2) When JS-504 is installed
Relevant parts
Route change motor (M3) JS control board (JSCB)
Route change home sensor (PS4)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
3 PS4 I/O check, sensor check JSCB PJ7JSCB-15 (ON) JS-504 F-4
4 M3 operation check JSCB PJ6JSCB-1 to 2 JS-504 F-6
5 Change M3 — —
6 Change JSCB — —
19.5.60 C11E1: Upper lower path switching motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Upper lower path switching motor (M6) FS control board (FSCB)
Upper lower path switching sensor (PS26)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 Change M6 — —

19.5.61 C11E2: Tray1 path switching motor drive malfunction
Relevant parts
Tray1 path switching motor (M8) FS control board (FSCB)
Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
2 — —
5 Change M8 — —
19.5.62 C2101: PC charge cleaning malfunction
Relevant parts
Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)
Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the drum unit/K for proper connec- — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
3 PS43 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN25-11 (ON) C-12

6 Change drum unit /K — —

19.5.63 C2151: Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation
Relevant parts
Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50) Printer control board (PRCB)
2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the M3 connector for proper — —
connection and correct as necessary.
3 M3 operation check PFTDB CN5-3 (REM) Q-6
4 Change M3 — —
19.5.64 C2152: Transfer belt pressure welding alienation
Relevant parts
Pressure welding alienation sensor/K (PS51) Printer control board (PRCB)
Pressure welding alienation sensor/color (PS52)
1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
4 M21 operation check PRCB CN20-1 to 4 K-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
7 Change MFPB — —

19.5.65 C2160: PC charge (C) malfunction

19.5.66 C2161: PC charge (M) malfunction
19.5.67 C2162: PC charge (Y) malfunction
19.5.68 C2163: PC charge (K) malfunction
19.5.69 C2164: PC charge malfunction
Relevant parts
Imaging unit High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the imaging unit for proper — —
2 Check the HV1 connector for proper — —
3 Check the PRCB connector for proper — —
4 Change IU — —
5 Change HV1 — —
19.5.70 C2204: Waste toner agitating motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor (PS23) Printer control board (PRCB)
Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Clean the PS23 if it has toner or paper — —

1
dust, etc.
2 Change the waste toner box. — —
Check the M20 connector for proper — —
3
Check the connector of motor for proper — —
4
5 M20 operation check PRCB CN23-1 to 4 C-8 to 9

19.5.71 C2253: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn

19.5.72 C2254: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
Color PC drum motor (M16) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 Check the M16 connector for proper drive — —
4 PRCB CN34-8 (REM)
M16 operation check K-1
PRCB CN34-11 (LOCK)
19.5.73 C2255: Color developing motor’s failure to turn

19.5.74 C2256: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
Color developing motor (M17) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 PRCB CN34-13 (REM)
PRCB CN34-16 (LOCK)

19.5.75 C2257: Cleaner motor’s failure to turn

19.5.76 C2258: Cleaner motor’s turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
Cleaner motor (M38) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
4 M38 operation check PRCB CN2-3 (REM)
K-11
PRCB CN2-6 (LOCK)
19.5.77 C2259: K developing motor’s failure to turn

19.5.78 C225A: K developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
K developing motor (M19) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING

K-2
PRCB CN34-4 (LOCK)

19.5.79 C225B: K PC drum motor’s failure to turn

19.5.80 C225C: K PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
K PC drum motor (M18) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
K-2
PRCB CN35-13 (LOCK)
19.5.81 C2350: Toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Toner suction fan motor (FM7) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING
3 FM7 operation check PRCB CN15-1 (REM)
K-8
PRCB CN15-3 (LOCK)

19.5.82 C2353: IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
IU cooling fan motor (FM15) PH relay board (REYB/PH)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Check the FM15 connector for proper — —
1
2
REYB/PH CN5-1 (REM)
3 FM15 operation check A to B-6
REYB/PH CN5-3 (LOCK)
5 REYB/PH ICP1 conduction check — —
6 Change REYB/PH — —
19.5.83 C2354: Rear side cooling fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
Check the FM16 connector for proper — —
1
2
PRCB CN18-2 (REM)
3 FM16 operation check C-12 to 13
PRCB CN18-3 (LOCK)
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.84 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
19.5.85 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
19.5.86 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
Relevant parts
Imaging unit /C Toner supply motor/Y (M9)
Imaging unit /M Toner supply motor/M (M10)
Imaging unit /Y Toner supply motor/C (M11)
Toner cartridge /C Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13)
Toner cartridge /M Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
Toner cartridge /Y Printer control board (PRCB)
Toner empty sensor/C (PZS/C)
Toner empty sensor/M (PZS/M)
Toner empty sensor/Y (PZS/Y)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Perform image troubleshooting procedure if — —
image density is low.
2 Clean the TCR sensor window on the — —
underside of the imaging unit if dirty
3 Reinstall imaging unit — —
4 Reinstall toner cartridge — —
5 M9: PRCB CN19-1 to 4
M9, M10, M11 operation check
M10: PRCB CN19-5 to 8 C-21
(At this time, IU must be non-installation.)
M11: PRCB CN19-9 to 12
6 M13: PRCB CN20-5 to 8
M13, M14 operation check K-6
M14: PRCB CN20-9 to 12
7 If the toner empty sensor and its surround- — —
ings inside the sub hopper are dirtied with
toner, clean them.
8 Change imaging unit — —
9 PRCB ICP1 or ICP2 conduction check — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
10 Change PRCB. — —

19.5.87 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor
19.5.88 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor
19.5.89 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor
Relevant parts
Imaging unit /C Sub hopper unit
Imaging unit /M Printer control board (PRCB)
Imaging unit /Y
Toner cartridge /C
Toner cartridge /M
Toner cartridge /Y
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
6 Change sub hopper unit — —
19.5.90 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor
Relevant parts
Drum unit /K Toner supply motor/K (M12)
Toner cartridge /K Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Perform image troubleshooting procedure if — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
image density is low.

(At this time, IU must be non-installation.)
3 M14 operation check PRCB CN20-9 to 12 K-6
4 Reinstall drum unit/K — —
1 6 If the toner empty sensor and its surround- — —

ings inside the sub hopper are dirtied with
toner, clean them.

19.5.91 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor
Relevant parts
Drum unit /K Sub hopper unit
Toner cartridge /K Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Reinstall drum unit/K — —
3 Change drum unit/K — —
6 Change sub hopper unit — —
19.5.92 C2559: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure

19.5.93 C255A: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure
19.5.94 C255B: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure
Relevant parts
Imaging unit /C Printer control board (PRCB)
Imaging unit /M
Imaging unit /Y
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING
19.5.95 C255C: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Reinstall drum unit /K — —

19.5.96 C2561: Cyan TCR sensor failure

19.5.97 C2562: Magenta TCR sensor failure
19.5.98 C2563: Yellow TCR sensor failure
19.5.99 C2564: Black TCR sensor failure
Relevant parts
Imaging unit /M
Imaging unit /Y
Drum unit /K
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 Check the harness from imaging unit to — —
PRCB for proper connection and correct as
necessary.
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.100 C2650: Main backup media access error
Relevant parts
Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connector (CN33) on PRCB, the — —
connector (CN1) on SV ERB, and the har-
ness between the boards for proper con-
1. Turn OFF the main power switch and
replace the current PRCB with a new
one.
(When using a PRCB of another
machine in service, be sure to use a
PRCB installed in the same model.)
See P.134
2. Update the PRCB firmware.
3. After completing the firmware update,
turn OFF and ON the main power switch
and check to see that warm-up is
started.
Make sure that malfunction codes other
than C2650 or improper IU/TC place-
ment is not detected.
4. When the trouble cannot be solved, rein-
stall the removed PRCB to the original
board.
NOTE
• When taking the above steps, check
whether PRCB is defective or not
without replacing the SV ERB.
3 Change SV ERB — —
1. Replace the current SV ERB with a new
TROUBLESHOOTING
one.
See P.141
2. Turn ON the main power switch and
check to see that warm-up is started.
(One minute is spent to prepare the new
SV ERB for use. During the period, the
control panel backlight stays off.)
Make sure that malfunction codes other
than C2650 or improper IU/TC place-
ment is not detected.
3. Make the specified readjustments.
See P.141
4 If the above actions do not solve the prob- — —
lem, contact KMBT.

19.5.101 C2651: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/C)

19.5.102 C2652: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/M)
19.5.103 C2653: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/Y)
19.5.104 C2654: EEPROM access error (Drum unit/K)
Relevant parts
Imaging unit /M
Imaging unit /Y
Drum unit /K
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Clean the connection between the imaging — —
unit and the machine if dirty
3 Check the harness for proper connection — —
and correct as necessary.
19.5.105 C2A14: Drum unit/K new release failure

19.5.106 C2A21: Toner cartridge/C new release failure
19.5.107 C2A22: Toner cartridge/M new release failure
19.5.108 C2A23: Toner cartridge/Y new release failure
19.5.109 C2A24: Toner cartridge/K new release failure
Relevant parts
Toner cartridge/C Drum unit/K
Toner cartridge/M Printer control board (PRCB)
Toner cartridge/Y
TROUBLESHOOTING
Toner cartridge/K
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Clean the connection between the toner — —
cartridge/drum unit and the machine if dirty.
2 Reinstall toner cartridge/drum unit — —
3 Check the harness for proper connection — —
4 Change toner cartridge/drum unit — —

19.5.110 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure
Relevant parts
Roller pressure welding alienation sensor (PS55) Printer control board (PRCB)
Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) Fusing unit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 PS55 I/O check, sensor check — —
5 Change fusing unit — —
19.5.111 C3102: Fusing roller failure to turn
Relevant parts
Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS56) Printer control board (PRCB)
Fusing motor (M30) Fusing unit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the fusing unit for proper installation — —
4 PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.112 C3201: Fusing motor failure to turn

19.5.113 C3202: Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 Check the loading status of the fusing unit — —
drive, and correct the error as necessary.
3 Check the fusing unit, PRCB for proper — —
connection and correct or change as
necessary.
4 PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)
19.5.114 C3303: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 1 failure to turn
Relevant parts
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the FM2 connector for proper
— —
2 Check the fan for possible overload and
— —
TROUBLESHOOTING
K-7
PRCB CN11-3 (LOCK)

Relevant parts
Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (FM4) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the FM4 connector for proper — —
3 PFTDB CN5-6 (REM)
PFTDB CN5-8 (LOCK)
Relevant parts
Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 PFTDB CN5-9 (REM)
PFTDB CN5-11 (LOCK)
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.117 C3424: Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side)
Relevant parts
Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU)
DC power supply (DCPU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the fusing unit for correct installation — —
(whether it is secured in position).
2 Check the open/close operation of the — —
upper right door.
3 Check the fusing unit, IHPU, MFPB and — —
DCPU for proper connection and correct or
change as necessary.
5 Change IHPU — —
7 Change DCPU — —
19.5.118 C3425: Fusing heaters trouble (NC sensor)
Relevant parts
Relay drive board (REDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING

upper right door.
REDB for proper connection and correct or
8 Change REDB — —


(Center of the heating roller)
(Edge of the heating roller)
19.5.121 C3725: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC sensor)
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
upper right door.
19.5.122 C3724: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side)
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the fusing unit for correct installation
— —
2 Check the open/close operation of the
— —
upper right door.
3 Check the fusing unit, IHPU, MFPB and
DCPU for proper connection and correct or — —

19.5.123 C3822: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection

(Edge of the heating roller)
19.5.124 C3825: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC sensor)
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
upper right door.
3 Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and — —
19.5.125 C3824: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking side)
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Control signal
cal component)
upper right door.

19.5.126 C3921: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Center of the heating roller)
19.5.127 C3922: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Edge of the heating roller)
19.5.128 C3925: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (NC sensor)
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
upper right door.
19.5.129 C3924: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (soaking side)
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Control signal
cal component)
upper right door.

19.5.130 C392A: Fusing sensor contamination (NC sensor)
Relevant parts
Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1) DC power supply (DCPU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Wipe the TEMS1 clean of dirt if any. — —
<Cleaning procedure>
• Clear away a dirt or a foreign object on
the sensor with a cotton swab.
• When a dirt is left even if you cleaned the
sensor by above procedure, clear away a
dirt or a foreign object on the sensor
using a cotton swab dampened with the
alcohol.
And, wipe off the sensor with a dry cot-
ton swab afterwards.
2 Check the TEMS1 for installed position and — —
proper connector connection.
3 Check the connection of the fusing unit. — —
5 Change TEMS1 — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.131 C3B02: IH malfunction (CPU)

19.5.132 C3B03: IH malfunction (monitor)
Relevant parts
IH coil unit Relay drive board (REDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
upper right door.
3 Check the fusing unit, degaussing coil unit, — —
IHPU, PRCB and REDB for proper connec-
tion and correct or change as necessary.
5 Change IH coil unit — —
19.5.133 C3B05: IH temperature sensor defect

19.5.134 C3B06: IH surge error
19.5.135 C3B07: IH input power error
19.5.136 C3B08: IH input voltage error
Relevant parts
IH coil unit IH power supply (IHPU)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connection of the fusing unit. — —
2 Check the fusing unit, degaussing coil unit, — —
IHPU, PRCB and REDB for proper connec-
tion and correct or change as necessary.
3 Change degaussing coil unit — —

19.5.137 C4101: Polygon motor rotation trouble
Relevant parts
PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connector for proper connection — —
2 Change PH unit — —
19.5.138 C4301: PH cooling fan motor failure to turn
Relevant parts
PH cooling fan motor (FM14) PH relay board (REYB/PH)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 FM14 operation check REYB/PH CN4-1 (REM)
A to B-7
REYB/PH CN4-3 (LOCK)
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.139 C4501: Laser malfunction
Relevant parts
PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connector for proper connection — —
2 Change PH unit — —
19.5.140 C5104: Transfer belt motor’s failure to turn

19.5.141 C5105: Transfer belt motor’s turning at abnormal timing
Relevant parts
Transfer belt motor (M1) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 Check M1 for proper drive coupling and — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
K-3
PRCB CN35-6 (LOCK)
5 Change M1 — —

19.5.142 C5304: IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
C-16
PRCB CN8-7 (LOCK)
19.5.143 C5306: IH cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
IH cooling fan motor/2 (FM12) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
C-15
PRCB CN8-10 (LOCK)
TROUBLESHOOTING


19.5.144 C5351: Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (FM9) DC power supply (DCPU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 FM9 operation check DCPU PJ008-3 (LOCK) W-15 to 16
5 DCPU F551 conduction check — —
19.5.145 C5354: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
K-7
PRCB CN11-6 (LOCK)
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.146 C5356: Cooling fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Cooling fan motor (FM3) Printer control board (PRCB)
5
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
K-7 to 8
PRCB CN15-6 (LOCK)
19.5.147 C5370: MFP control board cooling fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
MFP control board cooling fan motor (FM17) Slide Interface board (REYB/SL)
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 FM17 operation check MFPB PJ26-3 (LOCK) O-26
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 Change REYB/SL — —

19.5.148 C5372: MFP control board CPU temperature failure
Relevant parts
CPU cooling fan motor MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Reboot the machine. — —
2 Check the fan connector for proper — —
4 Fan motor operation check MFPB PJ20 O-26
19.5.149 C6102: Drive system home sensor malfunction

19.5.150 C6103: Slider over running
Relevant parts
Scanner home sensor (PS201) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
Scanner motor (M201) MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Correct or change the scanner drive — —
(cable, pulley, gear, belt) if it is faulty.
2 Correct the scanner motor set screw if — —
loose.
3 Adjust [Image Position Leading Edge] and — —
[Feed Direction Adjustment].
4 Check the PS201, M201, REYB/SCAN and — —
TROUBLESHOOTING
MFPB connector for proper connection and
5 PS201 I/O check, sensor check REYB/SCAN PJ3-5 (ON) P-17
6 M201 operation check REYB/SCAN PJ5-4 to 7 P-19
7 Change REYB/SCAN. — —
8 Change MFPB. — —

19.5.151 C6301: Optical cooling fan motor’s failure to turn
Relevant parts
Optical cooling fan motor (M202) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 M202 operation check REYB/SCAN PJ4-3 (LOCK) P-18 to 19
4 Change REYB/SCAN — —
19.5.152 C6704: Image input time out
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) CCD board (CCDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Select [Service Mode] o [State Confirma- — —
tion] o [Memory/HDD Adj.] o [Memory
Bus Check] o [ScanneroMemory], and
conduct the memory bus function.
2 Check the connectors between scanner — —
section and MFPB for proper connection
4 Change CCDB — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.153 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Correct the harness connection between — —
CCDB and MFPB if faulty.
2 Check for possible extraneous light and — —
3 Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and — —
shading sheet if dirty
4 Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if — —
faulty, or change scanner.
19.5.154 C6752: ASIC clock input error (front side)

19.5.155 C6753: ASIC clock input error (back side)
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Correct the harness connection of CCDB if — —
faulty.
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.156 C6901: DSC board mount failure 1

19.5.157 C6902: DSC board bus check NG1-1
19.5.158 C6903: DSC board bus check NG1-2
Relevant parts
DSC board (SC-507) MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Correct the harness connection of DSC — —
board if faulty.
2 Change DSC board — —
19.5.159 C6F01: Scanner sequence trouble 1
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) DF control board (DFCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Correct the harness connection between — —
main body and ADF if faulty.
19.5.160 C8101: Before reading pressure welding alienation mechanism
Relevant parts
Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) DF control board (DFCB)
Read roller sensor (PS6)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for — —
proper connection, and correct as neces-
sary.
5 Change M4 — —
6 DFCB PS3 conduction check — —

19.5.161 C8102: Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble
Relevant parts
Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) DF control board (DFCB)
Reverse roller sensor (PS7)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
3 PS7 I/O check, sensor check DF-618
REYB PJ3-3 (ON)
K to L-10
4 DFCB F9 conduction check — —
6 Change M5 — —
19.5.162 C8103: Lift up mechanism trouble (Upward movement)
Relevant parts
Lift-up motor (M6) DF control board (DFCB)
Lift-up upper sensor (PS16)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 M6 operation check DFCB PJ5-6 to 7 DF-618 I-7 to 8
5 Change M6 — —

19.5.163 C8104: Glass movement trouble
Relevant parts
Original glass moving unit Original glass position control board (OGPCB)
Original glass moving motor (M202)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
3 Change original glass moving unit — —
4 Change OGPCB — —
19.5.164 C8106: Lift up mechanism failure (Downward movement)
Relevant parts
Lift-up motor (M6) DF control board (DFCB)
Lift-up lower sensor (PS15)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
sary.
3 PS15 I/O check, sensor check DF-618
REYB PJ3-6 (ON)
K to L-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
5 M6 operation check DFCB PJ5-6 to 7 DF-618 I-7 to 8

6 Change M6 — —

19.5.165 C8302: Cooling fan failure
Relevant parts
Cooling fan (FM1) DF control board (DFCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connector of FM1 for proper — —
3 FM1 operation check DFCB PJ7-1 to 3 DF-618 I-2 to 3
19.5.166 C8401: EEPROM failure
Relevant parts
DF control board (DFCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
power switch.
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.167 C9401: Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection

19.5.168 C9402: Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection
Relevant parts
Exposure unit Inverter board (INVB)
Flat cable CCD board (CCDB)
Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connection between the lamp — —
harness and the inverter board, and correct
if necessary.
2 Check the connection between REYB/ — —
SCAN and the inverter board, and correct if
necessary.
3 Check the connection between REYB/ — —
SCAN and MFPB, and correct if necessary.
4 Check that the connection between CCDB — —
and IPB, and correct if necessary.
5 Change INVB — —
6 Change exposure unit — —
7 Change IPB — —
19.5.169 CA051: Standard controller configuration failure

19.5.170 CA052: Controller hardware error
19.5.171 CA053: Controller start failure
Relevant parts
TROUBLESHOOTING
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check to see if the following setting has — —
been correctly made: [Service Mode] o
[System 2] o [Image Controller Setting].
If changing the setting, turn OFF the main
power switch and turn it ON again after 10
seconds or more.
2 Check the connectors of the MFP board — —
(MFPB) for proper connection and correct
as necessary.

19.5.172 CC001: Vendor connection failure
Relevant parts
Printer control board (PRCB) Coin vendor (Japan)
Coin vendor kit (North America, Europe)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the vendor connector for proper — —
19.5.173 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)

19.5.174 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner)
19.5.175 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the ROM version. — —
3 Replace the appropriate board. — —
19.5.176 CC155: Finisher ROM error
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Control signal
cal component)
power switch.
2 Rewrite firmware. — —

19.5.177 CC156: ADF ROM error
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
power switch.
19.5.178 CC157: Finisher ROM error (RU)
Relevant parts
Transport control board (TRCB) FS control board (FSCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 — —
power switch.
19.5.179 CC158: Finisher ROM error (ZU)
Relevant parts
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 — —
power switch.

19.5.180 CC159: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1)

19.5.181 CC15A: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2)
Relevant parts
DSC board (SC-507)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the DSC board connector for proper — —
power switch.
4 Change DSC board — —
19.5.182 CC15B: Finisher ROM error (SD)
Relevant parts
SD drive board (SDDB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 — —
power switch.
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.183 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT)
Relevant parts
Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1. Turn OFF the main power switch and
replace the current PRCB with a new
one.
(When using a PRCB of another
machine in service, be sure to use a
PRCB installed in the same model.)
See P.134
2. Update the PRCB firmware.
3. After completing the firmware update,
turn OFF and ON the main power switch
and check to see that warm-up is
started.
4. When the trouble cannot be solved, rein-
stall the removed PRCB to the original
board.
NOTE
• When taking the above steps, check
whether PRCB is defective or not
without replacing the SV ERB.
3 Change SV ERB — —
1. Replace the current SV ERB with a new
one.
See P.141
2. Turn ON the main power switch and
check to see that warm-up is started.
(One minute is spent to prepare the new
SV ERB for use. During the period, the
TROUBLESHOOTING
control panel backlight stays off.)

3. Make the specified readjustments.
See P.141
4 If the above actions do not solve the prob- — —
lem, contact KMBT.

19.5.184 CC164: ROM contents error (MSC)
Relevant parts
Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the ROM version. — —
3 Replace the corresponding board. — —
4 When not reviving even if the above-men- — —
tioned procedure is done, contact the
responsible people of KMBT.
19.5.185 CC165: ROM contents error (ADF)
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
power switch.
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.186 CC170: Dynamic link error during starting (AP0)

19.5.191 CC180: Dynamic link error during starting (LDR)
19.5.192 CC181: Dynamic link error during starting (IBR)
19.5.193 CC182: Dynamic link error during starting (IID)
19.5.194 CC183: Dynamic link error during starting (IPF)
19.5.195 CC184: Dynamic link error during starting (IMY)
19.5.196 CC185: Dynamic link error during starting (SPF)
19.5.197 CC186: Dynamic link error during starting (OAP)
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) NVRAM board (NRB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 If the malfunction code “C-C172” has — —
occurred, access [Service Mode] o [Sys-
tem 2] o [Image Controller Setting] and
check to see if “Controller 2,” “Controller 3,”
or “Others” is set for [Image Controller Set-
ting].
If any of these is set, according to the kind
of controller, select “Controller 0” or “Con-
troller 1.”
3 When not reviving even if the above-men- — —
tioned procedure is done, contact the
TROUBLESHOOTING
responsible people of KMBT.
19.5.198 CC190: Outline font load error
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the hard disk connector for proper — —
2 Format hard disk. — —
3 Change hard disk — —

19.5.199 CD002: JOB RAM save error
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
3 Change hard disk. — —
19.5.200 CD004: Hard disk access error (connection failure)

19.5.201 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error
19.5.202 CD020: Hard disk verify error
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
2 Reinstall the hard disk. — —
19.5.203 CD010: Hard disk unformat
TROUBLESHOOTING
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Select [Service Mode] o [State Confirma- — —
tion] o [Memory/HDD Adj.] o [HDD For-
mat], and conduct the HDD format function.

19.5.204 CD011: Hard disk out of specifications mounted
Relevant parts
Hard disk
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the hard disk specifications. — —
2 Change the hard disk. — —
19.5.205 CD041 to CD046: HDD command execution error Address Mark Not Found
Relevant parts
Hard disk
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
19.5.206 CD047 to CD04B: HDD SCSI library error
Relevant parts
Hard disk
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.207 CD201: File memory mounting error

19.5.208 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy
19.5.209 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) Memory
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
cal Component)
1 Check to see if the memory on MFPB is — —
installed correctly.
2 Change the memory on MFPB. — —
19.5.210 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure

19.5.211 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
cal Component)
19.5.212 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) FAX board
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step Action
TROUBLESHOOTING
Location (Electri-
Control Signal
cal Component)
1 Check to see if the FAX board is installed — —
correctly.

19.5.213 CD241: Encryption ASIC setting error

19.5.214 CD242: EncryptionASIC mounting error
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
cal Component)
1 Check the MFP board connector for proper — —
2 Change <FPB — —
19.5.215 CD252: No relay circuit boards for IC-412 mounting at IC-412 mount setting
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) Relay circuit boards (VI-505)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 If the IC-412 is not mounted, access [Ser- — —
vice Mode] o [System 2] o [Image Con-
troller Setting] and check to see if
“Controller 0” is set for [Image Controller
Setting].
2 Check the relay board (VI-505) connector — —
for proper connection and correct as nec-
essary.
3 Change relay board (VI-505). — —
19.5.216 CD261: USB host board failure

TROUBLESHOOTING
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) USB host board (EK-604)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the operation with another USB — —
device.
2 Check the USB host board connector for — —
proper connection and correct as neces-
sary.
3 Change USB host board. — —

19.5.217 CD271: i-Option activated and additional memory not installed
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) Memory for i-Option (UK-203)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the memory (UK-203) for proper — —
2 Change memory (UK-203). — —
19.5.218 CD272: i-Option activated and additional memory and HDD not installed
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB) Memory for i-Option (UK-203)
Hard disk
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the memory (UK-203) for proper — —
2 Check the HDD for proper connection and — —
3 Change memory (UK-203). — —
4 Change HDD — —
TROUBLESHOOTING

19.5.219 CD401: NACK command incorrect

19.5.220 CD402: ACK command incorrect
19.5.221 CD403: Checksum error
19.5.222 CD404: Receiving packet incorrect
19.5.223 CD405: Receiving packet analysis error
19.5.224 CD406: ACK receiving timeout
19.5.225 CD407: Retransmission timeout
Relevant parts
MFP board (PRCB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check whether there is an strong electro- — —
magnetic noise source near the main body.
2 Check the connectors on MFPB for proper — —
19.5.226 CE001: Abnormal message queue

19.5.227 CE003: Task error
19.5.228 CE004: Event error
19.5.229 CE005: Memory access error
19.5.230 CE006: Header access error
19.5.231 CE007: DIMM initialize error
Relevant parts
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connectors on PRCB for proper — —

19.5.232 CD3##: NVRAM data error

• When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost, backup data can be used for res-
toration.
• Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data
are detected, which can be restored with one restoration command.
• Data backup will be automatically performed every hour. Backup can also be performed
manually with the following setting.
[Service Mode] o [Enhanced Security] o [NVRAM Data Back Up]
See P.622
1. When a trouble caused by NVRAM data error occurs, the screen below appears.
A00JF4E517DA
2. Select [Yes] and touch [OK].

3. The screen will be shifted to the data restoration screen to perform data restoration.
NOTE
• When the restoration is performed in a short time, data restoration screen may not
be displayed.
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. Check the message which indicates that the data restoration was successfully con-
ducted. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds
after.
NOTE
• In case it failed to restore data, return to the trouble code screen.

19.5.233 CE002: Message and method parameter failure
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it — —
ON again, and conduct the following set-
ting.
[Service Mode] o [System 1] o [Initializa-
tion] o [Data Clear].
See P.526
19.5.234 CEEE1: MFP board malfunction
Relevant parts
MFP board (MFPB)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Check the connectors on MFPB for proper — —
19.5.235 CEEE2: Scanner section malfunction
Relevant parts
TROUBLESHOOTING
Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
1 Correct the connector connection between — —
CCDB and IPB if faulty.

19.5.236 CEEE3: Printer control board malfunction
Relevant parts
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
cal component)
TROUBLESHOOTING

20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
20. NETWORK ERROR CODE

• It displays the error code when a network error occurred.
• Network error code is displayed only when the following setting is in “Display.”
[Administrator Settings] o [Network Settings] o [Detail Settings] o [Error Code Display
Setting]
20.2 List
Function Code Description

IEEE802.1X 1 • Connection has already been established.
2 • Parameter error.
3 • Unable to find the destination AP (SSID).
4 • The authentication mode does not match the AP (IEEE8021X/WPA-EAP/
WPA-PSK/NONE).
5 • Negotiation of the EAP method failed.
6 • The EAP authentication failed (user ID, password, certificate, etc.)
7 • Encryption negotiation with the AP failed (TKIP/CCMP).
8 • Failed to retrieve the client certificate.
9 • The client certificate has expired.
10 • Verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
11 • Although the WPA-PSK mode is selected, the Pre-Shared Key is not
specified.
12 • An authentication error occurred in the WPA-PSK mode (un-matched
Pre-Shared Key).
13 • The phase 2 method is not specified (PEAP).
14 • Negotiation of the phase 2 method failed (PEAP).
15 • Response from the server has timed out.
16 • Failed to allocate memory.
17 • Failed to start the supplicant task.
TROUBLESHOOTING
18 • The driver does not work.

19 • The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
20 • CA verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/
PEAP).
21 • Server ID verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/
PEAP).
22 • The CA certificate is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
23 • The server ID is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
24 • The setting combination is correct.
25 • Connection and authentication are complete.
26 • The server certificate does not have the expected usage (EAP-TLS/EAP-
TTLS/PEAP).
27 • The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
28 • Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certificate is
rejected (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE

IEEE802.1X 29 • Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certificate has
timed out (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
30 • Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size that has been
retrieved to check for the expiration of the server certificate exceeds the
maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/
PEAP).
31 • Incorrect format of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
32 • Verification of the server certificate is invalid (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/
PEAP).
33 • Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to
perform verification because the HDD path has not been specified (EAP-
TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
34 • Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to
be verified (the maximum number of certificates that can be verified at a
time is 20) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
35 • Parameter error of the certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
36 • Internal error of the certificate verification (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
LDAP 1 • An invalid operation occurred.
• The number of search results has exceeded the maximum number of
4
items allowed.
7 • The LDAP server does not support SASL.
10 • Unable to trace the link although Referral is specified.
32 • Cannot find the search route.
49 • Failed to log in to the LDAP server.
80 • An unexpected error occurred.
85 • The connection has timed out.
86 • The supported SASL does not match the LDAP server side.
88 • Cancelled by the user.
90 • A memory shortage occurred.
91 • Unable to connect to the LDAP server.
92 • The supported LDAP version does not match the LDAP server side.
TROUBLESHOOTING
128 • Failed to resolve the LDAP server name using the DNS server.
129 • The certificate of the LDAP server has expired.
130 • Mutual authentication using GSS-SPNEGO (Kerberos v5) failed.
131 • The search result remains.
2238 • The CN field of the LDAP server certificate does not match the server
address.
2239 • The LDAP server certificate does not have the expected usage for a
server.
2240 • The LDAP server certificate is not trusted.
• To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 • The LDAP server certificate has expired.
2242 • The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 • The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate
has timed out.


LDAP 2244 • Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maxi-
mum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 • The format of the LDAP server certificate is invalid.
perform verification because the HDD path has not been specified.
time is 20).
2266 • Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 • The device certificate does not exist.
2268 • No certificate is sent from the server.
E-Mail/ 1 • Failed to log in to the E-mail server.
Internet Fax 2 • An internal error occurred.
3 • Failed to connect to the server.
5 • Decoding failed due to invalid MIME format or S/MIME format.
6 • Available free memory is insufficient. Reception is not possible.
9 • Failed to delete an E-mail message.
10 • The mail box is full.
11 • Failed to search the certificate.
12 • Failed to retrieve the device certificate or private key.
13 • An I/O error occurred.
• An HDD operation error occurred, or memory capacity of the computer
may be insufficient.
14 • The S/MIME function is disabled.
15 • The HDD is disabled.
16 • The format of the certificate from the E-mail sender is invalid.
2236 • The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
2238 • The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 • The certificate does not have the expected usage.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2240 • The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate must
be registered to the system.
2241 • The certificate has expired.
has timed out.
2244 • Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maxi-
2261 • The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 • Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
time is 20).


E-Mail/ 2268 • No certificate is sent from the server.
Internet Fax
FTP 22 • Parameter error (e.g. the file name is NULL).
transmission 27 • Parameter is invalid.
42 • The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 • The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55 • A buffer shortage occurred.
56 • The FTP connection is already open.
61 • The connection has been interrupted.
62 • The device is not connected to the network.
70 • The network connection is busy.
450 • The file has not been deleted.
451 • The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
452 • The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
530 • Incorrect login name or password.
550 • The specified folder does not exist.
552 • The file operation failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
SMB 42 • The specified protocol is unavailable.
transmission 52 • The process is cancelled by a device reset.
• The connection has been interrupted.
4096 • The host name is not specified.
• The specified host name does not exist on the network.
4097 • The user name is not specified.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
• The user does not have write permission to the folder.
• Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4098 • The folder name is not specified.
• The specified folder does not exist.
• The user does not have write permission to the folder.
4100 • The specified file name is invalid.
4101 • The specified file already exists and is write-protected.
• The folder and the disk are write-protected.
4102 • The specified media to be written is not formatted.
• The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.
4103 • The server capacity is full.
4104 • The server capacity has become full while writing data.


SMB 4105 • Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
transmission 10000 • Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
has timed out.
mum capacity that can be retained (1 MB).
time is 20).
SMTP 22 • Invalid argument.
transmission 27 • The file size is too large.
28 • Insufficient memory of the device.
32 • The pipe is broken.
51 • Unable to reach the destination network.
52 • The connection aborted by the network.
57 • The socket is not connected.
TROUBLESHOOTING
60 • The operation has timed out.

61 • The connection is rejected.
67 • The host is shut down.
70 • The operation is expected to be blocked.
421 • SMTP server error.
Since the service is unavailable, the transfer channel is closed.
432 • SMTP server error. The password must be changed.
450 • SMTP server error. Unable to access to the mail box.
The requested action has been cancelled because an error occurred
while processing a job.
452 • SMTP server error. Shortage of the system storage capacity.
453 • SMTP server error. No E-mail massage.


SMTP 454 • SMTP server error. Temporary authentication failure.
transmission 458 • SMTP server error. Unable to queue a message to the node.
459 • SMTP server error. The node is not permitted.
An unsupported SMTP error code of 400s is received from the SMTP
server.
500 • SMTP server error. Syntax error (command unrecognized).
501 • SMTP server error. Syntax error in parameters or arguments.
502 • SMTP server error. The command is not implemented.
503 • SMTP server error. Bad sequence of commands.
504 • SMTP server error. The command parameter is not implemented.
521 • SMTP server error. The server does not receive E-mail messages.
530 • SMTP server error. The access is rejected.
534 • SMTP server error. The authentication mechanism is too weak.
535 • SMTP server error. Authentication error.
The requested authentication mechanism requires encryption.
550 • SMTP server error. The requested action is not executed.
551 • SMTP server error. The user is not connected locally.
552 • SMTP server error. The requested E-mail action is cancelled.
553 • SMTP server error. The requested action is not accepted.
554 • An SMTP server error, or an internal error when sending data.
The transaction failed.
555 • SMTP server error. MAIL/RCPT parameter error.
An unsupported SMTP error code of 500s is received from the SMTP
server.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2240 • The certificate is not trusted.
has timed out.
time is 20).


SMTP 2268 • No certificate is sent from the server.
transmission 3000 • An unexpected error occurred.
3001 • An unexpected error occurred within the library being used.
3002 • An invalid channel is specified.
3003 • SMTP server address is invalid.
3004 • Parameter error (MIMEBodyHeader).
3005 • Parameter error (DisplayName).
3006 • Parameter error (character set).
3007 • Parameter error (From address).
3008 • Parameter error (To address).
3009 • Parameter error (CC address).
3010 • Parameter error (BCC address).
3011 • Parameter error (pEmailSet is NULL).
3012 • Parameter error (destination certificate is NULL).
3013 • Parameter error (E-mail body).
3014 • The HDD is disabled.
3015 • The S/MIME function is disabled.
3016 • The device certificate cannot be used in S/MIME (e.g. self-signed certifi-
cate error, the private key type is not RSA).
3018 • An invalid encryption algorithm is specified.
3019 • An invalid signature algorithm is specified.
3020 • The E-mail address included in the destination certificate does not match
the destination address (To/Cc/Bcc).
3021 • The E-mail address included in the certificate does not match the sender
(From) address.
3022 • Format error of the certificate.
3023 • Parameter error (Disposition-Notification-To).
3024 • Message syntax error of the receiver side.
3025 • The SMTP server does not support the STARTTLS command.
TROUBLESHOOTING
WebDAV 22 • The format of the URL of the target resource is invalid.

transmission • Parameter error.
27 • Attempted to send data that exceeds the maximum transferrable size for
transfer coding.
56 • The connection has already been established.
57 • The connection to the WebDAV server failed (including connection time
out).
72 • The connection has been interrupted with the condition that is insufficient
to the specified size.
401 • Authentication error.


WebDAV 407 • Proxy authentication error.
transmission 1001 • The server does not support WebDAV.
• Unable to upload data to the server.
1002 • The intermediate resource is not a collection (directory) (e.g. the speci-
fied folder does not exist).
1003 • The target resource is a collection (directory).
1011 • Although “https” is specified for the resource URL, it is unavailable
because the SSL library is not included for the modularity.
1012 • Although “https” is specified for the resource URL, the connection is
interrupted because the WebDAV server certificate has expired.
1013 • The CONNECT method is issued to the proxy server to establish an SSL
connection via a proxy, but it is rejected.
1017 • A communication error occurred while sending a request.
1018 • A communication error occurred while receiving a response.
1027 • nContentLength exceeds the maximum transferable size.
1030 • Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting information
is unavailable.
1031 • The connection to the proxy server failed (including connection time out).
1098 • Failed in chunk TX to SharePoint Server.
1099 • Other internal error occurred (e.g. memory shortage).
has timed out.
TROUBLESHOOTING
time is 20).


SMB browsing 32 • The connection has been interrupted.
• The internal channel detected an error immediately before establishing
communication.
67 • The host is shut down.
4096 • The group name/host name is not specified.
• The specified group name/host name does not exist on the network.
4098 • Administrative shares do not exist.
• The shared resource name is not specified.
• The shared resource does not exist.
4102 • The specified media to be written is not formatted.
• The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.
4105 • Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
4352 • The browser machine (master browser/backup browser) is not found.
4353 • Unable to log in to the browser machine (master browser/backup
browser).
4354 • The sub folder does not exist.
4355 • The request is not accepted due to an invalid call sequence etc.
4368 • The number of groups is too large.
4369 • The number of host PCs is too large.
4370 • The number of shared resources is too large.
10000 • Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
TROUBLESHOOTING

has timed out.
time is 20).


SMB browsing 12267 • The device certificate does not exist.
User 1 • Invalid parameter (e.g. the number of characters exceeds the limit,
authentication blank).
• The authentication function setting is disabled.
2 • Failed to resolve the name using the DNS server.
3 • Unable to find the authentication server.
4 • Failed to authenticate.
5 • Failed to allocate memory.
• An unexpected error occurred (which does not occur under normal
usage conditions).
6 • An authentication request is received while an internal task of the user
authentication client is being performed.
7 • The connection was interrupted while the user authentication was being
performed.
10000 • Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
has timed out.
TROUBLESHOOTING
time is 20).
WebDAV client 2 • The ID of the client that is not opened is specified.
3 • The reception has timed out.
4 • A reception error occurred.
• An invalid request URL is specified.
5 • Content-Length or the received data size exceeds the maximum transfer-
able size.
• The size of the message body is too large.
• The size of the message body exceeds the maximum transferable size.
7 • An internal error occurred.
• The process is cancelled by an internal reset.
8 • Failed to connect to the WebDAV server.
9 • An error occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.


WebDAV client 10 • A timeout occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.
11 • Failed to connect to the proxy server.
12 • The proxy server rejected the connection request.
13 • Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting in-forma-
tion is unavailable.
14 • Failed to authenticate the proxy server.
15 • Other error was returned from the proxy server.
16 • An internal error occurred.
17 • The process is cancelled because MIO_REQBODY_ERROR is specified
by the device application.
has timed out.
time is 20).
WS scan 1 • The specified client is not registered.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 • Parameter is invalid.
3 • The Web service or WS scan function is disabled.
5 • Waiting for connection from CP.
6 • The certificate of the destination computer is not valid when the validity
period of a certificate is checked.
22 • Invalid argument.
52 • The connection aborted by the network.
57 • The socket is not connected.
60 • The operation has timed out.
70 • The operation is expected to be blocked.


WS scan 72 • The RetrieveImage waiting period has timed out.
has timed out.
time is 20).
2265 • Parameter of the certificate verification is invalid.
TROUBLESHOOTING

21. POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
21. POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE

21.1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check)
Relevant parts
Main switch (SW1) DC power supply (DCPU)
WIRING
Step Check item DIAGRAM Result Action
(Location)
1 Check that the fusing unit is securely — NO Reconnect.
plugged in. (Only for d-Color MF651)
2 Is a power voltage supplied across K-24 NO Check the WIRING from
PJ001DCPU-1 and 2 on DCPU? the wall outlet to SW1
PJ001.
3 Are the fuses on DCPU conducting? — NO Change DCPU.
4 Is DC24 V being output from PJ10DCPU-4 I-25 to 26 NO Change DCPU.
on DCPU?
5 Is DC5 V being input to PJ011DCPU-5 to 7 I-26 to 27 NO Change DCPU.
on DCPU?
6 Is DC5 V being input to CN12PRCB-5 on H-24 NO Change DCPU.
the printer control board? (LED on PRCB YES Change PRCB.
does not blink.)
21.2 Fusing heaters do not operate
Relevant parts
Right door switch (MS1) DC power supply (DCPU)
WIRING
(Location)
TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Is the power source voltage applied across K-24 NO Check wiring from power
PJ002DCPU-1 to 4 on DCPU? outlet to MS1 to REDB to
During this time, the right door should be PJ002.
closed.
2 Is the power source voltage applied across Y-19 NO Check wiring from power
CN1IHPU-1 to 4 on IHPU? outlet to REDB to CN1.
3 Is the power source voltage applied across C-18 YES Fusing unit
CN259<C>-3 and 4? NO Change DCPU.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 21. POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE
21.3 Power is not supplied to ADF
WIRING
(Location)
1 Is DC24 V being output from CN610 on Q-21 YES Malfunction in ADF
ADF?
2 Is DC24 V being output from PJ013-3 on K-26 NO Check wiring from DCPU
DCPU? to ADF.
3 Is the fuse on DCPU conducting? — YES Change DCPU.
NO Malfunction in DF-611
21.4 Power is not supplied to option

21.4.1 LU-204/301
WIRING
(Location)
1 Is DC24 V being applied to hookup W-12 to 13 NO Malfunction in LU-204/301
connector CN425?
2 Is DC24 V being output from CN19 on U-12 to 13 NO Check wiring from PFTDB
PFTDB? to CN19 to LU-204/301.
NO Malfunction in LU-204/301
21.4.2 FS-526/527
WIRING
(Location)
1 Are DC24 V being applied to CN331<L>? L-26 NO Malfunction in finisher.
2 Are DC24 V being applied to PJ006-3 on K-26 NO Check wiring from DCPU
DCPU? to finisher.
TROUBLESHOOTING
NO Malfunction in finisher.

22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

22.1 How to read element date
• As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for “State Confirmation”
available from “Service Mode” can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem.
A0P0F4E515DA
22.1.1 Table number

TROUBLESHOOTING
A0P0F4E516DA
Vdc-C • Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced.
Vdc-M • Standard values: around 400 V (200 V to 800 V)
Vdc-Y • A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.
Vdc-K • A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller.
• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit/1 (HV1)
Vg-C • Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced.
Vg-M • Standard values: around 500 V (200 V to 800 V)
Vg-Y • A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.
Vg-K • A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller.
• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit/1 (HV1)

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM
22.1.2 Level history 1
A0P0F4E517DA
TCR-C • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).

TCR-M • Standard value: 6 to 8 %
TCR-Y • Relevant components: TCR sensor
TCR-K
IDC1 • Shows the IDC bare surface output value (in 0.01 V increments).
IDC2 • It should normally be around 4.3 V.
• The output range is 0 V to 5 V.
• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit
Middle heat temperature • Shows the temperature of the each part of the fusing unit
Heat. Protect Tempera- (in 1 qC increments).
ture • Relevant components: Fusing unit
Heat edge temperature
Soaking side temperature
NC sensor temperature
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.1.3 Level history 2
A0P0F4E518DA
IDC Sensor Adjust 1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value.

IDC Sensor Adjust 2 • It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255.
• The value becomes greater as the transfer belt unit has been used more.
• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit
ATVC -C • Shows the latest ATVC level (which varies according to the paper type).
ATVC -M • 10 PA to 100 PA (ATVC-C/-M/-Y/-K)
ATVC -Y • 300 V to 5000 V (ATVC-2nd)
ATVC -K • Relevant components: Transfer belt unit, High voltage unit/2 (HV2),
ATVC -2nd 2nd transfer assy
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.2 How to identify problematic part

• This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial check items” and “Troubleshooting proce-
dure by a particular image quality problem.”
• When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial check items” and, if
the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image
quality problem.”
22.2.1 Initial check items

A. Initial check items 1
• Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between scanner and memory,
and between memory and printer.
Action Result Next Step

Enter the Service Mode, select [State Confirmation] o [Memory/ OK Initial check items 2
HDD Adj.] o [Memory Bus Check], and select and carry out NG P.820
[ScanneroMemory] and [MemoryoPRT] checks. (action as instructed)
NOTE
• For the bus check as the internal process between the
scanner and the memory, there are two types, “scanner
internal check” and “check for the scanner and the mem-
ory.” NG1 or NG2 is displayed depending on the type of
NG detected.
TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Initial check items 2

• Let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attrib-
utable to the scanner or printer system.
Document scan
CCD board (CCDB)

Scanner
system
I/F cable
Printer MFP board (MFPB)

system
PH relay board Print output
(REYB/PH)
A0P0F4C510DA
• Evaluation procedure
Image
Action Result Cause Next step
problem
From [Service Mode], select [Test Mode] o YES Printer Initial check items 3
[Halftone Pattern] o [SINGLE] o [HYPER] NO Scanner P.862
Lines,
o [Gradation] o [CoMoYoK] o [Density
bands
64], and produce a test print. Is image prob-
lem evident?
TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Initial check items 3

• If the printer is responsible for the image problem, let the machine produce a test print
and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors
4 colors
Mono color
A0P0F4C511DA
• Evaluation procedure
Image
Action Result Cause Next step
problem
Lines, bands From [Service Mode], select [Test Mode] o YES Printer, P.891
[Halftone Pattern] o [SINGLE] o [HYPER] 4 colors
TROUBLESHOOTING
o [Gradation] o [CoMoYoK] o [Density NO Printer, P.877
64], and produce a test print. Is image prob- single color
lem evident in each of all four colors?

22.3 Solution
NOTE
• Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed with A3 setting.
22.3.1 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands
in sub scan direction
A. Typical faulty images
White lines White bands Color lines Color bands
A02EF4C507DA
B. Troubleshooting procedure
(1) When the original glass is used
Step Section Check item Result Action

1 Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.
2 ADF Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.
3 Original glass Original glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with
a soft cloth.
4 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with
a soft cloth.
5 Mirror, lens, Mirror is dirty YES Clean.
exposure Lamp, and Lens is dirty YES Clean.
reflectors
Exposure lamp is dirty YES Clean.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Reflectors are dirty YES Clean.

6 Machine o Scan The adjustment value for [Image NO Readjust.
Area o Image Posi- Position: Side Edge] falls within
tion: Side Edge the specified range.
(Service Mode)
7 The white lines/bands or colored YES Change exposure unit.
lines/bands are blurry. Change CCD unit.

(2) When the ADF is used

2 ADF reading section Glass is dirty. YES Clean.
3 ADF scanning guide ADF scanning guide is damaged YES Clean.
or dirty.
4 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with
a soft cloth.
5 Mirror, lens, expo- Mirror is dirty YES Clean.
sure lamp, and reflec- Lens is dirty YES Clean.
tors
Exposure lamp is dirty YES Clean.
Reflectors are dirty YES Clean.
6 ADF o Original Stop The adjustment value for [Main NO Readjust.
Position Scanning Direction] falls within
(Service Mode) the specified range.
7 Glass step sheet The glass step sheet is tilted. YES Readjust.
for the original glass
moving unit
8 ADF read position The white lines/bands or colored YES Readjust.
lines/bands occurs when reading
the original from ADF.
9 The white lines/bands or colored YES Change exposure unit.
lines/bands are blurry. Change CCD unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.2 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands
in main scan direction
White lines White bands Color lines Color bands
A02EF4C508DA

3 Original glass Original glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
4 Machine o Scan The adjustment value for [Image NO Readjust.
Area o Image Position: Leading Edge] falls within
Position: Top the specified range.
Edge
(Service Mode)
5 The problem has been eliminated NO Change exposure unit.
through the checks of steps up to 4. Change CCD unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.3 Scanner system: color spots

AA
A02EF4C509DA

soft cloth.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.4 Scanner system: fog

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
A02EF4C510DA

3 ADF does not lie flat. YES Change ADF if it is deformed or
hinges are broken.
soft cloth.
5 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
6 Mirror, lens, Mirror is dirty. YES Clean.
7 exposure lamp, Lens is dirty. YES Clean.
and reflectors
8 Exposure lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
9 Reflectors are dirty. YES Clean.
10 Basic screen The problem is eliminated when the NO Try another exposure level in
Quality/Density image is produced in the manual manual.
exposure setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING


22.3.5 Scanner system: blurred image, blotchy image

A02EF4C511DA

1 Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.
2 ADF ADF does not lie flat. YES Change ADF if it is deformed or
hinges are broken.
3 Original glass Original glass tilts. YES Position original glass correctly.
Check original loading position.
4 2nd/3rd mirrors Exposure unit is not aligned with YES Perform “Focus Positioning of the
carriage the 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage. scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors car-
riage” and “Scanner Position
Adjustment.”
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.6 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in
main scan direction)
AA
A02EF4C512DA

1 Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.
2 ADF ADF does not lie flat. YES Change ADF if it is deformed or
hinges are broken.
3 Scanner rails Foreign matter on rails. YES Clean and apply lubricant.
4 Drive cables Cable kinks or is damaged. YES Correct or change.
5 Exposure unit Scanner moves smoothly. NO Adjust the scanner motor timing
belt.
o Change bushing.
o Change scanner motor.
o Change scanner relay board.
6 The problem has been eliminated NO Change CCD unit.
through the checks of steps up to 5.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.7 Scanner system: moire

A02EF4C513DA

1 Original Moire distortions recur even after NO Change the original mode
the orientation of original has been (select one other than that
changed. resulted in moire).
2 Basic screen Moire distortions recur even after YES Select “Text Mode” or “Photo
Quality/Density the original mode has been Mode”.
changed.
3 Basic screen The problem has been eliminated NO Change the zoom ratio.
Zoom through the checks of steps up to 2.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.8 Scanner system: skewed image

AA
A02EF4C514DA

1 Original Original is skew. YES Reposition original.
2 Original glass Original glass is in positive contact NO Reinstall the glass.
with the flat spring without being tilt. Check the original loading posi-
tion.
3 2nd/3rd mirrors Exposure unit is not properly YES Perform “Focus Positioning of the
carriage aligned with 2nd/3rd mirrors scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors car-
carriage. riage” and “Scanner Position
Adjustment.”
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.9 Scanner system: distorted image

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C515DA

1 Installation Machine is installed on a level sur- NO Reinstall.
face.
2 2nd/3rd mirrors Exposure unit is not properly YES Perform “Focus positioning of the
carriage aligned with 2nd/3rd mirrors car- scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors car-
riage. riage” and “Scanner Position
Adjustment.”
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.10 Scanner system: low image density, rough image

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C516DA

1 Original glass Original Glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
2 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
3 Mirror, lens, Mirror is dirty. YES Clean.
4 exposure lamp, Lens is dirty. YES Clean.
and reflectors
5 Exposure lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
6 Reflectors are dirty. YES Clean.
7 The problem has been eliminated NO Clean exposure lamp.
through the checks of steps up to 6. o Change exposure unit.
o Change CCD unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.11 Scanner system: defective ACS

AA Colored area of original

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE Black-and-white area of original
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C517DA

1 Auto Color Level The problem persists even after YES Change the original loading direc-
Adjustment the ACS determination level tion. Make manual settings
[User Setting] adjust function has been according to the type of original.
changed. (If the original contains a colored
area in one of its corners, the
machine may fail to properly
detect the colored area.)
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.12 Scanner system: blank copy, black copy

Blank copy Black copy
A02EF4C518DA

1 Cable connecting Connector is connected properly NO Reconnect.
scanner and with no pins bent.
printer
2 Image process- Connectors on the image pro- NO Reconnect.
ing board (IPB) cessing board are connected
properly.
3 CCD Unit Connectors of the CCD unit are NO Reconnect.
connected properly.
4 Test Mode The problem is eliminated as NO Change I/F connection cable.
[Service Mode] checked with the image on a test
pattern produced.
5 MFP board The problem is eliminated after NO Change MFP board.
(MFPB) the I/F connection cable has been
changed.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.13 Scanner system: abnormal image

ABCDE Data on
ABCDE previous
ABCDE page
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE Data on
ABCDE
ABCDE AA current
page
A02EF4C519DA

1 Cable connecting Connector is connected properly NO Reconnect.
scanner and with no pins bent.
printer
2 MFP board Connectors on the MFP board are NO Reconnect.
(MFPB) connected properly.
3 MFP board Data on previous page is mixed NO Reinstall the memory.
(MFPB) with data on current page.
4 Test Mode The problem is eliminated as NO Change interface connection
[Service Mode] checked with the image on a test cable.
pattern produced.
5 MFP board The problem is eliminated after the NO Change MFP board.
(MFPB) interface connection cable has
been changed.
6 Printer control Check the connection of connec- NO Change printer control board.
board (PRCB) tors, harness, and flat cables Change PH relay board.
PH relay board between PRCB and REYB/PH, and
TROUBLESHOOTING
(REYB/PH) correct if necessary.

22.3.14 Scanner system: uneven density

A02EF4C520DA
(1) When the original glass is used

1 2nd/3rd mirrors Exposure unit is not properly YES Perform “Focus positioning of the
carriage aligned with 2nd/3rd mirrors car- scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors car-
riage. riage” and “Scanner Position
Adjustment.”
2 Scanner motor Scanner motor turns smoothly. NO Change belt.
Change scanner motor.
(2) When the ADF is used

1 ADF read The uneven density occurs when YES Readjust.
position reading the original from ADF.
2 Guide support Guide support is tilted. YES Readjust.
TROUBLESHOOTING
for the original

glass moving
unit
3 Original glass The original glass moving unit is YES Readjust.
moving unit tilted.

22.3.15 Printer monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored
bands in sub scan direction
White lines White bands Colored lines Colored bands
A02EF4C507DA

1 Image check A white line or black line in sub YES Clean the electrostatic charger wire.
scan direction is sharp.
2 When printing thick paper, black YES Select [Service Mode] o [Machine]
lines appear. o [Thick Paper Mode] and set
[Image Quality].
3 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is YES Change imaging unit.
scratched.
4 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
5 Contact terminals make good con- NO Clean contact terminals.
nection between each IU and
machine.
6 Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-
makes good connection. minal position.
7 PH unit The surface of the PH window is YES Clean with cleaning jig.
dirty.
TROUBLESHOOTING
8 The problem has been eliminated NO Change imaging unit.
through the checks of steps up to 7. o Change image transfer belt unit.
o Change PH unit.

22.3.16 Printer monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored
bands in main scan direction
A02EF4C508DA

1 Image check A white line or black line in main NO Clean the electrostatic charger wire.
scan direction is sharp.
scratched.
4 Contact terminals make good con- NO Clean contact terminals.
nection between each IU and
machine.
5 Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-
makes good connection. minal position.
dirty.
through the checks of steps up to 6. o Change image transfer belt unit.
o Change PH unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.17 Printer monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction

A02EF4C520DA

1 High image Uneven density in sub scan direc- YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of
density original tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to paper with no originals placed, as
50 mm when a multi-copy cycle is the IU fails to keep up with a high
run using an original with high demand for toner.
image density (50% or more).
2 Machine The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step.
o LD adjust- through the LD lightness balance
ment o LD adjust.
lightness bal-
ance adjust.
(Service Mode)
scratched.
dirty.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6 Transfer belt Is abnormality found in the cam YES Change transfer belt unit.
unit gear?
7 The problem has been eliminated NO Change IU.
through the checks of steps up to 6. o Change PH unit.
o Change High voltage unit/2.

22.3.18 Printer monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction

A02EF4C521DA

1 Machine The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step.
o LD adjust- through the LD lightness balance
ment o LD adjust.
lightness bal-
ance adjust.
(Service Mode)
scratched.
dirty.
5 Transfer roller Check that the spring does not NO Correct.
come off during the pressure oper- Change transfer roller unit.
ation of the transfer roller.
6 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit makes positive NO Check and correct contacts.
contact with plates on rails.
TROUBLESHOOTING
7 Is abnormality found in the cam YES Change image transfer belt unit.
gear?
o Change high voltage unit/2.

22.3.19 Printer monocolor: low image density

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C516DA

1 Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the
displayed on the panel. warning code shown on the
2 State Confirm o Check data for Vg and Vdc. Go to next step.
Table Number Color Vdc: around 400 V
(Service Mode) Vg : around 500 V
Black Vdc: around 400 V
Vg : around 500 V
3 State Confirma- Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.
tion o Level His- (specified rang: 6 to 8 %)
4 tory 1 IDC output value is around 4.3 V. NO Clean IDC sensor and exe-
(Service Mode) cute the image stabilization.
Check image transfer belt for
damage and correct as nec-
essary.
5 Level history data Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 10.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6 check results Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 14.
7 TCR falling within specified range YES Go to step 10.
and low Vg and Vdc
and high Vg and Vdc
9 The situations other than the above- YES Go to step 10.
mentioned.
10 Imaging unit Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
dirty.
12 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit makes positive NO Check and correct contacts.
contact with plates on rails.
13 Is abnormality found in the cam YES Change image transfer belt
gear? unit.


14 Hopper unit Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect.
15 Gear is cracked. YES Change gear.
16 Image Process Toner is properly supplied when NO Go to next step.
Adjustment o TCR toner supply is run.
TCR Toner Supply
(Service Mode)
17 Image Process “Conv. Value” falls within the speci- YES Go to step 20.
Adjustment fied range as checked through gra-
oGradation Adjust dation adjust.
(Service Mode) Dark: 0 ± 100
Highlight: 0 ± 60
18 Image Process The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step.
Adjustment through the adjust of D Max.
o D Max Density
(Service Mode)
19 Image Process After the Initialize + Image Stabiliza- NO Go to next step.
Adjustment tion sequence has been completed,
o Stabilizer o run gradation adjust.
Initialize + Image
Stabilization
(Service Mode)
through the checks of steps up to 19. o Change printer control
board
oChange PH unit.
oChange high voltage unit/2.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.20 Printer monocolor: gradation reproduction failure

A02EF4C522DA

2 Photo/density Original type and screen pattern are NO Change screen pattern.
selected properly.
dirty.
5 State Confirma- IDC output value is around 4.3 V. NO Clean IDC sensor and execute
tion o Level His- the image stabilization.
tory 1 Check image transfer belt for
(Service Mode) damage and correct as neces-
sary.
6 Image Process “Conv. Value” falls within the YES Go to step 9.
Adjustment specified range as checked through
oGradation gradation adjust.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Adjust Dark: 0 ± 100
(Service Mode) Highlight: 0 ± 60
Adjustment o through the adjust of D Max.
D Max Density
(Service Mode)
o Stabilizer o run gradation adjust;
Initialize + Image
Stabilization
(Service Mode)
through the checks of steps up to 8. o Change printer control board
o Change PH unit.

22.3.21 Printer monocolor: foggy background

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
A02EF4C510DA

2 State Confirma- Check data for Vg and Vdc. NO Go to next step.
tion o Table Color Vdc: around 400 V
Number Vg : around 500 V
(Service Mode) Black Vdc: around 400 V
Vg : around 500 V
3 State Confirma- Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.
tion o Level His- (specified rang: 6 to 8 %)
4 tory 1 IDC output value is around 4.3 V. NO Clean IDC sensor and execute
(Service Mode) the image stabilization.
Check image transfer belt for
damage and correct as neces-
sary.
5 Level history data Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 10.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6 check results Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 12.
and low Vg and Vdc
and high Vg and Vdc
9 The situations other than the above- YES Go to step 10.
mentioned.
dirty.
12 Image Process The problem is eliminated after NO Go to next step.
Adjustment o background voltage margin has
Background Volt- been adjusted.
age Margin
(Service Mode)


Adjustment through the adjust of D Max.
o D Max Density
(Service Mode)
o Stabilizer o run gradation adjust.
Initialize + Image
Stabilization
(Service Mode)
16 Printer control Check the connection of connectors, NO Change printer control board.
board (PRCB) harness, and flat cables between Change PH relay board.
PH relay board PRCB and REYB/PH, and correct if
(REYB/PH) necessary.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.22 Printer monocolor: void areas, white spots

Void areas White spots
A02EF4C523DA

1 Image Check There are void areas at the front YES See P.881
side or high density section.
2 There is void area at the rear side YES Perform [Transfer Adjust] of
section. [Image Process Adjustment]
under Service Mode.
scratched.
5 Toner cartridge Foreign matter or caked toner in YES Remove foreign matter.
the toner cartridge.
6 Installation Is the atmospheric pressure at the YES Make the following adjustment:
environment installation site low? [Service Mode] o [Image Pro-
cess Adjustment] o [Dev. Bias
Choice].
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.23 Printer monocolor: colored spots

AA
A02EF4C524DA

1 Imaging unit Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and
makes good connection. check terminal position.
2 The surface of the PC drum is YES Change imaging unit.
scratched.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.24 Printer monocolor: blurred image

A02EF4C511DA

dirty.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.25 Printer monocolor: blank copy, black copy

Blank copy Black copy
A02EF4C518DA

1 Image check A blank copy occurs. YES Check PH unit connector for
proper connection.
2 Imaging unit Coupling of IU drive mechanism NO Check and correct drive
is installed properly. transmitting coupling.
Change IU.
3 The PC drum charge corona NO Check, clean, or correct the con-
voltage contact or PC drum tact.
ground contact of the imaging unit
is connected properly.
4 High voltage unit/ Connector is connected properly. NO Reconnect.
1
5 The problem has been eliminated NO Change high voltage unit/1.
through the check of step 4. o Change printer control board
o Change PH unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.26 Printer monocolor: uneven image

A02EF4C525DA

1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color NO Re-install it.
is surely installed.
2 PH unit The PH unit is surely installed. NO Re-install it.
3 Toner cartridge There is any stain or breakage on YES Clean/replace the toner cartridge.
the drive section of the toner
cartridge.
4 Imaging unit There is any stain, damage or YES Replace the imaging unit.
abrasion on the PC drum.
5 Transfer roller There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the transfer roller.
deformation or abrasion on the
transfer roller.
6 Fusing unit There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the fusing unit.
roller and drive section of the
fusing unit.
7 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the image transfer belt
TROUBLESHOOTING
through the check of step 6. unit.

22.3.27 Printer 4-color: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands
in sub scan direction
A02EF4C507DA

1 Image check A white line or colored line in sub YES Clean the comb electrode.
scan direction.
2 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent.
matter is evident on the transfer belt. (See Maintenance.)
3 Transfer belt is dirty or scratched. YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.
Change transfer belt unit if belt is
damaged.
4 Cleaning blade is not effective in YES Clean cleaning blade.
removing toner completely. Change transfer belt unit.
5 Transfer roller Transfer roller is dirty or scratched. YES Change transfer roller unit.
unit
6 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter.
path.
7 Image transfer paper separator YES Clean or change.
fingers are damaged or dirty.
TROUBLESHOOTING
8 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty YES Clean.
or damaged. Change fusing unit.
9 Fusing paper separator fingers are YES Clean.
dirty.
10 The problem has been eliminated NO Change printer control board

22.3.28 Printer 4-color: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands
in main scan direction
A02EF4C508DA

matter is evident on the transfer (See Maintenance.)
belt.
damaged.
3 Cleaning brush is not effective in YES Clean cleaning brush.
removing toner completely. Change transfer belt unit.
unit
path.
6 Image transfer paper separator YES Clean or change.
fingers are damaged or dirty.
7 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty YES Clean.
TROUBLESHOOTING
or damaged. Change fusing unit.

8 Fusing paper separator fingers are YES Clean.
dirty.
9 Neutralizing The resistance values between the NO Check the contact.
brush neutralizing brush and the ground Change neutralizing brush.
terminal is not f.
10 The problem has been eliminated NO Change printer control board

22.3.29 Printer 4-color: uneven density in sub scan direction

A02EF4C526DA

belt.
damaged.
3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4 Transfer roller Image transfer roller is installed NO Reinstall.
unit properly.
5 Image transfer roller is dirty or YES Change transfer roller unit.
scratched.
6 The problem has been eliminated NO Change transfer belt unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.30 Printer 4-color: uneven density in main scan direction

A02EF4C521DA

belt.
damaged.
3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4 Transfer roller Image transfer roller is installed NO Reinstall.
unit properly.
5 Image transfer roller is dirty or YES Change transfer roller unit.
scratched.
through the checks of steps up to 5. o Change high voltage unit/2.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.31 Printer 4-color: low image density

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A02EF4C516DA

1 Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just
unwrapped from its package.
2 Transfer belt unit Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
3 Transfer roller Transfer roller is installed properly. NO Reinstall.
4 unit Charge neutralizing needle is not NO Correct or change.
separated and ground terminal is
connected properly.
5 IDC sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean IDC sensor and execute
the image stabilization.
Adjustment through the adjust of D Max
TROUBLESHOOTING
o D Max Density Density.
(Service Mode)
8 Image Process After the Initialize + Image Stabili- NO Go to next step.
Adjustment zation sequence has been com-
o Stabilizer o pleted, run gradation adjust.
Reset + Stabi-
lizer
(Service Mode)
9 The problem has been eliminated NO Change image transfer belt unit.

22.3.32 Printer 4-color: poor color reproduction

A02EF4C527DA

2 Transfer belt unit Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4 unit Charge neutralizing needle is not NO Correct or change.
connected properly.
5 IDC sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean IDC sensor and execute
the image stabilization.
o Gradation gradation adjust.
Adjustment through the adjust of D Max Den-
TROUBLESHOOTING
oD Max Density sity.

(Service Mode)
8 Image Process After the Reset + Stabilizer NO Go to next step.
Adjustment sequence has been completed, run
o Stabilizer o gradation adjust.
Reset + Stabi-
lizer
(Service Mode)

22.3.33 Printer 4-color: incorrect color image registration

AA
A02EF4C512DA

displayed on the panel. warning code shown on the state
confirm screen.
2 Machine Vibration is given to the machine YES Turn off the main power switch
condition after main power switch has been and turn it on again more than 10
turned ON. seconds after.
3 Transfer belt Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent.
unit matter is evident on the transfer belt. (See Maintenance.)
damaged.
5 Drive coupling to the machine is YES Clean.
dirty.
scratched.
TROUBLESHOOTING
8 unit Transfer roller is dirty or scratched. YES Change transfer roller unit.
9 Machine Brush effect or blurred image YES Readjust fusing transport speed.
o Fusing Trans- occurs.
port Speed
(Service Mode)
10 Machine Check the specific color in which YES Perform “Color registration
o Color regis- color shift occurs. Adjustment.” If color shift is not
tration Adjust- corrected even with a correction
ment of ± 1 dot, go to next step.
(Service Mode)
11 PH relay board REYB/PH ICP3, ICP4 or ICP5 con- NO Change PH relay board.
duction check
12 Printer control PRCB ICP17 conduction check NO Change printer control board.
board

22.3.34 Printer 4-color: void areas, white spots

Void areas White spots
A02EF4C523DA

1 Image check There are void areas at the front YES See P.896
side or high density section.
2 There are void areas in the trailing YES Perform [Transfer Adjust] of
edge. [Image Process Adjustment]
under Service Mode.
belt.
damaged.
5 Transfer roller Transfer roller is dirty or scratched. YES Change 2nd image transfer roller
unit unit.
6 Charge neutralizing needle is not NO Correct or change.
connected properly.
TROUBLESHOOTING
path.
8 Pre-image transfer guide plate is YES Clean or change.
damaged or dirty.

22.3.35 Printer 4-color: colored spots

AA
A02EF4C509DA

scratched.
matter is evident on the image (See Maintenance.)
transfer belt.
damaged.
unit
path.
6 Fusing unit Fusing belt is dirty or scratched. YES Change fusing unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.36 Printer 4-color: poor fusing performance, offset

Poor fusing performance Offset
CF
CF
CF
A02EF4C528DA

1 Paper Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.
2 Machineo Fus- Changing fusing temperature YES Readjust fusing temperature.
ing Temperature eliminates the problem of poor
(Service Mode) fusing performance and offset.
3 The problem has been eliminated NO Change fusing unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.37 Printer 4-color: brush effect, blurred image

Brush effect Blurred image
A02EF4C529DA

2 Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.
3 Fusing unit Fusing unit is installed properly. NO Reinstall.
4 Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty. YES Clean.
5 Fusing belt is dirty or scratched. YES Change fusing unit.
6 Machine Changing fusing speed eliminates YES Readjust fusing transport
o Fusing Trans- the problem of brush effect and speed.
port Speed blurred image.
(Service Mode)
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.38 Printer 4-color: back marking

AA
A02EF4C530DA

1 2nd image trans- Image transfer roller is scratched or YES Change transfer roller unit.
fer roller unit dirty.
path.
3 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is YES Clean or change.
scratched or dirty.
4 Lower fusing roller is scratched or YES Change fusing unit.
dirty.
belt.
through the checks of steps up to 5. o Change high voltage unit/2.
TROUBLESHOOTING

22.3.39 Printer 4-color: uneven image

A02EF4C525DA

1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color NO Re-install it.
is surely installed.
2 PH unit The PH unit is surely installed. NO Re-install it.
3 Toner cartridge There is any stain or breakage on YES Clean/replace the toner cartridge.
the drive section of the toner car-
tridge.
4 Imaging unit There is any stain, damage or YES Replace the imaging unit.
abrasion on the PC drum.
5 Transfer roller unit There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the transfer roller unit.
transfer roller.
6 Fusing unit There is any stain, damage, YES Replace the fusing unit.
roller and drive section of the fus-
ing unit.
7 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the transfer belt unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
through the check of step 6.

23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
23. IC protector
23.1 Outline
• To increase product safety, this MFP has an IC protector (ICP) installed in each board.
ICP is a component that protects IC. If the amount of the current supplied to the electrical
parts such as motor exceeds the set level, ICP trips to protect IC from over current.
The following list contains ICP installed in each board, related devices, and symptoms
that occur when ICP trips.
23.2 IC protector list

23.2.1 Main body
A. Printer control board
When ICP trips

ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code
Symptom in each load
and others
ICP1 M9 Toner supply motor/Y Abnormally low toner density C-2555/
caused by toner supply motor/Y C-255B/C-2563
and its adjustment failure
M10 Toner supply motor/M Abnormally low toner density C-2553/
caused by toner supply motor/M C-255A/C-2562
ICP2 M11 Toner supply motor/C Abnormally low toner density C-2551/
caused by toner supply motor/C C-2559/C-2561
M12 Toner supply motor/K Abnormally low toner density C-2557/
caused by toner supply motor/K C-255C/C-2564
ICP3 M20 Waste toner agitating motor Waste toner agitating motor’s C-2204
failure to turn
ICP4 M21 1st transfer pressure retraction Transfer belt pressure/retraction C-2152
motor failure
ICP5 M13 Toner cartridge motor Y/M Toner empty detection
—
(TC replacement message)
TROUBLESHOOTING
M14 Toner cartridge motor C/K Toner empty detection

—
ICP6 FM3 Cooling fan motor Cooling fan motor’s failure to turn C-5356
FM7 Toner suction fan motor Toner suction fan motor’s failure C-2350
to turn
FM13 Paper cooling fan motor Paper cooling fan motor’s failure C-0351
to turn
ICP7 FM16 Rear side cooling fan motor Rear side cooling fan motor’s C-2354
failure to turn
SD1 Gate switch solenoid Paper exit section jam —
ICP8 FM101 Tucking fan motor/1 Occurrence of tucking problem —
FM102 Tucking fan motor/2 Occurrence of tucking problem —
FM103 Tucking fan motor/3 Occurrence of tucking problem —

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector
When ICP trips

and others
ICP9 FM2 Fusing cooling fan motor/1 Fusing cooling fan motor/1’s C-3303
failure to turn
FM6 Ozone ventilation fan motor Ozone ventilation fan motor’s C-5354
failure to turn
ICP10 FM10 IH cooling fan motor/1 IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to C-5304
turn
FM12 IH cooling fan motor/2 IH cooling fan motor/2’s failure to C-5306
turn
ICP11 EL/Y Main erase lamp/Y No change (Unlit. Image persis- —
EL/M Main erase lamp/M tence and stain on copy may —
occur.)
EL/C Main erase lamp/C —
EL/K Main erase lamp/K —
ICP12 — Key counter Unable to count —
TCT Total counter Unable to make a copy
—
(LED of Start Key blinks in red.)
ICP13 M16 Color PC drum motor Color PC drum motor’s failure to C-2253
turn
M17 Color developing motor Color developing motor’s failure C-2255
to turn
ICP14 M18 K PC drum motor K PC drum motor’s failure to turn C-225B
M19 K developing motor K developing motor’s failure to C-2259
turn
ICP15 M1 Transfer belt motor Transfer belt motor’s failure to C-5104
turn
REDB Relay drive board No change
(Dehumidifier heater remains —
ON, causing no negative effects.)
ICP16 M30 Fusing motor Fusing motor’s failure to turn C-3201
ICP17 TCRS/ TCR sensor/Y Abnormally high toner density C-2556/C-255B
Y detected by TCR sensor/Y and its
TROUBLESHOOTING
adjustment failure
TCRS/ TCR sensor/M Abnormally high toner density C-2554/C-255A
M detected by TCR sensor/M and
its adjustment failure
TCRS/ TCR sensor/C Abnormally high toner density C-2552/C-2559
C detected by TCR sensor/C and
its adjustment failure
TCRS/ TCR sensor/K Abnormally high toner density C-2558/C-255C
K detected by TCR sensor/K and its
adjustment failure
REYB/ PH relay board P-14 color shift may occur. P-14
PH
INDEX Index board Laser failure C-4501
B
PZS_K Toner empty sensor/K K toner empty detection
—

When ICP trips

and others
ICP17 IDCS/F IDC registration sensor/F IDC registration sensor/F P-5
malfunction
IDCS/R IDC registration sensor/R IDC registration sensor/R P-28
malfunction
TEMS1 Heating roller temperature Fusing heater failure/abnormally C-3425/
sensor/1 low fusing temperature/ C-3825/
fusing sensor wire disconnection C-3925/C-392A
/stain on fusing sensor
TEMS2 Heating roller temperature Fusing sensor wire disconnection C-3921
sensor/2
TEMS3 Heating roller temperature Abnormally low fusing tempera- C-3822/C-3922
sensor/3 ture/fusing sensor wire discon-
nection
ICP18 M38 Cleaner motor Cleaner motor’s failure to turn C-2257
B. MFP board
When ICP trips

and others
F201 — — Control panel unlit (As polyswitch —
is used, the problem disappears
by turning OFF the main power
switch and leaving MFP alone.
F250 — — MFP does not boot up. —
(As polyswitch is used, the prob-
lem disappears by turning OFF
the main power switch and leav-
ing MFP alone.)
F300 — — USB device does not work. —
TROUBLESHOOTING

ing MFP alone.)
F301 — — Unable to download —
ing MFP alone.)
ICP — — Management device does not —
200 communicate.
Q206 — — Unable to download (Download —
screen does not appear.)

C. Paper feed/transport drive board
When ICP trips

and others
ICP1 LUDB LU drive board LCT feed section/transport sec-
—
tion jam
PS3 Paper feed sensor LCT feed section/transport sec-
—
tion jam
PS28 Intermediate roller sensor Tray 3/4 intermediate transport
—
roller section jam
PS4 Tray1 vertical transport sensor Tray 1 feed section jam —
PS5 Tray1 paper feed sensor Tray 1 feed section jam —
PS12 Tray2 vertical transport sensor Tray 2 feed section jam —
PS13 Tray2 paper feed sensor Tray 2 feed section jam —
ICP2 FM1 Suction fan motor Suction fan motor’s failure to turn C-0301
FM4 Fusing cooling fan motor/2 Fusing cooling fan motor/2’s C-3304
failure to turn
FM5 Fusing cooling fan motor/3 Fusing cooling fan motor/3’s C-3305
failure to turn
ICP3 CL1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch Tray 1 feed section jam —
CL2 Tray2 paper feed clutch Tray 2 feed section jam —
ICP4 CL5 Tray3 paper feed clutch Tray 3 feed section jam —
CL6 Tray3 transport clutch Tray 3/4 horizontal transport sec-
—
tion jam
CL7 Tray4 paper feed clutch Tray 3 feed section jam —
ICP5 CL3 Horizontal Transport clutch Tray 3/4 horizontal transport sec-
—
tion jam
ICP6 M25 Transport motor Tray 3/4 feeder transport motor C-0104
failure to turn detection
D. PH relay board
TROUBLESHOOTING
When ICP trips
and others
ICP1 FM14 PH cooling fan motor PH cooling fan motor’s failure to C-4301
turn
FM15 IU cooling fan motor IU cooling fan motor’s failure to C-2353
turn
ICP2 M34 Polygon motor Polygon motor’s turning at C-4101
abnormal timing
ICP3 M37 Skew correction motor/C P-14 color shift may occur. P-14
ICP4 M36 Skew correction motor/M P-14 color shift may occur. P-14
ICP5 M35 Skew correction motor/Y P-14 color shift may occur. P-14

When ICP trips

and others
ICP6 LDDB/ Laser drive board/Y Laser failure C-4501
Y
LDDB/ Laser drive board/M Laser failure C-4501
M
LDDB/ Laser drive board/C Laser failure C-4501
C
LDDB/ Laser drive board/K Laser failure C-4501
K
E. High voltage unit/1
When ICP trips

and others
IP101 — Charge corona/grid/developing Abnormal image (Stabilization is P-6/7/8/9
section_Y not completed successfully.)
IP201 — Charge corona/grid/developing Abnormal image (Stabilization is P-6/7/8/9
section_M not completed successfully.)
IP301 — Charge corona/grid/developing Abnormal image (Stabilization is P-7/8
section_C not completed successfully.)
IP401 — Charge corona/grid/developing Abnormal image (Stabilization is P-6/9
section_K not completed successfully.)
F. High voltage unit/2
When ICP trips

and others
IP101 — Image transfer Abnormal image (transfer failure, P-27
ATVC malfunction)
TROUBLESHOOTING
G. DC power supply
When ICP trips

and others
F551 FM9 Power supply cooling fan Power supply cooling fan motor’s C-5351
motor failure to turn

H. Scanner relay board
When ICP trips

and others
PTR1 PS14 Empty sensor JAM caused by the last original —
fed from DF
RS201 Original cover sensor Unable to detect a close of DF —
REYB/ Scanner relay board_WAKE Opening and closing DF or plac- —
SCAN signal generation section ing original on DF cannot cause
MFP to wake from sleep mode.
MCMB Machine condition monitor Unlit InfoLine (blue and orange) —
board located at the front of scanner
section
— Local interface board (option) USB device does not work. —
PTR2 PS204 Original size detection sensor/ Wrong original size detection —
1
PS205 Original size detection sensor/ Wrong original size detection —
2
F1 FM201 Optical cooling fan motor Optical cooling fan motor’s failure C-8302
to turn
23.2.2 DF-618
A. DF control board
When ICP trips

ICP
Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code
Symbol Symptom in each load
and others
DC to DC converter input sec- Unable to produce DC5V in ADF and
F8
tion 24V line MFP unable to detect ADF
F6 SD1 Switch back solenoid ADF paper exit / image reading sec-

tion JAM
SD2 Exit switch back solenoid ADF image reading section JAM
F7 SD3 Stamp solenoid Unable to place a stamp
TROUBLESHOOTING
FM1 Cooling fan Cooling fan failure C-8302
F10 PS3 Registration sensor ADF transport section JAM
PS8 Reverse Registration sensor ADF turnover section JAM
PS4 After separate sensor ADF transport section JAM
F9 PS7 Reverse roller sensor Turn around pressure welding alien-
C-8102
ation trouble
PS9 Before read sensor ADF transport section JAM
PS10 Length sensor/1 Wrong original size detection
PS15 Lift up lower sensor Lift up mechanism failure C-8106
F11 PS20 Original set sensor Original reset indication
F2 M7 Registration motor ADF transport section JAM
F3 M1 Reading motor ADF image reading section JAM

When ICP trips

ICP
and others
F1 M3 Exit motor ADF paper exit section
F4 M2 Take-up motor ADF paper feed section JAM
PS1 M6 Lift-up motor Lift up mechanism failure C-8106
PS2 M5 Switchback roller pressure/ Turn around pressure welding alien-
C-8102
retraction motor ation trouble
PS3 M4 Reading roller pressure/retrac- Before reading pressure welding
C-8101
tion motor alienation mechanism
23.2.3 LU-301/LU-204
A. LU drive board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP2 M1 Lift-up motor LCT up/down abnormality C-0216
ICP3 M3 Transport motor LCT transport section JAM
ICP4 M2 Paper feed motor LCT feed section JAM
ICP5 PS3 Paper feed sensor LCT feed section JAM
23.2.4 JS-504
A. JS control board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
F1 FN main power switch Unable to supply 24V to FN and MFP
C-1004
unable to detect FN
F2 DC to DC converter input sec- Unable to produce DC5V in FN and
C-1004
tion 24 V line MFP unable to detect FN
F3 Unused
TROUBLESHOOTING
F4 T1FD Continuous tray 1 full detection

Lower tray paper full detect
TB/
board/PR
PR

T2FD Continuous tray 2 full detection
Upper tray paper full detect
TB/
board/PR
PR
F6 M2 Shift motor Shift motor drive failure C-1182
F7 M1 Transport motor Transport section JAM

23.2.5 ZU-606
A. ZU control board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP1 DC5V sensor and others in the Unable to be detected
board
ICP3 M601 Registration motor Entrance JAM
ICP4 M606 Main motor Folding section JAM
ICP5 M605 Punch shift motor Punch shift motor drive malfunction C-1133
ICP6 M603 2nd stopper motor 2nd stopper motor drive malfunction C-1131
ICP7 M602 1st stopper motor 1st stopper motor drive malfunction C-1130
ICP8 SD601 Gate solenoid/Lw Main motor cooling fan drive mal- C-1134
SD602 Gate solenoid/Up function
CL601 Punch clutch

FM601 Main motor cooling fan
ICP9 M608 Punch switchover motor Punch switchover motor drive mal- C-1136
function
ICP10 M604 Punch motor Punch motor drive malfunction C-1135
ICP12 M607 Punch scraps conveyance motor Punch scraps full
23.2.6 FS-526
A. FS control board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP1 M5 Main tray lift motor Main tray Up/Down motor malfunc- C-1102
tion
ICP2 M4 Exit roller motor Paper exit roller drive motor malfunc- C-1104
tion
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD1 Route change gate solenoid SD staple section JAM
SD2 Bypass gate solenoid Bypass transport JAM
SD3 Sub tray gate solenoid Sub tray exit JAM
SD4 Switch back solenoid JAM during saddle stitch with paper
fed from PI
SD404 3rd Entrance switching solenoid Job tray paper exit JAM
ICP3 M1 Transport motor/1 Entrance JAM
M2 Transport motor/2 Entrance JAM

When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP4 M11 Alignment plate motor/F Side-staple front adjust drive motor C-1103
malfunction
M12 Alignment plate motor/R Side-staple rear adjust drive motor C-1140
malfunction
M15 Trail edge paddle motor Trail edge paddle up/down drive mal-
function
M18 Rewind paddle motor Rewind paddle motor drive malfunc-
tion
M19 2 staples trail edge stopper End stopper drive motor malfunction C-1145
motor
ICP5 M3 Bypass transport motor Bypass transport motor drive mal-
function
M13 2 staples stapler movement Side-staple stapler drive malfunction C-1106
motor
ICP6 M6 Paper output roller motor Paper exit auxiliary roller motor mal- C-1105
function
M10 Stacker entrance motor Stacker entrance motor drive mal-
function
board
ICP8 DC3.3V sensor and others in the Unable to be detected
board
ICP9 M17 Stacker plate motor Spare stacker board drive motor mal- C-1144
function
ICP10 M14 2 staples stapler motor Side-staple stapler motor drive mal- C-1109
function
ICP11 24V in interlock board Side-staple stapler motor drive mal- C-1109
function
ICP12 M34 Exit motor (SD-508) Center-staple paper exit motor mal- C-1152
function
TROUBLESHOOTING
ICP13 M16 Paddle motor Side-staple paddle roller motor mal- C-1141
function
B. Interlock board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP1 DC5V sensor and others in the Side-staple stapler motor drive mal- C-1109
board function

C. Transport control board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP1 M201 Transport motor Transport section JAM
ICP2 FM1 Fan motor/1 Fan motor drive malfunction
FM2 Fan motor/2
board
23.2.7 SD-508
A. SD drive board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP2 M22 Leading edge stopper motor Center-staple lead edge stopper C-1113
motor malfunction
board
ICP4 M20 Center staple alignment motor / Center-staple front adjust drive motor C-1114
F malfunction
M21 Center staple alignment motor / Center-staple rear adjust drive motor C-1150
R malfunction
M23 Center staple motor Center-staple stapler drive motor C-1151
malfunction
M26 Center staple paddle lift motor/C Center-staple paddle up-down motor C-1153
malfunction
ICP5 M29 Center staple paddle/T Center-staple paddle roller motor C-1156
malfunction (trailing edge)
M30 Center staple paddle/C Center-staple paddle roller motor C-1157
malfunction (middle)
M33 Transport motor Exit motor drive malfunction C-1116
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD5 Tri-folding change solenoid SD paper exit JAM
SD6 Exit grip solenoid
ICP6 M25 Clincher motor Center-staple clinch roller motor mal- C-1112
function
ICP7 M24 Staple motor Center-staple head roller motor mal- C-1110
function
ICP8 M32 Center fold knife motor Center-staple knife drive motor mal- C-1115
function

23.2.8 PK-516
A. Punch control board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
Output OP punch driving motor mal-
ICP1 M302 Punch oscillating motor C-1132
function
DC5V sensor and others in the Unable to be detected
ICP2
board
ICP4 M301 Punch drive motor Punch shift motor drive malfunction C-1127
23.2.9 PI-505
A. PI drive board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
ICP1 CL201 Transfer clutch /Up Paper feed JAM
CL202 Transfer clutch /Lw
CL203 Registration clutch
SD201 Pick-up solenoid /Up
SD202 Pick-up solenoid /Lw
ICP2 M201 Tray lift motor /Up Sheet feeder up/down drive failure C-1125
(upper)
M202 Tray lift motor /Lw Sheet feeder up/down drive failure C-1124
(lower)
board
ICP4 M203 Transfer motor Paper feed JAM
23.2.10 FS-527
A. FS control board
TROUBLESHOOTING
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
F1 Between connection with MFP No operation (Due to no power sup-
and 24V power line ply to CPU, FS connection not
F3 24V to 5V DC to DC converter detected)
F4 5V to 3.3V DC to DC converter
F5 M1 Paper passage motor/1 JAM between MFP and the paper
receiving section
F6 M3 Paper passage motor/2 JAM between RU and the intermedi-
ate section
F7 M4 Conveyance motor JAM between the intermediate and
lower path sections

When ICP trips

ICP
and others
F8 M5 Exit motor JAM or multiple sheets/sets ejection
JAM between the accommodation
and exit sections.
F9 M11 Stapler movement motor Stapler movement drive failure C-11B0
F10 M13 Alignment plate motor Alignment plate motor drive malfunc- C-1190
tion
F11 M14 Leading edge stopper motor Leading edge stopper motor drive C-1194
malfunction
F12 SD1 Accommodation paddle solenoid Accommodation section JAM
F13 M16 Tray2 shift motor Shift motor drive failure C-1182
F14 M2 Duplex path switching motor Duplex path switching motor drive C-11E0
malfunction (Paper may be fed in the
mode where this motor does not
operate)
F15 M6 Upper lower path switching Upper lower path switching motor C-11E1
motor drive malfunction (Paper may be fed
when no finishing options are
selected.)
F16 M8 Tray1 path switching motor Tray1 path switching motor drive mal- C-11E2
function (Paper may be fed when it is
not ejected to the tray 1.)
F17 M17 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction C-11A7
failure (Only when JS is installed)
F18 M9 Exit roller retraction motor Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction C-11A1
failure
F19 M10 Accommodation roller retraction Accommodation roller pressure/ C-11A2
motor retraction failure
F20 M100 Punch motor/1 Punch motor drive malfunction (Only C-11C0
during the initial operation or the
punch operation in punch mode)
F21 M18 Stapler motor Staple drive failure (Paper may be C-11B2
TROUBLESHOOTING
fed when stapling is not selected)
F22 M15 Elevate motor Elevate drive malfunction C-1183
F23 M12 Accommodation paddle motor Accommodation section JAM
(Depending on conditions, paper may
be ejected when no finishing options
are selected.)
F25 M15 Elevate motor Elevate drive malfunction C-1183
F26 PS200 Punch cam position sensor Punch motor drive malfunction C-11C0
PS300 Punch pulse sensor/1
PS100 Punch home sensor/1
F27 Stapler home sensor Staple drive failure (Likely to staple C-11B2
Stapler self-priming sensor repeatedly depending on conditions)
Staple empty sensor

When ICP trips

ICP
and others
F29 PS1 Paper passage sensor/1 JAM
PS2 Paper passage sensor/2
PS10 Registration sensor
PS30 Punch hole full sensor
F30 PS9 Lower path sensor JAM
PS16 Tray2 paper detection sensor
23.2.11 SD-509
A. SD drive board
When ICP trips

ICP
and others
F1 PS43 Paper detection sensor/1 Saddle section JAM
PS44 Paper detection sensor/2
F2 24V to 5V DC to DC converter No operation (Due to no power sup-
ply to CPU, SD connection is not
detected)
F3 M24 Center staple alignment motor/F Center-staple front adjust drive motor C-1114
malfunction
F4 M23 Center staple alignment motor/R Center-staple rear adjust drive motor C-1150
malfunction
F5 M20 Leading edge stopper motor Center-staple lead edge stopper C-1113
motor malfunction
F7 M26 Center fold plate motor Center-staple knife drive motor mal- C-1115
function
F8 Saddle stapler Saddle stapler drive failure C-11B5
F9 SD3 Leading edge grip solenoid Misalignment, misalignment of
sheets in a copy set, and misaligned
saddle stitch and fold positions
TROUBLESHOOTING
F10 Stapler home sensor Center-stapler drive failure or staple C-11B5

Staple empty sensor 1 empty indication
Staple empty sensor 2

F11 M25 Center fold roller motor Center-staple transfer motor mal- C-1116
function
F12 M25 Center fold roller motor Center-staple transfer motor mal- C-1116
function
F13 M21 Upper paddle motor Center-staple paddle roller motor C-1156
malfunction (trailing edge)
F14 M22 Lower paddle motor Center-staple paddle roller motor C-1158
malfunction (Leading edge)

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
APPENDIX
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
24.1 Main body
24.1.1 Scanner section
[1]
[17] [2]
[16] [3]
[18] [4]
[15]
[5]
[14] [6]
[13]
[8]
[12] [7]
[11] [10] [9]
A0P0F5J509DA
[1] Scanner motor (M201) [10] Scanner home sensor (PS201)

[2] 15 degree sensor (PS202) [11] Exposure lamp (FL201)
[3] Original size detection sensor/1 (PS204) [12] Inverter board (INVB)
[4] CCD board (CCDB) [13] Original glass moving motor (M202)
[5] Original cover sensor (RS201) [14] Glass home sensor (PS203)
[6] USB board (UB) [15] Original glass position control board
(OGPCB)
[7] Control panel assy [16] Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
[8] Fax speaker (SP) [17] Optical cooling fan motor (FM201)
[9] Machine condition monitor board (MCMB) [18] Original size detection sensor/2 (PS205)
APPENDIX

24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
24.1.2 Front side

A. Load
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6] A0P0F5C522DA
[1] IH cooling fan motor/2 (FM12) [4] Toner supply motor/M (M11)
[2] IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10) [5] Toner supply motor/C (M10)
[3] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [6] Toner supply motor/Y (M9)
APPENDIX

B. Board/switch/sensor/others
[12] [13] [14] [15]

[11]
[10]
[1]
[9]
[8] [2]
[7] [3]
[6] [4]
[5] A0P0F5C524DA
[1] IH power supply (IHPU) [9] Main erase lamp/M (EL/M)

[2] Power switch (SW1) [10] Main erase lamp/C (EL/C)
[3] Total counter (TCT) [11] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K)
[4] Waste toner box set sensor (PS53) [12] Toner empty sensor/Y (RS/Y)
[5] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [13] Toner empty sensor/M (RS/M)
[6] Front door switch (MS3) [14] Toner empty sensor/C (RS/C)
[7] Toner cartridge cover switch (RS1) [15] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)
[8] Main erase lamp/Y (EL/Y)
APPENDIX

24.1.3 Back side

A. Board
[12] [1]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[10]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
A0P0F5C518DA
[1] MFP board (MFPB) [7] DC power supply (DCPU)

[2] NVRAM board (NRB) [8] Service EEPROM board (SVERB)
[3] PCI board (PCIB) [9] High voltage unit/2 (HV2)
[4] Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) [10] Printer control board (PRCB)
[5] Relay drive board (REDB) [11] Hard disk (HDD)
[6] High voltage unit/1 (HV1) [12] DIMM0
APPENDIX

B. Load
[19] [1]
[17] [18]
[3]
[16] [2]
[4]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11] [5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[7]
A0P0F5C519DA
[1] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) [11] Cleaner motor (M38)
[2] Transfer belt motor (M1) [12] Color developing motor (M17)
[3] K PC drum motor (M18) [13] 1st transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)
[4] Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6) [14] Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13)
[5] K developing motor (M19) [15] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
[6] Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) [16] Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
[7] MFP control board cooling fan motor [17] Cooling fan motor (FM3)
(FM17)
[8] Color PC drum motor (M16) [18] Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
APPENDIX
[9] Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9) [19] Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
[10] IU cooling fan motor (FM15)

C. Switch/sensor/others
[1] [2]
[11]
[12]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[6]
[7]
A0P0F5C521DA
[1] Loop amount detection sensor/1 (PS41) [7] Pressure welding alienation sensor/color
(PS52)
[2] Loop amount detection sensor/2 (PS42) [8] Dehumidifier heater transformer (T1)
[3] Pressure welding alienation sensor/K [9] Noise filter (NF1) *200 V area only
(PS51)
[4] Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) [10] USB cover sensor (PS60)
[5] Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44) [11] K PC encoder sensor/1 (PS45)
[6] Dehumidification heater switch (SW2) [12] K PC encoder sensor/2 (PS46)
APPENDIX

24.1.4 Around the write section
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3] A0P0F5C511DA
[1] PH unit [4] PH cooling fan motor (FM14)

[2] Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor [5] PH relay board (REYB/PH)
(PS23)
[3] Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
APPENDIX

24.1.5 Manual bypass tray
[1]
[2]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
A0P0F5C512DA
[1] Bypass tray up down motor (M28) [7] Bypass paper width detection resistor
(VR1)
[2] Bypass paper feed motor (M27) [8] Bypass set sensor (PS30)
[3] Bypass sub tray set sensor (PS37) [9] Bypass paper empty sensor (PS34)
[4] Multi FD size sensor/3 (PS33) [10] Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
[5] Multi FD size sensor/2 (PS32) [11] Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36)
[6] Multi FD size sensor/1 (PS31)
APPENDIX

24.1.6 Tray 1
[13]
[1]
[12]
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
A0P0F5C513DA
[1] Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) [8] Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS7)
[2] Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) [9] Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)
[3] Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6) [10] Tray1 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS8)
[4] Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) [11] Tray1 device detection sensor (PS1)
[5] Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5) [12] Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)
[6] Tray1 paper empty sensor (PS2) [13] Take-up motor (M22)
[7] Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3)
APPENDIX

24.1.7 Tray 2
[13] [1]
[2]
[4] [5]
[6]
[12] [3]
[11]
[10]
[7]
[9]
[8]
A0P0F5C514DA
[1] Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) [8] Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11)
[2] Tray2 paper feed clutch (CL2) [9] Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/1 (PS15)
[3] Tray2 door set sensor (PS17) [10] Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)
[4] Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14) [11] Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/2 (PS16)
[5] Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) [12] Tray2 device detection sensor (PS9)
[6] Tray2 paper feed sensor (PS13) [13] Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)
[7] Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS10)
APPENDIX

24.1.8 Tray 3
[11] [1] [3]

[10] [2]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[6] A0P0F5C515DA
[1] Tray3 near empty sensor (PS20) [7] Paper temperature thermistor (TH8)
[2] Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS19) [8] Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)
[3] Intermediate roller sensor (PS28) [9] Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS22)
[4] Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) [10] Tray3 paper feed clutch (CL5)
[5] Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) [11] Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)
[6] Tray3 dehumidifier heater (DH1)
APPENDIX

24.1.9 Tray 4
[14] [15] [1] [2] [3]

[13]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[12]
[11]
[10]
A0P0F5C516DA
[1] Horizontal transport set sensor (PS58) [9] Tray4 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/4)
[2] Tray4 paper feed clutch (CL7) [10] Tray4 dehumidifier heater (DH2)
[3] Tray4 near empty sensor (PS25) [11] Tray4 lift-up motor (M24)
[4] Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24) [12] Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS27)
[5] Tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26) [13] Transport motor (M25)
[6] Tray1 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/1) [14] Vertical transport motor (M26)
[7] Tray2 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/2) [15] Horizontal Transport clutch (CL3)
[8] Tray3 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/3)
APPENDIX

24.1.10 2nd transfer section
[1] [2]
[3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
A0P0F5C523DA
[1] Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50) [6] Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS)
[2] Suction fan motor (FM1) [7] IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
[3] 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) [8] IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R)
[4] Timing roller sensor (PS38) [9] Registration motor (M2)
[5] OHP detection sensor (PS40)
APPENDIX

24.1.11 Duplex section
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
A0P0F5C517DA
[1] ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) [4] ADU door sensor (PS49)
[2] ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48) [5] ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
[3] ADU transport motor/2 (M32)
APPENDIX

24.1.12 Fusing/paper exit section
[16] [1] [3]

[15]
[2]
[14]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[12]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[10]
A0P0F5C520DA
[1] Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS56) [9] Pressure home sensor (PS55)
[2] Heating roller temperature sensor/2 [10] IH coil (FH1)
(TEMS2)
[3] Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5) [11] Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)
[4] Heating roller temperature sensor (TEMS1) [12] Right door switch (MS2)
[5] Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (FM4) [13] Fusing retraction position sensor (PS59)
[6] Heating roller temperature sensor/3 [14] Fusing motor (M30)
(TEMS3)
[7] Gate switch solenoid (SD1) [15] Exit motor (M4)
[8] Paper exit sensor (PS39) [16] Switchback Motor (M33)
APPENDIX

24.2 DF-618/SP-501
[10] [11]
[12]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
A0P0F5C600DA
[1] Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) [8] Registration motor (M7)
[2] Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) [9] Take-up motor (M2)
[3] Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) [10] Exit motor (M3)
[4] Stamp solenoid (SD3) * [11] Switch back solenoid (SD1)
[5] Lift-up motor (M6) [12] Cooling fan (FM1)
[6] Exit switch back solenoid (SD2)
[7] Reading motor (M1)
*: Option
APPENDIX

[21] [1]
[2]
[20]
[19]
[3]
[18]
[4]
[17]
[5]
[16]
[6]
[15]
[8] [7]
[14] [13]
[12] [10] [9]
[11]
A0P0F5C601DA
[1] Length sensor/1 (PS10) [12] Consolidation/2 (PS18)

[2] Length sensor/3 (PS12) [13] Consolidation/1 (PS19)
[3] Length sensor/2 (PS11) [14] Reverse registration sensor (PS8)
[4] Lift-up upper sensor (PS16) [15] Before read sensor (PS9)
[5] Empty sensor (PS14) [16] Registration sensor (PS3)
[6] After separate sensor (PS4) [17] Exit sensor (PS5)
[7] Original set sensor (PS20) [18] Read open/close sensor (PS2)
[8] Reverse roller sensor (PS7) [19] Feed open/close sensor (PS1)
[9] Lift up lower sensor (PS15) [20] DF control board (DFCB)
[10] Read roller sensor (PS6) [21] Relay board (REYB)
[11] Consolidation/3 (PS17)
APPENDIX

24.3 LU-301 (Option)
[13] [1]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
A03NF5C500DA
[1] LU door switch (MS1) [8] Tray set sensor (PS1)

[2] Near empty sensor /2 (PS6) [9] Lift-up motor (M1)
[3] Paper empty sensor(PS4) [10] Paper feed motor (M2)
[4] Tray LED(LED) [11] Transport motor (M3)
[5] Dehumidification heater (DH) [12] LU drive board (LUDB)
[6] Paper feed sensor(PS3) [13] Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)
[7] Upper limit sensor(PS2)
APPENDIX

24.4 LU-204 (Option)
[1]
[14] [2]
[3]
[13] [4]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[5]
[8]
[7] [6]
A0TJF5C500DA
[1] LU door switch (MS1) [8] Upper limit sensor(PS2)

[2] Near empty sensor /2 (PS6) [9] Tray set sensor/1 (PS1)
[3] Paper empty sensor(PS4) [10] Lift-up motor (M1)
[4] Tray LED(LED) [11] Paper feed motor (M2)
[5] Dehumidification heater (DH) [12] Transport motor (M3)
[6] Tray set sensor/2 (PS7) [13] LU drive board (LUDB)
[7] Paper feed sensor(PS3) [14] Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)
APPENDIX

24.5 JS-504 (Option)
[1]
[13]
[12] [2]
[3]
[11] [4]
[5]
[10] [9] [7] [6]

[8]
A0D5F5C500DA
[1] Upper tray exit sensor (PS2) [8] Upper tray paper full detect board/LED
(T2FDTB/LED)
[2] Lower tray exit sensor (PS1) [9] Route change motor (M3)
[3] Route change home sensor (PS4) [10] Lower tray paper full detect board/PR
(T1FDTB/PR)
[4] Shift motor (M2) [11] JS control board (JSCB)
[5] Shift home sensor (PS6) [12] Transport motor (M1)
[6] Front door sensor (PS3) [13] Upper tray paper full detect board/PR
(T2FDTB/PR)
[7] Lower tray paper full detect board/LED
(T1FDTB/LED)
APPENDIX

24.6 JS-603 (Option)
[3]
[1]
[2]
A10FF5C500DA
[1] Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) [3] Tray3 full sensor (PS36)
[2] Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
APPENDIX

24.7 ZU-606 (Option)
[1]
[15]
[14]
[2]
[13] [3]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[8] [7]
A07TF5C500DA
[1] Main motor cooling fan (FM601) [9] Coil (COIL)

[2] Punch shift motor (M605) [10] DC power supply/1 (DCPU1)
[3] Punch shift home sensor (PS605) [11] Door switch (MS602)
[4] ZU control board (ZUCB) [12] DC power supply/2 (DCPU2)
[5] Circuit breaker/2 (CBR2) [13] Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607)
[6] Circuit breaker/1 (CBR1) [14] Punch scraps full sensor (PS608)
[7] Power relay (RY1) [15] Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)
[8] Noise filter (NF1)
APPENDIX

[10] [11]
[9]
[8] [1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
A07TF5C501DA
[1] Main motor (M606) [7] 2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
[2] Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610) [8] Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)
[3] Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601) [9] Conveyance sensor (PS601)
[4] Registration motor (M601) [10] 1st folding stopper motor (M602)
[5] 2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604) [11] 1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)
[6] Exit sensor (PS609)
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4] [3]
A07TF5C502DA
[1] Punch motor (M604) [4] Punch switchover switch (MS601)

[2] Punch home sensor (PS606) [5] Punch switchover motor (M608)
APPENDIX
[3] Paper size detect board (PSDTB) [6] Punch clutch (CL601)

24.8 OT-503 (Option)
[1]
[2]
[3]
A092F5C500DA
[1] Exit paper cooling fun motor/2 (FM102) [3] Exit paper cooling fun motor/1 (FM101)
[2] Exit paper cooling fun motor/3 (FM103)
APPENDIX

24.9 FS-526 (Option)
[18] [19] [1]

[2] [3]
[17] [4]
[16]
[15]
[5]
[14]
[13]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[12]
[9]
[11]
[10]
A11PF5C506DA
[1] Paper output roller motor (M6) [11] Switch back solenoid (SD4)
[2] Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3) [12] 2 staples stapler movement motor (M13)
[3] Bypass transport motor (M3) [13] Alignment plate motor/F (M11)
[4] Transport motor/2 (M2) [14] Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
[5] Transport motor/1 (M1) [15] 2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19)
[6] Stacker entrance motor (M10) [16] Paddle motor (M16)
[7] Trail edge paddle motor (M15) [17] Stacker plate motor (M17)
[8] Bypass gate solenoid (SD2) [18] Exit roller motor (M4)
[9] Route change gate solenoid (SD1) [19] Rewind paddle motor (M18)
[10] Main tray lift motor (M5)
APPENDIX

[28] [30] [1] [2]

[24] [26] [29] [3]
[27]
[25] [4]
[5]
[23]
[6]
[22]
[21]
[20] [7]
[19]
[8]
[18] [9]
[10]
[12] [11]
[17]
[13]
[16] [15] [14]
A11PF5C507DA
[1] Shutter open/close switch (MS2) [16] 2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor (PS22)
[2] Rewind paddle home sensor (PS16) [17] 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15)
[3] Paper output roller home sensor (PS10) [18] Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53)
[4] Trail edge paddle home sensor (PS20) [19] Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52)
[5] 2 staples paddle phase sensor (PS19) [20] 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F
(PS17)
[6] Interlock board (IRB) [21] Staple paper exit top surface sensor (PS7)
[7] Stapler position sensor/1 (PS50) [22] Stacker plate home sensor (PS11)
[8] FS control board (FSCB) [23] Shutter open/close sensor (PS24)
[9] FNS pass sensor (PS1) [24] 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
[10] Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2) [25] Sub tray full sensor (PS9)
[11] 2 staples trail edge stopper standby [26] Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)
sensor/1 (PS23)
APPENDIX
[12] Main tray lower limit sensor (PS5) [27] Main tray top surface sensor (PS4)
[13] Center staple pass sensor (PS12) [28] 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/2
(PS42)
[14] Door switch (MS1) [29] 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R
(PS18)
[15] Stapler position sensor/2 (PS51) [30] Main tray empty sensor (PS6)

[5] [6]
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
A11PF5C500DA
[1] Fan motor/2 (FM2) [4] Transport motor (M201)

[2] Fan motor/1 (FM1) [5] Transport control board (TRCB)
[3] Paper pass sensor (PS202) [6] Door open/close sensor (PS201)
APPENDIX

24.10 SD-508 (Option)
[13] [1]
[14] [2]
[12]
[3]
[11] [4]
[5]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[6]
[7]
A11RF5C500DA
[1] Center staple paddle/T (M29) [8] Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
[2] Center staple paddle/C (M30) [9] Leading edge stopper motor (M22)
[3] Center staple alignment motor /R (M21) [10] Exit motor (M34)
[4] Staple motor (M24) [11] Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26)
[5] Clincher motor (M25) [12] Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)
[6] Center staple alignment motor /F (M20) [13] Center staple motor (M23)
[7] Center fold knife motor (M32) [14] Transport motor (M33)
APPENDIX

[1]
[15] [2]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[12]
[11]
[10] [9]
[6]
[8] [7]
A11RF5C501DA
[1] Center staple stacker empty sensor/2 (PS39) [9] Leading edge stopper home sensor
(PS32)
[2] Center staple alignment motor home sensor/ [10] SD exit full sensor (PS35)
R (PS31)
[3] Center fold knife home sensor (PS34) [11] Lift up switch (SW3)
[4] Center staple stacker empty sensor/1 (PS26) [12] SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)
[5] Stapler home sensor (PS33) [13] SD exit sensor/LED (PS28)
[6] Center staple alignment motor home sensor/ [14] SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)
F (PS30)
[7] Paddle home sensor/C (PS37) [15] SD drive board (SDDB)
[8] Fold sensor (PS27)
APPENDIX

24.11 PK-516 (Option)
[11]
[1]
[2]
[10] [3]
[4]
[9] [5]
[7]
[6]
[8]
A11TF5C500DA
[1] Punch drive motor (M301) [7] PK punch scraps box full sensor (PS302)
[2] PK punch front sensor (PS308) [8] Punch oscillating motor (M302)
[3] 2 hole position sensor (PS307) [9] PK punch oscillating home sensor (PS303)
[4] Punch drive motor (PS301) [10] Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
[5] PK punch scraps box set sensor (PS304) [11] Punch motor pulse sensor (PS306)
[6] Punch control board (PKDB)
APPENDIX

24.12 JS-602 (Option)
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
A10CF5C500DA
[1] 3rd Entrance switching solenoid (SD401) [3] Job tray full sensor(PS403)
[2] Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) [4] Job tray cover sensor (PS401)
APPENDIX

24.13 PI-505 (Option)
[1] [2]
[23] [24] [3] [4]
[5]
[22] [6]
[21]
[20] [7]
[8]
[19] [9]
[10]
[18]
[15] [13]
[17]
[16] [14]
[11]
[12]
A10AF5C500DA
[1] PI drive board (PIDB) [13] Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
[2] Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202) [14] Paper size VR /Lw (VR202)
[3] Registration clutch (CL203) [15] Paper empty sensor /Lw (PS207)
[4] Paper empty sensor /Up (PS202) [16] Paper set sensor /Lw (PS208)
[5] Paper size VR /Up (VR201) [17] Paper set sensor /Up (PS203)
[6] Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) [18] L size sensor /Lw (PS212)
[7] Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204) [19] Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
[8] Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) [20] Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
[9] Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202) [21] Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205)
[10] PI control board (PIOB) [22] Transfer motor (M203)
[11] Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201) [23] Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
[12] Upper door open/close switch (MS205) [24] Transfer clutch /Up (CL201)
APPENDIX

24.14 FS-527 (Option)
[14] [1]
[2]
[4]
[13]
[3]
[12]
[11] [5]
[6]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[8]
A0HRF5C501DA
[1] Paper passage motor/2 (M3) [8] Leading edge stopper motor (M14)
[2] Conveyance motor (M4) [9] Tray1 shift motor (M16)
[3] Accommodation paddle motor (M12) [10] Stapler movement motor (M11)
[4] Tray2 path switching motor (M8) [11] Alignment plate motor (M13)
[5] Upper lower path switching motor (M6) [12] Exit motor (M5)
[6] Accommodation roller retraction motor [13] Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1)
(M10)
[7] Exit roller retraction motor (M9) [14] Elevate motor (M15)
APPENDIX

[23] [24] [1]

[2] [3]
[22]
[4]
[5]
[21]
[6]
[20]
[7]
[19]
[8]
[18]
[17] [16]
[9]
[15]
[10]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
A0HRF5C502DA
[1] Tray2 full sensor (PS22) [13] Tray1 shift home sensor (PS25)
[2] Upper door sensor (PS14) [14] Tray1 lower position sensor (PS21)
[3] Registration sensor (PS10) [15] Tray1 lower position switch (SW3)
[4] lower path sensor (PS9) [16] Tray1 upper position sensor (PS24)
[5] Punch hole full sensor (PS30) [17] Tray1 upper position switch (SW2)
[6] Upper lower path switching sensor (PS26) [18] FS control board (FSCB)
[7] Tray2 path switching home sensor (PS7) [19] Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)
[8] Accommodation roller pressure sensor [20] Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS20)
(PS13)
APPENDIX
[9] Upper path sensor (PS8) [21] Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)
[10] Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12) [22] Tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16)
[11] Stapler home sensor/2 (PS19) [23] Saddle path sensor (PS11)
[12] Front door switch (SW1) [24] Tray2 path sensor (PS6)

[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
A0HRF5C500DA
[1] Duplex path switching sensor (PS3) [4] Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
[2] Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) [5] Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
[3] Horizontal conveyance cover sensor (PS5) [6] Duplex path switching motor (M2)
APPENDIX

24.15 SD-509 (Option)
[8]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4] [3]
A10DF5C500DA
[1] Center staple alignment motor/R (M23) [5] Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
[2] Center staple alignment motor/F (M24) [6] Lower paddle motor (M22)
[3] Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3) [7] Center fold roller motor (M25)
[4] Center fold plate motor (M26) [8] Upper paddle motor (M21)
APPENDIX

[1]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[6] [5]
A10DF5C501DA
[1] Center staple alignment home sensor/R [6] Booklet tray full sensor (PS50)
(PS41)
[2] Paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) [7] Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44)
[3] Center staple alignment home sensor/F [8] Booklet tray near full sensor (PS48)
(PS42)
[4] Center fold plate home sensor (PS47) [9] SD drive board (SDDB)
[5] Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)
APPENDIX

24.16 PK-517 (Option)
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
A10EF5C500DA
[1] Punch cam position sensor (PS200) [3] Punch pulse sensor/1 (PS300)
[2] Punch home sensor/1 (PS100) [4] Punch motor/1 (M100)
APPENDIX

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 25. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
25. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

25.1 Main body
25.1.1 Printer control board (PRCB)
CN16 (14pin) CN18 (20pin) CN20 (12pin)

CN15
(9pin) CN22
(18pin)
CN14 CN23 CN24

(20pin) (4pin) (14pin)
CN25
CN13 (14pin)
(12pin)
CN12 CN26
(6pin) CN39 (19pin)
(50pin)
CN11
(6pin)
CN28
CN10 (20pin)
(6pin) CN27
CN9 (18pin)
(7pin)
CN8 CN29
(18pin) (10pin)
CN7 CN38
(11pin) (30pin) CN30
(18pin)
CN2
(7pin) CN31
CN6 (9pin)
(15pin)
CN32
(12pin)
CN4 (7pin) CN37 (6pin) CN35 (16pin) CN33 (13pin)

CN3 (10pin)
A0P0F5C502DA
APPENDIX

25. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
25.1.2 MFP board (MFPB)
PJ27 (7pin) DIMM0 (200pin) PJ24 (8pin)

PJ28 (3pin) DIMM1 (200pin) PJ04 (8pin)
N.C.
PJ07
(14pin) PJ14
(40pin)
PJ16
(4pin)
PJ13
(50pin)
PJ05
(9pin) PJ20
(3pin)
PJ19
(12pin) PJ12 (4pin)
PJ25
(6pin)
N.C.
PJ11 (7pin)
PJ21
PJ15 (88pin) PJ10 PJ03
(24pin) (140pin) (30pin)
PJ02
PJ01 (25pin)
(26pin)
PJ26 (4pin)
A0P0F5C503DA
APPENDIX

25.1.3 PCI board (PCIB)
PJ03 (100pin)
PJ02 (100pin)
PJ01 (140pin)
A0P0F5C504DA
25.1.4 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

CN1
(8pin)
CN10 CN5 (11pin)
(22pin)
CN24
(9pin)
CN11
(15pin)
CN17 (7pin)
CN19 (8pin) CN23
CN12 (10pin)
(4pin) CN17 (7pin) CN21 (9pin)
CN16 (11pin) CN20 (17pin)

APPENDIX
CN13 (8pin) CN14 (16pin) CN18 (13pin) CN22 (10pin) A0P0F5C505DA

25.1.5 PH relay board (REYB/PH)
CN3
(20pin)

A0P0F5C506DA
25.1.6 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
PJ1 (10pin)
PJ7
(4pin)
CN3
(20pin)
PJ4 (3pin)
PJ5 (9pin) PJ3 (15pin) PJ2 (40pin) PJ9 (13pin)

APPENDIX
A0P0F5C507DA

25.1.7 Original glass position control board (OGPCB)
PJ1 (4pin)
PJ2 (7pin) PJ3 (5pin)

A0P0F5C508DA
25.1.8 DF control board (DFCB)
PJ11 (10pin) PJ13 (7pin) PJ16 (11pin)
PJ10 (12pin) PJ20 (3pin) PJ14 (9pin)
PJ1
(12pin)
PJ9
(8pin)
PJ2
(2pin)
PJ8
(10pin)
PJ7
(3pin)
APPENDIX
A0P0F5C604DA

25.1.9 LU drive board (LUDB)

A0TJF5C502DA
25.1.10 Punch control board (PKDB)

(1) PK-516
CN300
(3pin)
CN37 (6pin) CN310
(9pin)
A11TF5C501DA
APPENDIX

25.1.11 ZU control board
CN10 (9pin)
CN4 (19pin)
CN9 (7pin)
CN6 (4pin)
CN11 (13pin)
CN15 (12pin)
CN8 (12pin)
CN102 (40pin)
CN5 (6pin)
CN14 (6pin)
CN1 (3pin)
CN7 (4pin)
A109F5C502DA
APPENDIX

25.1.12 FS control board (FSCB)

(1) FS-526
CN11 (12pin) CN13 (6pin) CN15 (8pin) CN18 (10pin) CN60 (8pin)
CN4
(6pin) CN61
CN91 (3pin) (16pin)
CN30
(8pin)
CN19
CN31 (12pin)
(9pin)
CN10
(9pin) CN20
(36pin)
CN3
(4pin)
CN2 CN21
(7pin) CN105 CN106 (24pin)
(20pin) (40pin)
CN1 CN17
(2pin) (12pin)
CN102 (3pin) CN100 (24pin) CN103 (10pin) CN40 (8pin) CN22 (11pin)
A11PF5C508DA
APPENDIX

(2) FS-527
PJ6 (4pin) PJ7 (12pin) PJ29 PJ30 (6pin)

(3pin)
PJ28(4pin) PJ8(12pin) PJ9(8pin) PJ10(5pin)
PJ11
PJ27 (3pin) (13pin)
PJ5 (7pin)
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ4
(11pin) PJ13
PJ3 (9pin)
(2pin)
PJ14
PJ2
(14pin)
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
PJ25 PJ16
(5pin) (16pin)
PJ24
(6pin)
PJ23 (7pin) PJ21 (10pin) PJ19 (17pin) PJ17 (15pin)
A0HRF5C503DA
25.1.13 Interlock board (IRB)
CN27 (6pin)
CN26 (6pin)
APPENDIX
CN25 (3pin)
A11TF5C502DA

25.1.14 SD drive board (SDDB)

(1) SD-508
CN403 (17pin)
CN405 (10pin) CN404 (5pin)
CN401 (8pin) CN406 (34pin)
CN402 (24pin)
CN411 (2pin)
PJ6 (6pin)
A11RF5C502DA
APPENDIX

(2) SD-509
PJ11 (10pin)
PJ8 (4pin)
PJ9 (9pin)
PJ7 (8pin)
PJ6 (3pin)
PJ5 (10pin)
PJ4 (11pin)
PJ10 (11pin)
PJ3 (10pin)
PJ13 (9pin)
PJ2 (3pin)
PJ1 (4pin)
A10DF5C502DA
25.1.15 PI drive board

APPENDIX

A10AF5C501DA

26. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
26. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

26.1 How to read the relay connector layout drawing
Number of pin ➀ Possible to confirm by removing external cover.

1 Not possible to confirm by removing external cover.
26.2 Main body
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[16]
[15]
[5]
[14]
[6]
[7]
[13]
[8]
[9]
[12]
[11]
[10]
A0P0F5C525DA
APPENDIX
No. CN No. Location No. CN No. Location

[1] CN178 R-11 [9] CN254 D-21
[2] CN174 R-9 [10] CN195<A> S-10
[3] CN180 R-10 [11] CN195<B> S-11
[4] CN186 R-9 [12] CN172 S-9 to 10

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 26. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

[5] CN154 W-12 [13] CN142 S-9
[6] CN257 D-20 [14] CN152 W-11
[7] CN256 D-21 [15] CN153 W-12
[8] CN255 D-21 [16] CN290 E-15
APPENDIX

[24] [1] [2]
[3]
[23]
[4]
[22]
[21] [5]
[20] [6]
[19]
[7]
[18]
[17] [8]
[16]
[15] [9]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11] [10]
A0P0F5C526DA

[1] CN170 R-8 [13] CN203 C-7
[2] CN602 Q-17 [14] CN706 W-15
[3] CN605 Q-18 [15] CN267 V-15
[4] CN604 Q-17 [16] CN707 C-6
[5] CN289 D-15 [17] CN333 V-15
[6] CN293 D-16 [18] CN334 I-5
[7] CN322 J-7 [19] CN330 I-6
[8] CN171 R-8 [20] CN306 I-4
APPENDIX
[9] CN198 S-7 to 8 [21] CN320 J-6

[10] CN202 B-7 [22] CN166 S-7 to 8
[11] CN386 E-1 [23] CN321 J-6
[12] CN385 E-1 [24] CN381 O-27 to 28

[31] [1]
[2]
[30] [3]
[28] [29]
[4]
[27]
[26]
[5]
[25]
[6]
[24]
[7]
[23]
[8]
[22] [9]
[21]
[20] [10]
[11]
[19]
[12]
[18]
[13]
[17] [16]
[15] [14]
A0P0F5C527DA

[1] CN282 Q-7 [17] CN119 W-6
[2] CN281 Q-6 [18] CN193 V-6
[3] CN275 Q-5 [19] CN113<A> V-5
[4] CN280 R-6 to 7 [20] CN193 V-6
[5] CN248 D-22 [21] CN113<B> V-6
[6] CN291 D-23 [22] CN143 V-9
[7] CN246 D-22 [23] CN197 W-10
[8] CN247 D-22 [24] CN137 W-10
APPENDIX
[9] CN131 W-9 [25] CN144 W-10

[10] CN121<A> V-7 [26] CN324 J-7 to 8
[11] CN121<B> V-8 [27] CN326 J-8
[12] CN194 W-7 to 8 [28] CN325 J-7
[13] CN123 W-7 [29] CN323 J-7


[14] CN122 W-7 [30] CN260 D-17
[15] CN129 W-7 [31] CN258 E-16
[16] CN134 W-7
APPENDIX

[21] [1] [2] [3]

[20] [4]
[19] [5]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[7]
[15]
[8]
[9]
[14]
[10]
[13]
[11]
[12]
A0P0F5C528DA

[1] CN297 E-23 [12] CN235 E-25
[2] CN318 D-23 [13] CN242 E-27
[3] CN613 D-28 [14] CN249 E-13
[4] CN511 D-20 [15] CN164 D-14
[5] CN298 E-17 [16] CN163 D-14
[6] CN241 E-24 [17] CN253<A> E-22
[7] CN165 D-13 [18] CN253<B> E-21
[8] CN228 E-24 to 25 [19] CN316 D-23
APPENDIX
[9] CN702 D-19 [20] CN328 D-12

[10] CN287 E-18 [21] CN383 E-28
[11] CN378 D-13

[1]
[2]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10] [5]
[9]
[6]
[8] [7]
A0P0F5C529DA

[1] CN155<A> S-3 [8] CN395 E-10
[2] CN145 S-2 [9] CN392 E-7
[3] CN279 R-6 to 7 [10] CN394 E-9
[4] CN278 Q-6 [11] CN700 E-8
[5] CN151 Q-2 [12] CN271<A> S-5
[6] CN156 Q-3 [13] CN271<B> S-6 to 7
[7] CN217 E-11 [14] CN155<B> S-4
APPENDIX

Developing bias DC Y/M/C
Developing bias DC K 27.1.1
Main erase lamp Y/M/C
Main erase lamp K
Y110571-1
Color PC drum motor (M16)
K PC drum motor (M18)
Charge Y/M/C
Charge K
Color developing motor (M17)
K developing motor (M19) B. Timing chart
BCL (+)
BCL (-)
Cleaner motor (M38)
27.1 Main body
Transfer belt motor (M1)

2nd transfer roller pressure/retraction
1st transfer pressure/retraction
A. Operating conditions
Image write start signal

Developing bias AC Y
Developing bias AC M
27. TIMING CHART
Developing bias AC C
Developing bias AC K
1st transfer Y
• Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/tray1
1st transfer M
1st transfer C
1st transfer K
Timing chart in color mode
2nd transfer
Neutralizing
Registration motor (M2)
Take-up motor (M22)
Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
Tray 1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
Exit motor (M4)
Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9)
Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
Service Manual
Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
Suction fan motor (FM1)
Cooling fan motor (FM3)
IU cooling fan motor (FM15)
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)
PH cooling fan motor (FM14)
Tucking fan motor/1 (FM101)
Tucking fan motor/1 (FM102)
Polygon motor (M34)
LD
Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
Fehumidifier heater
Fusing motor (M30)
A0P0F5E524DA
27. TIMING CHART
973
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
974
ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
27.2.1
READY signal
OFF
ON
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
After separate sensor
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
27.2 DF-618
ON
B. Timing chart
27. TIMING CHART
Reverse registration sensor

OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
OFF
1-sided mode
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
ON
Reading roller pressure/retraction
motor ST/SP OFF
ON
motor Brake OFF
• Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/full size/2 originals
ON
Service Manual
Read open/close sensor
OFF
Reverse roller pressure/ ON
retraction motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reverse roller sensor
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor CW/CCW
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
Lift up upper sensor
OFF
ON
Lift up lower sensor
OFF
Reverse path switching ON
solenoid OFF
Exit reverse path ON
switching solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
A0P0F5E608DA
OFF
Y110571-1
ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
READY signal
OFF
ON
Y110571-1
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
OFF
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
Reading roller pressure/retraction ON
motor ST/SP OFF
Reading roller pressure/retraction ON
motor Brake OFF
ON
OFF
Service Manual
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
A0P0F5E609DA
OFF
27. TIMING CHART
975
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
976
ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
27.2.2
READY signal
OFF
ON
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
B. Timing chart
27. TIMING CHART
ON
OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
2-sided mode
OFF
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
ON
motor ST/SP OFF
ON
motor Brake OFF
• Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/full size/2 originals
ON
Service Manual
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
A0P0F5E610DA
OFF
Y110571-1
ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
READY signal
OFF
ON
Y110571-1
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
OFF
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
ON
motor ST/SP OFF
ON
motor Brake OFF
ON
OFF
Service Manual
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
A0P0F5E611DA
OFF
27. TIMING CHART
977
APPENDIX
27. TIMING CHART Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009
27.3 LU-204
• Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/full size
B. Timing chart
Paper feed motor (M2)
Transport motor (M3)
Paper feed sensor (PS3)
Main body: Tray2 vertical transport

motor (M7)
Main body: Tray2 vertical transport
sensor (PS12)
A0TJF5E503DA
APPENDIX

27.4.1
Paper exit sensor
Y110571-1
(PS39)
B. Timing chart
FNS pass sensor

(PS1)
Transport motor/1
27.4 FS-526/SD-508
(M1)
Z-fold Punch regist

sensor (PS2)
Straight paper exit mode
Transport motor/2
(M2)
• Non-sort/Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/1-side
Bypass transport
motor (M3)
Service Manual
Bypass gate
solenoid (SD2)
Sub tray gate

solenoid (SD3)
2 staples stacker
sensor (PS3)
Stacker entrance
motor (M10)
A11PF5E512DA
27. TIMING CHART
979
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
980
2 staples stacker
sensor (PS3)
Paper output roller

motor (M6)
27. TIMING CHART
Paper output roller

home sensor (PS10)
Stacker entrance
motor (M10)
Exit roller motor

(M4)
2 staples stacker
empty sensor
Service Manual
(PS15)
Stacker entrance
motor (M10)
Main tray lift motor

(M5)
Main tray top

surface sensor
(PS4)
Staple paper exit

top surface sensor
(PS7)
A11PF5E513DA
Y110571-1
27.4.2
Y110571-1
B. Timing chart
Transport motor/1 (M1)

Z-fold Punch regist

sensor (PS2)
• Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/1-side
Route change gate

solenoid (SD1)
2 flat stitching staples mode
Bypass transport motor
Service Manual
(M3)
Bypass gate solenoid
(SD2)
Sub tray gate solenoid
(SD3)
2 staples stacker
sensor (PS3)
Stacker entrance motor

(M10)
A11PF5E514DA
27. TIMING CHART
981
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
982

27. TIMING CHART
Z-fold Punch regist sensor

(PS2)
Route change gate solenoid
(SD1)
Service Manual
Bypass transport motor (M3)
Bypass gate solenoid

(SD2)
Sub tray gate solenoid
(SD3)
2 staples stacker sensor

(PS3)
Stacker entrance motor (M10)
A11PF5E515DA
Y110571-1
2 staples stacker sensor
(PS3)
Y110571-1
Paddle motor(M16)
Rewind paddle motor(M18)
Rewind paddle home sensor

(PS16)
Trail edge paddle motor(M15)
Trail edge paddle home sensor

(PS20)
Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
2 staples alignment motor home

sensor/R (PS18)
Alignment plate motor/F (M11)
Service Manual
2 staples alignment motor home
sensor/R (PS18)
Stacker plate motor (M17)
Stacker plate home sensor (PS11)
Paper output roller motor (M6)
Paper output roller home sensor

(PS10)
2 staples trail edge stopper motor

(M19)
A11PF5E516DA
27. TIMING CHART
983
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
984
Paper output roller
motor (M6)
27.4.3
Paper pass sensor

(PS202)
FNS pass sensor
(PS1)
Center staple pass
sensor (PS12)
B. Timing chart
27. TIMING CHART
Transport motor/1
(M1)
Stacker entrance
motor (M10)
Route change gate

solenoid (SD1)
Saddle stitching mode
FNS pass sensor

(PS1)
Center staple pass

sensor (PS12)
Center staple alignment
motor /R(M21)
Service Manual
motor home sensor/F
(PS30)
motor /F(M20)
motor home sensor/R
(PS31)
Leading edge stopper
motor (M22)
Center staple paddle/T

(M29)
Center staple paddle/C

(M30)
Center staple paddle
lift motor/C (M26)
Paddle home
sensor/C (PS37)
A11PF5E517DA
Y110571-1
Center staple pass sensor (PS12)
Center staple alignment motor /R
Y110571-1
(M21)
Center staple alignment motor /F
(M20)
Center staple paddle/T (M29)
Center staple paddle/C (M30)
Center staple paddle lift motor/C

(M26)
Paddle home sensor/C (PS37)
Center staple paddle lift motor/C

(M26)
Paddle home sensor/C (PS37)
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
Leading edge stopper motor (M22)

* Center staple mode
Service Manual
Center staple motor (M23)

Staple motor (M24)

Center fold knife motor (M32)
Center fold knife home sensor

(PS34)

* Center staple: 6 sheets to

* Center staple:2 sheets to 5sheets
A11PF5E518DA
SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)
27. TIMING CHART
985
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
986
27.4.4
Center staple pass sensor

(PS12)
motor /R (M21)
B. Timing chart
27. TIMING CHART

motor /F (M20)
Tri-folding mode
Center staple paddle/T (M29)
Center staple paddle/C (M30)

Center staple paddle lift

motor/C (M26)
Paddle home sensor/C

(PS37)
Service Manual
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
Leading edge stopper

motor (M22)
Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)
Center fold knife motor (M32)
Center fold knife home sensor

(PS34)
Exit motor (M34)
SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)
A11PF5E519DA
Y110571-1
27.5.1
Y110571-1
27.5 ZU-606
B. Timing chart
Item
Main body paper exit signal

Loop Loop Loop
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)

-leading/trailing edge
790mm/s
Registration motor (M601)
Z-folding+Punch mode
370mm/s
790mm/s
Main motor (M606)
370mm/s
Release
1st folding stopper motor (M602)
Set Release Set Release Set Release
2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Exit sensor (PS609)
FNS pass sensor
F
Punch shift motor (M605)
R
Service Manual
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
• Z-folding / Punch mode / A3 / 3 originals / Single side
-side edge
Punch motor (M604)
Punch clutch (CL601) Punch Punch Punch
Punch scraps conveyance motor
(M607)
Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)
Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)
A109F5C501DA
27. TIMING CHART
987
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
988
27.6.1
B. Timing chart
27. TIMING CHART
Shift mode


27.6 FS-527/SD-509/PK-517
Speed Speed
Up Down
Paper passage motor/1 (M1) Start Stop
Paper passage motor/2 (M3) Start Stop

• Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/2 originals/1-side
Conveyance motor (M4) Start Stop
Service Manual
Exit motor (M5) Start Stop
Elevate motor (M15) Down Rise Down Rise Down Rise
Tray2 shift motor (M16) Shift Shift
A0HRF5E508DA
Y110571-1
27.6.2
Y110571-1

B. Timing chart

Upper path sensor (PS8)
Tray2 paper detection
sensor (PS16)
Speed Loop
Loop Loop Loop

Up
Paper passage motor/1 (M1) Start
Align Start
Paper passage motor/2 (M3)
Stop
Conveyance motor (M4) Start

2 flat stitching staples mode
Switch Back Stop

Exit motor (M5) Start Back Back Stop Start
Stop Stop
• Color mode/A4 or 8 1/2 x 11/2 originals/1-side
Accommodation roller
retraction motor (M10)
Exit roller retraction motor (M9) Press
Service Manual
Release Press Release
Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1) FD Align FD Align FD Align

Accommodation paddle motor (M12) Stop Stop
Alignment plate motor (M13) CD Align CD Align CD Align

Home Move
Stapler movement motor (M11) Staple Point Move Second Staple Second Staple Home Move
Point Move Point Move
Tray1 path switching motor (M8)
Elevate motor (M15)
A0HRF5E509DA
27. TIMING CHART
989
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
990
27.6.3

B. Timing chart
27. TIMING CHART
Saddle path sensor (PS11)


Conveyance motor (M4)
Center staples mode
Exit roller retraction motor (M9)

Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12)
Tray2 paper detection sensor (PS16)

Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)
Center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
Center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41)
Upper paddle motor (M21)
Service Manual
• Color mode/A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S/2 originals/1-side
Lower paddle motor (M22)

Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)

Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)
Saddle staple motor
Saddle staple home sensor
Center fold plate motor (M26)
Center fold plate home sensor (PS47)
Center fold roller motor (M25)
Booklet tray near full sensor (PS48)

Booklet tray full sensor (PS50)
Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44)
A0HRF5E510DA
Y110571-1
27.6.4
Y110571-1
B. Timing chart
Main body paper

exit signal
Punch mode


Speed Up Speed Up
Loop Loop

Conveyance motor (M4)
Service Manual
Exit motor (M5)
Punch motor/1 (M100)
A0HRF5E511DA
27. TIMING CHART
991
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
992
27.7.1
27.7 JS-603
B. Timing chart
27. TIMING CHART
Main body paper

Tray3 paper exit mode
exit signal
Paper passage Speed Up Speed Up Speed Up Speed Up

sensor/1 (PS1)
Paper passage Speed Down Speed Down Speed Down
motor/1 (M1)
Release
Tray3 exit roller
Service Manual
retraction motor (M17)

Tray3 exit roller
retraction sensor (PS35)
A10FF5E502DA
Y110571-1
UPDATING STATUS
DATE UPDATED PAGES PAGES CODE
10/2009 1ST EDITION 1053053 Y110571-1

D ColorMF651 551 451 - SM - Y110571 1 - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D ColorMF651 551 451 - SM - Y110571 1 - en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D ColorMF651 551 451 - SM - Y110571 1 - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Color Printer

Copyright © 2009, Olivetti

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium

:Precaution when servicing the

:Prohibition when servicing the

:Direction when servicing the

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.)

• Making any modification to the product unless instructed

• Using parts not specified by KMBT

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

Power Cord Set or Power Plug

• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Connection to Power Supply

• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet

• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

Power Plug and Cord

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Prohibited Installation Places

• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such

When not Using the Product for a long time

Inspection before Servicing

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

Work Performed with the Product Powered On

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-

• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

Handling of Service Materials

• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before

Handling of Service Materials

• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

[4] Used Batteries Precautions

[5] Laser Safety

5.1 Internal Laser Radiation

Print Head Unit

5.2 Laser Safety Label

* Only for the U.S.A.

5.3 Laser Caution Label

5.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE